JP7424231B2 - gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

Pachinko machines, slot machines, and the like are known as types of gaming machines. These gaming machines are known to have a configuration in which an internal lottery is held based on the satisfaction of predetermined lottery conditions, and a bonus is awarded to a player according to the result of the internal lottery.

Specifically, pachinko machines have a configuration in which a game ball enters a ball entry section provided in a gaming area, and when a winning result is obtained in an internal lottery, the machine enters a special gaming state, and A configuration is known in which the game enters a special game state based on a game ball entering the game ball. When the state shifts to the special game state, for example, a ball entering device provided in the gaming area starts to open and close, and game balls are paid out based on the ball entering the ball entering device (for example, (See Patent Document 1).

JP2019-005447A

Here, in gaming machines such as those exemplified above, processing needs to be suitably executed by the control means, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

The present invention has been made in view of the above-mentioned circumstances, and it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine in which a control means can suitably execute processing.

In order to solve the above problem, the invention according to claim 1 includes a control means for executing various predetermined processes;
information storage means into which information is written when the various predetermined processes are executed in the control means;
Equipped with
The information storage means includes:
a first storage area into which information is written when the various predetermined processes are executed;
a second storage area that is contiguous with the first storage area in terms of the address of the information storage means and to which information is not written when the various predetermined processes are executed;
a third storage area that is continuous with the second storage area at the address of the information storage means and into which information is written when the various predetermined processes are executed;
Equipped with
This gaming machine is
erasure execution means for performing information erasure processing on storage areas of the information storage means including the first storage area, the second storage area, and the third storage area when a predetermined information erasure trigger occurs;
a predetermined prohibition setting means for setting a predetermined prohibition so that information is not written to the second storage area;
a predetermined prohibition canceling means for canceling the predetermined prohibition setting when the information erasing process is executed;
a predetermined setting area that becomes one of the binary information when the predetermined prohibition setting is performed and becomes the other information of the binary information when the predetermined prohibition setting is cancelled;
means for preventing information from being written to the second storage area when the information in the predetermined setting area is the one of the information;
It is characterized by having the following .

According to the present invention, it becomes possible to suitably execute processing by the control means.

It is a perspective view showing a pachinko machine in a first embodiment. FIG. 1 is an exploded perspective view showing the main structure of a pachinko machine. It is a front view showing the structure of a game board. (a), (b) are explanatory diagrams for explaining the display contents of the symbol display device when a game round is executed. (a) to (j) are explanatory diagrams for explaining main symbols and sub-designs that are variably displayed in each symbol row. It is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of a pachinko machine. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of various counters and various storage areas. It is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of support mode. (a) It is an explanatory diagram for explaining the first validity table when the probability is low, (b) It is an explanatory diagram for explaining the second validity table when the probability is low, and (c) It is an explanatory diagram for explaining the second validity table when the probability is high. It is an explanatory diagram for explaining a table. (a) It is an explanatory diagram for explaining the jackpot distribution table for the first special symbol, (b) It is an explanatory diagram for explaining the jackpot distribution table for the second special symbol, and (c) It is an explanatory diagram for explaining the jackpot distribution table for the second special symbol. It is an explanatory diagram for explaining a time-saving distribution table for the 1st special figure, and (d) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the time-saving distribution table for the 2nd special figure. (a) It is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of each jackpot result, and (b) It is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of each time saving result and ceiling time saving. (a) to (e) are time charts showing how a time saving state is set based on a time saving result or a ceiling time saving. 3 is a flowchart showing main processing in the main MPU. 3 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing in the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows general map general electric power control processing in main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the normal figure fluctuation start process in main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the normal figure determination process in main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure special electric control process in main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the reservation information acquisition process in main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows special figure fluctuation start processing in main side MPU. 12 is a flowchart showing a process for specifying a variable display period in the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure confirmation process in main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the special call termination process in main side MPU. 12 is a flowchart showing a process of subtracting a high probability state counter in the main MPU. 12 is a flowchart showing a setting process for time saving results in the main MPU. It is an explanatory diagram for explaining a stop result of a special figure display part and a stop result of a pattern display device. (a) The result of stopping the first special symbol display unit and the symbol display device when the first time saving result is obtained in the final game round in the normal gaming state or the time saving state and the game round triggered by the first reservation information. It is an explanatory diagram for explaining, and (b) the first time saving result in the game round other than the last game round in the high probability state or the time saving state and the first time saving result is obtained in the game round triggered by the first reservation information. It is an explanatory diagram for explaining the stop result of the 1st special figure display part and the symbol display device, and (c) the 1st special figure display part and the stop result in the game round triggered by the 1st reservation information. It is an explanatory view for explaining a stop result of a pattern display device. It is a flowchart which shows the determination process of the fluctuation pattern in audio-light side MPU. 3 is a flowchart illustrating a ceiling counter subtraction process in the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the subtraction process of the time saving state counter in main side MPU. (a) to (e) are time charts for explaining the execution order of processing in the special figure confirmation process. 3 is a flowchart illustrating subtraction processing of a variation selection state counter in the main MPU. (a) to (f) are time charts for explaining the relationship between the execution timings of the reach high frequency state and the time saving state triggered by the ceiling time reduction. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure fluctuation start process performed by main side MPU in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure confirmation process in main side MPU. 3 is a flowchart showing a setting process for time-saving results in the main MPU. 3 is a flowchart showing a subtraction process of a ceiling counter in the main MPU. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of various counters and various storage areas in the third embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows special figure fluctuation start processing in main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure confirmation process in main side MPU. 12 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by the main MPU in the fourth embodiment. 3 is a flowchart showing setting value update processing in the main MPU. 12 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by the main MPU in the fifth embodiment. It is a front view of the game board in a 6th embodiment. (a) It is a longitudinal cross-sectional view of the special winning prize device in a non-guiding state, and (b) It is a vertical cross-sectional view of the special winning prize device in a guiding state. It is a longitudinal cross-sectional view for explaining the internal configuration of the prize distribution device. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of various counters and various storage areas. (a) It is an explanatory diagram for explaining the first win/fail table, (b) It is an explanatory diagram for explaining the second win/fail table, and (c) It is an explanatory diagram for explaining the jackpot distribution table. , (d) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the time saving distribution table, (e) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the small hit distribution table, and (f) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of each small winning result. It is an explanatory diagram. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure special electric control process in main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the reservation information acquisition process in main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows special figure fluctuation start processing in main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure confirmation process in main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the special call termination process in main side MPU. 3 is a flowchart showing a power outage monitoring process in the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure determination process performed by main side MPU in 7th Embodiment. 12 is a flowchart showing a process for specifying a variable display period in the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the subtraction process of the time saving state counter performed by the main side MPU in 8th Embodiment. FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing a time-saving result setting process executed by the main MPU in the ninth embodiment. FIG. 3 is a flowchart illustrating a ceiling counter subtraction process in the main MPU. (a) to (g) are time charts for explaining the subsequent gaming state when a time saving result or ceiling time saving occurs in the time saving state. It is a front view of the game board in a 10th embodiment. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of various counters and various storage areas. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special figure special electric control process in main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special figure special electric control process in main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows special figure fluctuation start processing in main side MPU. 12 is a flowchart showing a process for specifying a variable display period in the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure confirmation process in main side MPU. 12 is a flowchart illustrating processing for determining the end of a time saving state in the main MPU. 12 is a flowchart showing a setting process for time saving results in the main MPU. 3 is a flowchart illustrating a ceiling counter subtraction process in the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the left-handed hitting notification process in the sound-light side MPU. (a) to (f) are time charts showing how the game round corresponding to the end in the time saving state is executed with the first pending information as the execution target. 12 is a flowchart showing a process for specifying a variable display period executed by the main MPU in the eleventh embodiment. 12 is a flowchart showing a process for specifying a variable display period executed by the main MPU in the twelfth embodiment. It is a front view of the main control device in a 13th embodiment. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram for explaining how programs and data are set in the main ROM. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the setting manner of each area in the main side RAM. FIG. 6 is an explanatory diagram for explaining various storage areas provided in a work area for specific control and various storage areas provided in a work area for non-specific control. It is an explanatory view for explaining the electrical composition for transmitting a command from main side MPU to audio-light side MPU. (a) to (d) are time charts showing how commands are transmitted. 3 is a flowchart showing main processing in the main MPU. 3 is a flowchart showing a setting confirmation process in the main MPU. 3 is a flowchart showing setting value update processing in the main MPU. This document explains the contents of the process executed in the main process when the supply of operating power is resumed when the power outage process is executed in a situation where the setting value update process or the setting confirmation process is being executed. It is an explanatory diagram. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st management process in main side MPU. 3 is a flowchart showing initial setting processing in the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows disconnection and short circuit processing in main side MPU. 3 is a flowchart showing first timer interrupt processing in the main MPU. It is an explanatory view for explaining the composition regarding discharge of the game ball which flowed down the game area. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a configuration in which detection results of a detection sensor are input to the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows ball entry detection processing in main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the reservation information acquisition process in main side MPU. 3 is a flowchart showing fraud detection processing in the main MPU. 3 is a flowchart showing information clearing processing in the main MPU. 3 is a flowchart showing fraud detection execution processing in the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows general power control processing in main side MPU. (a) It is a flowchart which shows the special electricity start process in main side MPU, (b) It is a flowchart which shows the process during special electricity release in main side MPU, and (c) It is a flowchart which shows the process during special electricity closure in main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the magnetic monitoring process in main side MPU. 3 is a flowchart showing fraud handling processing in the main MPU. (a) to (h) are time charts showing how prize monitoring is performed using the second operating port detection sensor as an example. 3 is a flowchart showing security processing in the main MPU. (a) to (h) are time charts showing how security signals are outputted to the outside. It is an explanatory diagram for explaining various areas of a work area for non-specific control used to manage game history. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram for explaining various areas of the calculation result storage area. (a) to (d) are explanatory diagrams for explaining the display contents of the first to fourth notification display devices. (a) to (c) are explanatory diagrams for explaining the display contents of the first to fourth notification display devices. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd management process in main side MPU. 3 is a flowchart showing check processing in the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows normal ball entrance management processing in main side MPU. 3 is a flowchart showing result calculation processing in the main MPU. FIG. 2 is a block diagram illustrating a configuration for controlling display of various display circuits by a main CPU. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram for explaining various buffers provided in a work area for specific control. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the electrical configuration of a display IC. 3 is a flowchart showing second timer interrupt processing in the main MPU. 12 is a flowchart showing a setting process for an eighth display data buffer in the main MPU. 3 is a flowchart showing display processing in the main MPU. (a) to (i) are time charts showing how various displays are performed on the first to fourth notification display devices and setting display devices when supply of operating power to the main MPU is started; 3 is a flowchart showing RAM clear processing in the main MPU. 3 is a flowchart showing information abnormality monitoring processing in the main MPU. 12 is a flowchart showing first timer interrupt processing executed by the main MPU in the fourteenth embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows ball entry detection processing in main side MPU. 3 is a flowchart showing management processing in the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the reservation information acquisition process in main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process of the prize ball counter in the main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows normal ball entrance management processing in main side MPU.

<First embodiment>
Hereinafter, a first embodiment of a pachinko game machine (hereinafter referred to as a "pachinko machine"), which is a type of gaming machine, will be described in detail based on the drawings. FIG. 1 is a perspective view of a pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 2 is an exploded perspective view showing the main components of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, in FIG. 2, the structure within the gaming area is omitted for convenience.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 that forms the outer shell of the pachinko machine 10, and a gaming machine main body 12 that is rotatably attached to the outer frame 11 forward. . The outer frame 11 is constructed by connecting wooden boards on four sides, and has a rectangular frame shape. The pachinko machine 10 is installed in a game hall by attaching and fixing the outer frame 11 to island equipment. It should be noted that the outer frame 11 is not an essential component of the pachinko machine 10, and the outer frame 11 may be provided in an island facility of a game hall.

As shown in FIG. 2, the gaming machine main body 12 includes an inner frame 13, a front door frame 14 disposed in front of the inner frame 13, and a back pack unit 15 disposed behind the inner frame 13. ing. An inner frame 13 of the gaming machine main body 12 is rotatably supported relative to the outer frame 11. Specifically, when viewed from the front, the inner frame 13 is rotatable forward with the left side being the rotation base end side and the right side being the rotation tip side.

A front door frame 14 is rotatably supported by the inner frame 13, and can be rotated forward with the left side as the rotation base end and the right side as the rotation tip end when viewed from the front. Further, a back pack unit 15 is rotatably supported by the inner frame 13, and can be rotated rearward with the left side as the rotation base end and the right side as the rotation tip end when viewed from the front.

The gaming machine main body 12 is provided with a locking device at its rotating tip, and has a function of locking the gaming machine main body 12 against the outer frame 11 so that it cannot be opened. It has a function of locking the door frame 14 with respect to the inner frame 13 so that it cannot be opened. Each of these locked states is released by performing an unlocking operation using an unlocking key on the cylinder lock 17 provided in an exposed manner on the front surface of the pachinko machine 10.

Next, the configuration of the front side of the game machine main body 12 will be explained.

The inner frame 13 is mainly composed of a resin base 21 whose outer shape is substantially the same as that of the outer frame 11. A substantially elliptical window hole 23 is formed in the center of the resin base 21 . A game board 24 is detachably attached to the resin base 21. The game board 24 is made of plywood, and the game area PA formed on the front surface of the game board 24 is exposed to the front side of the inner frame 13 through the window hole 23 of the resin base 21.

The configuration of the game board 24 will be explained based on FIG. 3. FIG. 3 is a front view of the game board 24.

An inner rail part 25 and an outer rail part 26 are attached to the game board 24 so as to partition a part of the outer edge of the game area PA, and the inner rail part 25 and the outer rail part 26 provide a guide means. The guide rail is configured as follows. A game ball fired from a game ball firing mechanism 27 (see FIG. 2) attached below the window hole 23 in the resin base 21 is guided to the upper part of the game area PA by a guide rail.

Incidentally, the game ball firing mechanism 27 includes a firing rail 27a that extends toward the guide rail, a ball feeding device 27b that supplies game balls stored in an upper tray 66a (described later) onto the firing rail 27a, and a ball feeding device 27b that supplies game balls stored in an upper tray 66a (described later) onto the firing rail 27a. The solenoid 27c is an electric actuator that fires the game balls supplied to the guide rail toward the guide rail. When the firing operation device (or firing handle) 28 provided on the front door frame 14 is rotated, the solenoid 27c is driven and controlled, and the game ball is fired.

The game board 24 is formed with a plurality of large and small openings passing through it in the front-rear direction. Each opening is provided with a general winning opening 31, a special winning winning device 32, a first operating opening 33, a second operating opening 34, a through gate 35, a variable display unit 36, a special drawing unit 37, a general drawing unit 38, etc. ing.

Even if a ball enters the through gate 35, the payout of the game ball is not executed. On the other hand, when a ball enters the general winning hole 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating hole 33, and the second operating hole 34, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out. Specifically, regarding the number of prize balls, when a ball enters the first operating port 33 or a ball enters the second operating port 34, three prize balls are paid out, When a ball enters the general winning hole 31, 10 prize balls are paid out, and when a ball enters the special electric winning device 32, 15 prize balls are paid out. .

Note that the number of prize balls is arbitrary; for example, the second operating port 34 may have a smaller number of prize balls than the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34 may have a smaller number of winning balls than the first operating port 33. It is also possible to have a configuration in which the number of prize balls is greater than 33. Further, it is not limited to a configuration in which both the number of prize balls when a ball enters the first operating port 33 and the number of prize balls when a ball enters the second operating port 34 are plural. Instead, it may be configured such that the number of prize balls is one when a ball enters the first operating port 33, and the number of prize balls is one when a ball enters the second operating port 34. It may be possible to have a certain configuration, or it may be a configuration in which the number of prize balls for both players is one.

In addition, an out port 24a is provided at the bottom of the game board 24, and game balls that have not entered various winning ports are discharged from the gaming area PA through the out port 24a. Further, the game board 24 has a large number of nails 24b planted therein in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the game balls, and various members such as a windmill are also arranged.

Here, entering the ball means that the game ball passes through a predetermined opening, and not only the manner in which the game ball is ejected from the game area PA after passing through the opening, but also the manner in which the game ball is ejected from the game area PA after passing through the opening. It also includes a mode in which the fluid continues to flow down the gaming area PA without being discharged. However, in the following explanation, in order to clearly distinguish from the entry of a game ball into the out port 24a, the general winning hole 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, the second operating port 34, and the through gate 35 will be used. The landing of a game ball into a ball is also expressed as winning a prize.

The first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34 are installed in the game board 24 as a unit as an operating port device. Both the first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34 are opened upward. Further, both the operating ports 33 and 34 are arranged in the vertical direction with the first operating port 33 facing upward.

A stage part 36b is provided in the lower frame part 36a, which is the lower part of the symbol display device 41 in the variable display unit 36, so as to extend in the horizontal direction above the first operating port 33, and the stage part 36b A left frame portion 36c, which is a portion to the left of the symbol display device 41 in the unit 36, has an entrance to a warp passage that allows game balls flowing down the left region of the variable display unit 36 to be guided to the stage portion 36b. A portion 36d is formed. A horizontal center portion of the stage portion 36b exists vertically above the first operating port 33, and a lead-out portion 36e for guiding the game ball below the stage portion 36b by its own weight. is formed. In this case, game balls guided to the stage part 36b and guided downward from the stage part 36b from areas other than the lead-out part 36e are difficult to enter the first operating port 33, but the game balls guided to the lead-out part 36e The game ball led out from below the stage part 36b enters the first operating port 33 with a high probability.

The first operating port 33 is open upward and is not provided with a member such as an opening/closing member for preventing a game ball from entering the first operating port 33. In a situation where the game balls are fired in the same manner, the winning probability at the first operating port 33 is constant regardless of the game state. In other words, the first operating port 33 is such that a game ball flowing down the gaming area PA toward the first operating port 33 can always enter the first operating port 33 .

The second actuating port 34 is provided with a general electric accessory 34a as a guide piece consisting of a pair of left and right movable pieces. When the electric utility object 34a is in the closed state, the game ball cannot enter the second operating port 34, and when the general electric accessory 34a is in the open state, it is possible to enter the second operating hole 34.

A through gate 35 is provided on the upstream side of the second operating port 34 in the downstream direction of the game ball. The through gate 35 has a through hole (not shown) that passes through the through gate 35 in the vertical direction, and the game ball that enters the through gate 35 flows down the gaming area PA after winning the prize. Thereby, the game ball that has entered the through gate 35 can enter the second operating port 34.

Based on winning in the through gate 35, the general electric utility object 34a of the second operating port 34 is switched from the closed state to the open state. Specifically, the winning of the through gate 35 is used as a trigger to determine the validity of a normal figure, and the normal figure unit 38 provided in the lower right corner, which is an area where the game ball does not pass through in the gaming area PA. A changing display of the picture is performed on the common picture display section 38a. Then, when the result of the ordinary figure propriety determination process is the electric power open winning, a stop result corresponding to the result is displayed, and the variable display of the ordinary figure display section 38a is ended, the state shifts to the ordinary electric role open state. In the general power open state, the general power accessory 34a is in the open state in a predetermined manner.

Note that the general figure display section 38a is constituted by a segment display in which a plurality of segment light emitting sections are arranged in a predetermined manner, but is not limited to this, and may be a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, etc. , CRT or other types of display devices such as a dot matrix display. In addition, the patterns that are variably displayed on the general figure display section 38a include a configuration in which multiple types of characters are variably displayed, a configuration in which multiple types of symbols are variably displayed, a configuration in which multiple types of characters are variably displayed, or A configuration in which multiple types of colors are switched and displayed is conceivable.

In the general drawing unit 38, a general drawing holding display section 38b is provided at a position adjacent to the general drawing display section 38a. The number of game balls that have entered the through gate 35 is reserved up to a maximum of four, and the number of reserved balls is displayed by lighting up the regular game reservation display section 38b.

A win/fail determination process is performed using the win to the first operating port 33 or the second operating port 34 as a trigger. Then, the result of the hit/fail judgment process is clearly displayed through the display effect on the symbol display device 41 of the special symbol unit 37 and the variable display unit 36.

The special figure unit 37 is provided with a first special figure display section 37a and a second special figure display section 37b. In the first special figure display section 37a, a win/fail judgment process is performed using the winning at the first actuation port 33 as a trigger, thereby displaying a changing pattern. Then, a stop result corresponding to the result of the validity determination process is displayed. In this case, the jackpot result, time-saving result, and miss result, which will be described later, are present as a result of the success/failure judgment process, but the contents of the stop result on the first special symbol display section 37a are the jackpot result, time-saving result, and miss result, respectively. They are different. The display of the stop result on the first special figure display section 37a is maintained until the next game round starts and the first special figure display section 37a starts to display a new symbol in a variable manner. In addition, in the second special figure display section 37b, a win/fail determination process is performed using the win to the second actuation port 34 as a trigger, thereby displaying a changing pattern. Then, a stop result corresponding to the result of the validity determination process is displayed. In this case, as a result of the judgment process, there are jackpot results, time-saving results, and miss results, which will be described later, but the contents of the stop results on the second special figure display section 37b are the jackpot results, time-saving results, and miss results, respectively. They are different. The display of the stop result on the second special figure display section 37b is maintained until the next game round starts and the variable display of a new symbol starts on the second special figure display section 37b.

Note that the first special figure display section 37a and the second special figure display section 37b are constituted by a segment display in which a plurality of segment light emitting sections are arranged in a predetermined manner, but they are not limited to this. Instead, it may be configured by other types of display devices such as a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, a CRT, or a dot matrix display. In addition, the patterns displayed on the first special figure display section 37a and the second special figure display section 37b include a configuration in which multiple types of characters are displayed, a configuration in which multiple types of symbols are displayed, a configuration in which multiple types of symbols are displayed, and a configuration in which multiple types of characters are displayed. Possible configurations include a configuration in which , or a configuration in which multiple types of colors are displayed.

In the special figure unit 37, a first special figure reservation display part 37c and a second special figure reservation display part 37d are provided at positions adjacent to the first special figure display part 37a and the second special figure display part 37b. . The number of game balls entered into the first actuation port 33 is reserved up to a maximum of four, and the number of reserved balls is displayed by lighting the first special figure reservation display section 37c. In addition, the number of game balls that have entered the second operating port 34 is reserved up to a maximum of four, and the number of reserved balls is displayed by lighting the second special figure reservation display section 37d.

In detail about the symbol display device 41, the symbol display device 41 is configured as a liquid crystal display device including a liquid crystal display, and the display contents are controlled by a display control device to be described later. Note that the symbol display device 41 is not limited to a liquid crystal display device, and may be another display device having a display surface such as a plasma display device, an organic EL display device, or a CRT, and may also be a dot matrix display device. It's okay.

In the symbol display device 41, when a symbol is displayed in a variable manner in the first special symbol display section 37a based on winning at the first operating port 33, the symbol is displayed in a variable manner in accordance with this, and the symbol is displayed in a variable manner in accordance with this. When the symbols are displayed in a variable manner on the second special symbol display section 37b based on the prize winning number 34, the symbols are displayed in a variable manner in accordance with the variable display. In addition, the symbol display device 41 not only displays display effects triggered by winning to the first operating port 33 or the second operating port 34, but also display effects during the opening/closing execution mode described below that shifts after a jackpot result. will be held.

Based on the winning of any of the operating ports 33, 34, the display starts on any of the special symbol display sections 37a, 37b and the symbol display device 41, and a stop result corresponding to the result of the win/fail judgment process is displayed. The period from when the game ends until the execution of the special figure confirmation process in the main control device 71, which will be described later, is completed corresponds to one game round.

In this pachinko machine 10, a win/fail determination process is executed based on winnings in the operating ports 33, 34, and when the result of the win/fail determination process becomes a jackpot result, the game shifts to the opening/closing execution mode. In the opening/closing execution mode, the opening/closing control of the special electric winning device 32 is executed, and when a winning occurs in the special electric winning device 32 which is in the open state, the payout of game balls is executed. Specifically, in the opening/closing execution mode, a predetermined number of round games are executed. A round game is a game that continues until either one of the following conditions is met: a predetermined opening duration period elapses, and a predetermined upper limit number of game balls enters the special electric winning device 32. That's true. In this case, the game ball firing mechanism 27 is drive-controlled so that one game ball is fired toward the gaming area PA every 0.6 seconds when the firing operation device 28 is operated by the player. , the open duration period is set to 29 seconds and the upper limit number is set to 10. Therefore, the open duration period of the round game is set to be longer than the product of the firing cycle of game balls and the upper limit number of balls in one round game, so the upper limit is set in the special electric winning device 32 in each round game. You can expect more game balls to win than the number of balls. Further, the upper limit number of round games differs depending on the type of jackpot result that triggered the transition.

As the win/fail lottery mode of the win/fail determination process, a high probability mode and a low probability mode exist so that the probability of a jackpot result resulting in a transition to the opening/closing execution mode is relatively high or low. In addition, in this pachinko machine 10, a plurality of types of support modes are set so that the manner in which the general electrical accessory 34a of the second operating port 34 is in the open state is different from each other. In detail, the support mode includes the frequency with which the general electric accessory 34a becomes open per unit time when compared with the situation where the game ball continues to be launched in the same manner to the game area PA. A high-frequency support mode (a first high-frequency support mode and a second high-frequency support mode, which will be described later) and a low-frequency support mode are set so that the values are relatively high and low. Depending on the type of combination of the win/fail lottery mode and the support mode, the gaming state in a situation other than the opening/closing execution mode will differ. The gaming states include a normal gaming state which is a low probability mode and a low frequency support mode, a high probability state which is a high probability mode and a high frequency support mode, and a high probability mode which is a low probability mode and a high frequency support mode. A time saving state is set. In the high probability state and the time saving state, the average period of time required for one game to be completed is shorter than in the normal gaming state.

Both the first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34 are installed in a lower area PAU that is an area below the variable display unit 36 in the game area PA. Further, the first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34 are arranged vertically in parallel, with the first operating port 33 facing upward and the second operating port 34 facing downward, forming a unit as a working port device. has been done. In addition, the general electric accessory 34a of the second operation opening 34 can be controlled to be opened when a prize is won in the through gate 35, but the through gate 35 is located in the area to the left of the variable display unit 36 in the gaming area PA. It is arranged in a certain left area PAL. The game ball flowing down the left side area PAL is guided to the lower area PAU, and the game ball guided to the lower area PAU is guided to the area where the first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34 are provided. can be done. Therefore, when a firing operation is performed with the aim of winning a prize in the first operating port 33, a winning may not only occur in the first operating port 33, but also a winning in the second operating port 34. When a firing operation is performed with the aim of winning a prize in the second operating port 34, not only a winning in the second operating port 34 may occur, but also a winning in the first operating port 33 may occur.

When the gaming state is the normal gaming state, the support mode becomes the low-frequency support mode as described above, so winnings to the second operating port 34 are less likely to occur, and the first operating port 34 is more likely to win than the second operating port 34. 33 becomes more likely to win. Therefore, in the normal gaming state, the execution target of the game round is basically the first special figure display section 37a, and if a prize is accidentally won in the second operating port 34, the second special figure display section 37b is executed. It is subject to execution of game times.

On the other hand, when the gaming state is a high probability state or a time saving state, the support mode becomes the high frequency support mode as described above, so winnings to the second operating port 34 are more likely to occur. In this case, winnings are more likely to occur in the second operating port 34 than in the first operating port 33. However, as already explained, if the firing operation is performed with the aim of winning the second operating port 34, the winning may occur in the first operating port 33, and the shot may be guided to the lead-out portion 36e of the stage portion 36b. Since the game ball will enter the first operating port 33 with a high probability, even in the high-frequency support mode, winnings will occur in the first operating port 33 with the same frequency as in the low-frequency support mode. .

The performance for the game round is executed on the symbol display device 41 in a manner corresponding to the pattern of the special figure display sections 37a, 37b that are the targets of the game round. The display contents of the symbol display device 41 when the performance for the game round is executed will be explained.

FIGS. 4(a) and 4(b) are explanatory diagrams for explaining the display contents of the symbol display device 41 when a game round is executed.

As shown in FIG. 4A, on the display surface of the symbol display device 41, three symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 are set as a plurality of display areas: an upper row, a middle row, and a lower row. Each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is composed of main symbols and sub-symbols arranged in a predetermined order. That is, when a game round is executed, the symbols are displayed in a variable manner using most of the display surface of the symbol display device 41.

FIGS. 5(a) to 5(j) are explanatory diagrams for explaining the main symbols and sub-symbols that are variably displayed in each symbol row Z1 to Z3. As shown in Figures 5(a) to 5(j), the patterns, which are a type of pattern, include nine types of main patterns with numbers ``1'' to ``9'' attached to them, and a shell-shaped pattern. It is composed of sub-designs consisting of. More specifically, nine types of character patterns such as an octopus are numbered from ``1'' to ``9'' to form the main pattern.

As shown in FIG. 4(b), in the upper symbol row Z1, nine types of main symbols from "1" to "9" are arranged in descending numerical order, and one sub-symbol is placed between each main symbol. They are arranged one by one. In the lower symbol row Z3, nine types of main symbols from "1" to "9" are arranged in ascending numerical order, and one sub-symbol is arranged between each main symbol. In other words, the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3 are composed of 18 symbols. On the other hand, in the middle symbol row Z2, nine types of main symbols "1" to "9" are arranged in ascending order of numbers, and between the main symbol "9" and the main symbol "1". A main symbol of "4" is additionally arranged on the top, and one sub-symbol is arranged between each of these main symbols. That is, only in the middle symbol row Z2, 10 main symbols are arranged and it is composed of 20 symbols. Then, on the display surface, the symbols of each of these symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are displayed in a cyclically scrolling manner in a predetermined direction. The symbol display device 41 is configured to stop display three symbols for each symbol row Z1 to Z3, and as a result, a total of nine symbols (3×3) are stopped and displayed. Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 4(a), the symbol display device 41 is set with five effective lines, namely, a left line L1, a middle line L2, a right line L3, a lower right line L4, and an upper right line L5. There is.

When a variable display of symbols is performed on the symbol display device 41 based on a winning to the first operating port 33 or the second operating port 34, the symbols in each symbol row Z1 to Z3 are periodically scrolled in a predetermined direction. The variable display will start as shown below. Then, basically, the display is switched from the variable display to the standby display in the order of upper symbol row Z1 → lower symbol row Z3 → middle symbol row Z2, and finally a state in which a predetermined symbol is displayed statically in each symbol row Z1 to Z3. It ends with.

When the fluctuating display of symbols ends, if the result of the success/failure judgment process in the main controller 71 (described later) is a jackpot result (described later), the same symbol combination is formed on any of the active lines L1 to L5. Ru. In addition, if the result of the validity judgment process is a time saving result described later and the time saving state is set based on the time saving result, when the symbol fluctuation display ends, one of the valid lines Predetermined symbol combinations (for example, "1, 2, 3", "3, 4, 1") that are not combinations of the same symbols and combinations of reach symbols are formed on L1 to L5. In this case, since there are multiple types of time-saving results as described later, the contents of the predetermined symbol combinations also differ depending on the type of time-saving results. On the other hand, if the result of the judgment process is a time-saving result (described later), and the time-saving state is not set based on the time-saving result, the reach symbol will change when the fluctuating symbol display ends. A stop symbol for non-reach out where no combination is formed is displayed. In other words, if the result of the validity judgment process is a time saving result which will be described later, and the setting of the time saving state is not triggered by the time saving result, the stop results in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are determined by the validity judgment process. The same stopping result can be obtained if the result is a wrong result.

In the configuration in which symbols are displayed in a variable manner in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 as described above, an expected performance is set as a display performance on the symbol display device 41 when a game round is executed. The expected performance is a display state that is made to make the player think that the fluctuating display state is likely to result in a jackpot, at a stage after the fluctuating display of symbols on the symbol display device 41 starts and before the stop result is derived and displayed. say. Two types of expected effects are set: a ready-to-reach display and a preview display for making the player expect the occurrence of a ready-to-reach display or a jackpot result at a stage before the ready-to-reach display occurs.

In the reach display, the combination of reach symbols is displayed by stopping and displaying the same type of symbols for upper symbol row Z1 and lower symbol row Z3 among multiple symbol rows Z1 to Z3, and in that state, the remaining medium symbols A display state in which symbols are displayed in a variable manner is included in column Z2. In addition, with the combination of ready-to-reach symbols displayed as described above, the remaining symbol rows are displayed with fluctuating symbols, and a predetermined character or the like is displayed as a video on the background screen to create a ready-to-reach effect. , those that perform a reach effect by displaying a predetermined character or the like as a moving image on substantially the entire display surface after reducing or not displaying a combination of ready-to-reach symbols are included. If the game round results in a jackpot, the same type of symbol as the symbol forming the combination of reach symbols will be stopped and displayed on the reach line in the middle symbol row Z2, and if the game round does not result in a jackpot, the reach symbol will be displayed. A symbol of a different type from the symbols forming the combination is stopped and displayed on the reach line in the middle symbol row Z2.

The preview display is performed after the variable display of symbols starts in each symbol column Z1 to Z3, in a situation where the symbols are displayed in a variable manner in all symbol columns Z1 to Z3, or in some symbol columns Z1 to Z3. Z3 includes a mode in which a character is displayed separately from the symbols on the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 in a situation where symbols are variably displayed in a plurality of symbol rows Z1 to Z3. Also included are ones in which the background screen is set in a predetermined mode different from the previous modes, and those in which the symbols on the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are set in a predetermined mode different from the previous modes. Such a preview display can occur in any game round when a reach display is displayed or when a reach display is not performed, but it is higher when a reach display is performed than when a reach display is not performed. It is set to occur with probability.

On the display surface of the symbol display device 41, as shown in FIG. 4(b), in addition to the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, a reservation display area 42 and a status suggestion area 43 are set. The hold display area 42 is set at the lower part of the display surface of the symbol display device 41. The hold display area 42 includes a first hold display area in which an image is displayed to notify the player of the number of hold information acquired by the main control device 71, which will be described later, based on winnings to the first operating port 33. 42a, and a second reservation display area 42b in which an image is displayed to notify the player of the number of reservation information acquired by the main control device 71, which will be described later, based on winnings to the second operating port 34. . The pending information is information that triggers the execution of the propriety determination process in the main control device 71, and is information that triggers the execution of the game round. The reservation information (hereinafter also referred to as "first reservation information") acquired in response to winning at the first actuating port 33 becomes a trigger for executing a game round in the first special symbol display section 37a, and winning at the second operating port 34. The reservation information (hereinafter also referred to as second reservation information) acquired in response to this trigger becomes a trigger for executing the game round in the second special symbol display section 37b. A maximum of four pieces of first pending information are held and stored, and a maximum of four pieces of second pending information are held and stored.

The number of first pending images G1 corresponding to the number of first pending information is displayed in the first pending display area 42a. That is, if the number of first pending information stored on hold is 0, the first pending image G1 is not displayed in the first pending display area 42a. Further, if the number of first pending information held in hold memory is one, one first held image G1 is displayed, and if the number of first held information held in hold storage is two, the first held image G1 is displayed. If two images G1 are displayed and the number of first pending information held is three, then three first held images G1 are displayed, and the number of first held information held is four. If so, four first pending images G1 are displayed. When a plurality of first pending images G1 are displayed, the plurality of first pending images G1 are displayed side by side at regular intervals. In addition, when the number of first pending information stored on hold increases, the first pending image G1 is displayed to increase toward the right, and the first pending information becomes a trigger for starting a game round and is stored in the pending memory. When the number of pieces of first hold information displayed decreases, the first hold images G1 are displayed so as to decrease toward the left.

The number of second pending images G2 corresponding to the number of second pending information is displayed in the second pending display area 42b. That is, if the number of second pending information stored on hold is 0, the second pending image G2 is not displayed in the second pending display area 42b. Further, if the number of second pending information stored on hold is one, one second pending image G2 is displayed, and if the number of second pending information stored on hold is two, the second pending image G2 is displayed. If two images G2 are displayed and the number of second pending information held on hold is three, three second held images G2 are displayed and the number of second held information held on hold is four. If so, four second pending images G2 are displayed. When a plurality of second pending images G2 are displayed, the plurality of second pending images G2 are displayed side by side at regular intervals. In addition, when the number of second pending information stored on hold increases, the second pending image G2 is displayed to increase toward the right, and the second pending information becomes a trigger for starting a game round and is stored in the pending memory. When the number of pieces of second hold information displayed decreases, the second hold images G2 are displayed so as to decrease toward the left.

In addition, in FIG. 4(b), the number of first pending information stored on hold is four, and the number of second pending information is four, so that the first pending information is displayed in the first pending display area 42a. Four images G1 are displayed, and four second pending images G2 are displayed in the second pending display area 42b.

The state suggestion area 43 is set at the upper part of the display surface of the symbol display device 41. The state suggesting area 43 has a display area narrower than the display area of the symbols in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. In the state suggestion area 43, the symbols for the game round are displayed in a fluctuating manner in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 of the symbol display device 41, and the stop result corresponding to the result of the judgment process for the game round is not stopped and displayed. Depending on the situation, a color switching display is performed. Specifically, a predetermined display color pattern is repeated in the order of red → blue → green → red → blue → green → red, and so on. Then, at the timing when the stop result corresponding to the result of the validity determination process is displayed in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 and the final display (static display) is started, the stop result corresponding to the gaming situation at that time and the result of the validity determination process is displayed. The results will be displayed. In this case, if the result of the success/failure determination process is a jackpot result or a miss result, red is stopped and displayed in the status suggestion area 43. In addition, if the result of the validity judgment process is a time saving result (described later), if a time saving state is set based on the time saving result, the red color is stopped regardless of the type of the time saving result, and the time saving result is displayed in red. If the time-saving state is not set based on the result, blue or green is stopped and displayed depending on the type of time-saving result. As mentioned above, if the result of the validity judgment process is a time-saving result described later, and the time-saving state is not set based on the time-saving result, the stop result in symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is the validity judgment process. In a configuration where the same stop result as when the result is an incorrect result, if the result of the validity judgment process is a time saving result described later, the time saving state is not set based on the time saving result. By differentiating the display content of the status suggestion area 43 depending on the case where the result of the validity judgment process is an incorrect result and the case where the result of the validity judgment process is a negative result, it is possible to display the case where the result of the validity judgment process is a time saving result described later. The overall display content of the symbol display device 41 can be different depending on the case where the time saving state is not set as a trigger and the case where the result of the judgment process is incorrect. .

Returning to the explanation of the game board 24 (see FIG. 3), if the result of the success/failure determination process is a jackpot result, the game board 24 shifts to the opening/closing execution mode as already described. In the opening/closing execution mode, opening/closing control of the special electric prize winning device 32 is executed. The special electric winning device 32 is equipped with a grand prize opening (not shown) that leads to the back side of the game board 24, and is also provided with an opening/closing door 32a that opens and closes the grand prize opening. The opening/closing door 32a is placed in either a closed state or an open state. Specifically, the opening/closing door 32a is normally in a closed state where game balls cannot win, but when a jackpot result is selected in the win/fail determination process, it can be switched to an open state where game balls can win. ing. Note that in the closed state, it is not impossible to win a prize, but it may be configured to be in a state in which it is more difficult to win a prize than in the open state. Further, in the opening/closing execution mode, a display effect corresponding to the opening/closing execution mode is executed on the symbol display device 41.

A front door frame 14 is provided so as to cover the entire front side of an inner frame 13 in which a game board 24 configured as described above is attached to a resin base 21. As shown in FIG. 1, the front door frame 14 has a window 61 formed therein so that almost the entire area of the gaming area PA can be viewed from the front. The window portion 61 has a substantially elliptical shape, and a window panel 62 is fitted therein. The window panel 62 is made of glass and is colorless and transparent, but is not limited to this, and may be made of synthetic resin to be colorless and transparent. It may be colored and transparent as long as it is visible.

A display light emitting section 64 is provided above the window section 61. Furthermore, a pair of left and right speaker sections 65 are provided to output sound effects and the like according to the gaming state. Further, below the window portion 61, an upper bulging portion 66 and a lower bulging portion 67 that bulge toward the front are vertically arranged in parallel. An upper plate 66a that opens upward is provided inside the upper bulge 66, and a lower plate 67a that also opens upward is provided inside the lower bulge 67. The upper tray 66a has a function of temporarily storing game balls put out from a payout device described later and guiding them to the game ball firing mechanism 27 side while arranging them in a line. Further, the lower tray 67a has a function of storing surplus game balls in the upper tray 66a.

Next, the configuration of the back side of the gaming machine main body 12 will be explained.

As shown in FIG. 2, a main control device 71 that controls the main control of the game is mounted on the back side of the inner frame 13 (specifically, the game board 24). The main control device 71 includes a main control board housed in a board box. Note that the substrate box may be provided with a trace means for leaving a trace of its opening, or may be provided with a trace structure for leaving a trace of its opening. Examples of such trace means include the structure of a joint that connects multiple case bodies that make up a board box inseparably and requires destruction of a predetermined part when separating them, and the adhesive layer that remains on the target when peeled off. A configuration is conceivable in which a seal that leaves a trace of what has been done is pasted across the boundaries between a plurality of case bodies. Further, as the trace structure, a configuration in which an adhesive is applied to the boundaries between a plurality of case bodies constituting the board box can be considered.

A back pack unit 15 is installed so as to cover the back side of the inner frame 13 including the main control device 71. The back pack unit 15 includes a back pack 72 made of transparent synthetic resin, and a dispensing mechanism section 73 and a control device assembly unit 74 are attached to the back pack 72.

The payout mechanism section 73 includes a tank 75 to which game balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall are sequentially replenished, and a payout device 76 for paying out the game balls stored in the tank 75. The game balls put out by the payout device 76 are delivered to the upper tray 66a or the lower tray 67a through a payout passage provided on the downstream side of the payout device 76. The dispensing mechanism section 73 is supplied with, for example, a main power source of 24 volts AC, and is equipped with a back pack board having a power switch for turning the power on and off.

The control device assembly unit 74 includes a payout control device 77 that has a function of controlling the payout device 76, and a predetermined amount of power required by various control devices, etc., is generated and outputted, and is also used to generate and output electricity when the player operates the firing operation device 28. It is equipped with a power supply/launch control device 78 that controls the launch of game balls. The payout control device 77 and the power supply/launch control device 78 are arranged one on top of the other so that the payout control device 77 is located at the rear of the pachinko machine 10.

<Electrical configuration of pachinko machine 10>
FIG. 6 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

The main control device 71 includes a main control board 81 that controls the main control of the game. An MPU 82 is mounted on the main control board 81. The MPU 82 includes a ROM 83 that stores various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the MPU 82, and a memory that temporarily stores various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 83. It has a built-in RAM 84, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, various counter circuits as a random number generator, and the like. Note that it is not essential that the ROM 83 and RAM 84 are integrated into one chip for the MPU 82, and each may be integrated into separate chips. This also applies to the MPUs of control devices other than the main control device 71.

The MPU 82 is provided with an input port and an output port, respectively. A power outage monitoring board 85 provided in the main control device 71 is connected to the input side of the MPU 82, and a payout control device 77 is also connected. A power supply/launch control device 78 having a function of supplying operating power is connected to the power outage monitoring board 85, and power is supplied to the MPU 82 via the power outage monitoring board 85.

Various sensors such as various prize detection sensors 86a to 86e are connected to the input side of the MPU 82. The various winning detection sensors 86a to 86e include a detection sensor 86a provided in the general winning opening 31, a detection sensor 86b provided in the special electric winning device 32, a detection sensor 86c provided in the first operation opening 33, and a detection sensor 86c installed in the first operation opening 33. A detection sensor 86d provided at the mouth 34 and a detection sensor 86e provided at the through gate 35 are included. Based on the detection results of these various winning detection sensors 86a to 86e, the MPU 82 determines the winning of each winning ball section. Furthermore, the MPU 82 executes various lottery drawings based on winnings in the first operating port 33 or the second operating port 34.

A power outage monitoring board 85, a payout control device 77, and a sound emission control device 91 are connected to the output side of the MPU 82. For example, a prize ball command is output to the payout control device 77 based on the winning determination result in the winning ball entering section. Various commands such as a variation command, a type command, and an opening command are output to the audio emission control device 91.

On the output side of the MPU 82, there are a drive unit 32b for special electricity that opens and closes the opening/closing door 32a of the special electricity prize winning device 32, a drive unit 34b for general electricity that opens and closes the ordinary electricity accessory 34a of the second operating port 34, and a drive unit 34b for general electricity that opens and closes the opening/closing door 32a of the special electricity winning device 32. A drawing unit 37 and a general drawing unit 38 are connected. By the way, the special figure unit 37 is provided with a first special figure display section 37a, a second special figure display section 37b, a first special figure reservation display section 37c, and a second special figure reservation display section 37d. are all connected to the output side of the MPU 82. Similarly, the general drawing unit 38 is provided with a general drawing display section 38a and a general drawing holding display section 38b, all of which are connected to the output side of the MPU 82. The main control board 81 is provided with various driver circuits, and the MPU 82 executes drive control of various drive units through the driver circuits.

That is, in the opening/closing execution mode, the MPU 82 executes drive control of the special electric drive unit 32b so that the special electric prize winning device 32 is opened and closed. In addition, when the general power utility object 34a is selected to be opened, the MPU 82 executes drive control of the general power drive unit 34b so that the general power utility object 34a is opened and closed. Furthermore, during each game round, display control of the special figure unit 37 is executed by the MPU 82. Further, when displaying the lottery result as to whether or not the general electric utility object 34a is to be in the open state where the electric utility object 34a is in the open state, the display control of the general electric figure unit 38 is executed in the MPU 82.

The power outage monitoring board 85 relays between the main control board 81 and the power source/launch control device 78, and also monitors the stable DC voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power source/launch control device 78. The payout control device 77 controls the payout of prize balls and rental balls by the payout device 76 based on a prize ball command input from the MPU 82 of the main control device 71.

The power source/launch control device 78 is connected to a commercial power source (external power source) in, for example, an amusement hall or the like. Then, based on the external power supplied from the commercial power source, necessary operating power is generated for the main control device 71, payout control device 77, etc., and the generated operating power is supplied.

Specifically, regarding the configuration for supplying the operating power, the power supply/launch control device 78 is provided with a power supply section 78a for power-on and a power supply section 78b for power-off. The power supply section 78a for power-on operation is connected to a commercial power source in, for example, an amusement hall, and generates operating power in a situation where external power is supplied from the commercial power source, and also supplies the generated operating power. Has a function. The power supply section 78b for during power outage is made of a capacitor, and receives the power supplied from the power supply section 78a for power on when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is in the ON state (when power is being supplied from an external power source). It is charged by In addition, in a power cut-off state (when power supply from an external power supply is cut off) such as when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is OFF or when a power outage occurs in the commercial power supply, the main power supply unit 78b discharges electricity. Backup power is supplied to the RAM 84 of the control device 71 and the unillustrated RAM of the payout control device 77. Therefore, even in this situation, the information stored in the RAM 84 of the main control device 71 and the RAM of the payout control device 77 will not be erased while backup power is being supplied from the power outage power supply section 78b. Memory is retained.

Here, the RAM 84 of the main control device 71 temporarily stores information on the current gaming state and the progress of the game, and the RAM of the payout control device 77 temporarily stores information on the number of unpaid prize balls. be done. In this case, by supplying backup power to these RAMs from the power supply section 78b during power outage as described above, even if there is no power supply from the power supply section 78a during power on, the current game It becomes possible to store and hold the status, game progress details, and unpaid prize ball information for a predetermined period of time. On the other hand, backup power is not supplied to the audio emission control device 91 and the display control device 101 from the power supply unit 78b during power outage. Therefore, the information stored in the RAM 95 of the audio emission control device 91 and the RAM 105 of the display control device 101 will not be backed up, and will be destroyed or will be deleted.

The capacity of the power supply unit 78b during power outage is secured relatively large, and the information stored in the RAM 84 of the main controller 71 before the power is shut off is retained for a predetermined period (for example, one or two days). Ru. The power supply section 78b for use during power outage is not limited to a capacitor, and may be a battery, a non-rechargeable battery, or the like.

The power supply/launch control device 78 is provided with a power supply section (not shown) for use during a power outage, which is different from the power supply section 78b for use during a power outage. In the power supply/launch control device 78, even after the stable 24 volt DC power supply becomes less than 22 volts, the power supply for power outage is discharged for a sufficient time to execute the power outage processing described below. It is configured to maintain the 5 volt output, which is the driving power source for the control system, at a normal value. This allows the main controller 71 and the like to normally execute and complete the power outage process.

The power supply/launch control device 78 is provided with a firing control section 78c in addition to various power supply sections 78a and 78b. A touch sensor 28a, a push sensor 28b, and a variable resistor 28c built into the firing operation device 28 are electrically connected to the firing control section 78c.

The touch sensor 28a has a built-in capacitor, and when the player's hand comes into contact with the outer surface of the operating handle and the capacitance of the capacitor changes, the controller 78c emits a predetermined electrical signal corresponding to the handle operation detection. Output to. By receiving the predetermined electrical signal, the firing control unit 78c recognizes that the player's hand is in contact with the outer surface of the operating handle. In addition, the firing control unit 78c determines whether or not the firing stop switch of the firing operating device 28 is operated according to the electrical signal received from the push sensor 28b, and also determines whether or not the firing stop switch of the firing operating device 28 is operated according to the electrical signal received through the variable resistor 28c. Understand the amount of rotational operation.

The firing control unit 78c transmits a condition fulfillment signal in a predetermined signal form to the MPU 82 of the main control device 71 when a predetermined game ball firing condition is satisfied. Specifically, the firing control unit 78c receives a signal from the touch sensor 28a indicating that the operating handle is being touched by the player, and also receives a signal indicating that the firing stop switch is not being manually operated by the player. is received from the push sensor 28b, a HI level condition fulfillment signal (a signal corresponding to the condition establishment) is continuously transmitted to the MPU 82. Note that if any of the above signals is not received, a LOW level condition fulfillment signal (signal that does not correspond to condition fulfillment) is transmitted to the MPU 82. However, the relationship between the LOW level and the HI level may be reversed. Further, in addition to the above conditions, a condition that the ball lending device is connected to the pachinko machine 10 may be added as a condition for transmitting a condition fulfillment signal corresponding to the condition establishment.

If the MPU 82 is in a situation where it is receiving a HI level condition fulfillment signal and can permit firing of the game ball, it sends a HI level firing permission signal (signal corresponding to firing permission) to the firing control unit 78c. Continue to send. Note that if the MPU 82 does not receive a HI level condition fulfillment signal from the launch control unit 78c, it transmits a LOW level launch permission signal (a signal that does not correspond to launch permission); The relationship between the level and the HI level may be reversed.

When the game ball firing mechanism 27 is electrically connected and receiving the HI level firing permission signal from the MPU 82, the firing control unit 78c periodically controls the driving of the game ball firing mechanism 27. In this case, if game balls are continuously supplied to the game ball firing mechanism 27, one game ball will be fired into the game area PA in a specific firing period (specifically, 0.6 seconds). Ru. Furthermore, during this firing, the firing intensity is adjusted based on the signal received from the variable resistor 28c, so the game ball is fired with an intensity that corresponds to the amount of rotation of the operating handle.

The audio emission control device 91 includes an audio emission control board 92 on which an MPU 93 is mounted. The MPU 93 includes a ROM 94 that stores various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the MPU 93, and a memory that temporarily stores various data etc. when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 94. It has a built-in RAM 95, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, etc. The MPU 93 drives and controls the display light emitting section 64 and the speaker section 65 based on the command received from the main control device 71, and transmits the command to the display control device 101.

The display control device 101 includes a display control board 102 on which an MPU 103 is mounted. The MPU 103 includes a ROM 104 that stores various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the MPU 103, and a memory that temporarily stores various data etc. when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 104. It has a built-in RAM 105, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, etc. The MPU 103 controls the symbol display device 41 based on commands received from the sound emission control device 91.

Although not shown, the display control board 102 is equipped with a video display processor (VDP), a character ROM, a video RAM, and the like in addition to the MPU 103. The VDP is a type of drawing circuit that directly operates an image processing device as a liquid crystal display driver built into the symbol display device 41. The VDP intervenes in the reading and writing of data in the video RAM, and also reads the image data to be stored in the video RAM from the character ROM at a predetermined timing and displays it on the symbol display device 41. The character ROM serves as an image data library for storing character data such as symbols displayed on the symbol display device 41. This character ROM stores bitmap format image data of various display symbols, a color palette table that is referred to when determining the expression color of each dot of the bitmap image, and the like. The video RAM is a memory for storing display data to be displayed on the symbol display device 41, and the display contents of the symbol display device 41 are changed based on rewriting the contents of the video RAM.

In the following explanation, for convenience of explanation, the MPU 82, ROM 83, and RAM 84 of the main control device 71 are referred to as the main side MPU 82, the main side ROM 83, and the main side RAM 84, and the MPU 93, ROM 94, and RAM 95 of the audio light emission control device 91 are referred to as the sound-light side. The MPU 93, the audio-optical side ROM 94, and the audio-optical side RAM 95 are referred to as the MPU 93, the ROM 104, and the RAM 105 of the display control device 101 are referred to as the display-side MPU 103, the display-side ROM 104, and the display-side RAM 105.

<Electrical configuration for performing various lottery drawings on the main side MPU 82>
Next, the electrical configuration for performing various lottery drawings on the main side MPU 82 will be explained using FIG. 7.

During the game, the main MPU 82 uses various types of counter information to determine winning lottery results, display settings on the special symbol display sections 37a and 37b, symbol display settings on the symbol display device 41, display settings on the regular symbol display section 38a, etc. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 7, a winning random number counter C1 used in the lottery of winning occurrences, a type random number counter C2 used when determining the jackpot result type and the time saving result type, A reach random number counter C3 used for the reach random number lottery when the symbol display device 41 comes off and fluctuates, a random number initial value counter CINI used to set the initial value of the hit random number counter C1, special symbol display parts 37a and 37b, and symbol display A fluctuation type counter CS is used to determine the fluctuation display period in the device 41. Furthermore, a general electricity random number counter C4 is used to determine whether or not the general electricity accessory 34a of the second operating port 34 should be placed in the general electricity open state. The counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4 are provided in various counter areas 84b of the main RAM 84.

Each of the counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4 is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the previous value each time the counter is updated, and returns to "0" after reaching the maximum value. Each counter is updated at short intervals. Information corresponding to the hit random number counter C1, type random number counter C2, and reach random number counter C3 is stored in the special figure reservation provided in the main side RAM 84 when a winning occurs in the first operating port 33 or the second operating port 34. It is stored in area 84a. The special figure holding area 84a includes a first special figure holding area 111, a second special figure holding area 112, and a special figure execution area 113.

The first special drawing holding area 111 includes a first area 111a, a second area 111b, a third area 111c, and a fourth area 111d. Numerical information of the type random number counter C2 and reach random number counter C3 is stored as first pending information in any of the areas 111a to 111d. In this case, in the first area 111a to the fourth area 111d, if winnings to the first operating port 33 occur multiple times in a row, the first area 111a → second area 111b → third area 111c → Each piece of numerical information is stored chronologically in the order of the four areas 111d. By providing the four areas 111a to 111d in this manner, the winning history of game balls entered into the first operating port 33 can be stored in abeyance at a maximum of four. The number that can be held and stored in the first special drawing holding area 111 is not limited to four, but is arbitrary, and may be any other number such as two, three, or five or more. , may be singular.

The second special figure holding area 112 includes a first area 112a, a second area 112b, a third area 112c, and a fourth area 112d, and a winning random number counter C1, Each numerical value information of the type random number counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3 is stored as second pending information in any of the areas 112a to 112d. In this case, in the first area 112a to the fourth area 112d, if winnings to the second operating port 34 occur multiple times in a row, the first area 112a → second area 112b → third area 112c → Each piece of numerical information is stored chronologically in the order of the four areas 112d. By providing the four areas 112a to 112d in this manner, the winning history of game balls entered into the second operating port 34 can be stored in abeyance at a maximum of four. The number that can be held and stored in the second special figure holding area 112 is not limited to four, but is arbitrary, and may be any other number such as two, three, or five or more. , may be singular.

The special figure execution area 113 is an area in which pending information about objects to be judged, such as validity judgment and distribution judgment, is stored when starting variable display on either of the special figure display sections 37a, 37b. Specifically, when starting the variable display of the first special figure display section 37a, the hold information stored in the first area 111a of the first special figure hold area 111 is moved to the special figure execution area 113. Ru. On the other hand, when starting the variable display of the second special figure display section 37b, the reservation information stored in the first area 112a of the second special figure reservation area 112 is moved to the special figure execution area 113.

The information corresponding to the general random number counter C4 is stored in the general drawing holding area 84c when a winning in the through gate 35 occurs. The general drawing reservation area 84c includes a first area 114a, a second area 114b, a third area 114c, and a fourth area 114d, and the numerical information of the general drawing random number counter C4 is stored in accordance with the winning history in the through gate 35. is stored in one of the areas 114a to 114d as pending information on the general figure side. In this case, in the first area 114a to the fourth area 114d, if winnings to the through gate 35 occur multiple times in a row, the first area 114a → second area 114b → third area 114c → fourth area Numerical information is stored chronologically in the order of 114d. By providing the four areas 114a to 114d in this manner, the winning history of game balls entered into the through gate 35 can be stored in abeyance at a maximum of four. Note that the number that can be held and stored in the general drawing holding area 84c is not limited to four, but is arbitrary, and may be any other number such as 2, 3, or 5 or more; It may be. The ordinary figure holding area 84c is provided with an execution area 115 for ordinary figures. The execution area 115 for ordinary figures is an area in which pending information on objects for which ordinary figure validity determination processing is to be performed when starting variable display on the ordinary figure display section 38a is stored. Specifically, when starting the variable display of the ordinary figure display section 38a, the reservation information stored in the first area 114a of the ordinary figure holding area 84c is moved to the execution area 115 for ordinary figures.

Each of the above counters will be explained in detail.

First, the standard random number counter C4 will be explained. The general random number counter C4 is configured such that, for example, the increment is sequentially incremented by 1 within the range of 0 to 250, and returns to "0" after reaching the maximum value. The general random number counter C4 is updated regularly, and is stored in the general drawing holding area 84c at the timing when a game ball enters the through gate 35. Then, at a predetermined timing, a universal symbol correctness determination process is performed to determine whether or not to control the universal electrical accessory 34a to the open state based on the stored value of the universal electrical random number counter C4.

As already explained in this pachinko machine 10, a plurality of types of support modes are set so that the modes of support by the general electric accessory 34a are different from each other. FIG. 8 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of the support mode.

The support mode includes the frequency with which the electric accessories 34a of the second operating port 34 are opened per unit time when compared with a situation where game balls are continued to be launched in the same manner into the game area. A high-frequency support mode and a low-frequency support mode are set so that the values are relatively high and low. Furthermore, a first high-frequency support mode and a second high-frequency support mode are set as high-frequency support modes.

As a determination mode in the case where the general utility figure correctness determination process is executed to determine whether or not the general electric utility object 34a is in the open state by lottery, the probability of the electric utility object being won is relative. There is a high probability mode on the ordinary figure side and a low probability mode on the ordinary figure side so that the average level is high and low. In the low probability mode on the general figure side, the probability of winning the electric hand is 1/2 in one process of determining the validity of the general figure, whereas in the high probability mode on the general figure side, the probability of winning the electric hand is 1/2. In the process, the probability of winning the electric role open win is 4/5.

When the ordinary figure appropriateness determination process is executed, the variable display of the pattern will be started in the ordinary figure display section 38a. In this case, the fluctuation period of the common symbol, which is the continuation period of the variable display times in which the variable display of the symbol is executed in the common symbol display section 38a, is divided into a long period and a short period so that the period is relatively long and short. exists. The long term is 10 seconds, while the short term is 1 second.

When the variable display cycle of the normal figure display unit 38a ends, the stop result corresponding to the determination result of the normal figure correctness determination process that triggered the execution of the variable display unit is displayed on the normal figure display unit 38a. . In this case, if the judgment result of the ordinary figure correctness determination process is a failure result, a stop result corresponding to the failure result is displayed on the ordinary figure display section 38a, and a shift to the ordinary electricity open state does not occur. When the reservation information on the ordinary figure side is stored in the ordinary figure holding area 84c, a new ordinary figure validity determination process is executed for the ordinary figure side reservation information, and a new one is displayed on the ordinary figure display part 38a. A fluctuating display cycle will begin. On the other hand, if the judgment result of the ordinary map validity determination process is a result corresponding to the winning of electric power opening, a stop result corresponding to the winning result is displayed on the ordinary figure display section 38a, and the transition to the ordinary electric role opening state is performed. Occur.

As the execution mode of the general electric power open state, there are a high expectation degree mode and a low expectation degree mode so that the degree of expectation of the game ball entering the general electric utility object 34a is relatively high or low. In the low expectation mode, a short opening of the common electric accessory 34a occurs once. The duration of the short opening is 0.7 seconds. As already explained, the firing cycle of the game ball is 0.6 seconds, so if a short opening of the general electric accessory 34a occurs once, the game ball will basically not enter the second operating port 34. Even if it occurs without occurring, the number of balls that enter the ball is about one. Note that the normal power open state also ends when the number of game balls entering the second operating port 34 reaches 10, which is the upper limit number on the normal power side, but if one short open state occurs, As described above, even if a game ball enters the second operating port 34, only one ball enters the second operating port 34, so the upper limit number of game balls on the normal power side will not enter the second operating port 34.

In the high expectation mode, the long opening of the general electric accessory 34a occurs three times. The duration of the long release is 2 seconds. As already explained, the firing cycle of the game balls is 0.6 seconds, so when the long opening of the general electric accessory 34a occurs once, about three game balls enter the second operating port 34. obtain. Then, in the normal power open state in the high expectation mode, long opening occurs three times with an interval period (specifically, 1 second) on the normal power side in which the second operating port 34 is in the closed state. Therefore, when the normal power open state in the high expectation mode occurs, about nine game balls can enter the ball. As mentioned above, the normal power open state ends when the number of game balls entering the second operating port 34 reaches 10, which is the upper limit number on the power grid side. When the open state occurs, an event may occur in which the upper limit number of game balls on the normal power side enters the second operating port 34, and the normal power open state ends.

In the configuration in which the determination mode of the ordinary figure propriety determination process, the fluctuation period of the ordinary figure in the ordinary figure display part 38a, and the execution mode of the electric utility open state are set as described above, in the low frequency support mode, the ordinary figure appropriateness determination process is set. The determination mode is a low probability mode on the ordinary figure side, the fluctuation period of the ordinary figure is a long period of time, and the execution mode of the ordinary electric open state is a low expectation mode in which one short open occurs. In addition, in the first high-frequency support mode, the judgment mode for the ordinary figure validity judgment process is the high probability mode on the ordinary figure side, the fluctuation period of the ordinary figure is short, and the execution mode in the ordinary electric open state is long open three times. It becomes a high expectation mode that occurs. In addition, in the second high-frequency support mode, the judgment mode for the general pattern validity judgment process is a low probability mode on the general pattern side, the fluctuation period of the general pattern is short, and the execution mode for the general electricity open state is long open three times. It becomes a high expectation mode that occurs. Therefore, if the game ball continues to be launched in the same manner so that a winning occurs in the through gate 35, the rate at which the general electric accessory 34a of the second operating port 34 is in the open state per unit time The expectation level is the highest in the first high-frequency support mode, the second highest in the second high-frequency support mode, and the lowest in the low-frequency support mode. In addition, in the low-frequency support mode, the execution mode in the normal power open state is a low expectation mode, so in the low-frequency support mode, almost no game ball enters the second operating port 34. On the other hand, in the first high-frequency support mode and the second high-frequency support mode, the execution mode in the utility power open state is the high expectation mode, so when the mode is in the first high-frequency support mode or the second high-frequency support mode, It can be expected that the number of game balls entering the second operating port 34 will be greater than or equal to the upper limit number of the second reservation information in the second special figure reservation area 112.

Note that the configuration for differentiating the expected rate of the rate at which the general electric accessory 34a of the second operating port 34 is in the open state per unit time in the first high-frequency support mode and the second high-frequency support mode is as follows. For example, in the first high-frequency support mode, a short period is selected as the fluctuation period of the regular pattern, whereas in the second high-frequency support mode, a short period and a long period are selected. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which a medium period is selected, and as an execution mode of the general power open state, in the first high-frequency support mode, long-time open occurs three times, while in the second high-frequency support mode, long open occurs twice. It is also possible to have a configuration in which this occurs twice. In addition, although the judgment mode of the general utility grid validity determination process is the same in the high probability mode on the utility grid side in the first high frequency support mode and the second high frequency support mode, the execution of the general utility grid fluctuation period or the utility power open state is performed. Depending on the content of the mode, the expected rate of the general electric accessory 34a of the second operating port 34 being in the open state per unit time is higher in the first high-frequency support mode than in the second high-frequency support mode. It may also be a configuration.

Next, the winning random number counter C1 will be explained. The winning random number counter C1 is configured to increment sequentially by 1 within the range of 0 to 9999, and return to "0" after reaching the maximum value. In particular, when the winning random number counter C1 completes one round, the value of the random number initial value counter CINI at that time is read as the initial value of the winning random number counter C1. Note that the random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the winning random number counter C1 (value=0 to 9999). The winning random number counter C1 is updated regularly, and is stored in the first special figure holding area 111 at the timing when the game ball enters the first operating port 33, and is stored in the second special symbol holding area 111 at the timing when the gaming ball enters the second operating port 34. It is stored in the special figure holding area 112. Then, a win/fail judgment process is performed using the stored numerical information of the winning random number counter C1.

The value of the random number that results in a win in the win/fail determination process is stored in the main side ROM 83 as a win/fail table. In the present pachinko machine 10, there are a high probability mode and a low probability mode in which the probability of a jackpot result is relatively high or low as the success/failure lottery mode of the success/failure determination process. As the validity table referred to in the validity determination process in the low probability mode, the first validity table 121 at low probability, which is referred to when the validity determination process is executed for the first pending information, and the second pending information. A second validity table 122 for low probability is provided, which is referred to when the validity determination process is executed for the target. In addition, a high-probability validity table 123 is provided as a validity table that is referred to in the validity determination process in the high-probability mode.

FIG. 9(a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the first validity table 121 when the probability is low, and FIG. 9(b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the second validity table 122 when the probability is low. FIG. 9C is an explanatory diagram for explaining the validity table 123 when the probability is high.

As shown in FIGS. 9(a) to 9(c), there are a jackpot result, a time saving result, and a miss result as a result of the success/failure determination process. The jackpot result is a win/fail result that can trigger a transition to an opening/closing execution mode in which a plurality of round games are executed, and can trigger a transition to a win/fail lottery mode and a support mode. Although the time-saving result does not trigger a shift to the opening/closing execution mode and does not trigger a shift to the win/fail lottery mode, it is a win/fail result that can trigger a shift to the support mode. A losing result is a win/fail result that does not trigger a shift to the opening/closing execution mode, and also does not trigger a shift to the win/fail lottery mode and the support mode.

This pachinko machine 10 has a set value that determines the advantage per unit time. The larger the setting value of "setting n" (n is an integer from 1 to 6) (that is, the higher the setting value), the higher the advantage. “Setting 1” to “Setting 6” exist as setting values. As shown in FIG. 9(a), the first win/fail table 121 at low probability is set such that the higher the setting value, the higher the probability of a jackpot result, and the higher the setting value, the lower the probability of a winning result. . On the other hand, the probability of a time-saving result is set to be the same for any of "Settings 1" to "Settings 6".

Specifically, the lowest setting value "Setting 1" is set to 50 as the number of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 that results in a jackpot, and the numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 that results in a time-saving result. 100 pieces are set as the number of pieces, and 9850 piece is set as the number of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 which is a losing result. In addition, "Setting 2", which is a setting value one step higher than "Setting 1", is set to 52 as the number of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 that results in a jackpot, and the winning random number counter that results in a time-saving result. 100 is set as the number of numerical information of C1, and 9848 is set as the number of numerical information of winning random number counter C1 which is a losing result. In addition, "Setting 3", which is a setting value one step higher than "Setting 2", is set to 54 as the number of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 that results in a jackpot, and the winning random number counter that results in a time-saving result. 100 is set as the number of numerical information of C1, and 9846 is set as the number of numerical information of winning random number counter C1 which is a losing result. In addition, "Setting 4", which is a setting value one step higher than "Setting 3", is set to 56 as the number of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 that results in a jackpot, and the winning random number counter that results in a time-saving result. 100 is set as the number of numerical information of C1, and 9844 is set as the number of numerical information of winning random number counter C1 which is a losing result. In addition, "Setting 5", which is a setting value one step higher than "Setting 4", is set to 58 as the number of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 that results in a jackpot, and the winning random number counter that results in a time-saving result. 100 is set as the number of numerical information of C1, and 9842 is set as the number of numerical information of winning random number counter C1 which is a losing result. In addition, the highest setting value "Setting 6" is set to 60 as the number of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 that results in a jackpot, and 60 as the number of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 that results in a time-saving result. 100 pieces are set, and 9840 pieces are set as the number of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 which is a losing result. As mentioned above, regardless of the setting value, in the low probability mode, the probability of a time-saving result is higher than the probability of a jackpot result.

As shown in FIG. 9(b), in the second win/fail table 122 when the probability is low, the higher the setting value, the higher the probability of a jackpot result, and the higher the setting value, the lower the probability of a winning result. . On the other hand, the probability of a time-saving result is set to be the same for any of "Settings 1" to "Settings 6".

Specifically, the lowest setting value "Setting 1" is set to 50 as the number of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 that results in a jackpot, and the numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 that results in a time-saving result. 120 is set as the number of , and 9830 is set as the number of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 that is a losing result. In addition, "Setting 2", which is a setting value one step higher than "Setting 1", is set to 52 as the number of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 that results in a jackpot, and the winning random number counter that results in a time-saving result. The number of numerical information of C1 is set to 120, and the number of numerical information of winning random number counter C1 which is a losing result is set to 9828. In addition, "Setting 3", which is a setting value one step higher than "Setting 2", is set to 54 as the number of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 that results in a jackpot, and the winning random number counter that results in a time-saving result. The number of numerical information of C1 is set to 120, and the number of numerical information of winning random number counter C1 which is a losing result is set to 9826. In addition, "Setting 4", which is a setting value one step higher than "Setting 3", is set to 56 as the number of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 that results in a jackpot, and the winning random number counter that results in a time-saving result. The number of numerical information of C1 is set to 120, and the number of numerical information of winning random number counter C1 which is a losing result is set to 9824. In addition, "Setting 5", which is a setting value one step higher than "Setting 4", is set to 58 as the number of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 that results in a jackpot, and the winning random number counter that results in a time-saving result. The number of numerical information of C1 is set to 120, and the number of numerical information of winning random number counter C1 which is a losing result is set to 9822. In addition, the highest setting value "Setting 6" is set to 60 as the number of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 that results in a jackpot, and 60 as the number of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 that results in a time-saving result. 120 pieces are set, and 9820 pieces are set as the number of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 which is a losing result.

In other words, the probability of the jackpot result for each set value is the same in the first win/fail table 121 when the probability is low and the second win/fail table 122 when the probability is low. On the other hand, the probability that the time-saving result is selected in the validity determination process is higher in the second validity table 122 when the probability is low than in the first validity table 121 when the probability is low. Therefore, when the win/fail lottery mode is the low probability mode, the win/fail determination process is executed for the second pending information more than the win/fail determination process is executed for the first hold information. , the probability that the time-saving result will be selected increases.

Note that this is not limited to this, and the probability that the time-saving result is selected in the validity determination process is the same or approximately the same in the first validity table 121 when the probability is low and the second validity table 122 when the probability is low. The first validity table 121 at low probability may be higher than the second validity table 122 at low probability. Furthermore, the first validity table 121 at the time of low probability is not limited to a configuration in which the probability of a time-saving result is the same for each set value, but may be configured to vary depending on the set value. In this case, a configuration may be adopted in which the higher the set value, the higher the probability of a time saving result, or a configuration in which the higher the set value, the lower the probability of a time saving result. Further, in the second validity table 122 when the probability is low, the probability of the time-saving result is not limited to the same configuration for each set value, but may be configured to vary depending on the set value. In this case, a configuration may be adopted in which the higher the set value, the higher the probability of a time saving result, or a configuration in which the higher the set value, the lower the probability of a time saving result.

As shown in FIG. 9(c), in the high-probability win/fail table 123, the higher the setting value, the higher the probability of a jackpot result, and the higher the setting value, the lower the probability of a winning result. On the other hand, the probability of a time-saving result is set to be the same for any of "Settings 1" to "Settings 6".

Specifically, the lowest setting value "Setting 1" is set to 500 as the number of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 that results in a jackpot, and the numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 that results in a time-saving result. 100 is set as the number of , and 9400 is set as the number of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 that is a losing result. In addition, "Setting 2", which is a setting value one step higher than "Setting 1", is set to 520 as the number of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 that results in a jackpot, and the winning random number counter that results in a time-saving result. 100 is set as the number of numerical information of C1, and 9380 is set as the number of numerical information of winning random number counter C1 which is a losing result. In addition, "Setting 3", which is a setting value one step higher than "Setting 2", is set to 540 as the number of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 that results in a jackpot, and the winning random number counter that results in a time-saving result. The number of numerical information of C1 is set to 100, and the number of numerical information of winning random number counter C1 which is a losing result is set to 9360. In addition, "Setting 4", which is a setting value one step higher than "Setting 3", is set to 560 as the number of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 that results in a jackpot, and the winning random number counter that results in a time-saving result. 100 is set as the number of numerical information of C1, and 9340 is set as the number of numerical information of winning random number counter C1 which is a losing result. In addition, "Setting 5", which is a setting value one step higher than "Setting 4", is set to 580 as the number of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 that results in a jackpot, and the winning random number counter that results in a time-saving result. The number of numerical information of C1 is set to 100, and the number of numerical information of winning random number counter C1 which is a losing result is set to 9320. In addition, the highest setting value "Setting 6" is set to 600 as the number of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 that results in a jackpot, and 600 as the number of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 that results in a time-saving result. 100 pieces are set, and 9300 pieces are set as the number of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 which is a losing result.

The validity table 123 in high probability mode shows whether the validity determination process is executed for the first pending information or the validity determination process is executed for the second pending information in the high probability mode. Even if there is, it will be referenced. As a result, the validity table is created corresponding to each case where the validity determination process is executed on the first pending information in the high probability mode and the case where the validity determination process is executed on the second pending information in the high probability mode. It is possible to reduce the storage capacity of the main side ROM 83 required to store the validity table, compared to a configuration in which the validity table is provided.

In "Setting 1", the probability of a jackpot result is 1/200 in the low probability mode, and 1/20, which is 10 times the probability, in the high probability mode. In "Setting 2", the probability of a jackpot result is about 1/192 in the low probability mode, and about 1/19.2, which is 10 times the probability, in the high probability mode. In "Setting 3", the probability of a jackpot result is about 1/185 in the low probability mode, and about 1/18.5, which is 10 times the probability, in the high probability mode. In "Setting 4", the probability of a jackpot result is about 1/179 in the low probability mode, and about 1/17.9, which is 10 times that probability, in the high probability mode. In "Setting 5", the probability of a jackpot result is about 1/172 in the low probability mode, and about 1/17.2, which is 10 times the probability, in the high probability mode. In "Setting 6", the probability of a jackpot result is about 1/167 in the low probability mode, and about 1/16.7, which is 10 times the probability, in the high probability mode. In other words, regardless of any of "Settings 1" to "Settings 6", the probability of a jackpot result is 10 times higher in the high probability mode than in the low probability mode.

On the other hand, the probability of a time-saving result is 1/100 for any of "Setting 1" to "Setting 6" in the first validity table 121 at low probability and the validity table 123 at high probability, and the probability is low. In the second validity table 122 at the time, the value is approximately 1/83 for any of "Setting 1" to "Setting 6". However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the probability of a time-saving result is higher in the validity table 123 when the probability is high than in the first validity table 121 when the probability is low, and it is higher than the second validity table 122 when the probability is low. The probability may be set to be lower than that of the second validity table 122 when the probability is low.

In addition, the numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 that results in a jackpot may be configured to be set in aggregation so that it becomes a serial number, or it may be set in a distributed manner so that at least a part or all of it is not a serial number. It is also possible to have a configuration in which Further, the numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 that results in a time-saving result may be configured to be set in aggregation so that it becomes a serial number, or it may be set in a distributed manner so that at least a part or all of it is not a serial number. It is also possible to have a configuration in which

As mentioned above, regardless of whether it is triggered by the first pending information or the second pending information, the higher the setting value, the higher the probability of a jackpot result. The higher the value, the more advantageous it is to the player. In addition, the opening/closing execution mode is a period in which the amount of increase in the player's balls per unit time is the largest, and the probability of a jackpot result that triggers the transition to the opening/closing execution mode fluctuates according to the setting value. It is possible to increase the player's attention to the set value.

In a configuration where the probability of a jackpot result is higher in the high probability mode than in the low probability mode, the probability of a jackpot result in the high probability mode is higher than that in the low probability mode regardless of any of "Setting 1" to "Setting 6" The probability of a jackpot result is higher by a certain number of times (specifically, 10 times) than "1". This makes it possible to keep the rate of change in the probability of a jackpot result constant between the low probability mode and the high probability mode in any setting state.

When comparing combinations with the same set value and win/fail lottery mode, the probability of a jackpot result is the same when triggered by the first pending information and when triggered by the second pending information. . This makes it possible to prevent a difference in the probability of occurrence of a jackpot result between when the first reservation information is used as a trigger and when the second reservation information is used as a trigger.

The probability of a time-saving result when the first hold information is used as a trigger is the same for any of "Settings 1" to "Settings 6". Furthermore, the probability of a time-saving result when the second hold information is used as a trigger is the same for any of "Settings 1" to "Settings 6". This makes it possible for the player to focus on only jackpot results in order to estimate the set value, making it difficult for the player to guess the set value. On the other hand, the probability of a time-saving result is higher when the second reservation information is used as a trigger than when the first reservation information is used as a trigger. This makes it possible to make the frequency of occurrence of time-saving results different between when a game round triggered by the first reservation information is executed and when a game round triggered by the second reservation information is executed.

The type random number counter C2 is configured to increment sequentially by 1 within the range of 0 to 29, and return to "0" after reaching the maximum value. The type random number counter C2 is updated regularly, and is stored in the first special figure holding area 111 at the timing when the game ball enters the first operating port 33, and stored in the second special symbol holding area 111 at the timing when the gaming ball enters the second operating port 34. It is stored in the special figure holding area 112.

In this pachinko machine 10, multiple jackpot results can be achieved by differentiating three conditions: the number of rounds played in the opening/closing execution mode, the win/fail lottery mode after the opening/closing execution mode, and the support mode after the opening/closing execution mode. It is set. A jackpot distribution table 125 for the first special drawing is provided as a jackpot distribution table that is referred to in the jackpot distribution determination process when a jackpot result is selected in the validity determination process for the first pending information. There is. In addition, a jackpot distribution table 126 for the second special drawing is provided as a jackpot distribution table that is referred to in the distribution determination process for the jackpot when a jackpot result is selected in the validity determination process for the second pending information. It is being

FIG. 10(a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the jackpot distribution table 125 for the first special symbol, and FIG. 10(b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the jackpot distribution table 126 for the second special symbol. It is a diagram. As shown in FIGS. 10(a) and 10(b), each jackpot distribution table 125, 126 includes 5R low probability results, 5R high probability results, and 10R high probability results as types of jackpot results. It is set. FIG. 11(a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of each jackpot result.

As already explained, the 5R low-probability result is generated by being selected as a jackpot result in the jackpot determination process and in the jackpot distribution determination process. In the 5R low probability result, the number of times the round game is executed in the opening/closing execution mode is 5, the win/fail lottery mode after the opening/closing execution mode is the low probability mode, and the support mode after the opening/closing execution mode is the first high frequency. This is a jackpot result that becomes support mode. The low probability mode in this case continues at least until the next opening/closing execution mode occurs. Further, the first high-frequency support mode ends when 100 games have been played without a new opening/closing execution mode occurring. When 100 games have been played, the support mode becomes a low-frequency support mode.

As already explained, the 5R high-accuracy result is generated by becoming a jackpot result in the validity judgment process and being selected in the jackpot distribution judgment process. In the 5R high-accuracy result, the number of times the round game is executed in the opening/closing execution mode is 5, the winning lottery mode after the opening/closing execution mode is the high probability mode, and the support mode after the opening/closing execution mode is the first high frequency. This is a jackpot result that becomes support mode. In this case, the high probability mode and the first high frequency support mode end when 100 gaming times are played without a new opening/closing execution mode occurring. When 100 games have been played, the win/fail lottery mode becomes a low probability mode, and the support mode becomes a low frequency support mode.

As already explained, the 10R high-accuracy result is generated by being selected as a jackpot result in the jackpot determination process in the correctness determination process and in the jackpot distribution determination process. In the 10R high-accuracy result, the number of times the round game is executed in the opening/closing execution mode is 10, the win/fail lottery mode after the opening/closing execution mode is the high probability mode, and the support mode after the opening/closing execution mode is the first high frequency. This is a jackpot result that becomes support mode. In this case, the high probability mode and the first high frequency support mode end when 100 gaming times are played without a new opening/closing execution mode occurring. When 100 games have been played, the win/fail lottery mode becomes a low probability mode, and the support mode becomes a low frequency support mode.

As shown in FIG. 10(a), the jackpot distribution table 125 for the first special symbol sets 5R low probability results, 5R high probability results, and 10R high probability results as the types of jackpot results to be distributed. ing. In the jackpot distribution table 125 for the first special symbol, the type random number counter C2 of "0 to 14" corresponds to the 5R low probability result, and the type random number counter C2 of "15 to 22" corresponds to the 5R high probability result. The type random number counter C2 of “23 to 29” corresponds to the 10R high accuracy result. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 10(b), in the jackpot distribution table 126 for the second special symbol, 5R low-probability results and 10R high-probability results are set as the types of jackpot results to be distributed. In the jackpot distribution table 126 for the second special symbol, the type random number counter C2 of "0 to 14" corresponds to a 5R low probability result, and the type random number counter C2 of "15 to 29" corresponds to a 10R high probability result. Compatible.

The jackpot distribution table 125 for the first special symbol and the jackpot distribution table 126 for the second special symbol have the same probability of entering the high probability mode after the opening/closing execution mode when a jackpot is won. On the other hand, the average number of executions of the round game is greater in the jackpot distribution table 126 for the second special symbol than in the jackpot distribution table 125 for the first special symbol. Therefore, as for the types of jackpot results that can be selected in the case of a jackpot win, a winning at the second operating port 34 is more likely than a case where a winning occurs at the first operating port 33 and the win/fail judgment process is performed. It is more advantageous for the player if the error occurs and the validity determination process is performed.

Not only are there multiple types of jackpot results, but there are also multiple types of time-saving results. When the time-saving result is selected in the success/failure determination process, the type of time-saving result is determined by lottery using the type random number counter C2 used to determine the type of jackpot result by lottery. In other words, not only is the winning random number counter C1 used for selecting the jackpot result used as a random number for selecting the time-saving result in the validity determination process, but also the time-saving result is selected in the validity determination process. In this case, a type random number counter C2 used for selecting the type of jackpot result is used as a random number for selecting the type of time saving result. This makes it possible to suppress the number of counters for lottery, and it becomes possible to suppress the storage capacity of the main side RAM 84 necessary for performing the lottery.

A time-saving distribution table 127 for the first special drawing is provided as a time-saving distribution table that is referred to in the time-saving distribution determination process when a time-saving result is selected in the validity determination process for the first reservation information. There is. In addition, a time-saving distribution table 128 for the second special symbol is provided as a time-saving distribution table that is referred to in the time-saving distribution determination process when a time-saving result is selected in the validity determination process for the second pending information. It is being

FIG. 10(c) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the time-saving distribution table 127 for the first special symbol, and FIG. 10(d) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the time-saving distribution table 128 for the second special symbol. It is a diagram. As shown in FIGS. 10(c) and 10(d), in each time saving distribution table 127, 128, a first time saving result and a second time saving result are set as types of time saving results. FIG. 11(b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of each time saving opportunity.

As already explained, the first time-saving result is generated by being selected in the time-saving distribution determination process as a time-saving result in the propriety determination process. The first time-saving result does not trigger a transition to the opening/closing execution mode, nor does it trigger a transition to the win/fail lottery mode, and is a time-saving result that changes the support mode to the second high-frequency support mode. In this case, the second high-frequency support mode ends when 100 games have been played without a new opening/closing execution mode occurring. When 100 games have been played, the support mode becomes a low-frequency support mode.

As already explained, the second time-saving result is generated by being selected in the time-saving distribution determination process as a time-saving result in the propriety determination process. The second time-saving result does not trigger a transition to the opening/closing execution mode, nor does it trigger a transition to the win/fail lottery mode, and is a time-saving result that changes the support mode to the second high-frequency support mode. In this case, the second high-frequency support mode ends when 150 games have been played without a new opening/closing execution mode occurring. When 150 games have been played, the support mode becomes a low-frequency support mode. In other words, the second time-saving result has a greater number of execution times in which the second high-frequency support mode continues than the first time-saving result. Therefore, the second time saving result is more advantageous to the player than the first time saving result.

As shown in FIG. 10(c), the time saving distribution table 127 for the first special figure has the first time saving result and the second time saving result set as the types of time saving results to be distributed. In the time saving distribution table 127 for the first special figure, the type random number counter C2 of "0 to 19" corresponds to the first time saving result, and the type random number counter C2 of "20 to 29" corresponds to the second time saving result. Compatible. On the other hand, in the time saving distribution table 128 for the second special symbol, as shown in FIG. 10(d), the first time saving result and the second time saving result are set as the types of time saving results to be distributed. . In the time saving distribution table 128 for the second special figure, the type random number counter C2 of "0 to 9" corresponds to the first time saving result, and the type random number counter C2 of "10 to 29" corresponds to the second time saving result. Compatible.

In the time-saving distribution table 127 for the first special symbol, the selection probability of the relatively disadvantageous first time-saving result is higher than the selection probability of the relatively advantageous second time-saving result. In the time saving distribution table 128 for 2 special symbols, the selection probability of the relatively advantageous second time saving result is higher than the selection probability of the relatively disadvantageous first time saving result. Furthermore, the selection probability of the relatively advantageous second time-saving result is higher in the time-saving distribution table 128 for the second special symbol than in the time-saving distribution table 127 for the first special symbol. Therefore, the types of time-saving results that can be selected in the case where a time-saving result is obtained in the win/fail judgment process are those in which the second actuation It is more advantageous for the player if a win occurs in the mouth 34 and the win/fail determination process is performed.

Here, the time-saving result may be selected in the win/fail judgment process regardless of whether the win/fail lottery mode is the low probability mode or the high probability mode, but even if the time-saving result is selected in the high probability mode. The support mode is not set based on the time saving result. In addition, the time-saving result may be selected in the validity determination process regardless of whether the support mode is the low-frequency support mode, the first high-frequency support mode, or the second high-frequency support mode. Even if a time-saving result is selected in the frequent support mode or the second high-frequency support mode, the support mode is not set based on the time-saving result. In other words, setting of the support mode triggered by the time-saving result that is selected in the validity determination process occurs only in a situation where the mode is a low-probability mode and a low-frequency support mode. In addition, in the situation where the low probability mode is the low frequency support mode, the last of the high frequency support mode in the situation where the low probability mode is the first high frequency support mode or the second high frequency support mode. This also includes the situation after the process for ending the high-frequency support mode and transitioning to the low-frequency support mode in a game round is executed.

Transition to the second high-frequency support mode due to a time-saving result occurs only when the mode is low probability mode, so if a time-saving result occurs and a transition to the second high-frequency support mode occurs, the transition to the second high-frequency support mode occurs in the low probability mode. Therefore, the second high-frequency support mode is activated. In other words, the time saving result is a result of shifting the gaming state to the above time saving state without intervening the opening/closing execution mode. In addition, the support mode set after the opening/closing execution mode triggered by a jackpot result is the first high-frequency support mode, whereas the support mode set triggered by a time-saving result is the first. 2 high frequency support mode. In other words, the support mode triggered by a jackpot result is more advantageous than the support mode triggered by a time-saving result.

In this pachinko machine 10, in addition to the above-mentioned time saving results, there is a ceiling time saving as an event that causes the support mode to shift to the second high-frequency support mode without generating the opening/closing execution mode. The ceiling time reduction occurs when the ceiling number of games are completed without a jackpot result, as shown in FIG. 11(b). Note that the setting of the ceiling number occurs when a jackpot result occurs, and also occurs when the supply of operating power is started. This will be explained in detail later. The ceiling time reduction does not trigger a transition to the opening/closing execution mode, and furthermore, does not trigger a transition to the win/fail lottery mode, and is the result of setting the support mode to the second high-frequency support mode. In this case, the second high-frequency support mode ends when 100 games have been played without a new opening/closing execution mode occurring. When 100 games have been played, the support mode becomes a low-frequency support mode.

The number of times the second high-frequency support mode is continued due to the ceiling time reduction is the same as the number of times the second high-frequency support mode is continued due to the first time reduction result, and the second time reduction result is obtained. The number of times the second high-frequency support mode is continued is smaller than the number of times the second high-frequency support mode is continued. Therefore, it is more advantageous for the player if the time-saving result is selected in the validity determination process than if the ceiling time is shortened.

Exhaustion of the ceiling number of games does not occur in the high probability mode. Therefore, even if the ceiling count is newly set due to a 5R high probability result or a 10R high probability result, the remaining ceiling count will not be subtracted until the subsequent high probability mode ends. On the other hand, the ceiling number of games is exhausted in the low probability mode, regardless of which mode the support mode is. However, even if the maximum number of games has been completed in the first high-frequency support mode or the second high-frequency support mode, the support mode is not set based on the completion of the maximum number of games. In other words, the setting of the support mode triggered by the ceiling time reduction when the ceiling number of games has been completed occurs only in the low probability mode and the low frequency support mode. In addition, in the situation where the low probability mode is the low frequency support mode, the last of the high frequency support mode in the situation where the low probability mode is the first high frequency support mode or the second high frequency support mode. This also includes the situation after the process for ending the high-frequency support mode and transitioning to the low-frequency support mode in a game round is executed.

The transition to the second high-frequency support mode due to ceiling time reduction occurs only when the mode is low probability mode, so if the ceiling time reduction occurs and the transition to the second high-frequency support mode occurs, the transition to the second high-frequency support mode occurs in the low probability mode. Therefore, the second high-frequency support mode is activated. In other words, the ceiling time saving is the result of shifting the gaming state to the above time saving state without intervening the opening/closing execution mode. In addition, the support mode set after the opening/closing execution mode triggered by a jackpot result is the first high-frequency support mode, whereas the support mode set triggered by the ceiling time being shortened is the first support mode. 2 high frequency support mode. In other words, the support mode triggered by a jackpot result is more advantageous than the support mode triggered by a ceiling time reduction.

FIG. 12 is a time chart showing how the time saving state is set based on the time saving result or ceiling time saving. 12(a) shows a period in the opening/closing execution mode, FIG. 12(b) shows the state of the ceiling counter 131 provided in the main side RAM 84, and FIG. 12(c) shows a period in a high probability state. , FIG. 12(d) shows the timing at which the time-saving result is selected in the validity determination process, and FIG. 12(e) shows the period in the time-saving state.

First, a case will be described in which an event that results in a time saving result triggers a time saving state, and an event that triggers a ceiling time reduction and results in a time saving state occur discontinuously.

When the result of the validity determination process becomes a 5R highly accurate result or a 10R highly accurate result, the opening/closing execution mode is started at timing t1 as shown in FIG. 12(a). In this case, with the start of the opening/closing execution mode as a trigger, as shown in FIG. 12(b), the ceiling counter 131 provided in the main side RAM 84 is set to a fixed ceiling count of 500 times. The ceiling counter 131 is a counter used by the main MPU 82 to specify the remaining number of ceilings.

Thereafter, the opening/closing execution mode ends at timing t2 as shown in FIG. 12(a), resulting in a high probability state as shown in FIG. 12(c). The high probability state is a gaming state which is a high probability mode and a first high frequency support mode. The high probability state ends at timing t4 when 100 games have been played. In the opening/closing execution mode, the ceiling counter 131 is not decremented because the game round is not executed, and furthermore, in the high probability mode, even if the game round is executed, the ceiling counter 131 is not decremented. Therefore, at the timing t4 when the high probability state ends, the value of the ceiling counter 131 has not changed from the timing t1 when the fixed ceiling number was set in the ceiling counter 131. Furthermore, at timing t3, which is a timing in the middle of the high probability state, a time saving result is selected in the validity judgment process as shown in FIG. 12(d), but since it is a high probability mode, the time saving result is invalidated. be done.

As shown in FIG. 12(c) at timing t4, the high probability state ends and the gaming state becomes the normal gaming state. In the normal gaming state, regardless of whether a game round triggered by the first pending information is executed or a gaming round triggered by the second pending information is executed, as shown in FIG. 12(b) The value of the ceiling counter 131 is subtracted as follows.

Thereafter, at timing t5, the time saving result is selected in the validity determination process as shown in FIG. 12(d). Since the gaming state at the timing of t5 is the normal gaming state, the time saving result triggers a shift to the time saving state as shown in FIG. 12(e). In this case, as shown in FIG. 12(a), the opening/closing execution mode does not intervene, and the win/fail lottery mode is maintained at the low probability mode. The time saving state is a gaming state which is a low probability mode and a second high frequency support mode. In the time saving state, whether a game session triggered by the first pending information or a gaming session triggered by the second pending information is executed, as shown in FIG. 12(b), The value of the ceiling counter 131 is subtracted. Thereafter, the remaining number of continuations of the time saving state becomes 0 at timing t6 without a jackpot result occurring in the time saving state, and the time saving state ends as shown in FIG. 12(e). In this case, the gaming state becomes the normal gaming state.

Thereafter, at timing t7, the value of the ceiling counter 131 becomes "0" as shown in FIG. 12(b). In other words, the ceiling number of games has been played. Since the gaming state at the timing t7 is the normal gaming state, the time saving state is triggered by the ceiling time saving as shown in FIG. 12(e). In this case, as shown in FIG. 12(a), the opening/closing execution mode does not intervene, and the win/fail lottery mode is maintained at the low probability mode. The time saving state is a gaming state which is a low probability mode and a second high frequency support mode. Thereafter, the remaining number of continuations of the time saving state becomes 0 at timing t8 without a jackpot result occurring in the time saving state, and the time saving state ends as shown in FIG. 12(e). In this case, the gaming state becomes the normal gaming state.

The value of the ceiling counter 131 is not set either when the time saving state is transitioned to due to the ceiling time saving as a trigger, or when the time saving state ends. In addition, the transition to the time saving state triggered by the ceiling time reduction occurs when, in a situation where the value of the ceiling counter 131 is 1 or more, the value of the ceiling counter 131 is subtracted as a result of the game being played and the value of the ceiling counter 131 is subtracted. occurs when becomes "0". Therefore, the transition to the time saving state triggered by the ceiling time reduction occurs only once after the jackpot result occurs, and if the transition to the time saving state triggered by the ceiling time reduction occurs once, basically after that Unless a jackpot result occurs and the value of the ceiling counter 131 is set, a transition to the time saving state triggered by the ceiling time reduction does not occur.

Next, a case will be described in which an event that results in a time saving result results in a time saving state, and an event in which a ceiling time reduction results in a time saving state occurs continuously.

When the result of the validity determination process becomes a 5R highly accurate result or a 10R highly accurate result, the opening/closing execution mode is started at timing t9 as shown in FIG. 12(a). In this case, with the start of the opening/closing execution mode as a trigger, as shown in FIG. 12(b), the ceiling counter 131 is set to 500 times, which is the fixed ceiling frequency.

Thereafter, the opening/closing execution mode ends at timing t10 as shown in FIG. 12(a), resulting in a high probability state as shown in FIG. 12(c). The high probability state ends at timing t11 when 100 games have been played. In this case, in the opening/closing execution mode, the ceiling counter 131 is not subtracted because the game round is not executed, and furthermore, in the high probability mode, even if the game round is executed, the ceiling counter 131 is not subtracted. Therefore, at the timing t11 when the high probability state ends, the value of the ceiling counter 131 has not changed from the timing t9 when the fixed ceiling number was set in the ceiling counter 131.

As shown in FIG. 12(c) at timing t11, the high probability state ends and the gaming state becomes the normal gaming state. In the normal gaming state, regardless of whether a game round triggered by the first pending information is executed or a gaming round triggered by the second pending information is executed, as shown in FIG. 12(b) The value of the ceiling counter 131 is subtracted as follows.

Thereafter, at timing t12, the time saving result is selected in the validity determination process as shown in FIG. 12(d). Since the gaming state at the timing t12 is the normal gaming state, the time saving result triggers a transition to the time saving state as shown in FIG. 12(e). In this case, as shown in FIG. 12(a), the opening/closing execution mode does not intervene, and the win/fail lottery mode is maintained at the low probability mode. The time saving state is a gaming state which is a low probability mode and a second high frequency support mode. In the time saving state, whether a game session triggered by the first pending information or a gaming session triggered by the second pending information is executed, as shown in FIG. 12(b), The value of the ceiling counter 131 is subtracted. After that, at timing t13, which is the middle of the time saving state, the time saving result is selected in the validity judgment process as shown in FIG. 12(d), but since the time saving state is in effect, the time saving result is invalidated. .

Thereafter, the remaining number of continuations of the time saving state becomes 0 at timing t14 without a jackpot result occurring in the time saving state, and the value of the ceiling counter 131 becomes "0" as shown in FIG. 12(b). Become. In this case, the time-saving state is in effect at the timing when the last game in the time-saving state starts, but the remaining number of continuations of the time-saving state becomes 0 in the process that is executed when the game in question ends. By specifying this, the support mode is changed from the second high-frequency support mode to the low-frequency support mode, and the gaming state changes from the time-saving state to the normal gaming state. Further, when the game round ends, the value of the ceiling counter 131 is subtracted by 1 after the process is executed, and the value of the ceiling counter 131 becomes "0". That is, after the gaming state is set from the time saving state to the normal gaming state in the game round, the value of the ceiling counter 131 becomes "0". Therefore, the time saving state is set in response to the completion of the ceiling number of game times in the relevant game time. Therefore, the time saving state continues without ending at the timing t14. The time saving state is a gaming state which is a low probability mode and a second high frequency support mode. Thereafter, the remaining number of continuations of the time saving state becomes 0 at timing t15 without a jackpot result occurring in the time saving state, and the time saving state ends as shown in FIG. 12(e). In this case, the gaming state becomes the normal gaming state.

Next, the reach random number counter C3 in FIG. 7 will be explained. The reach random number counter C3 is configured to increment sequentially by 1 within the range of 0 to 238, for example, and return to "0" after reaching the maximum value. The reach display is executed regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3 in the game round in which the same combination of symbols is finally stopped and displayed. Moreover, in the game round corresponding to the time saving result, the reach display is not executed regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3. In addition, in the game round corresponding to a losing result, a reach display is executed when the reach random number counter C3 corresponds to the occurrence of a reach display with reference to the reach table stored in the main side ROM 83.

Next, the variation type counter CS will be explained. The variation type counter CS is configured to be incremented by 1 in sequence within the range of 0 to 198, for example, and return to "0" after reaching the maximum value. The fluctuation type counter CS is used by the main MPU 82 to determine the fluctuation display period in the special symbol display sections 37a, 37b and the fluctuation display period of the symbols in the symbol display device 41. The variation type counter CS is repeatedly updated and acquired when determining a variation pattern at the start of variation display on the special symbol display sections 37a, 37b and at the start of symbol variation by the symbol display device 41.

<About various processes executed by the main MPU 82>
Next, each process executed by the main MPU 82 to advance the game will be explained. The processing of the main MPU 82 can be roughly divided into main processing that is started upon power-on, and timer interrupt processing that is started periodically (in this embodiment, every 4 msec).

<Main processing>
First, the main processing will be explained with reference to the flowchart in FIG.

First, a power-on initial setting process is executed (step S101). In the power-on initial setting process, for example, the process waits without proceeding to the next process until a predetermined wait time (specifically, 1 second) has elapsed after the main process is started. During this predetermined wait period, the start of operation and initial setting of the symbol display device 41 are completed. Also, access to the main RAM 84 is permitted.

Thereafter, internal function register setting processing is executed (step S102). In the internal function register setting process, the interrupt cycle of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14), which is a process that is activated by periodically interrupting the main process, is set to a predetermined cycle (specifically, 4 milliseconds). Details of the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 14) will be explained later. Furthermore, in addition to setting the interrupt cycle, the internal function register setting process also executes processing for setting the numerical ranges of various counters, such as the numerical range of the hit random number counter C1.

Thereafter, the start-up processing flag provided in the main side RAM 84 is set to "1" (step S103). The start-up processing flag is used to monitor power outages, update various counters, and monitor fraud among the various processes set in the timer interrupt process (Figure 14) even if the timer interrupt process (Figure 14) is activated. This flag is used by the main MPU 82 to specify that the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14) should be terminated without executing the process for advancing the game.

The start-up process flag is set to "1" when the process at the start of the supply of operating power (steps S101 to S126) is started in the main process (FIG. 13); It is cleared to "0" after (steps S101 to S126) are completed and before the remaining processing (steps S127 to S130) is started. In the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 14), if the startup processing flag is set to "1", the processing at steps S207 to S220 is not executed, so that the processing at the start of the supply of operating power ( It is possible to prevent the process for advancing the game from being executed in a situation where the setting confirmation process (step S112) or the setting value update process (step S117), which will be described later, among steps S101 to S126) is being executed. becomes. On the other hand, as mentioned above, in the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 14), even if the start-up processing flag is set to "1", by executing the processing from step S201 to step S205, the operating power is supplied. Power outage monitoring is executed even in a situation where a setting confirmation process (step S112) or a setting value update process (step S117), which will be described later, is being executed among the start processes (steps S101 to S126), and The winning random number counter C1, type random number counter C2, reach random number counter C3, and random number initial value counter CINI are updated, and fraud detection is also performed.

In particular, by executing the power outage monitoring process (step S201) even in a situation where the start-up process flag is set to "1", the process at the start of supply of operating power (steps S101 to SB126) Even if a power outage occurs in a situation where a setting confirmation process (step S112) or a setting value update process (step S117), which will be described later, is being executed, the power outage process can be executed in response to the power outage. In the power outage processing, the power outage flag provided in the main side RAM 84 is set to "1", a checksum is calculated, and the calculated checksum is stored in the main side RAM 84, so that the supply of operating power is restarted. In this case, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of an abnormality in the main RAM 84 from being identified. As a result, if a power outage occurs during the setting confirmation process (step S112) or setting value update process (step S117), which will be described later, the next operating power This makes it possible to specify at the start of supply. Incidentally, in a situation where the setting confirmation process (step S112) or the setting value update process (step S117), which will be described later, is being executed, the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14) is not prohibited and can be interrupted at any timing. It is possible.

After setting the start-up process flag to "1" in step S103, it is determined whether or not a power outage flag provided in the main side RAM 84 is set to "1" (step S104). When the power outage process is executed in the power outage monitoring process (step S201) of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14), the power outage flag is set to "1". The power outage flag is a flag used by the main MPU 82 to specify whether or not power outage processing was appropriately performed during the previous power cutoff.

If the power outage flag is set to "1" (step S104: YES), it is determined whether the checksum is normal (step S105). Specifically, first, a checksum is calculated for the main RAM 84. The checksum calculation method is arbitrary, but it is the same calculation method as the checksum calculation method in the power outage process in the power outage monitoring process (step S201) of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14), which will be described later. ing. After that, the checksum calculated in the power outage process executed immediately before the supply of operating power to the main MPU 82 was stopped and stored in the main RAM 84 is read out, and the read checksum is used as the current main MPU 82. Compare with the checksum calculated during processing. Then, it is determined whether these checksums match.

If the checksums match (step S105: YES), it is determined whether the setting value corresponding to the information stored in the setting reference area of the main side RAM 84 is within a normal range (step S106). The setting reference area is a storage area in which information for specifying setting values to be used in the current pachinko machine 10 by the main MPU 82 is stored. If numerical information of "1" is stored in the setting reference area, the current setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is "setting 1". If numerical information of "2" is stored in the setting reference area, the current setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is "setting 2". If the numerical information of "3" is stored in the setting reference area, the current setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is "setting 3". If numerical information of "4" is stored in the setting reference area, the current setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is "setting 4". If numerical information of "5" is stored in the setting reference area, the current setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is "setting 5". If numerical information of "6" is stored in the setting reference area, the current setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is "setting 6". In step S106, it is determined whether the setting value information stored in the setting reference area is one of "1" to "6".

If a positive determination is made in all steps S104 to S106, it means that no information abnormality has occurred in the main RAM 84. In this case, it is determined whether the setting update flag provided in the main side RAM 84 is set to "1" (step S107). The setting update flag is a flag for specifying in the main MPU 82 that the setting value update process (step S117) described later is being executed, and when the setting update flag is set to "1", is a display on the notification display device 141 (see FIG. 6) mounted on the main control board 81 of the main control device 71 indicating that the setting value is being updated and a display indicating the setting value in the middle of updating. will be held. The notification display device 141 includes a plurality of segment displays. These multiple segment displays are arranged in parallel on the element mounting surface of the main control board 81, and the display surface of each segment display can be viewed from outside the board box without opening the board box of the main control device 71. It becomes.

The setting update flag is a flag that is set to "1" when the setting value update process (step S117) is started and is cleared to "0" when the setting value update process (step S117) is finished. , in a situation where the setting value update process (step S117) is not executed, the setting update flag is basically not set to "1". However, if the supply of operating power to the main MPU 82 is stopped while the setting value update process (step S117) is being executed, if the supply of operating power to the main MPU 82 is subsequently started; At this point, the setting update flag is set to "1". The state in which the setting update flag is set to "1" is maintained until the setting update flag is cleared to "0" in the setting value update process (step S117).

If a negative determination is made in step S107 because the setting update flag is not set to "1", it is determined whether or not the reset button 142 (see FIG. 6) is pressed (step S108). The reset button 142 is provided on the element mounting surface of the main control board 81, and the pressing operation part of the reset button 142 is not covered by the board box of the main control device 71. Therefore, it is possible to operate the reset button 142 without opening the board box. In step S108, it is determined whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is powered on while the reset button 142 is being pressed and supply of operating power to the main MPU 82 is started.

If the reset button 142 is not pressed (step S108: NO), it is determined whether the game stop flag provided in the main side RAM 84 is set to "1" (step S109). The game stop flag is a flag that is set to "1" when the power outage flag is not set to "1", when the checksums do not match, or when the set value is abnormal. By setting the game stop flag to "1", steps S201 to S205 are executed in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14), which will be described later, while steps S207 to S205 are executed by making an affirmative determination in step S206. The process of S220 is not executed. As a result, if the power outage flag is not set to "1" because power outage processing was not performed properly at the previous power outage, the memory state of the main RAM 84 has changed since the previous power outage. If the checksums do not match due to the fact that the processing will not be executed. If an affirmative determination is made in step S109, the processes of step S124 and step S125, which will be described later, are executed.

If a negative determination is made in step S109, it is determined whether the setting key insertion unit 143 (see FIG. 6) is turned on using a setting key (step S110). The setting key insertion part 143 is provided on the element mounting surface of the main control board 81, and the keyhole part for turning on the setting key insertion part 143 using the setting key is located in the board box of the main control unit 71. Not covered by. Therefore, it is possible to perform an ON operation using the setting key on the setting key insertion portion 143 without opening the board box. When the setting key insertion section 143 is turned on using a setting key (step S110: YES), a setting confirmation process is executed (step S112). Furthermore, even if the setting key insertion section 143 is not turned on using a setting key (step S110: NO), the setting confirmation flag provided in the main side RAM 84 is set to "1". If so (step S111: YES), a setting confirmation process is executed (step S112).

The setting confirmation flag is a flag used by the main MPU 82 to specify that the setting confirmation process (step S112) is being executed, and if the setting confirmation flag is set to "1", an alert is sent. On the display device 141, a display indicating that the setting values are being confirmed and a display indicating the currently set setting values are performed. The setting confirmation flag is a flag that is set to "1" when the setting confirmation process (step S112) is started and is cleared to "0" when the setting confirmation process (step S112) is ended. , in a situation where the setting confirmation process (step S112) is not executed, the setting confirmation flag is basically not set to "1". However, if the supply of operating power to the main MPU 82 is stopped while the setting confirmation process (step S112) is being executed, if the supply of operating power to the main MPU 82 is subsequently started; At this point, the setting confirmation flag is set to "1". When the setting confirmation flag is set to "1", the RAM clearing process (step S119) described later is executed, the setting value updating process (step S117) described later is executed, or the setting confirmation flag is set to "1". This is maintained until the setting confirmation flag is cleared to "0" in the process (step S112).

Not only when the reset button 142 is not pressed as described above and the setting key insertion section 143 is turned on (that is, when the "setting confirmation operation" is performed), but also when the reset button 142 is pressed. The setting confirmation process (step S112) is executed even when the setting confirmation flag is set to "1" in a situation where no pressing operation is performed, so that the setting confirmation process (step S112) is executed. If the power outage process is executed in such a situation, the setting confirmation process (step S112) is executed even if the "setting confirmation operation" is not performed when the supply of operating power is resumed. This makes it possible to continue checking the current setting values of the pachinko machine 10. On the other hand, even if the power outage process is executed while the setting confirmation process (step S112) is being executed, if the reset button 142 is pressed when the supply of operating power is resumed, The process corresponding to the operation performed when the supply of operating power is restarted among the RAM clear process (step S119) and the setting value update process (step S117) is executed without executing the setting confirmation process (step S112). Ru. This makes it possible to prioritize execution of the RAM clearing process (step S119) or the setting value update process (step S117) over the setting confirmation process (step S112).

Here, the setting confirmation process executed in step S112 will be described.

In the setting confirmation process, interrupt permission is first set. As a result, the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14) is interrupted and activated at a predetermined period. In this pachinko machine 10, interrupts of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14) are basically prohibited in the process at the start of supply of operating power (step S101 to step S126), and the interrupt of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14) is basically prohibited, and Execution of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14) is permitted in a situation where the value update process (step S117) is being executed. However, in a situation where the setting confirmation process (step S112) or the setting value update process (step S117) is being executed, the startup process flag is set to "1", so the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14) Even if the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 14) is started, the processing for power outage monitoring, updating of various counters, and fraud monitoring will be executed, while the processing for advancing the game will not be executed. The timer interrupt processing (FIG. 14) is ended without any interruption. Thereafter, on the condition that the setting checking flag in the main side RAM 84 is not set to 1, the setting checking flag is set to 1. By setting the setting confirmation flag to "1," a display indicating that the setting values of the pachinko machine 10 are being confirmed and a display indicating the current setting values of the pachinko machine 10 are displayed on the notification display device. It will be held at 141. Thereafter, a confirmation start command is sent to the sound-light side MPU 93. As a result, an image indicating that the setting confirmation process (step S112) is being executed and an image for making it possible to recognize the operation details for ending the setting confirmation process (step S112) are displayed on the symbol display device 41. The display side MPU 103 performs display control so that the image is displayed as follows.

Thereafter, the setting key insertion unit 143 uses the setting key to determine whether the ON state has been switched to the OFF state. When the setting key insertion unit 143 identifies that the setting key insertion unit 143 has switched from the ON state to the OFF state, the setting confirmation flag in the main side RAM 84 is cleared to “0”. As a result, on the notification display device 141, the state where the display indicating that the current setting values of the pachinko machine 10 are being confirmed and the display indicating the current setting values of the pachinko machine 10 are released. Ru. Then, set to disable interrupts. As a result, when ending the setting confirmation process (step S112) and returning to the process at the time of starting the supply of operating power (steps S101 to S126) in the main process (FIG. 13), the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14) is executed. interrupts are prohibited. Thereafter, a return command at the time of confirmation is transmitted to the sound-light side MPU 93. As a result, an image indicating that the setting confirmation process (step S112) is being executed in the symbol display device 41 and an image for making it possible to recognize the operation details for ending the setting confirmation process (step S112) are displayed. Display ends.

Returning to the explanation of the main process (FIG. 13), when the setting key insertion unit 143 is not turned on using a setting key and the setting confirmation flag is not set to "1" (step S110 and Step S111: NO), it is determined whether the gaming machine main body 12 is open (Step S113). A main body opening detection sensor 144 (see FIG. 6) is provided on the resin base 21 of the inner frame 13. The main body open detection sensor 144 is electrically connected to the main MPU 82 and sends a LOW level open detection signal to the main MPU 82 when the gaming machine main body 12 is in a closed state with respect to the outer frame 11. However, when the gaming machine main body 12 is in an open state with respect to the outer frame 11, an open detection signal of HI level is transmitted to the main side MPU 82. Note that the relationship between these LOW and HI may be reversed. In step S113, it is determined whether a HI level open detection signal is received from the main body open detection sensor 144.

When the opening detection signal of HI level is received from the main body opening detection sensor 144 (step S113: YES), that is, when the gaming machine main body 12 is in an open state with respect to the outer frame 11, the ceiling of the main side RAM 84 Information of 500 times, which is the fixed ceiling number, is set in the counter 131 (step S114). The process of step S113 is executed when the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is started and the reset button 142 is pressed and the setting key insertion section 143 is turned on by the setting key. Furthermore, both the setting updating flag and the setting checking flag of the main side RAM 84 are not set to "1". In this case, the settings confirmation process (step S112), the setting value update process (step S117), and the RAM clear process (step S119) are not executed during the process at the start of the supply of operating power (steps S101 to S126). It's a situation. In addition, in the game hall, the main power supply for supplying operating power to each pachinko machine 10 is turned off, and the power switch provided on the power supply/launch control device 78 of each pachinko machine 10 is turned on in advance. When it is time to start business for the day, the main power is turned on so that all pachinko machines 10 are activated at the same time.

In such circumstances, when an affirmative determination is made in step S113, the gaming machine This is a case where the supply of operating power is started in a situation where the main body 12 is intentionally left in an open state. In such a situation, information of 500 times, which is the fixed ceiling number, is set in the ceiling counter 131. This makes it possible to generate a situation in which the fixed ceiling count of 500 times is set on the ceiling counter 131 at the start of the supply of operating power, which is different from the situation at the start of normal business operations, and also to confirm the setting. It is possible to generate this without having to perform the processing (step S112), the setting value update processing (step S117), and the RAM clearing processing (step S119).

When a negative determination is made in step S113 or when the process in step S114 is executed, a normal return command is transmitted to the sound-light side MPU 93 (step S115). By receiving the normal return command, the sound-light side MPU 93 specifies that the processing at the time of starting the supply of operating power (steps S101 to S126) has been completed in the main side MPU 82, and also specifies that the processing at the time of starting the supply of operating power this time has been completed. In the process (steps S101 to S126), it is determined that none of the RAM clear process (step S119), the setting confirmation process (step S112), and the setting value update process (step S117) is being executed.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step S108 that the reset button 142 is pressed, and it is determined that the setting key insertion section 143 is turned on using a setting key (step S116: YES) , or if it is determined in step S107 that the setting update flag is set to "1", a setting value update process is executed (step S117). Not only when the reset button 142 is pressed as described above and the setting key insertion section 143 is turned on (that is, when a "setting change operation" is performed), but also when the reset button 142 is pressed. The setting value is updated by executing the setting value update process (step S117) even when the setting update flag is set to "1" regardless of whether there is a pressing operation or an ON operation of the setting key insertion part 143. If the power outage process is executed in a situation where the process (step S117) is being executed, the operation contents when starting the supply of operating power after that are "no operation", "RAM clear operation", and "setting change". The setting value update process (step S117) is executed regardless of whether it is a ``operation'' or a ``setting confirmation operation.'' This makes it possible to give priority to the execution of the setting value update process (step S117).

Here, the setting value update process executed in step S117 will be explained.

In the setting value update process, interrupt permission is first set. As a result, the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14) is interrupted and activated at a predetermined period. In this pachinko machine 10, interrupts of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14) are basically prohibited in the process at the start of supply of operating power (step S101 to step S126), and the interrupt of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14) is basically prohibited, and Execution of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14) is permitted in a situation where the value update process (step S117) is being executed. However, in a situation where the setting confirmation process (step S112) or the setting value update process (step S117) is being executed, the startup process flag is set to "1", so the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14) Even if the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 14) is started, the processing for power outage monitoring, updating of various counters, and fraud monitoring will be executed, while the processing for advancing the game will not be executed. The timer interrupt processing (FIG. 14) is ended without any interruption. Thereafter, on the condition that the setting updating flag in the main side RAM 84 is not set to "1", the setting updating flag is set to "1". By setting the setting update flag to "1", the display indicating that the setting values of the pachinko machine 10 are being updated and the display of the setting values selected as the update target of the pachinko machine 10 are displayed. This is done on the notification display device 141.

Thereafter, the game stop flag in the main side RAM 84 is cleared to "0". If the power outage flag is not set to "1" because the power outage processing was not performed appropriately at the time of the previous power shutoff (step S104: NO), the game stop flag is set to 1 on the main side from the previous power down. If the checksums do not match due to a change in the storage state of the RAM 84 (step S105: NO), or if the setting value corresponding to the information stored in the setting reference area is not within the normal range. (Step S106: NO), this flag is set to "1" in step S121 of the main process (FIG. 13). By setting "1" to the game stop flag, steps S201 to S205 are executed in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14), while steps S207 to S220 are executed by making an affirmative determination in step S206. No processing is performed. As a result, when an information abnormality in the main RAM 84 as described above occurs, processes for monitoring power outages, updating various counters, and monitoring fraud are executed, while processes for advancing the game are executed. It will not be done. By clearing the game stop flag to "0" in the setting value update process, the state in which the occurrence of information abnormality in the main side RAM 84 is specified is canceled when the setting value update process (step S117) is executed. becomes possible.

Thereafter, "1" is set in the setting update area provided in the main side RAM 84. The setting update area is a storage area in which information about setting values that are being updated in the setting value update process (step S117) is stored. If numerical information of "1" is stored in the setting update area, the setting value to be updated is "setting 1". If numerical information of "2" is stored in the setting update area, the setting value to be updated becomes "setting 2". If the numerical information of "3" is stored in the setting update area, the setting value to be updated becomes "setting 3". If numerical information of "4" is stored in the setting update area, the setting value to be updated is "setting 4". If the numerical information of "5" is stored in the setting update area, the setting value to be updated is "setting 5". If numerical information of "6" is stored in the setting update area, the setting value to be updated is "setting 6". After that, an update start command is sent to the sound-light side MPU 93. As a result, an image indicating that the setting value update process (step S117) is being executed, an image for making it possible to recognize the operation details for changing the setting value, and an end to the setting value update process (step S117) Display-side MPU 103 is controlled to display an image on symbol display device 41 to enable recognition of the operation details.

In the setting value update process, the value of the setting update area is incremented by 1 on the condition that the reset button 142 is pressed. Thereby, each time the reset button 142 is pressed once, the setting value is updated to one level higher. Further, if the value of the setting update area after adding 1 is 7 or more, "1" is set in the setting update area. As a result, when the reset button 142 is pressed once in the situation of "Setting 6", the state returns to "Setting 1".

In the setting value update process, the setting key insertion unit 143 uses the setting key to determine whether the ON state has been switched to the OFF state. When the setting key insertion unit 143 identifies that the ON state has been switched to the OFF state, the setting value information stored in the setting update area is overwritten in the setting reference area. As a result, the setting value information updated in the current setting value update process (step S117) is set in the setting reference area, and the setting value corresponding to the set information is changed to the current pachinko machine. This is the setting value for machine 10. Then, set to disable interrupts. As a result, when ending the setting value update process (step S117) and returning to the process at the time of starting the supply of operating power (steps S101 to S126) in the main process (FIG. 13), the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14) interrupts are prohibited.

After that, RAM clear processing is executed. In the RAM clearing process, an area where setting value information indicating the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is set in the main side RAM 84 (that is, a setting reference area), information for calculating the winning ratio in the ceiling counter 131 and the main side RAM 84 The main RAM 84 is cleared to "0" except for the area where the . As a result, the area indicating whether the win/fail lottery mode is the high probability mode is cleared to "0", so the win/fail lottery is performed regardless of the win/fail lottery mode immediately before the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped. The mode is a low probability mode. In addition, the game cycle is not being executed, the opening/closing execution mode is not being executed, and the general figure display section 38a is not being displayed in a variable manner, and the general electric accessory 34a is in a closed state. situation. Moreover, since the special figure holding area 84a and the general figure holding area 84c are also cleared to "0", the first holding information, the second holding information, and the holding information on the general drawing side are erased. Additionally, the setting update flag, setting confirmation flag, and setting update area are cleared to "0". Further, in the RAM clearing process, initial settings are executed after various registers of the main MPU 82 are also cleared to "0". In this initial setting, processing similar to the internal function register setting processing in step S102 is executed.

Here, even if the setting value update process (step S117) is executed, the initialization of the ceiling counter 131 in the main side RAM 84 is not executed, and the new setting of the ceiling frequency including the fixed ceiling frequency information is not performed. will not be performed. Thereby, even if the setting value update process (step S117) is executed, it is possible to maintain the remaining ceiling number of times.

Thereafter, a return command at the time of update is sent to the sound-light side MPU 93. As a result, an image showing that the setting value update process (step S117) is being executed in the symbol display device 41, an image for making it possible to recognize the operation details for changing the setting value, and an image showing that the setting value update process (step S117) is being executed in the symbol display device 41, The display of the image for making it possible to recognize the details of the operation for ending step S117) is ended.

Returning to the explanation of the main process (FIG. 13), if it is determined in step S108 that the reset button 142 is pressed, and the setting key insertion section 143 is not turned on using the setting key. If it is determined (step S116: NO), it is determined whether the game stop flag in the main side RAM 84 is set to "1" (step S118). The game stop flag is a flag that is set to "1" when the power outage flag is not set to "1", when the checksums do not match, or when the set value is abnormal. By setting "1" to the game stop flag, steps S201 to S205 are executed in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14), while steps S207 to S220 are executed by making an affirmative determination in step S206. No processing is performed. As a result, if the power outage flag is not set to "1" because power outage processing was not performed properly at the previous power outage, the memory state of the main RAM 84 has changed since the previous power outage. If the checksums do not match due to the fact that the processing will not be executed.

If the game stop flag is not set to "1" (step S118: NO), RAM clear processing is executed (step S119). In the RAM clearing process, an area where setting value information indicating the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is set in the main side RAM 84 (that is, a setting reference area), information for calculating the winning ratio in the ceiling counter 131 and the main side RAM 84 The main side RAM 84 is cleared to "0" except for the area where the . is stored, and initial settings are executed. As a result, the area indicating whether the win/fail lottery mode is the high probability mode is cleared to "0", so the win/fail lottery is performed regardless of the win/fail lottery mode immediately before the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped. The mode is a low probability mode. In addition, the game cycle is not being executed, the opening/closing execution mode is not being executed, and the general figure display section 38a is not being displayed in a variable manner, and the general electric accessory 34a is in a closed state. situation. Moreover, since the special figure holding area 84a and the general figure holding area 84c are also cleared to "0", the first holding information, the second holding information, and the holding information on the general drawing side are erased. Also, the settings update flag and settings confirmation flag are cleared to "0". Further, in the RAM clearing process, initial settings are executed after various registers of the main MPU 82 are also cleared to "0". In this initial setting, processing similar to the internal function register setting processing in step SB102 is executed.

Here, even if the RAM clearing process (step S119) is executed, the initialization of the ceiling counter 131 of the main side RAM 84 is not executed, and furthermore, the new setting of the ceiling number including the information of the fixed ceiling number is not executed. Not done. This makes it possible to maintain the remaining ceiling number of times even if the RAM clearing process (step S119) is executed.

Thereafter, a return command upon clearing is transmitted to the sound-light side MPU 93 (step S120). By receiving the return command at the time of clearing, the sound-light side MPU 93 specifies that the processing for starting the supply of operating power (steps S101 to S126) has ended in the main MPU 82, and starts supplying the current operating power. It is specified that the RAM clearing process (step S119) was executed in the process at the time (steps S101 to S126).

In the main process (FIG. 13), if a negative determination is made in any of steps S104 to S106, that is, if the power outage flag is not set to "1", if the checksums do not match, or if the set value is abnormal If so, the game stop flag in the main side RAM 84 is set to "1" (step S121). As already explained, when the game stop flag is set to "1", steps S201 to S205 are executed in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14), and when an affirmative determination is made in step S206, step S207 is executed. ~Do not execute the process of step S220. As a result, if the power outage flag is not set to "1" because power outage processing was not performed properly at the previous power outage, the memory state of the main RAM 84 has changed since the previous power outage. If the checksums do not match due to the fact that the processing will not be executed.

Thereafter, information of 500 fixed ceiling times is set in the ceiling counter 131 of the main side RAM 84 (step S122). As already explained, the setting value update process (step S117) is executed, but even if it is executed, the initialization of the ceiling counter 131 in the main side RAM 84 is not executed, and the ceiling counter 131 including the information on the number of fixed ceilings is No new settings are made for the number of times. Therefore, even if the setting value update process (step S117) is executed in order to cancel the game stop state due to the information abnormality when an information abnormality occurs in the main side RAM 84, the information in the ceiling counter 131 is maintained as is. . On the other hand, if it is specified that an information error has occurred in the main side RAM 84 and the game stop flag in the main side RAM 84 is set to "1", the ceiling counter 131 is set to 500 times, which is the fixed ceiling number. information is set. As a result, even if the information on the ceiling counter 131 is rewritten when an information error occurs in the main RAM 84, it is possible to reset the information on the ceiling counter 131 to the fixed ceiling number of 500 times. becomes.

Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the reset button 142 is pressed (step S123). If the reset button 142 is not pressed (step S123: NO), an abnormality command indicating that an abnormality has occurred regarding the power outage flag, checksum, or set value at the time of starting supply of operating power is transmitted to the sound-light side MPU 93. (Step S124). Upon receiving the abnormality command, the sound/light side MPU 93 causes the display light emitting section 64 to emit light in a manner corresponding to the information abnormality at the time of starting supply of operating power, and also sends a message from the speaker section 65 saying "Please change the settings." Outputs the sound. Further, a character image "Please change the settings" is displayed on the symbol display device 41. These notifications are maintained until the supply of operating power to the Pachinko machine 10 is stopped, and are terminated when the supply of operating power to the Pachinko machine 10 is stopped. However, even if the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is once stopped, the above notification will not be sent when the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is resumed until the setting value update process (step S117) is executed. It will start again.

Thereafter, external output processing in the event of an abnormality is executed (step S125). In the external output process at the time of an abnormality, a process for externally outputting an abnormal signal to the management computer of the gaming hall is executed. In this case, the abnormality signal is output for a predetermined period (for example, 100 milliseconds). However, this is not limited to this, and in a situation where the game stop flag is set to "1", the abnormal signal continues to be output, and when the game stop flag is cleared to "0", the abnormal signal is output. A configuration may also be adopted in which signal output is stopped.

If the reset button 142 is pressed (step S123: YES), it is determined whether the setting key insertion section 143 is turned on using a setting key (step S116). When the reset button 142 is pressed and the setting key insertion section 143 is turned on using a setting key (step S116 and step S123: YES), a setting value update process is executed (step S117). The contents of the setting value update process have already been described. In other words, if operating power is supplied to the main MPU 82 while a "setting change operation" is being performed, an abnormality has occurred in the main RAM 84, so a negative result is determined in any of steps S104 to S106. Even if a determination is made, the setting value update process (step S117) is executed. This makes it possible to prioritize changes to set values. Further, in the setting value update process (step S117), the game stop flag is cleared to "0" as already explained. As a result, when the setting value update process (step S117) is executed, it is possible to eliminate the abnormal state in the main RAM 84 after the setting value update is completed.

On the other hand, if the reset button 142 is pressed but the setting key insertion section 143 is not turned on (step S123: YES, step S116: NO), the game stop flag in the main side RAM 84 is set to "1". It is determined whether or not (step S118). In the process of step S118 after the game stop flag is set to "1" in step S121, since the game stop flag is naturally set to "1", an affirmative determination is made in step S118. In this case, in step S124, an abnormality command is transmitted to the sound-light side MPU 93, and in step S125, an abnormality signal is output to the outside.

In other words, if an abnormality regarding the power failure flag, checksum, and setting value occurs and a negative determination is made in any of steps S104 to S106, the operation to the main MPU 82 is performed in a situation where a "RAM clear operation" is performed. Even if power supply is started, the RAM clearing process (step S119) is not executed. Also, if the supply of operating power to the main MPU 82 is started in a situation where the game stop flag is set to "1" and a "RAM clear operation" is being performed, the RAM clear process ( Step S119) is not executed. This prevents the game stop flag from being set to "1" even if the supply of operating power to the main MPU 82 is started while the "RAM clear operation" is being performed. It becomes possible. On the other hand, if a "setting change operation" is being performed, the setting value update process (step S117) is executed regardless of whether the game stop flag is set to "1" and the setting value is changed. The game stop flag is cleared to "0" in the value update process (step S117). As a result, in order to eliminate the state in which the game stop flag is set to "1", it becomes necessary to execute the setting value update process (step S117). Therefore, when an information abnormality occurs in the main RAM 84, it is possible to not only initialize a part of the area of the main RAM 84, but also to reset the setting values.

If the supply of operating power to the main MPU 82 is started in a situation where the game stop flag is set to "1", if the "setting change operation" is not performed, that is, if "no operation" is performed. Alternatively, if a "RAM clear operation" or "setting confirmation operation" is performed, an affirmative determination is made in step S109 or step S118, and an abnormality command is transmitted in step S124, and an external Execute output processing. As a result, when the game stop flag is set to "1", regardless of the processing results of steps S104 to S106 in the subsequent main processing, unless the setting value update processing (step S117) is executed, Every time the supply of operating power to the MPU 82 is started, abnormality notification in the pachinko machine 10 and external output of the abnormality to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 are performed. Therefore, it becomes possible to make the administrator of the game hall aware that the set value should be changed.

When the process of step S112 is executed, when the process of step S115 is executed, when the process of step S117 is executed, when the process of step S120 is executed, or when the process of step S125 is executed, the main side RAM 84 is The raising processing flag is cleared to "0" (step S126). When the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 14) is started by clearing the start-up processing flag to "0", a negative determination is made in step S206, so that not only the processing of steps S201 to S205 but also the processing of step S207 is performed. ~The process of step S220 is executed, and the state in which the process for advancing the game is not executed is canceled. Incidentally, in step S126, the power failure flag in the main side RAM 84 is also cleared to "0".

Thereafter, the process proceeds to the remaining processing of steps S127 to S130. That is, although the main MPU 82 is configured to periodically execute timer interrupt processing (FIG. 14), there is a remaining time between one timer interrupt processing and the next timer interrupt processing. Although this remaining time will vary depending on the processing completion time of the timer interrupt processing, the remaining processing of steps S127 to S130 is repeatedly executed using such irregular time. In this respect, it can be said that the remaining processing of steps S127 to S130 is non-regular processing that is executed non-regularly.

In the remaining processing, first, in step S127, interrupt prohibition is set to prohibit the occurrence of timer interrupt processing (FIG. 14). In the subsequent step S128, a random number initial value update process is executed to update the random number initial value counter CINI, and in step S129, a variation counter update process is executed to update the variation type counter CS. In these update processes, the current numerical information is read from the corresponding counter in the main side RAM 84, the read numerical information is incremented by 1, and then the process of overwriting the counter from which it was read is executed. In this case, each counter value is cleared to "0" when it exceeds the maximum value. Thereafter, in step S130, interrupt permission is set to switch from a state where generation of timer interrupt processing (FIG. 14) is prohibited to a state where generation is permitted. When the process of step S130 is executed, the process returns to step S127 and the processes of steps S127 to S130 are repeated.

<Timer interrupt processing>
Next, timer interrupt processing will be explained with reference to the flowchart in FIG. The timer interrupt process is activated repeatedly at a cycle of 4 msec.

First, a power outage monitoring process is executed (step S201). In the power outage monitoring process, it is monitored whether or not a power outage signal corresponding to the occurrence of a power outage is received from the power outage monitoring board 85, and if the occurrence of a power outage is identified, the processing at the time of power outage is executed and then an infinite loop is created. . In the power outage process, the power outage flag in the main RAM 84 is set to "1", a checksum is calculated, and the calculated checksum is saved.

Thereafter, random number update processing for lottery is executed (step S202). In the lottery random number update process, the winning random number counter C1, the type random number counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the general random number counter C4 are updated. Specifically, after sequentially reading the current numerical information from the winning random number counter C1, type random number counter C2, reach random number counter C3, and general random number counter C4, and adding 1 to each of the read numerical information, Execute processing to overwrite the reading source counter. In this case, each counter value is cleared to "0" when it exceeds the maximum value. After that, in step S203, a random number initial value update process is executed as in step S128 of the main process (FIG. 13), and in step S204, a variation counter update process is executed as in step S129 of the main process (FIG. 13). do.

Thereafter, fraud detection processing is executed to monitor whether or not a predetermined event set as a monitoring target for fraud has occurred (step S205). In the fraud detection process, the occurrence of a plurality of types of events is monitored, and by confirming that a predetermined event has occurred, the game stop flag provided in the main side RAM 84 is set to "1".

Thereafter, it is determined whether "1" is set in either the game stop flag or the starting process flag in the main side RAM 84 (step S206). If either the game stop flag or the start-up processing flag is set to "1" (step S206: YES), the timer interrupt processing is ended without executing the processing of steps S207 to S220. As a result, in a situation where the game stop flag or start-up process flag is set to "1", the timer interrupt process (Figure 14) executes power outage monitoring, random number updating, and fraud monitoring, while the step It becomes possible to prevent the processing for advancing the game in S207 to S220 from being executed.

If "1" is not set in both the game stop flag and the starting process flag (step S206: NO), the process for advancing the game in steps S207 to S220 is executed. Specifically, first, port output processing is executed (step S207). In the port output processing, when the output information has been set in the previous timer interrupt processing, processing is executed to perform output corresponding to the output information to the various drive units 32b and 34b. For example, if information is set to switch the special electric winning device 32 to the open state, output of a drive signal to the special electric drive unit 32b is started, and if information is set to switch the special electric prize winning device 32 to the closed state. stops the output of the drive signal. In addition, if information is set to switch the general electric accessory 34a of the second operating port 34 to the open state, output of a drive signal to the general electric drive unit 34b should be started, and the general electric accessory 34a of the second operating port 34 should be switched to the closed state. If the information is set, the output of the drive signal is stopped.

After that, reading processing is executed (step S208). In the reading process, signals other than the power outage signal and winning signal are read, and the read information is stored for use in future processing. Thereafter, ball entry detection processing is executed (step S209). In the ball entry detection process, the signals received from each winning detection sensor 86a to 86e are read, and the signals are sent to the general winning opening 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating opening 33, the second operating opening 34, and the through gate 35. Executes processing to determine whether or not a ball has entered the ball.

Thereafter, a timer update process is executed to collectively update numerical information of multiple types of timer counters provided in the main side RAM 84 (step S210). In this case, the configuration is such that the timer counters that are updated by subtracting the stored numerical information are handled collectively, but both the subtraction-type timer counter update and the addition-type timer counter update are performed collectively. It may also be a configuration.

Thereafter, a firing control process for controlling the firing of game balls is executed (step S211). In a situation where the firing operation is continued with respect to the firing operation device 28, as already explained, one game ball is fired every 0.6 seconds so as to have a predetermined firing cycle.

After that, as an input state monitoring process, based on the information read in the reading process of step S208, disconnection of each winning detection sensor 86a to 86e and opening of the gaming machine main body 12 and front door frame 14 are confirmed (step S212).

After that, a special figure special electric power control process is executed to control the execution of the game round and the opening/closing execution mode (step S213), and at the same time, the display control of the ordinary figure display section 38a and the execution control of the ordinary electric power open state are performed. A general-purpose electric power control process is executed for this purpose (step S214). The special figure/special electric line control process and the regular figure/general electric line control process will be explained in detail later.

In the following step S215, based on the processing results of the immediately preceding step S213 and step S214, output information is set to reflect the increase or decrease in the number of pieces of the first reservation information on the first special symbol reservation display section 37c, and the setting of output information for reflecting the increase or decrease in the number of pieces of the first reservation information, Output information is set to reflect the increase or decrease in the number of special symbols on the second special symbol reservation display section 37d, and output information is set to reflect the increase or decrease in the number of reservations on the regular symbol side on the regular symbol reservation display section 38b. In addition, in step S215, based on the processing results of the immediately preceding step S213 and step S214, output information is set for updating the display contents of the first special figure display section 37a and the second special figure display section 37b. , and sets output information for updating the display contents of the ordinary figure display section 38a.

Thereafter, the content of the command and signal received from the payout control device 77 is confirmed, and a payout state receiving process is executed to perform processing corresponding to the confirmation result (step S216). Further, a payout output process for setting the prize ball command as an output target is executed (step S217). Furthermore, an external information setting process is executed to control the start and end of output of an external signal according to the processing results of various processes executed in the current timer interrupt process (step S218).

Thereafter, a setting monitoring process is executed (step S219). In the setting monitoring process, it is determined whether the setting value information stored in the setting reference area of the main side RAM 84 is one of "1" to "6", and the setting value is set to be used. It is determined whether the set value is one of "Setting 1" to "Setting 6". If the setting value information stored in the setting reference area is "0" or 7 or more, it means that the setting value set to be used is abnormal, so the game stop flag of the main side RAM 84 is set. Set "1" to "1". As a result, the game cannot proceed until the setting values to be used are newly set in the setting value update process (step S117). After that, management processing is executed (step S220). Management processing includes processing for storing gaming history for calculating winning ratios, processing for calculating winning ratios using the stored gaming history, and displaying the calculated winning ratios for notification purposes. Processing for displaying on the device 141 is executed.

<General purpose electric power control process>
Next, the regular electric power control process executed in step S214 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 15.

If a prize has been won in the through gate 35 (step S301: YES), the number of reservation information on the general drawing side stored in the first area 114a to the fourth area 114d of the general drawing holding area 84c is the upper limit number. On the condition that there are fewer than four pieces (step S302: NO), storage processing in the general drawing reservation area 84c is executed (step S303). In this storage process, the numerical information of the random number counter C4 is used as the pending information on the standard computer side, and the areas in the first area 114a to the fourth area 114d of the standard computer reservation area 84c where the pending information on the standard computer side is not stored are stored. It is stored in the area with the earliest digestion order. In addition, when the reservation information on the general map side is acquired, data is used to update the display contents of the general map reservation display section 38b in accordance with the current increase in the number of pending information on the general map side. Make settings.

If a negative determination is made in step S301, if an affirmative determination is made in step S302, or if the process of step S303 is executed, the general address table stored in the main side ROM 83 is read out (step S304). The start address of a program for executing a process corresponding to the numerical information of the standard, standard, and general electricity counter is set in the standard, standard, and general electricity address table. The regular/universal electricity counter is a counter for specifying the processing content to be executed in the ordinary/universal electricity control process by the main side MPU 82.

The general electricity counter can take values from "0" to "3", and each value from "0" to "3" corresponds to each process (steps S307 to S310). Specifically, when the value of the general figure general electricity counter is "0," the ordinary figure fluctuation start process (step S307), which is a process for starting the fluctuation display time in the general figure display section 38a, is executed. Therefore, when the value of the general-purpose figure and general electricity counter is "1," the ordinary figure fluctuation process (step S308), which is a process for advancing the fluctuation display cycle in the ordinary figure display section 38a, is executed, and the ordinary figure is changed. When the value of the figure and general electricity counter is "2," the ordinary figure determination process (step S309), which is a process for ending the fluctuation display times in the figure display section 38a, is executed, and When the value of the counter is "3", the general electric power control process (step S310), which is a process for controlling the general electric power open state of the general electric accessory 34a at the second operating port 34, is to be executed.

In the general-purpose electricity control process, after reading the general-purpose electricity address table (step S304), the start address corresponding to the information of the general-purpose electricity counter is acquired from the general-purpose electricity address table (step S305). , jumps to the process indicated by the acquired start address (step S306). Each process from step S307 to step S310 will be individually explained below.

<General figure fluctuation start process>
First, the normal pattern fluctuation start process in step S307 will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 16.

In the ordinary figure fluctuation start process, data setting processing is executed (step S402) on the condition that the reservation information on the ordinary figure side is stored in the ordinary figure holding area 84c (step S401: YES). In the data setting process, the data stored in the first area 114a of the ordinary figure holding area 84c is moved to the execution area 115 for ordinary figures. Thereafter, a process is executed to shift the data stored in the storage area of the common drawing reservation area 84c. This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to fourth areas 114a to 114d to the lower area side, specifically, from the second area 114b to the first area 114a, the third area The data in each area is shifted in the following order: area 114c→second area 114b, fourth area 114d→third area 114c, and so on. Then, the fourth area 114d is cleared to "0". In addition, in the data setting process, data is set so that the display contents of the general figure reservation display section 38b are updated in accordance with the current reduction in the number of pending information on the ordinary figure side.

Thereafter, it is determined whether the current state is the opening/closing execution mode (step S403), and if the current status is not the opening/closing execution mode, whether or not the first high frequency flag provided in the main side RAM 84 is set to "1". (Step S404). The first high frequency flag is a flag used by the main MPU 82 to specify whether or not the support mode is the first high frequency support mode. The first high frequency flag is set to "1", and when the first high frequency support mode ends, the first high frequency flag is cleared to "0".

If it is the opening/closing execution mode (step S403: YES), the low probability table on the general figure side is read from the main side ROM 83 to the main side RAM 84 (step S405). Furthermore, if the first high-frequency flag is not set to "1" although the mode is not the opening/closing execution mode (step S404: NO), that is, if the support mode is the low-frequency support mode or the second high-frequency support mode, the main The low probability table on the normal figure side is read from the side ROM 83 to the main side RAM 84 (step S405). On the other hand, if the first high-frequency flag is set to "1" instead of the opening/closing execution mode (step S404: YES), that is, if the support mode is the first high-frequency support mode, the main side ROM 83 The high probability table on the ordinary figure side is read into the RAM 84 (step S406). In each of the low probability table on the general figure side and the high probability table on the ordinary figure side, the value of the general electric random number counter C4 that results in the electric winning combination winning is set. In this case, the high probability table on the general figure side is set to have a larger number of values of the ordinary electric random number counter C4 that will result in an electric winning winning combination than the low probability table on the ordinary figure side. As a result, when the high probability table on the common symbol side is referred to, the probability of winning the electric winning combination is higher than when the low probability table on the common symbol side is referred to. In other words, the high probability mode on the common symbol side and the low probability mode on the common symbol side are used as the judgment modes of the common symbol propriety determination process (step S407), which will be described later, so that the probability of the electric role opening winning is relatively high or low. Existing. The low probability table on the general figure side is set so that the probability of winning the electric role open is 1/2, and the high probability table on the general figure side is set so that the probability of winning the electric role open is 4/5. However, if the high probability mode on the general map side has a higher probability of winning the electric role open win than the low probability mode on the general side, then the probability of these electric role open winnings is arbitrary. .

When the process of step S405 or the process of step S406 is executed, a process of determining whether or not the common pattern is correct is executed (step S407). In the general figure validity determination process, numerical information about the general purpose random number counter C4 in the pending information on the general purpose figure side, which is the target of the current ordinary figure appropriateness determination process, is added to the table read in step S405 or step S406. Verify.

When the result of the common figure propriety determination process is the electric role open winning (step S408: YES), a stop result setting process for the common figure winning result is executed (step S409). Specifically, information about the stop mode of the symbol for the winning result of the common symbol to be finally stopped and displayed in the current variable display time on the common symbol display section 38a is read from the main side ROM 83 to the main side RAM 84. Note that one type of pattern stopping pattern may be set as the pattern stopping pattern for the general figure winning result, or a plurality of types of pattern stopping patterns may be set.

If the result of the ordinary figure correctness determination process is not the electric role open winning (step S408: NO), a stop result setting process for the ordinary figure out result is executed (step S410). Specifically, information about the stop mode of the pattern for the normal pattern failure result that is to be finally stopped and displayed on the normal pattern display section 38a in the current continuous display time is read from the main side ROM 83 to the main side RAM 84. The information on the mode of the selected pattern in this case is different from the information on the mode of stopping the pattern for the general pattern winning result.

When the process of step S409 or the process of step S410 is executed, it is determined whether the current state is the opening/closing execution mode (step S411), and if the current state is not the opening/closing execution mode, the first height provided in the main side RAM 84 is It is determined whether either the frequency flag or the second high frequency flag is set to "1" (step S412). As already explained, the first high-frequency flag is a flag for the main MPU 82 to specify whether the support mode is the first high-frequency support mode, and a transition to the first high-frequency support mode occurs. When the first high-frequency support mode ends, the first high-frequency flag is set to "1", and when the first high-frequency support mode ends, the first high-frequency flag is cleared to "0". The second high frequency flag is a flag for the main MPU 82 to specify whether or not the support mode is the second high frequency support mode. The second high frequency flag is set to "1", and when the second high frequency support mode ends, the second high frequency flag is cleared to "0".

If it is in the opening/closing execution mode (step S411: YES), information corresponding to 10 seconds, which is a long period of time as the duration of the variable display times in the current general figure display section 38a, is stored in the general figure side provided in the main side RAM 84. The timer counter is set (step S413). Furthermore, if both the first high-frequency flag and the second high-frequency flag are not set to "1" (step S412: NO), that is, if the support mode is the low-frequency support mode, the current common map display section Information corresponding to 10 seconds, which is a long period of time as the duration of the variable display times in 38a, is set in the general figure side timer counter provided in the main side RAM 84 (step S413). The numerical information set in the general map side timer counter is updated in the timer update process of step S210 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14). As a result, when the opening/closing execution mode is selected or when the support mode is the low-frequency support mode, the variable display times on the regular figure display section 38a are performed over a relatively long period of time.

If the first high frequency flag or the second high frequency flag is set to "1" instead of the opening/closing execution mode (step S412: YES), that is, the support mode is the first high frequency support mode or the second high frequency support mode. In the case of the mode, information corresponding to 1 second, which is a short period of time as the duration of the current fluctuating display on the ordinary figure display section 38a, is set in the ordinary figure side timer counter of the main side RAM 84 (step S414). As a result, when the support mode is the first high-frequency support mode or the second high-frequency support mode, the fluctuation display times on the general figure display section 38a are performed over a short period of time that is a relatively short duration.

Thereafter, the variable display of the pattern on the ordinary figure display section 38a is started (step S415). A variable display table for ordinary figures is stored in advance in the main side ROM 83 as a table referred to by the main side MPU 82 when the symbols are displayed in a variable manner on the ordinary figure display section 38a. When the variable display of the symbol is executed in the ordinary symbol display section 38a, the same variable display table is used regardless of the result of the ordinary symbol appropriateness determination process. When the fluctuating display of the picture is performed in the ordinary picture display section 38a, the fluctuating display of the picture according to the predetermined pattern is repeated, but the variation display table for the common picture shows the variation display of the picture according to the predetermined pattern. Control data for one revolution is set. Therefore, when a variable display of a symbol is performed in the ordinary figure display section 38a, the variable display table for ordinary figures is repeatedly used until immediately before final display is performed. Thereafter, 1 is added to the value of the general electricity counter (step S416). As a result, the value of the regular map and power counter becomes "1" corresponding to the regular map changing process (step S308).

<Processing during normal map fluctuation>
Next, the process during regular map fluctuation in step S308 in the regular map regular electricity control process (FIG. 15) will be explained.

In the normal figure variation process, it is determined whether the timing is such that the pattern is being displayed in a variable manner on the common figure display section 38a and before the final display. Specifically, when the value of the regular figure side timer counter that measures the duration of the current variable display is 0.4 seconds remaining, it is determined that the timing is before the final display. If the display is not yet finalized, a process for regularly changing the display mode of the picture on the ordinary picture display section 38a is executed. This regular change continues until it is time to start final display. Moreover, this regular change is performed in a fixed manner regardless of whether or not the result of the common symbol correctness determination process (step S407) is an electric winning combination. Moreover, when the timing for final display has come, the display mode of the picture in the common symbol display section 38a is set to a stop mode corresponding to the result of the current common symbol correctness determination process. This stop mode corresponds to the information read out to the main side RAM 84 in step S409 or step S410 of the regular figure fluctuation start process (FIG. 16). Then, by adding 1 to the value of the general map and general electricity counter, the value of the counter is updated to one corresponding to the general map and general electricity processing.

<Public map confirmation process>
Next, the regular map confirmation process in step S309 in the regular map general electricity control process (FIG. 15) will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 17.

By determining whether or not the value of the timer counter on the general figure side that measures the duration of the current variable display time is "0", 0.4 seconds) has elapsed (step S501). If the fixed display period has elapsed (step S501: YES), it is determined whether the result of the normal pattern validity determination process in the current variable display time is an electric hand open win (step S502). When it is not the electric role open winning (step S502: NO), after clearing the value of the ordinary figure general electricity counter to "0" (step S503), the present ordinary figure determination process is ended. As a result, the value of the general map and general power counter becomes the value corresponding to the general map fluctuation start process.

If the electric role opening is won (step S502: YES), it is determined whether the current state is in the opening/closing execution mode (step S504), and if it is not in the opening/closing execution mode, the first high frequency flag of the main side RAM 84 and It is determined whether any of the second high-frequency flags is set to "1" (step S505). If it is the opening/closing execution mode (step S504: YES), the processes of steps S506 to S508 are executed. Moreover, if the first high-frequency flag and the second high-frequency flag are not both set to "1" although the opening/closing execution mode is not set (step S505: NO), that is, if the support mode is the low-frequency support mode, The processes from step S506 to step S508 are executed.

In steps S506 to S508, first, a normal power release counter provided in the main side RAM 84 is set to "1" (step S506). In addition, "10" is set in the universal power winning counter provided in the main side RAM 84 (step S507). Further, information corresponding to 0.7 seconds, which is the duration of short opening on the general power side, is set in the general power side timer counter of the main side RAM 84 (step S508). The general power release counter is a counter for the main MPU 82 to specify the number of times the general power accessory 34a of the second operating port 34 is opened in the current general power release state. The general power winning counter specifies whether or not the number of game balls entering the second operating port 34 has reached 10, which is the upper limit number on the general power side, in the current general power open state, using the main side MPU 82. This is a counter for

By executing the processes from step S506 to step S508, the execution mode of the general power open state that occurs in the low frequency support mode becomes a low expectation mode. In other words, in the low-expectation level mode in which the general electric power is opened, the short opening of the general electric accessory 34a occurs once. As already explained, the firing cycle of the game ball is 0.6 seconds, so if a short opening of the general electric accessory 34a occurs once, the game ball will basically not enter the second operating port 34. Even if it occurs without occurring, the number of balls that enter the ball is about one.

If the first high-frequency flag or the second high-frequency flag is set to "1" instead of the opening/closing execution mode (step S505: YES), that is, the support mode is the first high-frequency support mode or the second high-frequency support mode. mode, the general power open counter of the main side RAM 84 is set to "3" (step S509), the general power winning counter of the main side RAM 84 is set to "10" (step S510), Information corresponding to 2 seconds, which is the duration of the long open on the general power side, is set in the timer counter on the figure side (step S511). By executing the processes from step S509 to step S511, the execution mode of the general power open state that occurs in the first high-frequency support mode or the second high-frequency support mode becomes a high expectation mode. That is, in the general power open state in the high expectation mode, the long open state of the general power accessory 34a occurs three times. As already explained, the firing cycle of the game balls is 0.6 seconds, so when the long opening of the general electric accessory 34a occurs once, about three game balls enter the second operating port 34. obtain. In the normal power open state in the high expectation mode, long opening occurs three times with an interval period on the normal power side in which the second operating port 34 is in the closed state. Therefore, when the normal power open state in the high expectation mode occurs, about nine game balls can enter the ball. Note that the normal electricity open state ends when the number of game balls entering the second operating port 34 reaches 10, which is the upper limit number on the normal electricity side, so the normal electricity open state in the high expectation mode is If this occurs, an event may occur in which the upper limit number of game balls on the power grid side enters the second operating port 34, thereby ending the power open state.

When the process of step S507 or the process of step S510 is executed, the general electric utility accessory 34a of the second operating port 34 is brought into an open state by starting outputting a drive signal to the general electric drive unit 34b. Thereafter, by adding 1 to the value of the general electricity counter, the value of the counter is updated to one corresponding to the general electricity control process.

<General electricity control processing>
Next, the general electric power control process in step S310 in the general electric power control process (FIG. 15) will be explained.

In the general power control process, when a win to the second actuating port 34 has occurred, a value corresponding to the number of winnings is subtracted from the value of the general power winning counter in the main side RAM 84. When the value of the general power winning counter is "0", the value of the general power release counter in the main side RAM 84 is cleared to "0", and furthermore, the output of the drive signal to the general power driving unit 34b is stopped. By doing so, the second operating port 34 is brought into a closed state. Then, the value of the general electricity counter is cleared to "0". Thereby, the process to be executed in the next processing time of the general-purpose figure and electric power control process becomes the general-purpose figure fluctuation start process (step S307).

If there is no winning in the second actuating port 34 or if the value of the general power winning counter is not "0", check whether the value of the general power side timer counter in the main side RAM 84 is "0" or not. judge. When the value of the timer counter on the general power side is "0", the output of the drive signal to the drive unit 34b for general power is stopped, thereby closing the second operating port 34. Then, the value of the general power release counter in the main side RAM 84 is subtracted by 1, and it is determined whether the value of the general power release counter after the 1 subtraction is "0". If the value of the general power open counter after subtracting 1 is 1 or more, after maintaining the second operating port 34 in the closed state for the interval period (specifically 1 second) on the general power side, By outputting the drive signal to the drive unit 34b again, the second operating port 34 is brought into an open state. Further, information corresponding to 2 seconds, which is the duration of the long open period on the general power side, is set in the general power side timer counter of the main side RAM 84. As a result, the second actuating port 34 becomes open again, and the duration of the open state is set to 2 seconds, which is the long open duration on the normal power side. If the value of the general power open counter after subtracting 1 is "0", the value of the general power open counter is cleared to "0". Thereby, the process to be executed in the next processing time of the general-purpose figure and electric power control process becomes the general-purpose figure fluctuation start process (step S307).

<Special figure special electric control processing>
Next, the special figure special electric control process executed in step S213 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14) will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 18.

First, pending information acquisition processing is executed (step S601). In the reservation information acquisition process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. If the number of pieces of one hold information is less than the upper limit storage number (step S702: YES), processing for acquiring first hold information is executed.

In the process for acquiring the first pending information, first, a memory card is provided in the main side RAM 84 in order for the main side MPU 82 to grasp the number of unprocessed first pending information stored in the first special figure holding area 111. The value of the first special figure reservation counter is incremented by 1 (step S703). According to the value of the first special symbol reservation counter, the display contents of the first special symbol reservation display section 37c in the special symbol unit 37 are adjusted. Thereby, the display contents of the first special figure reservation display section 37c correspond to the number of first reservation information stored in the first special figure reservation area 111. Thereafter, each value of the hit random number counter C1, type random number counter C2, and reach random number counter C3 is stored in the first storage area of the first special figure reservation area 111, that is, the storage corresponding to the number of reservation memories added by 1 in step S703. It is stored in the area (step S704). Thereafter, the first hold command is transmitted to the sound-light side MPU 93 (step S705). Thereby, the display side MPU 103 controls the display of the symbol display device 41 so that the display content of the first reservation display area 42a of the symbol display device 41 corresponds to the increase in the first reservation information.

If a negative determination is made in step S701, if a negative determination is made in step S702, or if the process in step S705 is executed, a winning has occurred in the second operating port 34 (step S706: YES). , Further, on the condition that the number of second reservation information stored in the second special figure reservation area 112 is less than the upper limit storage number (step S707: YES), a process for acquiring the second reservation information is executed. do.

In the process for acquiring the second pending information, first, the main side RAM 84 is provided in order for the main side MPU 82 to grasp the number of unprocessed second pending information stored in the second special figure holding area 112. The value of the second special figure reservation counter is incremented by 1 (step S708). According to the value of the second special symbol reservation counter, the display contents of the second special symbol reservation display section 37d in the special symbol unit 37 are adjusted. Thereby, the display content of the second special figure holding display section 37d corresponds to the number of second holding information stored in the second special figure holding area 112. Thereafter, each value of the hit random number counter C1, type random number counter C2, and reach random number counter C3 is stored in the first storage area of the second special figure reservation area 112, that is, the storage corresponding to the number of reservations added by 1 in step S708. It is stored in the area (step S709). Thereafter, a second hold command is transmitted to the audio-optical side MPU 93 (step S710). Thereby, the display side MPU 103 controls the display of the symbol display device 41 so that the display content of the second reservation display area 42b of the symbol display device 41 becomes the display content corresponding to the increase in the second reservation information.

Returning to the explanation of the special figure special electric line control process (FIG. 18), after executing the reservation information acquisition process in step S601, the numerical information of the special figure special electric line counter provided in the main side RAM 84 is read out (step S602). , reads out the special figure special electric address table provided in the main side ROM 83 (step S603). Then, a start address corresponding to the numerical information of the special figure/special electric line counter is acquired from the special figure/special electric line address table (step S604), and the process jumps to the process indicated by the acquired start address (step S605).

The special figure special electric line counter is a counter for the main side MPU 82 to grasp which of each process from step S606 to step S612 in the special figure special electric line control process should be executed, and it is used in the special figure special electric line address table. is set as a start address in the program for executing each process from step S606 to step S612 in correspondence with the numerical information of the special figure special electric counter. If the value of the special figure special electric line counter is "0", the process jumps to the special figure fluctuation start process of step S606, and if the value of the special figure special electric line counter is "1", the process jumps to the special figure fluctuation process of step S607. If the value of the special figure special electric line counter is "2", the process jumps to the special figure confirmation process of step S608, and if the value of the special figure special electric line counter is "3", the process jumps to the special figure confirmation process of step S609. Jump to the start process, and if the value of the special figure special electric line counter is "4", jump to the special electric line opening process of step S610, and if the value of the special figure special electric line counter is "5", jump to the special electric line opening process of step S611. The program jumps to the special train closing process, and if the value of the special map special train counter is "6", jumps to the special train end process of step S612. Each process from step S606 to step S612 will be individually explained below.

<Special figure fluctuation start process>
First, the special symbol fluctuation start process in step S606 will be explained with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 20. Note that the special figure fluctuation start process is not executed in a situation where a game round has already been executed and a situation where the opening/closing execution mode is being executed.

In the special figure fluctuation start process, if the second reserve information is not stored in the second special figure reserve area 112 and the first reserve information is stored in the first special figure reserve area 111 (step S801: YES, step S802: NO), the first data setting process is executed (step S803). In the first data setting process, the data stored in the first area 111a of the first special figure holding area 111 is moved to the special figure execution area 113. After that, a process of shifting the data stored in the storage area of the first special figure holding area 111 is executed. This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to fourth areas 111a to 111d to the lower area side, specifically, from the second area 111b to the first area 111a, the third area The data in each area is shifted in the following order: area 111c→second area 111b, fourth area 111d→third area 111c, and so on. Then, the fourth area 111d is cleared to "0". Thereafter, the value of the first special figure reservation counter in the main side RAM 84 is subtracted by 1. Thereby, the display content of the first special figure reservation display section 37c in the special figure unit 37 is changed to the content in which the first reservation information is decreased by one. In addition, in the data setting process, a first decrease command indicating that the first reservation information in the first special figure reservation area 111 has decreased by one is transmitted to the sound-light side MPU 93. Thereby, the display side MPU 103 controls the display of the symbol display device 41 so that the display content of the first reservation display area 42a of the symbol display device 41 becomes the display content corresponding to the decrease in the first reservation information.

On the other hand, when the second reservation information is stored in the second special figure reservation area 112 (step S801 and step S802: YES), the first reservation information acquired earlier than the second reservation information is the first reservation information. Even if it is stored in the 1 special figure holding area 111, the second data setting process is executed (step S804). In the second data setting process, the data stored in the first area 112a of the second special figure holding area 112 is moved to the special figure execution area 113. Thereafter, a process of shifting the data stored in the storage area of the second special figure holding area 112 is executed. This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to fourth areas 112a to 112d to the lower area side, specifically, from the second area 112b to the first area 112a, the third area The data in each area is shifted in the following order: area 112c→second area 112b, fourth area 112d→third area 112c, and so on. Then, the fourth area 112d is cleared to "0". Thereafter, the value of the second special figure reservation counter in the main side RAM 84 is subtracted by 1. Thereby, the display contents of the second special figure reservation display section 37d in the special figure unit 37 are changed to the contents in which the second reservation information is decreased by one. In addition, in the data setting process, a second decrease command indicating that the second reservation information in the second special figure reservation area 112 has decreased by one is transmitted to the sound-light side MPU 93. Thereby, the symbol display device 41 is display-controlled by the display side MPU 103 so that the display content of the second reservation display area 42b of the symbol display device 41 becomes the display content corresponding to the decrease of the second reservation information.

If the second reservation information is stored as described above, even if the first reservation information acquired earlier than the second reservation information is stored, the second reservation information is the execution area for special drawings. It will be shifted to 113. As a result, the second pending information is given priority over the first pending information as a target for starting a game round.

When the process of step S803 or the process of step S804 is executed, a validity determination process is executed (step S805). In the win/fail determination process, if the win/fail lottery mode is the low probability mode and the starting target of the game round is the first pending information, the first win/fail table 121 (see FIG. 9(a)) for low probability is stored from the main side ROM 83. If the win/fail lottery mode is the low probability mode and the target for starting the game round is the second pending information, the second win/fail table 122 for low probability (see FIG. 9(b)) is read into the main side ROM 83. is read out to the main side RAM 84, and if the win/fail lottery mode is the high probability mode, the win/fail table 123 at high probability (FIG. 9(c) ) is read from the main side ROM 83 to the main side RAM 84. After reading the winning/failure tables 121 to 123, the information for judging the winning/failure, that is, the numerical information obtained from the winning random number counter C1, is read from the pending information stored in the special figure execution area 113, and the read numerical information is , It is determined whether or not the data group corresponding to the setting value of the current target of use among the read out success/failure tables 121 to 123 matches any of the numerical information set as the jackpot result. In addition, if it does not match the numerical information set as the jackpot result, the above-mentioned information for judgment is a data group corresponding to the setting value of the current target of use among the read-out success/failure tables 121 to 123. In this step, it is determined whether or not the result matches any of the numerical information set as the time saving result.

When the result of the success/failure determination process is a jackpot result (step S806: YES), a distribution determination process for jackpot is executed (step S807). In the jackpot distribution determination process, if the starting target of the game round is the first pending information, the jackpot distribution table 125 (see FIG. 10(a)) for the first special symbol is transferred from the main side ROM 83 to the main side RAM 84. If the second pending information is to be read and the game round is to be started, the jackpot distribution table 126 for the second special symbol (see FIG. 10(b)) is read from the main side ROM 83 to the main side RAM 84. After reading the jackpot distribution tables 125 and 126, the information for distribution determination, that is, the numerical information acquired from the type random number counter C2, is read from the pending information stored in the execution area 113 for special symbols, and the above-mentioned jackpot distribution By referring to the minute tables 125 and 126, it is specified which type of jackpot result the read numerical information corresponds to.

After executing the jackpot distribution determination process, a flag in the main RAM 84 corresponding to the type of jackpot result specified in the jackpot distribution determination process is set to "1" (step S808). Thereafter, a stop result setting process for jackpot results is executed (step S809). Specifically, information on the stop mode of the symbols to be finally stopped and displayed on the special figure display sections 37a and 37b, which are the starting targets for the current game round, is stored in the main side ROM 83 in advance for jackpot results. It is specified from the result table, and the specified information is stored in the main side RAM 84. In this stop result table for jackpot results, the types of stop modes of the symbols that are stopped and displayed on the first special figure display section 37a or the second special figure display section 37b are set differently for each type of jackpot result. In step S809, information on the pattern stop mode corresponding to the type of jackpot result specified in step S808 is stored in the main RAM 84. Note that the pattern stopping manner may be set in one-to-one correspondence with each jackpot result, or a plurality of types of pattern stopping patterns may be set for at least some of the jackpot results. The method of selecting a stop result for a jackpot result in which a plurality of types of pattern stop modes are set is arbitrary, but for example, a structure may be adopted in which a stop result is selected according to the value of the type random number counter C2.

When the result of the success/failure determination process is not a jackpot result but a time-saving result (step S806: NO, step S810: YES), a time-saving allocation determination process is executed (step S811). In the time-saving distribution determination process, if the start target of the game round is the first pending information, the time-saving distribution table 127 (see FIG. 10(c)) for the first special symbol is transferred from the main side ROM 83 to the main side RAM 84. If the second pending information is to be read and the game round is to be started, the time saving distribution table 128 for the second special symbol (see FIG. 10(d)) is read from the main side ROM 83 to the main side RAM 84. After reading the time-saving distribution tables 127 and 128, the information for distribution determination, that is, the numerical information obtained from the type random number counter C2, is read from the pending information stored in the execution area 113 for special symbols, and the above-mentioned time-saving distribution is By referring to the minute tables 127 and 128, it is specified which type of time saving result the read numerical information corresponds to.

After executing the time-saving distribution determination process, a flag in the main RAM 84 corresponding to the type of time-saving result specified in the time-saving distribution determination process is set to "1" (step S812). Thereafter, a stop result setting process for time saving results is executed (step S813). Specifically, information on the stopping mode of the symbols to be finally stopped and displayed on the special figure display sections 37a and 37b, which are the starting targets for the current game round, is stored in advance in the main side ROM 83, using the stop mode for time-saving results. It is specified from the result table, and the specified information is stored in the main side RAM 84. In this stop result table for time-saving results, the types of stop modes of the patterns that are stopped and displayed on the first special figure display section 37a or the second special figure display section 37b are set differently for each type of time-saving result. In step S813, information on the stop mode of the picture according to the type of time saving result specified in step S812 is stored in the main RAM 84. Note that the pattern stopping mode may be set in one-to-one correspondence with each time saving result, or a plurality of types of pattern stopping modes may be set for at least some of the time saving results. For time-saving results in which a plurality of types of pattern stopping modes are set, a method for selecting a stopping result is arbitrary, but for example, a configuration may be adopted in which a stopping result is selected according to the value of the type random number counter C2. The information on the pattern mode selected in step S813 is different from the information on the pattern mode selected in the case of a jackpot result.

If the result of the success/failure determination process is neither a jackpot result nor a time saving result (step S810: NO), a stop result setting process for a miss result is executed (step S814). Specifically, information on the mode of the picture to be finally stopped and displayed on the first special figure display section 37a or the second special figure display section 37b in the current game round is stored in advance in the main side ROM 83 as a winning result. The specified information is stored in the main side RAM 84. The information on the pattern mode selected in this case is different from the information on the pattern mode selected in the case of a jackpot result and the information on the pattern mode selected in the case of a time saving result, and furthermore, the information on the pattern mode selected in the case of a jackpot result is different from the information on the pattern mode selected in the case of a time saving result. One type is common to the figure display section 37a and the second special figure display section 37b.

When the process of step S809, the process of step S813, or the process of step S814 is executed, a process of identifying a variable display period is executed (step S815). FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing a process for specifying a variable display period.

First, it is determined whether the high probability flag in the main side RAM 84 is set to "1" (step S901). The high probability flag is a flag used by the main MPU 82 to specify whether or not the win/fail lottery mode is the high probability mode, and when a shift to the high probability mode occurs, the high probability flag is set to "1". The high probability flag is cleared to "0" when the high probability mode ends. When the high probability flag is set to "1" (step S901: YES), that is, when the win/fail lottery mode is the high probability mode, the high probability table group is read from the main side ROM 83 to the main side RAM 84 (step S902). In a situation where the variable display period selection process is executed in step S908 with reference to the high probability table group, if a jackpot result occurs in the current game round, or if the result of the success/failure determination process is a miss result. At the same time, the numerical information corresponding to the reach random number counter C3 in the pending information that is the target of execution corresponds to the occurrence of the out-of-reach display, and if the out-of-reach display occurs in the current game round, the fluctuation type counter at that time Information on the variable display period of the reach display mode is read by comparing the numerical information of the CS with the table corresponding to the reach in the high probability table group. Although there are multiple types of variable display periods of the reach display mode, the variable display period of any reach display mode is longer than the variable display period in the case where the reach display does not occur.

If a jackpot result does not occur in this game round and no out-of-reach display also occurs, the second hold information is the execution target of the game round and there are two or more second pieces in the second special figure hold area 112. If the game is started in a situation where pending information is stored, the information of the shortest period (specifically, 3 seconds) on the special figure side is read out as the variable display period of the current game. Thereby, in the high probability mode, it is possible to increase the efficiency of playing the game using the second reservation information as a trigger. In addition, even if a time-saving result occurs in the current game round, the second hold information is the execution target of the game round, and two or more pieces of second hold information are stored in the second special figure hold area 112. If the game is started in a situation where the CPU 30 is in a situation where the game is played, information for the shortest period of time (specifically, 3 seconds) on the special figure side is read out.

On the other hand, in the case where a jackpot result does not occur in this game round and no out-of-reach display also occurs, the second hold information is the execution target of the game round, and there is one second hold in the second special figure hold area 112. If the game round is started in a situation where the information is stored, or if a jackpot result does not occur in the current game round and no hit-reach display occurs, the first pending information is the target of execution of the game round. If so, the information of the middle period (specifically, 10 seconds) on the special figure side is read out as the variable display period of the current game round. This makes it possible to ensure that the second pending information is acquired in the high probability mode. In addition, even if a time-saving result occurs in the current game round, the second hold information is the execution target of the game round, and one piece of second hold information is stored in the second special figure hold area 112. If the game round is started in a situation where the first hold information is the execution target of the game round, the information of the medium period (specifically, 10 seconds) on the special figure side is read out.

In the high probability mode, even if the time-saving result is selected in the validity determination process (step S805), it is invalidated. In this case, when the variable display period of the game is selected by referring to the table group for high probability, the occurrence of time-saving results that are invalidated can be prevented by treating time-saving results in the same way as losing results. It is possible to make it less noticeable.

If the high probability flag of the main side RAM 84 is not set to "1" (step S901: NO), either the first high frequency flag or the second high frequency flag of the main side RAM 84 is set to "1". It is determined whether there is one (step S903). If the first high frequency flag or the second high frequency flag is set to "1" (step S903: YES), that is, the win/fail lottery mode is the low probability mode and the support mode is the first high frequency support mode or the second high frequency flag. 2. If the mode is high-frequency support mode, the table group for high-frequency support is read from the main-side ROM 83 to the main-side RAM 84 (step S904). In a situation where the variable display period selection process is executed in step S908 with reference to the table group for high-frequency support, if a jackpot result occurs in the current game round, or if the result of the validity judgment process is a negative result. At the same time, the numerical information corresponding to the reach random number counter C3 in the pending information that is the target of execution corresponds to the occurrence of the out-of-reach display, and if the out-of-reach display occurs in the current game round, the type of change at that time Information on the variable display period of the reach display mode is read by comparing the numerical information of the counter CS against the reach-compatible table in the table group for high-frequency support. In this case, the manner in which the reach display mode changes and the display period is selected is different from when the high probability table group is referenced, and specifically, the frequency is higher when the high probability table group is referenced. A longer variable display period is more likely to be selected than when a support table group is referenced. However, this relationship may be reversed.

If a jackpot result does not occur in this game round and no out-of-reach display also occurs, the second hold information is the execution target of the game round and there are two or more second pieces in the second special figure hold area 112. If the game is started in a situation where pending information is stored, the information of the shortest period (specifically, 3 seconds) on the special figure side is read out as the variable display period of the current game. This makes it possible to increase the efficiency of playing games triggered by the second reservation information in the first high-frequency support mode or the second high-frequency support mode. In addition, even if a time-saving result occurs in the current game round, the second hold information is the execution target of the game round, and two or more pieces of second hold information are stored in the second special figure hold area 112. If the game is started in a situation where the CPU 30 is in a state where the game is running, the information of the shortest period (specifically, 3 seconds) on the special figure side is read out.

On the other hand, in the case where a jackpot result does not occur in this game round and no out-of-reach display also occurs, the second hold information is the execution target of the game round, and there is one second hold in the second special figure hold area 112. If the game round is started in a situation where the information is stored, or if a jackpot result does not occur in the current game round and no hit-reach display occurs, the first pending information is the target of execution of the game round. If so, the information of the middle period (specifically, 10 seconds) on the special figure side is read out as the variable display period of the current game round. This makes it possible to ensure that the second pending information is acquired in the first high-frequency support mode or the second high-frequency support mode. In addition, even if a time-saving result occurs in the current game round, the second hold information is the execution target of the game round, and one piece of second hold information is stored in the second special figure hold area 112. If the game round is started in a situation where the first hold information is the execution target of the game round, the information of the medium period (specifically, 10 seconds) on the special figure side is read out.

In a situation where the low probability mode is the first high frequency support mode or the second high frequency support mode, even if the time saving result is selected in the validity determination process (step S805), the last game in the high frequency support mode It will be disabled unless it is used twice. In this case, if the fluctuating display period of gaming times is selected by referring to the table group for high-frequency support, time-saving results are treated the same as losing results, so that time-saving results are invalidated. It is possible to make it less noticeable. In addition, if a time-saving result is selected in the last game of the high-frequency support mode, the second high-frequency support mode will be triggered by the time-saving result, but even in this case, the The same variable display period for a winning result without a reach display will be selected for the fluctuating display period of the gaming session, so it is possible to determine whether it is a time-saving result or a losing result from the fluctuating display period of the gaming session. It becomes possible to make it difficult for players to recognize.

If "1" is not set in either the first high frequency flag or the second high frequency flag (step S903; NO), that is, the win/fail lottery mode is the low probability mode and the support mode is the low frequency support mode. If so, it is determined whether the reach high frequency state flag provided in the main side RAM 84 is set to "1" (step S905). The reach high frequency state flag is a flag used by the main MPU 82 to specify whether or not the reach high frequency state is a low probability mode and can occur in the low frequency support mode. The reach high frequency state is a gaming state in which the out-of-reach display occurs more frequently than in a situation where the reach is in the low probability mode and the low frequency support mode and which is not the reach high frequency state.

If the high reach frequency state flag is set to "1" (step S905: YES), that is, if the mode is low probability mode and low frequency support mode, and the high reach frequency state is set, the table group for high reach frequency is set. The data is read from the main side ROM 83 to the main side RAM 84 (step S906). In a situation where the variable display period selection process is executed in step S908 with reference to the table group for high reach frequency, the variable display period is selected in step S908 with reference to the table group for low frequency support, which will be described later. Rather than the situation in which the selection process is executed, when the result of the validity judgment process is a negative result, the numerical information corresponding to the reach random number counter C3 in the pending information that is the execution target corresponds to the occurrence of a negative reach display. The probability of being identified increases.

If a jackpot result occurs in the current game round, or the result of the win/fail judgment process is a wrong result, and the numerical information corresponding to the reach random number counter C3 in the pending information that is the target of execution is out, it corresponds to the occurrence of the reach display. If the out-of-reach display occurs in the current game round, the numerical information of the fluctuation type counter CS at that time is checked against the reach-compatible table in the table group for high reach frequency, and the reach display mode is changed. Reads information on the fluctuation display period. In this case, the selection mode of the variable display period of the reach display mode is such that a longer variable display period is more likely to be selected than when a table group for low-frequency support, which will be described later, is referred to. In addition, in this case, the selection mode of the variation display period of the reach display mode is the same as when the high probability table group is referenced, but the variation is longer than when the high probability table group is referenced. A configuration may be adopted in which the display period is easily selected, a configuration in which a shorter variable display period is more easily selected than when a table group for high probability support is referred to, and a configuration may be adopted in which the display period is more likely to be selected than when a table group for high probability support is referred to. The configuration may be the same, or the configuration may be such that a shorter variable display period is more likely to be selected than when a table group for high-frequency support is referred to.

If a time-saving result occurs in the current game round, by comparing the numerical information of the fluctuation type counter CS at that time against the table corresponding to the time-saving result in the table group for high reach frequency, the fluctuation corresponding to the time-saving result is displayed. Read period information. Multiple types of information on the variable display period corresponding to the time-saving result are set, and no matter which variable display period corresponds to the time-saving result, it is longer than the minimum period on the special map side, and the reach display will occur. The period is shorter than the fluctuation display period. Specifically, 10 seconds, 11 seconds, 12 seconds, and 13 seconds are set as the fluctuation display periods for time-saving results, and among these, the period corresponding to the value of the acquired fluctuation type counter CS is the period for this game. selected as the variable display period.

If a jackpot result or time-saving result does not occur in this game round, and no out-of-reach display also occurs, the first hold information is the execution target of the game round and there are 3 or more pieces in the first special figure hold area 111. If the game is started in a situation where the first reservation information is stored, the information of the shortest period (specifically, 3 seconds) on the special figure side is read out as the variable display period of the current game. Thereby, in the low-frequency support mode, it is possible to increase the efficiency of playing games triggered by the first reservation information.

On the other hand, in the case where no jackpot result or time-saving result occurs in this game round, and no out-of-reach display occurs, the first reservation information is the execution target of the game round, and there is one or more in the first special figure reservation area 111. If the game round was started in a situation where two pieces of first pending information are stored, or if no jackpot result or time-saving result occurs in the current game round, and no out-of-reach display occurs, the second If the pending information is subject to execution of a game, the numerical information of the fluctuation type counter CS at that time is checked against the table for complete miss results in the table group for high reach frequency to determine the complete miss result. Read out information on the corresponding variable display period. Multiple types of information are set for the variable display period corresponding to the completely missed result, and any variable display period corresponding to the completely missed result is longer than the shortest period on the special drawing side, and the variable display corresponding to the time-saving result is longer. The period is shorter than the variable display period corresponding to the occurrence of period and reach display. Specifically, 5 seconds, 6 seconds, 7 seconds, and 8 seconds are set as the fluctuation display periods corresponding to completely off results, and among these, the period corresponding to the obtained value of the fluctuation type counter CS is the current period. Selected as the variable display period of game times.

If the reach high frequency state flag is not set to "1" (step S905: NO), that is, if it is a low probability mode, a low frequency support mode, and is not in a reach high frequency state, a table for low frequency support is set. The group is read from the main side ROM 83 to the main side RAM 84 (step S907). In a situation where the variable display period selection process is executed in step S908 with reference to the table group for low-frequency support, as already explained, the variable display period is selected in step S908 with reference to the table group for high-reach frequency support. Compared to the situation in which the period selection process is executed, if the result of the validity judgment process is a negative result, the numerical information corresponding to the reach random number counter C3 in the pending information that is the execution target will be negative and the reach display will occur. If it is compatible, the probability of being identified will be lower.

If a jackpot result occurs in this game round, or the result of the win/fail judgment process is a wrong result, and the numerical information corresponding to the reach random number counter C3 in the pending information that is the target of execution is out, it corresponds to the occurrence of the reach display. If the out-of-reach display occurs in the current game round, the numerical information of the fluctuation type counter CS at that time is checked against the reach-compatible table in the table group for low-frequency support, and the reach display mode is changed. Reads information on the fluctuation display period. In this case, the selection mode of the variable display period of the reach display mode is such that, as already explained, a shorter variable display period is more likely to be selected than when the table group for high reach frequency is referred to.

If a time-saving result occurs in the current game round, by comparing the numerical information of the fluctuation type counter CS at that time against the table corresponding to the time-saving result in the table group for low-frequency support, the fluctuation corresponding to the time-saving result is displayed. Read period information. The manner in which the information on the variable display period corresponding to the time-saving result is selected is the same as when the table corresponding to the time-saving result in the table group for high reach frequency is referred to. In other words, multiple types of information on variable display periods corresponding to time-saving results are set, and no matter which variable display period corresponds to time-saving results, it is longer than the shortest period on the special drawing side, and reach display will occur. The period is shorter than the corresponding variable display period. Specifically, 10 seconds, 11 seconds, 12 seconds, and 13 seconds are set as the fluctuation display periods for time-saving results, and among these, the period corresponding to the value of the acquired fluctuation type counter CS is the period for the current game. selected as the variable display period.

If a jackpot result or time-saving result does not occur in this game round, and no out-of-reach display also occurs, the first hold information is the execution target of the game round and there are 3 or more pieces in the first special figure hold area 111. If the game is started in a situation where the first reservation information is stored, the information of the shortest period (specifically, 3 seconds) on the special figure side is read out as the variable display period of the current game. Thereby, in the low-frequency support mode, it is possible to increase the efficiency of playing games triggered by the first reservation information.

On the other hand, in the case where no jackpot result or time-saving result occurs in this game round, and no out-of-reach display occurs, the first hold information is the execution target of the game round, and there is one or more pieces in the first special figure hold area 111. If the game round started in a situation where two pieces of first pending information are stored, or if no jackpot result or time-saving result occurs in the current game round, and no out-of-reach display occurs, the second If the pending information is subject to execution of a game, the numerical information of the fluctuation type counter CS at that time is checked against the table corresponding to the completely wrong result in the table group for low frequency support, and the complete wrong result is determined. Read out information on the corresponding variable display period. The selection mode of the information on the variable display period corresponding to the completely missed result is the same as the case where the table corresponding to the completely missed result in the table group for high reach frequency is referred to. In other words, multiple types of information on the variable display period corresponding to a completely missed result are set, and any variable display period corresponding to a completely missed result is longer than the shortest period on the special drawing side, and the variation corresponding to a time-saving result is set. The period is shorter than the display period and the variable display period corresponding to the occurrence of reach display. Specifically, 5 seconds, 6 seconds, 7 seconds, and 8 seconds are set as the fluctuation display periods for completely off results, and among these, the period corresponding to the obtained value of the fluctuation type counter CS is the current period. Selected as the variable display period of game times.

When the process of step S902, the process of step S904, the process of step S906, or the process of step S907 is executed, a variable display period selection process is executed with reference to the table group read in any of these processes (step S908). The contents of the selection process are as already explained. Then, information on the variable display period selected in step S908 is set in the special figure side timer counter provided in the main side RAM 84 (step S909). The numerical information set in the special figure side timer counter is updated in the timer update process of step S210 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14).

Returning to the explanation of the special figure fluctuation start process (FIG. 20), after executing the process of specifying the fluctuation display period in step S815, the fluctuation command and type command corresponding to the game round that is the target of this start are executed. It is transmitted to the sound-light side MPU 93 (step S816). The variation command includes information on the variation display period specified in step S815, and also indicates which of the first special figure display section 37a and second special figure display section 37b the game round to be started is. Contains information indicating whether it is compatible. Although the fluctuation command does not include information on whether or not to execute the reach display, the fluctuation display period when the reach display occurs is longer than the fluctuation display period when the reach display does not occur. Since this is set, the sound/light side MPU 93 can specify whether or not the ready-to-reach display has occurred from the information on the variable display period. The type command includes information as to whether or not the game round to be started this time corresponds to a jackpot result, and if it corresponds to a jackpot result, which type of jackpot result it is. Contains information indicating whether In addition, the type command includes information as to whether the game round to be started this time supports time-saving results, and if it supports time-saving results, which type of time-saving results Contains information indicating whether the

Thereafter, the variable display of the symbols is started on the first special figure display section 37a and the second special figure display section 37b, which are the display sections targeted for the start of the current game round (step S817). Then, the value of the special figure special electric counter is incremented by 1 (step S818). As a result, the value of the special figure special electric counter becomes "1" corresponding to the special figure fluctuation processing (step S607).

Incidentally, when the sound and light side MPU 93 receives the variation command and the type command, it executes processing for determining the execution contents of the game repeat performance corresponding to these commands. Then, light emission control of the display light emitting section 64 and sound output control of the speaker section 65 are executed according to the table corresponding to the processing result. As a result, the light emitting effect in the display light emitting section 64 and the sound output effect in the speaker section 65 are executed over the variable display period of the current game round. In addition, the sound and light side MPU 93 transmits a command corresponding to the content of execution of the game replay effect decided this time to the display side MPU 103. By receiving the command, the display side MPU 103 executes display control of the symbol display device 41 according to the table corresponding to the command. As a result, the display effect on the symbol display device 41 is executed over the variable display period of the current game round.

<Processing during special figure fluctuation>
Next, the special figure fluctuation process executed in step S607 of the special figure special electric control process (FIG. 18) will be described.

When the value of the special figure side timer counter is 1 or more and the variable display period for the current game round has not elapsed, the display on the special figure display sections 37a and 37b that is the target of execution for the current game round. When it is time to update the contents, data settings are made to update the display contents of the special figure display sections 37a and 37b. As a result, the display contents of the pictures in the special figure display sections 37a and 37b to be controlled are updated to the display contents of the next order.

The manner in which the fluctuating display of symbols in the special figure display sections 37a and 37b starts and the manner in which the fluctuating display of symbols is updated are performed in a constant manner regardless of the validity determination result and the distribution determination result, and the symbol display device Regardless of the content of the game replay in 41, the game is performed in a fixed manner. For example, when a predetermined update timing occurs a plurality of times, the display content of the picture completes one cycle, and a display pattern in which the display order is a fixed order is repeatedly performed, and when a variable display period has elapsed, the display pattern No matter which order of display is being performed, the stop result determined at the start of the game round will be displayed. This makes it possible to simplify the processing configuration for controlling the display of the special figure display sections 37a and 37b.

On the other hand, when the value of the special figure side timer counter is "0", that is, when the variable display period has elapsed, a final stop command is transmitted to the sound and light side MPU 93. Thereafter, at the start of a game round, the stop mode of the symbols on the special symbol display sections 37a and 37b stored in the main side RAM 84 in any one of step S809, step S813, and step S814 in the special symbol variation start process (FIG. 20) is changed. Read information. As a result, the variable display of the symbols is stopped in a state where the symbols corresponding to the game results of the current game round are displayed on the special symbol display sections 37a and 37b to be controlled. After that, information on the final stop period (specifically, 0.5 sec) is set in the special figure side timer counter. Thereby, measurement of the final stop period is started. Thereafter, add 1 to the value of the special figure special electric counter. As a result, the value of the special figure special electric counter becomes "2" corresponding to the special figure confirmation process (step S608).

Note that, when the audio-light side MPU 93 receives the final stop command, it transmits a command corresponding thereto to the display side MPU 103. When the display side MPU 103 receives the command, the symbol combination corresponding to the stop result of the current game round is displayed definitively on the symbol display device 41 over the final stop period.

<Special drawing confirmation process>
Next, the special figure confirmation process executed in step S608 of the special figure special electric control process (FIG. 18) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 22.

When the value of the special figure side timer counter is "0" and the final stop period has passed (step S1001: YES), and when the game result of the current game round is a jackpot result (step S1002: YES) ), information corresponding to the opening period (specifically 5 seconds) is set in the special figure side timer counter (step S1003), and an opening command is transmitted to the sound and light side MPU 93 (step S1004). When receiving the opening command, the sound and light side MPU 93 causes the symbol display device 41, the display light emitting section 64, and the speaker section 65 to perform a performance corresponding to the opening period.

Thereafter, information of 500 fixed ceiling times is set in the ceiling counter 131 of the main side RAM 84 (step S1005). That is, when the game round corresponding to the jackpot result ends and the opening/closing execution mode is started, information of 500 times, which is the fixed ceiling number, is set in the ceiling counter 131. In the case of a configuration in which the fixed ceiling count is set to the ceiling counter 131 not when the opening/closing execution mode is started but during the opening/closing execution mode or when the opening/closing execution mode ends, the operation is performed after the opening/closing execution mode is started. If a fraudulent act is committed that causes the power supply to be stopped and the setting value update process (step S117) or the RAM clearing process (step S119) to be executed when the operating power supply is restarted, the setting value update process (step S119) is performed. In step S117) or the RAM clearing process (step S119), the information indicating that the opening/closing execution mode is in progress is cleared as described above, but the value of the ceiling counter 131 is maintained, so the operating power is supplied. There is a risk that the game will be restarted in a situation where there are only a few remaining ceilings, while still enjoying the benefits of the opening/closing execution mode until the game is stopped. On the other hand, when the opening/closing execution mode is started, the information of 500 times, which is the fixed ceiling number, is set in the ceiling counter 131, thereby making it possible to neutralize the above-mentioned fraudulent acts.

Thereafter, information of 450 times, which is the reference number of period switching, is set in the fluctuation selection state counter 132 provided in the main side RAM 84 (step S1006). The timing at which the value of the variable selection state counter 132 is subtracted by one is the same as the timing at which the value of the ceiling counter 131 is subtracted by one. That is, when one game round is completed in a situation where the win/fail lottery mode is not the high probability mode, the value of the variable selection state counter 132 is decremented by 1 at the end of the game round. Then, in a situation where the value of the variable selection state counter 132 is 1 or more, the value of the variable selection state counter 132 is decremented by 1, and when the value of the variable selection state counter 132 becomes "0", the main side RAM 84 "1" is set to the reach high frequency state flag. If the reach high frequency state flag is set to "1" in the low probability mode and low frequency support mode, the reach high frequency is set in the fluctuation display period specification process (Figure 21) as already explained. A variable display period of game times is selected by referring to a group of tables.

In other words, if the period switching reference number of games is played in the low probability mode after the opening/closing execution mode ends, if the period switching reference number of games is played in the low probability mode, if the reach is in the low frequency support mode, the reach high frequency table group is referenced. It becomes a high frequency state. In addition, in a high reach frequency state, as already explained, the probability that reach display is selected is higher when the result is an outlier than in a situation where the reach is in a low probability mode or a low frequency support mode and is not in a high reach frequency state. At the same time, the variable display period when the reach display is selected is also likely to be longer than in a situation where the reach mode is in the low probability mode and the low frequency support mode and is not in the high reach frequency state. Further, the period switching reference number of times is a predetermined number of times (specifically, 50 times) less than the fixed ceiling number of times. Therefore, it is possible to generate the reach high frequency state before the second high frequency support mode occurs due to the occurrence of ceiling time reduction.

Thereafter, the value of the special figure special electric counter is incremented by 1 (step S1007). As a result, the value of the special figure special electric line counter becomes "3" corresponding to the special electric line start process (step S609).

If the game result of the current game round is not a jackpot result (step S1002: NO), the time saving state counter 134 (see FIG. 6) is subtracted in step S1008, and the fluctuation selection state counter 132 is decreased in step S1009. A subtraction process is executed, a time-saving result setting process is executed in step S1010, a subtraction process is executed for the ceiling counter 131 in step S1011, and a subtraction process is executed for the high probability state counter 133 (see FIG. 6) in step S1012. Execute processing. The contents of the processing in steps S1008 to S1012 will be explained in detail later. After that, the special figure special electric counter is cleared to "0" (step S1013). As a result, the value of the special figure special electric counter becomes "0" corresponding to the special figure fluctuation start process (step S606).

<Special call start process>
Next, the special train start process executed in step S609 of the special figure special train control process (FIG. 18) will be explained.

The opening/closing number setting process is executed on the condition that the value of the special figure side timer counter is "0", that is, the opening period has elapsed. In this case, if the current game result is a 5R low-probability result or a 5R high-probability result, "5" is set in the round counter provided in the main side RAM 84, and if the current game result is a 10R high-probability result, the main Set the round counter in the side RAM 84 to "10". The round counter is a counter for the main MPU 82 to specify the number of remaining round games in the opening/closing execution mode. Further, information on the open duration period of the round game (specifically, 29 seconds) is set in the special figure side timer counter. In addition, "10" is set in the winning counter provided in the main side RAM 84. The prize winning counter is a counter for the main MPU 82 to specify the number of prizes remaining from the upper limit number of winning prizes. Further, by outputting a drive signal to the special electric drive unit 32b, the special electric prize winning device 32 is brought into an open state. Thereafter, add 1 to the value of the special figure special electric counter. As a result, the value of the special figure special electricity counter becomes "4" corresponding to the special electricity release process (step S610).

<Processing while special electric line is open>
Next, the special train opening process executed in step S610 of the special figure special train control process (FIG. 18) will be described.

When the value of the special figure side timer counter is "0", that is, when the open duration period has elapsed, the value of the round counter of the main side RAM 84 is subtracted by 1, and the drive signal to the special electric drive unit 32b is By stopping the output, the special electric prize winning device 32 is brought into a closed state. In addition, when a game ball enters the special electric winning device 32, the value of the winning prize counter is subtracted by 1, and if the value of the winning prize counter after 1 subtraction is "0", the main side RAM 84 By decrementing the value of the round counter by 1 and stopping the output of the drive signal to the special electric drive unit 32b, the special electric winning device 32 is brought into a closed state. In addition, when the value of the round counter is subtracted by 1, if the value of the round counter after subtracting 1 is 1 or more, after setting the interval period information (specifically 3 seconds) to the special drawing side timer counter. , add 1 to the value of the special figure special electric counter. As a result, the value of the special train special train counter becomes "5" corresponding to the special train closed process (step S611). On the other hand, if the value of the round counter after subtracting 1 is "0", information on the ending period (specifically 5 seconds) is set in the special map side timer counter, and an ending command is sent to the sound and light side MPU 93. After that, add 2 to the value of the special figure special electric counter. As a result, the value of the special figure special electric line counter becomes "6" corresponding to the special electric line end process (step S612). In addition, when the sound and light side MPU 93 receives the ending command, it causes the symbol display device 41, the display light emitting section 64, and the speaker section 65 to perform a performance corresponding to the ending period.

<Processing during special train closure>
Next, the special train closed process executed in step S611 of the special train special train control process (FIG. 18) will be described.

If the value of the special figure side timer counter is "0", that is, if the interval period has elapsed, set the information on the open duration period of the round game (specifically 29 seconds) to the special figure side timer counter. . Also, the winning counter of the main side RAM 84 is set to "10". Further, by outputting a drive signal to the special electric drive unit 32b, the special electric prize winning device 32 is brought into an open state. Thereafter, the value of the special figure special electric counter is subtracted by 1. As a result, the value of the special figure special electric line counter becomes "4" corresponding to the special electric line opening process (step S610).

<Special call termination process>
Next, the special train termination process executed in step S612 of the special figure special train control process (FIG. 18) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 23.

If the value of the special figure side timer counter is "0", that is, if the ending period has elapsed (step S1101: YES), the game result that triggered the current opening/closing execution mode is a 5R high probability result or a 10R If it is a high probability result (step S1102: YES), the high probability flag in the main side RAM 84 is set to "1" (step S1103). As already explained, the high probability flag is a flag used by the main MPU 82 to specify whether or not the win/fail lottery mode is the high probability mode. By setting the high probability flag to "1", the win/fail lottery mode becomes the high probability mode.

Thereafter, the first high frequency flag of the main side RAM 84 is set to "1" and the second high frequency flag of the main side RAM 84 is cleared to "0" (step S1104). As already explained, the first high-frequency flag is a flag for specifying in the main MPU 82 whether the support mode is the first high-frequency support mode, and the second high-frequency flag is a flag for specifying whether or not the support mode is the first high-frequency support mode. This is a flag for the main MPU 82 to specify whether or not it is in the second high-frequency support mode. By setting the first high frequency flag to "1" and clearing the second high frequency flag to "0", the support mode becomes the first high frequency support mode.

Thereafter, information of "100", which is the number of high probability continuations, is set in the high probability state counter 133 provided in the main side RAM 84 (step S1105). The high probability state counter 133 is a counter for the main MPU 82 to specify the remaining number of continuations of the high probability mode. In this pachinko machine 10, when the opening/closing execution mode triggered by a 5R high-accuracy result or a 10R high-accuracy result ends, it becomes a high probability mode and a first high-frequency support mode. If the number of games played without a new jackpot result in a certain mode reaches 100, which is the high probability continuation number, then the low probability mode and It will be in low frequency support mode.

On the other hand, if the game result that triggered the current opening/closing execution mode is a 5R low probability result (step S1102: NO), the high probability flag in the main side RAM 84 is cleared to "0" (step S1106). When the high probability flag is cleared to "0", the win/fail lottery mode becomes the low probability mode. Thereafter, the first high frequency flag of the main side RAM 84 is set to "1" and the second high frequency flag of the main side RAM 84 is cleared to "0" (step S1107). By setting the first high frequency flag to "1" and clearing the second high frequency flag to "0", the support mode becomes the first high frequency support mode.

Thereafter, information of "100", which is the number of times the first time saving is continued, is set in the time saving state counter 134 provided in the main side RAM 84 (step S1108). The time saving state counter 134 is a counter for the main MPU 82 to specify the remaining number of continuations of the high frequency support mode (first high frequency support mode or second high frequency support mode) in the low probability mode. In this pachinko machine 10, when the opening/closing execution mode triggered by the 5R low-probability result ends, it enters the low-probability mode and the first high-frequency support mode. In the low probability mode and the first high frequency support mode, if the number of games played without a new jackpot result reaching the first time saving continuation number, no jackpot result has occurred. However, it becomes low probability mode and low frequency support mode.

When the process of step S1105 or the process of step S1108 is executed, a process of transmitting a status designation command is executed (step S1019). In the transmission processing, a state designation command corresponding to the state of the pachinko machine 10 determined by the processing of steps S1102 to S1108 is transmitted to the sound-light side MPU 93. The sound and light side MPU 93 executes processing for causing the symbol display device 41, the display light emitting section 64, and the speaker section 65 to perform effects corresponding to the contents of the received state specifying command. Thereafter, the special figure special electric counter is cleared to "0". As a result, the value of the special figure special electric counter becomes "0" corresponding to the special figure fluctuation start process (step S606).

<Subtraction processing of high probability state counter 133>
Next, the subtraction process of the high probability state counter 133 executed in step S1012 of the special figure confirmation process (FIG. 22) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 24.

When the high probability flag in the main side RAM 84 is set to "1" (step S1201: YES), that is, when the win/fail lottery mode is the high probability mode, the value of the high probability state counter 133 in the main side RAM 84 is subtracted by 1. (Step S1202). If the value of the high probability state counter 133 after the subtraction by 1 is "0" (step S1203: YES), the situation is that the high probability mode is the first high frequency support mode after the end of the opening/closing execution mode. This means that 100 games, which is a high probability continuation number, have been played. In this case, the high probability flag is cleared to "0" (step S1204), and the first high frequency flag in the main side RAM 84 is cleared to "0" (step S1205). As a result, a normal gaming state is established, which is a low probability mode and a low frequency support mode. Thereafter, a process for transmitting a status designation command is executed (step S1206). In the transmission process, a state designation command indicating that the high probability state has ended is transmitted to the sound-light side MPU 93. By receiving the state designation command, the sound and light side MPU 93 terminates the execution of the performance corresponding to the high probability mode in the symbol display device 41, the display light emitting unit 64, and the speaker unit 65, and starts the performance corresponding to the normal gaming state. start.

<Setting process for time-saving results>
Next, the setting process for time-saving results executed in step S1010 of the special figure confirmation process (FIG. 22) will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 25.

If the game result of the current game round is a time saving result (step S1301: YES), it is determined whether the high probability flag in the main side RAM 84 is set to "1" (step S1302). If the high probability flag is set to "1" (step S1302: YES), this time-saving result setting process is ended without executing the process from step S1303 onwards. In other words, even if a time-saving result (first time-saving result or second time-saving result) is selected in the validity judgment process of a game run executed in a high-probability mode, the second high-frequency support is triggered by the time-saving result. Time-saving results are disabled without setting the mode.

Here, in the special figure confirmation process (FIG. 22), as already explained, the time-saving result setting process (FIG. 25) is executed before the subtraction process of the high probability state counter 133 (FIG. 24). As a result, in the last game round in the high probability mode and the first high frequency support mode, the value of the high probability state counter 133 is subtracted by 1 in the subtraction process (FIG. 24) of the high probability state counter 133, and the corresponding When the value of the high probability state counter 133 becomes "0", the time saving result setting process (FIG. 25) is executed before the high probability flag and the first high frequency flag are cleared to "0". Become. If the time-saving result setting process (Figure 25) is executed at this timing, the high probability flag is still set to "1", so the second high-frequency support mode is set based on the time-saving result. will not be performed. Therefore, it is possible to reliably invalidate the time-saving result in the game round in which the validity determination process is executed in the execution mode corresponding to the high probability mode. In addition, such an effect can be achieved by changing the processing order in which the time-saving result setting process (Fig. 25) is executed before the subtraction process of the high probability state counter 133 (Fig. 24) in the special figure confirmation process (Fig. 22). This can be achieved by setting.

If the high probability flag is not set to "1" (step S1302: NO), it is determined whether the first high frequency flag or the second high frequency flag of the main side RAM 84 is set to "1" ( Step S1303, Step S1304). That is, it is determined whether the support mode is either the first high-frequency support mode or the second high-frequency support mode. If the support mode is the first high-frequency support mode or the second high-frequency support mode (step S1303 or step S1304: YES), the setting process for time-saving results is ended without executing the processes after step S1305. In other words, even if a time-saving result (first time-saving result or second time-saving result) is selected in the process of determining the validity of a gaming session executed in the first high-frequency support mode or the second high-frequency support mode, the time-saving result If the setting process for results (FIG. 25) is executed in the first high-frequency support mode or the second high-frequency support mode, the setting of the second high-frequency support mode is triggered by the time-saving result. The time-saving result is invalidated without being performed. This makes it possible to prevent additional settings for transitioning to the high-frequency support mode from being executed midway through the high-frequency support mode.

If the support mode is the low frequency support mode (steps S1303 and S1304: NO), the second high frequency flag of the main side RAM 84 is set to "1" (step S1305). As a result, the support mode becomes the second high-frequency support mode. If the current time saving result is the first time saving result (step S1306: YES), information of "100", which is the number of times the first time saving is continued, is stored in the time saving state counter 134 (see FIG. 6) provided in the main side RAM 84. is set (step S1307), and if the current time saving result is the second time saving result (step S1306: NO), information of "150", which is the number of times the second time saving is continued, is set in the time saving state counter 134 (step S1308). ). The time saving state counter 134 is a counter used by the main MPU 82 to specify the remaining number of continuations of the time saving state which is a low probability mode and is a high frequency support mode (first high frequency support mode or second high frequency support mode). It is. If the number of games played without a new jackpot result in a time-saving state reaches the first time-saving continuation count of 100 or the second time-saving continuation count of 150, a jackpot will be awarded. Low probability mode and low frequency support mode even if no result has occurred.

When the process of step S1307 or the process of step S1308 is executed, a process of transmitting a status designation command is executed (step S1309). In the transmission process, a state designation command indicating that the time saving state has started is transmitted to the sound-light side MPU 93. The state specification command also includes information on the currently set number of time saving continuations. When the sound and light side MPU 93 receives the state designation command, it performs a process for causing the symbol display device 41, the display light emitting section 64, and the speaker section 65 to execute an effect indicating that the time saving state is started. Execute.

Even if a time-saving result is selected in the validity determination process as described above, the time-saving result setting process (Fig. There are cases where the second high-frequency support mode is set based on the time saving result, and cases where it is not set. In this case, the stop result that is stopped and displayed on the special figure display sections 37a and 37b in the game round in which the time-saving result is selected in the judgment process is the setting of the second high-frequency support mode triggered by the time-saving result. While it does not change depending on whether or not it is performed, the stop result displayed on the symbol display device 41 changes depending on whether or not the second high-frequency support mode is set based on the time saving result. . This content will be explained in detail below. FIG. 26 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the stop results of the special symbol display sections 37a and 37b and the stop result of the symbol display device 41.

As already explained, the game results that can be selected by the game round propriety determination process (step S805) and the various distribution determination processes (step S807, step S811) include 5R low probability result, 5R high probability result, 10R high probability result, There are a first time saving result, a second time saving result, and a negative result. The stop result that is stopped and displayed as a confirmed display of the game round on the special figure display sections 37a and 37b is "1" in the case of a 5R low-probability result, and "2" in the case of a 5R high-probability result, 10R In the case of a highly accurate result, it is "3", in the case of the first time-saving result, it is "4", in the case of the second time-saving result, it is "5", and in the case of a wrong result, it is "-". ”. These stop results do not change regardless of the game situation. Therefore, the manager of the game hall can uniquely understand the game results of the game round by checking the stop results of the special figure display sections 37a and 37b.

The stop result that is stopped and displayed on the symbol display device 41 as a confirmation of the game round does not change regardless of the gaming situation if it is a jackpot result or a miss result, but it is a time-saving result. In some cases, it changes depending on the gaming situation. Specifically, in the case of a 5R low-probability result, the same even-numbered symbol combination is stopped and displayed on any of the valid lines L1 to L5 of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, and red is stopped and displayed in the status suggestion area 43. Ru. In the case of a 5R high accuracy result, a combination of the same odd symbols other than the "7" symbol is stopped and displayed on any of the valid lines L1 to L5 of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, and red is stopped in the status suggestion area 43. Is displayed. In the case of a 10R high accuracy result, the symbol combination "7" is stopped and displayed on any of the active lines L1 to L5 of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, and red is also stopped and displayed in the status suggestion area 43. In the case of a winning result, the symbol combination corresponding to the jackpot result, the first time-saving symbol combination (“1, 2, 3”), and the second time-saving symbol are placed on each active line L1 to L5 of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. Combinations of missing symbols other than the combination ("3, 4, 1") are stopped and displayed, and red is also stopped and displayed in the state suggestion area 43.

In the case of the first time-saving result, the normal gaming state is a low probability mode and a low-frequency support mode, or the time-saving state is a low probability mode and a high-frequency support mode (the first high-frequency support mode or the second high-frequency support mode). If it is the last game round, the first time saving symbol combination (“1, 2, 3”) is stopped and displayed on any of the valid lines L1 to L5 of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, and the state suggestion area 43 is displayed in red. In the case of the second time-saving result, the normal gaming state is a low probability mode and a low-frequency support mode, or the time-saving state is a low probability mode and a high-frequency support mode (the first high-frequency support mode or the second high-frequency support mode). If it is the last game round, the second time saving symbol combination ("3, 4, 1") is stopped and displayed on any of the active lines L1 to L5 of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, and the state suggestion area 43 is displayed in red. Although the details will be described later, in the last game in the time saving state, after the time saving state counter 134 subtraction process (step S1008) for ending the time saving state is executed, the setting process for the time saving result (FIG. 25) is performed. is executed, the time saving state has already ended and the normal gaming state has been reached by the time the time saving result setting process (FIG. 25) is executed.

FIG. 27(a) shows the first special symbol display section 37a and the symbol display device when the first time saving result is obtained in the final game round in the normal gaming state or the time saving state and the first time saving result is obtained in the game round triggered by the first reservation information. 41 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the stop result of No. 41. FIG. As shown in FIG. 27(a1), in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 of the symbol display device 41, the combination of the first time saving symbols ("1, 2, 3") is displayed in a stopped state on the middle line L2, indicating the state. In the area 43, red is displayed in a stopped state. Further, as shown in FIG. 27(a2), "4", which is the stop result corresponding to the first time saving result, is displayed in the first special symbol display section 37a.

On the other hand, if the game is in a high probability mode and the first high frequency support mode, which is a high probability state, or in a game time other than the final game time in the time saving state, the symbol sequence will be the first time saving result or the second time saving result. In Z1 to Z3, combinations of out-of-reach symbols are stopped and displayed on each active line L1 to L5. The combinations of symbols that are out of reach include the combination of symbols that correspond to the jackpot result, the combination of the first time-saving symbols ("1, 2, 3"), and the combination of the second time-saving symbols ("3, 4, 1"). ) and combinations of symbols other than the combination of out-of-reach symbols. In the status suggestion area 43, a blue color is stopped and displayed in the case of the first time saving result, and a green color is stopped and displayed in the case of the second time saving result.

FIG. 27(b) shows the second special figure display section 37b in the case where the first time saving result is obtained in a game round other than the last game round in the high probability state or the time saving state and triggered by the second reservation information. and is an explanatory diagram for explaining the result of stopping the symbol display device 41. As shown in FIG. 27(b2), "4", which is the stop result corresponding to the first time saving result, is displayed on the second special symbol display section 37b. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 27(b1), in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 of the symbol display device 41, combinations of out-of-reach symbols are stopped and displayed on each active line L1 to L5, and in the state suggestion area 43 The blue color is displayed as stopped.

If it is a time saving result that does not trigger the setting of the second high frequency support mode (first time saving result or second time saving result), a combination of non-reach out symbols is placed on each active line L1 to L5 of symbol rows Z1 to Z3. is stopped and displayed. The non-reach out-of-reach symbol combination is also stopped and displayed when the result of the win/fail determination process is an out-of-reach result.

FIG. 27(c) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the result of stopping the second special symbol display section 37b and the symbol display device 41 when the result of the validity judgment process is incorrect in the game round triggered by the second reservation information. It is. As shown in FIG. 27(c2), a "-" which is a stop result corresponding to a missed result is displayed on the second special figure display section 37b. In addition, as shown in FIG. 27(c1), combinations of out-of-reach symbols are stopped and displayed on each active line L1 to L5 in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 of the symbol display device 41, and the combination of out-of-reach symbols is displayed in the state suggestion area 43. Red is displayed as stopped.

The display area of the symbol display device 41 is wider than the display area of the special symbol display portions 37a, 37b, and the symbol display device 41 is located approximately in the center of the gaming area PA, whereas the special symbol display portions 37a, 37b Since it is arranged on the corner side of the game area PA, the symbol display device 41 attracts more attention from the player than the special symbol display sections 37a and 37b. In addition, while the symbol display device 41 executes a wide variety of effects such as a reach display, the special symbol display sections 37a and 37b display fluctuating symbols in a fixed manner in response to game results, as already explained. Since only the result of stopping is displayed, from this point of view as well, the symbol display device 41 attracts more attention from the player than the special symbol display sections 37a and 37b. Under these circumstances, if the time saving result (first time saving result or second time saving result) does not trigger the setting of the second high frequency support mode, the result will fall outside each valid line L1 to L5 of symbol rows Z1 to Z3. By stopping and displaying the combination of non-reach symbols that may be stopped and displayed in the case of , it is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize that the time-saving result has been invalidated even though it has been selected. Become.

If the time-saving result does not trigger the setting of the second high-frequency support mode (first time-saving result or second time-saving result), the validity judgment process is applied to each valid line L1 to L5 of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 as described above. Even if a combination of non-reach out symbols that is stopped and displayed even when the result is a miss result is stopped, the state suggestion area 43 shows a stop result that is different from when the result of the validity judgment process is a miss result. Stop display. In other words, in the cases of FIGS. 27(b) and 27(c), if the first time saving result does not trigger the setting of the second high-frequency support mode, the state will change as shown in FIG. 27(b). While the blue color is stopped and displayed in the suggestion area 43, in the case of an incorrect result, the red color is stopped and displayed in the status suggestion area 43 as shown in FIG. 27(c). In addition, if the second time-saving result does not trigger the setting of the second high-frequency support mode, the green color is stopped and displayed in the status suggestion area 43, whereas if it is a negative result, the status suggestion area 43 The red color will be stopped. As a result, in a situation where it is difficult for the game hall manager to visually recognize the special symbol display sections 37a and 37b, the combination of non-reach symbols is stopped and displayed on each valid line L1 to L5 of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 on the symbol display device 41. In this case, by checking the status suggestion area 43, it is possible to understand whether the result is a time saving result or a wrong result.

Even if it is a first time saving result that does not trigger the setting of the second high-frequency support mode, or a second time result that does not trigger the setting of the second high-frequency support mode, the symbol row Z1 ~ Even if a combination of out-of-reach symbols is stopped and displayed on each active line L1 to L5 of Z3, the state suggestion area 43 shows a different stop result depending on whether it is the first time saving result or the second time saving result. Stop display. In other words, if the first time-saving result does not trigger the setting of the second high-frequency support mode, the blue color is stopped and displayed in the status suggestion area 43; If the second time saving result does not occur, a green color is stopped and displayed in the status suggestion area 43. As a result, in a situation where it is difficult for the game hall manager to visually recognize the special symbol display sections 37a and 37b, the combination of non-reach symbols is stopped and displayed on each valid line L1 to L5 of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 on the symbol display device 41. In this case, by checking the status suggestion area 43, you can not only determine whether the result is a time-saving result or a negative result, but also whether it is a first time-saving result or a second time-saving result if it is a time-saving result. It becomes possible to understand.

A processing configuration that enables the display of the stop result on the symbol display device 41 as described above will be explained. FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing a variation pattern determination process executed by the audio-light side MPU 93. Note that the process of determining the variation pattern is executed when a variation command and a type command are received from the main MPU 82.

If the type command received this time contains information indicating that the game round to be started this time corresponds to the jackpot result (step S1401: YES), execute the stop symbol determination process for the jackpot result. (Step S1402). In the stop symbol determination process for the jackpot result, a combination of stop symbols corresponding to the type of the current jackpot result is selected as the stop result to be stopped and displayed in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 of the symbol display device 41. The relationship between the type of jackpot result and the combination of stopped symbols is as shown in FIG. 26. In addition, in the stop symbol determination process for the jackpot result, active lines L1 to L5 are determined by lottery to stop and display the combination of the stop symbols corresponding to the type of the current jackpot result. Thereafter, red is selected as the stop result in the state suggestion area 43 of the symbol display device 41 (step S1403).

If the type command received this time contains information indicating that the game round to be started this time corresponds to a time-saving result (step S1404: YES), the current gaming state is a high probability state and a time-saving state. If it is not the current gaming state (step S1405 and step S1406: NO), or even if the current gaming state is a time saving state, it is the last game in the time saving state (step S1406 and step S1407: YES), for time saving suggestion. The stop symbol determination process is executed (step S1408). In addition, the sound-light side MPU 93 can specify whether the current gaming state is a normal gaming state, a high probability state, or a time-saving state based on the state designation command received from the main-side MPU 82, and can also support the start of the time-saving state. It is possible to specify whether or not it is the last game in the time saving state by the number of times the variation command is received after receiving the state specifying command.

In the stop symbol determination process for time saving suggestion, a combination of stop symbols corresponding to the type of the current time saving result is selected as the stop result to be stopped and displayed on the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 of the symbol display device 41. Specifically, if the result is the first time saving result, select the combination of the first time saving symbols ("1, 2, 3"), and if the result is the second time saving result, select the combination of the second time saving symbols ("3, 3"). 4.1). In addition, in the time-saving suggestion stop symbol determination process, active lines L1 to L5 are determined by lottery to stop and display the combination of stop symbols corresponding to the type of time-saving result of this time. Thereafter, red is selected as the stop result in the state suggestion area 43 of the symbol display device 41 (step S1409).

On the other hand, if the type command received this time contains information indicating that the game round to be started this time corresponds to the time-saving result (step S1404: YES), the current game state is If it is a high probability state (step S1405: YES), or if the current gaming state is a time saving state and it is not the final game round of the time saving state (step S1406: YES, step S1407: NO), for non-reach out The stop symbol determination process is executed (step S1410). In the stop pattern determination process for non-reach out, the combination of symbols corresponding to the jackpot result and the combination of the first time-saving symbols ("1, 2・3"), the combination of symbols that generate the second time reduction ("3, 4, 1"), and the combination of non-reach out symbols that are combinations other than the combination of out-of-reach symbols will be stopped and displayed by lottery. decide.

After that, if information indicating that the game round to be started this time corresponds to the first time saving result is set in the type command received this time (step S1411: YES), the symbol display device 41 The color blue is selected as the stop result of the state suggestion area 43 (step S1412). Further, if information indicating that the game round to be started this time corresponds to the second time saving result is set in the type command received this time (step S1411: NO), the symbol display device 41 The color green is selected as the stop result of the state suggestion area 43 (step S1413).

If information indicating that the game round to be started this time corresponds to a winning result is set in the type command received this time (step S1404: NO), execute stop symbol determination processing for a winning result. (Step S1414). In the stop symbol determination process for a missed result, if the fluctuation command received this time contains information on the fluctuation display period indicating that the game round to be started this time corresponds to the occurrence of the reach display. As a stop result to be stopped and displayed on the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 of the symbol display device 41, a combination of out-of-reach symbols is determined by lottery, and effective lines L1 to L5 are set to stop and display the determined combination of out-of-reach symbols. To be determined by lottery. In addition, in the stop symbol determination process for a missed result, information on the fluctuation display period indicating that the game round to be started this time does not correspond to the occurrence of the reach display is set in the fluctuation command received this time. If so, the combination of symbols corresponding to the jackpot result, the first time-saving symbol combination (“1, 2, 3”), the second time-saving symbol combination (“3, 4, 1”), and the missed reach. A stop result in which a symbol combination other than the symbol combination is stopped and displayed is determined by lottery. Thereafter, red is selected as the stop result in the state suggestion area 43 of the symbol display device 41 (step S1415).

When the process of step S1403, the process of step S1409, the process of step S1412, the process of step S1413, or the process of step S1415 is executed, a variation pattern determination process is executed (step S1416). In the variation pattern determination process, first, a preview lottery process is executed to determine whether or not a preview display is to be performed and, if a preview display is to be performed, the type thereof. Then, as a result of the advance notice lottery process, a fluctuation pattern corresponding to the stop result determined in steps S1401 to S1415 and the information on the fluctuation display period included in the fluctuation command received this time is selected, and the fluctuation pattern is applied to the selected fluctuation pattern. The corresponding fluctuation pattern table is read from the audio-optical side ROM 94 to the audio-optical side RAM 95. The sound and light side MPU 93 controls the display light emitting section 64 and the speaker section 65 according to the read variation pattern table, thereby causing the display light emitting section 64 and the speaker section 65 to execute the effect of the variation pattern corresponding to the current game round. .

Thereafter, a variation pattern command corresponding to the variation pattern determined in step S1416 is transmitted to the display-side MPU 103 (step S1417). The display-side MPU 1417 reads the display control table corresponding to the received variation pattern command from the display-side ROM 104 to the display-side RAM 105. The display side MPU 103 controls the symbol display device 41 according to the read display control table, thereby causing the symbol display device 41 to execute a display effect of a variable pattern corresponding to the current game round. In this case, the stop results to be stopped and displayed in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 of the symbol display device 41 and the stop results to be stopped and displayed in the state suggestion area 43 of the symbol display device 41 in the relevant game round are determined by the fluctuation pattern determination process (FIG. 28). This is the stop result determined in steps S1401 to S1415.

<Subtraction processing of ceiling counter 131>
Next, the subtraction process of the ceiling counter 131 executed in step S1011 of the special figure confirmation process (FIG. 22) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 29.

First, it is determined whether the high probability flag in the main side RAM 84 is set to "1" (step S1501). Then, if the high probability flag is set to "1" (step S1501: YES), the subtraction process of the main ceiling counter 131 is ended without executing the processes after step S1502. In other words, in a game played in a high probability mode, the value of the ceiling counter 131 is not subtracted, and furthermore, the ceiling time is shortened because the value of the ceiling counter 131 is not subtracted. Nor.

Here, in the special figure confirmation process (FIG. 22), as already explained, the subtraction process of the ceiling counter 131 (FIG. 29) is executed before the subtraction process of the high probability state counter 133 (FIG. 24). As a result, in the last game round in the high probability mode and the first high frequency support mode, the value of the high probability state counter 133 is subtracted by 1 in the subtraction process (FIG. 24) of the high probability state counter 133, and the corresponding Since the value of the high probability state counter 133 becomes "0", the subtraction process (FIG. 29) of the ceiling counter 131 is executed before the high probability flag and the first high frequency flag are cleared to "0". Become. If the subtraction process (FIG. 29) of the ceiling counter 131 is executed at this timing, the value of the ceiling counter 131 is not subtracted because "1" is still set in the high probability flag. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the value of the ceiling counter 131 from being subtracted in the game round in which the validity determination process is executed in the execution mode corresponding to the high probability mode. In addition, such an effect can be obtained by changing the processing order in which the subtraction process of the ceiling counter 131 (FIG. 29) is executed before the subtraction process of the high probability state counter 133 (FIG. 24) in the special figure confirmation process (FIG. 22). This can be achieved by setting.

If the high probability flag is not set to "1" (step S1501: NO), it is determined whether the value of the ceiling counter 131 is 1 or more (step S1502). If the value of the ceiling counter 131 is "0" (step S1502: NO), the subtraction process of the main ceiling counter 131 is ended without executing the processes after step S1503. As already explained, the process of setting information on the ceiling counter 131 is performed when none of the "RAM clear operation," "setting change operation," and "setting confirmation operation" are executed and the gaming machine main body 12 is in an open state. Step S114 when the supply of operating power is started in a certain situation, step S122 when an information abnormality has occurred in the main side RAM 84 when the supply of operating power is started, and the opening/closing execution mode is started. In this case, only step S1005 is performed, and after the value of the ceiling counter 131 becomes "0", the value of the ceiling counter 131 is maintained at "0" unless any of the above processes is executed. On the other hand, ceiling time reduction occurs when the value of the ceiling counter 131 is 1 or more and the value of the ceiling counter 131 is subtracted by 1, and the value of the ceiling counter 131 becomes "0". In this case, if the value of the ceiling counter 131 is "0" as described above (step S1502: NO), the subtraction process of the main ceiling counter 131 is ended without executing the processes after step S1503. As a result, the value of the ceiling counter 131 after being subtracted by 1 becomes "0", and a time-saving state triggered by the ceiling time-saving occurs, and in the time-saving state, the number of consecutive game times for time-saving is completed without a jackpot result occurring. When the time saving state ends and the normal gaming state is entered, even if game rounds in which a jackpot result does not occur are repeated thereafter, the time saving state triggered by the ceiling time saving does not occur. Therefore, it is possible to prevent excessive time reduction conditions triggered by ceiling time reduction from occurring.

If the value of the ceiling counter 131 is 1 or more (step S1502: YES), the value of the ceiling counter 131 is subtracted by 1 (step S1503), and it is determined whether the value of the ceiling counter 131 after the 1 subtraction is "0" or not. (Step S1504). If the value of the ceiling counter 131 is "0" (step S1504: YES), on the condition that the second high frequency flag of the main side RAM 84 is not set to "1" (step S1505: NO), The second high-frequency flag of the RAM 84 is set to "1" (step S1506), and the information of "100", which is the number of times the first time saving is continued, is set to the time saving state counter 134 of the main side RAM 84 (step S1507). This results in a time saving state which is a low probability mode and a second high frequency support mode. In addition, the time saving state ends when the number of games played without a jackpot result reaches 100, which is the first time saving continuation number, and the normal game which is the low probability mode and low frequency support mode ends. state.

Thereafter, a process for transmitting a status designation command is executed (step S1508). In the transmission process, a state designation command indicating that the time saving state has started is transmitted to the sound-light side MPU 93. The state designation command also includes information on the number of first time saving continuations set this time. When the sound and light side MPU 93 receives the state designation command, it performs a process for causing the symbol display device 41, the display light emitting section 64, and the speaker section 65 to execute an effect indicating that the time saving state is started. Execute.

On the other hand, even if the value of the ceiling counter 131 after subtracting 1 becomes "0", if the second high-frequency flag is set to "1", the processes of steps S1506 to S1508 are not executed, so this time The setting of the second high-frequency support mode triggered by the ceiling time reduction is not performed, and the current ceiling time reduction is invalidated. In other words, even if the fixed ceiling number of games is completed in a time saving state, the ceiling time saving is disabled without setting the second high-frequency support mode using the ceiling time saving as an opportunity. This makes it possible to prevent additional settings for transitioning to the high-frequency support mode from being executed midway through the high-frequency support mode. Note that the first high-frequency support mode is set only until 100 games are played after the opening/closing execution mode, whereas the fixed ceiling number of 500 games is set when the opening/closing execution mode is started. is set, the value of the ceiling counter 131 after being subtracted by 1 will never become "0" in the first high-frequency support mode.

When an affirmative determination is made in step S1505 or when the process in step S1508 is executed, the reach high frequency state flag in the main side RAM 84 is cleared to "0" (step S1509). As a result, when a ceiling time reduction occurs, the reach high frequency state ends regardless of whether or not the second high frequency support mode is set using the ceiling time reduction as a trigger.

<Subtraction processing of time saving state counter 134>
Next, the subtraction process of the time saving state counter 134 executed in step S1008 of the special figure confirmation process (FIG. 22) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 30.

First, it is determined whether the high probability flag in the main side RAM 84 is set to "1" (step S1601). If the high probability flag is set to "1" (step S1601: YES), the process of subtracting the time-saving state counter 134 is ended without executing the processes after step S1602. In a high probability state, the support mode becomes the first high frequency support mode, but the trigger for ending the high probability state is specified using the high probability state counter 133 as described above, so "1" is set in the high probability flag. is set, the process for subtracting the value of the time saving state counter 134 is not executed.

When the high probability flag is not set to "1" and the first high frequency flag or the second high frequency flag of the main side RAM 84 is set to "1" (step S1602: YES), that is, the time is saved. If the time saving state counter 134 in the main side RAM 84 is in the state, the value of the time saving state counter 134 is subtracted by 1 (step S1603), and if the value of the time saving state counter 134 after the 1 subtraction is "0" (step S1604: YES), the main Both the first high frequency flag and the second high frequency flag in the side RAM 84 are cleared to "0" (step S1605). As a result, if it was the first high-frequency support mode, the first high-frequency support mode ends and becomes the low-frequency support mode, and if it was the second high-frequency support mode, the second high-frequency support mode ends. mode ends and enters infrequent support mode. In other words, the time saving state ends and the normal gaming state returns.

Thereafter, a process for transmitting a status designation command is executed (step S1606). In the transmission process, a state designation command indicating that the time saving state has ended is transmitted to the sound-light side MPU 93. By receiving the state designation command, the sound and light side MPU 93 terminates the execution of the performance corresponding to the time saving state in the symbol display device 41, the display light emitting unit 64, and the speaker unit 65, and starts the performance corresponding to the normal gaming state. Let it start.

Here, in the special figure confirmation process (FIG. 22), as already explained, before the time-saving result setting process (FIG. 25), the time-saving state counter 134 subtraction process (FIG. 30) is executed, Before the subtraction process of the ceiling counter 131 (FIG. 29), the subtraction process of the time saving state counter 134 (FIG. 30) is executed. In addition, in the special figure confirmation process (FIG. 22), as already explained, the time-saving result setting process (FIG. 25) is executed before the ceiling counter 131 subtraction process (FIG. 29). The effect of having such a process execution order set will be explained with reference to the time chart of FIG. 31. FIG. 31(a) shows a period in which a game round is being executed, FIG. 31(b) shows a period in a time saving state, and FIG. 31(c) shows a period in which the time saving state counter 134 is subtracted (step S1603). 31(d) shows the timing when setting the time saving state (steps S1305 to S1308) triggered by the time saving result, and FIG. 31(e) shows the timing when the ceiling counter 131 is subtracted (step S1503). ) is executed.

First, a case will be described in which, in the final game round in the time saving state, the result of the judgment process is a time saving result and the value of the ceiling counter 131 becomes "0".

In the time saving state as shown in FIG. 31(b), a game round is started at timing t1 as shown in FIG. 31(a). Then, as the variable display period of the game round passes, the stop result corresponding to the game result is displayed on the side that is the target of execution of the game round among the first special figure display section 37a and the second special figure display section 37b. At the same time, the stop result corresponding to the game result is displayed as a confirmed result on the symbol display device 41. When the final stop period passes in a state where these stop results are confirmed and displayed, the processes after step S1002 in the special symbol confirmation process (FIG. 22) are executed. In this case, since the game result of the game round is not a jackpot result, a negative determination is made in step S1002 of the special figure confirmation process (FIG. 22), and the process from step S1008 onwards is executed.

In the processing after step S1008, first, a subtraction process (FIG. 30) of the time saving state counter 134 is executed. Since this time is a game run executed in the time saving state, the time saving state counter 134 is set as shown in FIG. Subtract 1 from the value of . Then, when the value of the time saving state counter 134 after the subtraction by 1 becomes "0", the first high frequency flag and the second high frequency flag of the main side RAM 84 are cleared to "0", so that at the timing of t2. As shown in FIG. 31(b), the current time saving state ends and the normal gaming state, which is a low probability mode and a low frequency support mode, is entered.

After that, in the special figure confirmation process (Figure 22), execute the setting process for time-saving results (Figure 25) in which the execution order of the process is set to a later order than the process of subtracting the time-saving state counter 134 (Figure 30). do. Since the time-saving result is selected in the validity judgment process this time, the current time-saving result is selected at timing t3, which is the timing when the time-saving result setting process (Fig. 25) is being executed, as shown in Fig. 31(d). The time saving state is set based on the trigger. Therefore, at the timing t3, the gaming state becomes a time saving state where the gaming state is the low probability mode and the second high frequency support mode, as shown in FIG. 31(b). Furthermore, since the current time saving result is the second time saving result, information of "150", which is the number of times the second time saving is continued, is set in the time saving state counter 134.

After that, in the special figure confirmation process (Figure 22), the subtraction process (Figure 29) of the ceiling counter 131 is executed, which is set to a later order than the time-saving result setting process (Figure 25). . At timing t4, which is the timing during which the ceiling counter 131 is performing the subtraction process (FIG. 29), the value of the ceiling counter 131 is subtracted by 1 as shown in FIG. The value becomes "0". In other words, a ceiling time reduction occurs. However, as already explained, the result of the validity judgment process in the current game round is a time saving result, and the time saving state has already been set using the time saving result as a trigger at the timing t3 in the current game round. Therefore, the ceiling time reduction that occurred this time is invalidated. Thereafter, the current game round ends at timing t5 as shown in FIG. 31(a).

As described above, in the special drawing confirmation process (Figure 22), the time-saving result setting process (Figure 25) is set to a later order of execution than the time-saving state counter 134 subtraction process (Figure 30). By doing so, even if the result of the validity judgment process is a time saving result in a game round other than the last game round in the time saving state, the second high frequency support mode is not set based on the time saving result. If the result of the propriety determination process in the final game round in the time-saving state is a time-saving result, it is possible to set the second high-frequency support mode using the time-saving result as a trigger. This prevents the time-saving state from being newly set in the middle of the time-saving state, thereby preventing the time-saving state from continuing excessively. By validating the setting of the time saving state, it is possible to give the player as much as possible the benefit of selecting the time saving result in the validity determination process. Moreover, such excellent effects can be produced by setting the execution order of the processes as described above.

As mentioned above, in game rounds other than the last game round in the time saving state, even if the result of the judgment process is a time saving result, the setting of the second high-frequency support mode will not be performed based on the time saving result. However, in the final game in the time-saving state, if the result of the judgment process is a time-saving result, the second high-frequency support mode is set based on the time-saving result as already described. As shown, in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 of the symbol display device 41, if the result of the win/fail judgment process is a time saving result in a game other than the last game in the time saving state, non-reach out symbols are displayed on each active line L1 to L5. If the combination is stopped and displayed, and the result of the validity judgment process is a time saving result in the final game in the time saving state, a combination of time saving symbols (a combination of first time saving symbols or 2nd time-saving generating symbol combination) is stopped and displayed. Thereby, it becomes possible to set the stop result in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 of the symbol display device 41 as a stop result corresponding to whether or not the time saving result becomes a trigger for setting the time saving state.

In particular, the combination of non-reach symbols that is stopped and displayed when the result of the winning/failure judgment process is a time saving result in a game round other than the last game round in the time saving state is stopped when the result of the winning/failure judging process is a winning result. This is a combination of displayed symbols. This makes it possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize that the second high-frequency support mode will not be set based on the time saving result even though the time saving result has been obtained.

As mentioned above, if the time saving result is obtained but the second high-frequency support mode is not set based on the time saving result, symbol rows Z1 to Z3 will stop displaying if the result of the judgment process is incorrect. Even if the stop result is displayed, the special figure display sections 37a and 37b will stop display the picture corresponding to the time saving result. This allows the game hall manager to visually confirm whether or not a time saving result has occurred, regardless of whether or not the second high-frequency support mode has been set.

As mentioned above, if the time saving result is obtained but the second high-frequency support mode is not set based on the time saving result, symbol rows Z1 to Z3 will stop displaying if the result of the judgment process is incorrect. Even if the stop result is displayed, the state suggestion area 43 of the symbol display device 41 displays a stop result different from that in the case where the result of the validity determination process is a wrong result. This allows the game hall manager to visually confirm whether or not a time saving result has occurred, regardless of whether or not the second high-frequency support mode has been set.

In the special figure confirmation processing (Fig. 22), the time-saving result setting processing (Fig. 25) is set earlier than the ceiling counter 131 subtraction processing (Fig. 29), so that the validity is determined. If the value of the ceiling counter 131 after subtracting 1 becomes "0" in a game round where the result of the determination process is a time saving result, the time saving result is set as compared to the setting of the second high-frequency support mode triggered by the ceiling time saving. It becomes possible to prioritize the setting of the second high-frequency support mode triggered by the trigger. The number of continuous time reductions in the second high-frequency support mode triggered by the ceiling time reduction is fixed at 100, whereas the number of continuous time reductions in the second high-frequency support mode triggered by the time reduction results is the first time reduction result. If so, it is 100 times, and if it is the second time saving result, it is 150 times. In other words, the number of times the second high-frequency support mode continues to be shortened based on the time-saving result is greater than the number of times the second high-frequency support mode continues to be shortened based on the ceiling time-saving. In this case, as described above, the setting of the second high-frequency support mode triggered by the time saving result is given priority over the setting of the second high-frequency support mode triggered by the ceiling time saving, so that the result of the validity judgment process is When the value of a ceiling counter 131 after being subtracted by 1 becomes "0" in a game round resulting in a time saving result, it is possible to prevent the setting mode of the number of continuations of time saving from being disadvantageous to the player. Further, such excellent effects can be produced by setting the execution order of the processes as described above.

Next, a case will be described in which the result of the win/fail judgment process in the final game round in the time saving state is a negative result and the value of the ceiling counter 131 becomes "0".

In the time saving state as shown in FIG. 31(b), a game round is started at timing t6 as shown in FIG. 31(a). Then, as the variable display period of the game round passes, the stop result corresponding to the game result is displayed on the side that is the target of execution of the game round among the first special figure display section 37a and the second special figure display section 37b. At the same time, the stop result corresponding to the game result is displayed as a confirmed result on the symbol display device 41. When the final stop period passes in a state where these stop results are confirmed and displayed, the processes after step S1002 in the special symbol confirmation process (FIG. 22) are executed. In this case, since the game result of the game round is not a jackpot result, a negative determination is made in step S1002 of the special figure confirmation process (FIG. 22), and the process from step S1008 onwards is executed.

In the processing after step S1008, first, the subtraction processing (FIG. 30) of the time saving state counter 134 is executed. Since this is a game run executed in the time-saving state, the time-saving state counter 134 is set as shown in FIG. Subtract 1 from the value of . Then, when the value of the time-saving state counter 134 after the 1 subtraction becomes "0", the first high-frequency flag and the second high-frequency flag of the main side RAM 84 are cleared to "0", and at the timing of t7. As shown in FIG. 31(b), the time saving state ends and the normal gaming state, which is a low probability mode and a low frequency support mode, is entered. After that, in the special figure confirmation process (Figure 22), execute the setting process for time-saving results (Figure 25) in which the execution order of the process is set to a later order than the process of subtracting the time-saving state counter 134 (Figure 30). However, in this game round, since the result of the validity judgment process is a negative result, the time saving state is not set in the setting process.

Thereafter, in the special drawing confirmation process (Figure 22), the ceiling counter 131 subtraction process (FIG. 29) is executed, which is set to a later order than the time saving state counter 134 subtraction process (Figure 30). do. At timing t8, which is the timing when the ceiling counter 131 is executing the subtraction process (FIG. 29), the value of the ceiling counter 131 is subtracted by 1 as shown in FIG. 31(e), and the value of the ceiling counter 131 after the 1 subtraction is The value becomes "0". In other words, a ceiling time reduction occurs. Then, by setting the time saving state triggered by the occurrence of the ceiling time saving, the gaming state is set to the low probability mode and the second high frequency support mode at the timing of t8, as shown in FIG. 31(b). Time is shortened. Furthermore, since the ceiling time reduction is the trigger, information of "100", which is the number of times the first time reduction continues, is set in the time reduction state counter 134. Thereafter, the current game round ends at timing t9 as shown in FIG. 31(a).

As mentioned above, in the special drawing confirmation process (FIG. 22), the subtraction process of the ceiling counter 131 (FIG. 29) is set to be executed later than the subtraction process of the time saving state counter 134 (FIG. 30). As a result, even if the value of the ceiling counter 131 becomes "0" after being subtracted by 1 in a game round other than the last game round in the time saving state, the second high-frequency support mode is set using the ceiling time saving as a trigger. If the value of the ceiling counter 131 after subtracting 1 becomes "0" in the last game in the time saving state, the second high frequency support mode is set using the ceiling time saving as a trigger. It becomes possible to This prevents the setting of the time saving state from being newly set in the middle of the time saving state, thereby preventing the time saving state from continuing excessively. By enabling the setting of the time saving state triggered by this, it is possible to ensure that the benefit of the occurrence of the ceiling time saving is given to the player as much as possible. Further, such excellent effects can be produced by setting the execution order of the processes as described above.

<Subtraction processing of fluctuation selection state counter 132>
Next, the subtraction process of the fluctuation selection state counter 132 executed in step S1009 of the special figure confirmation process (FIG. 22) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 32.

First, it is determined whether the high probability flag in the main side RAM 84 is set to "1" (step S1701). If the high probability flag is set to "1" (step S1701: YES), the process of subtracting the variation selection state counter 132 is ended without executing the processes after step S1702.

As already explained, after the opening/closing execution mode ends, if the period switching reference number of games is played in the low probability mode, if it is the low frequency support mode, the table group for high reach frequency is referenced. It becomes a state of high reach frequency. In addition, in a high reach frequency state, as already explained, the probability that the reach display will be selected is higher when the result is an outlier than in a situation where the reach is in a low probability mode or a low frequency support mode and is not in a high reach frequency state. At the same time, the variable display period when the reach display is selected is also likely to be longer than in a situation where the reach mode is in the low probability mode and the low frequency support mode and is not in the reach high frequency state. Further, the period switching reference number of times is a predetermined number of times (specifically, 50 times) less than the fixed ceiling number of times. Therefore, it is possible to generate the reach high frequency state before the second high frequency support mode occurs due to the occurrence of ceiling time reduction. The variable selection state counter 132 is a counter for measuring the number of games of the remaining period switching standard number of times. In this case, as already explained, the value of the ceiling counter 131 is not subtracted in the high probability state, and no ceiling time reduction occurs in the high probability state. Therefore, when the high probability flag is set to "1", the process for subtracting the value of the variable selection state counter 132 is not executed.

If the high probability flag is not set to "1" (step S1701: NO), it is determined whether the value of the variation selection state counter 132 is 1 or more (step S1702). If the value of the variation selection state counter 132 is "0" (step S1702: NO), the process of subtracting the variation selection state counter 132 is ended without executing the processes after step S1703. As already explained, the process of setting information in the variation selection state counter 132 is only step S1006 when the opening/closing execution mode is started, and after the value of the variation selection state counter 132 becomes "0", step S1006 is performed. The value of the variable selection state counter 132 is maintained at "0" unless the process described above is executed. On the other hand, in the reach high frequency state, in a situation where the value of the variable selection state counter 132 is 1 or more, the value of the variable selection state counter 132 is subtracted by 1, and the value of the variable selection state counter 132 becomes "0". Occurs in cases. In this case, if the value of the variation selection state counter 132 is "0" as described above (step S1702: NO), the subtraction processing of the variation selection state counter 132 is performed without executing the processing from step S1703 onwards. finish. As a result, the value of the fluctuation selection state counter 132 after being subtracted by 1 becomes "0" and a reach high frequency state occurs, and when the reach high frequency state ends, the playing times in which no jackpot results occur are repeated. Even if it is, a high reach frequency state will not occur. This makes it possible to prevent the high reach frequency state from occurring excessively.

In addition, as already explained, the period switching reference number is set to a predetermined number of times (specifically 50 times) less than the fixed ceiling number of times, so before the second high-frequency support mode occurs due to the occurrence of ceiling time reduction. However, if the ceiling time shortening occurs once, it will not occur even if a game round in which no jackpot result occurs is repeated after that. In this case, as mentioned above, if the high reach frequency state ends, no jackpot results will occur after that. By preventing the high reach frequency state from occurring even if the gaming rounds are repeated, the ceiling time can be shortened. It is possible to prevent a high reach frequency state from occurring in a situation where it does not occur.

If the value of the variation selection state counter 132 is 1 or more (step S1702: YES), the value of the variation selection state counter 132 is subtracted by 1 (step S1703), and the value of the variation selection state counter 132 after the 1 subtraction is " 0'' (step S1704). When the value of the fluctuation selection state counter 132 is "0" (step S1704: YES), the reach high frequency state flag in the main side RAM 84 is set to "1" (step S1705).

When the reach high frequency state flag is set to "1", the ceiling counter 131 is subtracted by 1 in the subtraction process (FIG. 29), so that the value of the ceiling counter 131 becomes "0", and the reach high frequency state flag is set to "0" in step S1509. It is canceled by executing the process of clearing the status flag to "0". In other words, the state in which the reach high frequency state flag is set to "1" is canceled when a ceiling time reduction occurs, regardless of whether or not the time reduction state is set using the ceiling time reduction as a trigger.

Here, the process of step S1705 is executed even in the time saving state. On the other hand, in the fluctuation display period specifying process (FIG. 21), the main side Since the process of step S903 is executed to determine whether "1" is set in either the first high frequency flag or the second high frequency flag in the RAM 84, "1" is set in the reach high frequency state flag. Even if it is set, when selecting the variable display period of the game time, the selection mode of the variable display period in the short time state has priority over the selection mode of the variable display period in the high reach frequency state. This makes it possible to prevent the situation where the efficiency of playing games is high in the time saving state from being hindered by setting the reach high frequency state flag to "1".

On the other hand, even in the time saving state, the reach high frequency state flag is set to "1" and the state in which the reach high frequency state flag is set to "1" is maintained. Therefore, if the time saving state ends before an opportunity to clear the reach high frequency state flag to "0" occurs, it is possible to generate the reach high frequency state from that point on.

Thereafter, a process for transmitting a status designation command is executed (step S1706). In the transmission process, a state designation command indicating that the reach high frequency state flag is set to "1" is transmitted to the sound-light side MPU 93. When the sound and light side MPU 93 receives the state designation command, it sends an effect to the symbol display device 41, the display light emitting section 64, and the speaker section 65 indicating that the reach high frequency state is started, provided that the time saving state is not present. Execute the processing to ensure that it is executed. In addition, when the sound-light side MPU 93 receives the above-mentioned state designation command in the time saving state, if the time saving state ends before the period switching reference number of games is played, the high reach frequency state will be started. Processing is executed to cause the symbol display device 41, the display light emitting section 64, and the speaker section 65 to execute the effect shown.

Next, the relationship between the execution timings of the reach high frequency state and the time reduction state triggered by ceiling time reduction will be explained with reference to the time chart of FIG. 33. 33(a) shows a period in the opening/closing execution mode, FIG. 33(b) shows a period in a high probability state (high probability mode and first high frequency support mode), and FIG. 33(c) shows a time saving state. (low probability mode, first high frequency support mode or second high frequency support mode), FIG. 33(d) shows the state of the fluctuation selection state counter 132, and FIG. 33(e) shows the reach 33(f) shows the state of the ceiling counter 131. FIG.

First, a case will be described in which the reach high frequency state occurs at the timing when the value of the variable selection state counter 132 becomes "0".

When the game round with a high 5R result ends at the timing t1, the opening/closing execution mode is started at the timing t1 as shown in FIG. 33(a). In this case, at the timing of t1, information of 450 times, which is the reference number of period switching, is set in the fluctuation selection state counter 132 as shown in FIG. 33(d), and as shown in FIG. 33(f), Information of 500 times, which is the fixed ceiling number of times, is set in the counter 131.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 33(a), the opening/closing execution mode ends at timing t2, resulting in a high probability state, which is the high probability mode and the first high frequency support mode, as shown in FIG. 33(b). . In the high probability state, the game round is repeatedly executed, but in the high probability state, even if the game round is repeatedly executed, the value of the ceiling counter 131 is not decremented as shown in FIG. 33(f). 33(d), the value of the variable selection state counter 132 is never subtracted.

Thereafter, at timing t3, the high probability continuation number of game times in the high probability state is completed, and the high probability state ends as shown in FIG. 33(b), and the low probability mode and low frequency support mode This is the normal gaming state. Each time a game round is completed by entering the normal gaming state, the value of the ceiling counter 131 is subtracted as shown in FIG. 33(f), and the value of the variable selection state counter 132 is subtracted as shown in FIG. 33(d). The value of is subtracted.

Thereafter, at timing t4, the time saving result is selected in the validity determination process, thereby starting the time saving state as shown in FIG. 33(c). In the time saving state, each time a game is completed, the value of the ceiling counter 131 is subtracted as shown in FIG. 33(f), and the value of the variable selection state counter 132 is subtracted as shown in FIG. 33(d). be done.

Thereafter, at timing t5, the time saving continuation number of game times is completed, and as shown in FIG. 33(c), the time saving state ends and the normal gaming state returns. In the normal gaming state, each time a game is completed, the value of the ceiling counter 131 is subtracted as shown in FIG. 33(f), and the value of the variable selection state counter 132 is decreased as shown in FIG. 33(d). Subtracted.

Thereafter, at timing t6, the value of the variation selection state counter 132 becomes "0" as shown in FIG. 33(d). At the timing t6, as shown in FIG. 33(c), the time is not in a shortened state. Therefore, at the timing t6, a high reach frequency state is entered as shown in FIG. 33(e). As already explained, in the high reach frequency state, the probability that the reach display is selected is higher when the result is a miss than in the normal gaming state and not in the high reach frequency state, and when the reach display is selected. The variable display period in is also likely to be longer than in a normal gaming state and not in a high reach frequency state.

Thereafter, at timing t7, which is a high reach frequency state, the value of the ceiling counter 131 becomes "0" as shown in FIG. 33(f). At the timing t7, as shown in FIG. 33(c), the time is not reduced. Therefore, at the timing t7, the time saving state is entered as shown in FIG. 33(c). Further, at the timing t7, the reach high frequency state ends as shown in FIG. 33(e). In the time saving state, a short period is more likely to be selected as the variable display period of the game time, so that the efficiency of using the game time becomes high.

Thereafter, at timing t8, the time saving continuation number of game times is completed, and as shown in FIG. 33(c), the time saving state ends and the normal gaming state returns. In this case, as shown in FIG. 33(f) at the timing t8, the value of the ceiling counter 131 is not reset and the value of the ceiling counter 131 is maintained at "0". Further, at the timing t8, the value of the variable selection state counter 132 is maintained at "0" without being reset to the value of the variable selection state counter 132, as shown in FIG. 33(d).

Next, a case will be described in which the setting of the reach high frequency state is delayed due to the time saving state at the timing when the value of the fluctuation selection state counter 132 becomes "0".

When the game round with the 5R low-probability result ends at timing t9, the opening/closing execution mode is started at timing t9, as shown in FIG. 33(a). In this case, at the timing of t9, information of 450 times, which is the reference number of period switching, is set in the fluctuation selection state counter 132 as shown in FIG. 33(d), and as shown in FIG. 33(f), Information of 500 times, which is the fixed ceiling number of times, is set in the counter 131.

Thereafter, at timing t10, the opening/closing execution mode ends as shown in FIG. 33(a), resulting in a time saving state of the low probability mode and the first high frequency support mode as shown in FIG. 33(c). In the time saving state, each time a game is completed, the value of the ceiling counter 131 is subtracted as shown in FIG. 33(f), and the value of the variable selection state counter 132 is subtracted as shown in FIG. 33(d). be done.

Thereafter, at timing t11, the number of game times corresponding to the number of continuous time-savings is completed, and the time-saving state ends as shown in FIG. 33(c), and a normal gaming state is entered. In the normal gaming state, each time a game is completed, the value of the ceiling counter 131 is subtracted as shown in FIG. 33(f), and the value of the variable selection state counter 132 is decreased as shown in FIG. 33(d). Subtracted.

Thereafter, the time saving result is selected in the validity determination process at timing t12, thereby starting the time saving state as shown in FIG. 33(c). In the time saving state, each time a game is completed, the value of the ceiling counter 131 is subtracted as shown in FIG. 33(f), and the value of the variable selection state counter 132 is subtracted as shown in FIG. 33(d). be done.

Thereafter, at timing t13, which is the time saving state, the value of the variation selection state counter 132 becomes "0" as shown in FIG. 33(d). At the timing t13, the time is shortened as shown in FIG. 33(c). Therefore, at the timing t13, the reach high frequency state does not occur as shown in FIG. 33(e). However, the reach high frequency state flag of the main side RAM 84 is set to "1", and the state in which the reach high frequency state flag is set to "1" is maintained. In this case, the time saving state continues, and in the time saving state, the value of the ceiling counter 131 is decremented as shown in FIG. 33(f) every time a game round is completed.

Thereafter, at the timing t14, the time saving continuation number of game times is completed, and as shown in FIG. 33(c), the time saving state ends and the normal gaming state returns. However, since the reach high frequency state flag in the main side RAM 84 is set to "1", the reach high frequency state is entered at the timing t14 as shown in FIG. 33(e). As already explained, in the high reach frequency state, the probability that the reach display is selected is higher when the result is a miss than in the normal gaming state and not in the high reach frequency state, and when the reach display is selected. The variable display period in is also likely to be longer than in the normal gaming state and not in the high reach frequency state.

Thereafter, at timing t15, which is a high reach frequency state, the value of the ceiling counter 131 becomes "0" as shown in FIG. 33(f). At the timing t15, as shown in FIG. 33(c), there is no time saving state. Therefore, at the timing t15, the time saving state is entered as shown in FIG. 33(c). Further, at the timing t15, the reach high frequency state ends as shown in FIG. 33(e). In the time saving state, a short period is more likely to be selected as the variable display period of the game time, so that the efficiency of using the game time becomes high.

Thereafter, at timing t16, the time saving continuation number of game times is completed, and as shown in FIG. 33(c), the time saving state ends and the normal gaming state returns. In this case, as shown in FIG. 33(f) at the timing t16, the value of the ceiling counter 131 is not reset and the value of the ceiling counter 131 is maintained at "0". Furthermore, at the timing of t16, as shown in FIG. 33(d), the value of the variable selection state counter 132 is not reset and the value of the variable selection state counter 132 is maintained at "0".

According to the embodiment detailed above, the following excellent effects are achieved.

Even if a time saving result or a ceiling time reduction occurs in the time saving state (excluding the last game round), the setting of the time saving state is not triggered by these time saving results or ceiling time reduction. This makes it possible to prevent the time saving state from being newly set during the time saving state, and it is possible to prevent the time saving state from continuing excessively.

In the special figure confirmation process (FIG. 22), the time-saving result setting process (FIG. 25) is set to a later order of execution than the time-saving state counter 134 subtraction process (FIG. 30). Even if the result of the validity judgment process is a time-saving result in a game session other than the last game session in the time-saving state, the second high-frequency support mode is not set based on the time-saving result. If the result of the propriety determination process in the final game round is a time-saving result, it is possible to set the second high-frequency support mode using the time-saving result as a trigger. This prevents the time-saving state from being newly set in the middle of the time-saving state, thereby preventing the time-saving state from continuing excessively. By validating the setting of the time-saving state, it is possible to give the player as much as possible the benefit of selecting the time-saving result in the validity determination process. Moreover, such excellent effects can be produced by setting the execution order of the processes as described above.

In game rounds other than the last game round in the time saving state, even if the result of the judgment process is a time saving result, the setting of the second high-frequency support mode triggered by the time saving result is not performed, and the time saving state is set. In the final game round, if the result of the judgment process is a time-saving result, the second high-frequency support mode is set based on the time-saving result, and the symbol on the symbol display device 41 is In columns Z1 to Z3, if the result of the validity judgment process is a time saving result in a game round other than the last game round in the time saving state, a combination of non-reach out symbols is stopped and displayed on each active line L1 to L5, and the time saving state is If the result of the validity judgment process in the final game round is a time-saving result, a combination of time-saving symbols (a combination of first time-saving symbols or a second time-saving symbol combination) is placed on any of the valid lines L1 to L5. Stop and display. Thereby, it becomes possible to set the stop result in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 of the symbol display device 41 as a stop result corresponding to whether or not the time saving result becomes a trigger for setting the time saving state.

In particular, the combination of non-reach symbols that is stopped and displayed when the result of the winning/failure judgment process is a time saving result in a game round other than the last game round in the time saving state is stopped when the result of the winning/failure judging process is a winning result. This is a combination of displayed symbols. This makes it difficult for the player to recognize that although the time saving result has been achieved, the setting of the second high-frequency support mode will not be performed based on the time saving result.

If the second high-frequency support mode is not set based on the time-saving result even though the time-saving result is obtained, the stop result that will be stopped and displayed if the result of the validity judgment process is a wrong result in symbol rows Z1 to Z3. Even if the configuration is such that the symbols corresponding to the time-saving results are displayed, the symbols corresponding to the time-saving results are stopped and displayed on the special symbol display sections 37a and 37b. This allows the game hall manager to visually confirm whether or not a time saving result has occurred, regardless of whether or not the second high-frequency support mode has been set.

If the second high-frequency support mode is not set based on the time-saving result even though the time-saving result is obtained, the stop result that will be stopped and displayed if the result of the validity judgment process is a wrong result in symbol rows Z1 to Z3. Even if the configuration is such that is displayed, the state suggestion area 43 of the symbol display device 41 displays a stop result that is different from the case where the result of the validity determination process is a failure result. This allows the game hall manager to visually confirm whether or not a time saving result has occurred, regardless of whether or not the second high-frequency support mode has been set.

If a time saving result is obtained but the second high frequency support mode is not set based on the time saving result, the symbol row Z1~ In Z3, a stop result that is stopped and displayed when the result of the validity judgment process is a negative result is displayed. This makes it possible to make it less obvious that not only the time-saving result has been invalidated, but also that the relatively advantageous second time-saving result has been invalidated. .

If a time saving result is obtained but the second high frequency support mode is not set based on the time saving result, the symbol row Z1 to Z3 has a configuration in which a stop result that is stopped and displayed when the result of the validity judgment process is a wrong result is displayed, and in the special figure display parts 37a and 37b, a pattern corresponding to each of the first time saving result and the second time saving result is displayed. Stop display. This allows the game hall manager to visually check whether the first time saving result and the second time saving result have occurred, regardless of whether the second high-frequency support mode has been set. becomes.

If a time saving result is obtained but the second high frequency support mode is not set based on the time saving result, the symbol row Z1~ In Z3, in a configuration in which a stop result that is stopped and displayed when the result of the validity judgment process is a wrong result is displayed, the state suggestion area 43 of the symbol display device 41 corresponds to each of the first time saving result and the second time saving result. The stop result is displayed. This allows the game hall manager to visually check whether the first time saving result and the second time saving result have occurred, regardless of whether or not the second high-frequency support mode has been set. becomes.

By setting the subtraction process of the ceiling counter 131 (FIG. 29) to a later order of execution than the subtraction process of the time saving state counter 134 (FIG. 30) in the special figure confirmation process (FIG. 22), Even if the value of the ceiling counter 131 becomes "0" after being subtracted by 1 in a game round other than the last game round in the time saving state, the setting of the second high-frequency support mode triggered by the ceiling time saving is prevented from being performed. However, when the value of the ceiling counter 131 after subtracting 1 becomes "0" in the last game in the time saving state, the second high frequency support mode is set using the ceiling time saving as a trigger. becomes possible. This prevents the setting of the time saving state from being newly set in the middle of the time saving state, thereby preventing the time saving state from continuing excessively. By enabling the setting of the time saving state triggered by this, it is possible to ensure that the benefit of the occurrence of the ceiling time saving is given to the player as much as possible. Further, such excellent effects can be produced by setting the execution order of the processes as described above.

If a time saving result or a ceiling time reduction occurs in the last game of a time saving state, the time saving state triggered by the time saving result or ceiling time saving will start following the end of the current time saving state, so in these time saving states. The total number of times the game is executed is greater than the number of times the game is executed in the time saving state when the time saving state is started from the normal gaming state. As a result, if a time saving result or a ceiling time reduction occurs in the last game of a time saving state, the time saving state triggered by the time saving result or ceiling time saving will start following the end of the current time saving state. It becomes possible to increase the advantage of what you have done.

In the special figure confirmation process (Figure 22), the time-saving result setting process (Figure 25) is set earlier than the ceiling counter 131 subtraction process (Figure 29), so it is possible to determine whether it is correct or not. If the value of the ceiling counter 131 after subtracting 1 becomes "0" in a game round where the result of the determination process is a time saving result, the time saving result is set as compared to the setting of the second high-frequency support mode triggered by the ceiling time saving. It becomes possible to give priority to the setting of the second high-frequency support mode triggered by the trigger. The number of continuations of time reduction in the second high-frequency support mode triggered by ceiling time reduction is fixed at 100, whereas the number of continuations of time reduction in the second high-frequency support mode triggered by time reduction results is based on the first time reduction result. If so, it will be 100 times, and if it is the second time saving result, it will be 150 times. In other words, the number of times the second high-frequency support mode continues to be shortened based on the time-saving result is greater than the number of times the second high-frequency support mode continues to be shortened based on the ceiling time-saving. In this case, as described above, the setting of the second high-frequency support mode triggered by the time saving result takes priority over the setting of the second high-frequency support mode triggered by the ceiling time saving, so that the result of the validity judgment process is When the value of a ceiling counter 131 after being subtracted by 1 becomes "0" in a game round resulting in a time saving result, it is possible to prevent the setting mode of the number of continuations of time saving from being disadvantageous to the player. Moreover, such excellent effects can be produced by setting the execution order of the processes as described above.

In the special figure confirmation process (FIG. 22), the time-saving result setting process (FIG. 25) is executed before the subtraction process of the high probability state counter 133 (FIG. 24). As a result, in the last game round in the high probability mode and the first high frequency support mode, the value of the high probability state counter 133 is subtracted by 1 in the subtraction process (FIG. 24) of the high probability state counter 133, and the corresponding When the value of the high probability state counter 133 becomes "0", the time saving result setting process (FIG. 25) is executed before the high probability flag and the first high frequency flag are cleared to "0". Become. If the time-saving result setting process (Figure 25) is executed at this timing, the high probability flag is still set to "1", so the second high-frequency support mode is set based on the time-saving result. will not be performed. Therefore, it is possible to reliably invalidate the time-saving result in the game round in which the validity determination process is executed in the execution mode corresponding to the high probability mode. In addition, such an effect can be achieved by changing the processing order in which the time-saving result setting process (Fig. 25) is executed before the subtraction process of the high probability state counter 133 (Fig. 24) in the special figure confirmation process (Fig. 22). This can be achieved by setting.

In the special figure confirmation process (FIG. 22), the subtraction process of the ceiling counter 131 (FIG. 29) is executed before the subtraction process of the high probability state counter 133 (FIG. 24). As a result, in the last game round in the high probability mode and the first high frequency support mode, the value of the high probability state counter 133 is subtracted by 1 in the subtraction process (FIG. 24) of the high probability state counter 133, and the corresponding Since the value of the high probability state counter 133 becomes "0", the subtraction process (FIG. 29) of the ceiling counter 131 is executed before the high probability flag and the first high frequency flag are cleared to "0". Become. If the subtraction process (FIG. 29) of the ceiling counter 131 is executed at this timing, the value of the ceiling counter 131 is not subtracted because "1" is still set in the high probability flag. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the value of the ceiling counter 131 from being subtracted in the game round in which the validity determination process is executed in the execution mode corresponding to the high probability mode. In addition, such an effect can be achieved by changing the processing order in which the subtraction process of the ceiling counter 131 (FIG. 29) is executed before the subtraction process of the high probability state counter 133 (FIG. 24) in the special figure confirmation process (FIG. 22). This can be achieved by setting.

In the high probability state, not only does the time reduction state triggered by the ceiling time reduction not occur, but the process itself for decrementing the ceiling counter 131 by 1 is not executed. This makes it possible to exclude the number of game rounds executed in a high probability state advantageous to the player from the game rounds from which the value of the ceiling counter 131 is subtracted.

The value of the ceiling counter 131 is not set either when the time saving state is transitioned to due to the ceiling time saving as an opportunity or when the time saving state ends. In addition, the transition to the time saving state triggered by the ceiling time reduction occurs when, in a situation where the value of the ceiling counter 131 is 1 or more, the value of the ceiling counter 131 is subtracted as a result of the game being played and the value of the ceiling counter 131 is subtracted. occurs when becomes "0". Therefore, the transition to the time saving state triggered by the ceiling time reduction occurs only once after the jackpot result occurs, and if the transition to the time saving state triggered by the ceiling time reduction occurs once, basically after that Unless a jackpot result occurs and the value of the ceiling counter 131 is set, a transition to the time saving state triggered by the ceiling time reduction does not occur. This makes it possible to prevent excessive transitions to the time-saving state triggered by the ceiling time-shortening.

Even if the setting value update process (step S117) is executed, the initialization of the ceiling counter 131 in the main side RAM 84 is not executed, and furthermore, the new setting of the ceiling frequency including the information of the fixed ceiling frequency is not performed. do not have. Thereby, even if the setting value update process (step S117) is executed, it is possible to maintain the remaining ceiling number of times.

Even if the RAM clearing process (step S119) is executed, initialization of the ceiling counter 131 in the main side RAM 84 is not executed, and furthermore, no new setting of the ceiling frequency including information on the fixed ceiling frequency is performed. . This makes it possible to maintain the remaining ceiling number of times even if the RAM clearing process (step S119) is executed.

The setting value update process (step S117) is executed, but even if it is executed, the initialization of the ceiling counter 131 in the main side RAM 84 is not executed, and the new ceiling count including the fixed ceiling count information is not updated. No settings are made. Therefore, even if the setting value update process (step S117) is executed in order to cancel the game stop state due to the information abnormality when an information abnormality occurs in the main side RAM 84, the information in the ceiling counter 131 is maintained as it is. . On the other hand, if it is specified that an information error has occurred in the main side RAM 84 and the game stop flag in the main side RAM 84 is set to "1", the ceiling counter 131 is set to 500 times, which is the fixed ceiling number. information is set. As a result, even if the information on the ceiling counter 131 is rewritten when an information error occurs in the main RAM 84, it is possible to reset the information on the ceiling counter 131 to the fixed ceiling number of 500 times. becomes.

When the game machine main body 12 is in an open state with respect to the outer frame 11, information of 500 times, which is the fixed ceiling number, is set in the ceiling counter 131 of the main side RAM 84. When such processing is executed, processing for setting confirmation (step S112), setting value updating processing (step S117), and RAM clearing are performed during the processing at the start of supply of operating power (steps S101 to S126). This is a situation in which the process (step S119) is not executed. In addition, in the game hall, the main power supply for supplying operating power to each pachinko machine 10 is turned off, and the power switch provided on the power supply/launch control device 78 of each pachinko machine 10 is turned on in advance. When it is time to start business for the day, the main power is turned on so that all the pachinko machines 10 are activated at the same time. Under these circumstances, the gaming machine main body 12 is intentionally left in an open state to reduce operating power in a situation where the setting confirmation process (step S112), setting value update process (step S117), and RAM clearing process (step S119) are not executed. When the supply is started, information of 500 times, which is the fixed ceiling number, is set in the ceiling counter 131. This makes it possible to generate a situation in which the fixed ceiling count of 500 times is set on the ceiling counter 131 at the start of the supply of operating power, which is different from the situation at the start of normal business operations, and also to confirm the setting. It is possible to generate this without having to perform the processing (step S112), the setting value update processing (step S117), and the RAM clearing processing (step S119).

When the game round corresponding to the jackpot result ends and the opening/closing execution mode is started, information of 500 times, which is the fixed ceiling number, is set in the ceiling counter 131. In the case of a configuration in which the fixed ceiling count is set to the ceiling counter 131 not when the opening/closing execution mode is started but during the opening/closing execution mode or when the opening/closing execution mode ends, the operation is performed after the opening/closing execution mode is started. If a fraudulent act is committed that causes the power supply to be stopped and the setting value update process (step S117) or the RAM clearing process (step S119) to be executed when the operating power supply is restarted, the setting value update process (step S119) is performed. In step S117) or the RAM clearing process (step S119), the information indicating that the opening/closing execution mode is in progress is cleared as described above, but the value of the ceiling counter 131 is maintained, so the operating power is supplied. There is a risk that the game will be restarted in a situation where there are only a few remaining ceilings, while still enjoying the benefits of the opening/closing execution mode until the game is stopped. On the other hand, when the opening/closing execution mode is started, the information of 500 times, which is the fixed ceiling number, is set in the ceiling counter 131, thereby making it possible to neutralize the above-mentioned fraudulent acts.

After the opening/closing execution mode ends, if the period switching reference number of games is played in the low probability mode, if the low frequency support mode is used, the reach high frequency table group for high reach frequency is referenced. state. In the high reach frequency state, the probability that the reach display is selected is higher than in the low probability mode and low frequency support mode when the result is an outlier than in the low reach frequency state, and The variable display period when the display is selected is also likely to be longer than in a situation where the mode is a low probability mode and a low frequency support mode and is not in a high reach frequency state. Further, the period switching reference number of times is a predetermined number of times (specifically, 50 times) smaller than the fixed ceiling number of times that triggers the occurrence of ceiling time reduction. Therefore, it is possible to generate the reach high frequency state before the second high frequency support mode occurs due to the occurrence of ceiling time reduction.

When the value of the ceiling counter 131 after being subtracted by 1 becomes "0" in the reach high frequency state and a time reduction state triggered by the ceiling time reduction occurs, the reach high frequency state ends. In the time saving state, a short period is more likely to be selected as the variable display period of the game time, so that the efficiency of using the game time becomes high. This makes it possible to allow a high reach frequency state to occur while not inhibiting the increase in the efficiency of playing games in a time saving state.

The process of setting the reach high frequency state flag in the main side RAM 84 to "1" when the value of the variation selection state counter 132 becomes "0" after being subtracted by 1 is executed even in the time saving state. On the other hand, in the fluctuation display period specifying process (FIG. 21), the main side Since the process of step S903 is executed to determine whether "1" is set in either the first high frequency flag or the second high frequency flag in the RAM 84, "1" is set in the reach high frequency state flag. Even if it is set, when selecting the variable display period of the game time, the selection mode of the variable display period in the short time state has priority over the selection mode of the variable display period in the high reach frequency state. This makes it possible to prevent the situation where the efficiency of playing games is high in the time saving state from being hindered by setting the reach high frequency state flag to "1".

On the other hand, even in the time saving state, the reach high frequency state flag is set to "1" and the state in which the reach high frequency state flag is set to "1" is maintained. Therefore, if the time saving state ends before an opportunity to clear the reach high frequency state flag to "0" occurs, it is possible to generate the reach high frequency state from that point on.

The process of setting information in the variation selection state counter 132 is only step S1006 when the opening/closing execution mode is started, and the process of step S1006 is executed after the value of the variation selection state counter 132 becomes "0". Unless otherwise specified, the value of the variable selection state counter 132 is maintained at "0". On the other hand, in the reach high frequency state, in a situation where the value of the variable selection state counter 132 is 1 or more, the value of the variable selection state counter 132 is subtracted by 1, and the value of the variable selection state counter 132 becomes "0". Occurs in cases. In this case, if the value of the variation selection state counter 132 is "0" (step S1702: NO), the process of subtracting the variation selection state counter 132 is ended without executing the processes after step S1703. As a result, the value of the fluctuation selection state counter 132 after being subtracted by 1 becomes "0" and a high reach frequency state occurs, and when the high reach frequency state ends, the playing times in which no jackpot results occur will be repeated. Even if it is, a high reach frequency state will not occur. This makes it possible to prevent the high reach frequency state from occurring excessively.

Since the period switching reference number is set to a predetermined number (specifically 50 times) less than the fixed ceiling number, the reach high frequency state will occur before the second high frequency support mode occurs due to the occurrence of ceiling time reduction. However, if the ceiling time reduction occurs once, the ceiling time reduction will not occur even if game rounds in which no jackpot result occurs are repeated thereafter. In this case, if the reach high frequency state ends, no jackpot results will occur after that. By preventing the reach high frequency state from occurring even if the game play is repeated, the ceiling time reduction will not occur. It is possible to prevent a high reach frequency state from occurring.

<Second embodiment>
In this embodiment, the execution order of the processing in the special figure confirmation process is different from the above-mentioned first embodiment. Hereinafter, configurations that are different from the first embodiment will be described. Note that descriptions of the same configurations as in the first embodiment will be basically omitted.

FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing special symbol fluctuation start processing in this embodiment executed by the main MPU 82.

In steps S1801 to S1817, the same processes as steps S801 to S817 of the special symbol fluctuation start process (FIG. 20) in the first embodiment are executed. After executing the process of step S1817, it is determined whether the current gaming state is a high probability state by determining whether the high probability flag in the main side RAM 84 is set to "1". (Step S1818). When the high probability flag is set to "1" (step S1818: YES), the start high probability flag provided in the main side RAM 84 is set to "1" (step S1819), and the high probability flag is set to "1". is not set (step S1818: NO), the start high certainty flag is cleared to "0" (step S1820). The start high certainty flag is a flag used by the main side MP 82 to specify whether or not the win/fail lottery mode at the start of the game round was the high probability mode in the special pattern deciding process (FIG. 35), which will be described later.

When the process of step S1819 or the process of step S1820 is executed, the value of the figure special electric counter is incremented by 1 (step S1821). As a result, the value of the special figure special electric counter becomes "1" corresponding to the special figure fluctuation processing (step S607).

FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing the special figure confirmation process in this embodiment executed by the main MPU 82.

In steps S1901 to S1907, the same processes as steps S1001 to S1007 of the special figure confirmation process (FIG. 22) in the first embodiment are executed. When the value of the special figure side timer counter is "0" and the final stop period has elapsed (step S1901: YES), and when the game result of the current game round is not a jackpot result (step S1902: NO) ), in step S1908 the high probability state counter 133 is subtracted, in step S1909 the time saving state counter 134 is subtracted, in step S1910 the variable selection state counter 132 is subtracted, and in step S1909 the time saving state counter 134 is subtracted. In step S1911, a setting process for time-saving results is executed, and in step S1912, a subtraction process for the ceiling counter 131 is executed. Then, the special figure special electric counter is cleared to "0" (step S1913). In other words, in this embodiment, the subtraction process of the high probability state counter 133 is not set as the processing order after the setting process for the time-saving result and the subtraction process of the ceiling counter 131, but the setting process for the time-saving result and the subtraction process of the ceiling counter 131 are not set. The subtraction process of the high probability state counter 133 is set as the processing order before the subtraction process of the counter 131.

FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing the setting process for time-saving results in this embodiment, which is executed in step S1911 of the special figure confirmation process (FIG. 35).

If the game result of the current game round is a time saving result (step S2001: YES), it is determined whether the high start probability flag in the main side RAM 84 is set to "1" (step S2002). If the high start probability flag is set to "1" (step S2002: YES), the time saving result setting process is ended without executing the processes from step S2003 onwards. In other words, even if a time-saving result (first time-saving result or second time-saving result) is selected in the validity judgment process of a gaming session started in a high-probability mode, the second high-frequency support is triggered by the time-saving result. Time-saving results are disabled without setting the mode.

If the high start probability flag is not set to "1" (step S2002: NO), it is determined whether the first high frequency flag or the second high frequency flag of the main side RAM 84 is set to "1". (Step S2003, Step S2004). That is, it is determined whether the support mode is either the first high-frequency support mode or the second high-frequency support mode. If the support mode is the first high-frequency support mode or the second high-frequency support mode (step S2003 or step S2004: YES), this time-saving result setting process is ended without executing the processes after step S2005. In other words, even if a time-saving result (first time-saving result or second time-saving result) is selected in the process of determining the validity of a gaming session executed in the first high-frequency support mode or the second high-frequency support mode, the time-saving result If the first high-frequency support mode or the second high-frequency support mode is in effect at the timing when the result setting process (FIG. 36) is executed, the second high-frequency support mode is set based on the time-saving result. The time-saving result is invalidated without being performed. This makes it possible to prevent additional settings for transitioning to the high-frequency support mode from being executed midway through the high-frequency support mode.

If the support mode is the low frequency support mode (steps S2003 and S2004: NO), the second high frequency flag of the main side RAM 84 is set to "1" (step S2005). As a result, the support mode becomes the second high-frequency support mode. If the current time saving result is the first time saving result (step S2006: YES), information of "100", which is the number of times the first time saving is continued, is set in the time saving state counter 134 provided in the main side RAM 84 (step S2006: YES). S2007), if the current time saving result is the second time saving result (step S2006: NO), information of "150", which is the number of times the second time saving is continued, is set in the time saving state counter 134 (step S2008). If the number of games played without a new jackpot result in a time-saving state reaches the first time-saving continuation count of 100 or the second time-saving continuation count of 150, a jackpot will be awarded. Low probability mode and low frequency support mode are activated even if no result has occurred.

When the process of step S2007 or the process of step S2008 is executed, a process of transmitting a status designation command is executed (step S2009). In the transmission process, a state designation command indicating that the time saving state has started is transmitted to the sound-light side MPU 93. The state specification command also includes information on the currently set number of time saving continuations. When the sound and light side MPU 93 receives the state designation command, it performs processing for causing the symbol display device 41, the display light emitting section 64, and the speaker section 65 to execute an effect indicating that the time saving state is started. Execute.

FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing the subtraction process of the ceiling counter 131 in this embodiment, which is executed in step S1912 of the special figure confirmation process (FIG. 35).

First, it is determined whether the high start probability flag in the main side RAM 84 is set to "1" (step S2101). If the high start probability flag is set to "1" (step S2101: YES), the subtraction process of the main ceiling counter 131 is ended without executing the process from step S2102 onwards. In other words, in a game round that is started in the high probability mode, the value of the ceiling counter 131 is not subtracted, and furthermore, the ceiling time is shortened because the value of the ceiling counter 131 is not subtracted. Nor.

If the high start probability flag is not set to "1" (step S2101: NO), it is determined whether the value of the ceiling counter 131 is 1 or more (step S2102). If the value of the ceiling counter 131 is "0" (step S2102: NO), the subtraction process of the main ceiling counter 131 is ended without executing the processes after step S2103. As a result, the value of the ceiling counter 131 after being subtracted by 1 becomes "0", and a time-saving state triggered by the ceiling time-saving occurs, and in the time-saving state, the number of consecutive game times of the time-saving continuation is completed without a jackpot result occurring. When the time saving state ends and the normal gaming state is entered, the time saving state triggered by the ceiling time saving does not occur even if game rounds in which no jackpot result occurs are repeated thereafter. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a time reduction state triggered by a ceiling time reduction from occurring excessively.

If the value of the ceiling counter 131 is 1 or more (step S2102: YES), the value of the ceiling counter 131 is subtracted by 1 (step S2103), and it is determined whether the value of the ceiling counter 131 after the 1 subtraction is "0" or not. (Step S2104). If the value of the ceiling counter 131 is "0" (step S2104: YES), the main side The second high-frequency flag in the RAM 84 is set to "1" (step S2106), and the time saving state counter 134 in the main side RAM 84 is set to "100", which is the number of times the first time saving continues (step S2107). This results in a time saving state which is a low probability mode and a second high frequency support mode. In addition, the time saving state ends when the number of games played without a jackpot result reaches 100, which is the first time saving continuation number, and the normal game which is the low probability mode and the low frequency support mode ends. state.

Thereafter, a process for transmitting a status designation command is executed (step S2108). In the transmission process, a state designation command indicating that the time saving state has started is transmitted to the sound-light side MPU 93. The state designation command also includes information on the number of first time saving continuations set this time. When the sound and light side MPU 93 receives the state designation command, it performs a process for causing the symbol display device 41, the display light emitting section 64, and the speaker section 65 to execute an effect indicating that the time saving state is started. Execute.

On the other hand, even if the value of the ceiling counter 131 after subtracting 1 becomes "0", if the second high-frequency flag is set to "1", the processes of steps S2106 to S2108 are not executed, so this time The setting of the second high-frequency support mode triggered by the ceiling time reduction is not performed, and the current ceiling time reduction is invalidated. In other words, even if the fixed ceiling number of games is completed in a time saving state, the ceiling time saving is disabled without setting the second high-frequency support mode using the ceiling time saving as an opportunity. This makes it possible to prevent additional settings for transitioning to the high-frequency support mode from being executed midway through the high-frequency support mode. Note that the first high-frequency support mode is set only until 100 games are played after the opening/closing execution mode, whereas the fixed ceiling number of 500 games is set when the opening/closing execution mode is started. is set, the value of the ceiling counter 131 after being subtracted by 1 will never become "0" in the first high-frequency support mode.

When an affirmative determination is made in step S2105 or when the process in step S2108 is executed, the reach high frequency state flag in the main side RAM 84 is cleared to "0" (step S2109). As a result, when a ceiling time reduction occurs, the reach high frequency state ends regardless of whether or not the second high frequency support mode is set using the ceiling time reduction as a trigger.

According to the embodiment detailed above, the following excellent effects are achieved.

In the special figure confirmation process (FIG. 35), the time-saving result setting process (FIG. 36) is executed after the subtraction process of the high probability state counter 133 (step S1908). However, if the game round is started in the high probability mode and the success/failure determination process is executed by referring to the high probability success/failure table 123, the start high certainty flag in the main side RAM 84 is set to "1". be done. When the time-saving result setting process (Figure 36) is started, if the start high accuracy flag is set to "1", even if the time-saving result is selected in the validity judgment process, the time-saving result is selected. The time saving state is not set based on the result. As a result, it is possible to reliably invalidate the time-saving result in the game round in which the success/failure determination process is executed in the execution mode corresponding to the high probability mode.

Using the start high probability flag, which is set to "1" when the game is started in high probability mode, the time-saving result is invalidated in the time-saving result setting process (FIG. 36). Since it is configured to determine whether or not, it is possible to achieve the above excellent effects regardless of the order of execution of the processing in the special figure confirmation process (FIG. 35).

In the special figure confirmation process (FIG. 35), the subtraction process of the ceiling counter 131 (FIG. 37) is executed after the subtraction process of the high probability state counter 133 (step S1908). However, if the game round is started in the high probability mode and the success/failure determination process is executed by referring to the high probability success/failure table 123, the start high certainty flag in the main side RAM 84 is set to "1". be done. When the subtraction process (FIG. 37) of the ceiling counter 131 is started, if the start high certainty flag is set to "1", the value of the ceiling counter 131 is not subtracted. This makes it possible to prevent the value of the ceiling counter 131 from being subtracted in the game round in which the validity determination process is executed in the execution mode corresponding to the high probability mode.

When a game round is started, the value of the ceiling counter 131 is set in the subtraction process of the ceiling counter 131 (FIG. 37) using the start high probability flag, which is set to "1" on the condition that the game is in the high probability mode. Since it is configured to determine whether or not to subtract, it is possible to achieve the excellent effects described above regardless of the order of execution of the processing in the special figure confirmation process (FIG. 35).

<Third embodiment>
This embodiment is different from the first embodiment in the trigger for shifting the win/fail lottery mode from the high probability mode to the low probability mode. Hereinafter, configurations that are different from the first embodiment will be described. Note that descriptions of the same configurations as those in the first embodiment will basically be omitted.

FIG. 38 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the electrical configuration for performing various lottery drawings in the main MPU 82 in this embodiment.

In this embodiment, a fall random number counter C5 is provided in addition to a winning random number counter C1, a type random number counter C2, a reach random number counter C3, a random number initial value counter CINI, a fluctuation type counter CS, and a general random number counter C4. The contents of the winning random number counter C1, type random number counter C2, reach random number counter C3, random number initial value counter CINI, fluctuation type counter CS, and general random number counter C4 and the processing using these counters C1 to C4, CINI, and CS are as follows. The contents are the same as in the first embodiment.

The falling random number counter C5 is configured to increment by 1 within the range of 0 to 29, and return to "0" after reaching the maximum value. The falling random number counter C5 is updated regularly, and is stored in the first special figure holding area 111 at the timing when the game ball enters the first operating port 33, and stored in the second special symbol holding area 111 at the timing when the game ball enters the second operating port 34. It is stored in the special figure holding area 112. In the high probability mode, when a game round is started, a fall determination process is executed using numerical information corresponding to the fall random number counter C5 among the pending information that is the start target of the game round. When a fall result is selected in the fall determination process, the winning/failure lottery mode changes from the high probability mode to the low probability mode at that point. In other words, in the first embodiment, the win/fail lottery mode shifts from the high probability mode to the low probability mode when the number of games played in the high probability mode reaches the high probability continuation number. In the embodiment, the transition to the low probability mode does not occur depending on the number of games played in the high probability mode, but the transition to the low probability mode occurs when a fall result is selected in the fall determination process. .

FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing the special symbol fluctuation start process in this embodiment executed by the main MPU 82.

If the second reservation information is not stored in the second special figure reservation area 112 and the first reservation information is stored in the first special figure reservation area 111 (step S2201: YES, step S2202: NO), the first reservation information Data setting processing is executed (step S2203). The contents of the first data setting process are the same as step S803 of the special symbol fluctuation start process (FIG. 20) in the first embodiment. On the other hand, when the second reservation information is stored in the second special figure reservation area 112 (step S2201 and step S2202: YES), the first reservation information acquired earlier than the second reservation information is the first reservation information. Even if it is stored in the 1 special figure holding area 111, the second data setting process is executed (step S2204). The contents of the second data setting process are the same as step S804 of the special symbol fluctuation start process (FIG. 20) in the first embodiment.

When the process of step S2203 or the process of step S2204 is executed, the fall determination process is executed (step S2206) on the condition that the high probability flag in the main side RAM 84 is set to "1" (step S2205: YES). ). In the fall determination process, the fall determination table is read from the main side ROM 83 to the main side RAM 84. Numerical information of the fall random number counter C5, which is the fall result, is set in the fall determination table. Only one type of fall judgment table is provided, and the probability that a fall result is selected in the fall judgment process is constant regardless of the setting value, and the starting target of the game round is the first pending information and the second pending information. It is constant no matter which one is. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a configuration may be adopted in which the probability that a fall result is selected in the fall judgment process varies depending on a set value, and the probability that a fall result is selected in the fall judgment process is the first. It may be configured to vary depending on which of the first hold information and the second hold information is targeted for starting a game round.

Although the fall determination table is set so that the probability of selecting a fall result is 1/15, the probability may be lower than 1/15 or higher than 1/15. In the fall judgment process, the information for fall judgment, that is, the numerical information obtained from the fall random number counter C5, is read from the pending information stored in the execution area 113 for special figures, and the read numerical information is used as the fall judgment read above. It is determined whether it matches any of the numerical information set as the fall result in the table.

If the result of the fall determination process is a fall result (step S2207: YES), the high probability flag in the main side RAM 84 is cleared to "0" (step S2208), and if the result of the fall determination process is not a fall result (step S2207). :NO), the state where the high probability flag is set to "1" is maintained. As a result, if the result of the fall determination process is a fall result, the win/fail lottery mode shifts from the high probability mode to the low probability mode, and if the result of the fall determination process is not a fall result, the win/fail lottery mode changes to the high probability mode. mode. In addition, the fall determination process is executed before the validity determination process (step S2209), and the transition to the low probability mode when the result of the fall determination process is a fall result is also performed before the validity determination process (step S2209). executed before. Thereby, when the result of the fall determination process is a fall result, the win/fail determination process (step S2209) can be executed in a situation where the win/fail lottery mode is the low probability mode.

If a negative determination is made in step S2205, if a negative determination is made in step S2207, or if the process of step S2208 is executed, a validity determination process is executed (step S2209). The content of the validity determination process is the same as step S805 of the special symbol variation start process (FIG. 20) in the first embodiment.

If the result of the success/failure determination process is a jackpot result (step S2210: YES), a distribution determination process for the jackpot is executed (step S2211), a flag setting process for the jackpot is executed (step S2212), and a jackpot result The stop result setting process is executed (step S2213). The contents of steps S2211 to S2213 are the same as steps S807 to S809 of the special symbol fluctuation start process (FIG. 20) in the first embodiment.

If the result of the judgment process is not a jackpot result but a time saving result (step S2210: NO, step S2214: YES), if the high probability flag of the main side RAM 84 is set to "1" (step S2215: YES), the first time saving result is selected (step S2216), and if the high probability flag in the main side RAM 84 is not set to "1" (step S2215: NO), the time saving distribution determination process is executed. (Step S2217). In the distribution determination process for time saving, similar to step S811 of the special symbol fluctuation start process (FIG. 20) in the first embodiment, if the start target of the game round is the first pending information, the first special symbol The time saving distribution table 127 (see FIG. 10(c)) is read from the main side ROM 83 to the main side RAM 84, and if the start target of the game round is the second pending information, the time saving distribution table 127 (see FIG. 10(c)) for the second special symbol is read out. 10(d)) is read from the main side ROM 83 to the main side RAM 84. After reading the time-saving distribution tables 127 and 128, the information for distribution determination, that is, the numerical information obtained from the type random number counter C2, is read from the pending information stored in the execution area 113 for special symbols, and the time-saving distribution table 128 is read out. By referring to the minute tables 127 and 128, it is specified which type of time saving result the read numerical information corresponds to. Therefore, either the first time saving result or the second time saving result is selected.

Even in this embodiment, as in the first embodiment, even if the result of the validity determination process in the high probability state is a time saving result, the time saving state is not set based on the time saving result. In this case, if the result of the validity judgment process is a time-saving result in a high probability state, the first time-saving result, which is less advantageous than the second time-saving result, is forcibly selected. Even if the player recognizes from the display contents of the special symbol display sections 37a, 37b and the symbol display device 41 that the result of the validity judgment process is a time-saving result in the probability state, the second time-saving result, which has a high advantage, may not be possible. It becomes possible to make the player recognize that the first time-saving result, which has a low advantage, has been invalidated, and it is possible to reduce the sense of waste when the invalidation occurs. Note that this configuration may be applied to the first embodiment, the second embodiment, or the fourth to twelfth embodiments described later.

When the process of step S2216 or the process of step S2217 is executed, flag setting process for time saving is executed (step S2218), and stop result setting process for time saving result is executed (step S2219). The contents of steps S2217 to S2219 are the same as steps S811 to S813 of the special symbol fluctuation start process (FIG. 20) in the first embodiment. Further, if the result of the success/failure determination process is neither a jackpot result nor a time saving result (step S2214: NO), a stop result setting process for a losing result is executed (step S2220). The contents of step S2220 are the same as step S814 of the special symbol fluctuation start process (FIG. 20) in the first embodiment.

When the process of step S2213, the process of step S2219, or the process of step S2220 is executed, the processes of steps S2221 to S2224 are executed. The contents of steps S2221 to S2224 are the same as steps S815 to S818 of the special symbol fluctuation start process (FIG. 20) in the first embodiment.

FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing the special figure confirmation process in this embodiment executed by the main MPU 82.

In steps S2301 to S2307, the same processes as steps S1001 to S1007 of the special figure confirmation process (FIG. 22) in the first embodiment are executed. If the value of the special figure side timer counter is "0" and the final stop period has passed (step S2301: YES), and the game result of the current game round is not a jackpot result (step S2302: NO) ), in step S2308 the time saving state counter 134 is subtracted, in step S2309 the variable selection state counter 132 is subtracted, in step S2310 the time saving result setting process is performed, and in step S2311 Then, the ceiling counter 131 is subtracted. Then, the special figure special electric line counter is cleared to "0" (step S2312). In steps S2308 to S2311, the same processes as steps S1008 to S1011 of the special figure confirmation process (FIG. 22) in the first embodiment are executed.

In other words, in this embodiment, the process of subtracting the high probability state counter 133, which was set in the special pattern confirmation process (FIG. 22) in the first embodiment, is not set in the special pattern confirmation process (FIG. 40). . Therefore, in this embodiment, the transition to the low probability mode does not occur depending on the number of games played in the high probability mode.

As described above, when a game round is started in the high probability mode, the fall judgment process (step S2206) is executed, and if the result of the fall judgment process (step S2206) is a fall result, the win/fail lottery mode is entered at that point. changes from high probability mode to low probability mode. These processes are executed before the validity determination process (step S2209). Thereby, when the result of the fall determination process is a fall result, the win/fail determination process (step S2209) can be executed in a situation where the win/fail lottery mode is the low probability mode.

If the time-saving result is selected in the validity determination process (step S2209), if the mode is low probability mode, the first time-saving result or the second time-saving result is selected in the time-saving distribution determination process (step S2217). On the other hand, in the high probability mode, the first time saving result is forcibly selected. Even in this embodiment, as in the first embodiment, even if the result of the validity determination process in the high probability state is a time saving result, the time saving state is not set based on the time saving result. In this case, if the result of the validity judgment process is a time-saving result in a high probability state, the first time-saving result, which is less advantageous than the second time-saving result, is forcibly selected. Even if the player recognizes from the display contents of the special symbol display sections 37a, 37b and the symbol display device 41 that the result of the validity judgment process is a time-saving result in the state, the result is not the second time-saving result, which is more advantageous. It is possible to make the player recognize that the first time-saving result, which has a low advantage, has been invalidated, and it is possible to reduce the feeling of wasted money due to the occurrence of the invalidation.

In a configuration in which a first time-saving result having a relatively low advantage is selected when the result of the validity determination process (step S2209) is a time-saving result in the high probability mode, the time-saving result is combined with the first time-saving result and the second time-saving result. A fall determination process (step S2206) is executed before the process of allocating to one of the time saving results (steps S2215 to S2219). As a result, if a transition to the low probability mode occurs due to the result of the fall determination process (step S2206) being a fall result, the time saving result is changed to the first time saving after the transition to the low probability mode is performed. Processing (steps S2215 to S2219) to allocate the result to either the result or the second time saving result is executed. Therefore, in a game round in which a transition to the low probability mode occurs due to the result of the fall judgment process (step S2206), if the result of the validity judgment process (step S2209) is a time-saving result, the relative It becomes possible to select the second time-saving result that is advantageous to the user.

In a configuration in which the high-probability mode shifts to the low-probability mode when the result of the fall determination process (step S2206) is a fall result, the process to shift to the low-probability mode is executed at the start of a game round. On the other hand, the time-saving result setting process (step S2310) and the subtraction process of the ceiling counter 131 (step S2311) are executed in the special figure confirmation process (FIG. 40) which is the process at the end of the game round. As a result, if a transition to the low probability mode occurs because the result of the fall determination process (step S2206) is a fall result, the time saving result setting process is performed after the transition to the low probability mode is performed. (Step S2310) and subtraction processing of the ceiling counter 131 (Step S2311) are executed. Therefore, in a game round in which a transition to the low probability mode occurs due to the result of the fall determination process (step S2206) being a fall result, if the result of the validity determination process (step S2209) is a time saving result, the time saving is performed. It is possible to set the time saving state based on the result, and when the ceiling time reduction occurs because the value of the ceiling counter 131 after subtracting 1 becomes "0", the ceiling time reduction can be set. It becomes possible to set the time saving state using a trigger.

<Fourth embodiment>
This embodiment is different from the first embodiment in the processing configuration of the main process. Hereinafter, configurations that are different from the first embodiment will be explained. Note that descriptions of the same configurations as in the first embodiment will be basically omitted.

FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing the main processing in this embodiment executed by the main MPU 82.

In steps S2401 to S2416, the same processes as steps S101 to S116 of the main process (FIG. 13) in the first embodiment are executed. When it is determined that the reset button 142 is pressed (step S2408 or step S2422: YES), and when it is determined that the setting key insertion section 143 is turned on using a setting key (step S2416). : YES), or if it is determined in step S2407 that the setting update flag of the main side RAM 84 is set to "1", the setting value update process is executed (step S2417). The setting value update process will be explained later. Furthermore, in steps S2418 to S2420, the same processes as steps S118 to S120 of the main process (FIG. 13) in the first embodiment are executed.

If a negative determination is made in any of steps S2404 to S2406, that is, if the power outage flag is not set to "1", if the checksums do not match, or if the set value is abnormal, the main The game stop flag in the RAM 84 is set to "1" (step S2421). As in the first embodiment, by setting the game stop flag to "1", steps S201 to S205 are executed in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14), while an affirmative determination is made in step S206. By doing so, the processes from step S207 to step S220 are not executed. As a result, if the power outage flag is not set to "1" because power outage processing was not performed properly at the previous power off, the memory state of the main RAM 84 will change from the previous power off. If the checksums do not match due to the fact that the processing will not be executed.

In the first embodiment, when the game stop flag is set to "1" in step S121 by specifying that an information abnormality has occurred in the main side RAM 84, the ceiling counter of the main side RAM 84 is set in step S122. Although the configuration is configured to execute a process of setting information of 500 times, which is the fixed ceiling number, in 131, this process is not set in this embodiment. That is, even if the game stop flag is set to "1" in step S2421 by specifying that an information abnormality has occurred in the main side RAM 84, the process of setting information in the ceiling counter 131 is not executed.

Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the reset button 142 has been pressed (step S2422). If the reset button 142 is not pressed (step S2422: NO), the processes of steps S2423 and S2424 are executed. The processes in steps S2423 and S2424 are the same as steps S124 and S125 in the main process (FIG. 13) in the first embodiment.

If the reset button 142 is pressed (step S2422: YES), the setting value update process is performed on the condition that the setting key insertion section 143 is turned on using the setting key (step S2416: YES). Execute (step S2417). Note that in steps S2425 to S2429, the same processes as steps S126 to S130 of the main process (FIG. 13) in the first embodiment are executed.

FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing the setting value update process executed in step S2417 of the main process (FIG. 41).

First, interrupt permission is set (step S2501). Thereafter, the setting update flag in the main side RAM 84 is set to "1" (step S2502). After that, if the game stop flag in the main side RAM 84 is not set to "1" (step S2503: NO), after executing the RAM clearing process (step S2504), the process advances to step S2507, and the game stop flag is set to "1". 1" is set (step S2503: YES), RAM clear processing is executed (step S2505), ceiling counter 131 setting processing is executed (step S2506), and the process advances to step S2507.

In the RAM clear processing in each of step S2504 and step S2505, in the main side RAM 84, an area (that is, a setting reference area) in which setting value information indicating the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is set, a ceiling counter 131, a setting update flag Then, the main RAM 84 is cleared to "0", except for the area where information for calculating the winning ratio is stored, and initial settings are executed. As a result, the area indicating whether the win/fail lottery mode is the high probability mode is cleared to "0", so the win/fail lottery is performed regardless of the win/fail lottery mode immediately before the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped. The mode is a low probability mode. In addition, the game cycle is not being executed, the opening/closing execution mode is not being executed, and the general figure display section 38a is not being displayed in a variable manner, and the general electric accessory 34a is in a closed state. situation. Moreover, since the special figure holding area 84a and the general figure holding area 84c are also cleared to "0", the first holding information, the second holding information, and the holding information on the general drawing side are erased. Additionally, the setting confirmation flag and setting update area are cleared to "0". Further, in the RAM clearing process, initial settings are executed after various registers of the main MPU 82 are also cleared to "0". In this initial setting, processing similar to the internal function register setting processing in step S2402 is executed.

In the setting process of the ceiling counter 131 in step S2506, information of 500 times, which is the fixed ceiling number, is set in the ceiling counter 131. As a result, it is identified that an information error has occurred in the main side RAM 84, and the game stop flag in the main side RAM 84 is set to "1", which prevents the start of the process for advancing the game. When the setting value update process is executed in a situation where the blocking situation is canceled, information of 500 times, which is the fixed ceiling number, is set in the ceiling counter 131.

After that, "1" is set in the setting update area of the main side RAM 84 (step S2507), and an update start command is sent to the audio-light side MPU 93 (step S2508). Further, it is determined whether the setting value information stored in the setting update area is one of "1" to "6" (step S2509). If it is not one of "1" to "6" (step S2509: NO), "1" is set in the setting update area (step S2510). As a result, the setting value to be updated becomes "setting 1."

If an affirmative determination is made in step S2509 or if the process in step S2510 is executed, the setting key insertion unit 143 determines whether the setting key has been switched from the ON state to the OFF state (step S2511). If a negative determination is made in step S2511, the value of the setting update area is incremented by 1 on the condition that the reset button 142 is pressed (step S2512: YES) (step S2513). Thereby, each time the reset button 142 is pressed once, the setting value is updated to one level higher. Further, if the reset button 142 is not pressed (step S2512: NO) or if the value of the setting update area is incremented by 1, the process returns to step S2509, but in step S2509 the setting update area is If it is determined that the value of the area is 7 or more, "1" is set in the setting update area in step S2510. As a result, when the reset button 142 is pressed once in the situation of "Setting 6", the state returns to "Setting 1".

If it is determined that the setting key insertion unit 143 has switched from the ON state to the OFF state (step S2511: YES), the setting value information stored in the setting update area is overwritten in the setting reference area (step S2514). ). As a result, the setting value information updated in this setting value update process is set in the setting reference area, and the setting value corresponding to the set information is the current setting of the pachinko machine 10. value.

Thereafter, interrupt prohibition is set (step S2515). Further, a return command at the time of update is transmitted to the audio-light side MPU 93 (step S2516). Furthermore, the setting update flag in the main side RAM 84 is cleared to "0" (step S2517).

According to the above configuration, when it is specified that an information abnormality has occurred in the main side RAM 84 and the game stop flag of the main side RAM 84 is set to "1", the process for proceeding with the game can be started. When the setting value update process is executed in a blocked situation and the blocked situation is canceled, information of 500 times, which is the fixed ceiling number, is set in the ceiling counter 131. As a result, even if the information on the ceiling counter 131 is rewritten when an information error occurs in the main RAM 84, it is possible to reset the information on the ceiling counter 131 to the fixed ceiling number of 500 times. becomes.

When an information error occurs in the main RAM 84, the process of resetting the information on the ceiling counter 131 to the fixed ceiling number of times, 500, is canceled to prevent the start of the process for advancing the game. It becomes possible to consolidate the setting value update processing executed to update the settings. In addition, when an information error occurs in the main RAM 84, the process for resetting the information on the ceiling counter 131 to the fixed ceiling number of 500 times is prevented from starting the process for advancing the game. When the setting value update process is executed to cancel the setting value, it is possible to automatically execute the setting value update process.

<Fifth embodiment>
This embodiment is different from the first embodiment in the processing configuration of the main processing. Hereinafter, configurations that are different from the first embodiment will be described. Note that descriptions of the same configurations as those in the first embodiment will basically be omitted.

FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing the main processing in this embodiment executed by the main MPU 82.

In steps S2601 to S2612, the same processes as steps S101 to S112 of the main process (FIG. 13) in the first embodiment are executed. When the setting key insertion section 143 is not turned on using the setting key and the setting confirmation flag is not set to "1" (step S2610 and step S2611: NO), the main body opening detection sensor 144 It is determined whether or not the gaming machine main body 12 is being opened by determining whether or not an opening detection signal of HI level is received from (step S2613).

When the opening detection signal of HI level is received from the main body opening detection sensor 144 (step S2613: YES), that is, when the gaming machine main body 12 is in an open state with respect to the outer frame 11, the ceiling of the main side RAM 84 Information of 500 times, which is the first ceiling number, is set in the counter 131 (step S2614). The process of step S2613 is executed when the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is started and the reset button 142 is pressed and the setting key insertion section 143 is turned on by the setting key. Furthermore, both the setting updating flag and the setting checking flag of the main side RAM 84 are not set to "1". In this case, the settings confirmation process (step S2612), setting value update process (step S2617), and RAM clear process (step S2619) are not executed during the process at the start of the supply of operating power (steps S2601 to S2626). It's a situation. In addition, in the game hall, the main power supply for supplying operating power to each pachinko machine 10 is turned off, and the power switch provided on the power supply/launch control device 78 of each pachinko machine 10 is turned on in advance. When it is time to start business for the day, the main power is turned on so that all the pachinko machines 10 are activated at the same time. In such circumstances, when an affirmative determination is made in step S2613, the gaming machine This is a case where the supply of operating power is started while the main body 12 is intentionally left in an open state. In such a situation, information of 500 times, which is the first ceiling number, is set in the ceiling counter 131. As a result, it is possible to generate a situation in which the information of 500 times, which is the first ceiling number, is set on the ceiling counter 131 at the start of supply of operating power, as a situation different from that at the start of normal business operations, and also to set This can be performed without the confirmation process (step S2612), setting value update process (step S2617), and RAM clear process (step S2619). In addition, even when the result is a jackpot and the opening/closing execution mode is started, information of 500 times, which is the first ceiling number, is set in the ceiling counter 131.

In steps S2615 to S2620, the same processes as steps S115 to S120 of the main process (FIG. 13) in the first embodiment are executed. If a negative determination is made in any of steps S2604 to S2606, that is, if the power outage flag is not set to "1", if the checksums do not match, or if the set value is abnormal, the main The game stop flag in the RAM 84 is set to "1" (step S2621). As in the first embodiment, by setting the game stop flag to "1", steps S201 to S205 are executed in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14), while an affirmative determination is made in step S206. By doing so, the processes from step S207 to step S220 are not executed. As a result, if the power outage flag is not set to "1" because power outage processing was not performed properly at the previous power off, the memory state of the main RAM 84 will change from the previous power off. If the checksums do not match due to the fact that the processing will not be executed.

Thereafter, information of 800 times, which is the second ceiling number which is greater than the first ceiling number, is set in the ceiling counter 131 of the main side RAM 84 (step S2622). In steps S2623 to S2630, the same processes as steps S123 to S130 of the main process (FIG. 13) in the first embodiment are executed.

Even if the setting value update process (step S2617) is executed as in the first embodiment, the initialization of the ceiling counter 131 in the main side RAM 84 will not be executed, and furthermore, the new setting of the ceiling number will not be executed. It won't happen. Therefore, even if the setting value update process (step S2617) is executed in order to cancel the game stop state due to the information abnormality when an information abnormality occurs in the main side RAM 84, the information in the ceiling counter 131 is maintained as is. . On the other hand, if it is specified that an information error has occurred in the main side RAM 84 and the game stop flag in the main side RAM 84 is set to "1", the ceiling counter 131 is set to 800, which is the second ceiling number. The time information is set. As a result, even if the information on the ceiling counter 131 has been rewritten when an information error occurs in the main side RAM 84, the information on the ceiling counter 131 can be reset to the information of 800 times, which is the second ceiling number. It becomes possible.

The second ceiling count is greater than the first ceiling count set in the ceiling counter 131 when the opening/closing execution mode is started or in step S2614 of the main process (FIG. 43). As a result, when an information error occurs in the main side RAM 84, the second ceiling count, which is a relatively large number, is set in the ceiling counter 131, and fraud that accompanies the occurrence of an information error in the main side RAM 84 is prevented. If such an act is committed, it becomes possible to inflict a penalty such that the number of times the game is executed is increased in order to generate a ceiling time reduction.

<Sixth embodiment>
In this embodiment, the configuration of the game area PA provided on the game board 24 is different from the first embodiment. Hereinafter, configurations that are different from the first embodiment will be described. Note that descriptions of the same configurations as in the first embodiment will be basically omitted.

FIG. 44 is a front view of the game board 24 for explaining the configuration of the game area PA in this embodiment.

An inner rail part 25 and an outer rail part 26 are attached to the game board 24 so as to partition a part of the outer edge of the game area PA, and the inner rail part 25 and the outer rail part 26 provide a guide means. The guide rail is configured as follows. The game ball fired from the game ball firing mechanism 27 (see FIG. 2) is guided to the upper part of the game area PA by a guide rail.

As in the first embodiment, the game board 24 includes a general prize opening 31, a special prize winning device 32, a first operation opening 33, a through gate 35, a variable display unit 36, a special symbol unit 37, and a regular symbol unit 38. is provided. Further, a special winning device 151 is provided in place of the second operating port 34 in the first embodiment. Further, in this embodiment, a prize distribution device 161 is provided.

Even if a ball enters the through gate 35, the payout of the game ball is not executed. On the other hand, if a ball enters any of the general winning slot 31, special winning slot 32, first operating slot 33, special winning slot 151, and distribution winning slot 161, the number of gaming media available to the player will be reduced. A predetermined number of game balls are paid out in order to increase the number of game balls. Specifically, regarding the number of prize balls, when a ball enters the general winning hole 31, 10 game balls are paid out, and when a ball enters the special electric winning device 32, 15 game balls are paid out. When three game balls are paid out, and a ball enters the first operation port 33, three game balls are paid out, and when a ball enters the special winning device 151, The payout of one game ball is executed, and when a ball enters the distribution winning device 161, the payout of 15 game balls is executed.

In addition, the distribution winning device 161 is provided with a discharge passage area 165b and a V winning passage area 165c as described later, and game balls that enter the distribution winning apparatus 161 are provided with a discharge passage area 165b and a V winning passage area 165c. Although it will pass through either of the areas 165c, the same number of game balls (specifically 15) will be paid out regardless of which of the discharge passage area 165b and the V winning passage area 165c the game balls pass through. be done. Further, the number of prize balls is arbitrary, and for example, the number of prize balls of the first operating port 33 and the special winning device 151 may be the same, and the number of prize balls of the distribution winning device 161 is higher than the number of prize balls of the special winning device 151. The number of prize balls may be greater or less than the number of prize balls of 32.

In addition, an out port 24a is provided at the bottom of the game board 24, and game balls that have not entered various winning ports are discharged from the gaming area PA through the out port 24a. Further, the game board 24 is provided with a large number of nails 24b in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the game balls, and various members such as a windmill are also provided.

A variable display unit 36 is provided so as to include the central portion of the game area PA. Due to the peripheral edge of the variable display unit 36 protruding forward of the pachinko machine 10 from the surface of the game board 24, an area is defined in which game balls fired into the game area PA can flow down. Specifically, in the gaming area PA, there is an upper area PA1 that is an area above a predetermined height position of the variable display unit 36, and an area that is continuous below the upper area PA1 and is higher than the variable display unit 36. A left area PA2 which is a left area, a right area PA3 which is continuous below the upper area PA1 and is an area to the right of the variable display unit 36, and each of the left area PA2 and the right area PA3. On the other hand, it is divided into a lower area PA4 that is continuous below the variable display unit 36 and is below the variable display unit 36.

When the player operates the firing operation device 28 with a rotation amount in the first range that is less than the reference rotation amount as the first firing operation, the game ball is positioned to the left of the horizontal center position in the upper area PA1. It starts to flow down. In this case, the game ball will flow down in the order of upper area PA1 → left area PA2 → lower area PA4. On the other hand, when the player operates the firing operation device 28 as a second firing operation with a rotation amount in the second range that is equal to or greater than the reference rotation amount, the player can move the firing operation device 28 to the right of the horizontal center position in the upper area PA1. The game ball begins to flow down. In this case, the game ball will flow down in the order of upper area PA1 → right area PA3 → lower area PA4. In other words, by adjusting the rotational operation amount of the firing operation device 28, the player can play the game so that the game ball flows down the left area PA2 of the left area PA2 and the right area PA3, and the player can play the game so that the game ball flows down the left area PA2 and the right area PA3. A game can be played as the game ball flows down PA3. Incidentally, when the firing operation device 28 is operated with the maximum amount of rotation, the game balls will flow down in the order of upper area PA1 → right area PA3 → lower area PA4.

The first operating port 33 is installed in the lower area PA4. The first operating port 33 is opened upward, and no member such as an opening/closing member for preventing a game ball from entering the first operating port 33 is provided. In a situation where the game balls are fired in the same manner, the winning probability at the first operating port 33 is constant regardless of the game state. In other words, the first operating port 33 is such that a game ball flowing down the gaming area PA toward the first operating port 33 can always enter the first operating port 33 . In addition, the first operating port 33 is disposed directly below the stage portion 36b formed in the variable display unit 36, and the game balls flowing onto the stage portion 36b through the guide path formed in the variable display unit 36 Therefore, the game balls discharged from the lateral center of the stage part 36b to the outside of the variable display unit 36 can easily enter the first operating opening 33.

As mentioned above, the first operating port 33 is provided in the lower area PA4, but the game ball that has flown down the right area PA3 is located upstream of the first operating port 33 toward the right area PA3. A restriction nail 24c is provided so as to make it impossible to reach the first operating port 33. Further, the entrance of the guide passage to the stage portion 36b is provided for the left side area PA2, and is not provided for the right side area PA3. With these configurations, when the launch operation device 28 is operated so that the game ball flows down the left area PA2, it is possible to enter the first operating port 33, but the game ball flows down the right area PA3. If the firing operation device 28 is operated in such a manner, winning through the first operating port 33 is not possible. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the game ball flows down the right side area PA3 because the regulating nail 24c is not provided or the entrance of the guide passage to the stage part 36b is provided in the right side area PA3. Even when the firing operation device 28 is being operated as shown in FIG.

The special winning device 151 is installed in the right area PA3. In other words, the special winning device 151 cannot win a prize if the firing operation device 28 is operated so that the game ball flows down the left side area PA2, and the firing operation device 151 operates so that the game ball flows down the right side area PA3. If 28 is operated, it is possible to win a prize.

The configuration of the special prize winning device 151 will be explained with reference to FIG. 45(a). FIG. 45(a) is a vertical cross-sectional view of the special winning device 151 in the non-guidance state. The special winning device 151 includes a base unit 151a formed with a discharge passage 153 for discharging game balls flowing in from the game area PA to the rear of the game board 24, and a base unit 151a that discharges game balls flowing down the game area PA into the discharge passage 153. A guidance unit 152 for guidance is provided. The entrance portion 153a of the discharge passage 153 has an opening area equal to or larger than one game ball, and is open toward the front of the Pachinko machine 10. A detection sensor 154 is provided on the exit portion 153b side of the discharge passage 153, and the detection sensor 154 detects a game ball that has won a prize in the special winning device 151.

The guiding unit 152 receives the game balls flowing down the front area of the entrance part 153a in the game area PA from below, and includes a guide member 155 for guiding the received game balls into the discharge passage 153, and a guide member 155 for guiding the received game balls into the discharge passage 153. A situation in which a guide drive unit 156 for displacing the guide member 155 between an initial position that disables guiding of the game ball and a guiding position that allows the guiding, and the guide member 155 are arranged at the initial position. In the situation where the guide member 155 is placed in the blocking position that prevents the game balls from flowing into the discharge passage 153, and the guide member 155 is placed in the guiding position, it is placed in the non-blocking position that does not prevent the game balls from flowing into the discharge passage 153. A blocking member 157 is provided. The guide member 155 and the blocking member 157 are arranged to face each other at a predetermined distance in the vertical direction, with the guide member 155 facing downward. A transmission unit 158 is provided to transmit the driving force of the guide drive section 156 to the guide member 155 and the blocking member 157.

When the guide drive unit 156 is in a non-driven state, the guide member 155 is placed in the initial position by the urging force of a urging means such as a spring (not shown), and the blocking member 157 is placed in the blocking position. In this case, the guide member 155 and the blocking member 157 are entirely buried within the discharge passage 153 and do not protrude into the game area PA. As a result, the game ball flowing down the area in front of the entrance part 153a of the discharge passage 153 in the game area PA is not guided into the discharge passage 153 by the guide member 155 and the blocking member 157, and in other words, the game ball can win a special prize. The ball flows downward in the gaming area PA without entering the device 151. Further, since the blocking member 157 is disposed at the blocking position, the substantial opening area of the entrance portion 153a of the discharge passage 153 becomes less than one game ball. This makes it possible to reliably prevent game balls from entering the special winning device 151 in a situation where the guide member 155 is placed at the initial position.

When the guide drive section 156 is in the driven state, the guide member 155 and the blocking member 157 are displaced against the biasing force of the biasing means, so that the guide member 155 is placed in the guiding position and the blocking member 157 is released. placed in a blocking position. FIG. 45(b) is a vertical cross-sectional view of the special winning device 151 in the guided state.

When the guide member 155 is arranged at the guiding position, the distal end side of the guide member 155 projects from the entrance portion 153a of the discharge passage 153 toward the game area PA side. This amount of protrusion is such that it is possible to receive the game ball flowing down the front area of the entrance portion 153a in the game area PA from below. Since the upper surface of the distal end side of the guide member 155 is sloped downward toward the entrance portion 153a of the discharge passage 153, the game balls received from below at the distal end side of the guide member 155 are It rolls and is guided into the discharge passage 153. Furthermore, when the blocking member 157 is disposed at the non-blocking position, the distal end of the blocking member 157 is displaced to a position above the blocking position, so that the game that rolls on the upper surface of the guide member 155 The balls flow into the discharge passage 153 without interfering with the blocking member 157. As a result, the guide drive section 156 is brought into the driving state, and the game ball flowing down the area in front of the entrance section 153a in the game area PA enters the special winning device 151. Hereinafter, for convenience of explanation, the state in which the guide drive unit 156 is in a non-driving state, the guide member 155 is arranged in the initial position, and the blocking member 157 is arranged in the blocking position will be referred to as the non-guiding state of the guiding unit 152 or the special winning device 151. The state in which the guide drive unit 156 is in the driving state, the guide member 155 is placed in the guiding position, and the blocking member 157 is placed in the non-blocking position is called the guiding state of the guiding unit 152 or the special prize winning device 151. This is called the open state.

The special winning device 151 includes a cover member 159 that is provided to face the entrance portion 153a of the discharge passage 153 from the front of the pachinko machine 10. The cover member 159 is formed in a gate shape so as to form a vertical passage section 159a in a region in front of the entrance section 153a in the game area PA, and allows one game ball to pass through the front region of the entrance section 153a at the same time. It is provided so as to restrict the movement of the game ball to the front of the pachinko machine 10 and the movement of the game ball in the lateral direction. This prevents a plurality of game balls from being guided into the discharge passage 153 of the special winning device 151 at the same time when the guiding unit 152 of the special winning device 151 enters the guiding state. In this way, it becomes possible to reliably guide game balls passing through the front area of the entrance portion 153a into the discharge passage 153.

As shown in FIG. 44, a through gate 35 is provided above the special winning device 151 in the right area PA3. In other words, the through gate 35 cannot win if the firing operation device 28 is operated so that the game ball flows down the left side area PA2, and the firing operation device 28 operates so that the game ball flows down the right side area PA3. If the is operated, it is possible to win a prize. The through gate 35 has a through hole that penetrates in the vertical direction. Further, a special winning device 151 is provided at a position vertically below the through gate 35, and furthermore, a special winning device 32 and a prize distribution device 161 are provided downstream of the special winning device 151 in the right area PA3. It is being Therefore, the game balls that have won through the gate 35 can be won into the special winning device 151, the special electric winning device 32, or the distribution winning device 161.

The right side area PA3 where the special winning device 151 and the through gate 35 are arranged is defined by a side wall 36f on the left side that bulges out in front of the pachinko machine 10 than the board surface of the game board 24 in the variable display unit 36. , the right side is defined by a regulating wall provided on the resin base 21 of the inner frame 13 and protruding forward of the pachinko machine 10 from the board surface of the game board 24. The right side area PA3 is set to have a narrower lateral dimension than the lower area PA4, and the lateral dimension is such that it is impossible to arrange the game ball entry devices laterally at the same height position. It becomes. This makes it possible to limit the trajectory of the game ball flowing down the right side area PA3 to a predetermined range, making it easier for the game ball to enter the special winning device 151 and the through gate 35.

The arrangement of the plurality of nails 24b on the upstream side of the through gate 35 in the right area PA3 is set so as to guide the game balls flowing down the right area PA3 to the through gate 35. This makes it easier for game balls flowing down the right side area PA3 to enter the through gate 35, and along with the ease of entering the ball into the through gate 35, it becomes easier for the ball to enter the special winning device 151.

When the guiding unit 152 of the special winning device 151 is switched from the non-guiding state to the guiding state based on the winning in the through gate 35, the special winning device 151 changes from the closed state to the open state. Specifically, the winning of the through gate 35 is used as a trigger to determine whether the normal figure is correct or not, and the normal figure unit 38 provided in the lower left corner of the gaming area PA, which is an area through which the game ball does not pass, A changing display of the picture is performed on the diagram display section 38a. Then, when the result of the ordinary figure propriety determination process is the electric power open winning, a stop result corresponding to the result is displayed, and the variable display of the ordinary figure display section 38a is ended, the state shifts to the ordinary electric role open state. In the normal power open state, the guiding unit 152 enters the guiding state in a predetermined manner, so that the special winning device 151 enters the open state in a predetermined manner.

Even in this embodiment, a low-frequency support mode, a first high-frequency support mode, and a second high-frequency support mode are set as the support modes, and electric power is used in the general pattern validity determination process in each of these support modes. The probability of an open winning, the selection mode of the duration of the variable display times in the normal pattern display section 38a, and the selection mode of the stop result in the normal pattern display section 38a are the same as in the first embodiment. In addition, the manner in which the special prize winning device 151 becomes open when the general electricity is open in each support mode (opening duration, number of openings, upper limit number of prizes, interval period) is different from each other in the first embodiment. This is the same as the manner in which the general electric accessory 34a of the second operating port 34 is in the open state when the general electric power is opened in the support mode (opening duration, number of openings, upper limit number of winnings, interval period).

In the first high-frequency support mode and the second high-frequency support mode, the probability of winning the special prize winning device 151 is higher than in the low-frequency support mode. In other words, in the low-frequency support mode, the probability of winning a prize in the first operating port 33 is higher than in the special winning device 151, but in the first high-frequency support mode and the second high-frequency support mode, the probability of winning a prize in the first operating port 33 is higher than that in the special winning device 151. The probability of winning a prize in the special prize winning device 151 is higher than in the case of 33. When a winning occurs in the special winning device 151, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out, so in the first high-frequency support mode and the second high-frequency support mode, the player does not have many balls. You can play the game while trying not to lose the amount.

A win/fail determination process is performed based on the occurrence of a winning at the first operating port 33 or the special winning device 151. Then, the result of the hit/fail judgment process is clearly displayed through the display effect on the symbol display device 41 of the special symbol unit 37 and the variable display unit 36. The special figure unit 37 is provided with a first special figure display section 37a and a second special figure display section 37b as in the first embodiment. In the first special figure display section 37a, a fluctuation display of symbols is performed by performing a validity determination process on the first pending information acquired by the occurrence of a winning in the first operating port 33. Then, the stop result corresponding to the determination result of the validity determination process is displayed. In this case, as in the first embodiment, there are a jackpot result, a time saving result, and a miss result as the judgment results of the win/fail judgment process, but the contents of the stop result on the first special symbol display section 37a are the jackpot result, The time-saving results and the missed results are different. The display of the stop result on the first special figure display section 37a is maintained until the next game round starts and the first special figure display section 37a starts to display a new symbol in a variable manner. In addition, in the second special figure display section 37b, a fluctuation display of symbols is performed by performing a validity determination process on the second pending information acquired by the occurrence of a winning in the special winning device 151. Then, a result corresponding to the determination result of the validity determination process is displayed. In this case, as the judgment results of the success/failure judgment process, there are jackpot results, time-saving results, and miss results as in the first embodiment, and in addition to these, there are also small win results. The contents of the stop result on the second special figure display section 37b are different depending on the jackpot result, time saving result, small win result, and miss result. The display of the stop result on the second special figure display section 37b is maintained until the next game round starts and the variable display of a new symbol starts on the second special figure display section 37b.

In the special figure unit 37, a first special figure reservation display section 37c is provided at a position adjacent to the first special figure display section 37a. The number of game balls entered into the first actuation port 33 is reserved up to a maximum of four, and the number of reserved balls is displayed by lighting the first special figure reservation display section 37c. On the other hand, a special figure pending display section corresponding to the second special figure display section 37b is not provided. The number of winning game balls in the special prize winning device 151 is not stored pending storage unlike the first operating port 33. In other words, if a winning occurs in the special winning device 151 in a situation where it is possible to start a game round, the game round on the second special figure display section 37b is executed, but the game round cannot be started. Even if a winning occurs in the special winning device 151 under the circumstances, pending information that triggers the start of a game round is not stored. However, even if a winning occurs in the special winning device 151 in a situation where it is not possible to start a game round, the game ball will be paid out in response to the winning.

The display range of the first special figure display section 37a and the second special figure display section 37b is narrower than the display surface of the symbol display device 41. Further, the entire display range of the first special figure display section 37a, the second special figure display section 37b, and the first special figure reservation display section 37c is also narrower than the display surface of the symbol display device 41. This makes it possible to increase the player's attention to the symbol display device 41 rather than the first special symbol display section 37a, the second special symbol display section 37b, and the first special symbol pending display section 37c.

When a variable display of symbols is performed on the first special symbol display section 37a or the second special symbol display section 37b, that is, when a game round is being executed, a display effect is performed on the symbol display device 41 in accordance with it. When a game repeat effect is executed on the symbol display device 41, symbol rows Z1 to Z3, the first pending display area 42a, and the state suggestion area 43 are set as in the first embodiment. However, in this embodiment, the second reservation information is not stored on hold, so the second reservation display area 42b is not displayed. Further, the symbol display device 41 performs not only the display performance for the game round, but also the display performance during the opening/closing execution mode that is shifted to after a jackpot result, etc.

When a jackpot result is selected in the win/fail judgment process executed based on winning to the first operation port 33 or the special winning device 151, the game shifts to the opening/closing execution mode after the game round corresponding to the jackpot result ends. In the opening/closing execution mode, it is possible to win a prize using the special electric prize winning device 32. As shown in FIG. 44, the special prize winning device 32 is provided at a position below the special winning device 151 and above the distribution winning device 161 in the right area PA3. In other words, the special electric winning device 32 cannot win if the firing operation device 28 is operated so that the game ball flows down the left area PA2, and the firing operation device 32 operates so that the game ball flows down the right side area PA3. If 28 is operated, it is possible to win a prize.

The special electric winning device 32 is equipped with a grand prize opening (not shown) that leads to the back side of the game board 24, and an opening/closing door 32a that opens and closes the grand prize opening. The opening/closing door 32a is arranged in either a closed state or an open state. Specifically, the opening/closing door 32a is normally in a closed state where game balls cannot win, but when a jackpot result is selected in the win/fail determination process, it can be switched to an open state where game balls can win. ing. Note that in the closed state, it is not impossible to win a prize, but it may be configured to be in a state in which it is more difficult to win a prize than in the open state. Further, the execution contents of the opening/closing execution mode are the same as in the first embodiment.

When a small win result is selected in the win/fail judgment process executed based on the winning in the special winning device 151, the mode shifts to the distribution execution mode after the game round corresponding to the small win result ends. In the distribution execution mode, it is possible to win a prize using the distribution prize winning device 161.

As shown in FIG. 44, the distribution winning device 161 is provided at a position lower than the special winning device 151 in the right area PA3. In other words, if the firing operation device 28 is operated so that the game ball flows down the left area PA2, it is impossible to win a prize, and the distribution winning device 161 operates the firing operation so that the game ball flows down the right side area PA3. Winning is possible when the device 28 is operated.

The configuration of the prize distribution device 161 will be explained with reference to FIG. 46 in addition to FIG. 44. FIG. 46 is a longitudinal cross-sectional view for explaining the internal structure of the prize distribution device 161.

As shown in FIG. 44, the sorting winning device 161 is equipped with a sorting entrance 161a that is large enough for game balls to pass through, and is in a closed state where game balls cannot pass through the sorting entrance 161a. It is provided with a distribution side opening/closing member 162 that can be switched to an open state through which a ball can pass. The distribution side opening/closing member 162 is brought into an open state by being driven by the distribution entrance drive unit 163 through a link mechanism (not shown).

The game balls that have won at the sorting entrance 161a are led out to a branch passage 165 formed in the base body 164 of the sorting winning device 161, as shown in FIG. The branch passage 165 includes an upstream passage area 165a that is set so that the passage direction slopes downward in the horizontal direction from the entrance of the branch passage 165 to a midway position of the branch passage 165, and the upstream passage area 165a. A discharge passage area 165b is continuous with the downstream end of the discharge passage area 165b and is set so that the passage direction is vertically downward. A V-winning passage area 165c for guiding the ball is provided. In this case, the upstream passage area 165a has a dimension in the direction perpendicular to the passage direction that is greater than or equal to one game ball and less than two game balls; The game balls are prevented from passing through the upstream passage area 165a in a state where a plurality of game balls are lined up. Therefore, a plurality of game balls are prevented from simultaneously reaching the branch position to the V winning passage area 165c in the discharge passage area 165b.

A switching piece 166 is provided at the branch point of the discharge passageway area 165b to the V winning passage area 165c for guiding the game balls flowing into the discharge passageway area 165b to the V winning passage area 165c. The switching piece 166 is rotatably supported in a region on the opposite side to the V winning passage region 165c with respect to the discharge passage region 165b of the base body 164, and is completely retracted outside the discharge passage region 165b. position and a V-guide position protruding into the discharge passage area 165b. The driving force of a switching drive section 167 is transmitted to the switching piece 166 through a transmission unit (not shown). The switching piece 166 is placed in the retracted position by the biasing force of a biasing means such as a spring (not shown) when the switching drive unit 167 is in the non-driven state, and is moved to the retracted position when the switching drive unit 167 is in the driven state. The switching piece 166 is displaced against the biasing force and placed in the V guide position.

When the switching piece 166 is disposed at the retracted position, the game balls that have flowed into the branch passage 165 flow down the discharge passage area 165b without being guided to the V winning passage area 165c. Then, the game balls are detected by the count detection sensor 168 provided downstream of the branch position by the switching piece 166 in the discharge passage area 165b, and then discharged to the rear of the game board 24. On the other hand, when the switching piece 166 is arranged at the V-guidance position, the game balls flowing into the branch passage 165 are received by the switching piece 166 from below. The upper surface of the switching piece 166 in the state of being disposed at the V guiding position is inclined downward toward the V winning passage area 165c. As a result, the game ball received from below by the switching piece 166 flows into the V winning passage area 165c due to its own weight, and flows down the V winning passage area 165c. Then, the game ball is discharged to the rear of the game board 24 after being detected by the V win detection sensor 169 provided in the V win passage area 165c.

When the distribution side opening/closing member 162 is in the open state, the period in which the distribution side opening/closing member 162 is maintained in the open state is constant at 2 seconds, which is longer than the firing cycle of the game ball, and when the distribution side opening/closing member 162 is in the distribution execution mode, The upper limit number of game balls that can enter the winning device 161 is fixed at five. Furthermore, in a situation where the firing operation device 28 is being operated by the player, the game ball firing mechanism 27 is drive-controlled so that one game ball is fired toward the gaming area PA every 0.6 seconds. In this case, when the sorting side opening/closing member 162 is in the open state, the number of game balls won by the sorting winning device 161 is often one or two, and is about three at most. On the other hand, the switching piece 166 starts operating when operating power is supplied to the pachinko machine 10, and the switching piece 166 is placed at the V-guidance position at a certain period for a certain period of time. . The switching piece 166 is placed in the V-guidance position once every 4 seconds, and the period in which the switching piece 166 is held in the V-guidance position is 1 second. Therefore, even if a game ball enters the distribution winning device 161 that is in the open state, it is possible that the switching piece 166 is not placed at the V guidance position at the timing when the gaming ball reaches the position of the switching piece 166. In this case, the game ball is not detected by the V winning detection sensor 169.

Regardless of whether a game ball is detected by the count detection sensor 168 or a game ball is detected by the V winning detection sensor 169, the same number of prize balls corresponding to the distribution winning device 161 is paid out. be done. Further, when a game ball is detected by the V winning prize detection sensor 169 in the sorting execution mode, the opening/closing execution mode occurs after the sorting execution mode. On the other hand, when the sorting execution mode ends without any game ball being detected by the V winning prize detection sensor 169, the opening/closing execution mode does not occur.

In this embodiment, when the distribution execution mode occurs and the firing of game balls toward the distribution winning device 161 continues, there is a 1/2 probability that the game balls will be detected by the V winning prize detection sensor 169. Detection occurs. However, the probability is not limited to this, and the probability may be lower than 1/2 or higher. In addition, when the distribution execution mode occurs and the firing of game balls toward the distribution winning device 161 continues, there is a 100% or approximately 100% probability that the game ball will be detected by the V winning prize detection sensor 169. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which detection occurs.

FIG. 47 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the electrical configuration for performing various lottery drawings in the main MPU 82 in this embodiment.

In this embodiment, as in the first embodiment, a winning random number counter C1, a type random number counter C2, a reach random number counter C3, a random number initial value counter CINI, a fluctuation type counter CS, and a general random number counter C4 are provided. The contents of the hit random number counter C1, type random number counter C2, reach random number counter C3, random number initial value counter CINI, fluctuation type counter CS, and general random number counter C4, and the contents of the processing using these counters C1 to C4, CINI, and CS are as follows. This is the same as the first embodiment described above. Further, when a winning occurs in the through gate 35, the numerical information of the general random number counter C4 is stored in the general drawing holding area 84c, and the configuration of the general drawing holding area 84c is the same as in the first embodiment. It is.

Numerical information of the winning random number counter C1, type random number counter C2, and reach random number counter C3 is stored in the first special symbol area 171 provided in the main side RAM 84 when a winning occurs in the first operating port 33. be done. In addition, each numerical value information of the winning random number counter C1 and the type random number counter C2 is stored in the execution area 174 for the second special symbol provided in the main side RAM 84 when a winning occurs in the special winning device 151. .

The first special figure area 171 includes a first area 172a, a second area 172b, a third area 172c, and a fourth area 172d, and according to the winning history of the first operating port 33, a winning random number counter C1 , the type random number counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 are stored as first pending information in any of the areas 172a to 172d. In this case, in the first area 172a to the fourth area 172d, if winnings to the first operating port 33 occur multiple times in a row, the first area 172a → second area 172b → third area 172c → Each piece of numerical information is stored chronologically in the order of the four areas 172d. By providing the four areas 172a to 172d in this manner, the winning history of game balls entered into the first operating port 33 can be stored in abeyance at a maximum of four. Note that the number that can be reserved and stored in the first special figure area 171 is not limited to four, but is arbitrary, and may be any other number such as two, three, or five or more. , may be singular.

In the first special figure area 171, a first special figure execution area 173 is provided in addition to the first area 172a to the fourth area 172d. The execution area 173 for the first special figure stores the first pending information for which the validity judgment process and various distribution judgment processes are to be performed when the first special figure display section 37a starts displaying the changing pattern. This is the area where The reservation information stored in the first area 172a is shifted to the execution area 173 for the first special figure when the variable display of the first special figure display section 37a is started.

In the execution area 174 for the second special figure, each numerical information of the random number counter C1 and the type random number counter C2 is displayed as a second Stored as pending information. Here, as already explained, the first special figure area 171 is provided with the first to fourth areas 172a to 172d, and even in a situation where it is impossible to start a game round, the first pending information is In contrast, for the second pending information, only the execution area 174 for the second special symbol is provided, and no area is provided for holding and storing the second pending information. . This makes it possible to treat the presence or absence of pending storage differently between the first pending information and the second pending information. In addition, in the game session triggered by the second pending information, a reach effect that ultimately results in a loss does not occur, so while the first pending information includes the numerical information of the reach random number counter C3, the first pending information includes numerical information of the reach random number counter C3. 2 pending information does not include numerical information of the reach random number counter C3. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the second hold information may include numerical information of the reach random number counter C3.

The winning random number counter C1 will be used to execute the success/failure determination process. In the first embodiment, a low probability mode and a high probability mode are set as the winning/failure lottery mode, but in this embodiment, there is only one type of winning/failure lottery mode.

When the validity determination process is executed for the first pending information, the first validity table 181 stored in the main side ROM 83 is referred to. FIG. 48(a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the first validity table 181 when the setting value set to be used is "Setting 3". As shown in FIG. 48(a), the first success/failure table 181 has set a jackpot result, a time saving result, and a miss result as the results of the success/failure determination process. Note that even in the first win/fail table 181 corresponding to setting values other than "Setting 3", jackpot results, time saving results, and losing results are set. The number of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 set corresponding to the jackpot result is different for each set value as in the first embodiment, and the winning random number is set corresponding to the time saving result. The number of numerical information of the counter C1 is the same for each set value.

When the validity determination process is executed on the second pending information, the second validity table 182 stored in the main side ROM 83 is referred to. FIG. 48(b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the second validity table 182 when the setting value set to be used is "Setting 3". As shown in FIG. 48(b), in the second win/fail table 182, as a result of the win/fail determination process, a jackpot result, a time saving result, and a miss result are set, as well as a small win result. It should be noted that even in the second win/fail table 182 corresponding to setting values other than "Setting 3", jackpot results, time saving results, small winning results, and miss results are set. The number of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 that is set corresponding to the jackpot result is different for each set value as in the first embodiment, and it is set corresponding to the time saving result and the small winning result. The number of numerical information of the set winning random number counter C1 is the same for each set value.

When a jackpot result is selected in the judgment process, the type of jackpot result is selected using the type random number counter C2. When a jackpot distribution determination process for determining the type of jackpot result is executed, the jackpot distribution table 183 stored in the main ROM 83 is referred to. FIG. 48(c) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the jackpot distribution table 183. As shown in FIG. 48(c), a low-frequency jackpot result and a high-frequency jackpot result are set in the jackpot distribution table 183 as a result of the jackpot distribution determination process.

Low-frequency jackpot results trigger the transition to opening/closing execution mode. In the opening/closing execution mode triggered by low-frequency jackpot results, the number of times the round game is executed is 10. Further, the support mode after the opening/closing execution mode ends becomes the low-frequency support mode. In this case, the low frequency support mode continues at least until the next opening/closing execution mode occurs.

High-frequency jackpot results trigger the transition to opening/closing execution mode. In the opening/closing execution mode triggered by a high-frequency jackpot result, the number of times the round game is executed is 10. Further, the support mode after the opening/closing execution mode ends becomes the first high-frequency support mode. In this case, the first high-frequency support mode ends when 10 games have been played without any new opening/closing execution mode occurring. When 10 games have been played, the support mode becomes a low-frequency support mode.

The jackpot distribution table 183 is referred to even when the result of the judgment process for the first pending information is a jackpot result, and when the result of the judgment process for the second hold information is a jackpot result. be done. Further, the same jackpot distribution table 183 is referred to regardless of the set value. The jackpot distribution table 183 is set so that a low-frequency jackpot result is selected with a probability of 2/3 and a high-frequency jackpot result is selected with a probability of 1/3, but these selection probabilities are arbitrary.

When the time-saving result is selected in the validity determination process, the type of time-saving result is selected using the type random number counter C2. When the time-saving distribution determination process for determining the type of time-saving result is executed, the time-saving distribution table 184 stored in the main ROM 83 is referred to. FIG. 48(d) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the time saving distribution table 184. As shown in FIG. 48(d), a first time saving result and a second time saving result are set in the time saving allocation table 184 as a result of the time saving allocation determination process.

The first time-saving result does not trigger a transition to the opening/closing execution mode, but is a time-saving result that changes the support mode to the second high-frequency support mode. In this case, the second high-frequency support mode ends when the first time saving continuation number of times, 10 times, is completed without any new opening/closing execution mode occurring. When 10 games have been played, the support mode becomes a low-frequency support mode.

The second time-saving result does not trigger a transition to the opening/closing execution mode, but is a time-saving result that changes the support mode to the second high-frequency support mode. In this case, the second high-frequency support mode ends when the second time-saving continuation number of games, which is 15, has been played without a new opening/closing execution mode occurring. When 15 games have been played, the support mode becomes a low-frequency support mode. In other words, the second time-saving result has a greater number of game runs in which the second high-frequency support mode continues than the first time-saving result. Therefore, the second time saving result is more advantageous to the player than the first time saving result.

Note that even in this embodiment, there is a ceiling time reduction. When the second high-frequency support mode is set based on the ceiling time reduction, as in the case of the first time reduction result, the second high-frequency support mode is set at the first time reduction continuation number without newly generating the opening/closing execution mode. The game ends when a certain 10 games have been played. When 10 games have been played, the support mode becomes a low-frequency support mode.

The time saving distribution table 184 is referred to even when the result of the validity judgment process for the first pending information is a time saving result, and when the result of the propriety judgment process for the second pending information is a time saving result. be done. Further, the same time saving distribution table 184 is referred to regardless of the set value. The time saving distribution table 184 is set so that the first time saving result is selected with a probability of 2/3 and the second time saving result is selected with a probability of 1/3, but these selection probabilities are arbitrary.

When a small winning result is selected in the success/failure determination process, the type of small winning result is selected using the type random number counter C2. When the small win distribution determination process for determining the type of the small win result is executed, the small win distribution table 185 stored in the main side ROM 83 is referred to. FIG. 48(e) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the small winning distribution table 185. As shown in FIG. 48(e), the first small winning result, the second small winning result, and the third small winning result are set in the small winning distribution table 185 as a result of the small winning distribution determination process. ing.

Each of these first to third small winning results triggers a shift to the distribution execution mode. In the distribution execution mode, the distribution winning device 161 is in the open state as already explained. When the game ball that enters the distribution winning device 161 flows into the V winning passage area 165c and is detected by the V winning detection sensor 169, the mode shifts to the opening/closing execution mode after the distribution execution mode. After the opening/closing execution mode ends, the mode becomes a support mode depending on the type of small winning result. FIG. 48(f) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the combination of opening/closing execution mode and support mode corresponding to each small winning result.

The first small win result is a small win result in which the number of executions of the round game in the opening/closing execution mode to which the V winning prize detection sensor 169 has detected a game ball in the distribution execution mode is one. Further, the support mode after the opening/closing execution mode ends becomes the low-frequency support mode.

The second small win result is a small win result in which the number of executions of the round game in the opening/closing execution mode to which the V winning prize detection sensor 169 has detected a game ball in the distribution execution mode is four times. Further, the support mode after the opening/closing execution mode ends becomes the first high-frequency support mode. In this case, the first high-frequency support mode ends when 10 gaming times are played without any new opening/closing execution mode occurring. When 10 games have been played, the support mode becomes a low-frequency support mode.

The third small win result is a small win result in which the number of executions of the round game in the opening/closing execution mode to which the game ball is detected by the V winning prize detection sensor 169 in the distribution execution mode is shifted to is nine times. Further, the support mode after the opening/closing execution mode ends becomes the first high-frequency support mode. In this case, the first high-frequency support mode ends when 10 games have been played without any new opening/closing execution mode occurring. When 10 games have been played, the support mode becomes a low-frequency support mode.

As shown in FIG. 48(e), the small hit distribution table 185 is used when the result of the judgment process for the first pending information is a small win, and when the result of the judgment process for the second pending information is a small win. Any result will be referenced. Further, the same small winning distribution table 185 is referred to regardless of the set value. The small win distribution table 185 selects the first small win result with a probability of 1/3, selects the second small win result with a probability of 1/3, and selects the third small win result with a probability of 1/3. However, these selection probabilities are arbitrary.

FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing the special figure special electric control process in this embodiment executed by the main side MPU 82.

First, pending information acquisition processing is executed (step S2701). FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing the reservation information acquisition process. If a prize has been won to the first operating port 33 (step S2801: YES), the number of first pending information stored in the first area 172a to fourth area 172d of the first special drawing area 171 is On the condition that the number is less than the upper limit of 4 (step S2802: NO), storage processing in the first special figure area 171 is executed (step S2803). In the storage process, each numerical value information of the winning random number counter C1, type random number counter C2, and reach random number counter C3 is used as the first pending information, and the first in the first area 172a to the fourth area 172d of the first special symbol area 171 is stored. It is stored in an area that is earlier in the order of consumption among the areas where pending information is not stored. In addition, when the first reservation information is acquired, data settings are made so that the display contents of the first special figure reservation display section 37c are updated in accordance with the increase in the number of pieces of the first reservation information. conduct. Moreover, when the first reservation information is acquired, a command corresponding thereto is transmitted to the sound-light side MPU 93. Thereby, the image of the first reservation display area 42a in the symbol display device 41 is updated in accordance with the new acquisition of the first reservation information.

If a negative determination is made in step S2801, if a negative determination is made in step S2802, or if the process of step S2803 is executed, it is determined whether or not a winning has occurred in the special winning device 151 (step S2804) . If an affirmative determination is made in step S2804, the second special figure The storage process in the execution area 174 is executed (step S2806). In the storage process, each numerical value information of the winning random number counter C1 and the type random number counter C2 is stored in the execution area 174 for the second special symbol as second pending information. In other words, the second pending information is acquired only in situations where neither the gaming session triggered by the first pending information, the gaming session triggered by the second pending information, the distribution execution mode, nor the opening/closing execution mode are executed. be done. As will be described in detail later, the second pending information has priority over the first pending information as an execution trigger regarding the execution of the validity judgment process, in other words, regarding the execution of the game round, so the second pending information is the second pending information. When stored in the execution area 174 for special figures, the validity determination process triggered by the second pending information is immediately executed, and the game round triggered by the second pending information is started. It should be noted that a second special symbol reservation display section for notifying the number of stored second reservation information is not provided, and furthermore, a second special symbol reservation display section for notifying the number of stored second reservation information is not provided. Image is not displayed.

Returning to the explanation of the special figure special electric line control process (FIG. 49), after executing the reservation information acquisition process in step S2701, the special figure special electric line address table stored in the main side ROM 83 is read out (step S2702). The start address of a program for executing the process corresponding to the numerical information of the special figure/special electric line counter is set in the special figure/special electric line address table. The special figure special electric line counter is a counter for specifying the processing content to be executed in the special figure special electric control process by the main side MPU 82.

The special figure/special electric line counter can take values from "0" to "8", and each value from "0" to "8" corresponds to the start address of each process (steps S2705 to S2713). Specifically, when the value of the special figure special electric line counter is "0", the special figure fluctuation start process (step S2705), which is the process for starting the production of the game reuse, is executed, and the special figure special electric line When the value of the counter is "1", the special figure fluctuation process (step S2706), which is a process for advancing the performance of the game reuse, is executed, and when the value of the special figure special electric counter is "2", the special figure fluctuation process (step S2706) is executed. In this case, the special figure confirmation process (step S2707), which is the process for ending the production of the game reuse, is executed, and if the value of the special figure special electric counter is "3", the distribution execution mode is executed. The distribution start process (step S2708), which is the process for setting the start of the process, is to be executed, and if the value of the special figure special electric line counter is "4", various processes in the distribution execution mode are executed. If the value of the special map special electric line counter is "5", the special electric line start process (step S2710) which is the process for controlling the opening of the opening/closing execution mode is executed. becomes the execution target, and when the value of the special figure special electric line counter is "6", the special electric line opening process (step S2711), which is a process for controlling the open state of the special electric prize winning device 32, becomes the execution target, When the value of the special figure special electric line counter is "7," the special electric line closing process (step S2712), which is a process for controlling the closed state of the special electric prize winning device 32, is executed, and the value of the special figure special electric line counter is If the value is "8", the special electric end process (step S2713), which is a process for controlling the ending of the opening/closing execution mode and the transition of the gaming state at the end of the opening/closing execution mode, is to be executed.

In the special figure special electric line control process, after reading the special figure special electric line address table (step S2702), the start address corresponding to the information of the special figure special electric line counter is acquired from the special figure special electric line address table (step S2703), and the acquired Jump to the process indicated by the start address (step S2704). Each process from step S2705 to step S2713 will be individually explained below.

<Special figure fluctuation start process>
First, the special symbol fluctuation start process in step S2705 will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 51.

In the special figure fluctuation start process, on the condition that the first reservation information or the second reservation information is stored (step S2901: YES), the data setting process is executed (step S2902). In the data setting process, if the second reservation information is stored in the execution area 174 for the second special figure, the first reservation information acquired before the second reservation information is stored in the first special figure area 171. The second pending information stored in the execution area 174 for the second special figure is set as the execution target regardless of whether or not it has been acquired. This makes it possible to give priority to the second suspension information over the first suspension information as a trigger for executing the propriety determination process, and also as a trigger for executing a game round. Note that the second pending information stored in the execution area 174 for the second special symbol is deleted when the game round triggered by the second pending information ends.

On the other hand, in the data setting process, if the second reservation information is not stored in the execution area 174 for the second special figure, the data stored in the first area 172a of the first special figure area 171 is transferred to the first special figure. move to the execution area 173 for After that, a process of shifting the data stored in the storage area of the first special figure area 171 is executed. This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to fourth areas 172a to 172d to the lower area side, such as second area 172b → first area 172a, third area 172c → third area After the data in each area is shifted in the following order: 2 area 172b, 4th area 172d→3rd area 172c, the 4th area 172d is cleared to "0". In addition, in the data setting process, data is set so that the display content of the first special figure reservation display section 37c is updated in accordance with the current reduction in the number of reservation information on the first special figure side. Further, in the data setting process, a hold reduction command is transmitted to the audio-optical side MPU 93. Thereby, the image of the first reservation display area 42a in the symbol display device 41 is updated in accordance with the decrease in the first reservation information.

After executing the data setting process, an appropriateness determination process is executed (step S2903). In the success/failure determination process, if the execution target of the current game round is the first pending information, the first win/fail table 181 (see FIG. 48(a)) corresponding to the current setting value is read from the main side ROM 83, and the execution target of the current game is read from the main side ROM 83. If the execution target is the second pending information, the second validity table 182 (see FIG. 48(b)) corresponding to the current setting is read from the main side ROM 83. Note that, as already explained, there is only one type of success/failure lottery mode. After reading the win/fail tables 181 and 182, if the first pending information is the trigger for the current game round, numerical information about the winning random number counter C1 stored in the execution area 173 for the first special symbol is read. When the second pending information is the trigger for the current game round, numerical information about the winning random number counter C1 stored in the execution area 174 for the second special symbol is read out. Then, it is determined which of the game results set in the win/fail table 181 and 182 the numerical information about the read random number counter C1 matches.

If the result of the success/failure determination process is a jackpot result (step S2904: YES), a process for jackpot results is executed (step S2905). In the process for the jackpot result, the same process as steps S807 to S809 of the special symbol fluctuation start process (FIG. 20) in the first embodiment is executed. However, in the jackpot distribution determination process, the jackpot distribution table 183 shown in FIG. 48(c) is referred to, regardless of the type and setting value of the pending information that is the start target of the game round. In this case, if the first pending information is the start target of the game round, numerical information about the type random number counter C2 stored in the execution area 173 for the first special symbol is set in the jackpot distribution table 183. It is determined which of the jackpot results matches. In addition, when the second pending information is targeted for the start of a game round, numerical information about the type random number counter C2 stored in the execution area 174 for the second special symbol is set in the jackpot distribution table 183. Determine which of the jackpot results matches. In addition, in the flag setting process for jackpots, when a low-frequency jackpot result is selected in the jackpot distribution judgment process, a corresponding flag is set, and when a high-frequency jackpot result is selected, a corresponding flag is set. sets the corresponding flag. In addition, in the stop result setting process for jackpot results, if a low-frequency jackpot result is selected in the jackpot distribution determination process, information on the corresponding stop result is stored in the main side RAM 84, and the high-frequency When the jackpot result is selected, information on the corresponding stop result is stored in the main side RAM 84.

When the result of the validity determination process is a time-saving result (step S2906: YES), the process for the time-saving result is executed (step S2907). In the process for time-saving results, the same process as steps S811 to S813 of the special symbol fluctuation start process (FIG. 20) in the first embodiment is executed. However, in the time-saving distribution determination process, the time-saving distribution table 184 shown in FIG. 48(d) is referred to, regardless of the type and setting value of the hold information that is the start target of the game round. In this case, if the first pending information is the target for starting a game round, numerical information regarding the type random number counter C2 stored in the execution area 173 for the first special symbol is set in the time saving distribution table 184. Determine which of the time-saving results matches the result. In addition, when the second pending information is the start target of a game round, numerical information about the type random number counter C2 stored in the execution area 174 for the second special symbol is set in the time saving distribution table 184. Determine which of the time-saving results matches the result. In addition, in the time-saving flag setting process, if the first time-saving result is selected in the time-saving distribution determination process, a flag corresponding to it is set, and if the second time-saving result is selected, the corresponding flag is set. sets the corresponding flag. In addition, in the stop result setting process for time saving results, if the first time saving result is selected in the time saving distribution determination process, information on the corresponding stop result is stored in the main side RAM 84, and the second When the time saving result is selected, information on the corresponding stop result is stored in the main side RAM 84. The information on the pattern mode selected in this case is different from the information on the pattern mode selected in the case of a jackpot result.

If the result of the success/failure determination process is a small win result (step S2908: YES), a distribution determination process for a small win is executed (step S2909). In the small win distribution determination process, the small win distribution table 185 shown in FIG. 48(e) is referred to regardless of the type and setting value of the pending information that is the start target of the game round. In this case, if the first pending information is the start target for the game round, the numerical information about the type random number counter C2 stored in the execution area 173 for the first special symbol is added to the small hit distribution table 185. It is determined which of the set small winning results matches. In addition, when the second pending information is the start target of the game round, numerical information about the type random number counter C2 stored in the execution area 174 for the second special symbol is set in the small hit distribution table 185. It is determined which of the small winning results matches the winning result.

After that, flag setting processing for small winning is executed (step S2910). In the small win flag setting process, if the first small win result is selected in the small win distribution determination process in step S2909, the corresponding flag is set, and the second small win result is set. If it is selected, a flag corresponding to it is set, and if the third small win result is selected, a flag corresponding to it is set.

Thereafter, a stop result setting process for small winning results is executed (step S2911). In the stop result setting process for the small hit result, information on the stop mode of the symbol to be finally stopped and displayed in the second special figure display section 37b in the current game round is set to the small win result stored in advance in the main side ROM 83. The specified information is stored in the main side RAM 84. In this stop result table for small hit results, the types of stop modes of the symbols that are stopped and displayed on the second special figure display section 37b are set to be different for each type of small win result, and in step S2911 , information on the pattern stop mode corresponding to the type of small hit result specified in step S2909 is stored in the main side RAM 84. The information on the pattern mode selected in this case is different from the information on the pattern mode selected in the case of a jackpot result, and also different from the information on the pattern mode selected in the case of a time-saving result. . Note that the pattern stopping mode may be set in one-to-one correspondence with each small win result, or a plurality of types of pattern stopping modes may be set for at least some of the small win results. .

If the result of the validity determination process is an incorrect result (step S2908: NO), a stop result setting process for an incorrect result is executed (step S2912). Specifically, information about the stop mode of the pattern to be finally stopped and displayed in the current game round on the side that is the target of the game round among the first special figure display section 37a and the second special figure display section 37b. is specified from the stop result table for failure results stored in advance in the main side ROM 83, and the specified information is stored in the main side RAM 84. In this case, the information on the pattern mode selected in the case of a jackpot result, the information on the pattern mode selected in the case of a time-saving result, and the information on the pattern mode selected in the case of a small win result. This is different from the information on the aspect of the picture.

After any one of the stop result setting processes is executed, a process for specifying a variable display period is executed (step S2913). In the variable display period identification process, if the current situation is the first high-frequency support mode or the second high-frequency support mode, if a jackpot result occurs in the current game round, or if the result of the validity judgment process is a miss result. At the same time, the numerical information corresponding to the reach random number counter C3 in the pending information that is the execution target corresponds to the occurrence of the out-of-reach display, and if the out-of-reach display occurs in the current game round, the fluctuation type counter CS at that time Information on the variable display period of the reach display mode is read by comparing the numerical information with the reach-compatible table in the table group for high-frequency support. In addition, if a small win result occurs in the current game round, the numerical information of the fluctuation type counter CS at that time is checked against the small win compatible table in the high frequency support table group. Read out the information on the fluctuation display period of the winning mode. In addition, if a jackpot result, out-of-reach display, or small hit result does not occur in this game round, if the second pending information is the execution target of the game round, the special figure side will be used as the variable display period of the current game round. The information for the shortest period of time (specifically, 3 seconds) is read out. This makes it possible to increase the efficiency of playing games triggered by the second reservation information in the first high-frequency support mode or the second high-frequency support mode. On the other hand, if a jackpot result, out-of-reach display, or small hit result does not occur in this game round, and the first pending information is targeted for execution in the game round, the special figure side will be used as the variable display period for this game round. Read information for a medium period (specifically, 10 seconds).

If the current situation is the low frequency support mode, if a jackpot result occurs in the current game round, or if the result of the win/fail judgment process is a negative result, it corresponds to the reach random number counter C3 in the pending information that is the target of execution. Numerical information corresponds to the occurrence of out-of-reach display, and if out-of-reach display occurs in the current game round, the numerical information of the fluctuation type counter CS at that time is added to the reach-compatible table in the table group for low-frequency support. By checking against the above, information on the variable display period of the reach display mode is read out. In addition, if a small win result occurs in the current game round, the numerical information of the fluctuation type counter CS at that time is compared against the small win compatible table in the table group for low frequency support. Read out the information on the fluctuation display period of the winning mode. In addition, if a time-saving result occurs in the current game round, by comparing the numerical information of the fluctuation type counter CS at that time against the time-saving table in the table group for low-frequency support, the time-saving mode can be changed. Read out information about the variable display period. In addition, if a jackpot result, out-of-reach display, small hit result, or time-saving result does not occur in this game round, if the second pending information is the execution target of the game round, the variable display period of the current game round will be changed. Read out the information of the longest period (specifically 10 minutes) on the special figure side. As a result, in the low-frequency support mode, it is possible to reduce the efficiency of playing games triggered by the second reservation information. On the other hand, in the case where no jackpot result, out-of-reach display, small hit result, or time-saving result occurs in this game round, if the first pending information is targeted for execution in the game round, 3 If the game is started in a situation where more than 10 pieces of first hold information are stored, the information of the shortest period (specifically 3 seconds) on the special drawing side is read out as the variable display period of the current game. , if the game is started in a situation where one or two pieces of first pending information are stored in the first special figure area 171, the numerical information of the fluctuation type counter CS at that time is used for low frequency support. Information on the variable display period corresponding to the completely incorrect results is read by checking against the table corresponding to the completely incorrect results in the table group.

After executing the process of specifying the variable display period in step S2913, the variable command and type command corresponding to the game round to be started this time are transmitted to the sound-light side MPU 93 (step S2914). The variation command includes information on the variation display period specified in step S2913, and also indicates which of the first special figure display section 37a and second special figure display section 37b the game round to be started is. Contains information indicating whether it is compatible. Note that the fluctuation command does not include information on whether or not to execute the reach display, but the fluctuation display period when the reach display occurs is longer than the fluctuation display period when the reach display does not occur. Since this is set, the sound-light side MPU 93 can identify whether the ready-to-reach display has occurred based on the information on the variable display period. The type command includes information as to whether or not the game round to be started this time corresponds to a jackpot result, and if it corresponds to a jackpot result, which type of jackpot result it is. Contains information indicating whether In addition, the type command includes information as to whether or not the game round to be started this time supports time-saving results, and if it supports time-saving results, which type of time-saving results. Contains information indicating whether the In addition, the type command includes information as to whether or not the game round to be started this time corresponds to the small winning result, and if it corresponds to the small winning result, which type of Information indicating whether the result is a small win is included.

Thereafter, the variable display of the symbols is started on the first special figure display section 37a and the second special figure display section 37b, which are the display sections targeted for the start of the current game round (step S2915). Then, 1 is added to the value of the special figure special electric counter (step S2916). As a result, the value of the special figure special electric counter becomes "1" corresponding to the special figure fluctuation processing (step S2706).

<Processing during special figure fluctuation>
Next, the special figure fluctuation process executed in step S2706 of the special figure special electric control process (FIG. 49) will be explained.

When the value of the special figure side timer counter is 1 or more and the variable display period for the current game round has not elapsed, the display on the special figure display sections 37a and 37b that is the target of execution for the current game round. When it is time to update the contents, data settings are made to update the display contents of the special figure display sections 37a and 37b. As a result, the display contents of the pictures in the special figure display sections 37a and 37b to be controlled are updated to the display contents of the next order.

The manner at the start of the fluctuating display of the symbols in the special figure display sections 37a and 37b and the manner of updating the fluctuating display of the symbols are performed in a constant manner regardless of the validity determination result and the distribution determination result, and the symbol display device Regardless of the contents of the game replay in 41, the game is performed in a fixed manner. For example, when a predetermined update timing occurs a plurality of times, the display content of the picture completes one cycle, and a display pattern in which the display order is a fixed order is repeatedly performed, and when a variable display period has elapsed, the display pattern No matter which order of display is being performed, the stop result determined at the start of the game round will be displayed. This makes it possible to simplify the processing configuration for controlling the display of the special figure display sections 37a and 37b.

On the other hand, when the value of the special figure side timer counter is "0", that is, when the variable display period has elapsed, a final stop command is transmitted to the sound and light side MPU 93. Thereafter, at the start of a game round, the symbols on the special symbol display parts 37a and 37b stored in the main side RAM 84 in any one of step S2905, step S2907, step S2911, and step S2912 in the special symbol fluctuation start process (FIG. 51) Read out the information about the stop mode. As a result, the variable display of the symbols is stopped in a state where the symbols corresponding to the game results of the current game round are displayed on the special symbol display sections 37a and 37b to be controlled. After that, information on the final stop period (specifically, 0.5 sec) is set in the special figure side timer counter. Thereby, measurement of the final stop period is started. Thereafter, add 1 to the value of the special figure special electric counter. As a result, the value of the special figure special electric counter becomes "2" corresponding to the special figure confirmation process (step S2707).

Note that, when the audio-light side MPU 93 receives the final stop command, it transmits a command corresponding thereto to the display side MPU 103. When the display side MPU 103 receives the command, the symbol combination corresponding to the stop result of the current game round is displayed definitively on the symbol display device 41 over the final stop period.

<Special drawing confirmation process>
Next, the special figure confirmation process executed in step S2707 of the special figure special electric control process (FIG. 49) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 52.

When the value of the special figure side timer counter is "0" and the final stop period has passed (step S3001: YES), and when the game result of the current game round is a jackpot result (step S3002: YES) ), information corresponding to the opening period (specifically 5 seconds) is set in the special figure side timer counter (step S3003), and an opening command is transmitted to the sound and light side MPU 93 (step S3004). When the sound and light side MPU 93 receives the opening command, it causes the symbol display device 41, the display light emitting section 64, and the speaker section 65 to perform a performance corresponding to the opening period. Thereafter, the value of the special figure special electric counter is incremented by 3 (step S3005). As a result, the value of the special figure special line counter becomes "5" corresponding to the special line start process (step S2710).

If the game result of the current game round is not a jackpot result (step S3002: NO), the time saving state counter 134 is subtracted in step S3006, the time saving result setting process is executed in step S3007, and the step In S3008, the ceiling counter 131 is subtracted. The subtraction process of the time saving state counter 134 in step S3006 is the same as the subtraction process of the time saving state counter 134 in the first embodiment, except that the process of step S1601 is not executed due to the absence of a high probability mode. This is the same as in Fig. 30). In addition, the time-saving result setting process in step S3007 is the same as the time-saving result setting process in the first embodiment, except that the process in step S1302 is not executed due to the absence of the high probability mode. 25). Further, the subtraction process of the ceiling counter 131 in step S3008 is performed when the process of step S1501 is not executed due to the absence of a high probability mode, and when the second high frequency support mode occurs due to the ceiling time reduction. This is the same as the subtraction process of the ceiling counter 131 in the first embodiment (FIG. 29), except that the time saving state counter 134 is set to 10 times, which is the first number of continuous time saving operations.

Thereafter, it is determined whether the game result of the current game round is a small winning result (step S3009). If the game result of the current game round is a small winning result (step S3009: YES), 1 is added to the value of the special figure special electric counter (step S3010). As a result, the value of the special figure special electric counter becomes "3" corresponding to the distribution start process (step S2708). If the game result of the current game round is not a small hit result (step S3009: NO), the special figure special electric counter is cleared to "0" (step S3011). As a result, the value of the special figure special electric counter becomes "0" corresponding to the special figure fluctuation start process (step S2705).

<Processing for starting distribution>
Next, the distribution start process executed in step S2708 of the special figure special electric train control process (FIG. 49) will be explained.

First, a distribution start command is sent to the sound-light side MPU 93. When the sound/light side MPU 93 receives the distribution start command from the main side MPU 82, the sound/light side MPU 93 controls the light emission of the display light emitting unit 64 and outputs the sound of the speaker unit 65 so that an effect indicating that the distribution execution mode is in progress is executed. Execute control. Further, the sound and light side MPU 93 transmits a distribution start command to the display side MPU 103. When the display-side MPU 103 receives a distribution start command from the sound-light side MPU 93, after a display effect indicating that the distribution execution mode has been started is executed, a display effect indicating that the distribution execution mode is in progress is executed. The display of the symbol display device 41 is controlled so that this is executed.

Thereafter, "5" is set in the distribution prize counter provided in the main side RAM 84. The distribution prize counter determines the trigger for switching the distribution prize device 161 from the open state to the closed state in relation to the number of game balls that have entered the distribution prize device 161 which is in the open state in the distribution execution mode. This is a counter for identification by the main MPU 82. It also executes a distribution release period setting process. In the process of setting the distribution opening period, information corresponding to 2 seconds is stored in the timer counter of the main side RAM 84 so that the period during which the distribution winning device 161 is maintained in the open state is 2 seconds, which is the distribution opening period. set. Then, in order to open the prize distribution device 161, output of a drive signal to the distribution entrance drive unit 163 is started. After that, add 1 to the value of the special figure special electric counter. As a result, the value of the special figure special electric counter becomes "4" corresponding to the distribution process (step S2709).

<Distribution processing>
Next, the distribution process executed in step S2709 of the special figure special electric train control process (FIG. 49) will be explained.

When a game ball is detected by the V winning prize detection sensor 169 of the distribution prize winning device 161, the V winning prize flag provided in the main side RAM 84 is set to "1". The V winning prize flag is a flag for the main side MPU 82 to specify that a game ball has been detected by the V winning prize detection sensor 169. In addition, a V winning command is transmitted to the sound-light side MPU 93. When the sound and light side MPU 93 receives the V winning command from the main side MPU 82, it controls the light emission of the display light emitting unit 64 and the speaker so that an effect corresponding to the detection of a game ball by the V winning detection sensor 169 is executed. The sound output control of the section 65 is executed. Further, the sound and light side MPU 93 transmits a V winning command to the display side MPU 103. When the display side MPU 103 receives the V winning command from the sound and light side MPU 93, it controls the display of the symbol display device 41 so that a display effect indicating that a game ball has been detected by the V winning detection sensor 169 is executed. .

In the distribution process, it is determined whether or not the distribution opening period, which is measured using the timer counter of the main side RAM 84, has elapsed in a situation where the distribution winning device 161 is in the open state. If the distribution opening period has not elapsed, winnings are entered in the distribution winning device 161 by determining whether or not a game ball is detected by the count detection sensor 168 or the V winning detection sensor 169 of the distribution winning device 161. Determine whether or not this has occurred. If a prize has been won in the prize distribution device 161, the value of the prize distribution counter in the main side RAM 84 is subtracted by 1. Then, it is determined whether the value of the distributed prize counter after the subtraction by 1 is "0".

If the distribution opening period has elapsed or if the value of the distribution winning counter after subtracting 1 is "0", the closing condition for the distribution winning device 161 is satisfied, so the drive for the distribution entrance is By stopping the output of the drive signal to the section 163, the prize distribution device 161 is brought into a closed state. Thereafter, in order to wait for the end of the distribution execution mode until there are no game balls in the distribution winning device 161, information corresponding to the waiting period is set in the timer counter of the main side RAM 84. The waiting period is set as a period longer than the longest period required until the game ball that enters the distribution winning device 161 is detected by either the count detection sensor 168 or the V winning detection sensor 169. Specifically, it is set to 4 seconds. By waiting for the end of the sorting execution mode until the waiting period has elapsed in this way, the game ball that entered the sorting winning device 161 immediately before the sorting winning device 161 is closed will be temporarily detected as a V winning prize. When detected by the sensor 169, it can be treated as valid.

In the distribution process, it is determined whether the standby period measured by the timer counter of the main side RAM 84 has elapsed. When the standby period has elapsed, it is determined whether the V winning flag in the main side RAM 84 is set to "1". When the V winning flag is set to "1", processing for shifting to the opening/closing execution mode is executed. Specifically, display start processing for the special display section 191 provided on the game board 24 is executed. In the display start process, the display of the special display section 191 is controlled so that the display state of the special display section 191 becomes a predetermined display state corresponding to execution of the opening/closing execution mode. After that, the same process as steps S3003 to S3005 in the special figure confirmation process (FIG. 52) is executed. As a result, the opening period of the opening/closing execution mode is started, and the value of the special figure special electric line counter becomes "5" corresponding to the special electric line start process (step S2710). In addition, even in the special figure confirmation process (FIG. 52), when the process for transitioning to the opening/closing execution mode is executed, the display mode of the special display section 191 is set to a predetermined display state corresponding to the execution of the opening/closing execution mode. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which display control of the special display section 191 is performed.

On the other hand, if the V winning flag in the main side RAM 84 is not set to "1", a flag clearing process is executed. In the flag clearing process, various flags in the main side RAM 84 used in the current game round are cleared to "0". For example, in the distribution execution mode, one of the first to third small winning flags in the main side RAM 84 is set to "1", but the flag that is set to "1" is cleared to "0". . Thereafter, the value of the special figure special electric counter is cleared to "0". As a result, the value of the special figure special electric counter becomes "0" corresponding to the special figure fluctuation start process (step S2705).

Here, when the game ball is not detected by the V winning prize detection sensor 169 even though the mode has been shifted to the distribution execution mode, the process for shifting to the support mode is not executed. As a result, if the opening/closing execution mode does not occur after the transition to the distribution execution mode, the support mode and game duration table corresponding to the type of small winning result that triggered the distribution execution mode. It is possible to prevent settings from being made. After the distribution execution mode ends, the support mode that existed before the distribution execution mode started is maintained.

In the first high-frequency support mode or the second high-frequency support mode, when a game with a small winning result is executed, the value of the time-saving state counter 134 is reduced to 1 in the subtraction process (step S3006) of the time-saving state counter 134. If the value of the time saving state counter 134 is "0" after being subtracted by 1, processing for transitioning to the low frequency support mode is executed. Even if a game round with a small winning result is started in the high-frequency support mode, the game may be in the low-frequency support mode in the distribution execution mode. In this case, if the opening/closing execution mode does not occur after the distribution execution mode, a new game round will be executed in the low frequency support mode.

Even in a game with a small winning result, the ceiling counter 131 subtraction process (step S3008) subtracts the value of the ceiling counter 131 by 1, and the value of the ceiling counter 131 after the 1 subtraction is "0". ”, the processing to shift to the second high-frequency support mode is executed using the ceiling time reduction as an opportunity, so even if a game with a small winning result is started in the low-frequency support mode, the distribution will not be executed. mode may be in the second high-frequency support mode. In this case, if the opening/closing execution mode does not occur after the distribution execution mode, a new game round will be executed in the second high-frequency support mode.

<Special call start process>
Next, the special train start process executed in step S2710 of the special figure special train control process (FIG. 49) will be explained.

The opening/closing number setting process is executed on the condition that the value of the special figure side timer counter is "0", that is, the opening period has elapsed. In this case, if the current game result is a low-frequency jackpot result or a high-frequency jackpot result, "10" is set in the round counter of the main side RAM 84, and if the current game result is a first small win result, the main side RAM 84 is set. If the current game result is the second small win, set the round counter in the main RAM 84 to ``4'', and if the current game result is the third small win. If so, set the round counter in the main side RAM 84 to "9". The round counter is a counter for the main MPU 82 to specify the number of remaining round games in the opening/closing execution mode. Further, information on the open duration period of the round game (specifically, 29 seconds) is set in the special figure side timer counter. Also, the winning counter of the main side RAM 84 is set to "10". The prize winning counter is a counter for the main MPU 82 to specify the number of prizes remaining from the upper limit number of winning prizes. Further, by outputting a drive signal to the special electric drive unit 32b, the special electric prize winning device 32 is brought into an open state. Thereafter, add 1 to the value of the special figure special electric counter. As a result, the value of the special figure special electricity counter becomes "6" corresponding to the special electricity release process (step S2711).

<Processing while special electric line is open>
Next, the special train opening process executed in step S2711 of the special figure special train control process (FIG. 49) will be described.

When the value of the special figure side timer counter is "0", that is, when the open duration period has elapsed, the value of the round counter of the main side RAM 84 is subtracted by 1, and the drive signal to the special electric drive unit 32b is By stopping the output, the special electric winning device 32 is brought into a closed state. In addition, when a game ball enters the special electric winning device 32, the value of the winning prize counter is subtracted by 1, and if the value of the winning prize counter after 1 subtraction is "0", the main side RAM 84 By decrementing the value of the round counter by 1 and stopping the output of the drive signal to the special electric drive unit 32b, the special electric winning device 32 is brought into a closed state. In addition, when the value of the round counter is subtracted by 1, if the value of the round counter after subtracting 1 is 1 or more, after setting the interval period information (specifically 3 seconds) to the special drawing side timer counter. , add 1 to the value of the special figure special electric counter. As a result, the value of the special train special train counter becomes "7" corresponding to the special train closed process (step S2712). On the other hand, if the value of the round counter after subtracting 1 is "0", information on the ending period (specifically 5 seconds) is set in the special map side timer counter, and an ending command is sent to the sound and light side MPU 93. After that, add 2 to the value of the special figure special electric counter. As a result, the value of the special figure special line counter becomes "8" corresponding to the special line end process (step S2713). In addition, when the sound and light side MPU 93 receives the ending command, it causes the symbol display device 41, the display light emitting section 64, and the speaker section 65 to perform a performance corresponding to the ending period.

<Processing during special train closure>
Next, the special train closed process executed in step S2712 of the special train special train control process (FIG. 49) will be described.

If the value of the special figure side timer counter is "0", that is, if the interval period has elapsed, set the information on the open duration period of the round game (specifically 29 seconds) to the special figure side timer counter. . Also, the winning counter of the main side RAM 84 is set to "10". Further, by outputting a drive signal to the special electric drive unit 32b, the special electric prize winning device 32 is brought into an open state. Thereafter, the value of the special figure special electric counter is subtracted by 1. As a result, the value of the special figure special electricity counter becomes "6" corresponding to the special electricity release process (step S2711).

<Special call termination process>
Next, the special train termination process executed in step S2713 of the special figure special train control process (FIG. 49) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 53.

If the value of the special figure side timer counter is "0", that is, if the ending period has elapsed (step S3101: YES), the game result that triggered the current opening/closing execution mode is the high-frequency jackpot result, If it is a 2nd small winning result or a 3rd small winning result (step S3102: YES), the first high frequency flag of the main side RAM 84 is set to "1" (step S3103), and the second small winning result of the main side RAM 84 is set to "1". The high frequency flag is cleared to "0" (step S3104). As already explained, the first high-frequency flag is a flag for specifying in the main MPU 82 whether the support mode is the first high-frequency support mode, and the second high-frequency flag is a flag for specifying whether or not the support mode is the first high-frequency support mode. This flag is used by the main MPU 82 to specify whether or not the mode is in the second high-frequency support mode. By setting the first high frequency flag to "1" and clearing the second high frequency flag to "0", the support mode becomes the first high frequency support mode.

Thereafter, information of "10", which is the number of times the first time saving is continued, is set in the time saving state counter 134 of the main side RAM 84 (step S3105). The time saving state counter 134 is a counter for the main MPU 82 to specify the remaining number of continuations of the high frequency support mode (first high frequency support mode or second high frequency support mode). As a result, the first high-frequency support mode is maintained until the first time saving continuation number of times, which is 10 games, is played. In the first high-frequency support mode, the special winning device 151 is frequently opened. When a game ball enters the special winning device 151, a small winning result is selected with a high probability, and the distribution execution mode is executed by selecting the small winning result. Then, in the sorting execution mode, when the game ball is detected by the V winning prize detection sensor 169 of the sorting winning device 161, the opening/closing execution mode occurs.

Here, when the second high-frequency support mode is set because the result of the judgment process is the first time saving result, information of "10", which is the number of times the first time saving is continued, is set in the time saving state counter 134. On the other hand, when the second high-frequency support mode is set because the result of the judgment process is the second time saving result, the time saving state counter 134 displays the number of second time saving continuations that are greater than the number of first time saving continuations. Information of "15" which is the number of times is set. In other words, when the second high-frequency support mode is set due to the second time-saving result, the time-saving continuation is continued more times than when the first high-frequency support mode is set due to a jackpot result or small win result. The number of times is set. This makes it possible to increase the advantage of the second time-saving result as the result of the validity determination process.

On the other hand, if the game result that triggered the current opening/closing execution mode is a low-frequency jackpot result or a first small win result (step S3102: NO), the first high-frequency flag and the second high-frequency flag in the main side RAM 84 are Both frequency flags are cleared to "0" (step S3106). Further, the time saving state counter 134 of the main side RAM 84 is cleared to "0" (step S3107). As a result, the support mode becomes the low-frequency support mode.

When the process of step S3105 or the process of step S3107 is executed, a process of transmitting a status designation command is executed (step S3108). In the transmission processing, a state designation command corresponding to the state of the pachinko machine 10 determined by the processing of steps S3102 to S3107 is transmitted to the sound-light side MPU 93. The sound and light side MPU 93 executes processing for causing the symbol display device 41, the display light emitting section 64, and the speaker section 65 to perform effects corresponding to the contents of the received state specifying command.

Thereafter, information of "500" corresponding to the number of fixed ceilings is set in the ceiling counter 131 of the main side RAM 84 (step S3109). Then, the special figure special electric counter is cleared to "0" (step S3110). As a result, the value of the special figure special electric counter becomes "0" corresponding to the special figure fluctuation start process (step S2705).

When the opening/closing execution mode ends as described above, information of 500 times, which is the fixed ceiling number, is set in the ceiling counter 131. In this embodiment, as already explained, if the result of the judgment process is a jackpot, the mode shifts to the opening/closing execution mode when the game round ends, and if the result of the judgment process is a small win, The mode shifts to the opening/closing execution mode not when the game round ends, but when the sorting execution mode in which the detection of a game ball by the V winning prize detection sensor 169 occurs ends. That is, there are multiple types of routes for transitioning to the opening/closing execution mode. In this configuration, when the opening/closing execution mode ends, information of 500 times, which is the fixed ceiling number, is set in the ceiling counter 131, so that no matter which route the opening/closing execution mode occurs, the corresponding It becomes possible to consolidate the processing for setting information on the number of fixed ceilings into one processing. Therefore, while attempting to reduce the program capacity, it is possible to set the information of 500 times, which is the fixed ceiling number, in the ceiling counter 131 when the opening/closing execution mode occurs.

FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing the power outage monitoring process in this embodiment executed by the main MPU 82. Note that the power outage monitoring process is executed in step S201 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14).

If a power outage signal corresponding to the occurrence of a power cutoff has been received from the power outage monitoring board 85 (step S3201: YES), the current state is in the opening/closing execution mode, and the game result that triggered the transition to the opening/closing execution mode. On the condition that is a low frequency jackpot result or a first small win result (step S3202 and step S3203: YES), information of "800" corresponding to the special ceiling number is set in the ceiling counter 131 (step S3204). This special ceiling number is greater than the fixed ceiling number set in the ceiling counter 131 in step S3109 of the special call termination process (FIG. 53). On the other hand, if the current state is not the opening/closing execution mode (step S3202: NO), or even if the current state is the opening/closing execution mode, the game result that triggered the transition to the opening/closing execution mode is the high-frequency jackpot result, the second small If it is either a winning result or a third small winning result (step S3202: NO), the process of step S3204 is not executed.

If a negative determination is made in step S3202, if a negative determination is made in step S3203, or if the process in step S3204 is executed, the power outage flag of the main side RAM 84 is set to "1" (step S3205), and the power failure flag of the main side RAM 84 is set to "1". , and stores the calculated checksum in the main RAM 84 (step S3206), and further executes output port clearing processing (step S3207). Thereafter, the process waits until the supply of operating power to the main MPU 82 is stopped.

In the configuration in which the fixed ceiling count is set in the ceiling counter 131 when the opening/closing execution mode ends as in this embodiment, when the opening/closing execution mode triggered by a low-frequency jackpot result is started or the first When the sorting execution mode triggered by a small hit result occurs and the opening/closing execution mode is started by detecting a game ball by the V prize detection sensor 169 in the sorting execution mode, the opening/closing execution mode If a fraudulent act is performed that causes the supply of operating power to be stopped midway and the setting value update process (step S117) or RAM clearing process (step S119) to be executed when the supply of operating power is restarted, the setting value In the update process (step S117) or the RAM clear process (step S119), the information indicating that the opening/closing execution mode is in progress is cleared as in the first embodiment, whereas the value of the ceiling counter 131 is maintained. Therefore, there is a risk that the game will be restarted in a situation where there are only a few remaining ceilings, while obtaining the benefit of the opening/closing execution mode until the supply of operating power is stopped. In particular, when the opening/closing execution mode triggered by the low-frequency jackpot result or the first small winning result is executed, the support mode becomes the low-frequency support mode after the opening/closing execution mode, so the low-frequency jackpot result or the first small winning result Even if the above-mentioned fraudulent act is performed in the opening/closing execution mode triggered by a winning result, there will be no disadvantage to the fraudster in relation to the support mode. On the other hand, when the supply of operating power is stopped in the middle of the opening/closing execution mode triggered by the low-frequency jackpot result or the first small win result, the ceiling counter 131 is stopped before the supply of operating power is stopped. Information of "800" corresponding to the number of special ceilings is set in . This makes it possible to neutralize fraudulent acts such as those described above.

Furthermore, if the above-mentioned fraudulent act is committed, a special ceiling count is set in the ceiling counter 131, which is greater than the fixed ceiling count that is set when the opening/closing execution mode ends. Therefore, if the above-mentioned fraudulent act is committed, it becomes possible to inflict a penalty on it.

On the other hand, even in this embodiment, as in the first embodiment, there is a situation in which none of the "RAM clear operation", "setting change operation", and "setting confirmation operation" is executed, and the gaming machine main body 12 When the supply of operating power is started in a situation where is in an open state, in step S114 in the main process (FIG. 13), information of "500", which is the fixed ceiling number, is set in the ceiling counter 131. As a result, if the supply of operating power is stopped in the middle of the opening/closing execution mode triggered by a low-frequency jackpot result or the first small win result, even though the above-mentioned fraudulent activity has not been carried out, , the administrator of the game hall will not be able to supply operating power in a situation where none of the "RAM clear operation," "setting change operation," and "setting confirmation operation" are executed and the game machine main body 12 is in an open state. By performing the operation to start, it becomes possible to set the information of "500", which is the fixed ceiling number, on the ceiling counter 131, in the same way as when the opening/closing execution mode ends.

<Seventh embodiment>
This embodiment is different from the first embodiment in the manner in which the variable display period of game times is selected. Hereinafter, configurations that are different from the first embodiment will be described. Note that descriptions of the same configurations as those in the first embodiment will basically be omitted.

FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing the specific determination process in this embodiment executed by the main MPU 82.

When the value of the special figure side timer counter is "0" and the final stop period has passed (step S3301: YES), and when the game result of the current game round is a jackpot result (step S3302: YES) ), information corresponding to the opening period (specifically 5 seconds) is set in the special figure side timer counter (step S3303), and an opening command is transmitted to the sound and light side MPU 93 (step S3304). When receiving the opening command, the sound and light side MPU 93 causes the symbol display device 41, the display light emitting section 64, and the speaker section 65 to perform a performance corresponding to the opening period.

Thereafter, information of 500 fixed ceiling times is set in the ceiling counter 131 of the main side RAM 84 (step S3305). That is, when the game round corresponding to the jackpot result ends and the opening/closing execution mode is started, information of 500 times, which is the fixed ceiling number, is set in the ceiling counter 131. In the case of a configuration in which the fixed ceiling count is set to the ceiling counter 131 not when the opening/closing execution mode is started but during the opening/closing execution mode or when the opening/closing execution mode ends, the operation is performed after the opening/closing execution mode is started. If a fraudulent act is committed that causes the power supply to be stopped and the setting value update process (step S117) or the RAM clearing process (step S119) to be executed when the operating power supply is restarted, the setting value update process (step S119) is performed. In step S117) or the RAM clearing process (step S119), the information indicating that the opening/closing execution mode is in progress is cleared as described above, but the value of the ceiling counter 131 is maintained, so the operating power is supplied. There is a risk that the game will be restarted in a situation where there are only a few remaining ceilings, while still enjoying the benefits of the opening/closing execution mode until the game is stopped. On the other hand, when the opening/closing execution mode is started, the information of 500 times, which is the fixed ceiling number, is set in the ceiling counter 131, thereby making it possible to neutralize the above-mentioned fraudulent acts.

Thereafter, the number of games counter provided in the main side RAM 84 is cleared to "0" (step S3306). The game number counter is a counter used by the main MPU 82 to determine whether the number of times the game is executed after the opening/closing execution mode has ended has reached the reference number. The reference number of times is the number of times where the last digit of the number of times the game is executed is the reference number. "7" is set as the reference number. Therefore, the number of times the game is executed after the opening/closing execution mode ends is "7", "17", "27", "37", "47", "57", "67", "77", ``87'', ``97'', ``107'', etc., the number of times the game is executed after the opening/closing execution mode ends and the last digit is ``7'' is the standard number of times. becomes. Thereafter, the value of the special figure special electric counter is incremented by 1 (step S3307). As a result, the value of the special figure special electric line counter becomes "3" corresponding to the special electric line start process (step S609).

If the game result of the current game round is not a jackpot result (step S3302: NO), a subtraction process of the time saving state counter 134 is executed (step S3308). The contents of this process are the same as the subtraction process of the time saving state counter 134 (FIG. 30) in the first embodiment. Thereafter, setting processing for time-saving results is executed (step S3309). The contents of this process are the same as the time-saving result setting process (FIG. 25) in the first embodiment. Thereafter, a subtraction process for the ceiling counter 131 is executed (step S3310). The contents of this process are the same as the subtraction process of the ceiling counter 131 (FIG. 29) in the first embodiment. Thereafter, the subtraction process of the high probability state counter 133 is executed (step S3311). The contents of this process are the same as the subtraction process of the high probability state counter 133 (FIG. 24) in the first embodiment. After that, the special figure special electric counter is cleared to "0" (step S3312). As a result, the value of the special figure special electric counter becomes "0" corresponding to the special figure fluctuation start process (step S606).

FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing a process for identifying a variable display period in this embodiment, which is executed by the main MPU 82.

First, the value of the number of games counter in the main side RAM 84 is incremented by 1 (step S3401). In other words, the game count counter is cleared to "0" in step S3306 in the special figure confirmation process (FIG. 55) when the opening/closing execution mode is started, and a variable display is displayed each time a game time is started regardless of the game state. 1 is added in step S3401 in the period specifying process (FIG. 56). In addition, the value of the number of games counter is determined depending on whether a transition to the second high-frequency support mode occurs due to a time reduction result or a transition to the second high-frequency support mode occurs due to a ceiling time reduction. Even if the value is cleared to 0, it will not be updated. This makes it possible for the main MPU 82 to use the game counter to measure the number of games played after the opening/closing execution mode is ended. Note that even if the setting value update process (step S117) or the RAM clear process (step S119) is executed in the main process (FIG. 13) when the supply of operating power is started, the game count counter in the main side RAM 84 is is cleared to "0". As a result, if the setting value update process (step S117) or the RAM clear process (step S119) is executed when the supply of operating power is started, the main side The MPU 82 can use the game counter to measure the number of games played after the supply of operating power starts.

Thereafter, it is determined whether the value of the game count counter in the main side RAM 84 is the reference count (step S3402). As already explained, the standard number of times is the number of times that the last digit of the number of times the game is executed is the standard number (specifically, "7"). When an affirmative determination is made in step S3402, it is determined whether or not a jackpot result has been selected in the validity determination process of the current game round (step S3403).

If the jackpot result is selected (step S3403: YES), the table for the jackpot result is read from the main side ROM 83 to the main side RAM 84 (step S3404). In a situation where the selection process of the fluctuation display period is executed in step S3411 with reference to the table for jackpot results, the numerical information of the fluctuation type counter CS at that time is checked against the table for jackpot results. , reads information on the variable display period of the reach display mode. Although there are multiple types of variable display periods of the reach display mode, the variable display period of any reach display mode is longer than the variable display period in the case where the reach display does not occur. When the information on the variable display period of the ready-to-reach display mode is selected, the ready-to-reach display is reliably generated on the symbol display device 41 as in the first embodiment.

If the jackpot result is not selected (step S3403: NO), the table for non-reach occurrence is read from the main side ROM 83 to the main side RAM 84 (step S3405). In a situation where the selection process of the fluctuation display period is executed in step S3411 with reference to the table for reach non-occurrence, the numerical information of the fluctuation type counter CS at that time is checked against the table for reach non-occurrence. By doing so, information on the variable display period in which the reach display does not occur is read out. There are multiple types of variable display periods in which the reach display does not occur, but any of these types of variable display periods are shorter than the variable display period in which the reach display occurs. When the information of the variable display period in which the ready-to-reach display does not occur is selected, the ready-to-reach display does not occur reliably on the symbol display device 41 similarly to the first embodiment.

If a negative determination is made in step S3402 and the high probability flag of the main side RAM 84 is set to "1" (step S3406: YES), the table group for high probability is transferred from the main side ROM 83 to the main side RAM 84. (step S3407). The manner in which the variable display period is selected when the high probability table group is referred to is the same as in the first embodiment. Furthermore, if the high probability flag of the main side RAM 84 is not set to "1" (step S3406: NO), either the first high frequency flag or the second high frequency flag of the main side RAM 84 is set to "1". If set (step S3408: YES), the table group for high frequency support is read from the main side ROM 83 to the main side RAM 84 (step S3409). The manner in which the variable display period is selected when the high-frequency support table group is referred to is the same as in the first embodiment. Furthermore, when the high probability flag of the main side RAM 84 is not set to "1" (step S3406: NO), both the first high frequency flag and the second high frequency flag of the main side RAM 84 are set to "1". " is not set (step S3408: NO), the table group for low frequency support is read from the main side ROM 83 to the main side RAM 84 (step S3410). The manner in which the variable display period is selected when the low-frequency support table group is referred to is the same as in the first embodiment.

When the process of step S3404, the process of step S3405, the process of step S3407, the process of step S3409, or the process of step S3410 is executed, a variable display period selection process is performed with reference to the table group read out in any of these processes. (Step S3411). The contents of the selection process have already been explained. Then, information on the variable display period selected in step S3411 is set in the special figure side timer counter of the main side RAM 84 (step S3412). The numerical information set in the special figure side timer counter is updated in the timer update process of step S210 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14).

According to the above configuration, in the game round in which the number of executions after the end of the opening/closing execution mode is the reference number, the reach display will not occur on the symbol display device 41 unless a jackpot result is obtained. In this case, the occurrence of a jackpot result is confirmed at the time when the reach display occurs in the standard game round. This makes it possible to draw the player's attention to the performance of the game round on the symbol display device 41 in relation to the number of times the game round is executed.

The number of games counter for measuring the standard number of games is cleared to "0" when the opening/closing execution mode is executed, and when the second high-frequency support mode occurs triggered by a time saving result or when the ceiling time is reduced. It is not cleared to "0" in any case where the second high-frequency support mode occurs. As a result, even if the second high-frequency support mode triggered by the time saving result or the second high-frequency support mode triggered by the ceiling time reduction occurs after the opening/closing execution mode ends, the In the game round where the number of executions is the standard number of times, it is possible to cause the reach display to occur only when a jackpot result is obtained. Therefore, the game round that is the reference number of times becomes easy for the player to understand.

Note that the symbol display device 41 may be configured to display the number of times the game is played after the opening/closing execution mode ends. In this case, the number of executions of the game on the symbol display device 41 will be displayed when the second high-frequency support mode triggered by the time-saving result occurs and when the second high-frequency support mode triggered by the ceiling time-saving occurs. The value should not be cleared to "0" no matter which one of the following. This makes it easier for the player to recognize the game round that is the reference number of times.

<Eighth embodiment>
This embodiment is different from the first embodiment in the processing configuration of the subtraction process of the time saving state counter 134 executed by the main MPU 82. Hereinafter, configurations that are different from the first embodiment will be described. Note that descriptions of the same configurations as those in the first embodiment will basically be omitted.

FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing the subtraction process of the time saving state counter 134 in this embodiment executed by the main MPU 82.

First, it is determined whether the high probability flag in the main side RAM 84 is set to "1" (step S3501). If the high probability flag is set to "1" (step S3501: YES), the process of subtracting the time-saving state counter 134 is ended without executing the processes after step S3502. In the high probability state, the support mode becomes the first high frequency support mode, but as explained above, the trigger for ending the high probability state is specified using the high probability state counter 133, so "1" is set in the high probability flag. is set, the process for subtracting the value of the time saving state counter 134 is not executed.

When the high probability flag is not set to "1" and the first high frequency flag of the main side RAM 84 is set to "1" (step S3502: YES), that is, the low probability mode and the first high frequency flag are set to "1". If it is the frequency support mode, the value of the time saving state counter 134 in the main side RAM 84 is subtracted by 1 (step S3503), and if the value of the time saving state counter 134 after the 1 subtraction is "0" (step S3504: YES) , clears the first high frequency flag in the main side RAM 84 to "0" (step S3505). As a result, the first high-frequency support mode ends and the low-frequency support mode begins. In other words, the time saving state ends and the normal gaming state returns.

Thereafter, a state designation command transmission process is executed (step S3506). In the transmission process, a state designation command indicating that the time saving state has ended is transmitted to the sound-light side MPU 93. By receiving the state designation command, the sound and light side MPU 93 terminates the execution of the performance corresponding to the time saving state in the symbol display device 41, the display light emitting unit 64, and the speaker unit 65, and starts the performance corresponding to the normal gaming state. Let it start.

If the high probability flag is not set to "1" and the second high frequency flag of the main side RAM 84 is set to "1" (step S3507: YES), that is, the low probability mode and the second high frequency flag are set to "1". If it is the frequency support mode, the value of the time saving state counter 134 in the main side RAM 84 is subtracted by 1 (step S3508), and if the value of the time saving state counter 134 after the 1 subtraction is "0" (step S3509: YES) , clears the second high-frequency flag in the main side RAM 84 to "0" (step S3510). As a result, the second high-frequency support mode ends and the low-frequency support mode begins. In other words, the time saving state ends and the normal gaming state returns. Furthermore, a process for transmitting a status designation command is executed (step S3511). In the transmission process, a state designation command indicating that the time saving state has ended is transmitted to the sound-light side MPU 93. By receiving the state designation command, the sound and light side MPU 93 terminates the execution of the performance corresponding to the time saving state in the symbol display device 41, the display light emitting unit 64, and the speaker unit 65, and starts the performance corresponding to the normal gaming state. Let it start.

Thereafter, a process for setting the variation selection state counter 132 is executed (step S3512). In this case, information of 50 times, which is the predetermined reference number of switching, is set in the variation selection state counter 132 of the main side RAM 84. Even in this embodiment, as in the first embodiment, if one game round is used up in a situation where the win/fail lottery mode is not the high probability mode, the variable selection state counter 132 is set at the end of the game round. The value is subtracted by 1. Then, in a situation where the value of the variable selection state counter 132 is 1 or more, the value of the variable selection state counter 132 is subtracted by 1, and as a result, when the value of the variable selection state counter 132 becomes "0", the main side RAM 84 "1" is set to the reach high frequency state flag. If the reach high frequency state flag is set to "1" in the low probability mode and the low frequency support mode, the process for specifying the variable display period is performed in the same way as in the first embodiment (FIG. 21). The variable display period of the game is selected by referring to the table group for high reach frequency.

In other words, if either the time saving state triggered by the time saving result or the time saving state triggered by the ceiling time saving ends, and the predetermined switching standard number of games are played in the low probability mode, the low frequency support If it is in the high reach frequency mode, the reach high frequency state is set in which the table group for high reach frequency is referred to. Then, in the high reach frequency state, the reach display is selected when the result is lower than the situation where the reach is in the low probability mode and the low frequency support mode and is not in the high reach frequency state, as in the first embodiment. As the probability of reaching is higher, the variable display period when reach display is selected is also likely to be longer than in a situation where the reach is in the low probability mode and the low frequency support mode and is not in the reach high frequency state. Therefore, if either the time saving state triggered by the time saving result or the time saving state triggered by the ceiling time saving ends, and the predetermined switching reference number of games is played, the reach high frequency state will occur. This makes it possible to increase the attention to the game.

In the short time state, the efficiency of playing games is high, whereas in the high reach frequency state, the efficiency of playing games is low. In this case, by causing the reach high frequency state to occur after the time saving state ends, it is possible to prevent the efficiency of playing the game from becoming excessively high.

When the time saving state ends, the reach high frequency state does not immediately occur, but after the time saving state ends, the reach high frequency state is entered when a predetermined switching standard number of games are played. This makes it possible to prevent the efficiency of playing a game from rapidly changing from a high state to a low state. Therefore, it is possible to achieve the above-mentioned excellent effects while not giving the player a sense of discomfort.

<Ninth embodiment>
This embodiment is different from the first embodiment in the processing configuration when a time saving result or a ceiling time saving occurs in the time saving state. Hereinafter, configurations that are different from the first embodiment will be described. Note that descriptions of the same configurations as those in the first embodiment will basically be omitted.

FIG. 58 is a flowchart showing a setting process for time-saving results in this embodiment executed by the main MPU 82.

If the game result of the current game round is a time saving result (step S3601: YES), it is determined whether the high probability flag in the main side RAM 84 is set to "1" (step S3602). If the high probability flag is set to "1" (step S3602: YES), the time-saving result setting process is ended without executing the processes from step S3603 onwards. In other words, even if a time-saving result (first time-saving result or second time-saving result) is selected in the validity judgment process of a game run executed in a high-probability mode, the second high-frequency support is triggered by the time-saving result. Time-saving results are disabled without setting the mode.

Here, in the special figure confirmation process (FIG. 22), as already explained, the time-saving result setting process (FIG. 58) is executed before the subtraction process of the high probability state counter 133 (FIG. 24). As a result, in the last game round in the high probability mode and the first high frequency support mode, the value of the high probability state counter 133 is subtracted by 1 in the subtraction process (FIG. 24) of the high probability state counter 133, and the corresponding When the value of the high probability state counter 133 becomes "0", the time saving result setting process (FIG. 58) is executed before the high probability flag and the first high frequency flag are cleared to "0". Become. If the time-saving result setting process (Figure 58) is executed at this timing, the high probability flag is still set to "1", so the second high-frequency support mode is set based on the time-saving result. will not be carried out. Therefore, it is possible to reliably invalidate the time-saving result in the game round in which the validity determination process is executed in the execution mode corresponding to the high probability mode. In addition, such an effect can be achieved by changing the processing order in which the time-saving result setting process (Fig. 58) is executed before the subtraction process of the high probability state counter 133 (Fig. 24) in the special figure confirmation process (Fig. 22). This can be achieved by setting.

If the high probability flag is not set to "1" (step S3602: NO), it is determined whether the first high frequency flag of the main side RAM 84 is set to "1" (step S3603). That is, it is determined whether the support mode is the first high-frequency support mode. If the support mode is not the first high-frequency support mode (step S3603: NO), the second high-frequency flag of the main side RAM 84 is set to "1" (step S3604), and the support mode is the first high-frequency support mode. If yes (step S3603: YES), the process of step S3604 is not executed. As a result, when the low probability mode and the first high frequency support mode result in a time saving result, the low probability mode and the first high frequency support mode are maintained, and the time saving result occurs in the low probability mode and the second high frequency support mode. If this happens, the low probability mode and the second high frequency support mode are maintained, and if the low probability mode and the low frequency support mode result in a time saving result, the low probability mode and the second high frequency support mode are used.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S3603 or if the process in step S3604 is executed, it is determined whether the current time saving result is the first time saving result (step S3605). If the current time saving result is the first time saving result (step S3605: YES), it is determined whether the value of the time saving state counter 134 in the main side RAM 84 is greater than or equal to "100" corresponding to the first time saving continuation number. (Step S3606). If the value of the time saving state counter 134 is less than the value of the first time saving continuation number (step S3606: NO), information of "100" corresponding to the first time saving continuation number is set in the time saving state counter 134 (step S3607) .

Thereafter, a process for transmitting a status designation command is executed (step S3608). In the transmission process, a state designation command indicating that the time saving state has started or that the first time saving continuation number has been reset is transmitted to the sound-light side MPU 93.

If the process of step S3608 is executed after the process of step S3607 is executed in a situation where the current gaming state is not the time-saving state, the state designation command indicates that the time-saving state of the first time-saving continuation number is to be started. Contains information. When the sound and light side MPU 93 receives the state specifying command, it causes the symbol display device 41, the display light emitting section 64, and the speaker section 65 to execute an effect indicating that the time saving state of the first time saving continuation number is started. Execute processing to make it. In this case, in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 on the symbol display device 41, the first time-saving symbol combination (“1, 2, 3”) is stopped and displayed. After these stop results are stopped and displayed, the symbol display device 41 displays an image indicating that a time saving state occurs and an image indicating the number of times the first time saving continues. Since the timing at which the image is displayed is the timing at which the game round ends, a new game round can be started immediately. In this case, the area where the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are set on the display surface of the symbol display device 41 is reduced, and while the symbols corresponding to the new game round are displayed in a variable manner in the reduced area, The display continues to display an image indicating that a time saving state occurs in the secured area and an image indicating the number of times the first time saving continues. The display of the image ends when one game round ends, and when the display of the image ends, the area where the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are set returns to its original size.

If the process of step S3608 is executed after the process of step S3607 is executed in a situation where the current gaming state is the time saving state, the state designation command indicates that the first time saving continuation number has been reset. Contains information. When the sound and light side MPU 93 receives the state specifying command, the symbol display device 41, the display light emitting section 64, and the speaker section 65 execute an effect indicating that the first time saving continuation number has been reset. Execute processing to make it. In this case, in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 on the symbol display device 41, the symbol combination corresponding to the jackpot result, the first time-saving symbol combination (“1, 2, 3”), and the second time-saving symbol combination (“3”) are displayed.・4.1'') and combinations of non-reach out symbols that are combinations other than the combination of out-of-reach symbols are stopped and displayed. After the stop result is stopped and displayed and the final stop period ends, an image showing that the number of time saving continuations in the time saving state has actually been reset and an image showing the first number of time saving continuations are displayed. Is displayed. Since the timing at which the image is displayed is the timing at which the game round ends, a new game round can be started immediately. In this case, the area where the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are set on the display surface of the symbol display device 41 is reduced, and while the symbols corresponding to the new game round are displayed in a variable manner in the reduced area, In the secured area, an image indicating that the number of continuations of time saving in the time saving state has been reset and an image indicating the reset number of first time saving continuations are continued to be displayed. The display of the image ends when one game round ends, and when the display of the image ends, the area where the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are set returns to its original size.

If the current time saving result is the second time saving result (step S3605: NO), regardless of the current value of the time saving state counter 134, information of "150" corresponding to the number of times the second time saving continues is stored in the time saving state counter 134. Set (step S3609). Thereafter, a process for transmitting a status designation command is executed (step S3610). In the transmission process, a state designation command indicating that the time saving state has started or that the second time saving continuation count has been reset is transmitted to the sound/light side MPU 93.

If the process of step S3610 is executed after the process of step S3609 is executed in a situation where the current gaming state is not a time-saving state, the state designation command indicates that the time-saving state of the second time-saving continuation number is to be started. Contains information. When the sound and light side MPU 93 receives the state designation command, it causes the symbol display device 41, the display light emitting section 64, and the speaker section 65 to execute an effect indicating that the time saving state of the second time saving continuation number is started. Execute processing to make it. In this case, in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 on the symbol display device 41, the second time-saving symbol combination (“3, 4, 1”) is stopped and displayed. After these stop results are stopped and displayed, the symbol display device 41 displays an image indicating that a time saving state occurs and an image indicating the number of times the second time saving continues. Since the timing at which the image is displayed is the timing at which the game round ends, a new game round can be started immediately. In this case, the area where the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are set on the display surface of the symbol display device 41 is reduced, and while the symbols corresponding to the new game round are displayed in a variable manner in the reduced area, The image indicating that the time saving state occurs in the secured area and the image indicating the number of continuations of the second time saving are continued to be displayed. The display of the image ends when one game round ends, and when the display of the image ends, the area where the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are set returns to its original size.

If the process of step S3610 is executed after the process of step S3609 is executed in a situation where the current gaming state is the time saving state, the state designation command indicates that the second time saving continuation number has been reset. Contains information. When the sound and light side MPU 93 receives the state specifying command, the symbol display device 41, the display light emitting section 64, and the speaker section 65 execute an effect indicating that the second time saving continuation number has been reset. Execute processing to make it. In this case, in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 on the symbol display device 41, the symbol combination corresponding to the jackpot result, the first time-saving symbol combination (“1, 2, 3”), and the second time-saving symbol combination (“3”) are displayed.・4.1'') and combinations of non-reach out symbols that are combinations other than the combination of out-of-reach symbols are stopped and displayed. Then, after the stop result is stopped and displayed and the confirmation display for the final stop period ends, an image showing that the number of continuations of time saving in the time saving state has been reset and an image showing the number of times of second time saving continuation are actually displayed. Is displayed. Since the timing at which the image is displayed is the timing at which the game round ends, a new game round can be started immediately. In this case, the area where the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are set on the display surface of the symbol display device 41 is reduced, and while the symbols corresponding to the new game round are displayed in a variable manner in the reduced area, In the secured area, an image indicating that the number of time saving continuations in the time saving state has been reset and an image showing the reset number of second time saving continuations are continued to be displayed. The display of the image ends when one game round ends, and when the display of the image ends, the area where the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are set returns to its original size.

FIG. 59 is a flowchart showing the subtraction process of the ceiling counter 131 in this embodiment executed by the main MPU 82.

First, it is determined whether the high probability flag in the main side RAM 84 is set to "1" (step S3701). Then, if the high probability flag is set to "1" (step S3701: YES), the subtraction process of the main ceiling counter 131 is ended without executing the processes after step S3702. In other words, in a game run executed in a high probability mode, the value of the ceiling counter 131 is not subtracted, and furthermore, the ceiling time is shortened because the value of the ceiling counter 131 is not subtracted. Nor.

Here, in the special figure confirmation process (FIG. 22), as already explained, the subtraction process of the ceiling counter 131 (FIG. 59) is executed before the subtraction process of the high probability state counter 133 (FIG. 24). As a result, in the last game round in the high probability mode and the first high frequency support mode, the value of the high probability state counter 133 is subtracted by 1 in the subtraction process (FIG. 24) of the high probability state counter 133, and the corresponding Since the value of the high probability state counter 133 becomes "0", the subtraction process (FIG. 59) of the ceiling counter 131 is executed before the high probability flag and the first high frequency flag are cleared to "0". Become. If the subtraction process (FIG. 59) of the ceiling counter 131 is executed at this timing, the value of the ceiling counter 131 is not subtracted because "1" is still set in the high probability flag. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the value of the ceiling counter 131 from being subtracted in the game round in which the validity determination process is executed in the execution mode corresponding to the high probability mode. In addition, such an effect can be achieved by changing the processing order in which the subtraction process of the ceiling counter 131 (FIG. 59) is executed before the subtraction process of the high probability state counter 133 (FIG. 24) in the special figure confirmation process (FIG. 22). This can be achieved by setting.

If the high probability flag is not set to "1" (step S3701: NO), it is determined whether the value of the ceiling counter 131 is 1 or more (step S3702). If the value of the ceiling counter 131 is "0" (step S3702: NO), the subtraction process of the main ceiling counter 131 is ended without executing the processes after step S3703. The process of setting information on the ceiling counter 131 is similar to the first embodiment described above, in a situation where none of the "RAM clear operation", "setting change operation", and "setting confirmation operation" is executed, and the processing is performed on the gaming machine itself. 12 is in an open state, step S114 when the supply of operating power is started, step S122 when an information abnormality in the main side RAM 84 has occurred when the supply of operating power is started, and opening/closing execution Only step S1005 is performed when the mode is started, and after the value of the ceiling counter 131 becomes "0", the value of the ceiling counter 131 is maintained at "0" unless any of the above processes is executed. . On the other hand, ceiling time reduction occurs when the value of the ceiling counter 131 is 1 or more and the value of the ceiling counter 131 is subtracted by 1, and the value of the ceiling counter 131 becomes "0". In this case, if the value of the ceiling counter 131 is "0" as described above (step S3702: NO), the subtraction process of the main ceiling counter 131 is ended without executing the processes after step S3703. As a result, the value of the ceiling counter 131 after being subtracted by 1 becomes "0", and a time-saving state triggered by the ceiling time-saving occurs, and in the time-saving state, the number of consecutive game times for time-saving is completed without a jackpot result occurring. When the time saving state ends and the normal gaming state is entered, even if game rounds in which a jackpot result does not occur are repeated thereafter, the time saving state triggered by the ceiling time saving does not occur. Therefore, it is possible to prevent excessive time reduction conditions triggered by ceiling time reduction from occurring.

If the value of the ceiling counter 131 is 1 or more (step S3702: YES), the value of the ceiling counter 131 is subtracted by 1 (step S3703), and it is determined whether the value of the ceiling counter 131 after the 1 subtraction is "0" or not. (Step S3704). When the value of the ceiling counter 131 is "0" (step S3704: YES), the second high frequency flag is set to "1", regardless of whether the second high frequency flag of the main side RAM 84 is set to "1". 1" (step S3705). As a result, if the time reaches the ceiling in the low probability mode and the second high frequency support mode, the low probability mode and the second high frequency support mode are maintained, and the time reaches the ceiling in the low probability mode and the low frequency support mode. In this case, the mode becomes a low probability mode and a second high frequency support mode. In addition, the low probability mode and the first high frequency support mode occur after the opening/closing execution mode triggered by the 5R low probability result ends, and when the first time saving continuation number of 100 games is exhausted. Since the first high-frequency support mode ends, the ceiling time reduction that occurs when the fixed ceiling number of 500 games is exhausted in the low probability mode after the opening/closing execution mode ends, the first high-frequency support mode It cannot occur in certain situations.

Thereafter, it is determined whether the value of the time saving state counter 134 in the main side RAM 84 is equal to or greater than "100" corresponding to the first time saving continuation number (step S3706). If the value of the time saving state counter 134 is less than the value of the first time saving continuation number (step S3706: NO), information of "100" corresponding to the first time saving continuation number is set in the time saving state counter 134 (step S3707) .

Thereafter, a process for transmitting a status designation command is executed (step S3708). In the transmission process, a state designation command indicating that the time saving state has started or that the first time saving continuation number has been reset is transmitted to the sound-light side MPU 93.

If the process of step S3708 is executed after the process of step S3707 is executed in a situation where the current gaming state is not a time-saving state, the state designation command indicates that the time-saving state of the first time-saving continuation number is to be started. Contains information. When the sound and light side MPU 93 receives the state specifying command, it causes the symbol display device 41, the display light emitting section 64, and the speaker section 65 to execute an effect indicating that the time saving state of the first time saving continuation number is started. Execute processing to make it. Since the time-saving state triggered by the ceiling time-saving occurs in a game round in which neither a jackpot result nor a time-saving result occurs, symbol rows Z1 to Z3 on the symbol display device 41 display the combination of symbols corresponding to the jackpot result, the first time-saving Combinations of missing symbols (including combinations of missed reach symbols) that are combinations of symbols other than the combination of symbols that occur ("1, 2, 3") and the combination of symbols that generate the second time-saving symbol ("3, 4, 1") is stopped and displayed. Then, after the stop result is stopped and displayed and the final stop period ends, an image indicating that a time reduction state triggered by the ceiling time reduction will occur and an image indicating the number of times the first time reduction continues are displayed. . Since the timing at which the image is displayed is the timing at which the game round ends, a new game round can be started immediately. In this case, the area where the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are set on the display surface of the symbol display device 41 is reduced, and while the symbols corresponding to the new game round are displayed in a variable manner in the reduced area, In the secured area, an image indicating that a time saving state triggered by ceiling time saving occurs and an image indicating the number of times the first time saving continues are displayed. The display of the image ends when one game round ends, and when the display of the image ends, the area where the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are set returns to its original size.

If the process of step S3708 is executed after the process of step S3707 is executed in a situation where the current gaming state is the time saving state, the state designation command indicates that the first time saving continuation number has been reset. Contains information. When the sound and light side MPU 93 receives the state specifying command, the symbol display device 41, the display light emitting section 64, and the speaker section 65 execute an effect indicating that the first time saving continuation number has been reset. Execute processing to make it. Since the resetting of the first time saving continuation number triggered by the ceiling time saving occurs in a game round in which neither a jackpot result nor a time saving result occurs, the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 on the symbol display device 41 display the symbols corresponding to the jackpot result. A combination of missing symbols (missing reach) that is a combination of symbols other than the first time-saving symbol combination ("1, 2, 3") and the second time-saving symbol combination ("3, 4, 1") (including combinations of symbols) are stopped and displayed. Then, after the stop result is stopped and the final stop period is finished, an image indicating that a time saving state triggered by the ceiling time reduction will occur and that the first time reduction continuation number has been reset is displayed. The image shown will be displayed. Since the timing at which the image is displayed is the timing at which the game round ends, a new game round can be started immediately. In this case, the area where the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are set on the display surface of the symbol display device 41 is reduced, and while the symbols corresponding to the new game round are displayed in a variable manner in the reduced area, An image indicating that a time saving state triggered by ceiling time saving occurs in the secured area and an image indicating that the first time saving continuation count has been reset are continued to be displayed. The display of the image ends when one game round ends, and when the display of the image ends, the area where the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are set returns to its original size.

When an affirmative determination is made in step S3706 or when the process in step S3708 is executed, the reach high frequency state flag in the main side RAM 84 is cleared to "0" (step S3709). As a result, when a ceiling time reduction occurs, the reach high frequency state ends regardless of whether or not the second high frequency support mode is set using the ceiling time reduction as a trigger.

Here, in the special drawing confirmation process (FIG. 22), after the time-saving result setting process (FIG. 58) is executed, the ceiling counter 131 subtraction process (FIG. 59) is executed, and the ceiling counter 131 is also subtracted. In the process (FIG. 59), even if the value of the ceiling counter 131 after subtraction by 1 is "0", if the value of the time saving state counter 134 is "100" or more, the process of step S3707 and step S3708 is not executed. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the first time saving continuation number from being reset due to the ceiling time saving in the game round where the first time saving result or the second time saving result is obtained. This makes it possible to prevent the resetting of the number of time saving continuations triggered by the time saving result and the resetting of the number of time saving continuations triggered by the ceiling time reduction from being performed redundantly. In particular, if the first time saving continuation count is reset after the second time saving result is reset and the first time saving continuation count is triggered by the ceiling time saving, the number of time saving continuations will decrease. By adopting the above configuration, it is possible to prevent such inconvenience from occurring.

Next, the subsequent gaming state when a time saving result or ceiling time saving occurs in the time saving state will be explained with reference to the time chart of FIG. 60. 60(a) shows a period in which the opening/closing execution mode is in effect, FIG. 60(b) shows a period in which the first high frequency flag of the main side RAM 84 is set to "1", and FIG. 60(c) shows a period in which the main side RAM 84 is set to "1". 60(d) shows the state of the time saving state counter 134, and FIG. 60(e) shows the timing when the first time saving result occurs. FIG. 60(f) shows the timing when the second time saving result occurs, and FIG. 60(g) shows the timing when the ceiling time saving occurs.

First, a case where the second time saving result occurs during the low probability mode and the second high frequency support mode will be described.

As shown in FIG. 60(c), when the result of the success/failure determination process becomes the first time saving result at timing t1, the game round in which the success/failure determination process was executed ends, as shown in FIG. 60(c). As shown in FIG. 60(d), the second high frequency flag of the main side RAM 84 is set to "1", and the time saving state counter 134 is set to "100" corresponding to the number of times the first time saving is continued. Ru. As a result, the time-saving state, which is the low probability mode and the second high-frequency support mode, is entered, and the first time-saving continuation number is set as the remaining number of continuations of the time-saving state. Then, the value of the time-saving state counter 134 is decremented as shown in FIG. 60(d) as the game rounds that do not trigger the transition to the opening/closing execution mode are repeatedly executed.

Thereafter, at timing t2 when the value of the time saving state counter 134 is 1 or more and the second high-frequency support mode is activated, the result of the validity judgment process becomes the second time saving result as shown in FIG. 60(f). When the game round in which the validity determination process has been executed ends, information of "150" corresponding to the second time saving continuation number is set in the time saving state counter 134 as shown in FIG. 60(d). Thereby, in the middle of the time saving state, the remaining number of continuations of the time saving state increases from a number smaller than the first time saving continuation number to the second time saving continuation number.

Next, a case will be described in which, although a ceiling time reduction occurs during the low probability mode and the second high frequency support mode, no benefit is provided due to the occurrence of the ceiling time reduction.

At timing t3, as shown in FIG. 60(f), the result of the win/fail judgment process becomes the second time saving result, and the game round in which the win/fail judgment process was executed ends as shown in FIG. 60(c). As shown in FIG. 60(d), the second high frequency flag of the main side RAM 84 is set to "1", and the time saving state counter 134 is set to "150" corresponding to the number of times the second time saving is continued. Ru. This results in a time saving state which is the low probability mode and the second high frequency support mode, and a state in which the second time saving continuation number is set as the remaining number of continuations of the time saving state. Then, the value of the time-saving state counter 134 is decremented as shown in FIG. 60(d) as the game rounds that do not trigger the transition to the opening/closing execution mode are repeatedly executed.

Thereafter, at timing t4 when the value of the time saving state counter 134 is 1 or more and the second high frequency support mode is in effect, a ceiling time saving occurs as shown in FIG. 60(g). In this case, the value of the time saving state counter 134 is larger than the first time saving continuation count that is set in response to the occurrence of ceiling time saving. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 60(d), the value of the time saving state counter 134 is maintained as it is. In this way, even if a ceiling time reduction occurs in the middle of the time reduction state, if the remaining number of continuations at that point in the time reduction state is a larger value than the first time reduction continuation number that is set after the occurrence of the ceiling time reduction, The occurrence of ceiling time reduction is disabled.

Next, a case will be described in which a ceiling time reduction occurs in the middle of the low probability mode and the second high frequency support mode, and a profit due to the occurrence of the ceiling time reduction is provided.

As shown in FIG. 60(e) at timing t5, the result of the success/failure determination process becomes the first time saving result, and the game round in which the success/failure determination process was executed ends as shown in FIG. 60(c). As shown in FIG. 60(d), the second high frequency flag of the main side RAM 84 is set to "1", and the time saving state counter 134 is set to "100" corresponding to the number of times the first time saving is continued. Ru. As a result, the time-saving state, which is the low probability mode and the second high-frequency support mode, is entered, and the first time-saving continuation number is set as the remaining number of continuations of the time-saving state. Then, the value of the time-saving state counter 134 is decremented as shown in FIG. 60(d) as the game rounds that do not trigger the transition to the opening/closing execution mode are repeatedly executed.

Thereafter, at timing t6 when the value of the time saving state counter 134 is 1 or more and the second high frequency support mode is reached, a ceiling time saving occurs as shown in FIG. 60(g). In this case, the value of the time saving state counter 134 is smaller than the first time saving continuation number set in response to the occurrence of ceiling time saving. Therefore, at timing t6 when the ceiling time reduction occurs, information of "100" corresponding to the first time reduction continuation number is set in the time reduction state counter 134 as shown in FIG. 60(d). Thereby, in the middle of the time saving state, the remaining number of continuations of the time saving state increases from a number smaller than the first time saving continuation number to the first time saving continuation number.

Next, a case where the first time saving result occurs during the low probability mode and the first high frequency support mode will be described.

At timing t7, as shown in FIG. 60(a), the opening/closing execution mode triggered by the 5R low certainty result ends, and as shown in FIG. 60(b), the first high frequency flag of the main side RAM 84 is set to " At the same time, as shown in FIG. 60(d), information of "100" corresponding to the number of times the first time saving is continued is set in the time saving state counter 134. As a result, the time-saving state, which is the low probability mode and the first high-frequency support mode, is entered, and the first time-saving continuation number is set as the remaining number of continuations of the time-saving state. Then, the value of the time-saving state counter 134 is decremented as shown in FIG. 60(d) as the game rounds that do not trigger the transition to the opening/closing execution mode are repeatedly executed.

Thereafter, at timing t8 when the value of the time saving state counter 134 is 1 or more and the first high frequency support mode is in effect, the result of the validity determination process becomes the first time saving result as shown in FIG. 60(e). In this case, the value of the time saving state counter 134 is a value smaller than the first time saving continuation number set in response to the occurrence of the first time saving result. Therefore, when the game round in which the result of the judgment process is the first time saving result ends, as shown in FIG. Set. Thereby, in the middle of the time saving state, the remaining number of continuations of the time saving state increases from a number smaller than the first time saving continuation number to the first time saving continuation number. In addition, the support mode in the time-saving state is not changed to the second high-frequency support mode, but the first high-frequency support mode, which is more advantageous to the player than the second high-frequency support mode, is maintained. With the occurrence of the time saving result as a trigger, the remaining number of times the time saving state, which is the first high-frequency support mode, can be continued is set as the first time saving continuation number.

Next, a case where the second time saving result occurs during the low probability mode and the first high frequency support mode will be described.

At timing t9, as shown in FIG. 60(a), the opening/closing execution mode triggered by the 5R low certainty result ends, and as shown in FIG. 60(b), the first high frequency flag of the main side RAM 84 is set to " At the same time, as shown in FIG. 60(d), information of "100" corresponding to the number of times the first time saving is continued is set in the time saving state counter 134. As a result, the time-saving state, which is the low probability mode and the first high-frequency support mode, is entered, and the first time-saving continuation number is set as the remaining number of continuations of the time-saving state. Then, the value of the time-saving state counter 134 is decremented as shown in FIG. 60(d) as the game rounds that do not trigger the transition to the opening/closing execution mode are repeatedly executed.

Thereafter, at timing t10 when the value of the time-saving state counter 134 is 1 or more and the first high-frequency support mode is in effect, the result of the validity determination process becomes the second time-saving result as shown in FIG. 60(f). The second time saving continuation count, which is set when the second time saving result occurs, is greater than the first time saving continuation number in the time saving state, which is set when the opening/closing execution mode triggered by the 5R low certainty result ends. be. Therefore, when the game round in which the result of the judgment process is the second time saving result ends, as shown in FIG. Set. Thereby, in the middle of the time saving state, the remaining number of continuations of the time saving state increases from a number smaller than the first time saving continuation number to the second time saving continuation number. In addition, the support mode in the time-saving state is not changed to the second high-frequency support mode, but the first high-frequency support mode, which is more advantageous to the player than the second high-frequency support mode, is maintained. With the occurrence of the time saving result as a trigger, the remaining number of times the time saving state, which is the first high-frequency support mode, can be continued is set as the second number of time saving continuations.

With the above configuration, when a time saving result occurs in the low probability mode and the low frequency support mode, a transition is made to the time saving state with the number of time saving continuations corresponding to the type of the time saving result. Thereby, it is possible to create a situation in which a transition to the time saving state occurs without going through the opening/closing execution mode based on the result of the propriety determination process in the low probability mode and the low frequency support mode.

When the first time saving result occurs in the low probability mode and the first high frequency support mode, the value of the time saving state counter 134 is reset to 100 times, which is the first time saving continuation number, and then the low probability mode and the first high frequency support mode occur. Frequency support mode continues. In addition, when the second time saving result occurs in the low probability mode and the first high frequency support mode, the value of the time saving state counter 134 is set to 150 times, which is the second time saving continuation number, and the second time saving result occurs in the low probability mode and the first high frequency support mode. High frequency support mode continues. As a result, when a time-saving result occurs in the first high-frequency support mode, the first high-frequency support mode, in which the second operating port 34 is more likely to be opened than in the second high-frequency support mode, is continued, and until then, A situation occurs where the remaining number of continuations of the time-saving state is greater than the number of times the time-saving state continues. Therefore, it is possible to increase the advantage of producing a time-saving result in a time-saving state.

When the first time-saving result occurs in the low probability mode and the second high-frequency support mode, if the value of the time-saving state counter 134 is 100 times or more, which is the first time-saving continuation number, due to the occurrence of the current first time-saving result. The low probability mode and the second high frequency support mode continue without new settings regarding the time saving state being performed. Further, when the first time saving result occurs in the low probability mode and the second high frequency support mode, if the value of the time saving state counter 134 is less than 100 times which is the first time saving continuation number, the value of the time saving state counter 134 is The low probability mode and the second high frequency support mode continue with the first time saving continuation number set to 100 times. In addition, when the second time saving result occurs in the low probability mode and the second high frequency support mode, the value of the time saving state counter 134 is set to 150 times, which is the second time saving continuation number, and the second time saving result occurs in the low probability mode and the second high frequency support mode. High-frequency support mode continues. As a result, if a time-saving result occurs in the second high-frequency support mode, a situation may occur in which the remaining number of continuations of the time-saving state is greater than before, while continuing the second high-frequency support mode. . Therefore, it is possible to increase the advantage of producing a time-saving result in a time-saving state.

When a time saving result occurs in a time saving state, the remaining number of continuations of the current time saving state and the number of time saving continuations that can be set based on the newly generated time saving result, whichever is greater, will be the remaining number of times in the subsequent time saving state. This is the number of continuations. This makes it possible to increase the advantage of producing a time-saving result in a time-saving state.

When a ceiling time reduction occurs in the low probability mode and the low frequency support mode, a transition is made to the time reduction state of the first time reduction continuation number. Thereby, in the low probability mode and the low frequency support mode, it is possible to create a situation in which a transition to the time saving state occurs without going through the opening/closing execution mode based on the completion of the ceiling number of games.

When a ceiling time reduction occurs in the low probability mode and the second high-frequency support mode, if the value of the time reduction state counter 134 is 100 times or more, which is the first time reduction continuation number, a new time reduction state related to the current ceiling time reduction occurs. The low probability mode and the second high frequency support mode continue without any further settings being made. Further, when a ceiling time reduction occurs in the low probability mode and the second high frequency support mode, if the value of the time reduction state counter 134 is less than 100 times which is the first time reduction continuation number, the value of the time reduction state counter 134 is The low probability mode and the second high frequency support mode continue with the time saving continuation count set to 100 times. In other words, when a ceiling time reduction occurs in a time reduction state, the greater of the remaining number of continuations in the current time reduction state and the number of time reduction continuations that can be set due to the newly occurring ceiling time reduction is the number of times in the subsequent time reduction state. This is the remaining number of continuations. As a result, if a ceiling time reduction occurs in the second high-frequency support mode, a situation may occur in which the remaining number of times the time reduction state continues is greater than before, so it is possible that the ceiling time reduction will occur in the time reduction state. It is possible to increase the advantage.

<Tenth embodiment>
In this embodiment, the configuration of the game area PA provided on the game board 24 is different from the first embodiment. Hereinafter, configurations that are different from the first embodiment will be explained. Note that descriptions of the same configurations as in the first embodiment will be basically omitted.

FIG. 61 is a front view of the game board 24 for explaining the configuration of the game area PA in this embodiment.

An inner rail part 25 and an outer rail part 26 are attached to the game board 24 so as to partition a part of the outer edge of the game area PA, and the inner rail part 25 and the outer rail part 26 provide a guide means. The guide rail is configured as follows. The game ball fired from the game ball firing mechanism 27 (see FIG. 2) is guided to the upper part of the game area PA by a guide rail.

As in the first embodiment, the game board 24 includes a general prize opening 31, a special prize winning device 32, a first operation opening 33, a through gate 35, a variable display unit 36, a special symbol unit 37, and a regular symbol unit 38. is provided. Further, a special winning device 151 is provided in place of the second operating port 34 in the first embodiment. The configuration of the special prize winning device 151 is the same as that of the sixth embodiment.

Even if a ball enters the through gate 35, the payout of the game ball is not executed. On the other hand, if a ball enters any of the general winning slot 31, special electric winning device 32, first operating port 33, and special winning device 151, a predetermined number of game media are used to increase the number of gaming media available to the player. The payout of game balls is executed. Specifically, regarding the number of prize balls, when a ball enters the general winning hole 31, 10 game balls are paid out, and when a ball enters the special electric winning device 32, 15 game balls are paid out. When three game balls are paid out, and a ball enters the first operating port 33, three game balls are paid out, and when a ball enters the special winning device 151, One game ball is paid out. Note that the number of prize balls is arbitrary, and the first operating port 33 and the special winning device 151 may have the same number of prize balls.

In addition, an out port 24a is provided at the bottom of the game board 24, and game balls that have not entered various winning ports are discharged from the gaming area PA through the out port 24a. Further, the game board 24 is provided with a large number of nails 24b in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the game balls, and various members such as a windmill are also provided.

A variable display unit 36 is provided so as to include the central portion of the game area PA. Due to the peripheral edge of the variable display unit 36 protruding forward of the pachinko machine 10 from the surface of the game board 24, an area is defined in which game balls fired into the game area PA can flow down. Specifically, in the gaming area PA, there is an upper area PA1 that is an area above a predetermined height position of the variable display unit 36, and an area that is continuous below the upper area PA1 and is higher than the variable display unit 36. A left area PA2 which is a left area, a right area PA3 which is continuous below the upper area PA1 and is an area to the right of the variable display unit 36, and each of the left area PA2 and the right area PA3. On the other hand, it is divided into a lower area PA4 that is continuous below the variable display unit 36 and is below the variable display unit 36.

When the player operates the firing operation device 28 with a rotation amount in the first range that is less than the reference rotation amount as the first firing operation, the game ball is positioned to the left of the horizontal center position in the upper area PA1. It starts to flow down. In this case, the game ball will flow down in the order of upper area PA1 → left area PA2 → lower area PA4. On the other hand, when the player operates the firing operation device 28 as a second firing operation with a rotation amount in the second range that is equal to or greater than the reference rotation amount, the player can move the firing operation device 28 to the right of the horizontal center position in the upper area PA1. The game ball begins to flow down. In this case, the game balls will flow down in the order of upper area PA1 → right area PA3 → lower area PA4. In other words, by adjusting the rotational operation amount of the firing operation device 28, the player can play the game so that the game ball flows down the left area PA2 of the left area PA2 and the right area PA3, and the player can play the game so that the game ball flows down the left area PA2 and the right area PA3. A game can be played as the game ball flows down PA3. Incidentally, when the firing operation device 28 is operated with the maximum amount of rotation, the game balls will flow down in the order of upper area PA1 → right area PA3 → lower area PA4.

The first operating port 33 is installed in the lower area PA4. The first operating port 33 is opened upward, and no member such as an opening/closing member for preventing a game ball from entering the first operating port 33 is provided. In a situation where the game balls are fired in the same manner, the winning probability at the first operating port 33 is constant regardless of the game state. In other words, the first operating port 33 is such that a game ball flowing down the gaming area PA toward the first operating port 33 can always enter the first operating port 33 . In addition, the first operating port 33 is disposed directly below the stage portion 36b formed in the variable display unit 36, and the game balls flowing onto the stage portion 36b through the guide path formed in the variable display unit 36 Therefore, the game balls discharged from the lateral center of the stage part 36b to the outside of the variable display unit 36 can easily enter the first operating opening 33.

As mentioned above, the first operating port 33 is provided in the lower area PA4, but the game ball that has flown down the right area PA3 is located upstream of the first operating port 33 toward the right area PA3. A restriction nail 24c is provided so as to make it impossible to reach the first operating port 33. Further, the entrance of the guide passage to the stage portion 36b is provided for the left side area PA2, and is not provided for the right side area PA3. With these configurations, when the launch operation device 28 is operated so that the game ball flows down the left area PA2, it is possible to enter the first operating port 33, but the game ball flows down the right area PA3. If the firing operation device 28 is operated in such a manner, winning through the first operating port 33 is not possible. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and if the regulating nail 24c is not provided or the entrance of the guide passage to the stage portion 36b is provided to the right area PA3, the game ball may move through the right area PA3. Even when the firing operation device 28 is operated so as to flow downward, it may be configured such that winning can be entered into the first operating port 33.

The special winning device 151 is installed in the right area PA3. In other words, the special winning device 151 cannot win if the firing operation device 28 is operated so that the game ball flows down the left side area PA2, and the firing operation device 151 operates so that the game ball flows down the right side area PA3. If 28 is operated, it is possible to win a prize.

A through gate 35 is provided above the special winning device 151 in the right area PA3. In other words, the through gate 35 cannot win if the launch operation device 28 is operated so that the game ball flows down the left area PA2, and the launch operation device 28 operates so that the game ball flows down the right area PA3. If the is operated, it is possible to win a prize. The through gate 35 has a through hole that penetrates in the vertical direction. Further, a special winning device 151 is provided at a position vertically below the through gate 35, and furthermore, a special winning device 32 is provided downstream of the special winning device 151 in the right area PA3. Therefore, the game ball that has entered the through gate 35 can enter the special winning device 151 or the special electric winning device 32.

The right side area PA3 where the special winning device 151 and the through gate 35 are arranged is defined by a side wall 36f on the left side that bulges out in front of the pachinko machine 10 than the board surface of the game board 24 in the variable display unit 36. , the right side is defined by a regulating wall provided on the resin base 21 of the inner frame 13 and protruding forward of the pachinko machine 10 from the board surface of the game board 24. The right side area PA3 is set to have a narrower horizontal dimension than the lower area PA4, and the horizontal dimension is such that it is impossible to arrange the game ball entry devices horizontally at the same height position. It becomes. This makes it possible to limit the trajectory of the game ball flowing down the right side area PA3 to a predetermined range, making it easier for the game ball to enter the special winning device 151 and the through gate 35.

The arrangement of the plurality of nails 24b on the upstream side of the through gate 35 in the right area PA3 is set so as to guide the game balls flowing down the right area PA3 to the through gate 35. This makes it easier for game balls flowing down the right side area PA3 to enter the through gate 35, and along with the ease of entering the ball into the through gate 35, it becomes easier for the ball to enter the special winning device 151.

When the guiding unit 152 of the special winning device 151 is switched from the non-guiding state to the guiding state based on the winning in the through gate 35, the special winning device 151 changes from the closed state to the open state. Specifically, the winning of the through gate 35 is used as a trigger to determine whether the normal figure is correct or not, and the normal figure unit 38 provided in the lower left corner of the gaming area PA, which is an area through which the game ball does not pass, A changing display of the picture is performed on the diagram display section 38a. Then, when the result of the ordinary figure propriety determination process is the electric power open winning, a stop result corresponding to the result is displayed, and the variable display of the ordinary figure display section 38a is ended, the state shifts to the ordinary electric role open state. In the normal power open state, the guiding unit 152 enters the guiding state in a predetermined manner, so that the special winning device 151 enters the open state in a predetermined manner.

Even in this embodiment, a low-frequency support mode, a first high-frequency support mode, and a second high-frequency support mode are set as support modes, and electric power is used in the normal pattern validity determination process in each of these support modes. The probability of an open winning, the selection mode of the duration of the variable display times in the normal pattern display section 38a, and the selection mode of the stop result in the normal pattern display section 38a are the same as in the first embodiment. In addition, the manner in which the special winning device 151 becomes open when the general electricity is open in each support mode (opening duration, number of openings, upper limit number of prizes, interval period) is different from each other in the first embodiment. This is the same as the manner in which the general electric accessory 34a of the second operating port 34 is in the open state when the general electric power is opened in the support mode (opening duration, number of openings, upper limit number of prizes, interval period).

In the first high-frequency support mode and the second high-frequency support mode, the probability of winning the special prize winning device 151 is higher than in the low-frequency support mode. In other words, in the low-frequency support mode, the probability of winning a prize in the first operating port 33 is higher than in the special winning device 151, but in the first high-frequency support mode and the second high-frequency support mode, the probability of winning a prize in the first operating port 33 is higher than that in the special winning device 151. The probability that a prize will be won in the special prize winning device 151 is higher than in the case of 33. When a winning occurs in the special winning device 151, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out, so in the first high-frequency support mode and the second high-frequency support mode, the player does not have many balls. You can play the game while trying not to lose the amount.

A win/fail determination process is performed based on the occurrence of a winning in the first operating port 33 or the special winning device 151. Then, the result of the hit/fail judgment process is clearly displayed through the display effect on the symbol display device 41 of the special symbol unit 37 and the variable display unit 36. The special figure unit 37 is provided with a first special figure display section 37a and a second special figure display section 37b as in the first embodiment. In the first special figure display section 37a, a change of symbols is displayed by performing a win/fail judgment process on the first pending information acquired when a winning occurs in the first operating port 33. Then, the stop result corresponding to the determination result of the validity determination process is displayed. In this case, as in the first embodiment, there are jackpot results, time-saving results, and miss results as the judgment results of the win/fail judgment process, but the contents of the stop results on the first special symbol display section 37a are jackpot results, The time-saving results and the missed results are different. The display of the stop result on the first special figure display section 37a is maintained until the next game round starts and the variable display of a new symbol starts on the first special figure display section 37a. In addition, in the second special figure display section 37b, a fluctuation display of symbols is performed by performing a validity determination process on the second pending information acquired by the occurrence of a winning in the special winning device 151. Then, a result corresponding to the determination result of the validity determination process is displayed. In this case, as in the first embodiment, there are a jackpot result, a time saving result, and a miss result as the judgment results of the win/fail judgment process, but the contents of the stop result on the second special symbol display section 37b are the jackpot result, The time-saving results and the missed results are different. The display of the stop result on the second special figure display section 37b is maintained until the next game round starts and the variable display of a new symbol starts on the second special figure display section 37b.

In the special figure unit 37, a first special figure reservation display section 37c is provided at a position adjacent to the first special figure display section 37a. The number of game balls entered into the first actuation port 33 is reserved up to a maximum of four, and the number of reserved balls is displayed by lighting the first special figure reservation display section 37c. Further, in the special figure unit 37, a second special figure reservation display section 37d is provided at a position adjacent to the second special figure display section 37b. The number of winning game balls in the special winning device 151 is reserved up to a maximum of 4, and the reserved number is displayed by lighting up the second special figure reservation display section 37d.

The display range of the first special figure display section 37a and the second special figure display section 37b is narrower than the display surface of the symbol display device 41. In addition, the entire display range of the first special symbol display section 37a, second special symbol display section 37b, first special symbol reservation display section 37c, and second special symbol reservation display section 37d is also on the display surface of the symbol display device 41. It has a narrower range. As a result, the player's attention is focused on the symbol display device 41 rather than the first special symbol display section 37a, the second special symbol display section 37b, the first special symbol reservation display section 37c, and the second special symbol reservation display section 37d. It is possible to increase it.

When a variable display of symbols is performed on the first special symbol display section 37a or the second special symbol display section 37b, that is, when a game round is being executed, a display effect is performed on the symbol display device 41 in accordance with it. When a game repeat effect is executed on the symbol display device 41, the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, the first pending display area 42a, the second pending display area 42b, and the state suggestion area 43 are displayed as in the first embodiment. Set. Further, the symbol display device 41 performs not only the display performance for the game round, but also the display performance during the opening/closing execution mode that is shifted to after a jackpot result, etc.

When a jackpot result is selected in the win/fail judgment process executed based on winning to the first operation port 33 or the special winning device 151, the game shifts to the opening/closing execution mode after the game round corresponding to the jackpot result ends. In the opening/closing execution mode, it is possible to win a prize using the special electric prize winning device 32. The special winning prize device 32 is provided at a position below the special winning device 151 in the right area PA3. In other words, the special electric winning device 32 cannot win if the firing operation device 28 is operated so that the game ball flows down the left area PA2, and the firing operation device 32 operates so that the game ball flows down the right side area PA3. If 28 is operated, it is possible to win a prize.

The special electric winning device 32 is equipped with a grand prize opening (not shown) that leads to the back side of the game board 24, and an opening/closing door 32a that opens and closes the grand prize opening. The opening/closing door 32a is arranged in either a closed state or an open state. Specifically, the opening/closing door 32a is normally in a closed state where game balls cannot win, but when a jackpot result is selected in the win/fail determination process, it can be switched to an open state where game balls can win. ing. Note that in the closed state, it is not impossible to win a prize, but it may be configured to be in a state in which it is more difficult to win a prize than in the open state. Further, the execution contents of the opening/closing execution mode are the same as in the first embodiment.

FIG. 62 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the electrical configuration for performing various lottery drawings in the main MPU 82 in this embodiment.

In this embodiment, as in the first embodiment, a winning random number counter C1, a type random number counter C2, a reach random number counter C3, a random number initial value counter CINI, a fluctuation type counter CS, and a general random number counter C4 are provided. The contents of the hit random number counter C1, type random number counter C2, reach random number counter C3, random number initial value counter CINI, fluctuation type counter CS, and general random number counter C4, and the contents of the processing using these counters C1 to C4, CINI, and CS are as follows. This is the same as the first embodiment described above. Further, when a winning occurs in the through gate 35, the numerical information of the general random number counter C4 is stored in the general drawing holding area 84c, and the configuration of the general drawing holding area 84c is the same as in the first embodiment. It is.

Each numerical value information of the winning random number counter C1, the type random number counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 is stored in the first special feature of the main side RAM 84 in the same way as in the first embodiment when a winning occurs in the first operating port 33. It is stored in the figure holding area 111. The numerical information of the winning random number counter C1, type random number counter C2, and reach random number counter C3 indicates that when a winning occurs in the special winning device 151, a winning occurs in the second operating port 34 in the first embodiment. As in the case where the special figure is stored in the second special figure holding area 112 of the main side RAM 84.

The special figure execution area 192 includes an execution area 192a for a first special figure and an execution area 192b for a second special figure. The execution area 192a for the first special figure is an area where the first pending information to be subjected to the validity judgment process, distribution judgment process, etc. is stored when starting the variable display on the first special figure display section 37a. be. The execution area 192b for the second special figure is an area where the second pending information to be subjected to the validity judgment process, distribution judgment process, etc. is stored when starting the variable display on the second special figure display section 37b. be. Specifically, when starting the variable display of the first special figure display section 37a, the first reservation information stored in the first area 111a of the first special figure reservation area 111 It is shifted to area 192a. On the other hand, when starting the variable display of the second special figure display section 37b, the second reservation information stored in the first area 112a of the second special figure reservation area 112 is transferred to the execution area 192b for the second special figure. Shifted.

In this embodiment, at least a part of the period of the game round in the first special figure display part 37a and at least a part of the period of the game round in the second special figure display part 37b are configured to overlap. In other words, even when a game round is being executed on the first special figure display section 37a, a game round on the second special figure display section 37b can be started, and a game round is being executed on the second special figure display section 37b. A game round on the first special figure display section 37a can be started even while the game is being played.

When the validity determination process is executed for the first pending information, similarly to the first embodiment, the first validity table 121 at low probability is referred to in the low probability mode; For example, the validity table 123 at high probability is referred to. Further, when the validity determination process is executed for the second pending information, the second validity table 122 at the time of low probability is referred to in the low probability mode, and the second validity table 122 in the high probability mode is If so, the validity table 123 for high probability is referred to. In addition, when a jackpot result is selected in the judgment process for the first pending information, the jackpot allocation table 125 for the first special symbol is referred to and the jackpot allocation is made as in the first embodiment. When the minute determination process is executed and a time saving result is selected in the validity determination process for the first reservation information, the time saving distribution table 127 for the first special symbol is referred to, as in the first embodiment. Then, the time saving distribution determination process is executed. In addition, when a jackpot result is selected in the propriety determination process for the second pending information, the jackpot allocation table 126 for the second special symbol is referred to and the jackpot allocation is performed as in the first embodiment. When the minute determination process is executed and the time saving result is selected in the validity determination process for the second pending information, the time saving distribution table 128 for the second special symbol is referred to, as in the first embodiment. Then, the time saving distribution determination process is executed.

In this embodiment, as the special figure special electric line control process, a first special figure special electric line control process corresponding to the first reservation information and a second special figure special electric line control process corresponding to the second reservation information are set. These processes will be explained below.

FIG. 63 is a flowchart showing the first special figure special electric charge control process executed by the main side MPU 82, and FIG. 64 is a flowchart showing the second special figure special electric charge control process executed by the main side MPU 82. In addition, since the first special figure special electric charge control process and the second special figure special electric charge control process have similar processing configurations, explanation will be given for each corresponding processing configuration.

In the first special figure special electric train control process (FIG. 63), first, a first reservation information acquisition process is executed (step S3801). Moreover, in the second special figure special electric train control process (FIG. 64), first, the second reservation information acquisition process is executed (step S3901).

In the first reservation information acquisition process, when a prize has been won to the first operating port 33 and the number of first reservation information stored in the first special figure reservation area 111 is less than the upper limit storage number. , the first reservation information in the first area 111a to the fourth area 111d of the first special figure reservation area 111 is stored, with each value of the hit random number counter C1, type random number counter C2, and reach random number counter C3 as the first reservation information. It is stored in the area with the earliest digestion order among the areas that have not been used. In addition, when the first reservation information is acquired, data settings are made so that the display contents of the first special figure reservation display section 37c are updated in accordance with the increase in the number of pieces of the first reservation information. conduct. Moreover, a first hold command indicating that the first hold information has increased is transmitted to the audio-optical side MPU 93. The sound-light side MPU 93 transmits a command corresponding to the received first hold command to the display side MPU 103, thereby increasing the number of pieces of the first hold information displayed in the first hold display area 42a of the symbol display device 41. Change it accordingly.

In the second pending information acquisition process, if a winning has occurred in the special winning device 151 and the number of second pending information stored in the second special drawing holding area 112 is less than the upper limit storage number, Second reservation information in the first area 112a to fourth area 112d of the second special figure reservation area 112 is stored, with each value of the hit random number counter C1, type random number counter C2, and reach random number counter C3 as the second reservation information. It is stored in the area with the earliest digestion order among the areas where the data is not available. In addition, when the second reservation information is acquired, data settings are made so that the display contents of the second special figure reservation display section 37d are updated in accordance with the increase in the number of pieces of the second reservation information. conduct. Moreover, a second hold command indicating that the second hold information has increased is transmitted to the audio-optical side MPU 93. The sound-light side MPU 93 transmits a command corresponding to the received second hold command to the display side MPU 103, thereby increasing the number of pieces of second hold information displayed in the second hold display area 42b of the symbol display device 41. Change it accordingly.

In the first special figure special electric line control process (FIG. 63) and the second special figure special electric line control process (FIG. 64), after executing the reservation information acquisition process (step S3801 or step S3901), the information is stored in the main side ROM 83. The special figure/special electric train address table that is present is read out (step S3802, step S3902). The special figure special electric line address table includes the start of a program for executing the process corresponding to the numerical information of the first special figure special electric line counter provided in the main side RAM 84 and the second special figure special electric line counter provided in the main side RAM 84. Address is set. The first special figure special electric charge counter is a counter for specifying the processing content to be executed in the first special figure special electric control process (FIG. 63) by the main side MPU 82. The second special figure special electric line counter is a counter for specifying the processing content to be executed in the second special figure special electric control process (FIG. 64) by the main side MPU 82. The value of each special figure special electric line counter corresponds to the start address, and when the value of each special figure special electric line counter is "0", special figure fluctuation start processing (step S3805, step S3905) is executed, and each If the value of the special figure/special electric line counter is "1", the special figure changing process (step S3806, step S3906) is executed, and if the value of each special figure/special electric counter is "2", the special figure is confirmed. Medium processing (step S3807, step S3907) is executed, and if the value of each special figure special electric counter is "3", special electric charge start processing (step S3808, step S3908) is executed, and the value of each special figure special electric counter is is "4", the special train opening process (step S3809, step S3909) is executed, and when the value of each special map special train counter is "5", the special train closed process (step S3810, step S3910) is executed. ) is executed, and when the value of each special figure special electric line counter is "6", special electric line end processing (step S3811, step S3911) is executed.

In the first special figure special electric line control process (FIG. 63) and the second special figure special electric line control process (FIG. 64), after reading the special figure special electric line address table (step S3802, step S3902), the corresponding special figure special electric line counter The start address corresponding to the information is acquired from the special figure special electric line address table (step S3803, step S3903), and the process jumps to the process indicated by the acquired start address (step S3804, step S3904). Hereinafter, the special figure fluctuation start process (step S3805, step S3905), the special figure fluctuation process (step S3806, step S3906), and the special figure confirmation process (step S3807, step S3907) will be explained. Note that the special train start process (step S3808, step S3908), special train open process (step S3809, step S3909), and special train closed process (step S3810, step S3910) are the same as steps S609 to S611 in the first embodiment. are the same. In addition, the special electric power termination process (step S3811, step S3911) is performed when the main side RAM 84 is not provided with the high probability state counter 133 and the opening/closing execution mode triggered by the 5R high accuracy result or the 10R high accuracy result is terminated. The above-described special call termination process in the first embodiment is similar to that of the first embodiment, except that the high probability mode and the first high frequency support mode, which are the high probability states, are continued until the next game round that results in a jackpot. The same process as (FIG. 23) is executed.

<Special figure fluctuation start process>
First, the special symbol fluctuation start processing in steps S3805 and S3905 will be explained with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 65.

First, it is determined whether or not the process for the jackpot state is being executed on the side that does not correspond to the current special figure special electric control process (FIGS. 63 and 64) (step S4001). As already explained, in this embodiment, even if a game round is being executed in one of the first special figure display section 37a and the second special figure display section 37b, the game round can be executed in the other. In this case, step S4001 is executed, and if the process for the jackpot state is being executed on the side that does not correspond to the current special figure special electric control process (FIG. 63, FIG. 64), the process from step S4002 onwards is executed. The start of a new game round is regulated. As a result, in a situation where the opening/closing execution mode is being executed triggered by a game round on one of the first special figure display section 37a and the second special figure display section 37b, a new game round on the other side is not started. Regulated. Therefore, it is possible to increase the player's attention to the opening/closing execution mode. In addition, if this time is the special figure fluctuation start process in the first special figure special electric control process (FIG. 63), it is determined in step S4001 whether or not the value of the second special figure special electric line counter is 3 or more, and if the value is 3 or more. If this is the case, the process from step S4002 onwards is not executed, and if this is the special figure fluctuation start process in the second special figure special electric control process (FIG. 64), the value of the first special figure special electric counter is 3 or more. It is determined in step S4001 whether or not the number is 3, and if the number is 3 or more, the processing from step S4002 onwards is not executed.

If a negative determination is made in step S4001, it is determined whether the corresponding number of pending items is one or more (step S4002). If this time is the special figure fluctuation start process in the first special figure special electric control process (FIG. 63), it is determined whether or not one or more pieces of first reservation information are stored in the first special figure reservation area 111. If it is the special symbol fluctuation start process in the second special symbol special electric control process (FIG. 64), it is determined whether one or more pieces of second reservation information are stored in the second special symbol reservation area 112.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S4002, data setting processing is executed (step S4003). In the data setting process, if this is the first special figure special electric control process (FIG. 63), the data stored in the first area 111a of the first special figure holding area 111 is transferred to the execution area 192a for the first special figure. Moving. After that, a process of shifting the data stored in the storage area of the first special figure holding area 111 is executed. This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to fourth areas 111a to 111d to the lower area side, such as second area 111b → first area 111a, third area 111c → third area After the data in each area is shifted in the following order: 2 area 111b, 4th area 111d→3rd area 111c, the 4th area 111d is cleared to "0". In this case, the display content of the first special figure reservation display section 37c in the special figure unit 37 is changed to the content in which the first reservation information is decreased by one. In addition, in the data setting process, a command indicating that the first reservation information in the first special figure reservation area 111 has decreased by one is transmitted to the sound-light side MPU 93. The sound-light side MPU 93 changes the display of the number of first hold information in the first hold display area 42a of the symbol display device 41 to correspond to the decrease in the number of hold information by sending a command corresponding to the command to the display side MPU 103. change it.

In the data setting process, if this is the second special figure special electric control process (FIG. 64), the data stored in the first area 112a of the second special figure holding area 112 is transferred to the second special figure execution area 192b. Moving. Thereafter, a process of shifting the data stored in the storage area of the second special figure holding area 112 is executed. This data shift processing is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to fourth areas 112a to 112d to the lower area side, such as second area 112b → first area 112a, third area 112c → third area 112c → After the data in each area is shifted in this manner from the second area 112b and the fourth area 112d to the third area 112c, the fourth area 112d is cleared to "0". In this case, the display content of the second special figure reservation display section 37d in the special figure unit 37 is changed to the content in which the second reservation information is decreased by one. Further, in the data setting process, a command indicating that the second reservation information in the second special figure reservation area 112 has decreased by one is transmitted to the sound-light side MPU 93. The sound/light side MPU 93 sends a command corresponding to the command to the display side MPU 103, thereby changing the display of the number of second hold information in the second hold display area 42b of the symbol display device 41 to correspond to the decrease in the number of hold information. change it.

After the data setting process is executed, the game round is being executed on the side that does not correspond to the current special figure special electric control process (Figures 63 and 64), and the pending information that triggered the start of the game round is the jackpot result. (Step S4004). If a negative determination is made in step S4004, a validity determination process is executed (step S4005). In the win/fail determination process, if the win/fail lottery mode is a low probability mode and the starting target of the game round is the first pending information, the first win/fail table 121 for low probability is read from the main side ROM 83, and the win/fail lottery mode is set to a low probability mode. mode, and if the target for starting the game round is the second pending information, the second win/fail table 122 at low probability is read from the main side ROM 83, and if the winning/fail lottery mode is the high probability mode, the target for starting the game round is the second pending information. Regardless of whether the first hold information or the second hold information is high probability, the validity table 123 is read from the main side ROM 83. After reading out the winning/failure table, the winning/failure determination table is calculated based on the pending information stored in the execution area 192a for the first special symbol and the execution area 192b for the second special symbol, which is the start target of the current game round. That is, the numerical information obtained from the winning random number counter C1 is read out, and it is determined which game result in the win/fail table the read numerical information corresponds to.

When the result of the success/failure determination process is a jackpot result (step S4006: YES), a distribution determination process for jackpot is executed (step S4007). In the jackpot distribution determination process, if the starting target of the game round is the first pending information, the jackpot distribution table 125 for the first special symbol is read from the main side ROM 83, and the starting target of the gaming round is the second pending information. If so, the jackpot distribution table 126 for the second special symbol is read out. Then, information for distribution determination, that is, type random number By reading the numerical information acquired from the counter C2 and referring to the distribution table, it is specified to which type of jackpot result the read numerical information corresponds.

After executing the distribution determination process for the jackpot, "1" is set to the flag in the main side RAM 84 corresponding to the type of jackpot result specified in the distribution determination process (step S4008). Thereafter, a stop result setting process for jackpot results is executed (step S4009). Specifically, information on the stopping mode of the symbols to be finally stopped and displayed on the special figure display sections 37a and 37b, which are the starting targets for the current game round, is stored in the main side ROM 83 in advance for jackpot results. It is specified from the result table, and the specified information is stored in the main side RAM 84. In this stop result table for jackpot results, the types of stop modes of the symbols that are stopped and displayed on the first special figure display section 37a or the second special figure display section 37b are set differently for each type of jackpot result. In step S4009, information on the pattern stopping mode corresponding to the type of jackpot result specified in step S4008 is stored in the main side RAM 84. Note that the pattern stopping manner may be set in one-to-one correspondence with each jackpot result, or a plurality of types of pattern stopping modes may be set for at least some of the jackpot results.

If the result of the validity judgment process is a time saving result (step S4010: YES), a time saving allocation judgment process is executed (step S4011). In the time saving distribution determination process, if the starting target of the game round is the first pending information, the time saving distribution table 127 for the first special symbol is read from the main side ROM 83, and the starting target of the gaming round is the second pending information. If so, the time saving allocation table 128 for the second special figure is read out. Then, information for distribution determination, that is, type random number By reading the numerical information acquired from the counter C2 and referring to the distribution table, it is specified to which type of time saving result the read numerical information corresponds.

After executing the time saving distribution determination process, a flag in the main RAM 84 corresponding to the type of time saving result specified in the distribution determination process is set to "1" (step S4012). Thereafter, a stop result setting process for time saving results is executed (step S4013). Specifically, information on the stop mode of the symbols to be finally stopped and displayed on the special figure display sections 37a and 37b, which are the starting targets for the current game round, is stored in advance in the main side ROM 83 as a stop for time-saving results. It is specified from the result table, and the specified information is stored in the main side RAM 84. In this stop result table for time-saving results, the types of stop modes of the patterns that are stopped and displayed on the first special figure display section 37a or the second special figure display section 37b are set differently for each type of time-saving result. In step S4013, information on the stop mode of the pattern corresponding to the type of time saving result specified in step S4012 is stored in the main side RAM 84. Note that the pattern stopping mode may be set in one-to-one correspondence with each time saving result, or a plurality of types of pattern stopping modes may be set for at least some of the time saving results. The information on the pattern mode selected in step S4013 is different from the information on the pattern mode selected in the case of a jackpot result.

If the result of the success/failure determination process is neither a jackpot result nor a time saving result (step S4010: NO), a stop result setting process for a miss result is executed (step S4014). Specifically, information on the mode of the picture to be finally stopped and displayed on the first special figure display section 37a or the second special figure display section 37b in the current game round is stored in advance in the main side ROM 83 as a winning result. The specified information is stored in the main side RAM 84. The information on the pattern mode selected in this case is different from the information on the pattern mode selected in the case of a jackpot result and the information on the pattern mode selected in the case of a time saving result, and furthermore, the information on the pattern mode selected in the case of a jackpot result is different from the information on the pattern mode selected in the case of a time saving result. One type is common to the figure display section 37a and the second special figure display section 37b.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S4004, that is, the game round is being executed on the side that does not correspond to the current special figure special electric control process (FIGS. 63 and 64), and the hold that triggered the start of the game round If the information corresponds to the jackpot result, the already explained stop result setting process for the miss result is executed without executing the win/fail determination process (step S4014). In other words, this pachinko machine 10 has a configuration in which even if a game round is being executed on one of the first special figure display section 37a and the second special figure display section 37b, a game session can be started on the other. However, if the pending information that triggered the start of the game that has already been executed corresponds to any jackpot result, the pending information that triggered the start of the newly executed gaming session will be Regardless of whether or not it corresponds to a jackpot result, the game round corresponds to a losing result. This makes it possible to prevent the game rounds corresponding to jackpot results from being executed overlappingly. In addition, in the case of a configuration that prevents the start of a new game round if the game round corresponding to the jackpot result has already been executed, even if pending information for the start of the game round has been acquired, Regardless, there is a risk that it will become clear that the currently executed game session is the game session that corresponds to the jackpot result before a new game session starts, but if the game session that corresponds to the jackpot result has already been executed. By configuring the system so that a new game round can be started even in the case where the player has already played the game, it is possible to prevent such an event from occurring.

When the process of step S4009, the process of step S4013, or the process of step S4014 is executed, the value of the time-saving state counter 134 of the main side RAM 84 is set to 1 or more (step S4015: YES). The value is subtracted by 1 (step S4016). If the value of the time saving state counter 134 after the 1 subtraction is "0" (step S4017: YES), the current special time saving end flag and the second time saving end flag provided in the main side RAM 84 are The time saving end flag corresponding to the special electric power control process (FIGS. 63 and 64) is set to "1" (step S4018). The first time saving end flag is a flag used by the main MPU 82 to specify that the time saving state should be ended and the normal gaming state should be entered when the game round on the first special figure display section 37a is finished. be. The second time saving end flag is a flag used by the main MPU 82 to specify that the time saving state should be ended and the normal gaming state should be entered when the game round on the second special figure display section 37b has ended. be.

If a negative determination is made in step S4015, if a negative determination is made in step S4017, or if the process in step S4018 is executed, a process for identifying a variable display period is executed (step S4019). The process for specifying the variable display period will be explained later. Thereafter, a variation command and a type command corresponding to the game round to be started this time are transmitted to the sound-light side MPU 93 (step S4020). The variation command includes information on the variation display period specified in step S4019, and also indicates which of the first special figure display section 37a and second special figure display section 37b the game round to be started is. Contains information indicating whether it is compatible. The type command includes information indicating whether the game round to be started this time corresponds to a jackpot result, a time-saving result, or a miss result, and if it corresponds to a jackpot result. contains information indicating which type of jackpot result it is, and if it corresponds to a time saving result, information indicating which type of time saving result it is.

In the low-frequency support mode, the sound-light side MPU 93 changes the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 of the symbol display device 41 when it receives a variation command and a type command indicating that the first pending information is targeted for the start of a game round. starts the fluctuating display of the symbol, and causes the display light emitting unit 64 and speaker unit 65 to perform a performance corresponding to the fluctuating display of the symbol, while indicating that the second pending information is the target for the start of the game round. Even if a variation command and a type command are received, the variation display of the symbols in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 of the symbol display device 41 and the corresponding performance in the display light emitting section 64 and speaker section 65 are not executed. Therefore, when a game round triggered by the first reservation information is executed in the low-frequency support mode, the first special symbol display section 37a displays the symbols in a variable manner, and the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 of the symbol display device 41 On the other hand, when a game round triggered by the second hold information is executed in the low-frequency support mode, the symbols are displayed fluctuating on the second special symbol display section 37b. On the other hand, in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 of the symbol display device 41, the variable display of symbols is not performed.

In addition, a small display area is set on the outer edge side of the display surface of the symbol display device 41, and when a game round triggered by the second reservation information is being executed in the low-frequency support mode, in the display area. A configuration may also be adopted in which a blinking display or a color switching display is performed. In addition, in the low-frequency support mode, if a jackpot result occurs in a game round triggered by the second hold information, an effect will be displayed to notify the occurrence of the jackpot result on the symbol display device 41 at the timing when the game round ends. When a time-saving result occurs in a game round triggered by the second hold information in the low-frequency support mode, the symbol display device 41 announces the occurrence of the time-saving result at the timing when the game round ends. will be held.

In the first high-frequency support mode or the second high-frequency support mode, the sound-light side MPU 93 displays a symbol when receiving a variation command and a type command indicating that the second pending information is targeted for the start of a game round. The variable display of the symbols in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 of the display device 41 is started, and the display light emitting section 64 and the speaker section 65 perform effects corresponding to the variable display of the symbols. Even if a variation command and a type command indicating that the symbol is to be started are received, the variation display of the symbols in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 of the symbol display device 41 and the corresponding effects on the display light emitting section 64 and the speaker section 65 will not be performed. Don't let it run. Therefore, when a game round triggered by the first reservation information is executed in the first high-frequency support mode or the second high-frequency support mode, while the symbols are displayed in a variable manner on the first special figure display section 37a, In the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 of the symbol display device 41, symbols are not displayed in a variable manner, whereas in the first high-frequency support mode or the second high-frequency support mode, the game cycle triggered by the second reservation information is When executed, the symbols are displayed in a variable manner on the second special symbol display section 37b, and the symbols are displayed on the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 of the symbol display device 41 in a variable manner.

In addition, a small display area is set on the outer edge side of the display surface of the symbol display device 41, and a game round triggered by the first reservation information is executed in the first high-frequency support mode or the second high-frequency support mode. If there is a display area, a blinking display or a color switching display may be performed in the display area. In addition, in the first high-frequency support mode or the second high-frequency support mode, if a jackpot result occurs in the game round triggered by the first reservation information, the symbol display device 41 will display the winning result at the timing when the game round ends. An effect is performed to announce the occurrence of a jackpot result, and if a time-saving result occurs in a game session triggered by the first pending information in the first high-frequency support mode or the second high-frequency support mode, the game session concerned is At the timing when the process ends, an effect is performed on the symbol display device 41 to notify the occurrence of the time saving result.

Thereafter, the variable display of the symbols is started on the display section that is the target of the start of the current game round among the first special symbol display section 37a and the second special symbol display section 37b (step S4021). Also, if the current process corresponds to the first special figure special electric line control process (Figure 63), the value of the first special figure special electric line counter is incremented by 1, and the current process corresponds to the second special figure special electric line control process (Fig. 63). If it corresponds to FIG. 64), 1 is added to the value of the second special figure special electric counter (step S4022).

FIG. 66 is a flowchart illustrating the variable display period specifying process executed in step S4019.

If both the first high frequency flag and the second high frequency flag in the main side RAM 84 are not set to "1" (step S4101: NO), that is, if the support mode is the low frequency support mode, the current game round It is determined whether the start target is the first pending information (step S4102). If the start target of the current game round is the first pending information (step S4102: YES), the table group for the normal variable period is read from the main side ROM 83 to the main side RAM 84 (step S4103). Then, a process for selecting a variable display period is executed using the table group for the normal variable period (step S4104), and information on the variable display period selected in the selection process is stored in the first memory provided in the main side RAM 84. Set in the special figure side timer counter (step S4105). The update of the numerical information set in the first special figure side timer counter is executed in the timer update process of step S210 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14).

In a situation where the selection process of the variable display period in step S4104 is executed with reference to the table group for the normal variable period, if a jackpot result occurs in the current game round, or if the result of the validity judgment process is a miss result. At the same time, the numerical information corresponding to the reach random number counter C3 in the pending information that is the target of execution corresponds to the occurrence of the out-of-reach display, and if the out-of-reach display occurs in the current game round, the fluctuation type counter at that time Information on the variable display period of the reach display mode is read by comparing the numerical information of the CS with the table corresponding to the reach in the table group for the normal variable period.

If a time-saving result occurs in the current game round, by comparing the numerical information of the fluctuation type counter CS at that time against the table corresponding to the time-saving result in the table group for the normal fluctuation period, the fluctuation corresponding to the time-saving result is displayed. Read period information. Multiple types of variable display period information for time-saving results are set, and whichever variable display period for time-saving results is longer than the minimum period on the special map side, it corresponds to the occurrence of reach display. The period is shorter than the variable display period. Specifically, 10 seconds, 11 seconds, 12 seconds, and 13 seconds are set as the fluctuation display periods for time-saving results, and among these, the period corresponding to the value of the acquired fluctuation type counter CS is the period for this game. selected as the variable display period.

If a jackpot result or a time-saving result does not occur in this game round, and no out-of-reach display occurs, the game starts in a situation where three or more pieces of first hold information are stored in the first special figure hold area 111. If it is a game time that has been played, the information of the shortest period (specifically, 3 seconds) on the special figure side is read out as the variable display period of the current game time. Thereby, in the low-frequency support mode, it is possible to increase the efficiency of playing games triggered by the first reservation information.

On the other hand, in the case where no jackpot result or time-saving result occurs in this game round, and no out-of-reach display occurs, the first reservation information is the execution target of the game round, and there is one or more in the first special figure reservation area 111. If the game is started in a situation in which two pieces of first pending information are stored, the numerical information of the fluctuation type counter CS at that time is compared to the table corresponding to completely out-of-order results in the table group for the normal fluctuation period. By comparing the results, information on the fluctuation display period corresponding to the completely off result is read out. Multiple types of information are set for the variable display period for completely off results, and any one of the variable display periods for completely off results is longer than the shortest period on the special drawing side, and the variable display period for time-saving results is longer. The period is shorter than the variable display period corresponding to the occurrence of reach display. Specifically, 5 seconds, 6 seconds, 7 seconds, and 8 seconds are set as the fluctuation display periods corresponding to completely off results, and among these, the period corresponding to the obtained value of the fluctuation type counter CS is the current period. Selected as the variable display period of game times.

If it is the low frequency support mode (step S4101: NO) and the start target of the current game round is the second pending information (step S4102: NO), a special figure is set as the variable display period of the current game round. Information on the longest period (specifically 10 minutes) on the side is set in the second special figure side timer counter provided in the main side RAM 84 (step S4106). The update of the numerical information set in the second special figure side timer counter is executed in the timer update process of step S210 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14).

As mentioned above, in the low-frequency support mode, if the first pending information is the target for the start of a game session, the variable display period of the game session is selected by referring to the table group for the normal variable period. , if the second pending information is the target for starting a game round, the longest period on the special drawing side (specifically 10 minutes) is selected as the variable display period of the game round, regardless of the game result of the game round. . The longest period on the special figure side is usually longer than any variable display period selected by referring to the table group for variable periods. Therefore, in the low frequency support mode, the player plays the game by operating the firing operation device 28 so that the game ball flows down the left area PA2.

If either the first high-frequency flag or the second high-frequency flag of the main side RAM 84 is set to "1" (step S4101: YES), that is, the support mode is the first high-frequency support mode or the second high-frequency support mode. If it is the support mode, it is determined whether the start target of the current game round is the first pending information (step S4107). If the start target of this game round is the first pending information (step S4107: YES), the long-term information (specifically, 2 minutes) on the special drawing side is used as the variable display period of this game round. It is set in the first special figure side timer counter of the side RAM 84 (step S4108).

If the mode is the first high-frequency support mode or the second high-frequency support mode (step S4101: YES), and the start target of the current game round is the second pending information (step S4107: NO), the short-term The table group for variation is read from the main side ROM 83 to the main side RAM 84 (step S4109). Then, a process for selecting a variable display period is executed using the table group for short-term changes (step S4110), and information on the variable display period selected in the selection process is transferred to the second special figure side of the main side RAM 84. The timer counter is set (step S4111).

In a situation where the selection process of the variable display period in step S4110 is executed with reference to the table group for short-term variations, if a jackpot result occurs in the current game round, or if the result of the validity judgment process is a miss result. At the same time, the numerical information corresponding to the reach random number counter C3 in the pending information that is the target of execution corresponds to the occurrence of the out-of-reach display, and if the out-of-reach display occurs in the current game round, the fluctuation type counter at that time Information on the variable display period of the reach display mode is read by comparing the numerical information of the CS with the table corresponding to the reach in the table group for short-term changes.

If a jackpot result does not occur in this game round and no out-of-reach display also occurs, the game is started in a situation where two or more pieces of second hold information are stored in the second special figure hold area 112. If it is, the information of the shortest period (specifically, 3 seconds) on the special figure side is read out as the variable display period of the current game time. This makes it possible to increase the efficiency of playing games triggered by the second reservation information in the first high-frequency support mode or the second high-frequency support mode. In addition, even if a time-saving result occurs in the current game round, if the game round is started in a situation where two or more pieces of second reservation information are stored in the second special figure reservation area 112, Read out the information for the shortest period (specifically 3 seconds) on the special figure side.

On the other hand, in the case where a jackpot result does not occur in this game round and no out-of-reach display occurs, a game round is started in a situation where one piece of second hold information is stored in the second special figure hold area 112. If so, the information of the middle period (specifically, 10 seconds) on the special figure side is read out as the variable display period of the current game round. This makes it possible to ensure that the second pending information is acquired in the first high-frequency support mode or the second high-frequency support mode. In addition, even if a time-saving result occurs in the current game round, if the game round is started in a situation where one piece of second reservation information is stored in the second special figure reservation area 112, the special Information for an intermediate period (specifically, 10 seconds) on the diagram side is read.

As described above, in the first high-frequency support mode or the second high-frequency support mode, if the second pending information is the target for starting a gaming session, the fluctuation of the gaming session is displayed by referring to the table group for short-term fluctuations. While the period is selected, if the first hold information is the start target of the game round, the long period (specifically 2 minutes) on the special drawing side is the game regardless of the game result of the game round. selected as the variable display period. The long period of time on the special figure side is longer than the shortest period (specifically, 3 seconds) of the special figure side selected in the winning game game where the reach display triggered by the second hold information does not occur. be. Therefore, in the first high-frequency support mode or the second high-frequency support mode, the player plays the game by operating the firing operation device 28 so that the game ball flows down the right area PA3.

<Processing during special figure fluctuation>
Next, the special figure fluctuation processing executed in step S3806 of the first special figure special electric line control process (FIG. 63) and step S3906 of the second special figure special electric line control process (FIG. 64) will be described.

If the variable display period for the current game round on the special figure display sections 37a, 37b to be controlled has not elapsed, and it is time to update the display contents of the special figure display sections 37a, 37b, the special figure Data settings are performed to update the display contents of the display sections 37a and 37b. As a result, the display contents of the pictures in the special figure display sections 37a and 37b to be controlled are updated to the display contents of the next order.

The manner in which the fluctuation display of the symbols in the special figure display sections 37a and 37b starts and the manner in which the fluctuation display of the symbols is updated are performed in a constant manner regardless of the results of the validity determination process and the results of the distribution determination process. , is performed in a fixed manner regardless of the content of the game replay on the symbol display device 41. For example, when a predetermined update timing occurs a plurality of times, the display contents of the picture complete one cycle and a display pattern in which the display order is a fixed order is repeatedly performed, and when a variable display period has elapsed, the display pattern No matter which order of display is performed, the stop result determined at the start of the game round is displayed. This makes it possible to simplify the processing configuration for controlling the display of the special figure display sections 37a and 37b.

On the other hand, if the variable display period has elapsed, a final stop command is sent to the audio-light MPU 93. The final stop command includes information corresponding to the side on which the variable display period has passed among the first special figure display section 37a and the second special figure display section 37b. Thereafter, the information on the stop mode of the symbols on the special figure display sections 37a and 37b, which was stored in the main side RAM 84 at the start of the game round to be ended this time, is read out. As a result, the variable display of the symbols is stopped in a state where the symbols corresponding to the game results of the current game round are displayed on the special symbol display sections 37a and 37b to be controlled.

Thereafter, information on the final stop period (specifically, 0.5 sec) is set in the timer counters corresponding to the special figure display sections 37a and 37b to be controlled. As a result, measurement of the final stop period is started. After that, if the current process corresponds to the first special figure special electric line control process (Figure 63), the value of the first special figure special electric line counter is incremented by 1, and the current process corresponds to the second special figure special electric line control process (Figure 63). If it corresponds to FIG. 64), 1 is added to the value of the second special figure special electric counter.

<Special drawing confirmation process>
Next, please refer to the flowchart of FIG. 67 regarding the special symbol confirmation process executed in step S3807 of the first special symbol special electric vehicle control process (FIG. 63) and step S3907 of the second special symbol special electric vehicle control process (FIG. 64). I will explain while doing so.

If the final stop period has passed (step S4201: YES) and the game result of the current game round is a jackpot result (step S4202: YES), the current special figure special electric control process (FIG. 63, By determining whether or not the value of the special figure special electric line counter on the side that does not correspond to (Fig. 64) is "0," the special figure on the side that does not correspond to the current special figure special electric control process (Figs. It is determined on the display units 37a and 37b whether or not a game round is being executed (step S4203). If the value of the special figure special electric line counter on the side that does not correspond to the current special figure special electric line control process (FIGS. 63, 64) is not "0" (step S4203: NO), the current special figure special electric line control process (FIGS. The variable display of the symbols in the special figure display sections 37a and 37b on the side not corresponding to FIG. 64) is ended with the missed result being stopped and displayed (step S4204). Then, the special figure special electric line counter on the side that does not correspond to the current special figure special electric line control process (FIGS. 63 and 64) is cleared to "0" (step S4205). As a result, in a situation where the fluctuating display of symbols is being executed on both the first special symbol display section 37a and the second special symbol display section 37b, the fluctuating display of one symbol stops, resulting in a jackpot, and the opening/closing execution mode is switched off. If this occurs, the fluctuating display of the other symbol is forcibly terminated with the miss result being stopped and displayed.

If a negative determination is made in step S4203 or if the process in step S4205 is executed, the information corresponding to the opening period (specifically, 5 seconds) corresponds to the current special map special electric train control process (FIGS. 63 and 64). The opening command is set in the timer counter on the side to be played (step S4206), and an opening command is sent to the audio-light side MPU 93 (step S4207). When the sound and light side MPU 93 receives the opening command, it causes the symbol display device 41, the display light emitting section 64, and the speaker section 65 to perform a performance corresponding to the opening period.

Thereafter, information of 500 fixed ceiling times is set in the ceiling counter 131 of the main side RAM 84 (step S4208). That is, when the game round corresponding to the jackpot result ends and the opening/closing execution mode is started, information of 500 times, which is the fixed ceiling number, is set in the ceiling counter 131. In the case of a configuration in which the fixed ceiling count is set to the ceiling counter 131 not when the opening/closing execution mode is started but during the opening/closing execution mode or when the opening/closing execution mode ends, the operation is performed after the opening/closing execution mode is started. If a fraudulent act is committed that causes the power supply to be stopped and the setting value update process (step S117) or RAM clearing process (step S119) to be executed when the operating power supply is resumed, the setting value update process (step S119) is performed. In step S117) or the RAM clearing process (step S119), the information indicating that the opening/closing execution mode is in progress is cleared as described above, but the value of the ceiling counter 131 is maintained, so the operating power is supplied. There is a risk that the game will be restarted in a situation where there are only a few remaining ceilings, while still enjoying the benefits of the opening/closing execution mode until the game is stopped. On the other hand, when the opening/closing execution mode is started, information of 500 times, which is the fixed ceiling number, is set in the ceiling counter 131, thereby making it possible to neutralize the above-mentioned fraudulent acts.

After that, if the current process corresponds to the first special figure special electric line control process (Figure 63), the value of the first special figure special electric line counter is incremented by 1, and the current process corresponds to the second special figure special electric line control process (Figure 63). 64), the value of the second special figure special electric counter is incremented by 1 (step S4209).

If the game result of the current game round is not a jackpot result (step S4202: NO), a time saving state end determination process is executed in step S4210, a setting process for time saving result is executed in step S4211, and step S4212 The subtraction process of the ceiling counter 131 is executed. After that, if the current process corresponds to the first special figure special electric line control process (Figure 63), the first special figure special electric line counter is cleared to "0", and the current process corresponds to the second special figure special electric line control process (Fig. 63). If it corresponds to FIG. 64), the second special figure special electric counter is cleared to "0" (step S4213).

FIG. 68 is a flowchart showing the end determination process of the time saving state executed in step S4210 of the special figure confirmation process (FIG. 67).

First, it is determined whether or not "1" is set in the time saving end flag corresponding to the current special figure special electric control process (FIGS. 63 and 64) in the main side RAM 84 (step S4301). In other words, if the current process corresponds to the first special figure special electric control process (FIG. 63), it is determined whether the first time saving end flag in the main side RAM 84 is set to "1", and the current process is performed. If the process corresponds to the second special figure special electric control process (FIG. 64), it is determined whether the second time saving end flag in the main side RAM 84 is set to "1".

When an affirmative determination is made in step S4301, the time saving end flag corresponding to the current special map special electric train control process (FIGS. 63 and 64) is cleared to "0" (step S4302). Thereafter, both the first high frequency flag and the second high frequency flag in the main side RAM 84 are cleared to "0" (step S4303). As a result, the time saving state ends and the normal gaming state returns.

A game round on the second special figure display section 37b can be started even while a game round is being executed on the first special figure display section 37a, and a game time is being executed on the second special figure display section 37b. In the configuration where the game round on the first special figure display section 37a can be started even when the player is in the middle of the game, the time saving state is set when the game round corresponding to the end that was started in the situation where the remaining number of continuations is one ends. finish. In this case, even if a game session started after the game session corresponding to the end ends before the game session corresponding to the end, the time saving state continues and ends when the game session corresponding to the end ends. . On the other hand, in the time-saving state (i.e., the first high-frequency support mode or the second high-frequency support mode), if the game is played using the second pending information, the game is played by referring to the table group for short-term fluctuations. While the variable display period of the game is selected, the long period (specifically, 2 minutes) on the special figure side is uniquely selected in the game game where the first reservation information is the execution target. Then, in the time saving state, by operating the launch operation device 28 so that the game ball flows down the right side area PA3, the game round with the second pending information as the execution target is repeatedly executed, and the time saving state By operating the firing operation device 28 so that the game ball flows down the left area PA2, so that the first pending information becomes the target of execution of the game time when the remaining number of times of continuation is 1, It becomes possible to make the game round corresponding to the end in the time saving state the game round for which the first pending information is to be executed. Then, since the game round corresponding to the end is started with the first pending information as the execution target, the game round corresponding to the end is executed for a long period of time (specifically, 2 minutes) on the special drawing side, While the game round corresponding to the end is being executed, the firing operation device 28 is operated so that the game ball flows down the right side area PA3, so that the game round with the second pending information as the execution target is repeatedly executed. By doing so, it becomes possible to substantially increase the number of times the time saving state continues.

FIG. 69 is a flowchart showing the setting process for time-saving results executed in step S4211 of the special figure confirmation process (FIG. 67).

If the game result of the current game round is a time saving result (step S4401: YES), it is determined whether the high probability flag in the main side RAM 84 is set to "1" (step S4402). If the high probability flag is set to "1" (step S4402: YES), the time saving result setting process is ended without executing the process from step S4403 onward. In other words, even if a time-saving result (first time-saving result or second time-saving result) is selected in the validity judgment process of a game run executed in a high-probability mode, the second high-frequency support is triggered by the time-saving result. Time-saving results are disabled without setting the mode.

If the high probability flag is not set to "1" (step S4402: NO), it is determined whether the first high frequency flag of the main side RAM 84 is set to "1" (step S4403). That is, it is determined whether the support mode is the first high-frequency support mode. If the support mode is not the first high-frequency support mode (step S4403: NO), the second high-frequency flag of the main side RAM 84 is set to "1" (step S4404), and the support mode is the first high-frequency support mode. If yes (step S4403: YES), the process of step S4404 is not executed. As a result, when the low probability mode and the first high frequency support mode result in a time saving result, the low probability mode and the first high frequency support mode are maintained, and the time saving result occurs in the low probability mode and the second high frequency support mode. If this happens, the low probability mode and the second high frequency support mode are maintained, and if the low probability mode and the low frequency support mode result in a time saving result, the low probability mode and the second high frequency support mode are used.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S4403 or if the process in step S4404 is executed, it is determined whether the current time saving result is the first time saving result (step S4405). If the current time saving result is the first time saving result (step S4405: YES), it is determined whether the value of the time saving state counter 134 in the main side RAM 84 is equal to or greater than "100" corresponding to the first time saving continuation number. (Step S4406). When the value of the time saving state counter 134 is less than the value of the first time saving continuation number (step S4406: NO), information of "100" corresponding to the first time saving continuation number is set in the time saving state counter 134 (step S4407) .

Thereafter, a process for transmitting a status designation command is executed (step S4408). In the transmission process, a state designation command indicating that the time saving state has started or that the first time saving continuation number has been reset is transmitted to the sound-light side MPU 93.

If the process of step S4408 is executed after the process of step S4407 is executed in a situation where the current gaming state is not a time-saving state, the state designation command indicates that the time-saving state of the first time-saving continuation number is to be started. Contains information. When the sound and light side MPU 93 receives the state specifying command, it causes the symbol display device 41, the display light emitting section 64, and the speaker section 65 to execute an effect indicating that the time saving state of the first time saving continuation number is started. Execute processing to make it. In this case, in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 on the symbol display device 41, the first time-saving symbol combination (“1, 2, 3”) is stopped and displayed. After these stop results are stopped and displayed, the symbol display device 41 displays an image indicating that a time saving state occurs and an image indicating the number of times the first time saving continues. Since the timing at which the image is displayed is the timing at which the game round ends, a new game round can be started immediately. In this case, the area where the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are set on the display surface of the symbol display device 41 is reduced, and while the symbols corresponding to the new game round are displayed in a variable manner in the reduced area, The display continues to display an image indicating that a time saving state occurs in the secured area and an image indicating the number of times the first time saving continues. The display of the image ends when one game round ends, and when the display of the image ends, the area where the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are set returns to its original size.

If the process of step S4408 is executed after the process of step S4407 is executed in a situation where the current gaming state is the time saving state, the state designation command indicates that the first time saving continuation number has been reset. Contains information. When the sound and light side MPU 93 receives the state specifying command, the symbol display device 41, the display light emitting section 64, and the speaker section 65 execute an effect indicating that the first time saving continuation number has been reset. Execute processing to make it. In this case, in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 on the symbol display device 41, the symbol combination corresponding to the jackpot result, the first time-saving symbol combination (“1, 2, 3”), and the second time-saving symbol combination (“3”) are displayed.・4.1'') and combinations of non-reach out symbols that are combinations other than the combination of out-of-reach symbols are stopped and displayed. After the stop result is stopped and displayed and the final stop period ends, an image showing that the number of time saving continuations in the time saving state has actually been reset and an image showing the first number of time saving continuations are displayed. Is displayed. Since the timing at which the image is displayed is the timing at which the game round ends, a new game round can be started immediately. In this case, the area where the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are set on the display surface of the symbol display device 41 is reduced, and while the symbols corresponding to the new game round are displayed in a variable manner in the reduced area, In the secured area, an image indicating that the number of continuations of time saving in the time saving state has been reset and an image indicating the reset number of first time saving continuations are continued to be displayed. The display of the image ends when one game round ends, and when the display of the image ends, the area where the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are set returns to its original size.

If the current time saving result is the second time saving result (step S4405: NO), regardless of the current value of the time saving state counter 134, information of "150" corresponding to the number of times the second time saving continues is stored in the time saving state counter 134. Set (step S4409). Thereafter, a process for transmitting a status designation command is executed (step S4410). In the transmission process, a state designation command indicating that the time saving state has started or that the second time saving continuation count has been reset is transmitted to the sound/light side MPU 93.

If the process of step S4410 is executed after the process of step S4409 is executed in a situation where the current gaming state is not a time-saving state, the state designation command indicates that the time-saving state of the second time-saving continuation number is to be started. Contains information. When the sound and light side MPU 93 receives the state designation command, it causes the symbol display device 41, the display light emitting section 64, and the speaker section 65 to execute an effect indicating that the time saving state of the second time saving continuation number is started. Execute processing to make it. In this case, in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 on the symbol display device 41, the second time-saving symbol combination (“3, 4, 1”) is stopped and displayed. After these stop results are stopped and displayed, the symbol display device 41 displays an image indicating that a time saving state occurs and an image indicating the number of times the second time saving continues. Since the timing at which the image is displayed is the timing at which the game round ends, a new game round can be started immediately. In this case, the area where the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are set on the display surface of the symbol display device 41 is reduced, and while the symbols corresponding to the new game round are displayed in a variable manner in the reduced area, The image indicating that the time saving state occurs in the secured area and the image indicating the number of continuations of the second time saving are continued to be displayed. The display of the image ends when one game round ends, and when the display of the image ends, the area where the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are set returns to its original size.

If the process of step S4410 is executed after the process of step S4409 is executed in a situation where the current gaming state is the time saving state, the state designation command indicates that the second time saving continuation number has been reset. Contains information. When the sound and light side MPU 93 receives the state specifying command, the symbol display device 41, the display light emitting section 64, and the speaker section 65 execute an effect indicating that the second time saving continuation number has been reset. Execute processing to make it. In this case, in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 on the symbol display device 41, the symbol combination corresponding to the jackpot result, the first time-saving symbol combination (“1, 2, 3”), and the second time-saving symbol combination (“3”) are displayed.・4.1'') and combinations of non-reach out symbols that are combinations other than the combination of out-of-reach symbols are stopped and displayed. Then, after the stop result is stopped and displayed and the confirmation display for the final stop period ends, an image showing that the number of continuations of time saving in the time saving state has been reset and an image showing the number of times of second time saving continuation are actually displayed. Is displayed. Since the timing at which the image is displayed is the timing at which the game round ends, a new game round can be started immediately. In this case, the area where the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are set on the display surface of the symbol display device 41 is reduced, and while the symbols corresponding to the new game round are displayed in a variable manner in the reduced area, In the secured area, an image indicating that the number of time saving continuations in the time saving state has been reset and an image showing the reset number of second time saving continuations are continued to be displayed. The display of the image ends when one game round ends, and when the display of the image ends, the area where the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are set returns to its original size.

When the process of step S4408 or the process of step S4410 is executed, each of the first time saving end flag and the second time saving end flag provided in the main side RAM 84 is cleared to "0" (step S4411). As a result, while the game round corresponding to the end in the time saving state is being executed for a long period of time (specifically, 2 minutes) on the special drawing side with the first pending information as the execution target, the second pending information is the execution target. If a time saving result occurs in the game round, the remaining number of continuations of the time saving state is extended. Therefore, it is possible to increase the advantage of executing the game round corresponding to the end in the time saving state with the first pending information as the execution target.

With the above configuration, when a time saving result occurs in the low probability mode and the low frequency support mode, a transition is made to the time saving state with the number of time saving continuations corresponding to the type of the time saving result. Thereby, it is possible to create a situation in which a transition to the time saving state occurs without going through the opening/closing execution mode based on the result of the propriety determination process in the low probability mode and the low frequency support mode.

When the first time saving result occurs in the low probability mode and the first high frequency support mode, the value of the time saving state counter 134 is reset to 100 times, which is the first time saving continuation number, and then the low probability mode and the first high frequency support mode occur. Frequency support mode continues. In addition, when the second time saving result occurs in the low probability mode and the first high frequency support mode, the value of the time saving state counter 134 is set to 150 times, which is the second time saving continuation number, and the second time saving result occurs in the low probability mode and the first high frequency support mode. High-frequency support mode continues. As a result, when a time-saving result occurs in the first high-frequency support mode, the first high-frequency support mode, in which the second operating port 34 is more likely to be opened than in the second high-frequency support mode, is continued, and until then, A situation occurs where the remaining number of continuations of the time-saving state is greater than the number of times the time-saving state continues. Therefore, it is possible to increase the advantage of producing a time-saving result in a time-saving state.

When the first time-saving result occurs in the low probability mode and the second high-frequency support mode, if the value of the time-saving state counter 134 is 100 times or more, which is the first time-saving continuation number, due to the occurrence of the current first time-saving result. The low probability mode and the second high frequency support mode continue without new settings regarding the time saving state being performed. Further, when the first time saving result occurs in the low probability mode and the second high frequency support mode, if the value of the time saving state counter 134 is less than 100 times which is the first time saving continuation number, the value of the time saving state counter 134 is The low probability mode and the second high frequency support mode continue with the first time saving continuation number set to 100 times. In addition, when the second time saving result occurs in the low probability mode and the second high frequency support mode, the value of the time saving state counter 134 is set to 150 times, which is the second time saving continuation number, and the second time saving result occurs in the low probability mode and the second high frequency support mode. High-frequency support mode continues. As a result, if a time-saving result occurs in the second high-frequency support mode, a situation may occur in which the remaining number of continuations of the time-saving state is greater than before, while continuing the second high-frequency support mode. . Therefore, it is possible to increase the advantage of producing a time-saving result in a time-saving state.

When a time saving result occurs in a time saving state, the remaining number of continuations of the current time saving state and the number of time saving continuations that can be set based on the newly generated time saving result, whichever is greater, will be the remaining number of times in the subsequent time saving state. This is the number of continuations. This makes it possible to increase the advantage of producing a time-saving result in a time-saving state.

FIG. 70 is a flowchart showing the subtraction process of the ceiling counter 131 executed in step S4213 of the special figure confirmation process (FIG. 67).

First, it is determined whether the high probability flag in the main side RAM 84 is set to "1" (step S4501). Then, if the high probability flag is set to "1" (step S4501: YES), the subtraction process of the main ceiling counter 131 is ended without executing the processes after step S4502. In other words, in a game played in a high probability mode, the value of the ceiling counter 131 is not subtracted, and furthermore, the ceiling time is shortened because the value of the ceiling counter 131 is not subtracted. Nor.

If the high probability flag is not set to "1" (step S4501: NO), it is determined whether the value of the ceiling counter 131 is 1 or more (step S4502). If the value of the ceiling counter 131 is "0" (step S4502: NO), the subtraction process of the main ceiling counter 131 is ended without executing the processes after step S4503. The process of setting information on the ceiling counter 131 is similar to the first embodiment described above, in a situation where none of the "RAM clear operation", "setting change operation", and "setting confirmation operation" is executed, and the processing is performed on the gaming machine itself. 12 is in an open state, step S114 when the supply of operating power is started, step S122 when an information abnormality in the main side RAM 84 has occurred when the supply of operating power is started, and opening/closing execution Only step S4208 is performed when the mode is started, and after the value of the ceiling counter 131 becomes "0", the value of the ceiling counter 131 is maintained at "0" unless any of the above processes is executed. . On the other hand, ceiling time reduction occurs when the value of the ceiling counter 131 is 1 or more and the value of the ceiling counter 131 is subtracted by 1, and the value of the ceiling counter 131 becomes "0". In this case, if the value of the ceiling counter 131 is "0" as described above (step S4502: NO), the subtraction process of the main ceiling counter 131 is ended without executing the process from step S4503 onwards. As a result, the value of the ceiling counter 131 after being subtracted by 1 becomes "0", and a time-saving state triggered by the ceiling time-saving occurs, and in the time-saving state, the number of consecutive game times for time-saving is completed without a jackpot result occurring. When the time saving state ends and the normal gaming state is entered, even if game rounds in which a jackpot result does not occur are repeated thereafter, the time saving state triggered by the ceiling time saving does not occur. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a time reduction state triggered by a ceiling time reduction from occurring excessively.

If the value of the ceiling counter 131 is 1 or more (step S4502: YES), the value of the ceiling counter 131 is subtracted by 1 (step S4503), and it is determined whether the value of the ceiling counter 131 after the 1 subtraction is "0" or not. (Step S4504). When the value of the ceiling counter 131 is "0" (step S4504: YES), the second high frequency flag is set to "1", regardless of whether the second high frequency flag of the main side RAM 84 is set to "1". 1" (step S4505). As a result, if the low probability mode and the second high frequency support mode reach a ceiling time reduction, the low probability mode and the second high frequency support mode are maintained, and the ceiling time reduction occurs in the low probability mode and the low frequency support mode. In this case, the mode becomes a low probability mode and a second high frequency support mode. In addition, the low probability mode and the first high frequency support mode occur after the opening/closing execution mode triggered by the 5R low probability result ends, and when the first time saving continuation number of 100 games is exhausted. Since the first high-frequency support mode ends, the ceiling time reduction that occurs when the fixed ceiling number of 500 games is exhausted in the low probability mode after the opening/closing execution mode ends, the first high-frequency support mode It cannot occur in certain situations.

Thereafter, it is determined whether the value of the time saving state counter 134 in the main side RAM 84 is equal to or greater than "100" corresponding to the first time saving continuation number (step S4506). If the value of the time saving state counter 134 is less than the value of the first time saving continuation number (step S4506: NO), information of "100" corresponding to the first time saving continuation number is set in the time saving state counter 134 (step S4507) .

Thereafter, a process for transmitting a status designation command is executed (step S4508). In the transmission process, a state designation command indicating that the time saving state has started or that the first time saving continuation number has been reset is transmitted to the sound-light side MPU 93.

If the process of step S4508 is executed after the process of step S4507 is executed in a situation where the current gaming state is not a time-saving state, the state designation command indicates that the time-saving state of the first time-saving continuation number is to be started. Contains information. When the sound and light side MPU 93 receives the state specifying command, it causes the symbol display device 41, the display light emitting section 64, and the speaker section 65 to execute an effect indicating that the time saving state of the first time saving continuation number is started. Execute processing to make it. Since the time-saving state triggered by the ceiling time-saving occurs in a game round in which neither a jackpot result nor a time-saving result occurs, symbol rows Z1 to Z3 on the symbol display device 41 display the combination of symbols corresponding to the jackpot result, the first time-saving Combinations of missing symbols (including combinations of missed reach symbols) that are combinations of symbols other than the combination of symbols that occur ("1, 2, 3") and the combination of symbols that generate the second time-saving symbol ("3, 4, 1") is stopped and displayed. Then, after the stop result is stopped and displayed and the final stop period ends, an image indicating that a time reduction state triggered by the ceiling time reduction will occur and an image indicating the number of times the first time reduction continues are displayed. . Since the timing at which the image is displayed is the timing at which the game round ends, a new game round can be started immediately. In this case, the area where the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are set on the display surface of the symbol display device 41 is reduced, and while the symbols corresponding to the new game round are displayed in a variable manner in the reduced area, In the secured area, an image indicating that a time saving state triggered by ceiling time saving occurs and an image indicating the number of times the first time saving continues are displayed. The display of the image ends when one game round ends, and when the display of the image ends, the area where the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are set returns to its original size.

If the process of step S4508 is executed after the process of step S4507 is executed in a situation where the current gaming state is the time saving state, the state designation command indicates that the first time saving continuation number has been reset. Contains information. When the sound and light side MPU 93 receives the state specifying command, the symbol display device 41, the display light emitting section 64, and the speaker section 65 execute an effect indicating that the first time saving continuation number has been reset. Execute processing to make it. Since the resetting of the first time saving continuation number triggered by the ceiling time saving occurs in a game round in which neither a jackpot result nor a time saving result occurs, the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 on the symbol display device 41 display the symbols corresponding to the jackpot result. A combination of missing symbols (missing reach) that is a combination of symbols other than the first time-saving symbol combination ("1, 2, 3") and the second time-saving symbol combination ("3, 4, 1") (including combinations of symbols) are stopped and displayed. Then, after the stop result is stopped and the final stop period is finished, an image indicating that a time saving state triggered by the ceiling time reduction will occur and that the first time reduction continuation number has been reset is displayed. The image shown will be displayed. Since the timing at which the image is displayed is the timing at which the game round ends, a new game round can be started immediately. In this case, the area where the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are set on the display surface of the symbol display device 41 is reduced, and while the symbols corresponding to the new game round are displayed in a variable manner in the reduced area, An image indicating that a time saving state triggered by ceiling time saving occurs in the secured area and an image indicating that the first time saving continuation count has been reset are continued to be displayed. The display of the image ends when one game round ends, and when the display of the image ends, the area where the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are set returns to its original size.

When an affirmative determination is made in step S4506 or when the process in step S4508 is executed, each of the first time saving end flag and the second time saving end flag provided in the main side RAM 84 is cleared to "0" (step S4509). As a result, while the game round corresponding to the end in the time saving state is being executed for a long period of time (specifically, 2 minutes) on the special drawing side with the first pending information as the execution target, the second pending information is the execution target. If a time saving result occurs in the game round, the remaining number of continuations of the time saving state is extended. Therefore, it is possible to increase the advantage of executing the game round corresponding to the end in the time saving state with the first pending information as the execution target.

Here, in the special figure confirmation process (FIG. 67), after the time-saving result setting process (FIG. 69) is executed, the ceiling counter 131 subtraction process (FIG. 70) is executed, and the ceiling counter 131 is also subtracted. In the process (FIG. 70), even if the value of the ceiling counter 131 after subtraction by 1 is "0", if the value of the time saving state counter 134 is "100" or more, the process of step S4507 and step S4508 is not executed. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the first time saving continuation number from being reset due to the ceiling time saving in the game round in which the first time saving result or the second time saving result is obtained. This makes it possible to prevent the resetting of the number of time saving continuations triggered by the time saving result and the resetting of the number of time saving continuations triggered by the ceiling time reduction from being performed redundantly. In particular, if the first time saving continuation count is reset after the second time saving result is reset, and the first time saving continuation count is triggered by the ceiling time saving, the number of time saving continuations will decrease. By adopting the above configuration, it is possible to prevent such inconvenience from occurring.

With the above configuration, when a ceiling time reduction occurs in the low probability mode and the low frequency support mode, the time reduction state shifts to the time reduction state of the first time reduction continuation number. Thereby, in the low probability mode and the low frequency support mode, it is possible to create a situation in which a transition to the time saving state occurs without going through the opening/closing execution mode based on the completion of the ceiling number of games.

When a ceiling time reduction occurs in the low probability mode and the second high-frequency support mode, if the value of the time reduction state counter 134 is 100 times or more, which is the first time reduction continuation number, a new time reduction state related to the current ceiling time reduction occurs. The low probability mode and the second high frequency support mode continue without any further settings being made. Further, when a ceiling time reduction occurs in the low probability mode and the second high frequency support mode, if the value of the time reduction state counter 134 is less than 100 times which is the first time reduction continuation number, the value of the time reduction state counter 134 is The low probability mode and the first high frequency support mode continue with the time saving continuation count set to 100 times. In other words, when a ceiling time reduction occurs in a time reduction state, the greater of the remaining number of continuations in the current time reduction state and the number of time reduction continuations that can be set due to the newly occurring ceiling time reduction is the number of times in the subsequent time reduction state. This is the remaining number of continuations. As a result, if a ceiling time reduction occurs in the second high-frequency support mode, a situation may occur in which the remaining number of times the time reduction state continues is greater than before, so it is possible that the ceiling time reduction will occur in the time reduction state. It is possible to increase the advantage.

Next, the left-handed hitting notification process executed by the audio-optical side MPU 93 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 71. The left-handed hitting notification process is repeatedly executed at a relatively short cycle (for example, 4 milliseconds).

If it is not the high probability mode (step S4601: NO) but is in the high frequency support mode (first high frequency support mode or second high frequency support mode) (step S4602: YES), the current high frequency support mode is started. It is determined whether the number of games played since then is the notification reference number of times (step S4603). The standard number of notifications is when the remaining number of times the high-frequency support mode (ie, time saving state) can be continued is five times. The five times are set as the number of times that is the value obtained by adding 1 to the upper limit number of pieces of second holding information in the second special figure holding area 112.

In step S4603, left-handed hitting notification processing is executed (step S4604). In the left-handed hitting notification process, a process for displaying a left-handed hitting notification image on the symbol display device 41 is executed. As a left-handed hitting notification image, an image that allows the player to recognize that the game ball should be fired aiming at the left area PA2 so that the execution target for the game round five times after the current state is the first pending information. is displayed. This makes it possible to prompt the player to perform a firing operation so that the game round corresponding to the end in the time saving state is executed with the first pending information as the execution target.

Next, the manner in which the game round corresponding to the end in the time saving state is executed with the first pending information as the execution target will be explained with reference to the time chart of FIG. 72. FIG. 72(a) shows a period in which the time saving state is in effect, FIG. 72(b) shows a period in which a game round using the first pending information is being executed, and FIG. 72(c) shows a period in which the second pending information FIG. 72(d) shows a period when the first time saving end flag of the main side RAM 84 is set to "1", and FIG. The timing of occurrence of time saving results is shown, and FIG. 72(f) shows the timing of occurrence of ceiling time saving.

First, a case will be described in which a game round corresponding to an end in a time saving state is executed with the first pending information as an execution target, and neither a time saving result nor a ceiling time saving occurs during the game round corresponding to an end.

As shown in FIG. 72(a), at timing t1, which is a time saving state, a game round in which the first pending information is to be executed is started as shown in FIG. 72(b). The variable display period of the game is 2 minutes, which is a long period on the special drawing side. This game round is started in a situation where the remaining number of continuations of the time saving state is one, so it is a game round corresponding to the end of the time saving state, and at the timing of t1, as shown in FIG. 72(d). The first time saving end flag in the main side RAM 84 is set to "1". After that, as shown in FIG. 72(b), the timing of t2, the timing of t3, the timing of t4, the timing of t5, and the timing of t6 are in a situation where the game round corresponding to the end is executed with the first pending information as the execution target. At each of a plurality of timings including the timing of , a game round that targets the second pending information is executed as shown in FIG. 72(c). In this case, each of the plurality of timings including these timings t2 to t6 is in a short time state as shown in FIG. 72(a), so each of the plurality of timings including these timings t2 to t6 For the game round that starts at , the variable display period of the game round is determined by referring to the table group for short-term fluctuations. Each of these game rounds is started in a situation where two or more pieces of second hold information are stored in the second special figure hold area 112, and neither the jackpot result nor the out-of-reach display occurs, so the game round The variable display period is the shortest period on the special figure side (specifically, 3 seconds).

Thereafter, at timing t7, as shown in FIG. 72(b), the game round corresponding to the end for which the first pending information is to be executed ends. In this case, as shown in FIG. 72(d), since the first time saving end flag in the main side RAM 84 is set to "1", the support mode becomes the low frequency support mode, and as shown in FIG. 72(a), the time saving end flag is set to "1". The state ends.

As mentioned above, the game time for which the first hold information is to be executed is executed as the game time corresponding to the end in the time saving state, and in the game time corresponding to the end, the fluctuating display period of the game time is the long period on the special drawing side (specifically is 2 minutes). Then, in the gaming sessions corresponding to the end, there are about 30 gaming sessions triggered by the second hold information, which is the shortest variable display period. As a result, in the current time-saving state, the game has been executed about 30 times more than the set number of continuations out of the first time-saving continuation number and the second time-saving continuation number.

Next, a case will be described in which a game round corresponding to the end in the time saving state is executed with the first pending information as the execution target, and a time saving result occurs in the middle of the game round corresponding to the end.

As shown in FIG. 72(a), at timing t8, which is the time saving state, a game round in which the first pending information is to be executed is started as shown in FIG. 72(b). The variable display period of the game is 2 minutes, which is a long period on the special drawing side. This game round is started in a situation where the remaining number of continuations of the time saving state is one, so it is a game round corresponding to the end of the time saving state, and at the timing of t8, as shown in FIG. 72(d). The first time saving end flag in the main side RAM 84 is set to "1".

After that, as shown in FIG. 72(b), the timing of t9, the timing of t10, the timing of t11, the timing of t13, and the timing of t14 are in a situation where the game round corresponding to the end with the first pending information as the execution target is being executed. At each of a plurality of timings including the timing of , a game round that targets the second pending information is executed as shown in FIG. 72(c). In this case, each of the plurality of timings including the timing of t9, the timing of t10, the timing of t11, the timing of t13, and the timing of t14 are in a short time state as shown in FIG. For game times that start at each of a plurality of timings including timing, t10 timing, t11 timing, t13 timing, and t14 timing, the fluctuation display period of the game time is determined by referring to the table group for short-term fluctuations. be done. Each of these game rounds is started in a situation where two or more pieces of second hold information are stored in the second special figure hold area 112, and neither the jackpot result nor the out-of-reach display occurs, so the game round The variable display period is the shortest period on the special figure side (specifically, 3 seconds).

Among the game times at a plurality of timings including the timing of t9, the timing of t10, the timing of t11, the timing of t13, and the timing of t14, the game time of the timing of t11 is determined as correct or not as shown in FIG. 72(e). The result of the processing is a time-saving result. Therefore, at the timing t12 when the game round ends, the first time saving end flag in the main side RAM 84 is cleared to "0" as shown in FIG. 72(d), and if it is the first time saving result, the time saving state counter 134 The first time saving continuation number is reset, and if it is the second time saving result, the second time saving continuation number is reset in the time saving state counter 134. Therefore, the time saving state becomes an extended state.

Thereafter, at timing t14, as shown in FIG. 72(b), the game round corresponding to the end for which the first pending information is to be executed ends. However, since the first time saving end flag is cleared to "0" at timing t12 and the time saving state is extended, the time saving state does not end at timing t14.

As mentioned above, the game time for which the first hold information is to be executed is executed as the game time corresponding to the end in the time saving state, and in the game time corresponding to the end, the fluctuating display period of the game time is the long period on the special drawing side (specifically is 2 minutes). Then, the time saving state is extended by the time saving result occurring in the game round where the second pending information executed in the game round corresponding to the end is the execution target. By executing the game round for which the first reservation information is to be executed as a game round corresponding to the end in the time saving state, it becomes possible to provide the benefit of extending the time saving state.

Next, a case will be described in which a game round corresponding to the end in the time saving state is executed with the first pending information as the execution target, and a ceiling time saving occurs in the middle of the game round corresponding to the end.

As shown in FIG. 72(a), at timing t15, which is the time saving state, a game round in which the first pending information is to be executed is started as shown in FIG. 72(b). The variable display period of the game is 2 minutes, which is a long period on the special drawing side. Since this game round is started in a situation where the remaining number of continuations of the time saving state is one, it is a game round corresponding to the end of the time saving state, and at the timing of t15, as shown in FIG. 72(d). The first time saving end flag in the main side RAM 84 is set to "1".

After that, as shown in FIG. 72(b), the timing of t16, the timing of t17, the timing of t18, the timing of t19, and the timing of t21 are in a situation where the game round corresponding to the end is executed with the first pending information as the execution target. At each of a plurality of timings including the timing of , a game round that targets the second pending information is executed as shown in FIG. 72(c). In this case, each of the plurality of timings including the timing of t16, the timing of t17, the timing of t18, the timing of t19, and the timing of t21 are in a short time state as shown in FIG. For game times that start at each of a plurality of timings including the timing t17, the timing t18, the timing t19, and the timing t21, the fluctuation display period of the game time is determined by referring to the table group for short-term fluctuations. be done. Each of these game rounds is started in a situation where two or more pieces of second hold information are stored in the second special figure hold area 112, and neither the jackpot result nor the out-of-reach display occurs, so the game round The variable display period is the shortest period on the special figure side (specifically, 3 seconds).

Subtract 1 at the timing of t20, which is the timing at which the game round of the timing of t19 ends among the game rounds of multiple timings including the timing of t16, the timing of t17, the timing of t18, the timing of t19, and the timing of t21. The value of the ceiling counter 131 after that becomes "0", and a ceiling time reduction occurs as shown in FIG. 72(f). At the timing of t20, as shown in FIG. 72(d), the first time saving end flag in the main side RAM 84 is cleared to "0", and the number of times the first time saving continues is reset in the time saving state counter 134. Therefore, the time saving state becomes an extended state.

Thereafter, at timing t21, as shown in FIG. 72(b), the game round corresponding to the end for which the first pending information is to be executed ends. However, since the first time saving end flag is cleared to "0" at timing t20 and the time saving state is extended, the time saving state does not end at timing t21.

As mentioned above, the game time for which the first hold information is to be executed is executed as the game time corresponding to the end in the time saving state, and in the game time corresponding to the end, the fluctuating display period of the game time is the long period on the special drawing side (specifically is 2 minutes). Then, the time saving state is extended because the ceiling time reduction occurs with the second hold information executed in the game round corresponding to the end as a trigger for the game round to be executed. By executing the game round for which the first reservation information is to be executed as a game round corresponding to the end in the time saving state, it becomes possible to provide the benefit of extending the time saving state.

<Eleventh embodiment>
This embodiment is different from the tenth embodiment described above in the processing configuration of the variable display period specifying process executed by the main MPU 82. Hereinafter, configurations that are different from the tenth embodiment described above will be explained. Note that descriptions of the same configurations as those in the tenth embodiment will be basically omitted.

FIG. 73 is a flowchart showing a process for identifying a variable display period in this embodiment, which is executed by the main MPU 82.

If "1" is not set in both the first high frequency flag and the second high frequency flag of the main side RAM 84 (step S4701: NO), that is, if the support mode is the low frequency support mode, step S4702 to step The process of S4706 is executed. These steps S4702 to S4706 are the same as steps S4102 to S4106 in the variable display period specifying process (FIG. 66) in the tenth embodiment. In other words, in the low frequency support mode, if the first pending information is the target for starting a gaming session, the variable display period of the gaming session is selected by referring to the table group for normal variable periods; If the second pending information is the start target of a game round, the longest period on the special figure side (specifically 10 minutes) is selected as the variable display period of the game round, regardless of the game result of the game round. The longest period on the special figure side is usually longer than any variable display period selected by referring to the table group for variable periods. Therefore, in the low frequency support mode, the player plays the game by operating the firing operation device 28 so that the game ball flows down the left side area PA2.

If either the first high-frequency flag or the second high-frequency flag of the main side RAM 84 is set to "1" (step S4701: YES), that is, the support mode is the first high-frequency support mode or the second high-frequency support mode. If it is the support mode, it is determined whether the start target of the current game round is the first pending information (step S4707). If the start target of the current game round is the first pending information (step S4707: YES), it is determined whether the first time saving end flag in the main side RAM 84 is set to "1" (step S4708). In other words, it is determined whether the game round for which the current first hold information is to be executed is a game round that is to be completed in the time saving state. If the first time saving end flag is set to "1" (step S4708: YES), the information on the shortest period (specifically 3 seconds) on the special drawing side is used as the variable display period for the current game. Set it in the first special figure side timer counter of the main side RAM 84 (step S4709), and if "1" is not set in the first time saving end flag (step S4708: NO), the fluctuation display of the current game round will be displayed. Information on a long period (specifically, 2 minutes) on the special figure side is set as a period in the first special figure side timer counter of the main side RAM 84 (step S4710).

If the mode is the first high-frequency support mode or the second high-frequency support mode (step S4701: YES), and the start target of the current game round is the second pending information (step S4707: NO), step S4711 ~Execute the process of step S4713. These steps S4711 to S4713 are the same as steps S4109 to S4111 in the variable display period specifying process (FIG. 66) in the tenth embodiment.

As mentioned above, in the time saving state, if the game session triggered by the first hold information is executed as a game session other than the game session corresponding to the end, the special figure will be used as the variable display period of the game session triggered by the first hold information. A long period of time (specifically, 2 minutes) is selected. This makes it possible to reduce the efficiency of playing games triggered by the first reservation information in the time saving state. On the other hand, when a game session triggered by the first hold information is started as a game session corresponding to the end in the time saving state, the minimum period on the special drawing side as the variable display period of the game session triggered by the first hold information. (Specifically, 3 seconds) is selected. This shortest period on the special figure side is a period selected as a variable display period of a game round triggered by the second reservation information in the time saving state and in which no reach display occurs. As a result, if the game session triggered by the first hold information becomes a game session that corresponds to termination in the time-saving state, the game triggered by the second hold information while the game session corresponding to termination is being executed. This makes it possible to prevent the process from being executed repeatedly.

In addition, if the game round corresponding to the end in the time saving state becomes the game round triggered by the first reservation information, if a jackpot result occurs in the game round, the shortest duration of the game round on the special drawing side A configuration may be adopted in which a period longer than the period is selected. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which a medium period (specifically, 10 seconds) on the special figure side is selected, or a configuration in which a long period (specifically, 2 minutes) on the special figure side is selected. Also, by using the jackpot table included in the short-term fluctuation table group read in step S4711 and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS at that time, the fluctuation display period corresponding to the occurrence of the reach display is determined by lottery. The configuration may be determined. Thereby, even if the game round corresponding to the end in the time saving state becomes the game round triggered by the first reservation information, it is possible to secure a certain period until a jackpot result occurs.

<Twelfth embodiment>
This embodiment is different from the tenth embodiment described above in the processing configuration of the variable display period specifying process executed by the main MPU 82. Hereinafter, configurations different from the tenth embodiment described above will be explained. Note that descriptions of the same configurations as those in the tenth embodiment will be basically omitted.

FIG. 74 is a flowchart showing a process for specifying a variable display period in this embodiment, which is executed by the main MPU 82.

If "1" is not set in both the first high frequency flag and the second high frequency flag of the main side RAM 84 (step S4801: NO), that is, if the support mode is the low frequency support mode, step S4802 to step Execute the process of S4806. These steps S4802 to S4806 are the same as steps S4102 to S4106 in the variable display period specifying process (FIG. 66) in the tenth embodiment. In other words, in the low frequency support mode, if the first pending information is the target for starting a gaming session, the variable display period of the gaming session is selected by referring to the table group for normal variable periods; If the second pending information is the start target of a game round, the longest period on the special figure side (specifically 10 minutes) is selected as the variable display period of the game round, regardless of the game result of the game round. The longest period on the special figure side is usually longer than any variable display period selected by referring to the table group for variable periods. Therefore, in the low frequency support mode, the player plays the game by operating the firing operation device 28 so that the game ball flows down the left side area PA2.

If either the first high-frequency flag or the second high-frequency flag of the main side RAM 84 is set to "1" (step S4801: YES), that is, the support mode is the first high-frequency support mode or the second high-frequency support mode. If it is the support mode, it is determined whether the start target of the current game round is the first pending information (step S4807). If the start target of the current game round is the first pending information (step S4807: YES), it is determined whether the first time saving end flag in the main side RAM 84 is set to "1" (step S4808). In other words, it is determined whether the game round for which the current first hold information is to be executed is a game round that is to be completed in the time saving state.

If the first time saving end flag is set to "1" (step S4808: YES), a table group for end timing is read from the main side ROM 83 to the main side RAM 84 (step S4809). Then, a variable display period selection process is executed using the table group for the end timing (step S4810), and information on the variable display period selected in the selection process is stored in the first special figure side timer of the main side RAM 84. The counter is set (step S4811).

In a situation where the selection process of the variable display period in step S4810 is executed with reference to the end timing table group, if a jackpot result or a time-saving result occurs in the current game round, the minimum period (specifically 3 seconds). Even in this embodiment, the sound-light side MPU 93 is similar to the tenth embodiment described above, in which the second pending information is the target for starting a game round in the first high-frequency support mode or the second high-frequency support mode. When a variation command and a type command are received, the symbol display device 41 starts to display the symbols in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 in a variable manner, and also displays the effect corresponding to the variable display of the symbol in the light emitting unit 64 and While the speaker unit 65 is configured to perform this, even if the first pending information receives a variation command and a type command indicating that the game round is to be started, the symbols in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 of the symbol display device 41 will not be displayed. The variable display and the corresponding effects in the display light emitting section 64 and speaker section 65 are not executed. In addition, in the first high-frequency support mode or the second high-frequency support mode, if a jackpot result occurs in the game round triggered by the first reservation information, the symbol display device 41 will display the winning result at the timing when the game round ends. An effect is performed to announce the occurrence of a jackpot result, and if a time-saving result occurs in a game session triggered by the first pending information in the first high-frequency support mode or the second high-frequency support mode, the game session concerned is At the end of the game, an effect is performed on the symbol display device 41 to announce the occurrence of a time-saving result.If both a jackpot result and a time-saving result do not occur in this game round, the numerical information of the fluctuation type counter CS at that time is ended. By checking against the table corresponding to the end timing in the timing table group, information on the variable display period corresponding to the end is read out. As information on the variable display period corresponding to the termination, 3 seconds is the shortest period on the special map side, 10 seconds is the middle period on the special map side, and 2 minutes is the long period on the special map side. In the table corresponding to end timing, the shortest period on the special chart side is selected with a probability of 1/3, the middle period on the special chart side is selected with a probability of 1/3, and the long period on the special chart side is selected with a probability of 1/3. The period is set to be selected.

If the first time-saving end flag is not set to "1" (step S4808: NO), the long-term information (specifically, 2 minutes) on the special drawing side is used as the variable display period for the current game. , is set in the first special figure side timer counter of the main side RAM 84 (step S4812).

If the mode is the first high-frequency support mode or the second high-frequency support mode (step S4801: YES), and the start target of the current game round is the second pending information (step S4807: NO), step S4813 ~Execute the process of step S4815. These steps S4813 to S4815 are the same as steps S4109 to S4111 in the variable display period specifying process (FIG. 66) in the tenth embodiment.

As mentioned above, in the time saving state, if the game session triggered by the first hold information is executed as a game session other than the game session corresponding to the end, the special figure will be used as the variable display period of the game session triggered by the first hold information. A long period of time (specifically, 2 minutes) is selected. This makes it possible to reduce the efficiency of playing games triggered by the first reservation information in the time saving state. On the other hand, when a game session triggered by the first hold information is started as a game session corresponding to the end in the time saving state, the minimum period on the special drawing side as the variable display period of the game session triggered by the first hold information. (specifically, 3 seconds), a medium period on the special map side (specifically, 10 seconds), or a long period on the special map side (specifically, 2 minutes) is selected by lottery. If the minimum period on the special drawing side is selected, the game round triggered by the second hold information will not be repeatedly executed in a situation where the game round corresponding to the end triggered by the first hold information is being executed. If the medium period on the special drawing side is selected, the game session triggered by the second pending information is executed a small number of times in a situation where the game session corresponding to the end triggered by the first pending information is executed. When the long period on the special drawing side is selected, the game round triggered by the second hold information is repeated many times while the game round corresponding to the end triggered by the first hold information is being executed. . As a result, when a game round corresponding to termination is executed using the first suspension information as a trigger, the player will expect a longer variable display period to be selected, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. Become.

<Thirteenth embodiment>
In this embodiment, the processing configuration of the main MPU 82 is different from the first embodiment. Hereinafter, configurations that are different from the first embodiment will be described. Note that descriptions of the same configurations as in the first embodiment will be basically omitted.

FIG. 75 is a front view of the main control device 71 in this embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 75, the main control device 71 includes a main control board 81 housed in a board box 71a. A main side MPU 82 is mounted on an element mounting surface which is one board surface of the main control board 81 . The board box 71a is formed transparent so that the main MPU 82 housed in the board box 71a can be visually observed from the outside of the board box 71a. Although the board box 71a is formed to be colorless and transparent, it may be formed to be colored and transparent if it is possible to visually observe the main MPU 82 housed in the board box 71a from outside the board box 71a. good. The main control device 71 is mounted on the back surface of the resin base 21 in the board box 71a so that a facing wall portion 71b facing the element mounting surface of the main control board 81 faces toward the rear of the pachinko machine 10. Therefore, by opening the gaming machine main body 12 forward of the pachinko machine 10 with respect to the outer frame 11 and exposing the back surface of the resin base 21, it becomes possible to visually see the opposing wall 71b of the board box 71a, and It becomes possible to visually observe the main side MPU 82 through the opposing wall portion 71b.

The board box 71a is formed by combining a plurality of case bodies 71c back and forth, and these plurality of case bodies 71c are designed to prevent separation of these case bodies 71c and to leave traces when these case bodies 71c are separated. A connecting portion 71d is provided for leaving a . A plurality of coupling portions 71d are arranged in parallel on one side of the substantially rectangular parallelepiped substrate box 71a. As a result, even if some of the joints 71d are destroyed and the case body 71c is separated in a state in which separation of the case body 71c is prevented using some joints 71d, another joint By bringing the portion 71d into the connected state, it becomes possible to prevent the case body 71c from being separated again. Furthermore, since the joint portion 71d is destroyed when the case body 71c is separated, and traces thereof remain, it is possible to visually check the joint portion 71d to determine whether or not the case body 71c has been illegally separated. It becomes possible. Furthermore, a seal 71e is pasted on one side of the board box 71a opposite to the side on which the joint portions 71d are arranged so as to straddle the boundary between the case bodies 71c. When the sealing seal 71e is peeled off, an adhesive layer remains on the case body 71c. Thereby, when the seal 71e is peeled off when the case body 71c is separated, it is possible to leave a trace of the seal 71e.

In the main control device 71 having the above configuration, the main control board 81 includes a setting key insertion section 195, a reset button 196, first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, a setting display device 205, and an error display device. 206 is provided. Note that the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is not limited to the six stages of "setting 1" to "setting 6" and is arbitrary.

These setting key insertion section 195, reset button 196, first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, setting display device 205, and error display device 206 are all provided on the element mounting surface of the main control board 81. Further, as described above, the element mounting surface of the main control board 81 faces the opposing wall 71b of the board box 71a, but the setting key insertion section 195 and the reset button 196 are not covered by the opposing wall 71b. In other words, areas of the opposing wall portion 71b that face the setting key insertion portion 195 and the reset button 196 are separate openings. Thereby, it is possible to insert a setting key into the setting key insertion portion 195 without opening the board box 71a, and it is possible to press the reset button 196.

By inserting a setting key into the setting key insertion part 195 and rotating it in a predetermined direction, the setting key insertion part 195 is turned on. In this state, by starting the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 while pressing the reset button 196 (that is, by starting the supply of operating power to the main side MPU 82 of the main controller 71), the pachinko machine 10 settings can be changed. In this state, each time the reset button 196 is pressed once, the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is changed one step at a time in ascending order within the range of "setting 1" to "setting 6." Note that if the reset button 196 is operated in the state of "Setting 6", the state is updated to "Setting 1". In addition, by rotating the setting key inserted in the setting key insertion part 195 from the ON operation position in the opposite direction to the predetermined direction and returning it to the initial position, the setting key insertion part 195 can be turned OFF. Become. When the setting key insertion section 195 is turned off, the state in which the setting values can be changed ends, and the game becomes possible to play with the setting values at that time. Note that even if the reset button 196 is operated after the state in which the set value can be changed ends, the set value cannot be changed.

The ON operation on the setting key insertion section 195 is valid only when the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is started (that is, when the supply of operating power to the main side MPU 82 of the main controller 71 is started). Therefore, even if the setting key insertion section 195a is turned on after the main MPU 82 of the main controller 71 completes the processing at the start of supply of operating power, the setting value cannot be changed.

The setting state of the pachinko machine 10 determines the advantage per unit time of the pachinko machine 10, and the larger the value of "setting n" (n is an integer from "1" to "6") (that is, the setting The higher the value), the higher the advantage. There is a low probability mode where the winning probability is relatively low and a high probability mode where the winning probability is relatively high as the win/fail lottery mode that determines the winning probability of the jackpot result, but the higher the setting value, the lower the probability The winning probability of the jackpot result in each of the mode and high probability mode is set to be high.

By starting the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 while the setting key insertion section 195 is turned on and the reset button 196 is not pressed (that is, the operating power to the main MPU 82 of the main controller 71 is (), the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 can be confirmed. Furthermore, when the setting key insertion section 195 is turned off, the state in which the setting values can be confirmed ends.

By starting the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 while pressing the reset button 196 without turning on the setting key insertion part 195 (that is, supplying operating power to the main MPU 82 of the main controller 71 ), data in a predetermined area in the main RAM 84 is cleared. The ON operation on the reset button 196 is valid only when the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is started (that is, when the supply of operating power to the main MPU 82 of the main controller 71 is started). Therefore, even if the reset button 196 is pressed after the main MPU 82 of the main controller 71 completes the processing at the start of supply of operating power, the data in the main RAM 84 cannot be cleared.

The first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 and the setting display device 205 are all segment displays in which eight LED display segments are arranged, but are not limited to this, and are liquid crystal display devices. or an organic EL display. The first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 and the setting display device 205 are installed so that their display surfaces face the direction in which the element mounting surface of the main control board 81 faces, and the It is covered by the opposing wall portion 71b. In this case, since the board box 71a is transparent, the display surfaces and settings of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 housed in the board box 71a can be viewed from the outside of the board box 71a. It becomes possible to visually check the display surface of the device 205. Furthermore, the main control device 71 is mounted on the back surface of the resin base 21 in such a way that the opposing wall portion 71b facing the element mounting surface of the main control board 81 faces the rear of the pachinko machine 10 in the board box 71a. When the main body 12 is opened to the front of the pachinko machine 10 relative to the outer frame 11 and the back surface of the resin base 21 is exposed to the front of the pachinko machine 10, the first to fourth notification display devices 201 are exposed through the opposing wall portion 71b. 204 and the display screen of the setting display device 205 can be visually observed.

The first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 display game history management results. In addition, the setting display device 205 displays the setting value to be selected when the setting value update process for changing the setting value is being executed, and the setting display device 205 displays the setting value to be selected. When processing is being executed, the setting values that are being set are displayed. In other words, when the setting value of the selection target or the setting target is "Setting 1", "1" is displayed on the setting display device 205, and the setting value of the selection target or the setting target is "Setting 2". If so, “2” is displayed on the setting display device 205, and if the setting value of the above-mentioned selection target or the above-mentioned setting target is “setting 3”, “3” is displayed on the setting display device 205. , when the setting value of the selection target or the setting target is "Setting 4", "4" is displayed on the setting display device 205, and when the setting value of the selection target or the setting target is "Setting 5", "4" is displayed on the setting display device 205. If so, "5" is displayed on the setting display device 205, and when the setting value of the above-mentioned selection target or the above-mentioned setting object is "setting 6", "6" is displayed on the setting display device 205. . Note that in a situation where neither the setting value update process nor the setting confirmation process is executed, the setting display device 205 is maintained in an off state.

The first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 for displaying game history management results and the setting display device 205 for displaying setting values are arranged in parallel on the element mounting surface of the main control board 81. . As described above, the main control device 71 is mounted on the back surface of the resin base 21 in the board box 71a so that the opposing wall portion 71b facing the element mounting surface of the main control board 81 faces the rear of the pachinko machine 10. , when the gaming machine main body 12 is opened to the front of the pachinko machine 10 with respect to the outer frame 11 and the back surface of the resin base 21 is exposed to the front of the pachinko machine 10, the first to fourth notifications are transmitted through the opposing wall portion 71b. The display surfaces of the display devices 201 to 204 and the display surface of the setting display device 205 can be viewed visually. Since a setting key insertion section 195 and a reset button 196 are provided on the element mounting surface of the main control board 81, when executing a setting value update process or a setting confirmation process, the gaming machine main body 12 is placed against the outer frame 11. The back side of the resin base 21 is exposed to the front of the pachinko machine 10 by opening it to the front of the pachinko machine 10, but the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 and the setting display device 205 as described above are elements. By being provided on the mounting surface, it is possible to display not only the setting values of selection targets or setting targets on the setting display device 205, but also the display of game history management results on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. It becomes possible to visually observe.

The abnormality display device 206 is provided with a monochrome light emitting type LED. The abnormality display device 206 is installed so that its light emitting surface faces the direction in which the element mounting surface of the main control board 81 faces, and is covered by the opposing wall portion 71b of the board box 71a. In this case, since the board box 71a is transparent, it becomes possible to visually observe the abnormality display device 206 housed in the board box 71a from outside the board box 71a. Furthermore, the main control device 71 is mounted on the back surface of the resin base 21 in such a way that the opposing wall portion 71b facing the element mounting surface of the main control board 81 faces the rear of the pachinko machine 10 in the board box 71a. When the main body 12 is opened to the front of the pachinko machine 10 relative to the outer frame 11 and the back surface of the resin base 21 is exposed to the front of the pachinko machine 10, it is possible to visually see the abnormality display device 206 through the opposing wall portion 71b. becomes. When a predetermined abnormality occurs, the abnormality display device 206 changes from an off state to a lit state, and the lit state continues until the supply of operating power to the main MPU 82 is stopped.

<Specific control and non-specific control>
Next, the execution contents of various controls in the main MPU 82 will be explained.

Various controls executed by the main MPU 82 using programs are classified into specific control and non-specific control. Specifically, controls related to the management of gaming history and monitoring of fraud are considered non-specific controls, and controls other than non-specific controls, including controls for advancing the game based on gaming operations by players, are considered specific controls. ing. Specifically, the control by the main process (FIG. 81) that is executed when the supply of operating power to the main MPU 82 is started, all processes other than the first management process described later are included in the specific control, The first management process is included in non-specific control. In addition, there are the first timer interrupt process (Figure 88) and the second timer interrupt process (Figure 114) as processes that are started by interrupting periodically, but the second timer interrupt process (Figure 114) is All processes are included in the specific control, and all processes other than the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 88) and the fraud detection process and the second management process, which will be described later, are included in the specific control, and the fraud detection process and the second management process are included in the specific control. 2 Management processing is included in non-specific control.

FIG. 76 is an explanatory diagram for explaining how programs and data are set in the main side ROM 83. Corresponding to the fact that the control executed by the main MPU 82 is divided into specific control and non-specific control, the main ROM 83 also has a program for specific control and a program for specific control, as shown in FIG. Addresses of areas where data, non-specific control programs, and non-specific control data are stored are clearly distinguished.

Specifically, specific control programs are collectively stored in areas of consecutive addresses within the range of address X(1) to address X(k+2). Furthermore, addresses X(k+3) to address X(k+5) that follow address X(1) to address X(k+2) are addresses of unused areas where no data is stored. Data for specific control is collectively stored in areas of consecutive addresses within the range from address X(k+6) to address X(m+2). Additionally, addresses X(m+3) to X(m+5) that follow addresses X(k+6) to X(m+2) are addresses of unused areas where no data is stored, and the addresses following Non-specific control programs are collectively stored in areas of consecutive addresses within the range from address X(m+6) to address X(n+2). Additionally, addresses X(n+3) to X(n+5) that follow address X(m+6) to address X(n+2) are addresses of unused areas where no data is stored, and the addresses following Non-specific control data is collectively stored in areas of consecutive addresses within the range from X(n+6) to address X(p+2). Note that the relationship between programs and data and addresses as described above is set in both the physical address in the main side ROM 83 and the logical address on the memory map recognized by the main side MPU 82.

As mentioned above, the program for specific control and the data for specific control, the program for non-specific control and the data for non-specific control, regardless of the execution order of the processing for executing the corresponding control, When checking only specific control programs and specific control data, the address ranges in which these specific control programs and specific control data are stored are stored in areas with addresses in different ranges. It is only necessary to check the area of You only need to check the area. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently check programs and data by distinguishing between specific control and non-specific control. Additionally, it becomes possible to efficiently perform work when modifying programs and data by distinguishing between specific control and non-specific control.

No data is stored between the address range of the area where specific control programs and specific control data are stored and the address range of the area where non-specific control programs and non-specific control data are stored. By setting the address range of an unused area that has not been used, it becomes easier to grasp the boundary between the address range for specific control and the address range for non-specific control during checking work.

In each of the address range for specific control and the address range for non-specific control, programs and data are stored in areas of different ranges of addresses, regardless of the order of execution of processes for executing the corresponding control. By doing so, it becomes possible to perform the work efficiently when checking programs and data separately. Additionally, by setting the address range of an unused area where no data is stored between the address range of the area where the program is stored and the address range of the area where the data is stored, the program This makes it easier to understand the boundary between the address range and the data address range during checking work.

FIG. 77 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the setting manner of each area in the main side RAM 84. In correspondence with the fact that the control executed using a program in the main MPU 82 is distinguished into specific control and non-specific control, as shown in FIG. The address ranges of the area 211 and the stack area 212 for specific control are clearly distinguished from the address ranges of the work area 213 for non-specific control and the stack area 214 for non-specific control.

Specifically, the area of each consecutive address within the range of address Y(1) to address Y(r+2) is set as the work area 211 for specific control. Furthermore, addresses Y(r+3) to Y(r+5) that follow address Y(1) to address Y(r+2) are addresses of unused areas, and then addresses Y(r+6) to address The area of each consecutive address within the range of Y(s+2) is set as a stack area 212 for specific control. Furthermore, addresses Y(s+3) to Y(s+5) that follow address Y(r+6) to address Y(s+2) are addresses of unused areas, and then addresses Y(s+6) to address The area of each consecutive address within the range of Y(t+2) is set as a work area 213 for non-specific control. Furthermore, addresses Y(t+3) to Y(t+5) that follow address Y(s+6) to address Y(t+2) are addresses of unused areas, and then addresses Y(t+6) to address The area of each consecutive address within the range of Y(u+2) is set as a stack area 214 for non-specific control. The relationship between each area and address as described above is set in both the physical address in the main RAM 84 and the logical address on the memory map recognized by the main MPU 82.

As described above, the work area 211 for specific control and the work area 213 for non-specific control are set separately, so that when the main MPU 82 executes specific control and when executing non-specific control. Therefore, different areas of the main RAM 84 are used when performing various calculations. This makes it possible to make it less likely that when one of the specific control and non-specific control is executed, information in the main side RAM 84 necessary for the other will be erased. Incidentally, when writing information to each work area 211, 213 and reading information from each work area 211, 213, the main MPU 82 issues a load command.

Because the stack area 212 for specific control and the stack area 214 for non-specific control are set separately, the main MPU 82 can Different areas of the main RAM 84 are used when saving the information stored in the register of the side MPU 82 and when storing information on the return address on the program. As a result, when one of specific control and non-specific control is being executed, when saving the information stored in the register of the main MPU 82 and when storing information on the return address on the program, it can be used in the other. This makes it possible to make it difficult for events such as information being deleted to occur. Incidentally, when writing information to each stack area 212, 214, the main MPU 82 performs a push command, and when reading information from each stack area 212, 214, the main MPU 82 performs a pop command. Furthermore, when reading information from each stack area 212, 214, the information written to the stack area 212, 214 is read out first.

Here, when the main MPU 82 executes processing corresponding to specific control, the main MPU 82 can write information to the work area 211 for specific control and the stack area 212 for specific control, and Information can be read from the work area 211 for specific control and the stack area 212 for specific control. On the other hand, when the main MPU 82 executes processing corresponding to specific control, the main MPU 82 can read information from the work area 213 for non-specific control and the stack area 214 for non-specific control; , information cannot be written to the work area 213 for non-specific control and the stack area 214 for non-specific control. This makes it possible to prevent information used in processing corresponding to non-specific control from being accidentally deleted in a situation where processing corresponding to specific control is being executed.

Furthermore, when the main MPU 82 executes processing corresponding to non-specific control, the main MPU 82 can write information to the work area 213 for non-specific control and the stack area 214 for non-specific control. At the same time, information can be read from the work area 213 for non-specific control and the stack area 214 for non-specific control. On the other hand, when the main MPU 82 executes processing corresponding to non-specific control, although the main MPU 82 can read information from the work area 211 for specific control and the stack area 212 for specific control, Information cannot be written to the work area 211 for specific control and the stack area 212 for specific control. Thereby, in a situation where processing corresponding to non-specific control is being executed, it is possible to prevent information used in processing corresponding to specific control from being accidentally deleted.

Note that backup power will be supplied to the main side RAM 84 even after the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, but the backup power will be supplied to the work area 211 for specific control, the stack area 212 for specific control, and the non-specific control. It is supplied to all of the work area 213 for use and the stack area 214 for non-specific control. As a result, the information stored in the work area 211 for specific control, the stack area 212 for specific control, the work area 213 for non-specific control, and the stack area 214 for non-specific control is stored when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off. Even afterward, the data will be retained as long as backup power is supplied.

FIG. 78 is an explanatory diagram for explaining various storage areas provided in the work area 211 for specific control and various storage areas provided in the work area 213 for non-specific control.

The work area 211 for specific control includes a first security counter 211a, a special power monitoring delay timer counter 211b, a general power monitoring delay timer counter 211c, a confirmation flag group 211d, a previous value storage area 211e, a security flag 211f, and a checking flag. A counter 211g is provided. The work area 213 for non-specific control includes the first to eighth prize monitoring timer counters 213a to 213h, the magnetic detection counter 213i, the magnetic monitoring delay timer counter 213j, the second security counter 213k, and the first to third general prize winning abnormalities. Flags 213l to 213n, special electric winning abnormal flag 213o, first operating winning abnormal flag 213p, second operating winning abnormal flag 213q, out abnormal flag 213r, gate winning abnormal flag 213s, and magnetic abnormal flag 213t are provided.

The first security counter 211a in the work area 211 for specific control and the second security counter 213k in the work area 213 for non-specific control both externally output pulse-shaped security signals from the main MPU 82 to the management computer of the gaming hall. This is a counter used by the main MPU 82 to specify whether or not it is necessary to output the pulse-like security signal to the outside. This is the counter used. Events that trigger the external output of a pulsed security signal include execution of set value update processing, execution of main side RAM 84 clear processing, detection of disconnection in a predetermined detection sensor, detection of a short circuit in a predetermined detection sensor, and winning abnormality. detection, magnetic anomaly detection, etc. Incidentally, the events that trigger the external output of a pulse-like security signal are not limited to those listed above, and in addition to or in place of at least some of these, there may be the detection of radio wave abnormality or the occurrence of the gaming machine itself. 12 opening operations, etc. may be included. Further, when outputting the security signal to the outside and performing the processing associated therewith as described above, the previous value storage area 211e and the security flag 211f are used.

The special electric monitoring delay timer counter 211b of the work area 211 for specific control detects the game ball in the special electric detection sensor 234a provided in the special electric winning device 32 when the special electric winning device 32 which is in the open state is in the closed state. This counter is used by the main MPU 82 to specify a period that will be treated as valid even later. The general power monitoring delay timer counter 211c in the work area 211 for specific control detects the game ball by the second operating port detection sensor 236a provided at the second operating port 34, when the second operating port 34 is in the open state. This counter is used by the main MPU 82 to specify a period that is treated as valid even after the main MPU 82 enters the closed state. The confirmation flag group 211d of the work area 211 for specific control includes the out port 24a, the three general winning ports 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, the second operating port 34, and the through gate 35, respectively. Various confirmation flags are provided for the main MPU 82 to confirm the entry of game balls. The checking counter 211g in the specific control work area 211 is used when controlling the display of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204.

The first to third winning monitoring timer counters 213a to 213c in the work area 213 for non-specific control correspond to the three general winning openings 31 on a one-to-one basis. The first to third winning monitoring timer counters 213a to 213c detect one gaming ball in the winning opening detection sensors 231a to 233a provided in the corresponding general winning opening 31, and then disable the detection of the next gaming ball. This is a counter used by the main MPU 82 to specify the period to be handled as . In addition, in the first embodiment, four general winning holes 31 were provided, but in this embodiment, three general winning holes 31 are provided.

The fourth prize monitoring timer counter 213d of the work area 213 for non-specific control determines the period after the special electric detection sensor 234a of the special electric winning device 32 detects one game ball and treats the detection of the next game ball as invalid. This is a counter used for identification by the main MPU 82. The fifth prize monitoring timer counter 213e of the work area 213 for non-specific control detects one game ball with the first operation port detection sensor 235a provided in the first operation port 33, and then starts the next game ball. This is a counter used by the main MPU 82 to specify a period during which detection is treated as invalid. The sixth prize monitoring timer counter 213f of the work area 213 for non-specific control detects one game ball with the second operating port detection sensor 236a of the second operating port 34, and then disables the detection of the next gaming ball. This is a counter used by the main MPU 82 to specify the period to be handled as . The seventh prize monitoring timer counter 213g of the work area 213 for non-specific control detects one game ball with the exit detection sensor 237a provided at the exit 24a, and then disables the detection of the next game ball. This is a counter used by the main MPU 82 to specify the period to be handled. The eighth prize monitoring timer counter 213h in the work area 213 for non-specific control detects one game ball with the gate detection sensor 238a provided in the through gate 35, and then treats the detection of the next game ball as invalid. This is a counter used by the main MPU 82 to specify the period.

Details will be described later, but whether or not the game balls enter normally into the three general winning ports 31, special electric winning device 32, first operating port 33, second operating port 34, through gate 35, and out port 24a. Processing for monitoring is included in non-specific control. In this case, whether or not the game balls enter the three general winning ports 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, the second operating port 34, the through gate 35, and the out port 24a normally. Of the various timer counters 211b, 211c, 213a to 213h provided for monitoring, the special power monitoring delay timer counter 211b and the general power monitoring delay timer counter 211c are provided in the work area 211 for specific control. On the other hand, the first to eighth prize monitoring timer counters 213a to 213h are provided in the work area 213 for non-specific control.

Since the measurement of the invalid period of game ball detection using the first to eighth prize monitoring timer counters 213a to 213h is started in response to the detection results of each detection sensor 231a to 238a, the start timing is specified in the control process. It is possible to specify by non-specific control processing without considering the results. Therefore, by providing the first to eighth prize monitoring timer counters 213a to 213h in the work area 213 for non-specific control, the first to eighth winning prize monitoring timer counters 213a to 213h can be It becomes possible to measure the invalid period of game ball detection using non-specific control processing. Under such circumstances, by providing the first to eighth prize monitoring timer counters 213a to 213h in the work area 213 for non-specific control, it is possible to reduce the storage capacity required in the work area 211 for specific control. It becomes possible.

On the other hand, the measurement of the effective period of game ball detection using the special electric power monitoring delay timer counter 211b is started when the special electric power winning device 32 is changed from the open state to the closed state. Measurement of the effective period of game ball detection using the delay timer counter 211c is started upon execution of the process of changing the second operating port 34 from the open state to the closed state. Since the process of closing the special electric prize winning device 32 and the second actuating port 34 is executed as a specific control process, the start trigger can be used as a non-specific control process without considering the process result of the specific control. It is impossible to specify the In this case, if the special power monitoring delay timer counter 211b and the general power monitoring delay timer counter 211c are provided in the work area 213 for non-specific control, the special power monitoring delay timer counter 211b and the general power monitoring delay timer counter 211c are provided in the work area 213 for non-specific control. There is a possibility that the processing configuration for specifying the trigger for starting measurement of the effective period in the counter 211c becomes complicated. In contrast, by providing the special power monitoring delay timer counter 211b and the general power monitoring delay timer counter 211c in the work area 211 for specific control instead of the work area 213 for non-specific control, the work area for specific control can be Although the required storage capacity in 211 increases accordingly, it is possible to prevent the processing configuration from becoming complicated.

The first to third general winning abnormality flags 213l to 213n of the work area 213 for non-specific control are provided in one-to-one correspondence to the three general winning openings 31, and the first to third winning monitoring timers As a result of the monitoring process using the counters 213a to 213c, if it is specified in the non-specific control process that abnormal ball entry has been detected, the first - "1" is set in the corresponding flag among the third general winning abnormality flags 213l to 213n. The special electric prize winning abnormality flag 213o in the work area 213 for non-specific control is provided corresponding to the special electric prize winning device 32, and is the result of the monitoring process using the special electric wire monitoring delay timer counter 211b or the fourth prize winning monitoring timer counter 213d. , If it is specified in the non-specific control process that the detection of an abnormal game ball entering the ball has occurred, "1" is set in the special electric winning abnormality flag 213o in the non-specific control process. .

The first operation prize abnormality flag 213p of the work area 213 for non-specific control is provided corresponding to the first operation port 33, and as a result of the monitoring process using the fifth prize monitoring timer counter 213e, an abnormal game is detected. When it is specified in the non-specific control process that the detection of a ball entering the ball has occurred, "1" is set in the first operation winning abnormality flag 213p in the non-specific control process. The second operation prize abnormality flag 213q of the work area 213 for non-specific control is provided corresponding to the second operation port 34, and is set using the general electricity monitoring delay timer counter 211c or the sixth prize monitoring timer counter 213f. As a result of the monitoring process, if it is specified in the non-specific control process that the detection of an abnormal ball entering the game ball has occurred, the second operation winning abnormality flag 213q is set to " 1" is set.

The out abnormality flag 213r of the work area 213 for non-specific control is provided corresponding to the out port 24a, and as a result of monitoring processing using the seventh prize monitoring timer counter 213g, it is possible to detect abnormal entry of game balls. If the occurrence of detection is specified in the non-specific control process, the out abnormality flag 213r is set to "1" in the non-specific control process. The gate winning abnormality flag 213s of the work area 213 for specific control is provided corresponding to the through gate 35, and as a result of the monitoring process using the 8th winning monitoring timer counter 213h, it is determined that abnormal game balls have entered the game ball. When the occurrence of detection is specified in the non-specific control process, the gate winning abnormality flag 213s is set to "1" in the non-specific control process.

The magnetic detection counter 213i in the work area 213 for non-specific control is a counter for the main MPU 82 to specify the number of times the occurrence of magnetic abnormality has been specified. In this embodiment, a magnetic detection sensor (not shown) is provided on the back side of the game board 24, and the detection result of the magnetic detection sensor is input to the main MPU 82. The magnetic detection sensor outputs a LOW level magnetic detection signal to the main MPU 82 when it does not detect magnetism, and outputs a HI level magnetic detection signal to the main MPU 82 when it detects magnetism. The magnetic monitoring delay timer counter 213j in the work area 213 for non-specific control is a counter for the main MPU 82 to specify a period in which magnetic abnormality monitoring is not performed. The magnetic anomaly flag 213t in the work area 213 for non-specific control includes a flag that is measured by the magnetic detection counter 213i in a situation where the magnetic monitoring delay timer counter 213j does not measure the period in which magnetic anomaly is not monitored. If it is specified in the non-specific control process that the number of occurrences of timing abnormality has reached the abnormality reference number (specifically, "3"), "1" is set in the non-specific control process. .

<Command sending configuration>
FIG. 79 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the electrical configuration for transmitting commands from the main side MPU 82 to the audio-light side MPU 93.

The main side MPU 82 is provided with a specific control processing unit 221 as a function of executing specific control processing using the specific control program and specific control data stored in the main side ROM 83. A non-specific control processing unit 222 is provided as a function of executing non-specific control processing using the non-specific control program and non-specific control data stored in the side ROM 83. When specific control processing is executed in the specific control processing unit 221, as described above, information is read from and written from the specific control work area 211 and the specific control stack area 212. At the same time, information is read from the work area 213 for non-specific control. Note that when the specific control processing unit 221 executes specific control processing, information is not written to the work area 213 for non-specific control and the stack area 214 for non-specific control. When non-specific control processing is executed in the non-specific control processing unit 222, as already explained, information is read from the work area 213 for non-specific control and the stack area 214 for non-specific control, and information is At the same time as writing is performed, information is read from the work area 211 for specific control. Note that when the non-specific control processing unit 222 executes non-specific control processing, information is not written to the specific control work area 211 and the specific control stack area 212.

Regardless of whether the specific control processing unit 221 executes specific control processing or the non-specific control processing unit 222 executes non-specific control processing, the register provided in the main MPU 82 Information is read from area 223 and information is written to register area 223. The register area 223 is provided with a general-purpose register area 223a and a command transmission buffer 223b. The general-purpose register area 223a includes a flag register, various general-purpose registers, auxiliary registers, index registers, and the like. A WA register, BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register, IY register, etc. are provided as various general-purpose registers, auxiliary registers, and index registers.

The command transmission buffer 223b is required to transmit a predetermined command to the sound and light side MPU 93 provided on the sound and light emission control board 92 of the sound and light emission control device 91 when specific control processing is executed by the specific control processing unit 221. A predetermined command that is to be transmitted when an error occurs is stored. In addition, the command transmission buffer 223b is configured to specify a specific command to be transmitted when it becomes necessary to transmit a specific command to the sound/light side MPU 93 due to execution of non-specific control processing in the non-specific control processing unit 222. commands are stored. The command transmission buffer 223b is provided as a ring buffer having a plurality of unit storage areas capable of storing one type of command. The command to be sent is written into a unit storage area corresponding to the information of the write pointer provided in the main MPU 82. In this case, the unit storage areas to be written are sequentially switched in accordance with a predetermined order, and after the last unit storage area becomes the write target, the first unit storage area becomes the write target.

The command written in each unit storage area of the command transmission buffer 223b is transmitted to the audio-optical side MPU 93 by the command transmission circuit 224 provided in the main side MPU 82. The command transmission circuit 224 is provided with a read pointer, and transmits the command stored in the unit storage area corresponding to the information of the read pointer to the audio-optical side MPU 93. In this case, the unit storage areas to be read are sequentially switched in accordance with a specific order, and after the unit storage area in the last order is the unit storage area to be read, the unit storage area in the first order is the unit storage area to be read.

The command transmission circuit 224 executes the process using the program in the specific control processing section 221 and the non-specific control processing section 222 of the main MPU 82 without intervening, that is, without intervening the execution of the process using the program. A command is read from the unit storage area to be read in the command transmission buffer 223b, and the read command is transmitted. Therefore, even in a situation where the command transmission circuit 224 is transmitting a command to the sound-light side MPU 93, the specific control processing section 221 can execute specific control processing, and the non-specific control processing section 222 can execute the specific control processing. Non-specific control processing may be performed. Furthermore, even if the command stored in the command transmission buffer 223b is being transmitted by the command transmission circuit 224 due to execution of specific control processing by the specific control processing unit 221, the specific control processing unit 221 The configuration is such that not only specific control processing can be executed in the non-specific control processing section 222, but also non-specific control processing can be executed in the non-specific control processing section 222. As a result, even in a situation where the command stored in the command transmission buffer 223b is being transmitted by the command transmission circuit 224, the non-specific control processing unit 222 can not only execute non-specific control processing but also specific control processing. This configuration allows the unit 221 to execute specific control processing.

Note that the speed at which the command transmission circuit 224 transmits commands to the audio-optical side MPU 93 is such that when a new command is stored in the command transmission buffer 223b, an unsent command stored in the command transmission buffer 223b is overwritten. The speed is set at a speed that will not cause any damage.

The manner in which commands are transmitted will be explained with reference to the time chart of FIG. 80. FIG. 80(a) shows a period during which specific control processing is executed by the specific control processing unit 221, and FIG. 80(b) shows a period during which non-specific control processing is executed by the non-specific control processing unit 222. FIG. 80(c) shows the timing at which a command is stored in the command sending buffer 223b, and FIG. 80(d) shows a period during which the command is sent by the command sending circuit 224 to the audio-optical side MPU 93.

At timing t1, specific control processing in the specific control processing section 221 is started as shown in FIG. 80(a). Thereafter, the specific control process is executed at timing t2, and the command is stored in the command transmission buffer 223b as shown in FIG. 80(c). Since there is an untransmitted command in the command transmission buffer 223b, the command transmission circuit 224 starts transmitting the command at the timing t2 as shown in FIG. 80(d). Since the specific control processing in the specific control processing unit 221 and the command transmitting operation in the command transmission circuit 224 are performed independently of each other, the specific control processing in the specific control processing unit 221 and the command transmission operation in the command transmission circuit 224 are performed independently from each other, so that the specific control processing in the specific control processing section 221 and the command transmission operation in the command transmission circuit 224 are performed independently from each other, so that the specific control processing in the specific control processing section 221 and the command transmission operation in the command transmission circuit 224 are performed independently of each other. Even during a period in which commands are being transmitted by the command transmission circuit 224, the specific control processing unit 221 executes specific control processing as shown in FIG. 80(a).

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 80(a), in a situation where specific control processing is being executed in the specific control processing unit 221, the command is sent to the command transmission buffer 223b again at timing t4 as shown in FIG. 80(c). Stored. Since there is an untransmitted command in the command transmission buffer 223b, the command transmission circuit 224 starts transmitting the command at the timing t4 as shown in FIG. 80(d).

Thereafter, in a situation where the transmission of the command started at timing t4 continues, specific control processing is performed by the specific control processing unit 221 at timing t5 as shown in FIGS. 80(a) and 80(b). The situation is changed from the situation in which non-specific control processing is executed to the situation in which non-specific control processing is executed by the non-specific control processing unit 222. In this case, the operation of transmitting a command in the command transmission circuit 224 is performed not only independently of the specific control processing in the specific control processing section 221 but also independently of the non-specific control processing in the non-specific control processing section 222. It will be done. Therefore, even if the situation changes from a situation in which specific control processing is executed to a situation in which non-specific control processing is executed at timing t5, command transmission continues as shown in FIG. 80(d). . The transmission of the command ends at timing t6.

Thereafter, by executing non-specific control processing at timing t7, the command is stored in the command transmission buffer 223b as shown in FIG. 80(c). Since there is an untransmitted command in the command transmission buffer 223b, the command transmission circuit 224 starts transmitting the command at the timing t7 as shown in FIG. 80(d). Since the non-specific control processing in the non-specific control processing unit 222 and the command transmitting operation in the command transmission circuit 224 are performed independently of each other, the timing from t7 to t8 is changed as shown in FIG. 80(d). Even during the period in which commands are being transmitted by the command transmission circuit 224, the non-specific control processing unit 222 executes non-specific control processing as shown in FIG. 80(b).

After that, as shown in FIG. 80(b), in a situation where non-specific control processing is being executed in the non-specific control processing unit 222, a command is sent to the command transmission buffer 223b at timing t9 as shown in FIG. 80(c). is stored again. Since there is an untransmitted command in the command transmission buffer 223b, the command transmission circuit 224 starts transmitting the command at the timing t9 as shown in FIG. 80(d).

Thereafter, in a situation where the command transmission started at timing t9 continues, the non-specific control processing unit 222 performs non-specific control at timing t10 as shown in FIGS. 80(a) and 80(b). The situation where the process is being executed is switched to the situation where the specific control processing section 221 executes the specific control process. In this case, the operation of transmitting a command in the command transmission circuit 224 is performed not only independently of the non-specific control processing in the non-specific control processing section 222 but also independently from the specific control processing in the specific control processing section 221. It will be done. Therefore, even if the situation changes from a situation in which specific control processing is executed to a situation in which non-specific control processing is executed at timing t10, command transmission continues as shown in FIG. 80(d). . The transmission of the command ends at timing t11.

As described above, both the situation where specific control processing is being executed by the specific control processing unit 221 and the situation where non-specific control processing is being executed by the non-specific control processing unit 222 are subject to transmission. The command sent is stored in the command transmission buffer 223b of the register area 223. In other words, even if the area to which information is written in the main RAM 84 is different between the situation where specific control processing is being executed and the situation where non-specific control processing is being executed, The area for writing the command is used both in the situation where specific control processing is being executed and in the situation where non-specific control processing is being executed. Therefore, there is no need to consolidate the processing for storing commands into either specific control processing or non-specific control processing, so it is possible to prevent the processing configuration for storing commands from becoming complicated. It becomes possible.

The commands stored in the command transmission buffer 223b are transmitted to the sound-light side MPU 93 by the command transmission circuit 224, which operates independently of the specific control processing and the non-specific control processing. As a result, there is no need to adjust the command transmission timing in relation to the execution content of the process using the program in the main MPU 82, so it is possible to simplify the processing configuration of the process using the program in the main MPU 82. becomes.

<Main processing>
Next, various processes executed by the main MPU 82 using programs will be explained. FIG. 81 is a flowchart showing the main processing in this embodiment executed by the main MPU 82. Note that among the processes from step S4901 to step S4932 in the main process, processes other than the first management process called and executed in step S4927 are executed using the specific control program and specific control data. The first management process is executed by the specific control processing unit 221 of the side MPU 82, and the first management process is executed by the non-specific control processing unit 222 of the main MPU 82 using a non-specific control program and non-specific control data. Ru.

First, power-on initial setting processing is executed (step S4901). In the power-on initial setting process, for example, the process waits without proceeding to the next process until a predetermined wait time (specifically, 1 second) has elapsed after the main process is started. During this predetermined wait period, the start of operation and initial setting of the symbol display device 41 are completed. Also, access to the main RAM 84 is permitted.

Thereafter, internal function register setting processing is executed (step S4902). In the internal function register setting process, the interrupt cycle of the first timer interrupt process (Figure 88), which will be described later, is a process that is started by periodically interrupting the main process, and is set to the first interrupt cycle (specifically, 4 mm). seconds), and set the interrupt cycle of the second timer interrupt process (Figure 114), which will be described later, which is a process that is started by periodically interrupting the main process, to be shorter than the first interrupt cycle. Set to the second interrupt period (specifically, 2 milliseconds).

That is, in this embodiment, the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 88) and the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 114) are provided so that the interrupt cycles are relatively long and short. Both the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 88) and the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 114) are started by interrupting the main process. Further, the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 114) is started by interrupting the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 88). On the other hand, the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 88) interrupts the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 114) and is not activated. In addition, if both the first interrupt cycle and the second interrupt cycle have elapsed in a situation where both the first timer interrupt process (Figure 88) and the second timer interrupt process (Figure 114) are not being executed, those cycles The second timer interrupt process (FIG. 114) is activated first regardless of the order of progress. In this respect, it can be said that the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 114) is started with priority over the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 88). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a configuration may be adopted in which the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 88) is activated with priority over the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 114).

In the internal function register setting process, the first interrupt cycle of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 88) is set in a predetermined register of the main MPU 82, and the second interrupt cycle of the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 114) is set as the main interrupt cycle. Set in a specific register of the side MPU 82. Further, in the internal function register setting process, in addition to setting the first and second interrupt cycles, for example, setting process of the numerical range of various counters such as the numerical range of the winning random number counter C1 is executed.

Thereafter, protection setting processing is executed (step S4903). In the protection setting process, by setting "1" to the protect register 223c provided in the register area 223 of the main side MPU 82, the work area 211 for specific control and the stack for specific control among the areas of the main side RAM 84 are set. Unused areas other than area 212, work area 213 for non-specific control, and stack area 214 for non-specific control are excluded from information writing (including clearing to "0"). .

Specifically, the main MPU 82 is provided with a RAM management circuit 225 (see FIG. 79) for writing information into and reading information from the main RAM 84. When the address of an area from which information is to be read is specified by execution of processing by a program in the main MPU 82, the RAM management circuit 225 reads information from the area of the specified address and supplies it to the main MPU 82, When the address of an area to which information is to be written is specified by execution of processing by a program in the main MPU 82, the specified information is written in the area of the specified address. In this case, the main side ROM 83 has an address range of an unused area in the main side RAM 84 (address Y (r + 3) to address Y (r + 5), address Y (s + 3) to address Y (s + 5), address Y (t + 3) ~Address Y(t+5)) is stored in advance. If the RAM management circuit 225 is protected and the address of the area to which information is to be written is specified, the RAM management circuit 225 specifies that the address falls within the address range of an unused area stored in the main ROM 83. If it is included, the information will not be written. Writing of this information also includes clearing to "0". This makes it possible to prevent information from being written to an unused area in the main RAM 84.

Note that the RAM management circuit 225 identifies that the address designated as the target for writing information in the situation where the protection setting is performed is included in the address range of an unused area stored in the main ROM 83. If this occurs, the configuration may be such that not only the information is not written, but also an abnormality notification is executed. The execution mode of the abnormality notification is arbitrary, but for example, the display light emitting unit 64 may be configured to emit light for the abnormality, the speaker unit 65 may be configured to output a sound for the abnormality, and the pattern display device 41 may be configured to display an error message, or a management computer provided in the gaming hall may be configured to output an error message to the outside.

The register area 223 of the main MPU 82 is provided with a protect register 223c as shown in FIG. The protect register 223c protects unused areas (address Y(r+3) to address Y(r+5), address Y(s+3) to address Y(s+5), address Y(t+3) to address Y(t+5)) in the main side RAM 84. This is a storage area for specifying in the RAM management circuit 225 whether or not writing of information is disabled. If the protect information is set in the protect register 223c, the above protection setting is performed, and the address included in the address range of the unused area stored in the main ROM 83 is written to. Even if specified, no information will be written to the area of the address as described above. On the other hand, if the protect information is not set in the protect register 223c, the above protection setting is not performed, and the address included in the address range of the unused area stored in the main ROM 83 is written. When specified as a target, information is written to the area of that address.

The protect register 223c is set as a 1-bit area. The case where "1" is set in the relevant protect register 223c corresponds to the case where protect information is set in the relevant protect register 223c, and the case where the information in the relevant protect register 223c is "0" corresponds to the relevant protect register 223c. This applies when no protection information is set. When the supply of operating power to the main MPU 82 is started, the information in the protect register 223c is "0", so no protect information is set, but the protect setting process in step S4903 is executed. As a result, "1" is set in the protect register 223c, and the protect information is set. As a result, information regarding unused areas (address Y(r+3) to address Y(r+5), address Y(s+3) to address Y(s+5), address Y(t+3) to address Y(t+5)) in the main side RAM 84 is obtained. It becomes impossible to write.

Note that the protect register 223c is not limited to a 1-bit area, but may be configured as a 2-bit or more area, a 1-byte area, or a 2-byte area.

Thereafter, the start-up processing flag provided in the work area 211 for specific control is set to "1" (step S4904). Even if the first timer interrupt process (Figure 88) described later is started, the start-up process flag is used to monitor power outage and update various counters among the various processes set in the first timer interrupt process (Figure 88). , and the process for managing the game history, while the main MPU 82 indicates that the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 88) should be terminated without executing the process for advancing the game. This is a flag for specifying.

The start-up process flag is set to "1" when the process at the start of the supply of operating power (steps S4901 to S4928) is started in the main process (FIG. 81); It is cleared to "0" after (steps S4901 to S4928) are completed and before the remaining processing (steps S4929 to S4932) is started. In the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 88), when the startup processing flag is set to "1", the processing from step S5506 to step S5520 is not executed. Among the processes (steps S4901 to S4928), it is possible to prevent the process for advancing the game from being executed in a situation where the setting confirmation process or the setting value update process, which will be described later, is being executed. On the other hand, in the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 88), even if the start-up processing flag is set to "1", the operating power is Even if the setting confirmation process or the setting value update process, which will be described later, is being executed among the processes at the start of supply (steps S4901 to S4928), power outage monitoring is executed, and the winning random number counter C1, type The random number counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the random number initial value counter CINI are updated, and the game history is further managed.

Incidentally, in a situation where the setting confirmation process or the setting value update process is being executed, interrupts are not prohibited for either the first timer interrupt process (Figure 88) or the second timer interrupt process (Figure 114). It is possible to interrupt at any timing. In this case, if the first timer interrupt process (Figure 88) or the second timer interrupt process (Figure 114) is interrupted and activated in the setting confirmation process or setting value update process, the timer interrupt that was the target of activation Information on the return address of the main process (FIG. 81) for returning after the process is completed is saved in the stack area 212 for specific control, and various registers of the main MPU 82 immediately before the timer interrupt process is started. information is saved in the stack area 212 for specific control. Then, when the timer interrupt processing that has been activated ends, the processing returns to the main processing (FIG. 81) corresponding to the return address information saved in the stack area 212 for specific control, and The information saved in the stack area 212 for specific control is returned to various registers of the main MPU 82.

After setting the startup processing flag to "1" in step S4904, it is determined whether the power outage flag provided in the work area 211 for specific control is set to "1" (step S4905). . When the power outage process is executed in the power outage information storage process (step S5501) of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 88), the power outage flag is set to "1". The power outage flag is a flag used by the main MPU 82 to determine whether or not power outage processing was appropriately performed during the previous power cutoff.

If the power outage flag is set to "1" (step S4905: YES), it is determined whether the checksum is normal (step S4906). Specifically, first, checksums are calculated for the work area 211 for specific control and the stack area 212 for specific control. Thereafter, the specific control work area 211 and the specific control work area 211 calculated in the power outage processing executed immediately before the supply of operating power to the main MPU 82 is stopped and stored in the specific control work area 211. The checksum for the stack area 212 is read, and the read checksum is compared with the checksum calculated as described above in the current main processing. Then, it is determined whether these checksums match.

If the checksums match (step S4906: YES), it is determined whether the setting value corresponding to the information stored in the setting reference area in the specific control work area 211 is within a normal range ( Step S4907). The setting reference area is a storage area in which information for specifying the current setting values of the pachinko machine 10 by the main MPU 82 is stored. If numerical information of "1" is stored in the setting reference area, the current setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is "setting 1". If numerical information of "2" is stored in the setting reference area, the current setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is "setting 2". If the numerical information of "3" is stored in the setting reference area, the current setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is "setting 3". If numerical information of "4" is stored in the setting reference area, the current setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is "setting 4". If numerical information of "5" is stored in the setting reference area, the current setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is "setting 5". If numerical information of "6" is stored in the setting reference area, the current setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is "setting 6". In step S4907, it is determined whether the setting value information stored in the setting reference area is one of "1" to "6".

If a positive determination is made in all steps S4905 to S4907, it is determined whether the setting update display flag provided in the work area 211 for specific control is set to "1" (step S4908). The setting update display flag is a flag used by the main MPU 82 to specify that the setting value update process described later is being executed, and when the setting update display flag is set to "1", the main controller The setting display device 205 of 71 displays a setting value that is currently being updated. The setting update display flag is a flag that is set to "1" when the setting value update process is started and cleared to "0" when the setting value update process is finished, so the setting value update process is not executed. In a situation where the setting update display flag is not set to "1", the setting update display flag is basically not set to "1". However, if the supply of operating power to the main MPU 82 is stopped while the setting value update process is being executed, the setting update display will not be displayed when the supply of operating power to the main MPU 82 is subsequently started. The flag is set to "1". The state in which the setting update display flag is set to "1" is maintained until the setting update display flag is cleared to "0" in the setting value update process.

If a negative determination is made in step S4908 because the setting update display flag is not set to "1", it is determined whether or not the reset button 196 is pressed (step S4909). That is, it is determined whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is powered on while the reset button 196 is pressed and the supply of operating power to the main MPU 82 is started.

If the reset button 196 is not pressed (step S4909: NO), it is determined whether the game stop flag provided in the work area 211 for specific control is set to "1" (step S4910). The game stop flag is a flag that is set to "1" when the power outage flag is not set to "1", when the checksums do not match, or when the set value is abnormal. By setting the game stop flag to "1", steps S5501 to S5504 and step S5521 are executed in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 88), and when an affirmative determination is made in step S5505, steps are executed. The processes from S5506 to S5520 are not executed. As a result, if the power outage flag is not set to "1" because the power outage processing was not performed properly during the previous power shutdown, the work area 211 for specific control and the stack area 212 for specific control If the checksums do not match due to a change in the storage state of information on at least one side since the last time the power was shut off, or if the set value is abnormal, power outage monitoring, updating of various counters, and gaming While the process for managing the history is executed, the process for advancing the game is not executed. If an affirmative determination is made in step S4910, processing in steps S4924 and S4925, which will be described later, is executed.

If a negative determination is made in step S4910, it is determined whether the setting key insertion unit 195 is turned on using a setting key (step S4911). If the setting key insertion section 195 is turned on using a setting key (step S4911: YES), a setting confirmation process is executed (step S4913). Furthermore, even if the setting key insertion section 195 is not turned on using a setting key (step S4911: NO), "1" is set in the setting confirmation display flag provided in the work area 211 for specific control. If it is set (step S4912: YES), a setting confirmation process is executed (step S4913).

The setting confirmation display flag is a flag for the main MPU 82 to specify that the setting confirmation process is being executed, and when the setting confirmation display flag is set to "1", the main controller 71 The setting display device 205 displays the currently set setting values. The settings confirmation display flag is a flag that is set to "1" when the settings confirmation process is started and cleared to "0" when the settings confirmation process is finished, so the settings confirmation process is not executed. In a situation where the setting confirmation display flag is not set to "1", basically the setting confirmation display flag is not set to "1". However, if the supply of operating power to the main MPU 82 is stopped while the setting confirmation process is being executed, the setting confirmation display will not be displayed when the supply of operating power to the main MPU 82 is subsequently started. The flag is set to "1". When this setting confirmation display flag is set to "1", the RAM clearing process (step S4919) described later is executed, the setting value updating process described later is executed, or the setting is confirmed in the setting confirmation process. It is maintained until the process of clearing the display flag to "0" is executed.

Not only when the reset button 196 is not pressed as described above and the setting key insertion section 195 is turned on (that is, when the "setting confirmation operation" is performed), but also when the reset button 196 is pressed. Since the setting confirmation process is executed even when the setting confirmation display flag is set to "1" even in a situation where no press operation is being performed, the processing at the time of a power outage is performed in a situation where the setting confirmation process is being executed. If this is executed, the setting confirmation process will be executed even if the "setting confirmation operation" is not performed when the supply of operating power is subsequently restarted. This makes it possible to continue checking the current setting values of the pachinko machine 10. On the other hand, even if the power outage process is executed in a situation where the setting confirmation process is executed, if the reset button 196 is pressed when the supply of operating power is resumed, the setting confirmation process is executed. Among the RAM clearing process (step S4919) and setting value updating process, the process corresponding to the operation performed when the supply of operating power is restarted is executed without being executed. This makes it possible to prioritize execution of the RAM clearing process (step S4919) or the setting value update process over the setting confirmation process.

Here, the setting confirmation process executed in step S4913 will be explained. FIG. 82 is a flowchart showing the setting confirmation process. Note that the processes from step S5001 to step S5007 in the setting confirmation process are executed by the specific control processing unit 221 of the main MPU 82 using a specific control program and specific control data.

First, interrupt permission is set (step S5001). As a result, the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 88) is interrupted and activated in the first interrupt cycle, and the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 114) is interrupted and activated in the second interrupt cycle.

In the processing at the start of supply of operating power (steps S4901 to S4928), interrupts of the first timer interrupt processing (Fig. 88) and the second timer interrupt processing (Fig. 114) are basically prohibited, and the processing for setting confirmation is prohibited. Interrupts are permitted in the setting value update process. Therefore, in a situation where the setting confirmation process and the setting value update process are not executed in the process at the start of the supply of operating power (steps S4901 to S4928), the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 88) and the second timer interrupt process (Fig. 114) is prohibited, and the first timer interrupt processing (Fig. 88) and the second timer interrupt processing (Fig. 114) are permitted to be executed in a situation where the setting confirmation processing or setting value update processing is being executed. Ru. However, when the setting confirmation process or setting value update process is being executed, the start-up process flag is set to 1, so even if the first timer interrupt process (Figure 88) is started, Among the various processes of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 88), processes for monitoring power outages, updating various counters, and managing gaming history are executed, while processes for advancing the game are executed. The first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 88) is ended without any interruption.

Thereafter, on the condition that the setting confirmation display flag provided in the work area 211 for specific control is not set to "1", the setting confirmation display flag is set to "1" (step S5002). By setting the setting confirmation display flag to "1", the setting display device 205 of the main control device 71 displays the currently set setting values.

Thereafter, the confirmation start command is stored in the command transmission buffer 223b in the register area 223 of the main MPU 82 (step S5003). By storing the confirmation start command in the command transmission buffer 223b, the confirmation start command is transmitted to the sound-light side MPU 93 by the operation of the command transmission circuit 224. Upon receiving the confirmation start command, the sound/light side MPU 93 displays a pattern of an image indicating that the setting confirmation process is being executed and an image that makes it possible to recognize the operation details for terminating the setting confirmation process. Display control is performed on the display side MPU 103 so that the display is displayed on the device 41. This makes it possible for the game hall manager to recognize that the current setting values of the pachinko machine 10 are being checked, as well as the details of the operations necessary to end the setting confirmation process. It becomes possible for the manager of the game hall to recognize this.

Thereafter, the setting key insertion unit 195 uses the setting key to determine whether the ON state is switched to the OFF state (step S5004). Specifically, it is determined whether the reception state of the signal received from the detection sensor that detects the state of the setting key insertion section 195 has changed from the reception state corresponding to the ON state to the reception state corresponding to the OFF state. . Therefore, the OFF state is maintained not only when the setting key insertion section 195 is maintained in the ON state, but also when the setting confirmation process is started in a situation where the setting key insertion section 195 is in the OFF state. In this case, a negative determination is made in step S5004. If the setting key insertion unit 195 does not specify that the setting key insertion unit 195 has switched from the ON state to the OFF state (step S5004: NO), the process of step S5004 is repeated.

When it is specified that the setting key insertion section 195 has switched from the ON state to the OFF state (step S5004: YES), the setting confirmation display flag in the work area 211 for specific control is cleared to "0" (step S5005). This ends the display of the currently set setting values on the setting display device 205.

Thereafter, interrupt prohibition is set (step S5006). As a result, when ending the setting confirmation process and returning to the process at the time of starting the supply of operating power (steps S4901 to S4928) in the main process (FIG. 81), the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 88) and the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 88) 2 timer interrupt processing (FIG. 114) is prohibited.

Thereafter, the return command upon confirmation is stored in the command transmission buffer 223b in the register area 223 of the main MPU 82 (step S5007). By storing the return command at the time of confirmation in the command transmission buffer 223b, the return command at the time of confirmation is transmitted to the sound-light side MPU 93 by the operation of the command transmission circuit 224. By receiving the return command at the time of confirmation, the sound and light side MPU 93 can recognize the image indicating that the setting confirmation process is being executed on the symbol display device 41 and the operation details for terminating the setting confirmation process. Terminate the display of the image for the purpose of displaying the image.

As described above, by turning on the power of the pachinko machine 10 while turning on the setting key insertion part 195 with the setting key without pressing the reset button 196, the supply of operating power to the main MPU 82 starts. In the situation where the reset button 196 has not been pressed and the setting key insertion section 195 has been turned on in the situation where the main processing (FIG. 81) has been started, the game can proceed in the main processing (FIG. 81). The setting confirmation process is executed in a situation where the process at the start of supply of operating power is being executed, which is the situation before the process is executed. This makes it possible to check the set values even when no games are being played.

Returning to the explanation of the main process (FIG. 81), when the setting key insertion section 195 is not turned on using a setting key and the setting confirmation display flag is not set to "1" (step S4911 and Step S4912: NO), the normal return command is stored in the command transmission buffer 223b in the register area 223 of the main MPU 82 (Step S4914). By storing the normal return command in the command transmission buffer 223b, the normal return command is transmitted to the sound-light side MPU 93 by the operation of the command transmission circuit 224. By receiving the normal return command, the sound-light side MPU 93 specifies that the processing at the time of starting the supply of operating power (steps S4901 to S4928) has been completed in the main side MPU 82, and also specifies that the processing at the time of starting the supply of operating power this time has been completed. In the process (steps S4901 to S4928), it is determined that none of the RAM clear process (step S4919), the setting confirmation process, and the setting value update process are being executed. Then, processing corresponding to receiving the normal return command is executed.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S4909 that the reset button 196 is pressed and it is determined in step S4915 that the setting key insertion section 195 is turned on using a setting key, or If it is determined in S4908 that the setting update display flag is set to "1", setting value update processing is executed (step S4916). Not only when the reset button 196 is pressed as described above and the setting key insertion section 195 is turned on (that is, when a "setting change operation" is performed), but also when the reset button 196 is pressed. The setting value update process is executed even when the setting update display flag is set to "1" regardless of whether there is a pressing operation or an ON operation of the setting key insertion part 195. If power outage processing is executed in a situation where the power outage process is executed, the following operations will be performed when starting the supply of operating power: "No operation," "RAM clear operation," "setting change operation," and "setting confirmation operation." The setting value update process is executed no matter which of the above is the case. This makes it possible to give priority to the execution of the setting value update process.

Here, the setting value update process executed in step S4916 will be explained. FIG. 83 is a flowchart showing the setting value update process. Note that the processes from step S5101 to step S5115 in the setting value update process are executed by the specific control processing unit 221 of the main MPU 82 using a specific control program and specific control data.

First, interrupt permission is set (step S5101). As a result, the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 88) is interrupted and activated in the first interrupt cycle, and the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 114) is interrupted and activated in the second interrupt cycle.

In the processing at the start of supply of operating power (steps S4901 to S4928), interrupts of the first timer interrupt processing (Fig. 88) and the second timer interrupt processing (Fig. 114) are basically prohibited, and the processing for setting confirmation is prohibited. Interrupts are permitted in the setting value update process. Therefore, in a situation where the setting confirmation process and the setting value update process are not executed in the process at the start of the supply of operating power (steps S4901 to S4928), the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 88) and the second timer interrupt process (Fig. 114) is prohibited, and the first timer interrupt processing (Fig. 88) and the second timer interrupt processing (Fig. 114) are permitted to be executed in a situation where the setting confirmation processing or setting value update processing is being executed. Ru. However, when the setting confirmation process or setting value update process is being executed, the start-up process flag is set to 1, so even if the first timer interrupt process (Figure 88) is started, Among the various processes of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 88), processes for monitoring power outages, updating various counters, and managing gaming history are executed, while processes for advancing the game are executed. The first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 88) is ended without any interruption.

Thereafter, the setting update display flag is set to "1" on the condition that the setting update display flag provided in the work area 211 for specific control is not set to "1" (step S5102). By setting the setting update display flag to "1", the setting display device 205 of the main controller 71 displays the currently selected setting value.

Thereafter, initial settings at the time of starting are performed (step S5103). In the initial setting, the game stop flag provided in the work area 211 for specific control is cleared to "0". If the power outage flag is not set to "1" because the power outage process was not performed appropriately during the previous power outage (step S4905: NO), the game stop flag is set to the specific control work area 211 and If the checksums do not match due to a change in the storage state of information in at least one of the stack areas 212 for specific control since the last time the power was shut off (step S4906: NO), or if the checksums do not match in the setting reference area This flag is set to "1" in step S4922 of the main process (FIG. 81) when the setting value corresponding to the stored information is not within the normal range (step S4907: NO). By setting the game stop flag to "1", steps S5501 to S5504 and step S5521 are executed in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 88), and when an affirmative determination is made in step S5505, steps are executed. The processes from S5506 to S5520 are not executed. As a result, when an information abnormality in the main RAM 84 as described above occurs, processing for monitoring power outage, updating various counters, and managing gaming history is executed, while processing for advancing the game is executed. will not be executed. By clearing the game stop flag to "0" in the process of step S5103, it becomes possible to cancel the state in which the occurrence of information abnormality in the main side RAM 84 is specified when the setting value update process is executed. .

Thereafter, "1" is set in the setting update area in the work area 211 for specific control (step S5104). The setting update area is a storage area in which information about setting values that are being updated in the setting value update process is stored. If numerical information of "1" is stored in the setting update area, the setting value to be selected is "setting 1". If numerical information of "2" is stored in the setting update area, the setting value to be selected is "setting 2". If numerical information of "3" is stored in the setting update area, the setting value to be selected is "setting 3". If numerical information of "4" is stored in the setting update area, the setting value to be selected is "setting 4". If numerical information of "5" is stored in the setting update area, the setting value to be selected is "setting 5". If numerical information of "6" is stored in the setting update area, the setting value to be selected is "setting 6".

By setting "1" in the setting update area in step S5104, the setting value to be selected becomes "setting 1." In other words, no matter what the current setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is, when the setting value update process is started, the setting value to be selected will be "setting 1". Note that a configuration may be adopted in which the process of step S5104 is not executed. In this case, when the setting value update process starts, the information in the setting reference area is written to the setting update area, so that when the setting value update process starts, the setting target at that time The setting value becomes the setting value to be selected.

Thereafter, the update start command is stored in the command transmission buffer 223b in the register area 223 of the main MPU 82 (step S5105). By storing the update start command in the command transmission buffer 223b, the update start command is transmitted to the audio-optical side MPU 93 by the operation of the command transmission circuit 224. Upon receiving the update start command, the sound/light side MPU 93 displays an image indicating that the setting value update process is being executed, an image for making it possible to recognize the operation details for changing the setting value, and an image for updating the setting value. Display control is performed on the display side MPU 103 so that an image is displayed on the symbol display device 41 so that the content of the operation for terminating the process can be recognized. This allows the administrator of the game hall to recognize that the setting value is being changed, and also allows the operator to complete the necessary operation details and setting value update process to change the setting value. This makes it possible for the game hall manager to recognize the necessary operation details.

Thereafter, it is determined whether the setting value information stored in the setting update area is one of "1" to "6" (step S5106). If it is not one of "1" to "6" (step S5106: NO), "1" is set in the setting update area (step S5107). As a result, the setting value to be selected becomes "Setting 1."

If an affirmative determination is made in step S5106 or if the process in step S5107 is executed, the setting key insertion unit 195 determines whether the setting key has been switched from the ON state to the OFF state (step S5108). Specifically, it is determined whether the reception state of the signal received from the detection sensor that detects the state of the setting key insertion section 195 has changed from the reception state corresponding to the ON state to the reception state corresponding to the OFF state. do. Therefore, the OFF state is maintained not only when the setting key insertion section 195 is maintained in the ON state, but also when the setting value update process is started in a situation where the setting key insertion section 195 is in the OFF state. In this case, a negative determination is made in step S5108.

If a negative determination is made in step S5108, the value of the setting update area is incremented by 1 on the condition that the reset button 196 is pressed (step S5109: YES) (step S5110). Thereby, each time the reset button 196 is pressed once, the set value is updated to one level higher. Further, if the reset button 196 is not pressed (step S5109: NO) or if the value of the setting update area is incremented by 1, the process returns to step S5106, but in step S5106 the setting update area is If it is determined that the value of the area is 7 or more, "1" is set in the setting update area in step S5107. As a result, when the reset button 196 is pressed once in the situation of "Setting 6", the state returns to "Setting 1".

If it is determined that the setting key insertion unit 195 has switched from the ON state to the OFF state (step S5108: YES), the setting value information stored in the setting update area is overwritten in the setting reference area (step S5111). ). As a result, the setting value information updated in this setting value update process is set in the setting reference area, and the setting value corresponding to the set information is the current setting of the pachinko machine 10. value.

Thereafter, interrupt prohibition is set (step S5112). As a result, when the setting value update process is finished and the process returns to the process at the start of the supply of operating power (steps S4901 to S4928) in the main process (FIG. 81), the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 88) and the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 88) 2 timer interrupt processing (FIG. 114) is prohibited.

After that, RAM clear processing is executed (step S5113). In the RAM clearing process, in the work area 211 for specific control, except for the area where setting value information indicating the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is set (that is, the setting reference area) and the setting update display flag, The work area 211 of is cleared to "0" and initial settings are executed. As a result, the area indicating whether the win/fail lottery mode is the high probability mode is cleared to "0", so the win/fail lottery is performed regardless of the win/fail lottery mode immediately before the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped. The mode is a low probability mode. In addition, the game cycle is not being executed, the opening/closing execution mode is not being executed, and the general figure display section 38a is not being displayed in a variable manner, and the general electric accessory 34a is in a closed state. situation. In addition, since the special figure holding area 84a and the general figure holding area 84c provided in the work area 211 for specific control are also cleared to "0", the holding information for the first special figure display section 37a and the second special figure display The reservation information for the section 37b is erased, and the reservation information for the general figure display section 38a is also erased. Also, the setting confirmation display flag provided in the work area 211 for specific control is cleared to "0". Further, the setting update area provided in the work area 211 for specific control is cleared to "0". Furthermore, the game stop flag provided in the work area 211 for specific control is cleared to "0". Further, in the RAM clearing process, the stack area 212 for specific control is cleared to "0" and initial settings are executed. Further, in the RAM clearing process, initial settings are executed after various registers of the main MPU 82 are also cleared to "0". In this initial setting, processing similar to the internal function register setting processing in step S4902 is executed. Note that for the work area 213 for non-specific control and the stack area 214 for non-specific control, processing for clearing to "0" and processing for initializing are not executed.

Thereafter, the return command at the time of update is stored in the command transmission buffer 223b in the register area 223 of the main MPU 82 (step S5114). By storing the return command at the time of update in the command transmission buffer 223b, the return command at the time of update is transmitted to the sound-light side MPU 93 by the operation of the command transmission circuit 224. By receiving the return command at the time of update, the sound and light side MPU 93 can recognize an image indicating that the setting value update process is being executed in the symbol display device 41 and the operation details for changing the setting value. The display of the image and the image for making it possible to recognize the details of the operation for ending the setting value update process are ended. Thereafter, the setting update display flag in the work area 211 for specific control is cleared to "0" (step S5115).

As described above, in addition to turning on the power of the pachinko machine 10 while pressing the reset button 196, the operation of turning on the power of the pachinko machine 10 is performed while turning on the setting key insertion part 195 with the setting key. Setting value update processing is executed. Further, as described above, the setting confirmation process is executed based on the power ON operation of the pachinko machine 10 being performed while turning on the setting key insertion part 195 with the setting key without pressing the reset button 196. This makes it possible to use the ON operation for the setting key insertion section 195 in common as an operation for executing setting-related processing regarding setting values. Therefore, it is possible to make the details of the operation for generating the setting-related process easy to understand for the game hall manager.

In addition, when turning on the power of the pachinko machine 10 while turning on the setting key insertion part 195 with the setting key, and when pressing the reset button 196 is not added, a setting confirmation process is executed and the reset is performed. When adding a press operation to the button 196, a setting value update process is executed. Thereby, depending on whether or not the reset button 196 is pressed, it is possible to change the process to be executed among the setting confirmation process and the setting value update process. Therefore, it is possible to make it easy for the game hall manager to understand the operation details for executing a desired process among the setting confirmation process and the setting value update process. Furthermore, by increasing the number of operations required to execute the setting value update process than the setting confirmation process, it is possible to make it particularly difficult to perform the setting value update process illegally.

Returning to the explanation of the main process (FIG. 81), after the setting value update process is executed in step S4916, the value of the first security counter 211a provided in the work area 211 for specific control is incremented by 1 (step S4917). ). As already explained, the first security counter 211a is a counter used by the main MPU 82 to determine whether or not it is necessary to externally output a pulsed security signal from the main MPU 82 to the management computer of the gaming hall. This is a counter used by the main MPU 82 to specify the number of external outputs of a pulsed security signal when outputting to the outside.

In the main process (FIG. 81), when it is determined in step S4909 that the reset button 196 has been pressed, and when it is determined that the setting key insertion section 195 has not been turned on using a setting key. (Step S4915: NO), it is determined whether the game stop flag in the specific control work area 211 is set to "1" (Step S4918). The game stop flag is a flag that is set to "1" when the power outage flag is not set to "1", when the checksums do not match, or when the set value is abnormal. By setting the game stop flag to "1", steps S5501 to S5504 and step S5521 are executed in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 88), and when an affirmative determination is made in step S5505, steps are executed. The processes from S5506 to S5520 are not executed. As a result, if the power outage flag is not set to "1" because the power outage processing was not performed properly during the previous power shutdown, the work area 211 for specific control and the stack area 212 for specific control If the checksums do not match due to a change in the storage state of information on at least one side since the last time the power was shut off, or if the set value is abnormal, power outage monitoring, updating of various counters, and gaming While the process for managing the history is executed, the process for advancing the game is not executed.

If the game stop flag is not set to "1" (step S4918: NO), RAM clear processing is executed (step S4919). In the RAM clearing process, in the work area 211 for specific control, except for the area where setting value information indicating the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is set (that is, the setting reference area) and the setting update display flag, The work area 211 of is cleared to "0" and initial settings are executed. As a result, the area indicating whether the win/fail lottery mode is the high probability mode is cleared to "0", so the win/fail lottery is performed regardless of the win/fail lottery mode immediately before the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped. The mode is a low probability mode. In addition, the game cycle is not being executed, the opening/closing execution mode is not being executed, and the general figure display section 38a is not being displayed in a variable manner, and the general electric accessory 34a is in a closed state. situation. In addition, since the special figure holding area 84a and the general figure holding area 84c provided in the work area 211 for specific control are also cleared to "0", the holding information for the first special figure display section 37a and the second special figure display The reservation information for the section 37b is erased, and the reservation information for the general figure display section 38a is also erased. Also, the setting confirmation display flag provided in the work area 211 for specific control is cleared to "0". Further, the setting update area provided in the work area 211 for specific control is cleared to "0". Furthermore, the game stop flag provided in the work area 211 for specific control is cleared to "0". Further, in the RAM clearing process, the stack area 212 for specific control is cleared to "0" and initial settings are executed. Further, in the RAM clearing process, initial settings are executed after various registers of the main MPU 82 are also cleared to "0". In this initial setting, processing similar to the internal function register setting processing in step S4902 is executed. Note that for the work area 213 for non-specific control and the stack area 214 for non-specific control, processing for clearing to "0" and processing for initializing are not executed.

Thereafter, the value of the first security counter 211a provided in the work area 211 for specific control is incremented by 1 (step S4920). As already explained, the first security counter 211a is a counter used by the main MPU 82 to determine whether or not it is necessary to externally output a pulsed security signal from the main MPU 82 to the management computer of the gaming hall. This is a counter used by the main MPU 82 to specify the number of external outputs of a pulsed security signal when outputting to the outside.

Thereafter, the return command at the time of clearing is stored in the command transmission buffer 223b in the register area 223 of the main MPU 82 (step S4921). By storing the return command at the time of clearing in the command transmission buffer 223b, the return command at the time of clearing is transmitted to the sound-light side MPU 93 by the operation of the command transmission circuit 224. By receiving the return command at the time of clearing, the sound-light side MPU 93 specifies that the processing for starting the supply of operating power (steps S4901 to S4928) has ended in the main MPU 82, and also starts the current supply of operating power. In the time process (steps S4901 to S4928), it is specified that the RAM clear process in step S4919 has been executed. Then, the process corresponding to the reception of the return command at the time of clearing is executed.

Here, if the power outage process is executed in a situation where the setting value update process or the setting confirmation process is being executed, the process that is executed in the main process (FIG. 81) when the supply of operating power is resumed. The contents will be explained with reference to the explanatory diagram of FIG. 84.

The following describes the processing executed in the main processing (Fig. 81) when the supply of operating power is resumed when the power outage processing is executed in a situation where neither the setting value update processing nor the setting confirmation processing is executed. First, I will explain the contents.

When the supply of operating power is resumed in the "no operation" situation, none of the RAM clearing process (step S4919), setting value updating process, and setting confirmation process is executed in the main process (FIG. 81). In addition, when the supply of operating power is resumed in a situation where a "RAM clear operation" has been performed, the main process (FIG. 81) executes the RAM clear process (step S4919), while the setting value update process and the setting Confirmation processing is not executed. When the supply of operating power is resumed in a situation where a "setting change operation" has been performed, a setting value update process is executed in the main process (FIG. 81), while a RAM clear process (step S4919) and a setting confirmation No processing is performed. If the supply of operating power is resumed in a situation where the "setting confirmation operation" has been performed, a setting confirmation process is executed in the main process (FIG. 81), and a RAM clear process (step S4919) and setting value update are performed. No processing is performed.

Next, if the power outage process is executed while the setting value update process is being executed (that is, the setting update display flag is set to "1"), the main The contents of the process executed in the process (FIG. 81) will be explained.

If the supply of operating power is resumed in the situation of "no operation", if the supply of operating power is resumed in the situation of "RAM clear operation", it will operate in the situation that "setting change operation" is performed. Regardless of whether the power supply is restarted or if the operating power supply is restarted in a situation where the "setting confirmation operation" has been performed, the setting value update process is executed in the main process (Figure 81). On the other hand, the RAM clearing process (step S4919) and the setting confirmation process are not executed. In other words, if power outage processing is executed in a situation where setting value update processing is being executed, setting value update processing will be newly executed regardless of the operation contents when the supply of operating power is resumed. Begins.

With the above configuration, when the supply of operating power is stopped in the middle of the setting value update process, when restarting the supply of operating power, the setting key insertion part 195 and the reset button are pressed when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on. It becomes possible to start the setting value update process anew regardless of the content of the operation to 196. This makes it possible to reliably create an opportunity to complete updating of the setting values. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game from being started even though the setting value update has not been completed.

Furthermore, if the supply of operating power is stopped during the setting value update process, the setting value update process is uniquely executed regardless of the operation details when restarting the supply of operating power. Compared to a configuration in which the processing content to be executed is changed depending on the content of each operation, it is possible to achieve the above-mentioned excellent effects while simplifying the processing configuration.

Next, if the power outage process is executed while the setting confirmation process is being executed (that is, the setting confirmation display flag is set to "1"), the main The contents of the process executed in the process (FIG. 81) will be explained.

When the supply of operating power is resumed in a situation where "RAM clear operation" has been performed, RAM clear processing (step S4919) is executed in the main processing (FIG. 81), while setting value update processing and setting confirmation processing is not executed. In other words, even if the power outage process is executed in a situation where the settings confirmation process is being executed, if the "RAM clear operation" is performed when the supply of operating power is resumed, the settings confirmation process (Fig. 81), the RAM clearing process (step S4919) is executed. This makes it possible to give priority to the execution of the RAM clearing process (step S4919) over the "RAM clearing operation". Note that the setting confirmation display flag is cleared to "0" by executing the RAM clearing process (step S4919).

When the supply of operating power is resumed in a situation where a "setting change operation" has been performed, a setting value update process is executed in the main process (FIG. 81), but a setting confirmation process is not executed. In other words, even if the power outage processing is executed while the settings confirmation process is being executed, if a "settings change operation" is performed when the operating power supply is resumed, the settings confirmation process will be updated. Execute the setting value update process without executing it. This makes it possible to give priority to the execution of the setting value update process for the "setting change operation." Furthermore, even if the setting confirmation process is not executed in this way, by executing the setting value update process, the setting value to be selected is displayed on the setting display device 205, and at the end of the setting value update process. Since information on the setting values that are selected at that time is set in the setting reference area, the manager of the gaming hall can confirm the current setting values of the pachinko machine 10. Note that the setting confirmation display flag is cleared to "0" by executing the RAM clearing process (step S5113) in the setting value update process.

If the supply of operating power is resumed in a situation where the "setting confirmation operation" has been performed, the main process (Figure 81) will perform the setting confirmation operation on the condition that no abnormality has occurred regarding the power outage flag, checksum, and setting value. Execute processing. As a result, even if the power outage process is executed during the setting confirmation process, confirmation of the setting values can be resumed by performing the "setting confirmation operation" when the supply of operating power is resumed.

When the supply of operating power is resumed in the "no operation" situation, the main process (FIG. 81) allows the setting key insertion section 195 to The setting confirmation process is executed even if the ON operation is not performed. As a result, even if power outage processing is executed in the middle of setting confirmation processing and there is no operation when the supply of operating power is resumed, confirmation of setting values can be resumed. It becomes possible.

In the main process (FIG. 81), if a negative determination is made in any of steps S4905 to S4907, that is, if the power outage flag is not set to "1", if the checksums do not match, or if the set value is abnormal If so, the game stop flag in the specific control work area 211 is set to "1" (step S4922). As already explained, by setting the game stop flag to "1", steps S5501 to S5504 and step S5521 are executed in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 88), while an affirmative determination is made in step S5505. By doing so, the processes from step S5506 to step S5520 are not executed. As a result, if the power outage flag is not set to "1" because the power outage processing was not performed properly during the previous power shutdown, the work area 211 for specific control and the stack area 212 for specific control If the checksums do not match due to a change in the storage state of information on at least one side since the last time the power was shut off, or if the set value is abnormal, power outage monitoring, updating of various counters, and gaming While the process for managing the history is executed, the process for advancing the game is not executed.

Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the reset button 196 has been pressed (step S4923). If the reset button 196 is not pressed (step S4923: NO), an abnormality command indicating that an abnormality has occurred regarding the power failure flag, checksum, or set value is sent to the register area 223 of the main MPU 82 when supplying operating power is started. (step S4924). When the abnormal command is stored in the command transmission buffer 223b, the abnormal command is transmitted to the sound-light side MPU 93 by the operation of the command transmission circuit 224. Upon receiving the abnormality command, the sound/light side MPU 93 causes the display light emitting unit 64 to emit light in a manner corresponding to the information abnormality at the time of starting supply of operating power, and also sends a message from the speaker unit 65 saying “Please change the settings.” Outputs the sound. Further, a character image "Please change the settings" is displayed on the symbol display device 41. These notifications are maintained until the supply of operating power to the Pachinko machine 10 is stopped, and are terminated when the supply of operating power to the Pachinko machine 10 is stopped. However, even if the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is once stopped, the above notification will be restarted when the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is resumed until the setting value update process is executed. It happens.

Thereafter, external output processing in the event of an abnormality is executed (step S4920). In the external output process at the time of an abnormality, a process for externally outputting an abnormal signal to the management computer of the gaming hall is executed. In this case, the abnormal signal is output for a predetermined period (for example, 100 milliseconds). However, this is not limited to this, and in a situation where the game stop flag is set to "1", the abnormal signal will continue to be output, and when the game stop flag is cleared to "0", the abnormal signal will be output. A configuration may also be adopted in which the signal output is stopped.

If the reset button 196 is pressed (step S4923: YES), it is determined whether the setting key insertion section 195 is turned on using a setting key (step S4915). When the reset button 196 is pressed and the setting key insertion section 195 is turned on using a setting key (step S4915 and step S4923: YES), a setting value update process is executed (step S4916). The contents of the setting value update process have already been described. In other words, if operating power is supplied to the main MPU 82 while a "setting change operation" is being performed, an abnormality has occurred in the main RAM 84, so a negative result is determined in any of steps S4905 to S4907. Even if a determination is made, the setting value update process is executed. This makes it possible to prioritize changes to set values. Further, in the setting value update process, as already explained, the initial setting at the time of start is executed in step S5103, and the game stop flag is cleared to "0". As a result, when the setting value update process is executed, it becomes possible to eliminate the abnormal state in the main side RAM 84 after the setting value update is completed.

On the other hand, if the reset button 196 is pressed but the setting key insertion section 195 is not turned on (step S4923: YES, step S4915: NO), the game stop flag in the work area 211 for specific control is set to "1". ” is set (step S4918). In the process of step S4918 after the game stop flag is set to "1" in step S4922, since the game stop flag is naturally set to "1", an affirmative determination is made in step S4918. In this case, in step S4924, a process for transmitting an abnormality command to the sound-light side MPU 93 is executed, and in step S4925, an abnormality signal is output to the outside.

In other words, if an abnormality regarding the power outage flag, checksum, and set value occurs and a negative determination is made in any of steps S4905 to S4907, the operation to the main MPU 82 is Even if power supply is started, the RAM clearing process (step S4919) is not executed. Also, if the supply of operating power to the main MPU 82 is started in a situation where the game stop flag is set to "1" and a "RAM clear operation" is being performed, the RAM clear process ( Step S4919) is not executed. This prevents the game stop flag from being set to "1" even if the supply of operating power to the main MPU 82 is started while the "RAM clear operation" is being performed. It becomes possible. On the other hand, if a "setting change operation" is being performed, the setting value update process is executed regardless of whether the game stop flag is set to "1" and the setting value update process is executed. At the initial setting at the start (step S5103), the game stop flag is cleared to "0". As a result, in order to eliminate the state in which the game stop flag is set to "1", it becomes necessary to execute the setting value update process. Therefore, when an information abnormality occurs in the work area 211 for specific control, it is possible to not only perform processing to initialize the work area 211 for specific control, but also to reset the setting values. .

In addition, when the supply of operating power to the main MPU 82 is started in a situation where the game stop flag is set to "1", if no "setting change operation" has been performed, that is, "no operation". In this case, or when a "RAM clear operation" or "setting confirmation operation" is performed, an affirmative determination is made in step S4910 or step S4918, and processing for transmitting an abnormal command is executed in step S4924. In step S4925, external output processing in the event of an abnormality is executed. As a result, when the game stop flag is set to "1", regardless of the processing results of steps S4905 to S4907 in the subsequent main processing, the operation to the main MPU 82 is performed unless the setting value update processing is executed. Every time power supply is started, abnormality notification in the pachinko machine 10 and external output of the abnormality to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 are performed. Therefore, it becomes possible to make the administrator of the game hall aware that the set value should be changed.

If the process of step S4913 is executed, if the process of step S4914 is executed, if the process of step S4917 is executed, if the process of step S4921 is executed, or if the process of step S4925 is executed, the Information corresponding to the initial check period (specifically, 5 seconds) is set in the checking counter 211g (see FIG. 78) provided in the work area 211 (step S4926). The value set in the checking counter 211g is decremented by 1 each time the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 114) is activated. If a value of 1 or more is set in the checking counter 211g, the checking display continues on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. The contents of the check display will be explained in detail later.

According to the above configuration, when the supply of operating power to the main MPU 82 is started, it is after the processing at the time of starting the supply of operating power (steps S4901 to S4928) is completed in the main MPU 82, which will be described later. Before the residual processing (steps S4929 to S4932) is started, an initial check period is started. As a result, there is no need to control the initial check period in a situation where processing at the start of supply of operating power is being executed, reducing the processing load in a situation where processing at the start of supply of operating power is being executed. becomes possible.

Furthermore, the settings confirmation process and the setting value update process are executed as the process at the start of the supply of operating power (steps S4901 to S4928), whereas the process at the start of the supply of the operating power ends during the initial check period. is started when As a result, even if the check display is performed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 during the initial check period, the setting values are not displayed using the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. It is possible to avoid any influence.

Thereafter, the first management process is executed by the CALLI command (step S4927). The CALLI command and the first management process will be explained in detail later.

Thereafter, the start-up processing flag in the specific control work area 211 is cleared to "0" (step S4928). When the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 88) is started by clearing the start-up processing flag to "0", a negative determination is made in step S5505, and the processing in steps S5501 to S5504 and step S5521 is completed. In addition to this, the processes from step S5506 to step S5520 are executed, and the state in which the process for advancing the game is not executed is canceled. Note that in step S4928, the power outage flag in the work area 211 for specific control is also cleared to "0".

Thereafter, the process proceeds to the remaining processing of steps S4929 to S4932. In other words, the main MPU 82 is configured to periodically execute the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 88) and the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 114), but between the first timer interrupt process and the next timer interrupt process, There will be a remaining time. Although this remaining time will vary depending on the processing completion time of each timer interrupt process, the remaining process from step S4929 to step S4932 is repeatedly executed using such irregular time. In this respect, it can be said that the remaining processing of steps S4929 to S4932 is non-regular processing that is executed non-regularly. In steps S4929 to S4932, the same processes as steps S127 to S130 of the main process (FIG. 13) in the first embodiment are executed.

Next, the process of step S4927 of the main process (FIG. 81) will be explained.

In step S4927 of the main process (FIG. 81), the first management process is executed by the CALLI command as described above. The first management process is included in the non-specific control process. That is, when a situation in which a specific control process is executed in the main process (FIG. 81) changes to a situation in which a non-specific control process is executed, the non-specific control process is called using the CALLI command.

When the first management process is executed by the CALLI instruction, information in the flag register of the main MPU 82 is first saved in the stack area 212 for specific control. The flag register includes a carry flag, a zero flag, a P/V flag, a sign flag, a half-carry flag, and the like, and the information in the flag register changes depending on the execution results of arithmetic instructions, rotate instructions, input/output instructions, and the like. By saving the information in the flag register before starting the program for the first management process, which is a non-specific control process, it is possible to call the first management process or start the first management process. It becomes possible to save the information of the flag register in the state before it changes later to the stack area 212 for specific control.

When the first management process is executed by the CALLI instruction, the information in the flag register is saved to the stack area 212 for specific control, and then the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 88) and the second timer interrupt (described later) are executed. Interruption of the process (FIG. 114) is prohibited. As a result, during the execution of the first management process, which is a non-specific control process, the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 88) and second timer interrupt process (FIG. 114), which are specific control processes, are interrupted and activated. This makes it possible to prevent this from happening.

When the first management process is executed by the CALLI instruction, the information in the flag register is saved to the specific control stack area 212, and the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 88) and second timer interrupt process (FIG. 114) are performed. ), the program corresponding to the first management process is started.

In this way, by configuring the first management process to be executed by the CALLI instruction, the information in the flag register of the main MPU 82 is saved to the stack area 212 for specific control by one instruction ("CALLI"). At the same time, interrupts of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 88) and the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 114) are prohibited. Then, a program corresponding to the first management process can be started. Therefore, the instruction for saving the information in the flag register of the main MPU 82 to the stack area 212 for specific control and the interrupts of the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 88) and the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 114) are prohibited. Reduce the number of instructions set in the program to execute the first management process compared to the case where an instruction to execute the first management process and an instruction to start the program for the first management process are provided separately. be able to. This makes it possible to reduce the storage capacity of the main ROM 83 for storing programs.

FIG. 85 is a flowchart showing the first management process. Note that the processes from step S5201 to step S5216 in the first management process are executed by the non-specific control processing unit 222 of the main MPU 82 using a non-specific control program and non-specific control data.

First, as "LD SP, Y(u+2)", Y(u+2) is set as a fixed address at the start of non-specific control in the stack pointer of the main MPU 82 by a load instruction (step S5201). The stack pointer is an area in which address information is set for the main MPU 82 to specify a storage area in the stack areas 212 and 214 to which information is to be written by the push command. Each time a push instruction is executed, the stack pointer information is updated to the address of the storage area to be written in the next order, and each time a pop instruction is executed, the stack pointer information is updated to the address of the storage area to be written in the previous order. The address information of the storage area is updated. Furthermore, when using the stack area 214 for non-specific control, the information to be stored is stored starting from the storage area at the last address in the stack area 214 for non-specific control, and each time information to be stored is added. Then, the storage area of the storage destination is changed toward the first address side in the stack area 214 for non-specific control. Therefore, in step S5201, information on the last address in the stack area 214 for non-specific control is set in the stack pointer. The same goes for the stack area 212 for specific control, where information is stored from the storage area at the last address to the storage area at the first address.

By the way, if an additional push command is executed even though information has been set in all storage areas for both the stack area 212 for specific control and the stack area 214 for non-specific control, All areas of the main RAM 84 are cleared to "0", assuming that an abnormality has occurred in the storage process. This makes it possible to prevent the game from continuing even though an abnormality has occurred in the storage process.

Thereafter, the information in the WA register of the main MPU 82 is saved to the WA buffer set in the work area 213 for non-specific control by a load instruction as "LD (_WABUF), WA" (step S5202). Further, as "LD (_BCBUF), BC", information in the BC register of the main MPU 82 is saved to the BC buffer set in the work area 213 for non-specific control by a load instruction (step S5203). Further, as "LD (_DEBUF), DE", information in the DE register of the main MPU 82 is saved to the DE buffer set in the work area 213 for non-specific control by a load instruction (step S5204). Further, as "LD (_HLBUF), HL", information in the HL register of the main MPU 82 is saved to the HL buffer set in the work area 213 for non-specific control by a load instruction (step S5205). Further, as "LD (_IXBUF), IX", information in the IX register of the main MPU 82 is saved to the IX buffer set in the work area 213 for non-specific control by a load instruction (step S5206). Further, as "LD (_IYBUF), IY", information in the IY register of the main MPU 82 is saved to the IY buffer set in the work area 213 for non-specific control by a load instruction (step S5207).

The general-purpose register area 223a in the register area 223 of the main MPU 82 includes various general-purpose registers, auxiliary registers, and index registers in addition to the flag register described above. In this case, in steps S5202 to S5207, each information of the WA register, BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register, and IY register, which are some of these various general-purpose registers, auxiliary registers, and index registers. is saved in a corresponding buffer in the work area 213 for non-specific control. Note that the information amount of the WA register, BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register, and IY register is all 2 bytes.

These WA register, BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register, and IY register are registers used in the initial setting process (step S5208) and disconnection/short circuit process (step S5209), which are processes corresponding to non-specific control. be. By saving the information set in such registers to the work area 213 for non-specific control before executing the initial setting process (step S5208) and the disconnection/short circuit process (step S5209), the information set in the register can be saved for use in specific control. Furthermore, the information in these registers can be saved before non-specific control is started. Therefore, even if these registers are overwritten during non-specific control, the status of these registers can be changed by restoring the information saved in the work area 213 for non-specific control to these registers when terminating the non-specific control. It becomes possible to restore the state to the state corresponding to the specific control before the non-specific control was executed.

In addition, instead of saving all the information of various general-purpose registers, auxiliary registers, and index registers to the work area 213 for non-specific control, initial setting processing (step S5208), which is processing corresponding to non-specific control, and disconnection By selectively saving the information of the WA register, BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register, and IY register to be used in the short circuit processing (step S5209) to the work area 213 for non-specific control, It is possible to suppress the capacity secured for saving register information in the work area 213 for specific control. Therefore, it is possible to save the register information as described above while ensuring a large capacity of the work area 213 for non-specific control that can be used during the initial setting process (step S5208) and the disconnection/short circuit process (step S5209). becomes possible.

Of course, among the various general-purpose registers, auxiliary registers, and index registers in the main MPU 82, registers other than the WA register, BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register, and IY register support non-specific control. The information set before the start of the process is stored and held until the process corresponding to the non-specific control is finished and the process corresponding to the specific control is restarted.

Furthermore, by saving the register information to the work area 213 for non-specific control instead of saving it to the stack area 214 for non-specific control, the capacity of the stack area 214 for non-specific control can be kept small. It becomes possible. Furthermore, when using the stack area 214 for non-specific control, as described above, the information is written in the order in which the later information is read out first, so if the order in which the information is read is shifted due to some noise or other cause, If this happens, all subsequent reading order information will be restored to different registers. The probability of occurrence of such an event increases as the amount of information saved in the stack area 214 for non-specific control increases. In contrast, by saving register information to the work area 213 for non-specific control, it is possible to prevent the above-mentioned phenomenon from occurring even when there is a large amount of information to be saved. .

After executing the processes from step S5202 to step S5207, initial setting process (step S5208) and disconnection/short circuit process (step S5209) are executed. When executing the initial setting process (step S5208) and the disconnection/short circuit process (step S5209), subroutines corresponding to the initial setting process (step S5208) and the disconnect/short circuit process (step S5209) set in the program for non-specific control are executed. When executing the program of the subroutine, the program is executed in order to specify the return address of the first management process after executing the initial setting process (step S5208) and the disconnection/short circuit process (step S5209). information is written to the stack area 214 for non-specific control by a push command. Then, when the initial setting process (step S5208) and the disconnection/short circuit process (step S5209) are completed, information for specifying the return address is read out by the pop command, and the first management process indicated by the return address is program. Details of the initial setting process (step S5208) and the disconnection/short circuit process (step S5209) will be described later.

After executing the initial setting process (step S5208) and the disconnection/short circuit process (step S5209), the end of the first management process is written to the stack pointer of the main MPU 82 by a load command as "LD SP, Y(r+a)". Y(r+a) is set as a fixed address when returning to specific control later (step S5210). The address of Y(r+a) is set as an address between Y(r+8) and Y(s) in the stack area 212 for specific control.

The amount of information stored in the specific control stack area 212 immediately before the first management process is called in step S4927 of the main process (FIG. 81) is always constant, and accordingly, the amount of information stored in the main MPU 82 at that timing is The information of the stack pointer (ie, the value of the stack pointer) is constant. In this case, the information stored in the stack area 212 for specific control includes, for example, information on the return address of the main process (FIG. 81) after the first management process is completed. The above-mentioned fixed information of the stack pointer is Y(r+a). Therefore, when the initial setting process (step S5208) and the disconnection/short circuit process (step S5209), which are processes corresponding to non-specific control, are completed and the process corresponding to specific control is returned to, the constant information Y By setting (r+a) to the stack pointer of the main MPU 82, it is possible to restore the information of the stack pointer to the information immediately before the process corresponding to non-specific control was started. By setting fixed information in the stack pointer in this way, the information of the stack pointer is restored to the information immediately before the process corresponding to non-specific control was started, so that the main side corresponding to specific control There is no need to save information on the stack pointer of the MPU 82 to the main RAM 84 before starting processing corresponding to non-specific control. Therefore, it becomes possible to reduce the processing load, and there is no need to secure an area for the evacuation in the main RAM 84.

Thereafter, the information saved in the WA buffer of the non-specific control work area 213 is overwritten in the WA register of the main MPU 82 by a load instruction as "LD WA, (_WABUF)" (step S5211). Furthermore, as "LD BC, (_BCBUF)", the information saved in the BC buffer of the work area 213 for non-specific control is overwritten in the BC register of the main MPU 82 by the load instruction (step S5212). Further, as "LD DE, (_DEBUF)", the information saved in the DE buffer of the work area 213 for non-specific control is overwritten in the DE register of the main MPU 82 by the load instruction (step S5213). Also, as "LD HL, (_HLBUF)", the information saved in the HL buffer of the work area 213 for non-specific control is overwritten in the HL register of the main MPU 82 by the load instruction (step S5214). Further, as "LD IX, (_IXBUF)", the information saved in the IX buffer of the work area 213 for non-specific control is overwritten in the IX register of the main MPU 82 by the load instruction (step S5215). Further, as "LD IY, (_IYBUF)", the information saved in the IY buffer of the work area 213 for non-specific control is overwritten in the IY register of the main MPU 82 by the load instruction (step S5216). By executing the processing from step S5211 to step S5216, processing corresponding to non-specific control is started for each information of the WA register, BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register, and IY register of the main MPU 82. It becomes possible to restore the information corresponding to the specific control immediately before the control.

After executing the processing in steps S5211 to S5216, the RETI command returns to the main processing (FIG. 81) included in the specific control processing. By executing the RETI instruction, the information in the flag register saved in the specific control stack area 212 before execution of the first management process is restored to the flag register of the main MPU 82, and the first timer interrupt The state in which the occurrence of processing (FIG. 88) and second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 114) is prohibited is switched to a state in which it is permitted. As a result, the information in the flag register of the main MPU 82 is restored to information for executing specific control, and new execution of the first timer interrupt process and the second timer interrupt process becomes possible.

Due to the configuration that executes the RETI instruction, the information in the flag register saved in the stack area 212 for specific control is transferred to the main MPU 82 by one instruction (“RETI”) before the execution of the first management process. By restoring it to the flag register, it is possible to switch from a state in which generation of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 88) and a second timer interrupt process (FIG. 114) are prohibited to a state in which they are permitted. Therefore, an instruction for restoring the information in the flag register saved in the specific control stack area 212 before execution of the first management process to the flag register of the main MPU 82, and the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 88 ) and an instruction for switching from a state in which generation of the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 114) is prohibited to a state in which it is permitted are provided separately. The number of instructions can be reduced. This makes it possible to reduce the storage capacity of the main ROM 83 for storing programs for non-specific control processing.

Here, the information stored in the flag register and various registers of the main side MPU 82 when the non-specific control process is executed is not saved to the main side RAM 84 when the specific control process is restarted. Thereby, there is no need to secure a storage area for saving the above information in the work area 211 for specific control and the stack area 212 for specific control.

In addition, the information stored in the flag register and various registers of the main MPU 82 when non-specific control processing is executed is stored when non-specific control processing is restarted after returning to specific control processing. This information is not used. In other words, information necessary for multiple processing times of non-specific control processing that is executed with specific control processing in between is stored in the work area 213 for non-specific control or the stack area 214 for non-specific control. and is not stored in the flag register and various registers of the main MPU 82. Therefore, even if the information stored in the flag register and various registers of the main MPU 82 is not saved to the main RAM 84 when a non-specific control process is executed, a problem may arise when executing the non-specific control process. do not have.

Next, the initial setting process executed when the subroutine program is called in step S5208 will be described. FIG. 86 is a flowchart showing the initial setting process. Note that the processing from step S5301 to step S5304 in the initial setting process is executed by the non-specific control processing unit 222 of the main MPU 82 using a non-specific control program and non-specific control data.

In the initial setting process, among the storage areas of the work area 213 for non-specific control, the already explained first to eighth prize monitoring timer counters 213a to 213h, magnetic detection counter 213i, magnetic monitoring delay timer counter 213j, and second Security counter 213k, first to third general winning abnormal flags 213l to 213n, special electric winning abnormal flag 213o, first operating winning abnormal flag 213p, second operating winning abnormal flag 213q, out abnormal flag 213r, gate winning abnormal flag 213s, and Processing for initializing the magnetic anomaly flag 213t is executed. These first to eighth winning prize monitoring timer counters 213a to 213h, magnetic detection counter 213i, magnetic monitoring delay timer counter 213j, second security counter 213k, first to third general prize winning abnormality flags 213l to 213n, and special electric winning prize abnormality flag 213o. , the first operation winning abnormality flag 213p, the second operation winning abnormality flag 213q, the out abnormality flag 213r, the gate winning abnormality flag 213s, and the magnetic abnormality flag 213t each have a data capacity of 1 byte, and for each of these areas The addresses are set so that they are consecutive numbers. Each of the first to eighth prize monitoring timer counters 213a to 213h → magnetic detection counter 213i → magnetic monitoring delay timer counter 213j → second security counter 213k → first to third general prize winning abnormal flags 213l to 213n → special electric winning prize abnormal flag The address increases by "1" in the order of 213o → first operation winning abnormality flag 213p → second operation winning abnormality flag 213q → out abnormality flag 213r → gate winning abnormality flag 213s → magnetic abnormality flag 213t.

In the initial setting process, first, a start address is set in a predetermined register of the main MPU 82 as an initial setting target address (step S5301). The start address is the address of the first prize monitoring timer counter 213a.

Thereafter, initial settings are performed for the area corresponding to the initial setting target address (step S5302). When the initial setting target address is a start address, the area corresponding to the start address is the first winning monitoring timer counter 213a, so initial settings are performed for the first winning monitoring timer counter 213a. Specifically, the first winning monitoring timer counter 213a is cleared to "0" as an initial setting.

Thereafter, it is determined whether the initial setting target address is the final address (step S5303). The final address is the address of the magnetic abnormality flag 213t. If the initialization target address is not the final address (step S5303: NO), the initialization target address is updated to the next address in the order (step S5304). Specifically, 1 is added to the initial setting target address. Then, in step S5302, initial settings are performed for the area corresponding to the address after the 1 addition, and the process of step S5303 is executed.

If the process of step S5304 is executed in a situation where the initial setting target address is the start address, the initial setting target address becomes the address of the second winning monitoring timer counter 213b, and the second winning monitoring timer counter 213b is Initial settings are performed. Specifically, the second prize monitoring timer counter 213b is cleared to "0" as an initial setting. In addition, if the process of step S5304 is executed in a situation where the address of the second prize monitoring timer counter 213b is the initial setting target address, the initial setting target address becomes the address of the third winning prize monitoring timer counter 213c, and the corresponding Initial settings are made for the third winning monitoring timer counter 213c. Specifically, the third prize winning monitoring timer counter 213c is cleared to "0" as an initial setting.

When the process of steps S5302 to S5304 is repeated and the address of the magnetic anomaly flag 213t corresponding to the final address is set as the initial setting target address in the process of step S5304, the magnetic anomaly flag 213t is set as the initial setting. After clearing "0", an affirmative determination is made in step S5303. By making an affirmative determination in step S5303, this initial setting process ends. In addition, in the initial setting process (FIG. 86), a normal counter area 251, a calculation result storage area 252, a display target setting area 253, a switching timing counter 254, and a display target, which will be described later, are provided in the work area 213 for non-specific control. The initial setting of step S5302 for the counter 255 is not performed.

Next, a description will be given of the disconnection/short circuit processing that is executed when the subroutine program is called in step S5209. FIG. 87 is a flowchart showing the disconnection/short circuit processing. Note that the processing from step S5401 to step S5411 in the disconnection/short circuit processing is executed by the non-specific control processing unit 222 of the main MPU 82 using a non-specific control program and non-specific control data.

First, the value of the monitoring target counter provided in the work area 213 for non-specific control is cleared to "0" (step S5401). The monitoring target counter is a counter used by the main MPU 82 to specify the type of detection sensor to be monitored for the occurrence of a disconnection or short circuit. The first to third winning opening detection sensors 231a to 233a provided for each of the three general winning openings 31 and the special electric winning opening detection sensors 231a to 233a provided for each of the three general winning openings 31 are used as detection sensors to monitor the occurrence of disconnections or short circuits. A special electric detection sensor 234a provided at the first operating port 33, a first operating port detection sensor 235a provided at the first operating port 33, a second operating port detection sensor 236a provided at the second operating port 34, an out port detection sensor provided at the out port 24a. There are a sensor 237a and a gate detection sensor 238a provided at the through gate 35 (see FIG. 90). When the value of the monitored counter is "0", it corresponds to the first winning opening detection sensor 231a, and when the value of the monitoring target counter is "1", it corresponds to the second winning opening detection sensor 232a. When the value of the monitored counter is "2", it corresponds to the third winning opening detection sensor 233a, and when the value of the monitored counter is "3", it corresponds to the special electric detection sensor 234a. When the value of the monitored counter is "4", it corresponds to the first operating port detection sensor 235a, and when the value of the monitored counter is "5", it corresponds to the second operating port detection sensor 236a. When the value of the monitored counter is "6", it corresponds to the exit detection sensor 237a, and when the value of the monitored counter is "7", it corresponds to the gate detection sensor 238a.

A voltage of 12V is applied to each of the detection sensors 231a to 238a through an input electrical path. Further, each of the detection sensors 231a to 238a is connected to the main MPU 82 through an output electrical path, and applies a voltage to the main MPU 82 according to the detection result of each of the detection sensors 231a to 238a. In this case, a plurality of resistors are connected to the output electrical path, and these resistors keep the voltage applied to the main MPU 82 below a predetermined value and the supplied current below a predetermined value. function is fulfilled.

An electric signal is input to the main side MPU 82 depending on whether or not a game ball passes through the detection portions of the detection sensors 231a to 238a. In this case, a LOW level electric signal is input to the main MPU 82 when a game ball is not passing through the detection section of each of the detection sensors 231a to 238a, and a HI level electric signal is input when a game ball is passing through the detection section. The signal is input to the main MPU 82.

Regarding each of the detection sensors 231a to 238a, if a disconnection occurs in each of the electrical paths or inside the sensor, the voltage input from each of the detection sensors 231a to 238a to the main MPU 82 is lower than in the case of LOW level. voltage (ie 0V). Furthermore, if a short circuit occurs between the electrical paths or within the sensor, the voltage input from each of the detection sensors 231a to 238a to the main MPU 82 becomes higher than that at the HI level. If the voltage applied from each of the detection sensors 231a to 238a becomes lower than the LOW level, the main MPU 82 determines that a disconnection has occurred, and the voltage applied from each of the detection sensors 231a to 238a is determined to have occurred. If the voltage at the terminal becomes higher than that at the HI level, it is determined that a short circuit has occurred.

In the disconnection/short-circuit processing, after the value of the monitored counter is cleared to "0" in step S5401, the voltage input from the detection sensors 231a to 238a corresponding to the value of the monitored counter is a lower voltage than when the voltage is at the LOW level. (ie, 0V), it is determined whether a wire breakage has occurred (step S5402). If it is determined that a disconnection has occurred (step S5403: YES), the disconnection generation command is stored in the command transmission buffer 223b in the register area 223 of the main MPU 82 (step S5404). By storing the disconnection generation command in the command transmission buffer 223b, the command transmission circuit 224 operates to transmit the disconnection generation command to the audio-optical side MPU 93. By receiving the disconnection generation command, the sound and light side MPU 93 causes the display light emitting section 64, the speaker section 65, and the symbol display device 41 to issue a notification indicating that a disconnection has occurred. In this disconnection notification, the type of the detection sensor 231a to 238a that has identified the occurrence of the current disconnection may also be notified.

Thereafter, the value of the second security counter 213k provided in the work area 213 for non-specific control is incremented by 1 (step S5405). As already explained, the second security counter 213k is a counter used by the main MPU 82 to determine whether or not it is necessary to externally output a pulsed security signal from the main MPU 82 to the management computer of the gaming hall. This is a counter used by the main MPU 82 to specify the number of external outputs of a pulsed security signal when outputting to the outside.

If a negative determination is made in step S5403, or if the process in step S5405 is executed, the voltage input from the detection sensors 231a to 238a corresponding to the value of the monitored counter becomes a higher voltage than when it is at HI level. By determining whether or not there is a short circuit, it is determined whether or not a short circuit has occurred (step S5406). If it is determined that a short circuit has occurred (step S5407: YES), the short circuit generation command is stored in the command transmission buffer 223b in the register area 223 of the main MPU 82 (step S5408). By storing the short circuit generation command in the command transmission buffer 223b, the command transmission circuit 224 operates to transmit the short circuit generation command to the audio-optical side MPU 93. By receiving the short circuit generation command, the sound and light side MPU 93 causes the display light emitting section 64, the speaker section 65, and the symbol display device 41 to issue a notification indicating that a short circuit has occurred. In this short circuit notification, the type of the detection sensor 231a to 238a that has identified the occurrence of the current short circuit may also be notified.

Thereafter, the value of the second security counter 213k provided in the work area 213 for non-specific control is incremented by 1 (step S5409). As already explained, the second security counter 213k is a counter used by the main MPU 82 to determine whether or not it is necessary to externally output a pulsed security signal from the main MPU 82 to the management computer of the gaming hall. This is a counter used by the main MPU 82 to specify the number of external outputs of a pulsed security signal when outputting to the outside.

If a negative determination is made in step S5407, or if the process in step S5409 is executed, it is determined whether the value of the monitoring target counter is the maximum value "7" (step S5410). If a negative determination is made in step S5410, the value of the monitoring target counter is incremented by 1 (step S5411), and then the detection sensors 231a to 238a corresponding to the value of the monitoring target counter after the 1 increment are applied to the detection sensors 231a to 238a in steps S5402 to 238a. The process of S5409 is executed. If it is determined in step S5410 that the value of the monitored counter is the maximum value, this disconnection/short circuit processing ends.

<First timer interrupt processing>
Next, the first timer interrupt process executed by the main MPU 82 will be explained. FIG. 88 is a flowchart showing the first timer interrupt process. Note that among the processes from step S5501 to step S5521 in the first timer interrupt process, processes other than the fraud detection process called and executed in step S5509 and the second management process called and executed in step S5521 is executed by the specific control processing unit 221 of the main MPU 82 using a program for specific control and data for specific control, and the fraud detection process and the second management process are executed using a program for non-specific control and data for non-specific control. This is executed by the non-specific control processing section 222 of the main MPU 82 using specific control data.

First, a power outage monitoring process is executed (step S5501). In the power outage monitoring process, it is monitored whether or not a power outage signal corresponding to the occurrence of a power outage is received from the power outage monitoring board 85, and if the occurrence of a power outage is identified, the processing at the time of power outage is executed and then an infinite loop is created. . In the power outage process, the power outage flag in the main RAM 84 is set to "1", a checksum is calculated, and the calculated checksum is saved.

Thereafter, random number update processing for lottery is executed (step S5502). In the lottery random number update process, the winning random number counter C1, the type random number counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the general random number counter C4 are updated. Specifically, after sequentially reading the current numerical information from the winning random number counter C1, type random number counter C2, reach random number counter C3, and general random number counter C4, and adding 1 to each of the read numerical information, Execute processing to overwrite the reading source counter. In this case, each counter value is cleared to "0" when it exceeds the maximum value. After that, in step S5503, a random number initial value update process is executed as in step S4930 of the main process (FIG. 81), and in step S5504, a fluctuation counter update process is executed as in step S4931 of the main process (FIG. 81). do.

After that, it is determined whether "1" is set in either the game stop flag or the starting process flag in the main side RAM 84 (step S5505). If either the game stop flag or the start-up process flag is set to "1" (step S5505: YES), the game history is managed in step S5521 without executing the processes in steps S5506 to S5520. Proceed to processing. As a result, in a situation where the game stop flag or start-up process flag is set to "1", power outage monitoring, random number update, and game history management are executed in the first timer interrupt process (Fig. 88). However, it is possible to prevent the processing for advancing the game in steps S5506 to S5520 from being executed.

If "1" is not set to both the game stop flag and the starting process flag (step S5505: NO), the process for advancing the game in steps S5506 to S5520 is executed. Specifically, first, port output processing is executed (step S5506). In the port output processing, when the output information has been set in the previous first timer interrupt processing, processing is executed to output to the various driving units 32b and 34b corresponding to the output information. For example, if information is set to switch the special electric winning device 32 to the open state, output of a drive signal to the special electric drive unit 32b is started, and if information is set to switch the special electric prize winning device 32 to the closed state. stops the output of the drive signal. In addition, if information is set to switch the general electric accessory 34a of the second operating port 34 to the open state, output of a drive signal to the general electric drive unit 34b should be started, and the general electric accessory 34a of the second operating port 34 should be switched to the closed state. If the information is set, the output of the drive signal is stopped.

Thereafter, reading processing is executed (step S5507). In the reading process, signals other than the power outage signal and winning signal are read, and the read information is stored for use in future processing. Thereafter, ball entry detection processing is executed (step S5508). In the ball entry detection process, the signals received from each detection sensor 231a to 238a are read, and the signals received from the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, the second operating port 34, and the through hole are read. A process for determining whether or not a ball has entered the gate 35 is executed.

Thereafter, fraud detection processing is executed by the CALLI command (step S5509). The fraud detection process will be explained in detail later. Thereafter, a specific control timer update process is executed to collectively update the numerical information of the plurality of types of timer counters provided in the specific control work area 211 of the main side RAM 84 (step S5510). In this case, the configuration is such that the timer counters that are updated by subtracting the stored numerical information are handled collectively, but both the subtraction-type timer counter update and the addition-type timer counter update are performed collectively. It may also be a configuration. Thereafter, fraud handling processing is executed (step S5511). The fraud handling process will be explained in detail later.

Thereafter, a firing control process for controlling the firing of game balls is executed (step S5512). In a situation where the firing operation is continued with respect to the firing operation device 28, one game ball is fired every 0.6 seconds at a predetermined firing cycle as in the first embodiment. Thereafter, as input state monitoring processing, the opening of the gaming machine main body 12 and the front door frame 14 is confirmed based on the information read in the reading processing of step S5507 (step S5513).

Thereafter, a special figure/special electricity control process is executed to control the execution of the game round and the opening/closing execution mode (step S5514), as well as display control of the ordinary figure display section 38a and execution control of the ordinary electricity open state. A general-purpose electric power control process is executed for the purpose (step S5515). The processing contents of the special figure/special electric line control process and the general figure/general electric line control process are basically the same as those in the first embodiment. The different processing configurations will be explained later.

In the following step S5516, based on the processing results of the immediately preceding step S5514 and step S5515, output information is set to reflect the increase or decrease in the number of pieces of the first reservation information on the first special symbol reservation display section 37c, and the setting of output information for reflecting the increase or decrease in the number of pieces of the first reservation information, Output information is set to reflect the increase or decrease in the number of special symbols on the second special symbol reservation display section 37d, and output information is set to reflect the increase or decrease in the number of reservations on the regular symbol side on the regular symbol reservation display section 38b. In addition, in step S5516, output information is set for updating the display contents of the first special figure display section 37a and the second special figure display section 37b based on the processing results of the immediately preceding step S5514 and step S5515. , and sets output information for updating the display contents of the ordinary figure display section 38a.

Thereafter, the content of the command and signal received from the payout control device 77 is confirmed, and a payout state receiving process is executed to perform processing corresponding to the confirmation result (step S5517). Further, a payout output process for setting the prize ball command as an output target is executed (step S5518). Further, an external information setting process is executed to control the start and end of output of an external signal according to the processing results of various processes executed in the current first timer interrupt process (step S5519).

Thereafter, setting monitoring processing is executed (step S5520). In the setting monitoring process, it is determined whether the setting value information stored in the setting reference area of the main side RAM 84 is one of "1" to "6", and the setting value is set to be used. It is determined whether the set value is one of "Setting 1" to "Setting 6". If the setting value information stored in the setting reference area is "0" or 7 or more, it means that the setting value set to be used is abnormal, so the game stop flag of the main side RAM 84 is set. Set "1" to "1". As a result, the game cannot proceed until the setting values to be used are newly set in the setting value update process (FIG. 83).

If an affirmative determination is made in step S5505, or if the process in step S5520 is executed, the second management process is executed by the CALLI command (step S5521). The second management process will be explained in detail later.

<Composition regarding prize-winning>
Next, the configuration regarding winning will be explained. FIG. 89 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration regarding the discharge of game balls that have flown down the game area PA.

As in the first embodiment, the game ball that enters any of the general winning port 31, special electric winning device 32, first operating port 33, second operating port 34, and out port 24a is ejected from the gaming area PA. Ru. In other words, the game ball ejected from the game ball launch mechanism 27 and flowing into the game area PA is either the general winning port 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, the second operating port 34, or the out port 24a. By entering the ball, the ball will be ejected from the gaming area PA. A game ball that enters any of the general winning opening 31, special electric winning device 32, first operating opening 33, second operating opening 34, and out opening 24a is guided to the back side of the gaming board 24.

On the back side of the game board 24, discharge passages 231 to 237 are formed to correspond to the general winning opening 31, the special winning winning device 32, the first operating opening 33, the second operating opening 34, and the out opening 24a, respectively. . The game balls that have flowed into the discharge passages 231 to 237 flow down the discharge passages 231 to 237, and are guided to the lower end of the game board 24 on the back side of the game board 24, and then to the discharge ball collection part (not shown). will be collected. Then, the game balls collected by the discharged ball collection section are discharged to a ball circulation device of the island equipment in which the pachinko machine 10 is installed in the game hall.

Each of the discharge passages 231 to 237 is provided with various detection sensors 231a to 237a for detecting game balls. The discharge passage sections 231 to 237 and the detection sensors 231a to 237a will be explained below. Since there are three general winning openings 31, there are discharge passages 231 to 233 corresponding to each of the three. Among these, the first winning opening detection sensor 231a is provided so that the detection range exists in the middle of the first discharge passage section 231 corresponding to the leftmost general winning opening 31, and the general winning opening on the right side The second winning opening detection sensor 232a is provided so that the detection range exists in the middle of the second discharge passage part 232 corresponding to the opening 31, and the third discharge passage part corresponding to the rightmost general winning opening 31. The third winning a prize opening detection sensor 233a is provided so that the detection range exists in the middle position of 233.

A fourth discharge passage portion 234 is provided corresponding to the special electric prize winning device 32. A special electric detection sensor 234a is provided so that a detection range exists in the middle of the fourth discharge passage part 234, and the game ball that enters the special electric winning device 32 is on the way to pass through the fourth discharge passage part 234. It is detected by the special electric detection sensor 234a. A fifth discharge passage portion 235 is present corresponding to the first operating port 33 . A first operating port detection sensor 235a is provided so that a detection range exists in the middle of the fifth discharge passage portion 235, and the game ball that enters the first operating port 33 passes through the fifth discharge passage portion 235. While passing, it is detected by the first operating port detection sensor 235a. A sixth discharge passage portion 236 is present corresponding to the second operating port 34 . A second operating port detection sensor 236a is provided so that a detection range exists in the middle of the sixth discharge passage portion 236, and the game ball that enters the second operating port 34 passes through the sixth discharge passage portion 236. While passing, it is detected by the second operating port detection sensor 236a. A seventh discharge passage portion 237 exists corresponding to the out port 24a. The out-port detection sensor 237a is provided so that a detection range exists in the middle of the seventh discharge passage section 237, and the game ball that enters the out-port 24a is on the way to pass through the seventh discharge passage section 237. It is detected by the outlet detection sensor 237a.

A game ball that is detected by any one of the various detection sensors 231a to 237a will not be detected by any of the other detection sensors 231a to 237a. Further, a gate detection sensor 238a is also provided for the through gate 35, and a game ball passing through the through gate 35 while flowing down the gaming area PA is detected by the gate detection sensor 238a.

Although electromagnetic induction type proximity sensors are used as the various detection sensors 231a to 238a, any sensor can be used as long as it can detect each game ball individually. Further, the various detection sensors 231a to 238a are electrically connected to the main MPU 82, and the detection results of the various detection sensors 231a to 238a are output to the main MPU 82. Specifically, the various detection sensors 231a to 238a output a LOW level signal when a game ball is not detected, and output a HI level signal when a game ball is detected. Note that the present invention is not limited to this, and the relationship between HI and LOW may be reversed.

Next, in the main side MPU 82, based on the detection results of each detection sensor 231a to 238a, the output port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, the second operating port 34, and the through gate 35 A configuration for identifying whether or not a game ball has entered the ball will be described. FIG. 90 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a configuration in which the detection results of the detection sensors 231a to 238a are input to the main MPU 82.

The main MPU 82 is provided with an input port 241. The input port 241 is configured as an 8-bit parallel interface so that eight types of signals can be handled simultaneously. Areas in which information of "0" or "1" is stored in accordance with the voltage of each signal are provided in one-to-one correspondence with each terminal. In other words, the area includes the 0th bit D0 to the 7th bit D7. In addition, more than 8 types of signals will be input to the input port 241, but in order to limit the targets that can be input at the same time to 8 types, the signal group to be input to the input port 241 is determined by the driver IC. Switched through switching control.

In the ball entry detection process (step S5508) of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 88), the signal group to be input to the input port 241 is set to the signal group from each of the detection sensors 231a to 238a. In a situation where such settings are made, the 0th bit D0 stores information corresponding to the detection signal from the first winning opening detection sensor 231a, and the 1st bit D1 corresponds to the detection signal from the second winning opening detection sensor 232a. The second bit D2 stores information corresponding to the detection signal from the third winning opening detection sensor 233a, and the third bit D3 stores information corresponding to the detection signal from the special electric detection sensor 234a. , the fourth bit D4 stores information corresponding to the detection signal from the first working port detection sensor 235a, the fifth bit D5 stores information corresponding to the detection signal from the second working port detection sensor 236a, and the fifth bit D5 stores information corresponding to the detection signal from the second working port detection sensor 236a. The 6th bit D6 stores information corresponding to the detection signal from the exit detection sensor 237a, and the 7th bit D7 stores information corresponding to the detection signal from the gate detection sensor 238a.

Each of the detection sensors 231a to 238a outputs a LOW level signal indicating that it is not being detected as a detection signal when the passage of a game ball is not detected, and when it detects the passage of a game ball. outputs a HI level signal indicating that detection is in progress as a detection signal. The input port 241 stores information of "0" for the corresponding bit when receiving a LOW level signal, and stores "1" for the corresponding bit when receiving a HI level signal. Stores information about. In other words, in a situation where the passage of a game ball is not detected by the detection sensors 231a to 238a, information of "0" corresponding to information indicating non-detection is stored for the corresponding bit, and the passage of a game ball is not detected. In such a situation, information of "1" corresponding to information indicating that detection is in progress is stored for the corresponding bit.

FIG. 91 is a flowchart showing the ball entry detection process executed in step S5508 of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 88). Note that the processes from step S5601 to step S5623 in the ball entry detection process are executed by the specific control processing unit 221 of the main MPU 82 using a specific control program and specific control data.

First, various flag clearing processes are executed (step S5601). In the various flag clearing processes, the first winning confirmation flag, the second winning confirmation flag, the third winning confirmation flag, the special electric winning flag, and the first operation winning confirmation flag are set in the confirmation flag group 211d of the work area 211 for specific control. , the second operation winning confirmation flag, the out confirmation flag, and the gate winning confirmation flag are cleared to "0". The contents of each of these confirmation flags will be explained later. Note that in a situation where a negative determination is made in step S5505 of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 88), the ball entry detection process is executed in each process of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 88). In this case, the execution of the process corresponding to the state of the confirmation flag is completed after the ball entering detection process is executed in each process of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 88), so every time the ball entering detection process is started. Even if the above confirmation flag is cleared to "0", no problem will occur.

When it is confirmed that the situation has changed from the situation where the 0th bit D0 stores the information of "0" to the situation where the information of "1" is stored, the first winning opening detection sensor 231a detects one It is determined that a game ball has been detected (step S5602: YES). In this case, the first winning confirmation flag in the work area 211 for specific control is set to "1" (step S5603), and the value of the 10 prize balls counter provided in the work area 211 for specific control is set to 1. Add (step S5604). The first winning confirmation flag is a flag for the main side MPU 82 to specify that one game ball has been detected by the first winning opening detection sensor 231a. The 10 prize balls counter is a counter for the main MPU 82 to specify the number of times the payout of 10 game balls should be executed. If the value of the 10 prize balls counter is 1 or more, the 10 prize balls command is output to the payout control device 77 in the payout output process of step S5518 in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 88), and the 10 prize balls When the prize ball command is output once, the value of the 10 prize ball counter is subtracted by 1. When the payout control device 77 receives the 10 prize balls command, it drives and controls the payout device 76 so that 10 game balls are paid out.

When it is confirmed that the first bit D1 has changed from the state in which "0" information is stored to the state in which "1" information is stored, the second winning opening detection sensor 232a detects one It is determined that a game ball has been detected (step S5605: YES). In this case, the second winning confirmation flag in the work area 211 for specific control is set to "1" (step S5606), and the value of the 10 prize balls counter in the work area 211 for specific control is incremented by 1 ( Step S5607). The second winning confirmation flag is a flag for the main side MPU 82 to specify that one game ball has been detected by the second winning opening detection sensor 232a.

When it is confirmed that the second bit D2 has changed from the state where the information of "0" is stored to the state where the information of "1" is stored, the third winning opening detection sensor 233a detects one It is determined that a game ball has been detected (step S5608: YES). In this case, the third winning confirmation flag in the work area 211 for specific control is set to "1" (step S5609), and the value of the 10 prize balls counter in the work area 211 for specific control is incremented by 1 ( Step S5610). The third winning confirmation flag is a flag for the main side MPU 82 to specify that one game ball has been detected by the third winning opening detection sensor 233a.

When it is confirmed that the third bit D3 has changed from the state in which "0" information is stored to the state in which "1" information is stored, one game ball is detected by the special electric detection sensor 234a. It is determined that it has been detected (step S5611: YES). In this case, the special electric winning confirmation flag in the work area 211 for specific control is set to "1" (step S5612), and the value of the 15 prize balls counter provided in the work area 211 for specific control is incremented by 1. (Step S5613). The special electric winning confirmation flag is a flag used by the main side MPU 82 to specify that one game ball has entered the special electric winning device 32. In the special figure tokuden control process (step S5514) of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 88), by confirming that the tokuden prize confirmation flag is set to "1", one game to the tokuden prize winning device 32 is sent. It is identified that a ball has entered, and the remaining number of balls that can be entered into a special electric winning device 32 in a round game is subtracted by 1. In addition, the contents of the special electric prize winning confirmation flag are also referred to in the second management process (step S5521) that is executed after the special figure special electric line control process (step S5514) in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 88). Even if the information on the special electric prize winning confirmation flag is confirmed in the special figure special electric wire control process (step S5514), the information on the special electric winning prize confirmation flag is maintained as it is. The 15 prize balls counter is a counter for the main MPU 82 to specify the number of times that 15 game balls should be paid out. If the value of the 15 prize balls counter is 1 or more, the 15 prize balls command is output to the payout control device 77 in the payout output process of step S5518 in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 88), and the 15 prize balls When the prize ball command is output once, the value of the 15 prize ball counter is subtracted by 1. When the payout control device 77 receives the 15 prize balls command, it drives and controls the payout device 76 so that 15 game balls are paid out.

When it is confirmed that the fourth bit D4 has changed from the state in which the information "0" is stored to the state in which the information "1" is stored, the first operating port detection sensor 235a detects one It is determined that a game ball has been detected (step S5614: YES). In this case, the first operation winning confirmation flag in the work area 211 for specific control is set to "1" (step S5615), and the value of the one prize ball counter provided in the work area 211 for specific control is set to "1". Add 1 (step S5618). The one prize ball counter is a counter used by the main MPU 82 to specify the number of times one game ball should be paid out. If the value of the one prize ball counter is 1 or more, the one prize ball command is output to the payout control device 77 in the payout output process of step S5518 in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 88), and the one prize ball command is output to the payout control device 77. When the prize ball command is output once, the value of the prize ball counter is decremented by 1. When the payout control device 77 receives the one prize ball command, it drives and controls the payout device 76 so that one game ball is paid out. The first operation winning confirmation flag is a flag used by the main MPU 82 to specify that one game ball has entered the first operation port 33.

FIG. 92 is a flowchart showing the reservation information acquisition process in this embodiment executed by the main MPU 82. Note that the processing from step S5701 to step S5710 in the reservation information acquisition process is executed by the specific control processing unit 221 of the main MPU 82 using a specific control program and specific control data.

If the first operation winning confirmation flag is set to "1" (step S5701: YES), it is determined that the number of first reservation information stored in the first special drawing reservation area 111 is less than the upper limit storage number. As a condition (step S5702: YES), processing for acquiring first pending information is executed. In the process for acquiring the first reservation information, first, the value of the first special figure reservation counter is incremented by 1 (step S5703). According to the value of the first special symbol reservation counter, the display contents of the first special symbol reservation display section 37c in the special symbol unit 37 are adjusted. Thereby, the display contents of the first special figure holding display section 37c correspond to the number of first holding information stored in the first special figure holding area 111. After that, each value of the hit random number counter C1, type random number counter C2, and reach random number counter C3 is stored in the first storage area of the first special figure reservation area 111, that is, the storage corresponding to the number of reservation memories added by 1 in step S5703. It is stored in the area (step S5704). Thereafter, the first pending command is stored in the command transmission buffer 223b of the register area 223 (step S5705). By storing the first pending command in the command transmission buffer 223b, the first pending command is transmitted to the sound-light side MPU 93 by the operation of the command transmission circuit 224. Thereby, the display side MPU 103 controls the display of the symbol display device 41 so that the display content of the first reservation display area 42a of the symbol display device 41 becomes the display content corresponding to the increase in the first reservation information.

In addition, the contents of the first operation winning confirmation flag are also referred to in the second management process (step S5521) executed after the special figure special electric control process (step S5514) in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 88). Therefore, even if the information of the first action winning confirmation flag is confirmed in the hold information acquisition process (FIG. 92) in the special figure special electric control process (step S5514), the information of the first action winning confirmation flag is It will remain as is.

Returning to the explanation of the ball entry detection process (FIG. 91), when it is confirmed that the situation has changed from the situation where the fifth bit D5 stores information of "0" to the situation where information of "1" is stored. , it is determined that one game ball is detected by the second operating port detection sensor 236a (step S5617: YES). In this case, the second operation winning confirmation flag in the work area 211 for specific control is set to "1" (step S5618), and the value of the one prize ball counter in the work area 211 for specific control is incremented by 1. (Step S5619).

In the reservation information acquisition process shown in FIG. is less than the upper limit storage number (step S5707: YES), the process for acquiring the second pending information is executed. In the process for acquiring the second reservation information, first, the value of the second special figure reservation counter is incremented by 1 (step S5708). According to the value of the second special symbol reservation counter, the display contents of the second special symbol reservation display section 37d in the special symbol unit 37 are adjusted. Thereby, the display content of the second special figure holding display section 37d corresponds to the number of second holding information stored in the second special figure holding area 112. Thereafter, each value of the hit random number counter C1, type random number counter C2, and reach random number counter C3 is stored in the first storage area of the second special figure reservation area 112, that is, the memory corresponding to the number of reservations added by 1 in step S5708. It is stored in the area (step S5709). Thereafter, the second pending command is stored in the command transmission buffer 223b of the register area 223 (step S5710). By storing the second pending command in the command transmission buffer 223b, the second pending command is transmitted to the sound-light side MPU 93 by the operation of the command transmission circuit 224. Thereby, the display side MPU 103 controls the display of the symbol display device 41 so that the display content of the second reservation display area 42b of the symbol display device 41 becomes the display content corresponding to the increase in the second reservation information.

In addition, the contents of the second operation winning confirmation flag are also referred to in the second management process (step S5521) that is executed after the special symbol special electric train control process (step S5514) in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 88). Even if the information of the second operation winning confirmation flag is confirmed in the special figure special electric control process (step S5514), the information of the second operation winning confirmation flag is maintained as it is.

Returning to the explanation of the ball entry detection process (FIG. 91), when it is confirmed that the situation has changed from the situation where the sixth bit D6 stores information of "0" to the situation where information of "1" is stored. , it is determined that one game ball has been detected by the exit detection sensor 237a (step S5620: YES). In this case, the out confirmation flag of the work area 211 for specific control is set to "1" (step S5621). The out confirmation flag is a flag for the main side MPU 82 to specify that one game ball has been detected by the out exit detection sensor 237a.

When it is confirmed that the seventh bit D7 has changed from the state in which "0" information is stored to the state in which "1" information is stored, the gate detection sensor 238a detects that one game ball is It is determined that it has been detected (step S5622: YES). In this case, the gate winning confirmation flag of the work area 211 for specific control is set to "1" (step S5623). The gate winning confirmation flag is a flag used by the main MPU 82 to specify that one game ball has entered the through gate 35. In the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 88), in the general figure general control process (step S5515), by confirming that the gate winning confirmation flag is set to "1," the general figure is stored in the general figure holding area 84c. On the condition that the number of pieces of pending information on the standard computer side is less than the upper limit of 4, the numerical information of the current general computer random number counter C4 is stored as the pending information on the general computer side in the general computer reservation area 84c. Execute processing.

Next, the process of step S5509 of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 88) will be explained.

In step S5509 of the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 88), fraud detection processing is executed by the CALLI instruction as already explained. Fraud detection processing is included in non-specific control processing. In other words, in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 88), when the situation changes from executing specific control processing to executing non-specific control processing, the non-specific control processing uses the CALLI instruction. be called.

When fraud detection processing is executed by the CALLI instruction, first, information in the flag register of the main MPU 82 is saved to the stack area 212 for specific control. The flag register includes a carry flag, a zero flag, a P/V flag, a sign flag, a half-carry flag, and the like, and the information in the flag register changes depending on the execution results of arithmetic instructions, rotate instructions, input/output instructions, and the like. By saving the information in the flag register before starting the fraud detection processing program, which is non-specific control processing, changes can be made after the fraud detection processing is called or after the fraud detection processing starts. It becomes possible to save the information of the flag register in the state before the operation to the stack area 212 for specific control.

When fraud detection processing is executed by the CALLI instruction, the information in the flag register is saved to the stack area 212 for specific control, and then the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 88) and the second timer interrupt processing (described later) are performed. (Fig. 114) interrupts are prohibited. As a result, the first timer interrupt process (Figure 88) and the second timer interrupt process (Figure 114), which are specific control processes, are interrupted and activated while the fraud detection process, which is a non-specific control process, is being executed. This makes it possible to prevent this from happening.

When fraud detection processing is executed by the CALLI instruction, the information in the flag register is saved to the stack area 212 for specific control, and the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 88) and second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 114) are performed. After interrupts are disabled, a program corresponding to fraud detection processing is started.

In this way, with the configuration in which fraud detection processing is executed by the CALLI instruction, information in the flag register of the main MPU 82 is saved to the stack area 212 for specific control by one instruction ("CALLI"). At the same time, interrupts of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 88) and the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 114) are prohibited. Then, a program corresponding to fraud detection processing can be started. Therefore, the instruction for saving the information in the flag register of the main MPU 82 to the stack area 212 for specific control and the interrupts of the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 88) and the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 114) are prohibited. The number of instructions set in the program to execute the fraud detection processing can be reduced compared to the case where an instruction to execute the fraud detection processing and an instruction to start the fraud detection processing program are provided separately. can. This makes it possible to reduce the storage capacity of the main ROM 83 for storing programs.

FIG. 93 is a flowchart showing fraud detection processing. Note that the processing from step S5801 to step S5818 in the fraud detection process is executed by the non-specific control processing unit 222 of the main MPU 82 using a non-specific control program and non-specific control data.

First, as "LD SP, Y(u+2)", Y(u+2) is set as a fixed address at the start of non-specific control in the stack pointer of the main MPU 82 by a load instruction (step S5801). The stack pointer is an area in which address information is set for the main MPU 82 to specify a storage area in the stack areas 212 and 214 to which information is to be written by the push command. Each time a push instruction is executed, the stack pointer information is updated to the address of the storage area to be written in the next order, and each time a pop instruction is executed, the stack pointer information is updated to the address of the storage area to be written in the previous order. The address information of the storage area is updated. Furthermore, when using the stack area 214 for non-specific control, the information to be stored is stored starting from the storage area at the last address in the stack area 214 for non-specific control, and each time information to be stored is added. Then, the storage area of the storage destination is changed toward the first address side in the stack area 214 for non-specific control. Therefore, in step S5801, information on the last address in the stack area 214 for non-specific control is set in the stack pointer.

Thereafter, the information in the WA register of the main MPU 82 is saved to the WA buffer set in the work area 213 for non-specific control by a load instruction as "LD (_WABUF), WA" (step S5802). Further, as "LD (_BCBUF), BC", information in the BC register of the main MPU 82 is saved to the BC buffer set in the work area 213 for non-specific control by a load instruction (step S5803). Further, as "LD (_DEBUF), DE", information in the DE register of the main MPU 82 is saved to the DE buffer set in the work area 213 for non-specific control by a load instruction (step S5804). Further, as "LD (_HLBUF), HL", information in the HL register of the main MPU 82 is saved to the HL buffer set in the work area 213 for non-specific control by a load instruction (step S5805). Further, as "LD (_IXBUF), IX", information in the IX register of the main MPU 82 is saved to the IX buffer set in the work area 213 for non-specific control by a load instruction (step S5806). Further, as "LD (_IYBUF), IY", information in the IY register of the main MPU 82 is saved to the IY buffer set in the work area 213 for non-specific control by a load instruction (step S5807).

The general-purpose register area 223a in the register area 223 of the main MPU 82 includes various general-purpose registers, auxiliary registers, and index registers in addition to the flag register described above. In this case, in steps S5802 to S5807, each information of the WA register, BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register, and IY register, which are some of these various general-purpose registers, auxiliary registers, and index registers. is saved in a corresponding buffer in the work area 213 for non-specific control. Note that the information amount of the WA register, BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register, and IY register is all 2 bytes.

These WA register, BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register, and IY register are processes corresponding to non-specific control such as information clearing processing (step S5808), sighting test processing (step S5809), and timer update of non-specific control. This is a register used in the process (step S5810) and the fraud detection execution process (step S5811). The information set in such registers is used to execute information clearing processing (step S5808), sighting test processing (step S5809), non-specific control timer updating processing (step S5810), and fraud detection execution processing (step S5811). By previously saving the information in the work area 213 for non-specific control, it becomes possible to save the information in these registers used for specific control before the non-specific control is started. Therefore, even if these registers are overwritten during non-specific control, the status of these registers can be changed by restoring the information saved in the work area 213 for non-specific control to these registers when terminating the non-specific control. It becomes possible to restore the state to the state corresponding to the specific control before the non-specific control was executed.

In addition, instead of saving all the information of various general-purpose registers, auxiliary registers, and index registers to the work area 213 for non-specific control, information clearing processing (step S5808), which is processing corresponding to non-specific control, WA register, BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register, and IY register to be used in test processing (step S5809), non-specific control timer update processing (step S5810), and fraud detection execution processing (step S5811) By selectively saving the information in the work area 213 for non-specific control, it becomes possible to suppress the capacity secured for saving the register information in the work area 213 for non-specific control. Therefore, a work area for non-specific control that becomes available for information clearing processing (step S5808), sighting test processing (step S5809), non-specific control timer update processing (step S5810), and fraud detection execution processing (step S5811). It becomes possible to save the information in the register as described above while ensuring a large capacity of 213.

Of course, among the various general-purpose registers, auxiliary registers, and index registers in the main MPU 82, registers other than the WA register, BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register, and IY register support non-specific control. The information set before the start of the process is stored and held until the process corresponding to the non-specific control is finished and the process corresponding to the specific control is restarted.

Furthermore, by saving register information to the work area 213 for non-specific control instead of saving it to the stack area 214 for non-specific control, the capacity of the stack area 214 for non-specific control can be kept small. It becomes possible. Furthermore, when using the stack area 214 for non-specific control, as described above, the information is written in the order in which the later information is read out first, so if the order in which the information is read out is shifted due to some kind of noise, etc. If this happens, all subsequent reading order information will be restored to different registers. The probability of occurrence of such an event increases as the amount of information saved in the stack area 214 for non-specific control increases. In contrast, by saving register information to the work area 213 for non-specific control, it is possible to prevent the above-mentioned phenomenon from occurring even when there is a large amount of information to be saved. .

After executing the processes from step S5802 to step S5807, information clearing process (step S5808), sighting test process (step S5809), non-specific control timer update process (step S5810), and fraud detection execution process (step S5811) are executed. Execute. When executing the information clearing process (step S5808), the test firing process (step S5809), the non-specific control timer update process (step S5810), and the fraud detection execution process (step S5811), the information set in the program for non-specific control is The subroutine programs corresponding to the information clearing process (step S5808), the sight firing test process (step S5809), the non-specific control timer update process (step S5810), and the fraud detection execution process (step S5811) are executed. However, when executing the program of the subroutine, after the information clearing process (step S5808), sighting test process (step S5809), non-specific control timer update process (step S5810), and fraud detection execution process (step S5811) are executed. Information for specifying the return address of the fraud detection process in is written to the stack area 214 for non-specific control by a push command. Then, when the information clearing process (step S5808), the sighting test process (step S5809), the non-specific control timer update process (step S5810), and the fraud detection execution process (step S5811) are completed, the return address is determined by a pop command. The information for specifying is read out, and the program returns to the fraud detection processing program indicated by the return address.

In the sight-fire test processing in step S5809, sight-fire test information is generated, and the generated sight-fire test information is stored in the work area 213 for non-specific control. In the non-specific control timer update process of step S5810, numerical information of multiple types of timer counters provided in the non-specific control work area 213 of the main side RAM 84 is updated at once. The timer counters include first to eighth prize monitoring timer counters 213a to 213h and a magnetic monitoring delay timer counter 213j. Each of these timer counters 213a to 213j is decremented by 1 each time the process of step S5810 is executed, and the carry flag (or borrow flag) is set to "1" because it is decremented by 1 when it is already "0". The timer counter is cleared to "0". Details of the information clearing process (step S5808) and fraud detection execution process (step S5811) will be described later.

After executing the information clearing process (step S5808), the sight firing test process (step S5809), the non-specific control timer update process (step S5810), and the fraud detection execution process (step S5811), "LD SP, Y (r+b) '', the load instruction sets Y(r+b) in the stack pointer of the main MPU 82 as a fixed address when returning to specific control after the fraud detection process ends (step S5812). The address of Y(r+b) is set as an address between Y(r+8) and Y(s) in the stack area 212 for specific control.

The amount of information stored in the stack area 212 for specific control immediately before the fraud detection process is called in step S5509 of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 88) is always constant, and accordingly, the amount of information stored in the stack area 212 for specific control is always constant. The information on the stack pointer (that is, the value of the stack pointer) of the side MPU 82 is constant. In this case, the information stored in the specific control stack area 212 includes, for example, information on the return address of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 88) after the fraud detection process is completed. The above-mentioned constant information of the stack pointer is Y(r+b). Therefore, the information clearing process (step S5808), the sight-fire test process (step S5809), the non-specific control timer update process (step S5810), and the fraud detection execution process (step S5811), which are processes corresponding to non-specific control, are completed. When returning to the process corresponding to specific control, by setting the constant information Y(r+b) to the stack pointer of the main MPU 82, the information of the stack pointer is used to return to the process corresponding to non-specific control. It becomes possible to restore the information to the information immediately before the start of the process. By setting fixed information in the stack pointer in this way, the information of the stack pointer is restored to the information immediately before the process corresponding to non-specific control was started, so that the process corresponding to non-specific control can be performed. There is no need to save information on the stack pointer of the main MPU 82 corresponding to the specific control to the main RAM 84 before starting the specific control. Therefore, it becomes possible to reduce the processing load, and there is no need to secure an area for the evacuation in the main RAM 84.

Thereafter, the information saved in the WA buffer of the work area 213 for non-specific control is overwritten in the WA register of the main MPU 82 by a load instruction as "LD WA, (_WABUF)" (step S5813). Also, as "LD BC, (_BCBUF)", the information saved in the BC buffer of the work area 213 for non-specific control is overwritten in the BC register of the main MPU 82 by the load instruction (step S5814). Further, as "LD DE, (_DEBUF)", the information saved in the DE buffer of the non-specific control work area 213 is overwritten in the DE register of the main MPU 82 by the load instruction (step S5815). Further, as "LD HL, (_HLBUF)", the information saved in the HL buffer of the non-specific control work area 213 is overwritten in the HL register of the main MPU 82 by the load instruction (step S5816). Further, as "LD IX, (_IXBUF)", the information saved in the IX buffer of the work area 213 for non-specific control is overwritten in the IX register of the main MPU 82 by the load instruction (step S5817). Further, as "LD IY, (_IYBUF)", the information saved in the IY buffer of the work area 213 for non-specific control is overwritten in the IY register of the main MPU 82 by the load instruction (step S5818). By executing the processing from step S5813 to step S5818, processing corresponding to non-specific control is started for each information of the WA register, BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register, and IY register of the main MPU 82. It becomes possible to restore the information corresponding to the specific control immediately before the control.

After executing the processing in steps S5813 to S5818, the RETI command returns to the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 88) included in the specific control processing. By executing the RETI instruction, the information in the flag register saved in the specific control stack area 212 before execution of the fraud detection process is restored to the flag register of the main MPU 82, and the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 88) and the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 114) are switched from a state in which generation is prohibited to a state in which they are permitted. As a result, the information in the flag register of the main MPU 82 is restored to information for executing specific control, and new execution of the first timer interrupt process and the second timer interrupt process becomes possible. Note that the RETI command in the fraud detection process (FIG. 93) may maintain a state in which generation of the first timer interrupt process is prohibited.

Due to the configuration that executes the RETI instruction, the information in the flag register saved in the stack area 212 for specific control is transferred to the flag of the main MPU 82 by one instruction (RETI) before execution of the fraud detection process. It is possible to restore the register and switch from a state in which generation of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 88) and a second timer interrupt process (FIG. 114) are prohibited to a state in which they are permitted. Therefore, an instruction for restoring the information in the flag register saved in the stack area 212 for specific control to the flag register of the main MPU 82 before execution of the fraud detection process, and the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 88) and an instruction for switching from a state in which generation of second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 114) is prohibited to a state in which it is permitted. can reduce the number of This makes it possible to reduce the storage capacity of the main ROM 83 for storing programs for non-specific control processing.

Here, the information stored in the flag register and various registers of the main MPU 82 when the non-specific control process is executed is not saved to the main RAM 84 when the specific control process is restarted. Thereby, there is no need to secure a storage area for saving the above information in the work area 211 for specific control and the stack area 212 for specific control.

In addition, the information stored in the flag register and various registers of the main MPU 82 when non-specific control processing is executed is stored when non-specific control processing is restarted after returning to specific control processing. This information is not used. In other words, information necessary for multiple processing times of non-specific control processing that is executed with specific control processing in between is stored in the work area 213 for non-specific control or the stack area 214 for non-specific control. and is not stored in the flag register and various registers of the main MPU 82. Therefore, even if the information stored in the flag register and various registers of the main MPU 82 is not saved to the main RAM 84 when a non-specific control process is executed, a problem may arise when executing the non-specific control process. do not have.

Next, the information clearing process executed when the subroutine program is called in step S5808 will be described. FIG. 94 is a flowchart showing information clearing processing. Note that the processing from step S5901 to step S5904 in the information clearing process is executed by the non-specific control processing unit 222 of the main MPU 82 using a non-specific control program and non-specific control data.

In the information clearing process, among the storage areas of the work area 213 for non-specific control, the already explained first general winning abnormality flag 213l, second general winning abnormality flag 213m, third general winning abnormality flag 213n, special electric winning abnormality A process is executed to clear the flag 213o, the first operation winning abnormality flag 213p, the second operation winning abnormality flag 213q, the out abnormality flag 213r, the gate winning abnormality flag 213s, and the magnetic abnormality flag 213t to "0". These first general winning abnormal flag 213l, second general winning abnormal flag 213m, third general winning abnormal flag 213n, special electric winning abnormal flag 213o, first operating winning abnormal flag 213p, second operating winning abnormal flag 213q, out abnormal flag 213r, the gate prize winning abnormality flag 213s, and the magnetic abnormality flag 213t all have a data capacity of 1 byte, and addresses are set so as to be serial numbers for each of these areas. 1st general winning abnormal flag 213l → 2nd general winning abnormal flag 213m → 3rd general winning abnormal flag 213n → Special electric winning abnormal flag 213o → 1st operating winning abnormal flag 213p → 2nd operating winning abnormal flag 213q → Out abnormal flag 213r The address increases by "1" in the order of → gate winning abnormality flag 213s → magnetic abnormality flag 213t.

In the information clearing process, first, a start address is set as a clearing target address in a predetermined register of the main MPU 82 (step S5901). The start address is the address of the first general prize winning abnormality flag 213l.

Thereafter, the area corresponding to the address to be cleared is cleared to "0" (step S5902). When the address to be cleared is the start address, the area corresponding to the start address is the first general winning abnormality flag 213l, so the first general winning abnormality flag 213l is cleared to "0".

Thereafter, it is determined whether the address to be cleared is the final address (step S5903). The final address is the address of the magnetic abnormality flag 213t. If the address to be cleared is not the final address (step S5903: NO), the address to be cleared is updated to the next address in order (step S5904). Specifically, 1 is added to the address to be cleared. Then, in step S5902, the area corresponding to the address after the addition of 1 is cleared to "0", and the process of step S5903 is executed.

If the process of step S5904 is executed in a situation where the address to be cleared is the start address, the address to be cleared becomes the address of the second general prize winning abnormality flag 213m, and "0" is set for the second general prize winning abnormality flag 213m. ” Clearing is performed. Furthermore, if the process of step S5904 is executed in a situation where the address of the second general winning a prize abnormal flag 213m is the address to be cleared, the address to be cleared becomes the address of the third general winning a prize abnormal flag 213n, and the third general winning a prize abnormal flag 213m is the address to be cleared. The general winning abnormality flag 213n is cleared to "0".

If the address of the magnetic anomaly flag 213t corresponding to the final address is set as the address to be cleared in the process of step S5904 by repeating the processes of steps S5902 to S5904, the magnetic anomaly flag 213t is cleared to "0". After that, in step S5903, an affirmative determination is made. By making an affirmative determination in step S5903, this information clearing process ends. In addition, in the initial setting process (FIG. 86), the first to eighth prize monitoring timer counters 213a to 213h, magnetic detection counter 213i, magnetic monitoring delay timer counter 213j, and second security counter 213k in the work area 213 for non-specific control are , the normal counter area 251, the calculation result storage area 252, the display target setting area 253, the switching timing counter 254, and the display target counter 255 are not cleared in step S5902.

By executing the information clearing process as described above, the first general winning abnormality flag 213l, the second general winning abnormality flag 213m, the third general winning abnormality flag 213n, It becomes possible to clear the special electric winning abnormality flag 213o, the first operating winning abnormality flag 213p, the second operating winning abnormality flag 213q, the out abnormal flag 213r, the gate winning abnormality flag 213s, and the magnetic abnormality flag 213t to "0". The effect of clearing these flags 213l to 213t to "0" before execution of the fraud detection execution process will be explained later.

Next, a description will be given of the fraud detection execution process executed by calling the subroutine program in step S5811. FIG. 95 is a flowchart showing fraud detection execution processing. Note that the processing from step S6001 to step S6019 in the fraud detection execution process is executed by the non-specific control processing unit 222 of the main MPU 82 using a non-specific control program and non-specific control data.

First, it is determined whether the second operation winning confirmation flag in the work area 211 for specific control is set to "1" (step S6001). As already explained, when it is determined that one game ball is detected by the second actuation port detection sensor 236a in the ball entry detection process (FIG. 91) included in the specific control process, that is, the ball enters the second actuation port 34. When a winning of one game ball occurs, "1" is set in the second operation winning confirmation flag.

If the second operation winning confirmation flag is set to "1" (step S6001: YES), whether or not the general power open state flag provided in the work area 211 for specific control is set to "1". (Step S6002), and also determines whether the value of the general power monitoring delay timer counter 211c in the specific control work area 211 is "0" (Step S6003).

Here, the general electric power control process executed in the general electric power control process in step S5515 of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 88) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 96. The general electric power control process is a process for controlling the general electric power open state of the general electric accessory 34a at the second operating port 34, as in the first embodiment. Note that the processing from step S6101 to step S6111 in the general electricity control process is executed by the specific control processing unit 221 of the main MPU 82 using a specific control program and specific control data.

First, it is determined whether or not the second operating port 34 is in the open state by determining whether the general power open state flag provided in the work area 211 for specific control is set to "1". (Step S6101). The general power open state flag is a flag used by the main MPU 82 to specify that a drive signal is being output to the general power drive unit 34b and the second operating port 34 is in the open state. Note that when the output of the drive signal to the drive unit 34b for general electricity is started in the ordinary electricity map determination process (step S309) of the general electricity electricity control process (FIG. 15), "1" is set in the general electricity open state flag. " is set, and also when the output of a drive signal to the drive unit 34b for general power is started in step S6110, which will be described later, the general power open state flag is set to "1".

If "1" is set in the general power open state flag (step S6101: YES), a process for determining closure is executed (step S6102). In the closure determination process, if the second actuation winning confirmation flag of the confirmation flag group 211d in the work area 211 for specific control is set to "1," that is, a winning to the second actuation opening 34 has occurred. In this case, the value of the general power winning counter provided in the work area 211 for specific control is decremented by 1. As in the first embodiment, the general electric power winning counter indicates whether the number of game balls entering the second operation port 34 in the current electric power open state has reached 10, which is the upper limit number on the general electric power side. This counter is used by the main MPU 82 to determine whether the If the value of the general electricity prize counter after subtraction by 1 is "0", it is determined that the closing condition of the second operating port 34 is satisfied. In addition, when there is no winning in the second actuating port 34 or when the value of the general electric winning counter is not "0," the value of the ordinary electrician timer counter provided in the work area 211 for specific control is By determining whether or not it is "0", it is determined whether or not the duration of one opening of the second operating port 34 has elapsed. If the value of the timer counter on the general figure side is "0", it is determined that the closing condition for the second operating port 34 is satisfied.

If the closing condition for the second operating port 34 is satisfied (step S6103: YES), a closing setting process is executed (step S6104). In the closing setting process, the second operating port 34 is brought into a closed state by stopping the output of the drive signal to the drive unit 34b for general electricity. Thereafter, the general power open state flag in the work area 211 for specific control is cleared to "0" (step S6105).

Thereafter, information on the general power monitoring delay period is set in the general power monitoring delay timer counter 211c in the work area 211 for specific control (step S6106). The general power monitoring delay timer counter 211c detects the game ball by the second operating port detection sensor 236a provided in the second operating port 34 after the second operating port 34 which is in the open state becomes the closed state. This is a counter used by the main MPU 82 to specify the period during which the period is also treated as valid. The general power monitoring delay period is set as a period longer than the longest period assumed as the period until the game ball that enters the second operating port 34 in the open state is detected by the second operating port detection sensor 236a. Specifically, it is set to 1 second.

Thereafter, end branch processing is executed (step S6107). In the end branch processing, if the value of the general utility winning counter is "0", it is assumed that the current utility power release state has ended, and the value of the general utility winning counter provided in the work area 211 for specific control is set. Clear “0”. Thereby, the process to be executed in the next processing time of the general-purpose figure and electric power control process becomes the general-purpose figure fluctuation start process (step S307). If the value of the general power winning counter is 1 or more, 1 is subtracted from the value of the general power opening counter provided in the work area 211 for specific control. Similar to the first embodiment, the general power release counter is a counter for the main MPU 82 to specify the number of times the general power accessory 34a of the second operating port 34 is opened in the current general power release state. It is. If the value of the general power release counter after subtraction by 1 is "0", it is assumed that the current general power release state has ended, and the value of the general power power release counter in the work area 211 for specific control is cleared to "0". . Thereby, the process to be executed in the next processing time of the general-purpose figure and electric power control process becomes the general-purpose figure fluctuation start process (step S307). If the value of the utility power open counter after subtracting 1 is 1 or more, information about the interval period (specifically, 2 seconds) on the utility power side is sent to the utility power side timer counter in the work area 211 for specific control. set. In this case, since the value of the regular electricity counter is maintained, the process to be executed in the next processing time of the ordinary electricity control process is maintained as the general electricity control process (FIG. 96).

If it is determined in the general power control process that the value of the general power open state flag in the work area 211 for specific control is "0" (step S6101: NO), the general power side timer counter in the work area 211 for specific control By determining whether the value of is "0", it is determined whether the interval period on the power grid side has elapsed (step S6108). If the interval period on the general power side has elapsed (step S6108: YES), information corresponding to the long open duration period (specifically, 2 seconds) on the general power side is set in the timer counter on the general power side ( Step S6109). In addition, the second operating port 34 is brought into an open state by outputting the drive signal to the general power drive unit 34b again (step S6110). Thereafter, the general power open state flag in the work area 211 for specific control is set to "1" (step S6111). In this case, since the value of the regular electricity counter is maintained, the process to be executed in the next processing time of the ordinary electricity control process is maintained as the general electricity control process (FIG. 96).

Returning to the explanation of the fraud detection execution process (FIG. 95), in a situation where the second operation winning confirmation flag in the work area 211 for specific control is set to "1" (step S6001: YES), the work for specific control The general power open state flag in the area 211 is not set to "1" (step S6002: NO), and the value of the general power monitoring delay timer counter 211c in the specific control work area 211 is "0". In this case (step S6003: YES), even though the period in which the detection of a game ball by the second operating port detection sensor 236a is treated as valid has passed since the second operating port 34 was in the closed state, the second operating port 34 is closed. This means that the game ball has been detected by the operating port detection sensor 236a. In this case, the second operation winning abnormality flag 213q in the work area 213 for non-specific control is set to "1" (step S6004). As already explained, the second operation winning abnormality flag 213q is provided corresponding to the second operation port 34. As a result of the monitoring process using the general power monitoring delay timer counter 211c or the 6th winning prize monitoring timer counter 213g, it is determined by the non-specific control process that an abnormal ball entering the game ball has been detected. , "1" is set to the second operation winning abnormality flag 213q in the processing of the non-specific control.

Thereafter, the ordinary power winning abnormality command is stored in the command transmission buffer 223b in the register area 223 of the main MPU 82 (step S6005). By storing the ordinary electricity winning abnormality command in the command transmission buffer 223b, the ordinary electricity winning abnormality command is transmitted to the sound-light side MPU 93 by the operation of the command transmission circuit 224. When the sound/light side MPU 93 receives the ordinary power winning abnormality command, the display light emitting unit 64, the speaker unit 65, and the symbol display device 41 issue a notification indicating that an abnormality has occurred regarding the winning to the second operating port 34. to be done.

Thereafter, the value of the second security counter 213k in the work area 213 for non-specific control is incremented by 1 (step S6006). As already explained, the second security counter 213k is a counter used by the main MPU 82 to determine whether or not it is necessary to externally output a pulsed security signal from the main MPU 82 to the management computer of the gaming hall. This is a counter used by the main MPU 82 to specify the number of external outputs of a pulsed security signal when outputting to the outside.

If a negative determination is made in step S6001, if an affirmative determination is made in step S6002, if a negative determination is made in step S6003, or if the process in step S6006 is executed, special electric power is awarded in the work area 211 for specific control. It is determined whether the confirmation flag is set to "1" (step S6007). As already explained, when it is determined that one game ball is detected by the special electric detection sensor 234a in the ball entering detection process (FIG. 91) included in the specific control process, that is, when one game ball is detected by the special electric detection sensor 234a, When a winning game ball occurs, "1" is set in the special electric winning confirmation flag.

If the special electric train winning confirmation flag is set to "1" (step S6007: YES), it is determined whether or not the special electric power open state flag provided in the work area 211 for specific control is set to "1". At the same time (step S6008), it is determined whether the value of the special power monitoring delay timer counter 211b in the work area 211 for specific control is "0" (step S6009).

Here, the special train start process, the special train opening process, and the special train closing process executed in the special train special train control process in step S5514 of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 88) will be described in FIGS. 97(a) to 97(c). ) will be explained with reference to the flowchart. The special train start process, the special train open process, and the special train closed process are processes for controlling the opening and closing of the special train winning device 32 in the opening/closing execution mode, similar to the first embodiment. Note that steps S6201 to S6208 in the special train start process, steps S6301 to S6307 in the special train open process, and steps S6401 to S6407 in the special train closed process utilize a specific control program and specific control data. This is executed by the specific control processing section 221 of the main MPU 82.

As shown in FIG. 97(a), in the special train start process, the opening/closing execution mode is set by determining whether or not the value of the special train side timer counter provided in the work area 211 for specific control is "0". It is determined whether the opening period has elapsed (step S6201). If an affirmative determination is made in step S6201, information on the number of round games corresponding to the game result that triggered the execution of the current opening/closing execution mode is set in the round counter provided in the work area 211 for specific control ( Step S6202). The round counter is a counter for the main MPU 82 to specify the number of remaining round games in the opening/closing execution mode, as in the first embodiment. Further, information on the open duration period of the round game (specifically, 29 seconds) is set in the special figure side timer counter (step S6203). In addition, "10" is set in the winning counter provided in the work area 211 for specific control (step S6204). The winning counter is a counter for the main MPU 82 to specify the remaining number of winnings from the upper limit number of winnings, as in the first embodiment. Further, the special electric winning device 32 is brought into an open state by outputting a drive signal to the special electric drive unit 32b (step S6205).

Thereafter, the special power release state flag provided in the work area 211 for specific control is set to "1" (step S6206). The special electricity open state flag is a flag used by the main side MPU 82 to specify that a drive signal is being output to the special electricity drive unit 32b and the special electricity winning device 32 is in an open state.

Thereafter, the special power release command is stored in the command transmission buffer 223b in the register area 223 of the main MPU 82 (step S6207). By storing the special electric power release command in the command transmission buffer 223b, the special electric power release command is transmitted to the sound-light side MPU 93 by the operation of the command transmission circuit 224. By receiving the special electricity release command, the sound and light side MPU 93 causes the display light emitting unit 64, the speaker unit 65, and the symbol display device 41 to execute an effect indicating that the special electricity prize winning device 32 is in the open state. .

Thereafter, 1 is added to the value of the special figure special electric counter provided in the work area 211 for specific control (step S6208). As a result, the value of the special figure special electric line counter becomes "4" corresponding to the special electric line opening process (FIG. 97(b)).

In the special electricity opening process shown in FIG. 97(b), a closing determination process is executed (step S6301). In the closure determination process, when the special electric winning confirmation flag of the confirmation flag group 211d in the work area 211 for specific control is set to "1", that is, when a winning to the special electric winning device 32 has occurred, the specified The value of the prize winning counter in the control work area 211 is subtracted by 1. If the value of the prize winning counter after being subtracted by 1 is "0", it is determined that the closing condition for the special electric prize winning device 32 is satisfied. In addition, if there is no winning in the special electric winning device 32 or if the value of the winning counter is not "0", check whether the value of the special drawing side timer counter in the work area 211 for specific control is "0". By determining whether or not the round game is open, it is determined whether or not the open continuation period of the round game has elapsed. When the value of the special figure side timer counter is "0", it is determined that the closing condition of the special pay winning device 32 is satisfied.

If the closing condition for the special electric winning device 32 is satisfied (step S6302: YES), a closing setting process is executed (step S6303). In the closing setting process, the special electric winning device 32 is brought into a closed state by stopping the output of the drive signal to the special electric drive unit 32b. Thereafter, the special power release state flag in the work area 211 for specific control is cleared to "0" (step S6304).

Thereafter, information on the special power monitoring delay period is set in the special power monitoring delay timer counter 211b in the work area 211 for specific control (step S6305). The special electric line monitoring delay timer counter 211b sets a period in which the detection of a game ball by the special electric detection sensor 234a provided in the special electric winning device 32 is treated as valid even after the special electric winning device 32 which is in the open state becomes a closed state. This is a counter used for identification by the main MPU 82. The special electric monitoring delay period is set as a period longer than the longest period assumed as the period until the winning game ball of the special electric winning device 32 in the open state is detected by the special electric detection sensor 234a. is set to 1 second.

Thereafter, after decrementing the value of the round counter in the specific control work area 211 by 1 (step S6306), ending branch processing is executed (step S6307). In the ending branch process, if the value of the round counter after subtracting 1 is 1 or more, after setting the interval period information (specifically 3 seconds) to the special figure side timer counter in the work area 211 for specific control. , 1 is added to the value of the special figure special electric counter in the work area 211 for specific control. As a result, the value of the special train special train counter becomes "5" corresponding to the special train closed process (FIG. 97(c)). On the other hand, if the value of the round counter after subtraction by 1 is "0", information on the ending period (specifically, 5 seconds) is set in the special figure side timer counter in the work area 211 for specific control. Further, the ending command is stored in the command transmission buffer 223b in the register area 223 of the main MPU 82. By storing the ending command in the command transmission buffer 223b, the ending command is transmitted to the audio-optical side MPU 93 by the operation of the command transmission circuit 224. By receiving the ending command, the sound and light side MPU 93 causes the display light emitting section 64, the speaker section 65, and the symbol display device 41 to execute the ending performance of the opening/closing execution mode. After that, add 2 to the value of the special figure special electric counter. As a result, the value of the special figure special electric line counter becomes "6" corresponding to the special electric line end process (step S612) of the special figure special electric line control process (FIG. 18).

In the special train closing process shown in FIG. 97(c), by determining whether the value of the special train side timer counter in the work area 211 for specific control is "0", it is determined whether the interval period has elapsed. It is determined whether or not (step S6401). When an affirmative determination is made in step S6401, information on the opening duration of the round game (specifically, 29 seconds) is set in the special figure side timer counter (step S6402). Furthermore, the winning counter in the specific control work area 211 is set to "10" (step S6403). Further, the special electric winning device 32 is brought into an open state by outputting a drive signal to the special electric driving unit 32b (step S6404).

Thereafter, the special power release state flag in the work area 211 for specific control is set to "1" (step S6405). Thereafter, the special power release command is stored in the command transmission buffer 223b in the register area 223 of the main MPU 82 (step S6406). By storing the special electric power release command in the command transmission buffer 223b, the special electric power release command is transmitted to the sound-light side MPU 93 by the operation of the command transmission circuit 224. By receiving the special electricity release command, the sound and light side MPU 93 causes the display light emitting unit 64, the speaker unit 65, and the symbol display device 41 to execute an effect indicating that the special electricity prize winning device 32 is in the open state. . Thereafter, the value of the special figure special electric counter in the work area 211 for specific control is subtracted by 1 (step S6407). As a result, the value of the special figure special electric line counter becomes "4" corresponding to the special electric line opening process (FIG. 97(b)).

Returning to the description of the fraud detection execution process (FIG. 95), in a situation where the special electric winning confirmation flag in the work area 211 for specific control is set to "1" (step S6007: YES), the work area 211 for specific control If "1" is not set to the special power release state flag in (step S6008: NO), and furthermore, the value of the special power monitoring delay timer counter 211b in the work area 211 for specific control is "0" (step S6009) : YES), even though the period in which the detection of the game ball by the special electric detection sensor 234a is treated as valid has passed since the special electric winning device 32 was in the closed state, the game ball is detected by the special electric detection sensor 234a. means that it has been done. In this case, the special electric winning abnormality flag 213o in the work area 213 for non-specific control is set to "1" (step S6010). As already explained, the special electric winning abnormality flag 213o is provided corresponding to the special electric winning prize device 32. As a result of the monitoring process using the special electric monitoring delay timer counter 211b or the fourth winning monitoring timer counter 213e, when it is identified in the non-specific control process that an abnormal ball entry has occurred. In the processing of the non-specific control, "1" is set in the special electric winning prize abnormality flag 213o.

Thereafter, the special electric winning prize abnormality command is stored in the command transmission buffer 223b in the register area 223 of the main MPU 82 (step S6011). By storing the special electric winning abnormality command in the command transmission buffer 223b, the special electric winning abnormal command is transmitted to the sound-light side MPU 93 by the operation of the command transmitting circuit 224. By receiving the special electric winning abnormality command, the sound and optical side MPU 93 executes a notification indicating that an abnormality has occurred regarding winning to the special electric winning device 32 on the display light emitting unit 64, the speaker unit 65, and the symbol display device 41. Do it like this.

Thereafter, the value of the second security counter 213k in the work area 213 for non-specific control is incremented by 1 (step S6012). As already explained, the second security counter 213k is a counter used by the main MPU 82 to determine whether or not it is necessary to externally output a pulsed security signal from the main MPU 82 to the management computer of the gaming hall. This is a counter used by the main MPU 82 to specify the number of external outputs of a pulsed security signal when outputting to the outside.

If a negative determination is made in step S6007, an affirmative determination is made in step S6008, a negative determination is made in step S6009, or the process of step S6012 is executed, a confirmation flag in the work area 211 for specific control Of the 1st winning confirmation flag, 2nd winning confirmation flag, 3rd winning confirmation flag, special electric winning confirmation flag, 1st action winning confirmation flag, 2nd action winning confirmation flag, out confirmation flag, and gate winning confirmation flag of group 211d , it is determined whether the confirmation flag corresponding to the value of the monitoring target counter provided in the work area 213 for non-specific control is set to "1" (step S6013).

The monitoring target counter is a counter for the main MPU 82 to specify the type of confirmation flag that is the target of the monitoring processing in steps S6014 to S6016. At the timing when the fraud detection execution process (FIG. 95) is started, the value of the monitoring target counter is "0". The types of confirmation flags that are subject to the monitoring processing in steps S6014 to S6016 are the first winning confirmation flag when the value of the monitored counter is "0", and the first winning confirmation flag when the value of the monitored counter is "1". If the value of the monitored counter is "2", it is the third winning confirmation flag; if the value of the monitored counter is "3", it is the special electric winning confirmation flag. When the value of the monitored counter is "4", it is the first operation winning confirmation flag, and when the value of the monitored counter is "5", it is the second operation winning confirmation flag, and the value of the monitored counter is When the value is "6", it is an out confirmation flag, and when the value of the monitored counter is "7", it is a gate winning confirmation flag.

If the confirmation flag corresponding to the current value of the counter to be monitored is set to "1" (step S6013: YES), the non-specific control of the prize monitoring timer counters 213a to 213h in the work area 213 for non-specific control It is determined whether or not the values of the prize monitoring timer counters 213a to 213h corresponding to the values of the monitoring target counters in the work area 213 are greater than or equal to 1 (step S6014).

As already explained, the first to third winning monitoring timer counters 213a to 213c detect one game ball in the winning opening detection sensors 231a to 233a provided in the corresponding general winning opening 31, and then display the next game ball. This is a counter used by the main MPU 82 to specify a period during which the detection of is treated as invalid. As already explained, the fourth winning monitoring timer counter 213d controls the main side MPU 82 to determine the period after the special electric detection sensor 234a of the special electric winning device 32 detects one game ball and treats the detection of the next game ball as invalid. This is a counter used for specifying. As already explained, the fifth winning monitoring timer counter 213e detects one game ball with the first operating port detection sensor 235a provided in the first operating port 33, and then treats the detection of the next gaming ball as invalid. This is a counter used by the main MPU 82 to specify the period. As already explained, the sixth prize monitoring timer counter 213f mainly controls the period after the second operation port detection sensor 236a of the second operation port 34 detects one game ball and treats the detection of the next game ball as invalid. This is a counter used for identification by the side MPU 82. As already explained, the seventh prize monitoring timer counter 213g controls the period from the time when the out exit detection sensor 237a provided at the out exit 24a detects one game ball to the time when the detection of the next game ball is treated as invalid. This is a counter used for identification by the MPU 82. As already explained, the eighth prize monitoring timer counter 213h is set by the main side MPU 82 to determine the period after the gate detection sensor 238a provided in the through gate 35 detects one game ball and treats the detection of the next game ball as invalid. This counter is used to specify the

When the value of the monitoring target counter is "0", the first prize winning monitoring timer counter 213a becomes the checking target. When the value of the monitoring target counter is "1", the second prize winning monitoring timer counter 213b becomes the checking target. When the value of the monitoring target counter is "2", the third prize winning monitoring timer counter 213c becomes the checking target. When the value of the monitoring target counter is "3", the fourth prize winning monitoring timer counter 213d becomes the checking target. When the value of the monitoring target counter is "4", the fifth prize winning monitoring timer counter 213e becomes the checking target. When the value of the monitoring target counter is "5", the sixth winning prize monitoring timer counter 213f becomes the checking target. When the value of the monitoring target counter is "6", the seventh winning prize monitoring timer counter 213g becomes the checking target. When the value of the monitoring target counter is "7", the eighth winning prize monitoring timer counter 213h becomes the checking target.

If the value of the prize monitoring timer counter 213a to 213h corresponding to the value of the monitored counter is 1 or more (step S6014: YES), the detection result of the detection sensor 231a to 238a corresponding to the value of the monitored counter is 1. This means that the detection results of the detection sensors 231a to 238a become a new detection result of a game ball before the detection invalid period (for example, 0.1 seconds) elapses after the detection result of a game ball is obtained. When such a situation occurs, for example, chattering of a game ball occurs in the detection range of the detection sensors 231a to 238a, and the detection of the detection sensors 231a to 238a occurs when one game ball passes. There is a case where the result is a detection result corresponding to the passage of a plurality of game balls. The detection invalid period is set as a period in which no new detection of the game ball occurs when the game ball passes normally without chattering.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S6014, it means that a game ball has been detected before the detection invalid period elapses in the detection sensors 231a to 238a corresponding to the value of the monitored counter. In this case, the first general winning abnormality flag 213l, the second general winning abnormality flag 213m, the third general winning abnormality flag 213n, the special electric winning abnormality flag 213o, the first operation winning abnormality flag 213p, in the work area 213 for non-specific control, Among the second operation winning abnormality flag 213q, out abnormal flag 213r, and gate winning abnormality flag 213s, abnormality flags 213l to 213s corresponding to the value of the monitored counter are set to "1" (step S6015). When the value of the monitored counter is "0", "1" is set in the first general prize winning abnormality flag 213l. When the value of the monitored counter is "1", "1" is set in the second general prize winning abnormality flag 213m. When the value of the monitoring target counter is "2", "1" is set in the third general prize winning abnormality flag 213n. When the value of the monitored counter is "3", "1" is set in the special electric prize winning abnormality flag 213o. When the value of the monitored counter is "4", "1" is set in the first operation winning abnormality flag 213p. When the value of the monitored counter is "5", "1" is set to the second operation winning abnormality flag 213q. When the value of the monitored counter is "6", the out abnormality flag 213r is set to "1". When the value of the monitored counter is "7", "1" is set in the gate winning abnormality flag 213s. As a result, if a game ball is detected in the detection sensors 231a to 238a corresponding to the value of the monitored counter before the detection invalid period elapses, "1" is set to the corresponding abnormality flags 213l to 213s. Ru.

When a negative determination is made in step S6014, or when the process in step S6015 is executed, a detection invalid period is set in the winning monitoring timer counters 213a to 213h corresponding to the value of the monitoring target counter (step S6016). This allows the detection sensors 231a to 238a corresponding to the counters to be monitored to detect a game ball before the detection invalid period elapses, or when a game ball is detected after the detection invalid period elapses. Even if there is, a detection invalid period is set in the winning monitoring timer counters 213a to 213h corresponding to the counter to be monitored.

Thereafter, it is determined whether the value of the monitoring target counter is the maximum value "7" (step S6017). If the value of the monitored counter is less than the maximum value (step S6017: NO), the value of the monitored counter is incremented by 1 (step S6018), and then the process returns to step S6013. As a result, the monitoring processing of steps S6014 to S6016 is executed for the detection sensors 231a to 238a to be monitored in the next order. By executing the processes of steps S6013 to S6018 as described above, it is determined whether or not a game ball is detected within the detection invalid period for each of the detection sensors 231a to 238a.

If the value of the monitoring target counter is the maximum value (step S6017: YES), magnetic monitoring processing is executed (step S6019). FIG. 98 is a flowchart showing the magnetic monitoring process. Note that the processing of steps S6501 to S6509 in the magnetic monitoring process is executed by the non-specific control processing unit 222 of the main MPU 82 using a non-specific control program and non-specific control data.

First, it is determined whether the value of the magnetic monitoring delay timer counter 213j in the work area 213 for non-specific control is "0" (step S6501). As already explained, the magnetic monitoring delay timer counter 213j is a counter for the main MPU 82 to specify the magnetic monitoring delay period during which magnetic abnormality monitoring is not performed. The magnetic monitoring delay period is arbitrary, but in this pachinko machine 10, it is set to 0.5 seconds.

If the value of the magnetic monitoring delay timer counter 213j is "0" (step S6501: YES), it is determined whether the detection result of the magnetic detection sensor provided on the back surface of the game board 24 is a detection result corresponding to magnetic detection. (Step S6502). If a negative determination is made in step S6502, the value of the magnetic detection counter 213i in the work area 213 for non-specific control is cleared to "0" (step S6503). As already explained, the magnetic detection counter 213i is a counter for the main MPU 82 to specify the number of times the occurrence of magnetic abnormality has been specified.

When an affirmative determination is made in step S6502, the value of the magnetic detection counter 213i in the work area 213 for non-specific control is incremented by 1 (step S6504). If the value of the magnetic detection counter 213i after the 1 addition is equal to or greater than the abnormality reference number (specifically "3") (step S6505: YES), the magnetic abnormality flag 213t in the work area 213 for non-specific control is set to "1" (step S6506). By setting the magnetic anomaly flag 213t to "1", the main MPU 82 executes processing to deal with the occurrence of the magnetic anomaly.

Thereafter, the magnetic abnormality command is stored in the command transmission buffer 223b in the register area 223 of the main MPU 82 (step S6507). By storing the magnetic abnormality command in the command transmission buffer 223b, the magnetic abnormality command is transmitted to the audio-optical side MPU 93 by the operation of the command transmission circuit 224. By receiving the magnetic abnormality command, the sound/light side MPU 93 causes the display light emitting section 64, the speaker section 65, and the symbol display device 41 to issue a notification indicating that a magnetic abnormality has occurred.

Thereafter, the value of the second security counter 213k in the work area 213 for non-specific control is incremented by 1 (step S6508). As already explained, the second security counter 213k is a counter used by the main MPU 82 to determine whether or not it is necessary to externally output a pulsed security signal from the main MPU 82 to the management computer of the gaming hall. This is a counter used by the main MPU 82 to specify the number of external outputs of a pulsed security signal when outputting to the outside.

If a negative determination is made in step S6505, or if the process in step S6508 is executed, a magnetic monitoring delay period is set in the magnetic monitoring delay timer counter 213j in the work area 213 for non-specific control (step S6509). As a result, measurement of the magnetic monitoring delay period during which magnetic abnormality monitoring is not performed is started. In this way, a magnetic monitoring delay period in which magnetic anomaly monitoring is not performed is set, and as described above, when the value of the magnetic detection counter 213i exceeds the abnormality standard number of times determined as a plurality of times, magnetic anomaly is detected. By adopting a configuration that identifies the occurrence of magnetic abnormality, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of magnetic anomaly from being identified as occurring even when magnetism is generated due to electrical noise rather than illegal magnetic output.

Next, please refer to the flowchart in FIG. 99 regarding the fraud handling process executed in step S5511, which is a processing order after the fraud detection process including the fraud detection execution process in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 88). I will explain while doing so. Note that the processing from step S6601 to step S6625 in the fraud handling process is executed by the specific control processing unit 221 of the main MPU 82 using a specific control program and specific control data.

If the first general winning abnormality flag 213l in the work area 213 for non-specific control is set to "1" (step S6601: YES), this fraud is detected in the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 88) in the current processing round. Detection of a game ball (i.e., winning in the general winning hole 31) by the first winning hole detection sensor 231a identified in the ball entering detection process (FIG. 91) of step S5508, which is the processing order before the corresponding process, may be caused by chattering, etc. This means that it is caused by an abnormality caused by. In this case, in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 88) in the current process, the work area 211 for specific control is Although the first winning confirmation flag of the confirmation flag group 211d is set to "1", the first winning confirmation flag is cleared to "0" (step S6602). The fraud handling process (Fig. 99) is a processing order that is after the ball entry detection process (Fig. 91) in the processing order of the first timer interrupt process (Fig. 88) and before the second management process described later. Processing order is set. Therefore, in the second management process described later, it is specified that the game ball is not detected by the first winning a prize opening detection sensor 231a.

Thereafter, the value of the 10 award balls counter in the work area 211 for specific control is subtracted by 1 (step S6603). In the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 88) in this processing time, the game ball is detected by the first winning opening detection sensor 231a in the ball entry detection process (FIG. 91) of step S5508, which is the processing order before the main fraud handling process. Upon detection of this, the value of the 10 prize ball counter is incremented by 1. In addition, if the value of the 10 prize balls counter is 1 or more, in the payout output process of step S5518, which is the processing order after the main fraud handling process in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 88), Processing is executed so that a 10 prize ball command instructing the payout of 10 game balls is sent to the payout control device 77. In this case, if the detection of game balls by the first winning hole detection sensor 231a is caused by an abnormality, the first timer interrupt process ( In FIG. 88), before the payout output process in step S5518 is executed, the value of the 10 prize balls counter is decremented by 1 in the fraud handling process (FIG. 99). This makes it possible to prevent the game balls from being paid out excessively.

In steps S6604 to S6606, the same processes as steps S6601 to S6603 are executed for the second winning hole detection sensor 232a, and in steps S6607 to S6609, the same processes as steps S6601 to S6603 are executed for the third winning hole detection sensor 233a. Execute. Specifically, when the second general winning abnormality flag 213m in the work area 213 for non-specific control is set to "1" (step S6604: YES), the confirmation flag group 211d in the work area 211 for specific control is set to "1" (step S6604: YES). The second winning confirmation flag is cleared to "0" (step S6605), and the value of the 10 prize balls counter in the work area 211 for specific control is subtracted by 1 (step S6606). Furthermore, if the third general winning abnormality flag 213n in the work area 213 for non-specific control is set to "1" (step S6607: YES), the third general winning abnormality flag 213n in the work area 211 for specific control is set to "1". The win confirmation flag is cleared to "0" (step S6608), and the value of the 10 prize balls counter in the work area 211 for specific control is subtracted by 1 (step S6609).

If "1" is set in the special electric winning abnormality flag 213o in the work area 213 for non-specific control (step S6610: YES), this fraud handling process is performed in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 88) in the current processing time. Detection of a game ball (i.e., winning in the special electric winning device 32) by the special electric detection sensor 234a specified in the ball entering detection process (FIG. 91) in step S5508, which is a processing order earlier than , is abnormal due to chattering or in a closed state. This means that it was caused by fraud in which a game ball was entered into a prize in the special electric prize winning device 32 that was supposed to be a prize. In this case, in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 88) in the current process, the work area 211 for specific control is Although the special electric prize winning confirmation flag in the confirmation flag group 211d is set to "1," the special electric prize winning confirmation flag is cleared to "0" (step S6611). The fraud handling process (FIG. 99) is a processing order that comes after the ball entry detection process (FIG. 91) in the processing order of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 88), and includes the special figure special electric control process (step S5514) and the later-described process. The processing order is set to be earlier than the second management processing. Therefore, it is specified that the game ball is not detected by the special electricity detection sensor 234a in the special electricity release process (FIG. 97(b)) or the second management process described later.

Thereafter, the value of the 15 award balls counter in the work area 211 for specific control is subtracted by 1 (step S6612). In the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 88) in this processing round, the game ball is detected by the special electric detection sensor 234a in the ball entry detection process (FIG. 91) in step S5508, which is the processing order before the main fraud handling process. As a trigger, the value of the 15 prize balls counter is incremented by 1. In addition, if the value of the 15 prize balls counter is 1 or more, in the payout output process of step S5518, which is the processing order after the main fraud handling process in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 88), Processing is executed so that a 15 prize ball command instructing the payout of 15 game balls is sent to the payout control device 77. In this case, if the detection of game balls by the special electric detection sensor 234a is caused by an abnormality or fraud, the first timer interrupt process of the processing time in which the value of the 15 prize ball counter is incremented by 1 (Fig. 88), the value of the 15 prize ball counter is decremented by 1 in the fraud handling process (FIG. 99) before the payout output process in step S5518 is executed. This makes it possible to prevent the game balls from being paid out excessively.

If the first operation winning abnormality flag 213p in the work area 213 for non-specific control is set to "1" (step S6613: YES), this fraud is detected in the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 88) in the current processing round. Detection of a game ball (that is, winning into the first operating port 33) by the first operating port detection sensor 235a identified in the ball entering detection process (FIG. 91) of step S5508, which is the processing order before the corresponding processing, is chattering. This means that it is caused by an abnormality such as. In this case, in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 88) in the current process, the work area 211 for specific control is Although the first operation winning confirmation flag of the confirmation flag group 211d is set to "1", the first operation winning confirmation flag is cleared to "0" (step S6614). The fraud handling process (FIG. 99) is a processing order that comes after the ball entry detection process (FIG. 91) in the processing order of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 88), and includes the special figure special electric control process (step S5514) and the later-described process. The processing order is set to be earlier than the second management processing. Therefore, in the reservation information acquisition process (FIG. 92) or the second management process described later, it is specified that the game ball is not detected by the first operation opening detection sensor 235a.

Thereafter, the value of the one prize ball counter in the specific control work area 211 is subtracted by 1 (step S6615). In the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 88) in this processing round, the game ball is detected by the first operation opening detection sensor 235a in the ball entry detection process (FIG. 91) of step S5508, which is the processing order before the main fraud handling process. Upon detection of this, the value of the one prize ball counter is incremented by one. In addition, if the value of the one prize ball counter is 1 or more, in the payout output process of step S5518, which is the processing order after the main fraud handling process in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 88), Processing is executed so that a one prize ball command instructing the payout of one game ball is sent to the payout control device 77. In this case, if the detection of the game ball by the first operation opening detection sensor 235a is caused by an abnormality, the first timer interrupt process ( In FIG. 88), before the payout output process of step S5518 is executed, the value of the one prize ball counter is decremented by 1 in the fraud handling process (FIG. 99). This makes it possible to prevent the game balls from being paid out excessively.

If "1" is set in the second operation winning abnormality flag 213q in the work area 213 for non-specific control (step S6616: YES), this fraud is detected in the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 88) in the current processing round. Detection of a game ball (i.e., winning into the second operating port 34) by the second operating port detection sensor 236a identified in the ball entering detection process (FIG. 91) of step S5508, which is a processing order before the corresponding processing, is chattering. This means that it is caused by an abnormality such as that caused by an abnormality, or by fraud in which a game ball is placed in the second operating port 34, which should be in a closed state. In this case, in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 88) in the current process, the work area 211 for specific control is Although the second operation winning confirmation flag of the confirmation flag group 211d is set to "1", the second operation winning confirmation flag is cleared to "0" (step S6617). The fraud handling process (FIG. 99) is the processing order that comes after the ball entry detection process (FIG. 91) in the processing order of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 88), and is the special figure special electric control process (step S5514), the normal The processing order is set before the general power control processing (step S5515) and the second management processing described later. Therefore, in the reservation information acquisition process (FIG. 92), the normal power control process (FIG. 96), or the second management process described later, it is specified that the game ball is not detected by the second operating opening detection sensor 236a.

Thereafter, the value of the one prize ball counter in the specific control work area 211 is subtracted by 1 (step S6618). In the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 88) in this processing time, the game ball is detected by the second actuating opening detection sensor 236a in the ball entry detection process (FIG. 91) of step S5508, which is the processing order before the main fraud handling process. Upon detection of this, the value of the one prize ball counter is incremented by one. In addition, if the value of the one prize ball counter is 1 or more, in the payout output process of step S5518, which is the processing order after the main fraud handling process in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 88), Processing is executed so that a one prize ball command instructing the payout of one game ball is sent to the payout control device 77. In this case, if the detection of the game ball by the second operation opening detection sensor 236a is caused by an abnormality or fraud, the first timer interrupt of the processing time when the value of the one prize ball counter is incremented by 1 In the process (FIG. 88), before the payout output process of step S5518 is executed, the value of the one prize ball counter is decremented by 1 in the fraud handling process (FIG. 99). This makes it possible to prevent the game balls from being paid out excessively.

If the out error flag 213r in the work area 213 for non-specific control is set to "1" (step S6619: YES), the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 88) in the current processing time is executed from this fraud handling process. Detection of a game ball (i.e., ball entering the out port 24a) by the out exit detection sensor 237a identified in the ball entering detection process (FIG. 91) in step S5508, which is the previous processing order, was caused by an abnormality such as chattering. It means something. In this case, in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 88) in the current process, the work area 211 for specific control is Although the out confirmation flag of the confirmation flag group 211d is set to "1", the out confirmation flag is cleared to "0" (step S6620). The fraud handling process (Fig. 99) is a processing order that is after the ball entry detection process (Fig. 91) in the processing order of the first timer interrupt process (Fig. 88) and before the second management process described later. Processing order is set. Therefore, in the second management process described later, it is specified that no game ball is detected by the exit detection sensor 237a.

If the gate winning abnormality flag 213s in the work area 213 for non-specific control is set to "1" (step S6621: YES), this fraud handling process is performed in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 88) in the current processing time. Detection of a game ball (i.e. winning into the through gate 35) by the gate detection sensor 238a identified in the ball entry detection process (FIG. 91) in step S5508, which is a processing order earlier than , is caused by an abnormality such as chattering. It means that. In this case, in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 88) in the current process, the work area 211 for specific control is Although the gate winning confirmation flag in the confirmation flag group 211d is set to "1", the gate winning confirmation flag is cleared to "0" (step S6622). The fraud response process (FIG. 99) is a process that comes after the ball entry detection process (FIG. 91) in the process order of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 88), and after the general electric power control process (step S5515). is also set to the previous processing order. Therefore, it is specified that no game ball is detected by the gate detection sensor 238a in the process for acquiring the reservation information on the general map side in the general map general electric power control process (step S5515).

If the magnetic abnormality flag 213t in the work area 213 for non-specific control is set to "1" (step S6623: YES), the game stop flag provided in the work area 211 for specific control is set to "1". (Step S6624). If the game stop flag is set to "1", steps S5501 to S5504 and step S5521 are executed in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 88), and an affirmative determination is made in step S5505 to cancel the step. The processes from S5506 to S5520 are not executed. As a result, if it is determined that a magnetic abnormality has occurred, processing for monitoring power outages, updating various counters, and managing gaming history will be executed, while processing for progressing the game will be executed. It will not be executed.

In the fraud handling process, after steps S6601 to S6624 are executed, security processing is executed in step S6625. The security processing will be explained in detail later.

A manner in which monitoring is performed to determine whether or not the detection result of the second operating port detection sensor 236a is normal will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. 100. FIG. 100(a) shows a period in which the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 88) is being executed, and FIG. 100(b) shows a period in which the ball entry detection process (FIG. 91) included in the specific control process is being executed. FIG. 100(c) shows the state of the second activation winning confirmation flag of the confirmation flag group 211d in the work area 211 for specific control, and FIG. 100(d) shows the fraud response process included in the specific control process. (FIG. 99) is executed, FIG. 100(e) is a period during which pending information acquisition processing (FIG. 92) included in the specific control processing is executed, and FIG. 100(f) is FIG. 100(g) shows the period during which the information clearing process (FIG. 94) included in the non-specific control process is being executed, and FIG. FIG. 100(h) shows the state of the second operation winning abnormality flag 213q in the work area 213 for non-specific control.

First, a case will be described in which the detection of a game ball by the second operating port detection sensor 236a is not due to an abnormality or fraud.

At timing t1, a new processing cycle of the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 88) is started as shown in FIG. 100(a). Then, the ball entry detection process (FIG. 91) is started as shown in FIG. 100(b) at timing t2 when the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 88) of the processing cycle is being executed. In the ball entry detection process (FIG. 91), the first winning confirmation flag, the second winning confirmation flag, the third winning confirmation flag, the special electric winning flag, and the first operation winning confirmation flag of the confirmation flag group 211d in the work area 211 for specific control are first performed. The confirmation flag, second operation winning confirmation flag, out confirmation flag, and gate winning confirmation flag are cleared to "0". In addition, in the ball entry detection process (FIG. 91), it is specified that the game ball is detected by the second actuating port detection sensor 236a, so that the game ball is specified as shown in FIG. 100(c) at timing t3. "1" is set in the second operation winning confirmation flag of the confirmation flag group 211d in the control work area 211.

Thereafter, the ball entry detection process (FIG. 91) is completed at timing t4 as shown in FIG. As shown in (f), the information clearing process (FIG. 94) is started. As already explained in the information clearing process (FIG. 94), among the storage areas of the work area 213 for non-specific control, the first general winning abnormality flag 213l, the second general winning abnormality flag 213m, and the third general winning abnormality flag are 213n, special electric winning abnormality flag 213o, first operating winning abnormal flag 213p, second operating winning abnormal flag 213q, out abnormal flag 213r, gate winning abnormal flag 213s and magnetic abnormal flag 213t are cleared to "0".

After that, the information clearing process (FIG. 94) ends as shown in FIG. 100(f) at timing t5, and the fraud detection execution process (FIG. 95) starts as shown in FIG. 100(g) at timing t5. be done. In the fraud detection execution process (FIG. 95) included in the non-specific control process, it is specified that the second operation winning confirmation flag in the work area 211 for specific control is set to "1". The setting of "1" to the 2-operation winning confirmation flag is not specified as being caused by an abnormality or fraud. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 100(h), the second operation winning abnormality flag 213q in the work area 213 for non-specific control is not set to "1", and the information of the second operation winning abnormality flag 213q is "1". 0".

Thereafter, the fraud detection execution process (FIG. 95) ends as shown in FIG. 100(g) at timing t6, and the fraud response process (FIG. 99) starts as shown in FIG. 100(d) at timing t6. be done. In the fraud handling process (FIG. 99) included in the specific control process, it is specified that the second operation winning abnormality flag 213q in the work area 213 for non-specific control is not set to "1", so the specific control The process of clearing the second operation winning confirmation flag in the work area 211 to "0" is not executed. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 100(c), the state in which the second operation winning confirmation flag is set to "1" is maintained.

After that, the fraud handling process (FIG. 99) ends as shown in FIG. 100(d) at the timing t7, and the hold information acquisition process (FIG. 92) starts as shown in FIG. 100(e) at the timing t7. Begins. In the reservation information acquisition process (FIG. 92), as shown in FIG. 100(c), the second operation winning confirmation flag in the work area 211 for specific control is set to "1", so the second special symbol is reserved. Processing for acquiring second pending information is executed on condition that the number of second pending information stored in area 112 is less than the upper limit storage number. In addition, when the second operation winning confirmation flag is set to "1", it is cleared to "0" in the ball entering detection process (Figure 91) in the next processing time of the first timer interrupt process (Figure 88). It is canceled by being exposed. Thereafter, at timing t8, the current processing cycle of the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 88) ends as shown in FIG. 100(a).

Next, a case will be described in which the detection of a game ball by the second operating port detection sensor 236a is due to an abnormality or fraud.

At timing t9, a new processing cycle of the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 88) is started as shown in FIG. 100(a). Then, the ball entry detection process (FIG. 91) is started as shown in FIG. 100(b) at timing t10 when the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 88) of the processing cycle is being executed. In the ball entry detection process (FIG. 91), the first winning confirmation flag, the second winning confirmation flag, the third winning confirmation flag, the special electric winning flag, and the first operation winning confirmation flag of the confirmation flag group 211d in the work area 211 for specific control are first performed. The confirmation flag, second operation winning confirmation flag, out confirmation flag, and gate winning confirmation flag are cleared to "0". In addition, in the ball entry detection process (FIG. 91), it is specified that the game ball is detected by the second operating port detection sensor 236a, so that the identification is performed as shown in FIG. 100(c) at timing t11. "1" is set in the second operation winning confirmation flag of the confirmation flag group 211d in the control work area 211.

Thereafter, the ball entry detection process (FIG. 91) is completed at timing t12 as shown in FIG. As shown in (f), the information clearing process (FIG. 94) is started. As already explained in the information clearing process (FIG. 94), among the storage areas of the work area 213 for non-specific control, the first general winning abnormality flag 213l, the second general winning abnormality flag 213m, and the third general winning abnormality flag are 213n, special electric winning abnormality flag 213o, first operating winning abnormal flag 213p, second operating winning abnormal flag 213q, out abnormal flag 213r, gate winning abnormal flag 213s and magnetic abnormal flag 213t are cleared to "0".

After that, the information clearing process (FIG. 94) ends as shown in FIG. 100(f) at the timing t13, and the fraud detection execution process (FIG. 95) starts as shown in FIG. 100(g) at the timing t13. be done. In the fraud detection execution process (FIG. 95) included in the non-specific control process, it is specified that "1" is set in the second operation winning confirmation flag in the work area 211 for specific control. Then, it is specified that the setting of "1" to the second operation winning confirmation flag is caused by an abnormality or fraud. Therefore, at timing t14, as shown in FIG. 100(h), the second operation winning abnormality flag 213q in the work area 213 for non-specific control is set to "1".

After that, the fraud detection execution process (FIG. 95) ends as shown in FIG. 100(g) at timing t15, and the fraud response process (FIG. 99) starts as shown in FIG. 100(d) at timing t15. be done. In the fraud handling process (FIG. 99) included in the specific control process, it is specified that the second operation winning abnormality flag 213q in the work area 213 for non-specific control is set to "1". Therefore, at timing t16, the second operation winning confirmation flag in the work area 211 for specific control is cleared to "0" as shown in FIG. 100(c).

Thereafter, the fraud handling process (FIG. 99) ends as shown in FIG. 100(d) at timing t17, and the hold information acquisition process (FIG. 92) starts as shown in FIG. Begins. In the pending information acquisition process (FIG. 92), as shown in FIG. 100(c), the second operation winning confirmation flag in the work area 211 for specific control is not set to "1", so the second pending information is not set. Do not perform any processing to obtain it. Thereafter, at timing t18, the current processing cycle of the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 88) ends as shown in FIG. 100(a).

Thereafter, at timing t19, a new processing cycle of the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 88) is started as shown in FIG. 100(a). Then, the ball entry detection process (FIG. 91) is started as shown in FIG. 100(b) at timing t20 when the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 88) of the processing cycle is being executed. In the ball entry detection process (FIG. 91), it is specified that no game ball is detected by the second operating port detection sensor 236a, so that the work area 211 for specific control is determined as shown in FIG. 100(c). "1" is not set to the second operation winning confirmation flag of the confirmation flag group 211d in .

Thereafter, the ball entry detection process (FIG. 91) is completed at timing t21 as shown in FIG. As shown in (f), the information clearing process (FIG. 94) is started. As already explained in the information clearing process (FIG. 94), among the storage areas of the work area 213 for non-specific control, the first general winning abnormality flag 213l, the second general winning abnormality flag 213m, and the third general winning abnormality flag are 213n, special electric winning abnormality flag 213o, first operating winning abnormal flag 213p, second operating winning abnormal flag 213q, out abnormal flag 213r, gate winning abnormal flag 213s and magnetic abnormal flag 213t are cleared to "0". Therefore, at the timing t22, the second operation winning abnormality flag 213q is cleared to "0" as shown in FIG. 100(h). Thereafter, at the timing t23, the information clearing process (FIG. 94) ends as shown in FIG. 100(f), and at the timing t23, the fraud detection execution process (FIG. 95) starts as shown in FIG. 100(g). be done.

As described above, each detection sensor 231a to 238a detects the entry of a game ball into each of the general winning opening 31, special electric winning device 32, first operating opening 33, second operating opening 34, out opening 24a, and through gate 35. Entering ball detection processing (FIG. 91) for specifying whether or not a game ball has been detected at the sensor 231a to 238a, and processing for advancing the game in response to the detection of a game ball at each of the detection sensors 231a to 238a. (Holding information acquisition process (Figure 92), general electricity control process (Figure 96), special electricity release process (Figure 97(c)), payout output process (step S5518), etc.) are included in the specific control process. In contrast, the non-specific control process includes a fraud detection execution process (FIG. 95) for monitoring whether the detection of game balls by each of the detection sensors 231a to 238a is due to an abnormality or fraud. . This eliminates the need to execute the fraud detection execution process (FIG. 95) for monitoring whether the detection of game balls by each of the detection sensors 231a to 238a is due to an abnormality or fraud in the specific control process. , it becomes possible to allocate the data capacity allocated to the specific control program and specific control data in the main side ROM 83 to processes other than the fraud detection execution process (FIG. 95).

In the processing order in the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 88), ball entry detection processing is included in the specific control processing and is processing for specifying whether or not a game ball is detected by each detection sensor 231a to 238a. After (Fig. 91), fraud detection execution processing (Fig. 95) is executed, and after the fraud detection execution process (FIG. 95), it is included in the specific control process and the game progresses in response to the detection of the game ball by each of the detection sensors 231a to 238a. Processing (holding information acquisition processing (FIG. 92), general electricity control processing (FIG. 96), special electricity release processing (FIG. 97(c)), payout output processing (step S5518), etc.) is executed. As a result, the fraud detection execution process (FIG. 95) for monitoring whether the detection of game balls by each of the detection sensors 231a to 238a is due to an abnormality or fraud is executed as a non-specific control process. Even with this configuration, it is possible to prevent the processing for advancing the game from being executed in response to the detection of game balls by each of the detection sensors 231a to 238a due to abnormality or fraud.

When it is specified that a game ball has been detected by the detection sensors 231a to 238a in the ball entry detection process (FIG. 91) included in the process of specific control, a confirmation flag group 211d in the work area 211 for specific control is set. Each of the provided confirmation flags is set to "1", and it is specified in the fraud detection execution process (Figure 95) included in the non-specific control process that the detection of the game ball is caused by an abnormality or fraud. If the abnormality flags 213l to 213s provided in the work area 213 for non-specific control are set to "1", if the abnormality flags 213l to 213s are set to "1", the specific control The confirmation flags corresponding to the abnormality flags 213l to 213s set to "1" in the fraud handling process (FIG. 99) included in the control process are cleared to "0". As a result, while information stored in the work area 211 for specific control can be read in both specific control processing and non-specific control processing, it is possible to read information stored in the work area 211 for specific control. Although writing is possible in specific control processing, it is not possible in non-specific control processing, and reading of information stored in the work area 213 for non-specific control is possible in specific control processing and non-specific control processing. While this is possible in either case, writing information to the work area 213 for non-specific control is possible in non-specific control processing but not in specific control processing. It is possible to achieve such excellent effects.

After the fraud detection execution process (FIG. 95) included in the non-specific control process is executed, until the fraud detection execution process (FIG. 95) is executed again, the fraud response process (FIG. 95) included in the specific control process is executed. FIG. 99) is executed. Then, in the fraud handling process (FIG. 99), the confirmation flag is cleared to "0" and various prize ball counters are cleared, depending on the abnormality flags 213l to 213s whose information was set in the fraud detection execution process (FIG. 95). Executes subtraction processing. In this case, in the fraud detection execution process (FIG. 95), the abnormality flags 213l to 213s are first cleared to "0", and then a process for setting information in the abnormality flags 213l to 213s is executed. As a result, in a configuration in which writing information to the work area 213 for non-specific control is possible in non-specific control processing but not in specific control processing, an error can be detected at an appropriate timing in non-specific control processing. It becomes possible to clear the flags 213l to 213s to "0".

<Configuration related to security signals>
Next, the security process executed in step S6625 of the fraud countermeasure process (FIG. 99) included in the specific control process will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 101. Note that the processing from steps S6701 to S6714 in the security processing is executed by the specific control processing unit 221 of the main MPU 82 using a specific control program and specific control data.

First, it is determined whether the value of the second security counter 213k in the work area 213 for non-specific control has increased since the last execution of security processing (step S6701). The specific control work area 211 is provided with a previous value storage area 211e (see FIG. 78) for storing the value of the second security counter 213k when security processing is executed. In step S6701, it is determined whether the value of the second security counter 213k is larger than the value of the previous value storage area 211e.

If the value of the second security counter 213k is larger than the value of the previous value storage area 211e (step S6701: YES), the value of the previous value storage area 211e is subtracted from the value of the second security counter 213k, and the value after the subtraction is is added to the first security counter 211a in the specific control work area 211 as an increment value (step S6702). Thereafter, the value of the second security counter 213k is overwritten in the previous value storage area 211e (step S6703).

As already explained, the triggers for adding "1" to the first security counter 211a are when the setting value update process (step S4916) is executed in the main process (FIG. 81) (step S4917) and when the main process (FIG. 81) ), the RAM clearing process (step S4919) is executed (step S4920). As already explained, the trigger for adding "1" to the second security counter 213k is when the occurrence of a disconnection is confirmed in the disconnection/short circuit process (FIG. 87) (step S5405), or when the occurrence of a disconnection is confirmed in the disconnection/short circuit process (FIG. 87). If it is confirmed that the game ball has entered the second operation port 34 which is in the closed state in the fraud detection execution process (FIG. 95) (step S6006), fraud detection is executed. If it is confirmed in the process (FIG. 95) that a game ball has entered the special electric winning device 32 which is in the closed state (step S6012), and if the occurrence of a magnetic abnormality is confirmed in the magnetic monitoring process (FIG. 98) ( Step S6508).

If a negative determination is made in step S6701 or if the process in step S6703 is executed, it is determined whether the value of the first security counter 211a is 1 or more (step S6704). If the value of the first security counter 211a is 1 or more (step S6704: YES), the security flag 211f (see FIG. 78) provided in the work area 211 for specific control is set to "1" (step S6705). When the security flag 211f is set to "1", the abnormality display device 206 mounted on the main control board 81 of the main control device 71 enters a light emitting state. Note that when the value of the security flag 211f is "0", the abnormality display device 206 is maintained in an off state. The state in which the security flag 211f is set to "1" is maintained as long as the supply of operating power to the main MPU 82 is continued, and the state in which the security flag 211f is set to "1" is maintained, and the state in which the security flag 211f is set to "1" is maintained as long as the supply of operating power to the main MPU 82 is continued. When the RAM clearing process (step S5113) in the update process (FIG. 83) is executed, the security flag 211f is cleared to "0".

If a negative determination is made in step S6704 or if the process in step S6705 is executed, it is determined whether or not the current situation is such that the main side MPU 82 is externally outputting a security signal to the management computer of the gaming hall (step S6706). If the security signal is not being output to the outside (step S6706: NO), it is determined whether the value of the first security counter 211a is 1 or more (step S6707), and the work area 211 for specific control is determined. It is determined whether the value of the duration counter provided in is "0" (step S6708). The duration counter measures the output duration when the output of the security signal continues for the output duration period (specifically, 200 milliseconds), and measures the output duration of the security signal (specifically, 200 milliseconds). This counter is used by the main MPU 82 to measure the duration of the stoppage if it continues for 200 milliseconds. The value set in the duration counter is decremented by 1 each time the specific control timer update process of step S5510 in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 88) is executed.

If the value of the first security counter 211a is 1 or more and the value of the duration counter is "0" (step S6707 and step S6708: YES), a security signal output start process is executed (step S6709). As a result, external output of a security signal from the main MPU 82 to the management computer of the gaming hall is started. Thereafter, information corresponding to the output continuation period (specifically, 200 milliseconds) is set in the continuation period counter in the work area 211 for specific control (step S6710). Furthermore, the value of the first security counter 211a is subtracted by 1 (step S6711).

If the security signal is being output externally (step S6706: YES), the output continuation period is determined by determining whether the value of the continuation period counter in the work area 211 for specific control is "0". It is determined whether or not the period has elapsed (step S6712). If the value of the duration counter is "0" (step S6712: YES), a security signal output stop process is executed (step S6713). As a result, external output of the security signal from the main MPU 82 to the gaming hall management computer is stopped. Thereafter, information corresponding to the stop duration period (specifically, 200 milliseconds) is set in the duration counter in the specific control work area 211 (step S6714).

Next, the manner in which the security signal is outputted to the outside will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. 102. 102(a) shows the period during which specific control processing is being executed, FIG. 102(b) shows the value of the first security counter 211a in the specific control work area 211, and FIG. 102(c) shows the period during which specific control processing is executed. 102(d) shows the value of the second security counter 213k in the work area 213 for non-specific control, and FIG. 102(e) shows the period during which specific control processing is executed. 102(f) shows the state of the security flag 211f in the work area 211 for specific control, and FIG. 102(h) shows a period in which the abnormality display device 206 mounted on the control board 81 is in a light emitting state, and FIG. 102(h) shows a period in which a security signal is externally output from the main MPU 82 to the management computer of the gaming hall.

From timing t1 to timing t3, the main MPU 82 executes specific control processing as shown in FIG. 102(a). In this case, the main process (FIG. 81) is executed by starting the supply of operating power to the main MPU 82. Then, by executing the setting value updating process (step S4916) or the RAM clearing process (step S4919) in the main process (FIG. 81), the first security counter is updated at timing t2 as shown in FIG. 102(b). 1 is added to the value of 211a.

Thereafter, at timing t3, while the specific control process is being executed in the main process (FIG. 81), the first management process (FIG. 85) included in the non-specific control process is called by the CALLI command (step S4927). ). The first management process (FIG. 85) is executed from timing t3 to timing t5, as shown in FIG. 102(c). In this case, the occurrence of a disconnection or short circuit is identified in the disconnection/short circuit process (FIG. 87) in the first management process (FIG. 85). Therefore, at timing t4, the value of the second security counter 213k is incremented by 1 as shown in FIG. 102(d).

After that, the first management process (FIG. 85) ends at timing t5, and the specific control process is executed from timing t5 to timing t6, as shown in FIG. 102(a). In the specific control process, steps S4927 to S4932 in the main process (FIG. 81) and steps S5501 to S5508 in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 88) are executed.

Thereafter, at timing t6, while the specific control process is being executed in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 88), the fraud detection process (FIG. 93) included in the non-specific control process is called by the CALLI instruction ( Step S5509). The fraud detection process (FIG. 93) is executed from timing t6 to timing t7 as shown in FIG. 102(c). In this case, in the fraud detection execution process (FIG. 95) in the fraud detection process (FIG. 93), winnings are made to the second operating port 34 which is in the closed state, winnings are made to the special electric winning device 32 which is in the closed state, and magnetic abnormalities are detected. Since the occurrence is not specified, the value of the second security counter 213k is maintained without being incremented by 1.

Thereafter, the fraud detection process (FIG. 93) ends at the timing t7, and the specific control process is executed from the timing t7 to the timing t10, as shown in FIG. 102(a). In the specific control process, steps S5510 to S5520 in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 88) are executed. In this case, the security process (FIG. 101) is executed in the fraud handling process (step S5511) as shown in FIG. 102(e) from timing t8 to timing t9.

In the security processing (FIG. 101), it is specified that the value of the second security counter 213k in the work area 213 for non-specific control has increased compared to the value in the previous value storage area 211e in the work area 211 for specific control. By doing so, the increased value is added to the first security counter 211a. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 102(b), the value of the first security counter 211a increases from "1" to "2" at timing t8.

In the security processing (FIG. 101), by specifying that the value of the first security counter 211a is 1 or more, the security flag 212f is set to "1" at timing t8 as shown in FIG. 102(f). do. By setting "1" to the security flag 212f, the abnormality display device 206 enters the light emitting state at the timing t8 as shown in FIG. 102(g).

In the security processing (FIG. 101), by specifying that the value of the first security counter 211a is 1 or more, external output of the security signal is started at timing t9 as shown in FIG. 102(h), As shown in FIG. 102(b), the value of the first security counter 211a is subtracted by 1.

Thereafter, at timing t10, while the specific control process is being executed in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 88), the second management process (FIG. 107) included in the non-specific control process is executed by the CALLI instruction. The second management process (FIG. 107) that is called (step S5521) is executed from timing t10 to timing t11, as shown in FIG. 102(c).

Thereafter, the second management process (FIG. 107) ends at the timing t11, and the specific control process is executed from the timing t11 to the timing t12, as shown in FIG. 102(a). In the specific control process, steps S4927 to S4932 in the main process (FIG. 81) and steps S5501 to S5508 in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 88) are executed.

Thereafter, at timing t12, while the specific control process is being executed in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 88), the fraud detection process (FIG. 93) included in the non-specific control process is called by the CALLI instruction ( Step S5509). The fraud detection process (FIG. 93) is executed from timing t12 to timing t13, as shown in FIG. 102(c). In this case, in the fraud detection execution process (FIG. 95) in the fraud detection process (FIG. 93), winnings are made to the second operating port 34 which is in the closed state, winnings are made to the special electric winning device 32 which is in the closed state, and magnetic abnormalities are detected. Since the occurrence is not specified, the value of the second security counter 213k is maintained without being incremented by 1.

Thereafter, the fraud detection process (FIG. 93) ends at timing t13, and the specific control process is executed from timing t13 to timing t16, as shown in FIG. 102(a). In the specific control process, steps S5510 to S5520 in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 88) are executed. In this case, the security process (FIG. 101) is executed in the fraud handling process (step S5511) as shown in FIG. 102(e) from timing t14 to timing t15.

In the security process (FIG. 101), since the value of the second security counter 213k in the work area 213 for non-specific control has not changed from the value in the previous value storage area 211e in the work area 211 for specific control, As shown in (b), the process of increasing the value of the first security counter 211a according to the value of the second security counter 213k is not executed. Further, the state in which the security flag 211f is set to "1" is maintained when the supply of operating power to the main MPU 82 is continued, and the RAM clearing process (step S4919) in the main process (FIG. 81) Alternatively, the light emitting state of the abnormality display device 206 is maintained as shown in FIG. 102(g) because it is maintained unless the RAM clearing process (step S5113) in the setting value updating process (FIG. 83) is executed. Furthermore, since the output continuation period (specifically, 200 milliseconds) has not elapsed since the start of the external output of the security signal, the external output of the security signal is continued as shown in FIG. 102(h).

Thereafter, at timing t16, while the specific control process is being executed in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 88), the second management process (FIG. 107) included in the non-specific control process is executed by the CALLI instruction. It is called (step S5521).

As described above, the process for specifying whether or not an event to which a security signal is output to the outside has occurred is executed not only in the specific control process but also in the non-specific control process. As a result, processing for monitoring whether or not an event subject to external output of a security signal has occurred is assigned to non-specific control processing, and programs and data related to specific control processing are allocated to non-specific control processing. Capacity can be allocated to other processing.

A first security counter 211a is provided in the work area 211 for specific control, and a second security counter 213k is provided in the work area 213 for non-specific control. If it is determined that an event has occurred, the value of the first security counter 211a is incremented by 1, and the non-specific control process identifies that an event that is subject to external output of a security signal has occurred. If so, 1 is added to the value of the second security counter 213k. As a result, writing of information to the work area 211 for specific control is possible in specific control processing, but is not possible in non-specific control processing, and writing of information to the work area 213 for non-specific control is non-specific. An event that is subject to external output of a security signal must occur in each of specific control processing and non-specific control processing, although it is possible in specific control processing and disabled in specific control processing. It becomes possible to appropriately identify the

In the security process (FIG. 101) included in the specific control process, the increase in the value of the second security counter 213k in the non-specific control work area 213 is added to the first security counter 211a, and the value of the second security counter 213k is added to the first security counter 211a. If the value is 1 or more, a security signal is output to the outside in the security process (FIG. 101). Then, external output of the pulsed security signal over a predetermined output duration period or longer with a predetermined stop duration period in between is repeatedly executed until the value of the first security counter 211a becomes "0". This allows processing for externally outputting security signals in a configuration where identification of the occurrence of an event that is subject to external output of security signals is performed in specific control processing and non-specific control processing. It becomes possible to consolidate the processing into specific control processing.

When the value of the first security counter 211a becomes 1 or more, "1" is set to the security flag 211f, and when "1" is set to the security flag 211f, the abnormality display device 206 enters the light emitting state. . Further, the state in which the security flag 211f is set to "1" is maintained when the supply of operating power to the main MPU 82 is continued, and the state in which the security flag 211f is set to "1" is maintained in the RAM clear processing (step S4919) in the main processing (FIG. 81). ) or the RAM clearing process (step S5113) in the setting value update process (FIG. 83) is executed, and if the security flag 211f is set to "1", the abnormality display device 206 is maintained in the light emitting state. Ru. As a result, at least when the game hall is in operation, the manager of the game hall can recognize whether or not an event that is subject to external output of a security signal has occurred, regardless of the timing of checking the abnormality display device 206. becomes possible.

<Configuration related to game history management>
Next, a configuration related to game history management will be explained.

The contents of various areas 251 to 254 of the work area 213 for non-specific control used to manage gaming history will be explained. FIG. 103 is an explanatory diagram for explaining various areas of the work area 213 for non-specific control used to manage game history.

A normal counter area 251 is provided in the work area 213 for non-specific control. The normal counter area 251 is provided with a general winning counter 251a, a special winning winning counter 251b, a first operating counter 251c, a second operating counter 251d, and an out counter 251e. The general prize winning counter 251a is a counter for counting the number of game balls entering the general prize winning hole 31 from a predetermined timing of starting measurement. The special electric winning prize counter 251b is a counter for counting the number of game balls that enter the special electric winning prize device 32 from a predetermined timing of starting measurement. The first operation counter 251c is a counter for counting the number of game balls entering the first operation port 33 from a predetermined measurement start timing. The second operation counter 251d is a counter for counting the number of game balls entering the second operation port 34 from a predetermined timing of starting measurement. The out counter 251e is a counter for counting the number of game balls entering the out port 24a from a predetermined timing of starting measurement.

Each of the counters 251a to 251e in the normal counter area 251 corresponds to the target ball entry section 24a in a situation where the front door frame 14 is in a closed state and neither the opening/closing execution mode nor the high frequency support mode is in effect. , 31 to 34 are used to count the number of game balls that have entered the ball. Note that the situation where the front door frame 14 is open is not included in the measurement because a game ball enters the ball entry section 24a, 31 to 34 due to maintenance while the front door frame 14 is open. This is to exclude from the measurement object the number of balls that enter the ball when the ball is thrown. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a configuration may be adopted in which a situation where the front door frame 14 is in an open state is also subject to measurement in the same way as a situation where the front door frame 14 is in a closed state.

In addition to the normal counter area 251, the work area 213 for non-specific control is provided with a calculation result storage area 252. The calculation result storage area 252 is an area for storing information on the game history management results calculated using the normal counter area 251. The information on the game history management results stored in the calculation result storage area 252 is stored and held until the newly calculated information is overwritten by the new calculation of the information on the game history management results.

FIG. 104 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the electrical configuration of the calculation result storage area 252 in the work area 213 for non-specific control.

Information on the base value calculated by the main MPU 82 is stored in the calculation result storage area 252. The base value is the total number of game balls ejected from the gaming area PA (i.e., the total number of gaming balls supplied to the gaming area PA) in a situation that is neither the opening/closing execution mode based on jackpot results nor the high-frequency support mode. It is the ratio of the total number of game balls paid out.

When one game ball enters the general winning hole 31 in a situation that is neither the opening/closing execution mode based on the jackpot result nor the high-frequency support mode, the value of the general winning counter 251a is incremented by 1, and the special electric winning device 32 When one game ball enters the ball, the value of the special electric winning counter 251b is incremented by 1, and when one game ball enters the first operating port 33, the value of the first operating counter 251c increases. If one game ball enters the second operating port 34, the value of the second operating counter 251d is incremented by one, and if one game ball enters the out port 24a, the value of the second operating counter 251d is incremented by one. The value of the out counter 251e is incremented by 1. Then, when the values of the various counters 251a to 251e in the normal counter area 251 in a situation that is neither the opening/closing execution mode due to the jackpot result nor the high frequency support mode are K91 to K95, the base values are as follows.
・Base value: Total number of game balls paid out (K91 x ``Number of prize balls for winning into the general winning opening 31'' + K92 x ``Number of winning balls for winning into the special electric winning device 32'' + K93 x ``To the first operating opening 33'' Ratio of the total number of game balls ejected from the gaming area PA (K91+K92+K93+K94+K95).

Calculation of the base value is performed every time the result calculation process (FIG. 110), which will be described later, is executed in the second management process (FIG. 107) included in the non-specific control process. The values of the various counters 251a to 251e are determined when the management start flag provided in the work area 213 for non-specific control is not set to "1" and whether the opening/closing execution mode or the high-frequency support mode is determined by the jackpot result. When the total number of game balls ejected from the game area PA (i.e., the total number of game balls supplied to the game area PA) becomes the standard number for starting management, the number is cleared to "0" and management starts. The total number of game balls ejected from the game area PA (i.e., the total number of game balls supplied to the game area PA in a situation where the flag is set to "1" and neither the opening/closing execution mode based on the jackpot result nor the high-frequency support mode) When the total number of game balls (total number of game balls played) becomes the shift reference number, it is cleared to "0".

The management start reference number is set to 300, which is smaller than the shift reference number. At the stage of shipping the Pachinko machine 10, the operation of the Pachinko machine 10 may be checked before shipping, and at that time, game balls are placed in each ball entry section and subsequent operations are checked. The base value under such a situation may be a different value than under a normal gaming situation. Therefore, in a situation where the management start flag is not set to "1" and neither the opening/closing execution mode based on the jackpot result nor the high-frequency support mode, the total number of game balls ejected from the gaming area PA (i.e., the game ball Once the total number of game balls supplied to the area PA reaches the management start reference number, which is smaller than the shift reference number, the various counters 251a to 251e in the normal counter area 251 are cleared to "0". This makes it possible to reduce the influence of the above operation check on the base value in a situation where normal games are being played after the Pachinko machine 10 is shipped. Note that the management start reference number is not limited to 300, but can be any number as long as it is multiple, and may be set to a number less than 300, or may be set to a number greater than 300. Good too.

The shift reference number is set to 60,000. Since the pachinko machine 10 shoots a maximum of 100 game balls per minute, 60,000 balls is the maximum number of balls shot in 10 hours. In this case, the general business hours in the game hall are about 13 hours, of which about 10 hours are played in situations where the game is not in either the opening/closing execution mode based on the jackpot result or the high-frequency support mode. Therefore, the shift reference number is set approximately assuming the maximum number of game balls to be fired in one business day. By clearing the various counters 251a to 251e in the normal counter area 251 to "0" each time the shift reference number is reached, it becomes possible to calculate the base value within the range of the shift reference number. Note that the shift reference number is not limited to 60,000, but can be any number as long as it is a plural number, and may be set to a number smaller than 60,000, or even if it is set to a number greater than 60,000. good.

The calculation result storage area 252 is provided with a current area 256, a first history area 257, a second history area 258, and a third history area 259 as storage areas for storing information on the base value. There is. These various areas 256 to 259 all have the same storage capacity, specifically, a capacity of 1 byte so that base value information can be stored.

The current area 256 stores the base value calculated in the most recent result calculation process (FIG. 110). In other words, the latest base value will be stored in the current area 256.

The first history area 257 stores the final base value in the previous calculation period. In this case, if the previous calculation period is after the management start flag is set to "1", the first history area 257 contains the opening/closing execution mode according to the jackpot result in the previous calculation period. The base value at the timing when the total number of game balls ejected from the game area PA (i.e., the total number of game balls supplied to the game area PA) becomes the shift reference number in a situation other than the high-frequency support mode or the high-frequency support mode is Stored. In addition, if the management start flag is set to "1" as the previous calculation period has passed, the first history area 257 contains the opening/closing execution mode and the jackpot result in the previous calculation period. The base value at the timing when the total number of game balls ejected from the gaming area PA (that is, the total number of gaming balls supplied to the gaming area PA) reaches the management start reference number in a situation that is not in any of the high-frequency support modes is Stored.

The second history area 258 stores the final base value in the two previous calculation periods. In this case, if the two previous calculation periods are after the management start flag is set to "1", the second history area 258 contains the opening/closing execution mode based on the jackpot result in the two previous calculation periods. The base value at the timing when the total number of game balls ejected from the game area PA (i.e., the total number of game balls supplied to the game area PA) becomes the shift reference number in a situation other than the high-frequency support mode or the high-frequency support mode is Stored. In addition, if the management start flag is set to "1" as the two previous calculation periods have passed, the second history area 258 contains the opening/closing execution mode and the jackpot result in the two previous calculation periods. The base value at the timing when the total number of game balls ejected from the gaming area PA (that is, the total number of gaming balls supplied to the gaming area PA) reaches the management start reference number in a situation that is not in any of the high-frequency support modes is Stored.

The third history area 259 stores the final base value in the three previous calculation periods. In this case, if the three previous calculation periods are after the management start flag is set to "1", the third history area 259 contains the opening/closing execution mode based on the jackpot result in the three previous calculation periods. The base value at the timing when the total number of game balls ejected from the game area PA (i.e., the total number of game balls supplied to the game area PA) becomes the shift reference number in a situation other than the high-frequency support mode or the high-frequency support mode is Stored. In addition, if the management start flag is set to "1" after the three previous calculation periods have passed, the third history area 259 contains the opening/closing execution mode and the jackpot result in the three previous calculation periods. The base value at the timing when the total number of game balls ejected from the gaming area PA (that is, the total number of gaming balls supplied to the gaming area PA) reaches the management start reference number in a situation that is not in any of the high-frequency support modes is Stored.

The base values stored in the current area 256, first history area 257, second history area 258, and third history area 259 are sequentially notified on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. Specifically, each time the display duration period (specifically 5 seconds) elapses, the information is displayed in the predetermined order of current area 256 → first history area 257 → second history area 258 → third history area 259. The base value to be notified is switched, and the base value to be notified is repeatedly switched in the predetermined order.

105(a) to 105(d) are for the first to fourth notifications when the base values stored in various areas 256 to 259 are notified in a situation where the management start flag is set to "1". 2 is an explanatory diagram for explaining display contents of display devices 201 to 204. FIG. FIG. 105(a) shows an example of the display contents of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 when the base value stored in the current area 256 is notified, and FIG. 105(b) shows the display contents of the first history display device 201 to 204. An example of the display contents of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 when the base value stored in the area 257 is notified, and FIG. 105(c) shows the base value stored in the second history area 258. An example of the display contents of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 when a value is notified is shown, and FIG. 105(d) shows an example of the display contents when the base value stored in the third history area 259 is notified. An example of the display contents of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is shown.

As shown in FIGS. 105(a) to 105(d), each of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 has eight display segments 201a to 204a. Of the eight display segments 201a to 204a, seven display segments 201a to 204a are all rod-shaped light emitting regions with the same shape and size, and are arranged to form a figure 8. has been done. On the other hand, one display segment 201a to 204a is a circular light emitting area, and is located at the lower right position of the seven display segments 201a to 204a arranged in a figure 8 shape. It is provided. Regardless of which base value in the various areas 256 to 259 is to be notified, at least one display segment 201a to 204a in each of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is in a light emitting state.

The first notification display device 201 displays a display indicating that the base value is being reported in the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. Specifically, the character "b" is displayed on the first notification display device 201 regardless of the base value of any of the various areas 256 to 259. When information other than the base value is reported on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, the character “b” is not displayed on the first notification display device 201. As a result, by confirming that the letter "b" is displayed on the first notification display device 201, the game hall manager can check the base on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. It becomes possible to understand that the value is being reported.

The second notification display device 202 displays a display indicating which base value among the various areas 256 to 259 is being reported. Specifically, in a situation where the base value of the current area 256 is being reported, the character "L." is displayed on the second notification display device 202 as shown in FIG. 105(a). In a situation where the base value of the first history area 257 is being reported, the character "1." is displayed on the second notification display device 202 as shown in FIG. 105(b). In a situation where the base value of the second history area 258 is being reported, the characters "2." are displayed on the second notification display device 202 as shown in FIG. 105(c). In a situation where the base value of the third history area 259 is being reported, the characters "3." are displayed on the second notification display device 202 as shown in FIG. 105(d). As a result, by checking the characters displayed on the second notification display device 202, the administrator of the game hall can check the base value notified on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. It becomes possible to understand whether the calculation period is the same as that of the previous calculation period.

In the second notification display device 202, the circular display segments 201a to 204a are in a light emitting state regardless of which base value among the various areas 256 to 259 is being notified. On the third notification display device 203 and the fourth notification display device 204, any number from “0” to “9” will be displayed as a display corresponding to the base value. In this case, when any of the numbers "1" to "3" is displayed on the second notification display device 202, the three numbers will be displayed on the second to fourth notification display devices 202 to 204. This makes it difficult to understand the base value. In contrast, the circular display segments 201a to 204a provided at the lower right of the second notification display device 202 are in a light emitting state, so that the second notification display device 202 displays “1” to “1”. 3" is displayed, the number displayed on the second notification display device 202 and the number displayed on the third notification display device 203 and the fourth notification display device 204 It becomes possible to distinguish and understand numbers.

On the third notification display device 203 and the fourth notification display device 204, the number of the base value to be notified is displayed. The base value will be calculated as a decimal to the second decimal place, but the first decimal point of the base value will be displayed on the third notification display device 203, and the decimal point of the base value will be The second place number is displayed on the fourth notification display device 204. Here, when the base value is "1.00", the number "0" is displayed on each of the third notification display device 203 and the fourth notification display device 204. On the other hand, if the base value is not yet stored in the areas 256 to 259 that are the target of notification, the third notification display device 203 and the fourth notification display as shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. 106(a). A "-" character is displayed on each of the devices 204. As a result, even when the base value calculated as a decimal to the second decimal place is notified on the two display devices, the third notification display device 203 and the fourth notification display device 204, the base value It is possible to distinguish between the case where the base value is "1.00" and the case where the base value is not yet stored in the areas 256 to 259 that are the target of notification.

Note that the display contents of the combination of the third notification display device 203 and the fourth notification display device 204 are the same when the base value is “1.00” and when the base value is “0.00”. On the other hand, in order to distinguish between the two, one of the former and the latter may be configured to maintain the light-emitting state of displaying "00", and the other may display "00" in a blinking state.

When the supply of operating power to the main MPU 82 is started, the game hall checks whether each of the display segments 201a to 204a provided in the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 can normally enter a light emitting state. In order to have the administrator confirm the information, a check display is performed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 until the initial check period has elapsed. Specifically, as the check display, all display segments 201a to 204a of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are maintained in a light emitting state, as shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. 106(b). .

In a situation where the management start flag in the work area 213 for non-specific control is not set to "1", as shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. 106(c), the first and second notification display devices 201, 202 In a situation where all the display segments 201a and 202a are in a light emitting state in each of the above, the third notification display device 203 displays the number to the first decimal point of the base value calculated in the current calculation period. At the same time, the second decimal place of the base value calculated in the current calculation period is displayed on the fourth notification display device 204. Displaying numbers corresponding to the base value on the third and fourth notification display devices 203 and 204 while all the display segments 201a and 202a are in a light emitting state in the first and second notification display devices 201 and 202, respectively. By doing so, it becomes possible to make the game hall manager recognize that the base value currently being reported is the base value in a situation where the management start flag is not set to "1".

Next, the process of step S5521 of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 88) will be explained.

In step S5521 of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 88), the second management process is executed by the CALLI instruction, as described above. The second management process is included in the non-specific control process. In other words, in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 88), when the situation changes from executing specific control processing to executing non-specific control processing, the non-specific control processing uses the CALLI instruction. be called.

When the second management process is executed by the CALLI instruction, first, information in the flag register of the main MPU 82 is saved to the stack area 212 for specific control. The flag register includes a carry flag, a zero flag, a P/V flag, a sign flag, a half-carry flag, and the like, and the information in the flag register changes depending on the execution results of arithmetic instructions, rotate instructions, input/output instructions, and the like. By saving the information in the flag register before starting the program for the second management process, which is a non-specific control process, it is possible to call the second management process or start the second management process. It becomes possible to save the information of the flag register in the state before it changes later to the stack area 212 for specific control.

When the second management process is executed by the CALLI instruction, the information in the flag register is saved to the stack area 212 for specific control, and then the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 88) and the second timer interrupt (described later) are executed. Interruptions of the process (FIG. 114) are prohibited. As a result, the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 88) and the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 114), which are specific control processes, are interrupted and activated while the second management process, which is a non-specific control process, is being executed. This makes it possible to prevent this from happening.

When the second management process is executed by the CALLI instruction, the information in the flag register is saved to the specific control stack area 212, and the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 88) and second timer interrupt process (FIG. 114) are performed. ), the program corresponding to the second management process is started.

In this way, by configuring the second management process to be executed by the CALLI instruction, the information in the flag register of the main MPU 82 is saved to the stack area 212 for specific control by one instruction ("CALLI"). At the same time, interrupts of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 88) and the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 114) are prohibited. Then, a program corresponding to the second management process can be started. Therefore, the instruction for saving the information of the flag register of the main MPU 82 to the stack area 212 for specific control and the interrupts of the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 88) and the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 114) are prohibited. Reduce the number of instructions set in the program to execute the second management process compared to the case where an instruction to execute the second management process and an instruction to start the program for the second management process are separately provided. be able to. Thereby, the storage capacity of the main side ROM 83 for storing programs can be reduced.

FIG. 107 is a flowchart showing the second management process. Note that the processes from step S6801 to step S6816 in the second management process are executed by the non-specific control processing unit 222 of the main MPU 82 using a non-specific control program and non-specific control data.

First, as "LD SP, Y(u+2)", Y(u+2) is set as a fixed address at the start of non-specific control in the stack pointer of the main MPU 82 by a load instruction (step S6801). The stack pointer is an area in which address information is set for the main MPU 82 to specify a storage area in the stack areas 212 and 214 to which information is to be written by the push command. Each time a push instruction is executed, the stack pointer information is updated to the address of the storage area to be written in the next order, and each time a pop instruction is executed, the stack pointer information is updated to the address of the storage area to be written in the previous order. The address information of the storage area is updated. Furthermore, when using the stack area 214 for non-specific control, the information to be stored is stored starting from the storage area at the last address in the stack area 214 for non-specific control, and each time information to be stored is added. Then, the storage area of the storage destination is changed toward the first address side in the stack area 214 for non-specific control. Therefore, in step S6801, information on the last address in the stack area 214 for non-specific control is set in the stack pointer.

Thereafter, the information in the WA register of the main MPU 82 is saved to the WA buffer set in the work area 213 for non-specific control by a load instruction as "LD (_WABUF), WA" (step S6802). Further, as "LD (_BCBUF), BC", information in the BC register of the main MPU 82 is saved to the BC buffer set in the work area 213 for non-specific control by a load instruction (step S6803). Further, as "LD (_DEBUF), DE", information in the DE register of the main MPU 82 is saved to the DE buffer set in the work area 213 for non-specific control by a load instruction (step S6804). Further, as "LD (_HLBUF), HL", information in the HL register of the main MPU 82 is saved to the HL buffer set in the work area 213 for non-specific control by a load instruction (step S6805). Further, as "LD (_IXBUF), IX", information in the IX register of the main MPU 82 is saved to the IX buffer set in the work area 213 for non-specific control by a load instruction (step S6806). Further, as "LD (_IYBUF), IY", information in the IY register of the main MPU 82 is saved to the IY buffer set in the work area 213 for non-specific control by a load instruction (step S6807).

The general-purpose register area 223a in the register area 223 of the main MPU 82 includes various general-purpose registers, auxiliary registers, and index registers in addition to the flag register described above. In this case, in steps S6802 to S6807, each information of the WA register, BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register, and IY register, which are some of these various general-purpose registers, auxiliary registers, and index registers, is is saved in a corresponding buffer in the work area 213 for non-specific control. Note that the information amount of the WA register, BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register, and IY register is all 2 bytes.

These WA register, BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register, and IY register are registers used in the information abnormality monitoring process (step S6808) and check process (step S6809), which are processes corresponding to non-specific control. be. By saving the information set in such registers to the work area 213 for non-specific control before executing the information abnormality monitoring process (step S6808) and the check process (step S6809), the information set in the register can be saved for use in specific control. Furthermore, the information in these registers can be saved before non-specific control is started. Therefore, even if these registers are overwritten during non-specific control, the status of these registers can be changed by restoring the information saved in the work area 213 for non-specific control to these registers when terminating the non-specific control. It becomes possible to restore the state to the state corresponding to the specific control before the non-specific control was executed.

In addition, instead of saving all the information of various general-purpose registers, auxiliary registers, and index registers to the work area 213 for non-specific control, information abnormality monitoring processing (step S6808), which is processing corresponding to non-specific control, In the check process (step S6809), the information of the WA register, BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register, and IY register to be used is selectively saved to the work area 213 for non-specific control. It is possible to suppress the capacity secured for saving register information in the work area 213 for specific control. Therefore, it is possible to save the register information as described above while ensuring a large capacity of the work area 213 for non-specific control that can be used during the information abnormality monitoring process (step S6808) and the check process (step S6809). becomes possible.

Of course, among the various general-purpose registers, auxiliary registers, and index registers in the main MPU 82, registers other than the WA register, BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register, and IY register support non-specific control. The information set before the start of the process is stored and held until the process corresponding to the non-specific control is finished and the process corresponding to the specific control is restarted.

Furthermore, by saving register information to the work area 213 for non-specific control instead of saving it to the stack area 214 for non-specific control, the capacity of the stack area 214 for non-specific control can be kept small. It becomes possible. Furthermore, when using the stack area 214 for non-specific control, as described above, the information is written in the order in which the later information is read out first, so if the order in which the information is read out is shifted due to some kind of noise, etc. If this happens, all subsequent readout order information will be restored to different registers. The probability of occurrence of such an event increases as the amount of information saved in the stack area 214 for non-specific control increases. In contrast, by saving register information to the work area 213 for non-specific control, it is possible to prevent the above-mentioned phenomenon from occurring even when there is a large amount of information to be saved. .

After executing the processes from step S6802 to step S6807, information abnormality monitoring process (step S6808) and checking process (step S6809) are executed. When executing the information abnormality monitoring process (step S6808) and the check process (step S6809), subroutines corresponding to the information abnormality monitoring process (step S6808) and the check process (step S6809) set in the program for non-specific control are executed. When executing the program of the subroutine, the program is executed in order to specify the return address of the second management process after executing the information abnormality monitoring process (step S6808) and the check process (step S6809). information is written to the stack area 214 for non-specific control by a push command. Then, when the information abnormality monitoring process (step S6808) and the check process (step S6809) are completed, information for specifying the return address is read out by a pop command, and the second management process indicated by the return address is read out. program. Details of the information abnormality monitoring process (step S6808) and the checking process (step S6809) will be described later.

After executing the information abnormality monitoring process (step S6808) and the check process (step S6809), the end of the second management process is written to the stack pointer of the main MPU 82 by a load command as "LD SP, Y (r+c)". Y(r+c) is set as a fixed address when returning to specific control later (step S6810). The address of Y(r+c) is set as an address between Y(r+8) and Y(s) in the stack area 212 for specific control.

The amount of information stored in the specific control stack area 212 immediately before the second management process is called in step S5521 of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 88) is always constant, and accordingly The information on the stack pointer (that is, the value of the stack pointer) of the main MPU 82 is constant. In this case, the information stored in the stack area 212 for specific control includes, for example, information on the return address of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 88) after the second management process ends. The above-mentioned constant information of the stack pointer is Y(r+c). Therefore, when the information abnormality monitoring process (step S6808) and the check process (step S6809), which are processes corresponding to non-specific control, are completed and the process corresponding to specific control is returned to, the constant information Y By setting (r+c) to the stack pointer of the main MPU 82, it is possible to restore the information of the stack pointer to the information immediately before the process corresponding to non-specific control was started. By setting fixed information in the stack pointer in this way, the information of the stack pointer is restored to the information immediately before the process corresponding to non-specific control was started, so that the process corresponding to non-specific control is There is no need to save information on the stack pointer of the main MPU 82 corresponding to the specific control to the main RAM 84 before starting the specific control. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the processing load, and there is no need to secure an area for the evacuation in the main RAM 84.

Thereafter, the information saved in the WA buffer of the work area 213 for non-specific control is overwritten in the WA register of the main MPU 82 by a load instruction as "LD WA, (_WABUF)" (step S6811). Also, as "LD BC, (_BCBUF)", the information saved in the BC buffer of the work area 213 for non-specific control is overwritten in the BC register of the main MPU 82 by the load instruction (step S6812). Also, as "LD DE, (_DEBUF)", the information saved in the DE buffer of the work area 213 for non-specific control is overwritten in the DE register of the main MPU 82 by the load instruction (step S6813). Further, as "LD HL, (_HLBUF)", the information saved in the HL buffer of the work area 213 for non-specific control is overwritten in the HL register of the main MPU 82 by the load instruction (step S6814). Further, as "LD IX, (_IXBUF)", the information saved in the IX buffer of the work area 213 for non-specific control is overwritten in the IX register of the main MPU 82 by the load instruction (step S6815). Further, as "LD IY, (_IYBUF)", the information saved in the IY buffer of the work area 213 for non-specific control is overwritten in the IY register of the main MPU 82 by the load instruction (step S6816). By executing the processing from step S6811 to step S6816, processing corresponding to non-specific control is started for each information of the WA register, BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register, and IY register of the main MPU 82. It becomes possible to restore the information corresponding to the specific control immediately before the control.

After executing the processing in steps S6811 to S6816, the RETI command returns to the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 88) included in the specific control processing. By executing the RETI instruction, the information in the flag register saved in the specific control stack area 212 before execution of the second management process is restored to the flag register of the main MPU 82, and the first timer interrupt The state in which the occurrence of processing (FIG. 88) and second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 114) is prohibited is switched to a state in which it is permitted. As a result, the information in the flag register of the main MPU 82 is restored to information for executing specific control, and new execution of the first timer interrupt process and the second timer interrupt process becomes possible.

Due to the configuration that executes the RETI instruction, the information in the flag register saved in the stack area 212 for specific control is transferred to the main MPU 82 by the first instruction (RETI) before executing the second management process. By restoring it to the flag register, it is possible to switch from a state in which generation of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 88) and a second timer interrupt process (FIG. 114) are prohibited to a state in which they are permitted. Therefore, an instruction for restoring the information in the flag register saved in the specific control stack area 212 before execution of the second management process to the flag register of the main MPU 82, and the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 88 ) and an instruction for switching from a state in which generation of the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 114) is prohibited to a state in which it is permitted are provided separately. The number of instructions can be reduced. This makes it possible to reduce the storage capacity of the main ROM 83 for storing programs for non-specific control processing.

Here, the information stored in the flag register and various registers of the main MPU 82 when the non-specific control process is executed is not saved to the main RAM 84 when the specific control process is restarted. Thereby, there is no need to secure a storage area for saving the above information in the work area 211 for specific control and the stack area 212 for specific control.

In addition, the information stored in the flag register and various registers of the main MPU 82 when non-specific control processing is executed is stored in the information stored in the flag register and various registers of the main MPU 82 when non-specific control processing is restarted after returning to specific control processing. This information is not used. In other words, information necessary for multiple processing times of non-specific control processing that is executed with specific control processing in between is stored in the non-specific control work area 213 or the non-specific control stack area 214. and is not stored in the flag register and various registers of the main MPU 82. Therefore, even if the information stored in the flag register and various registers of the main MPU 82 is not saved to the main RAM 84 when non-specific control processing is executed, a problem may arise when executing non-specific control processing. do not have.

Next, a description will be given of the check processing executed when the subroutine program is called in step S6809. FIG. 108 is a flowchart showing the check process. Note that the processes from step S6901 to step S6906 in the check process are executed by the non-specific control processing unit 222 of the main MPU 82 using a non-specific control program and non-specific control data.

In the check process, if the front door frame 14 is not in the open state (step S6901: NO), is not in the opening/closing execution mode (step S6902: NO), and is not in the high-frequency support mode (step S6903: NO), normal entry is performed. After executing the ball management process (step S6904), result calculation process (step S6905) and display process (step S6906) are executed. On the other hand, if the front door frame 14 is in the open state (step S6901: YES), in the opening/closing execution mode (step S6902: YES), or in the high-frequency support mode (step S6903: YES), the normal entry The result calculation process (step S6905) and the display process (step S6906) are executed without executing the ball management process (step S6904).

FIG. 109 is a flowchart showing normal ball entry management processing in step S6904. Note that the processes from step S7001 to step S7014 in the normal ball entry management process are executed by the non-specific control processing unit 222 of the main MPU 82 using a non-specific control program and non-specific control data. .

If the first winning confirmation flag of the confirmation flag group 211d in the work area 211 for specific control is set to "1" (step S7001: YES), a winning to the general winning opening 31 occurs and the first winning opening This means that one game ball was normally detected by the detection sensor 231a. In this case, the value of the general winning counter 251a in the normal counter area 251 of the non-specific control work area 213 is incremented by 1 (step S7002). Further, if the second winning confirmation flag of the confirmation flag group 211d in the work area 211 for specific control is set to "1" (step S7003: YES), a winning to the general winning opening 31 occurs and the second winning confirmation flag is set to "1". This means that one game ball has been normally detected by the winning opening detection sensor 232a. In this case, the value of the general winning counter 251a in the normal counter area 251 of the non-specific control work area 213 is incremented by 1 (step S7004). In addition, if the third winning confirmation flag of the confirmation flag group 211d in the work area 211 for specific control is set to "1" (step S7005: YES), a winning to the general winning opening 31 occurs and the third winning confirmation flag is set to "1". This means that one game ball has been normally detected by the winning opening detection sensor 233a. In this case, the value of the general winning counter 251a in the normal counter area 251 of the non-specific control work area 213 is incremented by 1 (step S7006).

If the special electric winning confirmation flag of the confirmation flag group 211d in the work area 211 for specific control is set to "1" (step S7007: YES), a winning to the special electric winning device 32 occurs and the special electric winning detection sensor 234a This means that one game ball was successfully detected. In this case, the value of the special electric prize winning counter 251b in the normal counter area 251 of the work area 213 for non-specific control is incremented by 1 (step S7008).

If the first operation winning confirmation flag of the confirmation flag group 211d in the work area 211 for specific control is set to "1" (step S7009: YES), a winning to the first operation port 33 occurs and the first This means that one game ball has been normally detected by the operating port detection sensor 235a. In this case, the value of the first operation counter 251c in the normal counter area 251 of the work area 213 for non-specific control is incremented by 1 (step S7010).

If the second operation winning confirmation flag of the confirmation flag group 211d in the work area 211 for specific control is set to "1" (step S7011: YES), a winning to the second operation port 34 occurs and the second operation This means that one game ball has been normally detected by the operating port detection sensor 236a. In this case, the value of the second operation counter 251d in the normal counter area 251 of the non-specific control work area 213 is incremented by 1 (step S7012).

If the out confirmation flag of the confirmation flag group 211d in the work area 211 for specific control is set to "1" (step S7013: YES), a game ball enters the out port 24a and the out port is detected. This means that one game ball was normally detected by the sensor 237a. In this case, the value of the out counter 251e in the normal counter area 251 of the non-specific control work area 213 is incremented by 1 (step S7014).

The first winning confirmation flag, the second winning confirmation flag, the third winning confirmation flag, the special electric winning confirmation flag, the first action winning confirmation flag, the second action winning confirmation flag and the second winning confirmation flag of the confirmation flag group 211d in the work area 211 for specific control. The information on the out confirmation flag will be read in the normal ball entry management process included in the non-specific control process, but the information on these flags will not be updated in the normal ball entry management process. The process of clearing these flags to "0" and the process of setting them to "1" are executed in the ball entry detection process (FIG. 91) included in the specific control process, as described above.

FIG. 110 is a flowchart showing the result calculation process executed in step S6905 of the check process (FIG. 108). Note that the processing from step S7101 to step S7115 in the result calculation process is executed by the non-specific control processing unit 222 of the main MPU 82 using a non-specific control program and non-specific control data.

First, base value calculation processing is executed (step S7101). In the calculation process, a base value is calculated using the values of various counters 251a to 251e in the normal counter area 251. The method of calculating the base value is as described above. Then, the calculated base value is overwritten in the current area 256 (step S7102).

Thereafter, it is determined whether the management start flag provided in the work area 213 for non-specific control is set to "1" (step S7103). The management start flag has a value of "0" when the supply of operating power to the Pachinko machine 10 is started for the first time after the Pachinko machine 10 is manufactured. Furthermore, when the non-specific control work area 213 including the management start flag is cleared to "0" and initialized, the value of the management start flag becomes "0". The total number of game balls ejected from the gaming area PA in a situation where the management start flag is "0" and neither the opening/closing execution mode based on the jackpot result nor the high-frequency support mode (i.e., the total number of gaming balls ejected from the gaming area PA) When the total number of supplied game balls becomes the management start reference number, "1" is set in the management start flag. Further, when the management start flag is set to "1", the values of the various counters 251a to 251e in the normal counter area 251 are cleared to "0" and a new calculation period is started. This makes it possible to make it difficult for the influence of the operation check at the stage of shipping the Pachinko machine 10 to affect the base value in a situation where a normal game is being played after the Pachinko machine 10 is shipped.

If a negative determination is made in step S7103, the total number is calculated by summing all the values of the various counters 251a to 251e in the normal counter area 251 (step S7104). Then, it is determined whether the calculated total number is greater than the management start reference number of 300 (step S7105). Note that it may be configured to determine whether the total number is 300 or more, which is the reference number for starting management.

When an affirmative determination is made in step S7105, the management start flag is set to "1" (step S7106). Thereafter, data shift processing is executed (step S7107). In the data shift process, information stored in the current state area 256, first history area 257, second history area 258, and third history area 259 in the calculation result storage area 252 is transferred from the second history area 258 to the third history area 259. , first history area 257→second history area 258, and current area 256→first history area 257. As a result, the final base value in the two previous calculation periods is stored in the third history area 259 as the final base value in the three previous calculation periods, and the final base value in the one previous calculation period is stored in the third history area 259. is stored in the second history area 258 as the final base value in the two previous calculation periods, and the last calculated base value in the current calculation period is stored as the final base value in the previous calculation period. 1 history area 257. In data shift processing, when shifting information as described above, an LDIR command is used. With the LDIR instruction, by specifying the address of the area where the information is to be stored and the address of the area where the information is to be stored, the information stored in the storage source area can be shifted (copied) to the storage destination area. becomes.

However, in a situation where the management start flag is not set to "1", basically no base value information is stored in the first to third history areas 257 to 259, so in step S7107, management is essentially Only the final base value of the calculation period in a situation where the start flag is not set to "1" is shifted to the first history area 257. Thereafter, all the counters 251a to 251e in the normal counter area 251 are cleared to "0" (step S7108).

If an affirmative determination is made in step S7103, the total number is calculated by summing all the values of the various counters 251a to 251e in the normal counter area 251 (step S7109). Then, it is determined whether the calculated total number is greater than the initial reference number of 6000 (step S7110). If a negative determination is made in step S7110, the calculation initial flag provided in the work area 213 for non-specific control is set to "1" (step S7111), and if an affirmative determination is made in step S7110, the corresponding The calculation initial flag is cleared to "0" (step S7112). The calculation initial flag indicates the total number of game balls ejected from the gaming area PA (i.e., the gaming area This flag is used by the main MPU 82 to specify whether or not the total number of game balls supplied to the PA has reached the initial standard number.

When the process of step S7111 or step S7112 is executed, it is determined whether the total number calculated in step S7109 is equal to or greater than the shift reference number of 60,000 (step S7113). If an affirmative determination is made in step S7113, data shift processing is executed (step S7114). In the data shift process, information stored in the current area 256, first history area 257, second history area 258, and third history area 259 in the calculation result storage area 252 is transferred from the second history area 258 to the third history area 259 in the same way as step S7107. 3 history area 259, first history area 257→second history area 258, and current area 256→first history area 257. As a result, the final base value in the two previous calculation periods is stored in the third history area 259 as the final base value in the three previous calculation periods, and the final base value in the one previous calculation period is stored in the third history area 259. is stored in the second history area 258 as the final base value in the two previous calculation periods, and the last calculated base value in the current calculation period is stored as the final base value in the previous calculation period. 1 history area 257. In data shift processing, when shifting information as described above, an LDIR instruction is used. With the LDIR instruction, by specifying the address of the area where the information is to be stored and the address of the area where the information is to be stored, the information stored in the storage source area can be shifted (copied) to the storage destination area. becomes. Thereafter, all the counters 251a to 251e in the normal counter area 251 are cleared to "0" (step S7115).

Next, a configuration for notifying the base value will be described. First, a configuration for controlling the display of various display sections by the main MPU 82 will be described. FIG. 111 is a block diagram for explaining the configuration for controlling the display of various display units in the main MPU 82.

The objects whose display is controlled by the main MPU 82 are the first special symbol display section 37a, the second special symbol display section 37b, the first special symbol reservation display section 37c, the second special symbol reservation display section 37d, and the general symbol display section. There are at least a section 38a, a general map reservation display section 38b, a setting display device 205, and first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. Each of these is provided as a segment display section in which a plurality of display segments using LEDs are arranged. These segment display sections enter the light emitting state by setting data corresponding to the light emitting state (for example, data of "1" which is one of the binary data), and enter the light emitting state by setting data corresponding to the light emitting state (for example, data of "1" which is one of the binary data) When the other one (data "0") is set, the light is turned off.

The main control board 81 is provided with a first display circuit 261 corresponding to the first special figure display part 37a, and a second display circuit 262 is provided in correspondence with the second special figure display part 37b. , a third display circuit (not shown) is provided to correspond to the first special figure reservation display section 37c, and a fourth display circuit (not shown) is provided to correspond to the second special figure reservation display section 37d. A fifth display circuit (not shown) is provided to correspond to the common figure display section 38a, and a sixth display circuit (not shown) is provided to correspond to the common figure reservation display section 38b. A seventh display circuit 263 is provided corresponding to the setting display device 205, and an eighth display circuit 264 is provided corresponding to the first to fourth notification display devices 201-204.

The first display circuit 261 provides data corresponding to the supplied display data to each of the plurality of display segments of the first special figure display section 37a. As a result, each display segment of the first special figure display section 37a enters a light-emitting state or a light-off state in a manner corresponding to the display data provided to the first display circuit 261. In this case, the first display circuit 261 can store and hold the provided display data for a predetermined period (for example, 20 milliseconds), but after the predetermined period elapses, the display data gradually becomes all "0". This will bring us closer to the state of Therefore, the display segment of the first special figure display section 37a that is in a light-emitting state due to the display data provided to the first display circuit 261 remains for a predetermined period without new display data being provided to the first display circuit 261. As time passes, the light gradually turns off. Moreover, with such a configuration, not only when the display content of the first special figure display section 37a is changed, but also when the display content of the first special figure display section 37a is not changed, the previous display The same display data as the data output processing time is supplied to the first display circuit 261.

The second display circuit 262 provides data corresponding to the supplied display data to each of the plurality of display segments of the second special figure display section 37b. As a result, each display segment of the second special figure display section 37b enters a light-emitting state or a light-off state in a manner corresponding to the display data provided to the second display circuit 262. In this case, although the second display circuit 262 can store and hold the provided display data for a predetermined period (for example, 20 milliseconds), after the predetermined period elapses, the display data gradually becomes all "0". This will bring us closer to the state of Therefore, the display segment of the second special figure display section 37b, which is in a light emitting state due to the display data provided to the second display circuit 262, remains for a predetermined period without new display data being provided to the second display circuit 262. As time passes, the light gradually turns off. Moreover, with such a configuration, not only when the display contents of the second special figure display section 37b are changed, but also when the display contents of the second special figure display section 37b are not changed, the previous display The same display data as the data output processing time is supplied to the second display circuit 262.

The third display circuit provides data corresponding to the supplied display data to each of the plurality of display segments of the first special figure reservation display section 37c. As a result, each display segment of the first special figure pending display section 37c enters a light-emitting state or a non-light-emitting state in a manner corresponding to the display data provided to the third display circuit. In this case, although it is possible for the third display circuit to store and hold the provided display data for a predetermined period (for example, 20 milliseconds), after the predetermined period elapses, the display data gradually becomes all "0". The situation is approaching. Therefore, the display segment of the first special figure pending display section 37c, which is in a light-emitting state due to the display data provided to the third display circuit, remains for a predetermined period without new display data being provided to the third display circuit. As time passes, the light will gradually turn off. Moreover, with such a configuration, not only when the display content of the first special figure reservation display section 37c is changed, but also when the display content of the first special figure reservation display section 37c is not changed, the previous time The same display data as the display data output processing time is supplied to the third display circuit.

The fourth display circuit provides data corresponding to the supplied display data to each of the plurality of display segments of the second special figure reservation display section 37d. As a result, each display segment of the second special figure pending display section 37d enters a light emitting state or a light extinguishing state in a manner corresponding to the display data provided to the fourth display circuit. In this case, although it is possible for the fourth display circuit to store and hold the provided display data for a predetermined period (for example, 20 milliseconds), after the predetermined period elapses, the display data gradually becomes all "0". The situation is approaching. Therefore, the display segment of the second special figure pending display section 37d, which is in a light-emitting state due to the display data provided to the fourth display circuit, remains for a predetermined period without new display data being provided to the fourth display circuit. As time passes, the light will gradually turn off. Moreover, with such a configuration, not only when the display contents of the second special figure reservation display section 37d are changed, but also when the display contents of the second special figure reservation display section 37d are not changed, the previous time The same display data as the display data output processing time is supplied to the fourth display circuit.

The fifth display circuit provides data corresponding to the supplied display data to each of the plurality of display segments of the general figure display section 38a. As a result, each display segment of the ordinary figure display section 38a is brought into a light-emitting state or a light-out state in a manner corresponding to the display data provided to the fifth display circuit. In this case, although it is possible for the fifth display circuit to store and hold the provided display data for a predetermined period (for example, 20 milliseconds), after the predetermined period elapses, the display data gradually becomes all "0". The situation is approaching. Therefore, the display segment of the general figure display section 38a, which is in a light emitting state due to the display data provided to the fifth display circuit, will not be provided with new display data to the fifth display circuit for a predetermined period of time. The light will gradually turn off. Moreover, with such a configuration, not only when the display contents of the general figure display section 38a are changed, but also when the display contents of the ordinary figure display section 38a are not changed, the output processing of the previous display data The same display data is supplied to the fifth display circuit.

The sixth display circuit provides data corresponding to the supplied display data to each of the plurality of display segments of the general figure reservation display section 38b. As a result, each display segment of the ordinary figure reservation display section 38b is brought into a light-emitting state or a light-out state in a manner corresponding to the display data provided to the sixth display circuit. In this case, although it is possible for the sixth display circuit to store and hold the provided display data for a predetermined period (for example, 20 milliseconds), after the predetermined period elapses, the display data gradually becomes all "0". The situation is approaching. Therefore, the display segment of the regular figure reservation display section 38b, which is in a light emitting state due to the display data provided to the sixth display circuit, passes for a predetermined period without new display data being provided to the sixth display circuit. As a result, the lights gradually turn off. Moreover, with such a configuration, not only when the display contents of the general figure reservation display section 38b are changed, but also when the display contents of the ordinary figure reservation display section 38b are not changed, the previous display data is The same display data as in the output processing time is supplied to the sixth display circuit.

The seventh display circuit 263 provides data corresponding to the supplied display data to each of the plurality of display segments provided in each of the setting display devices 205. As a result, each display segment of the setting display device 205 enters a light-emitting state or a light-off state in a manner corresponding to the display data provided to the seventh display circuit 263. In this case, although the seventh display circuit 263 can store and hold the provided display data for a predetermined period (for example, 20 milliseconds), after the predetermined period elapses, the display data gradually becomes all "0". This will bring us closer to the state of Therefore, a predetermined period of time elapses without new display data being provided to the seventh display circuit 263 for the display segment of the setting display device 205 that is in a light emitting state due to the display data provided to the seventh display circuit 263. As a result, the lights gradually turn off. Furthermore, with such a configuration, not only when the display content of the setting display device 205 is changed, but also when the display content of the setting display device 205 is not changed, the output processing time of the previous display data can be compared with the previous display data output processing time. The same display data is supplied to the seventh display circuit 263.

The eighth display circuit 264 provides data corresponding to the supplied display data to each of a plurality of display segments provided in each of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. As a result, each display segment of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 enters a light-emitting state or a light-off state in a manner corresponding to the display data provided to the eighth display circuit 264. In this case, although the eighth display circuit 264 is able to store and hold the provided display data for a predetermined period (for example, 20 milliseconds), after the predetermined period elapses, the display data gradually becomes all "0". This will bring us closer to the state of Therefore, for the display segments of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 that are in a light emitting state due to the display data provided to the eighth display circuit 264, new display data is provided to the eighth display circuit 264. As a predetermined period of time passes without any interruption, the light gradually turns off. Moreover, with such a configuration, not only the display contents of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are changed, but also the display contents of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are changed. Even if this is not the case, the same display data as the previous display data output processing time is supplied to the eighth display circuit 264.

Note that each of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is provided with eight display segments. In contrast, display data is provided in 8-bit units. When the display data of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is provided to the eighth display circuit 264, the 8-bit display data corresponding to the first notification display device 201 is provided as data in 8-bit units. After that, 8-bit display data corresponding to the second notification display device 202 is provided in 8-bit units, and then 8-bit display data corresponding to the third notification display device 203 is provided in 8-bit units. Finally, 8-bit display data corresponding to the fourth notification display device 204 is provided as data in 8-bit units.

In the configuration in which the first to eighth display circuits 261 to 264 are provided as described above, the main MPU 82 supplies display data to the display IC 266. In other words, the display ICs 266 are not provided one to one for the first to eighth display circuits 261 to 264, but one display IC 266 is provided in common to all of the first to eighth display circuits 261 to 264. A display IC 266 is provided. When the main MPU 82 supplies display data to the display IC 266, it also supplies type data indicating which of the first to eighth display circuits 261 to 264 the display data corresponds to.

In detail, regarding the electrical connection between the main side MPU 82 and the display IC 266, the main side MPU 82 and the display IC 266 are connected to a type data signal line LN1, a type clock signal line LN2, a display data signal line LN3, and a display clock signal. It is electrically connected using line LN4. These signal lines LN1 to LN4 are all signal lines for transmitting signals from the main MPU 82 to the display IC 266 by one-way communication.

Type data is transmitted from the main side MPU 82 to the display IC 266 by serial communication using the type data signal line LN1. In this case, the delimitation of each bit of type data by serial communication is indicated by the type clock signal transmitted from the main MPU 82 to the display IC 266 using the type clock signal line LN2. The type data is data indicating which of the first to eighth display circuits 261 to 264 the display data to be transmitted corresponds to. The type data is transmitted as 8-bit data consisting of the first bit to the eighth bit. When the display data corresponds to the first display circuit 261, the first bit becomes HI level and the other bits become LOW level. When the display data corresponds to the second display circuit 262, the second bit becomes HI level and the other bits become LOW level. When the display data corresponds to the third display circuit, the third bit becomes HI level and the other bits become LOW level. When the display data corresponds to the fourth display circuit, the fourth bit becomes HI level and the other bits become LOW level. When the display data corresponds to the fifth display circuit, the fifth bit becomes HI level and the other bits become LOW level. When the display data corresponds to the sixth display circuit, the sixth bit becomes HI level and the other bits become LOW level. When the display data corresponds to the seventh display circuit 263, the seventh bit becomes HI level and the other bits become LOW level. When the display data corresponds to the eighth display circuit 264, the eighth bit becomes HI level and the other bits become LOW level.

Display data is transmitted from the main MPU 82 to the display IC 266 by serial communication using the display data signal line LN3. In this case, each 1-bit break of the display data by serial communication is indicated by a display clock signal transmitted from the main MPU 82 to the display IC 266 using the display clock signal line LN4. The display data is transmitted in 8-bit units consisting of the first to eighth bits.

The main MPU 82 transmits display data corresponding to each of the first to eighth display circuits 261 to 264 to the display IC 266 in a second timer interrupt process (FIG. 114) to be described later. In this case, in one processing cycle of the second timer interrupt processing, display data is transmitted to one display circuit among the first to eighth display circuits 261 to 264, and the display data is transmitted from the nth display circuit to the n+1th display circuit. In accordance with the order in which the circuits are arranged, the display circuits 261 to 264 to which display data is transmitted are changed one by one each time a new processing cycle of the second timer interrupt processing occurs. Furthermore, in the second timer interrupt processing in the processing cycle following the processing cycle in which the display data corresponding to the eighth display circuit 264, which is the last in the order, is transmitted, the first display circuit 261, which is the first in the above order, Send the display data corresponding to. Note that in the processing time of the second timer interrupt processing that transmits display data to any of the first to seventh display circuits 261 to 263, only one piece of display data in 8-bit units is transmitted; In the processing cycle of the second timer interrupt process for transmitting display data, four pieces of display data in 8-bit units are transmitted corresponding to the number of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204.

In the configuration in which the main MPU 82 transmits display data as described above, the work area 211 for specific control and the work area 213 for non-specific control include various storage areas that are referenced by the main MPU 82 to transmit display data. is set. FIG. 112 is an explanatory diagram for explaining various buffers 271 to 278 provided in the work area 211 for specific control.

As shown in FIG. 112, the work area 211 for specific control includes a first display data buffer 271, a second display data buffer 272, a third display data buffer 273, a fourth display data buffer 274, and a fifth display data buffer. A data buffer 275, a sixth display data buffer 276, a seventh display data buffer 277, and an eighth display data buffer 278 are provided.

The first display data buffer 271 stores display data to be supplied to the first display circuit 261. As already explained, the first display circuit 261 is provided corresponding to the first special figure display section 37a, so the first display data buffer 271 is used to cause the first special figure display section 37a to perform a predetermined display. display data will be stored. In this case, storage of the display data in the first display data buffer 271 is performed in the display control process (step S5516) based on the contents of the special figure special electric line control process (step S5514) in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 88). . Furthermore, when it comes to the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 114) for transmitting display data to the first display circuit 261, only when the display data stored in the first display data buffer 271 has been changed. Instead, even if the display data has not been changed, the display data stored in the first display data buffer 271 is transmitted to the display IC 266.

Display data to be supplied to the second display circuit 262 is stored in the second display data buffer 272 . As already explained, the second display circuit 262 is provided corresponding to the second special figure display section 37b, so the second display data buffer 272 is used to cause the second special figure display section 37b to perform a predetermined display. display data will be stored. In this case, storage of display data in the second display data buffer 272 is performed in the display control process (step S5516) based on the contents of the special figure special electric line control process (step S5514) in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 88). . Furthermore, when it comes to the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 114) for transmitting display data to the second display circuit 262, only when the display data stored in the second display data buffer 272 has been changed. Instead, even if the display data has not been changed, the display data stored in the second display data buffer 272 is sent to the display IC 266.

The third display data buffer 273 stores display data to be supplied to the third display circuit. As already explained, since the third display circuit is provided in correspondence with the first special figure pending display section 37c, the third display data buffer 273 is used to cause the first special figure pending display section 37c to perform a predetermined display. display data will be stored. In this case, storage of the display data in the third display data buffer 273 is performed in the display control process (step S5516) based on the contents of the special figure special electric line control process (step S5514) in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 88). . Furthermore, when it comes to the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 114) for transmitting display data to the third display circuit, when the display data stored in the third display data buffer 273 is changed, Even if the display data is not changed, the display data stored in the third display data buffer 273 is transmitted to the display IC 266.

The fourth display data buffer 274 stores display data to be supplied to the fourth display circuit. As already explained, since the fourth display circuit is provided in correspondence with the second special figure pending display section 37d, the fourth display data buffer 274 is used to cause the second special figure pending display section 37d to perform a predetermined display. display data will be stored. In this case, storage of the display data in the fourth display data buffer 274 is performed in the display control process (step S5516) based on the contents of the special figure special electric line control process (step S5514) in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 88). . Furthermore, when it comes to the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 114) for transmitting display data to the fourth display circuit, when the display data stored in the fourth display data buffer 274 is changed, Even if the display data is not changed, the display data stored in the fourth display data buffer 274 is transmitted to the display IC 266.

The fifth display data buffer 275 stores display data to be supplied to the fifth display circuit. As already explained, the fifth display circuit is provided in correspondence with the ordinary figure display section 38a, so the fifth display data buffer 275 stores display data for causing the ordinary figure display section 38a to perform a predetermined display. will be done. In this case, storage of the display data in the fifth display data buffer 275 is performed in the display control process (step S5516) based on the contents of the general electric power control process (step S5515) in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 88). be exposed. Furthermore, when it comes to the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 114) for transmitting display data to the fifth display circuit, when the display data stored in the fifth display data buffer 275 is changed, Even if the display data is not changed, the display data stored in the fifth display data buffer 275 is transmitted to the display IC 266.

The sixth display data buffer 276 stores display data to be supplied to the sixth display circuit. As already explained, the sixth display circuit is provided corresponding to the ordinary figure reservation display section 38b, so the sixth display data buffer 276 contains display data for causing the ordinary figure reservation display section 38b to perform a predetermined display. will be stored. In this case, storage of the display data in the sixth display data buffer 276 is performed in the display control process (step S5516) based on the contents of the general electric power control process (step S5515) in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 88). be exposed. Furthermore, when it comes to the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 114) for transmitting display data to the sixth display circuit, if the display data stored in the sixth display data buffer 276 is changed, Even if the display data is not changed, the display data stored in the sixth display data buffer 276 is transmitted to the display IC 266.

The seventh display data buffer 277 stores display data to be supplied to the seventh display circuit 263. As described above, the seventh display circuit 263 is provided corresponding to the setting display device 205, so the seventh display data buffer 277 stores display data for causing the setting display device 205 to perform a predetermined display. That will happen. Specifically, when the setting confirmation process (FIG. 82) is being executed, in the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 114), which is the process corresponding to the specific control, the setting display device 205 Display data for displaying the current setting values of the pachinko machine 10 is stored in the seventh display data buffer 277. In addition, when the setting value update process (FIG. 83) is being executed, in the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 114), which is the process corresponding to the specific control, the setting display device 205 displays the pachinko machine 1 Display data for displaying the current set value of is stored in the seventh display data buffer 277. When it is time to process the second timer interrupt process for transmitting display data to the seventh display circuit 263, not only when the display data stored in the seventh display data buffer 277 is changed, but also when the display data Even if the display data stored in the seventh display data buffer 277 is not changed, the display data stored in the seventh display data buffer 277 is transmitted to the display IC 266.

The eighth display data buffer 278 stores display data to be supplied to the eighth display circuit 264. As described above, the eighth display circuit 264 is provided corresponding to the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, so that the eighth display data buffer 278 includes the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. .about.204 store display data for performing a predetermined display. When it is time to process the second timer interrupt process for transmitting display data to the eighth display circuit 264, not only when the display data stored in the eighth display data buffer 278 has been changed, but also when the display data Even if the display data stored in the eighth display data buffer 278 is not changed, the display data stored in the eighth display data buffer 278 is transmitted to the display IC 266.

Here, the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 display a display corresponding to the base value. In this case, since the eighth display data buffer 278 is provided in the work area 211 for specific control, the process of storing display data in the eighth display data buffer 278 is performed as a process corresponding to the specific control. On the other hand, the process for deriving the base value is performed as a process corresponding to non-specific control, and each base value stored in the current area 256, first history area 257, second history area 258, and third history area 259 is The values are sequentially displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204.

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 103, the work area 213 for non-specific control includes not only a calculation result storage area 252 for storing each base value, but also a current area 256, a first history area 257, and a second history area 258. A display target setting area 253 is provided for storing base values to be displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 among the base values stored in the third history area 259. . Since the period in which one base value is continuously displayed is 5 seconds, in the process corresponding to non-specific control, the base value is displayed according to the predetermined display order every 5 seconds. The value is read from the calculation result storage area 252, and the read base value is stored in the display target setting area 253. When the base value is to be displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, the display target is The display data stored in the setting area 253 is read, and the read display data is stored in the eighth display data buffer 278.

In the configuration in which the first to eighth display data buffers 271 to 278 are provided as described above, at each processing time of the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 114), the main MPU 82 stores the display data corresponding to that processing time. Reads the display data from the buffers 271 to 278, transmits the read display data to the display IC 266, and also sends type data indicating which of the first to eighth display circuits 261 to 264 the display data corresponds to. It is sent to the display IC 266. FIG. 113 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the electrical configuration of the display IC 266.

As shown in FIG. 113, the display IC 266 includes a type data buffer 281, a selection signal output section 282, a display data buffer 283, and a display data output section 284. The display data buffer 283 stores display data received from the main MPU 82. The display data output unit 284 transmits the display data stored in the display data buffer 283 to the first to eighth display circuits 261 to 264. The type data buffer 281 stores type data received from the main MPU 82. The selection signal output unit 282 outputs a selection signal for specifying the display circuits 261 to 264 corresponding to the type data stored in the type data buffer 281 among the first to eighth display circuits 261 to 264 as display data reception destinations. Output.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 111, the display IC 266 and the first display circuit 261 are electrically connected using a display signal group 291. The display signal group 291 is provided to make it possible to transmit 8-bit display data at once, and the display data in 8-bit units is transmitted from the display IC 266 by parallel communication. Further, a branch signal group 292 is provided branching off from the display signal group 291, and the branch signal group 292 includes the second display circuit 262, the third display circuit, the fourth display circuit, the fifth display circuit, and the sixth display circuit. It is electrically connected to each of the display circuits, the seventh display circuit 263, and the eighth display circuit 264. Like the display signal group 291, the branch signal group 292 is provided to make it possible to transmit 8-bit display data at once, and the display data in 8-bit units is transmitted from the display IC 266 through parallel communication. Ru.

Since the display signal group 291 and the branch signal group 292 are provided as described above, when the display data stored in the display data buffer 283 is transmitted by the display data output unit 284, the display data is transmitted to the first - Supplied to all of the eighth display circuits 261 to 264. In this case, first to eighth selection signal lines 301 to 304 are provided to designate display circuits 261 to 264 to receive and use the supplied display data.

The first selection signal line 301 is provided to electrically connect the display IC 266 and the first display circuit 261. When type data corresponding to the first display circuit 261 is stored in the type data buffer 281, in order to cause the first display circuit 261 to receive and use the display data supplied from the display data output section 284. , the selection signal output section 282 of the display IC 266 transmits a first selection signal to the first display circuit 261 through the first selection signal line 301. As a result, display data supplied to all of the first to eighth display circuits 261 to 264 through the display signal group 291 and branch signal group 292 is received and used only by the first display circuit 261.

The second selection signal line 302 is provided to electrically connect the display IC 266 and the second display circuit 262. When type data corresponding to the second display circuit 262 is stored in the type data buffer 281, in order to cause the second display circuit 262 to receive and use the display data supplied from the display data output unit 284. , the selection signal output section 282 of the display IC 266 transmits a second selection signal to the second display circuit 262 through the second selection signal line 302. As a result, the display data supplied to all of the first to eighth display circuits 261 to 264 through the display signal group 291 and the branch signal group 292 is received and used only by the second display circuit 262.

A third selection signal line (not shown) is provided to electrically connect the display IC 266 and the third display circuit. When type data corresponding to the third display circuit is stored in the type data buffer 281, in order to cause the third display circuit to receive and use the display data supplied from the display data output section 284, the display The selection signal output section 282 of the IC 266 transmits the third selection signal to the third display circuit through the third selection signal line. As a result, the display data supplied to all of the first to eighth display circuits 261 to 264 through the display signal group 291 and branch signal group 292 is received and used only by the third display circuit.

A fourth selection signal line (not shown) is provided to electrically connect the display IC 266 and the fourth display circuit. When type data corresponding to the fourth display circuit is stored in the type data buffer 281, the display The selection signal output section 282 of the IC 266 transmits the fourth selection signal to the fourth display circuit through the fourth selection signal line. As a result, the display data supplied to all of the first to eighth display circuits 261 to 264 through the display signal group 291 and branch signal group 292 is received and used only by the fourth display circuit.

A fifth selection signal line (not shown) is provided to electrically connect the display IC 266 and the fifth display circuit. When type data corresponding to the fifth display circuit is stored in the type data buffer 281, in order to cause the fifth display circuit to receive and use the display data supplied from the display data output unit 284, the display The selection signal output section 282 of the IC 266 transmits the fifth selection signal to the fifth display circuit through the fifth selection signal line. As a result, the display data supplied to all of the first to eighth display circuits 261 to 264 through the display signal group 291 and branch signal group 292 is received and used only by the fifth display circuit.

A sixth selection signal line (not shown) is provided to electrically connect the display IC 266 and the sixth display circuit. When type data corresponding to the sixth display circuit is stored in the type data buffer 281, the display The selection signal output section 282 of the IC 266 transmits the sixth selection signal to the sixth display circuit through the sixth selection signal line. As a result, the display data supplied to all of the first to eighth display circuits 261 to 264 through the display signal group 291 and branch signal group 292 is received and used only by the sixth display circuit.

The seventh selection signal line 303 is provided to electrically connect the display IC 266 and the seventh display circuit 263. When type data corresponding to the seventh display circuit 263 is stored in the type data buffer 281, in order to cause the seventh display circuit 263 to receive and use the display data supplied from the display data output section 284. , the selection signal output section 282 of the display IC 266 transmits the seventh selection signal to the seventh display circuit 263 through the seventh selection signal line 303. As a result, the display data supplied to all of the first to eighth display circuits 261 to 264 through the display signal group 291 and the branch signal group 292 is received and used only by the seventh display circuit 263.

The eighth selection signal line 304 is provided to electrically connect the display IC 266 and the eighth display circuit 264. When type data corresponding to the eighth display circuit 264 is stored in the type data buffer 281, in order to cause the eighth display circuit 264 to receive and use the display data supplied from the display data output section 284. , the selection signal output section 282 of the display IC 266 transmits the eighth selection signal to the eighth display circuit 264 through the eighth selection signal line 304. As a result, the display data supplied to all of the first to eighth display circuits 261 to 264 through the display signal group 291 and branch signal group 292 is received and used only by the eighth display circuit 264.

Next, the second timer interrupt process in this embodiment executed by the main MPU 82 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 114. Note that the processes from step S7201 to step S7213 in the second timer interrupt process are executed by the specific control processing unit 221 of the main MPU 82 using a specific control program and specific control data.

First, interrupt prohibition is set to prohibit the occurrence of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 88) and the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 114) (step S7201). By disabling the generation of the first timer interrupt process (Figure 88), the first timer interrupt process (Figure 88) will interrupt the second timer interrupt process (Figure 114) even if the first interrupt cycle has elapsed. It is possible to prevent it from being started. Furthermore, by prohibiting the second timer interrupt processing (Fig. 114) from occurring, even if the second interrupt cycle has elapsed during the execution of the second timer interrupt processing (Fig. 114), the second timer interrupt processing (Fig. 114) is prohibited. It becomes possible to prevent the process (FIG. 114) from being activated redundantly.

Thereafter, it is determined whether the setting update display flag in the specific control work area 211 is set to "1" (step S7202). The setting update display flag is a flag for the main MPU 82 to specify whether or not the main MPU 82 is executing the setting value update process (FIG. 83). As already explained, the setting value update process (FIG. 83) is performed in the main process (FIG. 81) when the supply of operating power to the main MPU 82 is started, when the process at the time of starting the supply of operating power is being executed. When the setting value update process (FIG. 83) is started, an interrupt is permitted in step S5101. Therefore, even if the main MPU 82 is executing the setting value update process (FIG. 83), the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 114) is started as an interrupt.

The situation where the setting update display flag is set to "1" means that the current processing time of the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 114) is executing the setting value update processing (FIG. 83) in the main MPU 82. This means that the process was started by interrupting the situation. If an affirmative determination is made in step S7202, a setting process for the seventh display data buffer 277 during the setting update is executed (step S7203). In the setting process, display data for causing the setting display device 205 to display a setting value that is currently selected for the pachinko machine 10 is stored in the seventh display data buffer 277. As a result, the setting display device 205 displays the setting values that are currently selected.

If a negative determination is made in step S7202 or if the process in step S7203 is executed, it is determined whether the setting confirmation display flag in the specific control work area 211 is set to "1" (step S7204). The setting confirmation display flag is a flag for the main MPU 82 to specify whether or not the main MPU 82 is executing the setting confirmation process (FIG. 82). As already explained, the setting confirmation process (FIG. 82) is executed in the main process (FIG. 81) when the supply of operating power to the main MPU 82 is started. When the setting confirmation process (FIG. 82) is started, an interrupt is permitted in step S5001. Therefore, even if the main MPU 82 is executing the setting confirmation process (FIG. 82), the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 114) is started as an interrupt.

The situation in which the setting confirmation display flag is set to "1" means that the main MPU 82 is executing the setting confirmation process (FIG. 82) in the current processing time of the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 114). This means that the process was started by interrupting the situation. If an affirmative determination is made in step S7204, a setting process for the seventh display data buffer 277 during setting confirmation is executed (step S7205). In the setting process, display data for causing the setting display device 205 to display the current setting values of the pachinko machine 10 is stored in the seventh display data buffer 277. As a result, the setting display device 205 displays a setting value that is currently being set.

If a negative determination is made in step S7204 or if the process in step S7205 is executed, a setting process for the eighth display data buffer 278 is executed (step S7206). FIG. 115 is a flowchart showing the setting process for the eighth display data buffer 278. Note that the processing from step S7301 to step S7310 in the setting process for the eighth display data buffer 278 is executed by the specific control processing unit 221 of the main MPU 82 using the specific control program and specific control data. Ru.

First, it is determined whether the value of the checking counter 211g in the specific control work area 211 is 1 or more (step S7301). When the value of the checking counter 211g is 1 or more (step S7301: YES), it means that it is the initial check period (specifically, 5 seconds). In this case, the check display data is set in the eighth display data buffer 278 in the specific control work area 211 (step S7302). As already explained, the display data set in the eighth display data buffer 278 is display data for controlling the display of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. In addition, the data for the check display is display data for causing the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 to perform the check display, that is, the data for each of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. This is display data for setting all display segments 201a to 204a in a light emitting state. By supplying the check display data to the display IC 266, as shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. The display segments 201a to 204a are in a light emitting state. Thereby, the manager of the game hall can grasp whether each of the display segments 201a to 204a of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 can normally be in a light emitting state.

Thereafter, the value of the checking counter 211g in the specific control work area 211 is subtracted by 1 (step S7303). As a result, when the checking counter 211g is used to measure the initial check period, the value of the checking counter 211g is changed periodically every time the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 114) is started. will be subtracted.

If the value of the checking counter 211g is "0" and it is not the initial check period (step S7301: NO), check whether the management start flag provided in the work area 213 for non-specific control is set to "1". (Step S7304). If the management start flag is not set to "1" (step S7304: NO), a pre-management display setting process is executed for the first and second notification display devices 201 and 202 (step S7305). In the setting process, display data for setting all the display segments 201a and 202a in the light emitting state in each of the first and second notification display devices 201 and 202 is set in the eighth display data buffer 278. Note that the configuration is not limited to having all the display segments 201a, 202a in a light emitting state in each of the first and second notification display devices 201, 202, and the first and second notification display devices 201, 202, 202 may be configured such that all display segments 201a and 202a perform blinking display.

After that, the calculation result data set in the display target setting area 253 in the work area 213 for non-specific control is read out (step S7306), and the read calculation result data is displayed on the third and fourth notification display devices 203 and 204. The display data to be applied is set in the eighth display data buffer 278 (step S7307). Although the details will be described later, in the display processing (FIG. 116) included in the non-specific control processing, if the management start flag is not set to "1", the base value is read from the current area 256, and the read base value is Calculation result data corresponding to the number in the first decimal place and the number in the second decimal place are set in the display target setting area 253. In step S7307, this calculation result data is set in the eighth display data buffer 278 as display data to be applied to the third and fourth notification display devices 203 and 204.

By supplying the display data set in the eighth display data buffer 278 in steps S7305 and S7307 to the display IC 266, the first and second notification displays are displayed as shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. 106(c). In a situation where all display segments 201a and 202a in each of the devices 201 and 202 are in a light emitting state, the first decimal place of the base value calculated in the current calculation period by the third notification display device 203 At the same time, the fourth notification display device 204 displays the number to the second decimal place of the base value calculated in the current calculation period. Displaying numbers corresponding to the base value on the third and fourth notification display devices 203 and 204 while all the display segments 201a and 202a are in a light emitting state in the first and second notification display devices 201 and 202, respectively. By doing so, it becomes possible to make the game hall manager recognize that the base value currently being reported is the base value in a situation where the management start flag is not set to "1".

In a situation where the management start flag is set to "1", as already explained, each time the display duration period (specifically 5 seconds) elapses, the current area 256 → first history area 257 → second history While the base value to be notified is switched in the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 in a predetermined order of area 258 → third history area 259, "1" is set in the management start flag. In a situation where is not set, the base value of the current area 256 is maintained as the notification target. Thereby, when the operation of the Pachinko machine 10 is checked at the stage of shipping the Pachinko machine 10, the current base value can be checked at any timing.

If the management start flag is set to "1" (step S7304: YES), the display data set in the display target setting area 253 in the work area 213 for non-specific control is read out, and the read display data is 8 display data buffer 278 (step S7308). By supplying the display data to the display IC 266, if the base value of the current area 256 is the target of notification, the display as shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. 105(a) is displayed for the first to fourth notifications. This is done on the display devices 201 to 204, and if the base value of the first history area 257 is the target of notification, the display as shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. 105(b) is the first to fourth notification display. If the base value of the second history area 258 is to be notified, the display as shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. 105(c) is displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices. 201 to 204, and if the base value of the third history area 259 is the target of notification, a display as shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. 105(d) is displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201. ~204 will be held.

Thereafter, it is determined whether the initial display flag provided in the work area 213 for non-specific control is set to "1" (step S7309). The initial display flag is set on the first notification display device 201 to notify that in a situation where the base value of the current area 256 is the target of notification, the base value is the initial base value of the calculation after the start of the calculation period. This flag is used by the main MPU 82 to specify that the second notification display device 202 should be displayed blinking. If the initial display flag is set to "1" (step S7309: YES), a blinking setting process is executed for the first and second notification display devices 201 and 202 (step S7310).

In the blinking setting process, when a display corresponding to the display data currently set in the eighth display data buffer 278 is performed on the first and second notification display devices 201 and 202, the display is blinked. Configure the settings to make it work. As a setting for blinking display, specifically, regarding the transmission of display data to the first and second notification display devices 201 and 202, the display data currently set in the eighth display data buffer 278 is used. The corresponding data is sent to the display IC 266 until a predetermined lighting period (for example, 0.5 seconds) has elapsed, and then all display segments 201a and 202a of the first and second notification display devices 201 and 202 are turned off. Data indicating the state is transmitted to the display IC 266 until a predetermined light-off period (for example, 0.5 seconds) has elapsed, and thereafter the predetermined light-on period and predetermined light-off period are alternately repeated. As a result, if the base value in the current area 256 becomes the notification target immediately after a new base value calculation period starts, the initial calculation display is performed on the first and second notification display devices 201 and 202. Therefore, it is possible to make the game hall manager understand that the current base value reported on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is the value immediately after the start of the new calculation period. It becomes possible.

Here, in addition to the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 for displaying the base value, this is used to display the setting value in the setting confirmation process (FIG. 82) or the setting value update process (FIG. 83). The setting display device 205 is provided, and in the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 114), when the setting confirmation processing (FIG. 82) or the setting value update processing (FIG. 83) is being executed, the setting display device 205 (steps S7202 to S7205), as well as processing to display the base values on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 (step S7206) are executed. . As a result, when the setting confirmation process (FIG. 82) or the setting value update process (FIG. 83) is being executed, the game hall manager can move the game machine main body 12 in front of the pachinko machine 10 with respect to the outer frame 11. By rotating the main controller 71 to expose the front side of the main controller 71, the setting values displayed on the setting display device 205 and the base values displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 can be changed. Both can be visually checked. Therefore, in the setting value update process (Fig. 83), the administrator of the game hall can set a new setting value while checking the past base value, or in the setting confirmation process (Fig. 82), the administrator of the game hall can check the past base value and the current It becomes possible to check the correspondence with the set value.

Returning to the explanation of the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 114), after executing the process of step S7206, the transmission state of the signal through the type data signal line LN1 and the type clock signal line LN2 is turned OFF (step S7207 ), the signal transmission state through the display data signal line LN3 and display clock signal line LN4 is set to OFF state (step S7208). Thereafter, the type counter provided in the work area 211 for specific control is updated (step S7209).

The type counter is a counter for the main MPU 82 to specify the display data transmission target among the first to eighth display data buffers 271 to 278 in the current processing round of the second timer interrupt processing. When the value of the type counter is "1", the display data of the first display data buffer 271 is the target for transmission, and when the value of the type counter is "2", the display data of the second display data buffer 272 is the target of transmission. When the value of the type counter is "3", the display data of the third display data buffer 273 becomes the transmission target, and when the value of the type counter is "4", the display data of the fourth display data buffer 274 becomes the transmission target. If the value of the type counter is "5", the display data of the fifth display data buffer 275 becomes the target of transmission, and if the value of the type counter is "6", the display data of the sixth display data buffer 276 When the data is to be transmitted and the value of the type counter is "7", the display data in the seventh display data buffer 277 is to be transmitted, and when the value of the type counter is "8", the eighth display data buffer 278 The displayed data will be sent. In the type counter update process, the value of the type counter is incremented by 1, and if the value of the type counter after adding 1 exceeds the upper limit value of "8", the value of the type counter is set to "1". . As a result, the display data transmission targets are sequentially changed in the first to eighth display data buffers 271 to 278 each time the second timer interrupt process is performed.

Thereafter, type data corresponding to the value of the type counter is read from the main ROM 83 (step S7210). Specifically, when the value of the type counter is "1", the type data corresponding to the first display circuit 261 is read from the main side ROM 83, and when the value of the type counter is "2", the type data corresponding to the first display circuit 261 is read from the main side ROM 83, and when the value of the type counter is "2", the type data The type data corresponding to the display circuit 262 is read from the main side ROM 83, and when the value of the type counter is "3", the type data corresponding to the third display circuit is read from the main side ROM 83, and the value of the type counter is "3". 4", the type data corresponding to the fourth display circuit is read from the main side ROM83, and when the value of the type counter is "5", the type data corresponding to the fifth display circuit is read from the main side ROM83. When the value of the type counter is "6", the type data corresponding to the sixth display circuit is read from the main side ROM 83, and when the value of the type counter is "7", the type data is read from the seventh display circuit 263. The corresponding type data is read from the main side ROM 83, and when the value of the type counter is "8", the type data corresponding to the eighth display circuit 264 is read from the main side ROM 83.

Thereafter, display data is read from the display data buffers 271 to 278 corresponding to the value of the type counter (step S7211). Specifically, when the value of the type counter is "1", display data is read from the first display data buffer 271, and when the value of the type counter is "2", the display data is read from the second display data buffer 272. The display data is read out, and if the value of the type counter is "3", the display data is read out from the third display data buffer 273, and if the value of the type counter is "4", the display data is read out from the fourth display data buffer 274. When the value of the type counter is "5", the display data is read from the fifth display data buffer 275, and when the value of the type counter is "6", the display data is read from the sixth display data buffer 276. The display data is read, and if the value of the type counter is "7", the display data is read from the seventh display data buffer 277, and if the value of the type counter is "8", the display data is read from the eighth display data buffer 278. Read display data.

Thereafter, various signal transmission processing is executed (step S7212). In the transmission process, signals are output to the type data signal line LN1 and type clock signal line LN2 so that the type data read in step S7210 is transmitted to the display IC 266. Furthermore, in the transmission process, signals are output to the display data signal line LN3 and the display clock signal line LN4 so that the display data read in step S7211 is transmitted to the display IC 266.

Thereafter, interrupt permission is set to permit the occurrence of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 88) and the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 114) (step S7213).

FIG. 116 is a flowchart showing the display process executed in step S6906 of the check process (FIG. 108). Note that the processing from step S7401 to step S7420 in the display processing is executed by the non-specific control processing unit 222 of the main MPU 82 using a non-specific control program and non-specific control data.

First, it is determined whether the value of the checking counter 211g in the specific control work area 211 is 1 or more (step S7401). When the value of the checking counter 211g is 1 or more (step S7401: YES), the previous checking flag provided in the work area 213 for non-specific control is set to "1" (step S7402). The previous checking flag is a flag used by the main MPU 82 to specify that it was confirmed in the previous display process that the value of the checking counter 211g was 1 or more.

If the value of the checking counter 211g is "0" (step S7401: NO), it is determined whether the management start flag in the work area 213 for non-specific control is set to "1" (step S7403). . If the management start flag is not set to "1" (step S7403: NO), the previous checking flag in the work area 213 for non-specific control is cleared to "0" (step S7404).

After that, the base value is read from the current area 256, and the calculation result data corresponding to the first decimal place number and the second decimal place number in the read base value are displayed in the display target setting area in the work area 213 for non-specific control. 253 (step S7405). By transmitting the display data corresponding to the calculation result data to the display IC 266, the number at the first decimal place in the base value of the current area 256 is displayed on the third notification display device 203, and the base value of the current area 256 is displayed on the third notification display device 203. The second decimal place digit in the value is displayed on the fourth notification display device 204. With the above configuration, in a situation where the management start flag is not set to "1", the base value in the past calculation period will not be reported, and only the base value calculated in the current calculation period will be reported. be done.

In a situation where the management start flag is not set to "1", calculation result data is set in the display target setting area 253, but display type data is not set. As already explained, when the base value is notified in a situation where the management start flag is not set to "1", the display contents of the first notification display device 201 and the second notification display device 202 are changed to the management start flag. The display content is different from the case where the base value is notified in a situation where the start flag is set to "1". Specifically, all the display segments 201a and 202a in the first and second notification display devices 201 and 202 are in a light emitting state.

If the management start flag is set to "1" (step S7403: YES), it is determined whether the previous checking flag in the non-specific control work area 213 is set to "1" (step S7406). ). If the previous checking flag is not set to "1" (step S7406: NO), the value of the switching timing counter 254 (see FIG. 103) provided in the work area 213 for non-specific control is subtracted by 1 (step S7407). The switching timing counter 254 selects the first to fourth notification base values stored in the current area 256, first history area 257, second history area 258, and third history area 259 of the calculation result storage area 252, respectively. This counter is used by the main MPU 82 to specify that it is the timing to switch the base value to be notified in the display devices 201 to 204. As already explained, each time the display duration period (specifically 5 seconds) elapses, notification is made in the predetermined order of current area 256 → first history area 257 → second history area 258 → third history area 259. The target base value is switched, and the base value to be notified is repeatedly switched in the predetermined order.

When the process of step S7407 is executed, by determining whether the value of the switching timing counter 254 after being subtracted by 1 is "0", the base value that is currently the target of notification becomes the target of notification. It is determined whether the display continuation period has elapsed since then (step S7408). When an affirmative determination is made in step S7408, the value of the display target counter 255 (see FIG. 103) provided in the work area 213 for non-specific control is incremented by 1 (step S7409). If the value of the display target counter 255 after adding 1 exceeds the maximum value "3" (step S7410: YES), the value of the display target counter 255 is cleared to "0" (step S7411).

The display target counter 255 includes the first to fourth notification base values stored in each of the current area 256, first history area 257, second history area 258, and third history area 259 in the calculation result storage area 252. This counter is used by the main MPU 82 to specify the base value to be notified in the display devices 201 to 204. Specifically, when the value of the display target counter is "0", the base value stored in the current area 256 is the target of notification, and when the value of the display target counter is "1", the base value stored in the current area 256 is the base value stored in the first history area. If the base value stored in the second history area 257 is the target of notification, and the value of the display target counter is "2", the base value stored in the second history area 258 is the target of notification, and the value of the display target counter is "3". ”, the base value stored in the third history area 259 becomes the notification target.

If a negative determination is made in step S7410, or if the process in step S7411 is executed, the switching timing counter 254 in the work area 213 for non-specific control displays a value corresponding to the next notification target switching timing for the duration ( Specifically, a value corresponding to 5 seconds is set (step S7412).

If a negative determination is made in step S7408, or if the process in step S7412 is executed, display data corresponding to the base value that is the current notification target is displayed in the display target setting area 253 in the work area 213 for non-specific control. Execute the process to set the . Specifically, first, display type data corresponding to the value of the display target counter 255 is set in the display target setting area 253 (step S7413). The display type data includes display data for causing the first notification display device 201 to display that the notification target of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is the base value, and the base value of the notification target. A display indicating which of the current area 256, first history area 257, second history area 258, and third history area 259 in the calculation result storage area 252 the value corresponds to is displayed on the second notification display device 202. and display data for causing the process to occur.

After that, the base value is read from the area corresponding to the value of the display target counter 255 among the current area 256, first history area 257, second history area 258, and third history area 259 in the calculation result storage area 252, and the base value is read out from the area corresponding to the value of the display target counter 255. Calculation result data corresponding to the number in the first decimal place and the number in the second decimal place in the base value are set in the display target setting area 253 (step S7414). The calculation result data includes display data for causing the third notification display device 203 to display a display corresponding to the number in the first decimal place in the base value to be notified, and the number in the second decimal place in the base value to be notified. and display data for causing the fourth notification display device 204 to perform a display corresponding to the above.

As described above, display data consisting of display type data and calculation result data is set in the display target setting area 253. By transmitting the display data to the display IC 266 in the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 114), a display corresponding to the display data is performed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204.

Furthermore, the process in step S7414 is executed every time the display process (FIG. 116) is executed, regardless of the switching timing of the base value to be notified. As already explained, each time the calculation result storage process (FIG. 110) is executed, the base value is calculated using the current values of each counter 251a to 251e in the normal counter area 251, and the calculated base value is It is stored in the current state area 256 of the calculation result storage area 252. In this case, as described above, the process of step S7414 for setting the calculation result data in the display target setting area 253 is performed every time the display process (FIG. 116) is executed regardless of the switching timing of the base value of the notification target. When the base value of the current area 256 is changed in a situation where the base value of the current area 256 is to be notified, the changed base value can be notified.

Thereafter, it is determined whether the base value of the current area 256 is to be notified based on the value of the display target counter (step S7415), and the calculation initial flag provided in the work area 213 for non-specific control is set to " 1" is set (step S7416). As already explained, the calculation initial flag is the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA in a situation that is neither the opening/closing execution mode based on the jackpot result nor the high-frequency support mode after the new base value calculation period starts. This flag is used by the main MPU 82 to specify whether or not (that is, the total number of game balls supplied to the game area PA) has reached the initial reference number. If a positive determination is made in both step S7415 and step S7416, the initial display flag in the work area 213 for non-specific control is set to "1" (step S7417), and a negative determination is made in either step S7415 or step S7416. If the determination is made, the initial display flag is cleared to "0" (step S7418).

The initial display flag is set on the first notification display device 201 to notify that in a situation where the base value of the current area 256 is the target of notification, the base value is the initial base value of the calculation after the start of the calculation period. This flag is used by the main MPU 82 to specify that the second notification display device 202 should be displayed blinking. When it is determined in the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 114) that the initial display flag is set to "1", the display data stored in the display target setting area 253 is not only sent to the display IC 266, but also When displaying corresponding to the display data on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, the first notification display device 201 and the second notification display device 202 are blinked, and the third notification display device is The display device 203 and the fourth notification display device 204 are turned on. Note that if it is determined in the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 114) that the initial display flag is not set to "1", the display corresponding to the display data stored in the display target setting area 253 is changed to the first to When the fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are used, the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are turned on.

This is a case where the value of the checking counter 211g in the work area 211 for specific control is "0" and the management start flag in the work area 213 for non-specific control is set to "1" (step S7401: NO, step S7403: YES), if the previous checking flag in the work area 213 for non-specific control is set to "1" (step S7406: YES), the management start flag is set to "1". This means that the initial check period (specifically, 5 seconds) has elapsed in a situation where the supply of operating power to the main MPU 82 has started. In this case, after clearing the previous checking flag in the work area 213 for non-specific control to "0" (step S7419), the setting process of the switching timing counter 254 is executed (step S7420).

In the setting process of the switching timing counter 254, the switching timing counter 254 in the work area 213 for non-specific control is set to a value corresponding to the display duration period (specifically, 5 seconds) as a value corresponding to the switching timing of the next notification target. Set. On the other hand, the value of the display target counter 255 in the work area 213 for non-specific control is maintained without being updated. The display target counter 255 includes the first to fourth notification base values stored in each of the current area 256, first history area 257, second history area 258, and third history area 259 in the calculation result storage area 252. This counter is used by the main MPU 82 to specify the base value to be notified in the display devices 201 to 204.

After executing steps S7419 and S7420, steps S7413 to S7418 are executed. As a result, the base corresponding to the value of the display target counter 255 among the base values stored in each of the current area 256, the first history area 257, the second history area 258, and the third history area 259 in the calculation result storage area 252. Display of values is started on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204.

When the supply of operating power to the main MPU 82 is started as described above, the setting confirmation process (FIG. 82) or the setting value update process (FIG. 83) is performed at the time of starting the supply of operating power (steps S4901 to S4928) ) is executed to start displaying the base value on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, and then the setting confirmation process (FIG. 82) or the setting value update process (FIG. 83) ends. When an initial check period (specifically 5 seconds) occurs, and when the initial check period ends, the current area 256, first history area 257, and second history area 258 in the calculation result storage area 252 are Among the base values stored in each of the third history area 259 and the third history area 259, the base value that was the subject of notification immediately before the start of the initial check period is displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. When restarted, the restarted base value is displayed for a display duration period (specifically, 5 seconds) regardless of the remaining display duration period at the timing when the initial check period was started. This makes it possible to appropriately display the base value after the initial check period ends.

Note that the switching timing counter 254 and the display target counter 255 are provided in the work area 213 for non-specific control, as already explained. In the setting value update process (FIG. 83), the RAM clear process (step S5113) is executed, but in the RAM clear process (step S5113), the work area 211 for specific control and the stack area 212 for specific control are Clear processing is executed, but clear processing is not executed for the work area 213 for non-specific control and the stack area 214 for non-specific control. Therefore, even if the RAM clearing process (step S5113) is executed in the setting value updating process (FIG. 83), the information on the switching timing counter 254 and the information on the display target counter 255 are maintained without being cleared.

FIG. 117 is a time chart showing how various displays are performed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 and the setting display device 205 when the supply of operating power to the main MPU 82 is started. FIG. 117(a) shows a period during which operating power is supplied to the main MPU 82, FIG. 117(b) shows a period during which the setting value update process (FIG. 83) is executed, and FIG. 117(c) shows a period during which operating power is supplied to the main MPU 82. FIG. 117(d) shows the period during which the base value stored in the current area 256 in the calculation result storage area 252 is displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, and FIG. 117(e) shows the period during which the base value stored in the first history area 257 is displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, and FIG. 117(f) shows the period during which the base value stored in the history area 258 is displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, and FIG. 117(g) shows the period during which the base value stored in the base value is displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, and FIG. 117(h) shows the period during which the setting value is displayed on the setting display device 205, and FIG. 117(i) shows the period when the setting value is displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. Indicates the period during which the information is displayed.

First, a case will be described in which the setting confirmation process (FIG. 82) and the setting value update process (FIG. 83) are not executed when the supply of operating power is started.

At timing t1, the supply of operating power to the main MPU 82 is started as shown in FIG. 117(a). In this case, execution of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 88) and the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 114) is prohibited. Since the execution of the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 114) is prohibited, the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are maintained in the off state and display of the base value is not started.

Thereafter, at timing t2, the setting process for the checking counter 211g (step S4926) is executed, and execution of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 88) and the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 114) is permitted. Therefore, at the timing t2, the check display starts on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 as shown in FIG. 117(i). By visually checking the check display, the game hall manager can identify whether or not a failure has occurred in the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204.

Thereafter, as an initial check period (specifically 5 seconds) has elapsed from the timing t2, the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are checked at the timing t3 as shown in FIG. 117(i). display ends. When the check display ends in a situation where execution of the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 114) is permitted, the base value stored in the current area 256 is displayed as shown in FIG. 117(c). The notification is started on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. Furthermore, at the timing t3, information corresponding to the display duration period (specifically, 5 seconds) is set in the switching timing counter 254, as shown in FIG. 117(g).

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 117(g) at timing t4, the display continuation period (specifically, 5 seconds) measured by the switching timing counter 254 elapses, and at the timing t4, as shown in FIG. 117(c). ) and as shown in FIG. 117(d), the notification target in the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 changes from the base value stored in the current area 256 to the base value stored in the first history area 257. changed to the value. After that, each time the display duration period (specifically 5 seconds) elapses, including the timing of t5, timing of t6, and timing of t7, as shown in FIG. 117(g), 117(f), the base values to be notified in the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are arranged in a predetermined order (current area 256 → first history area 257 → second history area 258 → It is sequentially switched according to the third history area 259). Furthermore, after the base value is displayed in the third history area 259, which is the last order, for a display duration period (specifically, 5 seconds), the base value in the current area 256, which is the first order, is displayed. The display is performed for a display duration period (specifically, 5 seconds).

Next, a case will be described in which the setting value update process (FIG. 83) is executed when the supply of operating power is started.

At timing t8, the supply of operating power to the main MPU 82 is started as shown in FIG. 117(a). In this case, execution of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 88) and the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 114) is prohibited. Since the execution of the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 114) is prohibited, the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are kept in the off state and display of the base value is not started.

Thereafter, at timing t9, as shown in FIG. 117(b), the main MPU 82 starts the setting value update process (FIG. 83). By starting the setting value update process (FIG. 83), the setting display device 205 starts displaying the setting values that are currently selected as shown in FIG. 117(h) at the timing t9. Ru.

Furthermore, by starting the setting value update process (FIG. 83), execution of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 88) and the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 114) is permitted. By allowing execution of the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 114), the base value stored in the current area 256 is displayed in the first to fourth notifications at timing t9, as shown in FIG. 117(c). It is started on the display devices 201 to 204. As a result, the setting value is displayed on the setting display device 205 as shown in FIG. 117(h), and the base value is displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 as shown in FIG. 117(c). The value will be displayed. Furthermore, at the timing t9, information corresponding to the display duration period (specifically, 5 seconds) is set in the switching timing counter 254, as shown in FIG. 117(g).

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 117(g) at timing t10, the display duration period (specifically, 5 seconds) measured by the switching timing counter 254 elapses, so that at the timing t10, FIG. 117(c) ) and as shown in FIG. 117(d), the notification target in the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 changes from the base value stored in the current area 256 to the base value stored in the first history area 257. changed to the value. Further, at the timing t10, information corresponding to the display duration period (specifically, 5 seconds) is set in the switching timing counter 254, as shown in FIG. 117(g).

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 117(g) at timing t11, the display duration period (specifically, 5 seconds) measured by the switching timing counter 254 elapses, so that at the timing t11, FIG. 117(d) ) and as shown in FIG. 117(e), the notification targets in the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are stored in the second history area 258 from the base value stored in the first history area 257. is changed to the base value. Further, at the timing t11, as shown in FIG. 117(g), information corresponding to the display duration period (specifically, 5 seconds) is set in the switching timing counter 254.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 117(g) at the timing t12, the display duration period (specifically, 5 seconds) measured by the switching timing counter 254 elapses, and at the timing t12, ) and as shown in FIG. 117(f), the notification targets in the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are stored in the third history area 259 from the base value stored in the second history area 258. is changed to the base value. Further, at the timing t12, as shown in FIG. 117(g), information corresponding to the display duration period (specifically, 5 seconds) is set in the switching timing counter 254.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 117(g), at timing t13, when the switching timing counter 254 is in the middle of measuring the display continuation period, the setting value update process (FIG. 83) ends as shown in FIG. 117(b). When the setting value update process (FIG. 83) is completed, the display of the setting values on the setting display device 205 is ended at the timing t13 as shown in FIG. 117(h). In this case, the setting display device 205 is turned off.

Further, when the set value update process (FIG. 83) is completed, the display of the base value is completed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 at the timing t13, as shown in FIG. 117(f). Furthermore, at the timing of t13, the setting process for the checking counter 211g (step S4926) is executed, and execution of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 88) and the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 114) is permitted. . Therefore, at the timing t13, the check display starts on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 as shown in FIG. 117(i). By visually checking the check display, the game hall manager can identify whether or not a failure has occurred in the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204.

Thereafter, when an initial check period (specifically 5 seconds) has elapsed from the timing t13, the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are checked at the timing t14 as shown in FIG. 117(i). display ends. When the check display ends in a situation where execution of the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 114) is permitted, the base value display starts. In this case, as shown in FIG. 117(f), the base value to be notified by the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is the third history area where the check display was performed immediately before the start of the check display. This is the base value of 259. Further, as shown in FIG. 117(g), information corresponding to the display duration period (specifically, 5 seconds) is newly set in the switching timing counter 254. As a result, the display of the base value of the type that was being displayed immediately before the check display starts will be restarted after the check display ends, and the display of the base value will be This is not performed over the display continuation period of , but is performed over the display continuation period by setting a new display continuation period.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 117(g) at timing t15, the display duration period (specifically, 5 seconds) measured by the switching timing counter 254 elapses, so that at timing t15, FIG. ) and as shown in FIG. 117(f), the notification target in the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 changes from the base value stored in the third history area 259 to the base value stored in the current area 256. changed to the value. Further, as shown in FIG. 117(g) at the timing t16, the display duration period (specifically, 5 seconds) measured by the switching timing counter 254 elapses, so that at the timing t16, FIG. 117(c) elapses. ) and as shown in FIG. 117(d), the notification targets in the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 change from the base value stored in the current area 256 to the base value stored in the first history area 257. changed to the value.

Apart from the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 for displaying base values, a setting display for displaying setting values in setting confirmation processing (FIG. 82) or setting value update processing (FIG. 83) In a situation where the device 205 is provided and the setting confirmation process (FIG. 82) or the setting value update process (FIG. 83) is being executed in the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 114), the settings are displayed on the setting display device 205. In addition to the process for displaying the values (steps S7202 to S7205), the process for displaying the base values on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 (step S7206) is executed. As a result, when the setting confirmation process (FIG. 82) or the setting value update process (FIG. 83) is being executed, the game hall manager can move the game machine main body 12 in front of the pachinko machine 10 with respect to the outer frame 11. By rotating the main controller 71 to expose the front side of the main controller 71, the setting values displayed on the setting display device 205 and the base values displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 can be changed. Both can be visually checked. Therefore, in the setting value update process (Fig. 83), the administrator of the game hall can set a new setting value while checking the past base value, or in the setting confirmation process (Fig. 82), the administrator of the game hall can check the past base value and the current It becomes possible to check the correspondence with the set value.

When the supply of operating power to the main MPU 82 is started, the setting confirmation process (FIG. 82) or the setting value update process (FIG. 83) is executed in the process at the start of the supply of operating power (steps S4901 to S4928). After the display of the base value starts on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, the setting confirmation process (FIG. 82) or the setting value update process (FIG. 83) is completed and the initialization is completed. When a check period (specifically 5 seconds) occurs, when the initial check period ends, the current area 256, first history area 257, second history area 258, and third Among the base values stored in each of the history areas 259, the display of the base values that were the subject of notification immediately before the start of the initial check period is restarted on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. At the same time, the resumed display of the base value is performed over the display duration period (specifically, 5 seconds) regardless of the remaining display duration period at the timing when the initial check period started. This makes it possible to appropriately display the base value after the initial check period ends.

<Processing to delete information>
Next, processing for erasing information will be explained. FIG. 118 is a flowchart showing the RAM clearing process executed in step S4919 of the main process (FIG. 81) or step S5113 of the setting value update process (FIG. 83). Note that the processing from step S7501 to step S7506 in the RAM clearing process is executed by the specific control processing unit 221 of the main MPU 82 using a specific control program and specific control data.

First, protection release processing is executed (step S7501). In the protection release process, the areas other than the work area 211 for specific control, the stack area 212 for specific control, the work area 213 for non-specific control, and the stack area 214 for non-specific control among the areas of the main side RAM 84 are A process is executed to release a state in which an unused area is excluded from information writing (including clearing to "0").

As already explained, the main MPU 82 is provided with a RAM management circuit 225 (see FIG. 79) for writing information into and reading information from the main RAM 84. When the address of an area from which information is to be read is specified by execution of processing by a program in the main MPU 82, the RAM management circuit 225 reads information from the area of the specified address and supplies it to the main MPU 82, When the address of an area to which information is to be written is specified by execution of processing by a program in the main MPU 82, the specified information is written in the area of the specified address. In this case, the data for specific control in the main side ROM 83 is an address range of an unused area in the main side RAM 84 (address Y(r+3) to address Y(r+5), address Y(s+3) to address Y(s+5)). , address Y(t+3) to address Y(t+5)) are stored in advance. When the protection setting is performed, the RAM management circuit 225 controls the address range of an unused area stored in the main ROM 83 when the address of the area to which information is to be written is specified. If the address is included in the address specified for writing information, the information will not be written to the unused area if the protection setting has been canceled. Even if it is an address range, information is written to the area within that address range. Writing of this information also includes clearing to "0".

As already explained, the protect register 223c is provided in the register area 223 of the main MPU 82 (see FIG. 79). The protect register 223c protects unused areas (address Y(r+3) to address Y(r+5), address Y(s+3) to address Y(s+5), address Y(t+3) to address Y(t+5)) in the main side RAM 84. This is a storage area for specifying in the RAM management circuit 225 whether or not writing of information is disabled. If the protect information is set in the protect register 223c, the above protection setting is performed, and the address included in the address range of the unused area stored in the main ROM 83 is written to. Even if specified, no information will be written to the area of the address as described above. On the other hand, if the protect information is not set in the protect register 223c, the above protection setting is not performed, and the address included in the address range of the unused area stored in the main ROM 83 is written. When specified as a target, information is written to the area of that address.

The protect register 223c is set as a 1-bit area, and the case where "1" is set in the protect register 223c corresponds to the case where protect information is set in the protect register 223c, and the protect register 223c is set as a 1-bit area. The case where the information in 223c is "0" corresponds to the case where no protect information is set in the protect register 223c. In the protection release process of step S7501, the protect register 223c is cleared to "0".

Thereafter, address Y(3) is set as the target address in a predetermined register of the main MPU 82 (step S7502). Address Y(3) is the address of the area included in the work area 211 for specific control in the main side RAM 84, as shown in FIG. 1) and the second address Y(2) in the following order. The area corresponding to the first address Y(1) is a setting reference area in which information on setting values to be used is stored. Furthermore, the area corresponding to the second address Y(2) is a setting update display flag. In the RAM clearing process (FIG. 118), the clearing process is executed for the areas corresponding to the addresses after the third address Y (3), but the area for setting reference corresponding to the first address Y (1) and the second The clearing process is not executed for the setting update display flag corresponding to address Y(2). This makes it possible to prevent the setting value information to be used from being erased by the RAM clearing process (Figure 118), and also to ensure that the setting value update process (Figure 83) is in the middle of execution. It becomes possible to prevent the information indicating the information from being deleted. Note that the ceiling counter 131 may be included as the area excluded from the RAM clearing process (FIG. 118), as in the first embodiment.

Thereafter, the area corresponding to the target address is cleared to "0" and initial settings are executed (step S7503). When the address to be cleared is address Y(3), the area corresponding to address Y(3) is cleared to "0" and initialization is executed. Furthermore, if the address to be cleared is one of addresses Y(r+3) to address Y(r+5), the corresponding area becomes an unused area, but the protect register 223c is cleared to "0" in step S7501. Therefore, the unused area is also cleared to "0" and initial settings are executed.

Thereafter, it is determined whether the target address is address Y(s+1) (step S7504). Address Y(s+1) is an address of an area included in the stack area 212 for specific control as shown in FIG. 77, and is one address for the final address Y(s+2) in the stack area 212 for specific control. is the address of the previous order. Since the final address Y(s+2) in the stack area 212 for specific control is set to the return address information on the program after completing the RAM clearing process (FIG. 118), the RAM clearing process (FIG. 118) Excluded from the scope.

If the target address is not address Y(s+1) (step S7504: NO), the target address is updated to the next address in the order (step S7505). Specifically, 1 is added to the target address. Then, in step S7503, the area corresponding to the address after the 1 addition is cleared to "0" and initialized, and the process of step S7504 is executed.

If the process of step S7505 is executed in a situation where the target address is the final address Y(r+2) in the specific control work area 211, the target address becomes the address Y(r+3) corresponding to an unused area, The unused area is cleared to "0" and initialized. In this case, since no initial setting is performed, it is simply cleared to "0". Furthermore, if the process of step S7505 is executed in a situation where the target address is address Y(r+5) corresponding to an unused area, the target address is the start address Y(r+6) in the stack area 212 for specific control. Then, the area of the start address Y(r+6) in the stack area 212 for specific control is cleared to "0" and initialized. In this case, since no initial setting is performed, it is simply cleared to "0".

By repeating the processing from step S7503 to step S7505, the area from address Y(3) to address Y(r+2) in the work area 211 for specific control, the work area 211 for specific control, and the stack area for specific control 212 and the unused area in the address range (address Y(r+3) to address Y(r+5)) and the area from address Y(r+6) to address Y(s+1) in the stack area 212 for specific control. Clearing to "0" and initializing are performed. Then, after clearing the area of address Y(s+1) to "0" and performing initial setting, an affirmative determination is made in step S7504.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S7504, a protect setting process is executed (step S7506), similar to step S4903 of the main process (FIG. 81). In the protect setting process, as already explained, "1" is set in the protect register 223c. By setting "1" in the protect register 223c and setting the protect information, the unused areas in the main RAM 84 (address Y(r+3) to address Y(r+5), address Y(s+3) It becomes impossible to write information to address Y(s+5), address Y(t+3) to address Y(t+5)). Thereafter, this RAM clearing process ends.

By executing the RAM clearing process (FIG. 118) as described above, when the supply of operating power is started, part of the work area 211 for specific control and the stack area 212 for specific control is Clear processing can be executed for the area. In this case, in the main side RAM 84, an unused area (address Y(r+3) to address Y(r+5)) is set between the work area 211 for specific control and the stack area 212 for specific control. When the RAM clearing process (FIG. 118) is executed, the protection canceling process (step S7501) is executed and the protect register 223c is cleared to "0", thereby clearing the unused area (address Y(r+3) The state in which information cannot be written to address Y(r+5), address Y(s+3) to address Y(s+5), address Y(t+3) to address Y(t+5)) is released. As a result, in the RAM clearing process (FIG. 118), when clearing the work area 211 for specific control and the stack area 212 for specific control, the work area 211 for specific control and the stack area 212 for specific control are A series of areas from the work area 211 for specific control to the stack area 212 for specific control, including unused areas (address Y(r+3) to address Y(r+5)) set between the stack area 212 and the stack area 212. The clearing process can be executed by specifying the address range (addresses Y(3) to Y(s+1)). Therefore, the RAM clearing process (FIG. 118) is executed by distinguishing between the address range to be cleared in the work area 211 for specific control and the address range to be cleared in the stack area 212 for specific control. It is possible to reduce the processing load compared to .

Even if the protect register 223c is cleared to "0" by executing the protect release process (step S7501) when the RAM clear process (FIG. 118) is started, the clear process is not executed for the area in the address range to be cleared. When the process is completed, the protect setting process (step S7506) is executed and "1" is set in the protect register 223c. As a result, when the RAM clearing process (FIG. 118) is completed, unused areas in the main RAM 84 (address Y(r+3) to address Y(r+5), address Y(s+3) to address Y(s+5), It becomes possible to again disable writing of information to address Y(t+3) to address Y(t+5)).

In the protection release process (step S7501), the protect register 223c in the register area 223 of the main MPU 82 is cleared to "0", and in the protect setting process (step S7506), the protect register 223c is set to "1". . As a result, while reducing the processing load in the RAM clearing process (FIG. 118), the unused areas (address Y(r+3) to address Y(r+5), address Y(s+3) to address Y(s+5) in the main side RAM 84 are , processing to enable writing of information to address Y(t+3) to address Y(t+5)), and processing to enable writing of information to the corresponding unused areas (address Y(r+3) to address Y(r+5), address Y(s+3) to It becomes possible to perform processing to disable writing of information to address Y(s+5), address Y(t+3) to address Y(t+5)).

Next, the information abnormality monitoring process executed in step S6808 of the second management process (FIG. 107) included in the non-specific control process will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 119. Note that the processing from step S7601 to step S7606 in the information abnormality monitoring process is executed by the non-specific control processing unit 222 of the main MPU 82 using a non-specific control program and non-specific control data.

First, monitoring processing of the work area 213 for non-specific control is executed (step S7601). In the monitoring process, it is determined whether the value of the pointer indicating the processing position of the process being executed in the non-specific control program exceeds the normal numerical range, and If this happens, it is determined that there is an abnormality. It is also determined whether the information stored in the normal counter area 251 in the non-specific control work area 213 is clearly abnormal information. For example, if the value of the out counter 251e in the normal counter area 251 is "0" but the value of the general winning counter 251a is 1000 or more, it is determined that there is an abnormality.

If an abnormality is identified in the monitoring process in step S7601 (step S7602: YES), address Y(s+k) is set as a target address in a predetermined register of the main MPU 82 (step S7603). In the work area 213 for non-specific control, the area from the start address Y(s+6) to address Y(s+k-1) is used as the WA of the main MPU 82 when the specific control process to the non-specific control process is executed. They are WA buffer, BC buffer, DE buffer, HL buffer, IX buffer, and IY buffer to which information of the register, BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register, and IY register is saved. In the information abnormality monitoring process (FIG. 119), the clearing process is executed for the areas corresponding to addresses after address Y(s+k) in the work area 213 for non-specific control, but the work area 213 for non-specific control The clearing process is not executed for the area in the address range from the start address Y (s+6) to the address Y (s+k-1). As a result, even if the occurrence of an information abnormality is identified in the information abnormality monitoring process (FIG. 119), when the non-specific control process is executed from the specific control process, the main MPU 82's WA register, BC register, DE It becomes possible to prevent the information saved from the register, HL register, IX register, and IY register to the work area 213 for non-specific control from being erased.

Thereafter, the area corresponding to the target address is cleared to "0" and initial settings are executed (step S7604). When the address to be cleared is address Y(s+k), the area corresponding to the address Y(s+k) is cleared to "0" and initialization is executed.

Thereafter, it is determined whether the target address is address Y(t+2) (step S7605). Address Y(t+2) is the final address in the work area 213 for non-specific control, as shown in FIG.

If the target address is not the final address (t+2) in the non-specific control work area 213 (step S7605: NO), the target address is updated to the next address in the order (step S7606). Specifically, 1 is added to the target address. Then, in step S7604, the area corresponding to the address after the 1 addition is cleared to "0" and initialized, and the process of step S7605 is executed. As a result, the area included in the predetermined address range (address Y(s+k) to address Y(t+2)) in the work area 213 for non-specific control is cleared to "0" and initialized. The area of the address range (address Y(s+k) to address Y(t+2)) includes the first to eighth prize monitoring timer counters 213a to 213h, the magnetic detection counter 213i, the magnetic monitoring delay timer counter 213j, and the second security counter. 213k, 1st to 3rd general winning abnormality flags 213l to 213n, special electric winning abnormality flag 213o, 1st operation winning abnormality flag 213p, 2nd operation winning abnormality flag 213q, out abnormality flag 213r, gate winning abnormality flag 213s, magnetic abnormality It includes a flag 213t, a normal counter area 251, a calculation result storage area 252, a display target setting area 253, a switching timing counter 254, and a display target counter 255. If the clearing process is executed for the final address (t+2) in the non-specific control work area 213 and an affirmative determination is made in step S7605, this information abnormality monitoring process ends.

As mentioned above, in the information abnormality monitoring process (FIG. 119), if it is identified that an information abnormality has occurred in the non-specific control work area 213, the main side Clearing processing is executed for areas other than the area where the register information in the MPU 82 has been saved. This makes it possible to deal with information abnormalities.

In the information abnormality monitoring process (FIG. 119), the clearing process is executed for the work area 213 for non-specific control, but the clearing process is not executed for the stack area 214 for non-specific control. Although there is an unused area (address Y(t+3) to address Y(t+5)) between the work area 213 for non-specific control and the stack area 214 for non-specific control, There is no unused area in the work area 213. Therefore, even if the information abnormality monitoring process (FIG. 119) is configured to specify a series of address ranges and execute the clear process, there is no need to execute the protect release process and the protect setting process.

According to this embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are achieved.

A work area 211 for specific control and a stack area 212 for specific control are provided as storage areas of the main RAM 84 to which information is written when specific control processing is executed by the main MPU 82. This makes it possible to use the storage area to which information is written, depending on the role, between the work area 211 for specific control and the stack area 212 for specific control. Furthermore, an unused area (address Y(r+3) to address Y(r+5)) is provided between the work area 211 for specific control and the stack area 212 for specific control in the addresses of the main side RAM 84, Since information is not written to the unused area when specific control processing is executed, the work area 211 for specific control and the stack area 212 for specific control are clearly defined in the address of the main RAM 84. It becomes possible to distinguish between

In this case, when the RAM clearing process (FIG. 118) is executed, the protection canceling process (step S7501) is executed and the protect register 223c is cleared to "0", thereby leaving an unused area (address Y ( r+3) to Y(r+5), address Y(s+3) to Y(s+5), and address Y(t+3) to Y(t+5)), the state in which information cannot be written is released. As a result, in the RAM clearing process (FIG. 118), an unused area (address Y(r+3) to address Y( Execute the clearing process by specifying the address range (addresses Y(3) to Y(s+1)), which is a series of ranges from the specific control work area 211 to the specific control stack area 212, including do it. Therefore, the RAM clearing process (FIG. 118) is executed by distinguishing between the address range to be cleared in the work area 211 for specific control and the address range to be cleared in the stack area 212 for specific control. It is possible to reduce the processing load compared to .

Even if the protect register 223c is cleared to "0" by executing the protect release process (step S7501) when the RAM clear process (FIG. 118) is started, the clear process is not executed for the area in the address range to be cleared. When the process is completed, the protect setting process (step S7506) is executed and "1" is set in the protect register 223c. As a result, when the RAM clearing process (FIG. 118) is completed, unused areas in the main RAM 84 (address Y(r+3) to address Y(r+5), address Y(s+3) to address Y(s+5), It becomes possible to again disable writing of information to address Y(t+3) to address Y(t+5)).

In the protection release process (step S7501), the protect register 223c in the register area 223 of the main MPU 82 is cleared to "0", and in the protect setting process (step S7506), the protect register 223c is set to "1". . As a result, while reducing the processing load in the RAM clearing process (FIG. 118), the unused areas (address Y(r+3) to address Y(r+5), address Y(s+3) to address Y(s+5) in the main side RAM 84 are , processing to enable writing of information to address Y(t+3) to address Y(t+5)), and processing to enable writing of information to the corresponding unused areas (address Y(r+3) to address Y(r+5), address Y(s+3) to It becomes possible to perform processing to disable writing of information to address Y(s+5), address Y(t+3) to address Y(t+5)).

In the RAM clearing process (FIG. 118), the clearing process is executed for the work area 211 for specific control and the stack area 212 for specific control, including unused areas (address Y(r+3) to address Y(r+5)). However, the clearing process is not executed for the non-specific control work area 213 and the non-specific control stack area 214 that are used in the non-specific control process. As a result, in a configuration in which clear processing is executed including unused areas (address Y (r + 3) to address Y (r + 5)) in order to simplify the processing configuration, even the target of clear processing can be used for specific control. A work area 211 for specific control and a stack area 212 for specific control used in the processing of , and a work area 213 for non-specific control and a stack for non-specific control used in the processing for non-specific control. It becomes possible to clearly distinguish between the area 214 and the area 214.

In the information abnormality monitoring process (FIG. 119), when it is specified that an information abnormality has occurred in the work area 213 for non-specific control, the register of the main MPU 82 is changed in the work area 213 for non-specific control. Clearing processing is executed for areas other than the area where information has been saved. This makes it possible to deal with information abnormalities. In this case, in the information abnormality monitoring process (FIG. 119), the clearing process is executed for the work area 213 for non-specific control, but the clearing process is not executed for the stack area 214 for non-specific control. Although there is an unused area (address Y(t+3) to address Y(t+5)) between the work area 213 for non-specific control and the stack area 214 for non-specific control, There is no unused area in the work area 213. In this configuration, even if the information abnormality monitoring process (FIG. 119) specifies a series of address ranges and executes the clearing process, the protection cancellation process and the protection setting process are not executed. This eliminates the need to release protection for unused areas (address Y(r+3) to address Y(r+5), address Y(s+3) to address Y(s+5), address Y(t+3) to address Y(t+5)). This makes it possible to prevent this from happening.

Apart from the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 for displaying base values, a setting display for displaying setting values in setting confirmation processing (FIG. 82) or setting value update processing (FIG. 83) In a situation where the device 205 is provided and the setting confirmation process (FIG. 82) or the setting value update process (FIG. 83) is being executed in the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 114), the settings are displayed on the setting display device 205. In addition to the process for displaying the values (steps S7202 to S7205), the process for displaying the base values on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 (step S7206) is executed. As a result, when the setting confirmation process (FIG. 82) or the setting value update process (FIG. 83) is being executed, the game hall manager can move the game machine main body 12 in front of the pachinko machine 10 with respect to the outer frame 11. By rotating the main controller 71 to expose the front side of the main controller 71, the setting values displayed on the setting display device 205 and the base values displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 can be changed. Both can be visually checked. Therefore, in the setting value update process (Fig. 83), the administrator of the game hall can set a new setting value while checking the past base value, or in the setting confirmation process (Fig. 82), the administrator of the game hall can check the past base value and the current It becomes possible to check the correspondence with the set value.

In a configuration in which the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 on which base values are displayed are mounted on the element mounting surface of the main control board 81, the setting display device 205 on which setting values are displayed is also mounted on the element mounting surface. It is provided. This makes it easier to confirm both the base values displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 and the setting values displayed on the setting display device 205.

When the setting value update process (FIG. 83) is executed when the supply of operating power to the main MPU 82 is started, the first to fourth Display of the base value on the notification display devices 201 to 204 is started. This makes it possible to prevent the display of the base value from starting before the game hall manager starts work for changing the set value.

When the supply of operating power to the main MPU 82 is started, each of the display segments 201a to 201a of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. A check display is executed that allows checking whether or not an abnormality has occurred in 204a. This makes it possible to confirm whether or not the display on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is performed normally before the game starts. In this case, when the setting value update process (FIG. 83) is executed, the check display on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 will be Begins. As a result, in a situation where the setting value update process (FIG. 83) is being executed, displaying the base value on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is prioritized, while the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 It becomes possible to display a check display on the display devices 201 to 204.

When the supply of operating power to the main MPU 82 is started, the processing at the time of starting the supply of operating power ends without executing the setting confirmation process (FIG. 82) and the setting value update process (FIG. 83). When the process of advancing the game is to be started, a check display is first started on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, and after the check display is finished, a base value display is started. be done. As a result, in this situation, it is possible to give priority to the check display over the start of displaying the base value.

When the supply of operating power to the main MPU 82 is started, the setting confirmation process (FIG. 82) or the setting value update process (FIG. 83) is executed in the process at the start of the supply of operating power (steps S4901 to S4928). After the display of the base value starts on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, the setting confirmation process (FIG. 82) or the setting value update process (FIG. 83) is completed and the initialization is completed. When a check period (specifically 5 seconds) occurs, when the initial check period ends, the current area 256, first history area 257, second history area 258, and third Among the base values stored in each of the history areas 259, the display of the base values that were the subject of notification immediately before the start of the initial check period is restarted on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. At the same time, the restarted display of the base value is performed over the display duration period (specifically, 5 seconds) regardless of the remaining display duration period at the timing when the initial check period was started. This makes it possible to appropriately display the base value after the initial check period ends.

When specific control processing is executed, the work area 211 for specific control and the stack area 212 for specific control are the targets for writing information, but the work area 213 for non-specific control and the stack area for non-specific control 214 is not the target for writing information, and when non-specific control processing is executed, the work area 213 for non-specific control and the stack area 214 for non-specific control are used to specify the target for writing information. The work area 211 for control and the stack area 212 for specific control are never the targets for writing information. This makes it possible to clearly distinguish the type of storage area to which information is to be written when specific control processing is executed and when non-specific control processing is executed. On the other hand, even when specific control processing is executed, not only the work area 211 for specific control and the stack area 212 for specific control but also the work area 213 for non-specific control and the stack for non-specific control Information can also be read from the area 214, and even when non-specific control processing is executed, information can be read not only from the work area 213 for non-specific control and the stack area 214 for non-specific control, but also for specific control. Information can also be read from the work area 211 for use and the stack area 212 for specific control. This makes it possible to refer to information corresponding to the processing result in one of the specific control process and the non-specific control process in the other process.

In this case, if it is determined in the non-specific control process that the detection of game balls by each of the detection sensors 231a to 238a was caused by an abnormality or fraud, the corresponding process is executed in the specific control process. be done. As a result, specific control can be performed by executing the process for specifying whether the detection of game balls by each of the detection sensors 231a to 238a is caused by an abnormality or fraud as non-specific control process instead of specific control process. Even in a configuration in which there is a margin for processing that can be executed as processing, processing corresponding to the detection of a game ball by each detection sensor 231a to 238a due to an abnormality or fraud may be set as processing of specific control. It becomes possible to execute.

In a configuration in which a process for specifying whether or not a game ball is detected by each detection sensor 231a to 238a is executed in the specific control process, the game in each detection sensor 231a to 238a is executed in the nonspecific control process. If it is specified that the detection of the ball was caused by an abnormality or fraud, a process for invalidating the detection of the game ball is executed in the specific control process. As a result, specific control can be performed by executing the process for specifying whether the detection of game balls in each of the detection sensors 231a to 238a is caused by an abnormality or fraud as a non-specific control process instead of a specific control process. Processing for specifying whether or not a game ball is detected by each of the detection sensors 231a to 238a and a process for disabling the detection of the game ball are carried out while allowing a margin for executable processing as processing. It becomes possible to perform the specific control processing in a concentrated manner.

The game is played with each detection sensor 231a to 238a that detects the entry of a game ball into each of the general winning opening 31, special electric winning device 32, first operating opening 33, second operating opening 34, out opening 24a, and through gate 35. Entering ball detection processing (FIG. 91) for specifying whether or not a ball has been detected, and processing for advancing the game in response to the detection of a game ball by each of the detection sensors 231a to 238a (holding information acquisition processing (Fig. 92), general electric power control processing (Fig. 96), special electric power release processing (Fig. 97(c)), payout output processing (step S5518), etc.) are included in the specific control processing. , fraud detection execution processing (FIG. 95) for monitoring whether the detection of game balls by each of the detection sensors 231a to 238a is due to abnormality or fraud is included in the non-specific control processing. This eliminates the need to execute the fraud detection execution process (FIG. 95) for monitoring whether the detection of game balls by each of the detection sensors 231a to 238a is due to an abnormality or fraud in the specific control process. , it becomes possible to allocate the data capacity allocated to the specific control program and specific control data in the main side ROM 83 to processes other than the fraud detection execution process (FIG. 95).

In the processing order in the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 88), ball entry detection processing is included in the specific control processing and is processing for specifying whether or not a game ball is detected by each detection sensor 231a to 238a. After (Fig. 91), fraud detection execution processing (Fig. 95) is executed, and after the fraud detection execution process (FIG. 95), it is included in the specific control process and the game progresses in response to the detection of the game ball by each of the detection sensors 231a to 238a. Processes for obtaining reservation information (FIG. 92), general electricity control process (FIG. 96), special electricity release process (FIG. 97(c)), payout output process (step S5518), etc.) are executed. As a result, the fraud detection execution process (FIG. 95) for monitoring whether the detection of game balls by each of the detection sensors 231a to 238a is due to an abnormality or fraud is executed as a non-specific control process. Even with this configuration, it is possible to prevent processing for advancing the game from being executed in response to detection of game balls by each of the detection sensors 231a to 238a due to abnormality or fraud.

When it is specified that a game ball has been detected by the detection sensors 231a to 238a in the ball entry detection process (FIG. 91) included in the process of specific control, a confirmation flag group 211d in the work area 211 for specific control is set. Each of the provided confirmation flags is set to "1", and it is specified in the fraud detection execution process (Figure 95) included in the non-specific control process that the detection of the game ball is caused by an abnormality or fraud. If the abnormality flags 213l to 213s provided in the work area 213 for non-specific control are set to "1", if the abnormality flags 213l to 213s are set to "1", the specific control The confirmation flags corresponding to the abnormality flags 213l to 213s set to "1" in the fraud handling process (FIG. 99) included in the control process are cleared to "0". As a result, while information stored in the work area 211 for specific control can be read out in both specific control processing and non-specific control processing, it is possible to read information stored in the work area 211 for specific control. Writing is possible in specific control processing, but not in non-specific control processing, and reading of information stored in the work area 213 for non-specific control is possible in specific control processing and non-specific control processing. While it is possible in either case, writing information to the work area 213 for non-specific control is possible in non-specific control processing but not in specific control processing, and the above It is possible to achieve such excellent effects.

After the fraud detection execution process (FIG. 95) included in the non-specific control process is executed, until the fraud detection execution process (FIG. 95) is executed again, the fraud response process (FIG. 95) included in the specific control process is executed. FIG. 99) is executed. Then, in the fraud handling process (FIG. 99), the confirmation flag is cleared to "0" and various prize ball counters are cleared, depending on the abnormality flags 213l to 213s whose information was set in the fraud detection execution process (FIG. 95). Executes subtraction processing. In this case, in the fraud detection execution process (FIG. 95), the abnormality flags 213l to 213s are first cleared to "0", and then a process for setting information in the abnormality flags 213l to 213s is executed. As a result, in a configuration in which writing information to the work area 213 for non-specific control is possible in non-specific control processing but not in specific control processing, an error can be detected at an appropriate timing in non-specific control processing. It becomes possible to clear the flags 213l to 213s to "0".

In a configuration in which the identification of whether or not the detection of game balls by each of the detection sensors 231a to 238a is caused by an abnormality or fraud is performed through non-specific control processing, the special electric monitoring delay referred to in the identification. The timer counter 211b and the general power monitoring delay timer counter 211c are provided in the work area 211 for specific control. Thereby, it becomes possible to perform a process for measuring a period by using the special power monitoring delay timer counter 211b and the normal power monitoring delay timer counter 211c in a specific control process.

In addition, the measurement of the effective period of game ball detection using the special electric power monitoring delay timer counter 211b is started when the special electric power winning device 32 is changed from the open state to the closed state, and the general electric power monitoring delay timer counter 211b is started. Measurement of the effective period of game ball detection using the timer counter 211c is started upon execution of the process of changing the second operating port 34 from the open state to the closed state. Since the process of closing the special electric prize winning device 32 and the second operating port 34 is executed as a specific control process, the start trigger is determined as a non-specific control process without taking into account the process result of the specific control. It is impossible to specify. In this case, if the special power monitoring delay timer counter 211b and the general power monitoring delay timer counter 211c are provided in the work area 213 for non-specific control, the special power monitoring delay timer counter 211b and the general power monitoring delay timer counter 211c There is a risk that the processing configuration for specifying the trigger for starting measurement of the effective period in the counter 211c may become complicated. In contrast, by providing the special power monitoring delay timer counter 211b and the general power monitoring delay timer counter 211c in the work area 211 for specific control instead of the work area 213 for non-specific control, the work area for specific control can be Although the required storage capacity in 211 increases accordingly, it is possible to prevent the processing configuration from becoming complicated.

In a configuration in which identification of whether or not the detection of game balls by each of the detection sensors 231a to 238a is caused by an abnormality or fraud is performed by non-specific control processing, the general prize opening 31, the special electric prize winning device 32, The first to eighth prize monitoring timers are referenced when monitoring whether or not the entry of game balls into the first operating port 33, second operating port 34, through gate 35, and out port 24a is normal. Counters 213a to 213h are provided in a work area 213 for non-specific control. Since the measurement of the invalid period of game ball detection using the first to eighth prize monitoring timer counters 213a to 213h is started in response to the detection results of each detection sensor 231a to 238a, the start timing is specified in the control process. It is possible to specify by non-specific control processing without considering the results. Therefore, by providing the first to eighth winning monitoring timer counters 213a to 213h in the work area 213 for non-specific control, the invalid period of game ball detection using the first to eighth winning monitoring timer counters 213a to 213h It becomes possible to perform measurements using non-specific control processing. Under such circumstances, by providing the first to eighth prize monitoring timer counters 213a to 213h in the work area 213 for non-specific control, it is possible to reduce the storage capacity required in the work area 211 for specific control. It becomes possible.

Regardless of whether the specific control processing unit 221 is executing specific control processing or the non-specific control processing unit 222 is executing non-specific control processing, the command to be sent is , is stored in the command transmission buffer 223b of the register area 223. In other words, even if the area to which information is written in the main RAM 84 is different between the situation where specific control processing is being executed and the situation where non-specific control processing is being executed, The area for writing the command is used both in a situation where specific control processing is being executed and in a situation where non-specific control processing is being executed. Therefore, there is no need to consolidate the processing for storing commands into either specific control processing or non-specific control processing, so it is possible to prevent the processing configuration for storing commands from becoming complicated. It becomes possible.

The command transmission buffer 223b is provided not in the main RAM 84 but in the register area 223 of the main MPU 82. As a result, the storage area of the main side RAM 84 into which information can be written in specific control processing and the storage area of the main side RAM 84 into which information can be written in non-specific control processing are combined into the work area 211 for specific control. In a configuration in which the stack area 212 for specific control, the work area 213 for non-specific control, and the stack area 214 for non-specific control are clearly distinguished, commands are written while avoiding the use of these areas 211 to 214. It becomes possible to share the storage area between specific control processing and non-specific control processing.

The commands stored in the command transmission buffer 223b are transmitted to the sound-light side MPU 93 by the command transmission circuit 224, which operates independently of the specific control processing and the non-specific control processing. As a result, there is no need to adjust the command transmission timing in relation to the execution content of the process using the program in the main MPU 82, so it is possible to simplify the processing configuration of the process using the program in the main MPU 82. becomes.

Processing for specifying whether or not an event to which a security signal is output to the outside has occurred is executed not only in specific control processing but also in non-specific control processing. As a result, processing for monitoring whether or not an event subject to external output of a security signal has occurred is assigned to non-specific control processing, and programs and data related to specific control processing are allocated to non-specific control processing. Capacity can be allocated to other processing.

A first security counter 211a is provided in the work area 211 for specific control, and a second security counter 213k is provided in the work area 213 for non-specific control, so that an event that is subject to external output of a security signal in specific control processing is detected. If it is determined that an event has occurred, the value of the first security counter 211a is incremented by 1, and the non-specific control process identifies that an event that is subject to external output of a security signal has occurred. In this case, the value of the second security counter 213k is incremented by one. As a result, writing of information to the work area 211 for specific control is possible in specific control processing, but is not possible in non-specific control processing, and writing of information to the work area 213 for non-specific control is non-specific. An event that is subject to external output of a security signal must occur in both specific control processing and non-specific control processing, although it is possible in specific control processing and disabled in specific control processing. It becomes possible to appropriately identify the

In the security process (FIG. 101) included in the specific control process, the increase in the value of the second security counter 213k in the non-specific control work area 213 is added to the first security counter 211a, and the value of the second security counter 213k is added to the first security counter 211a. If the value is 1 or more, a security signal is output to the outside in the security process (FIG. 101). Then, external output of the pulsed security signal over a predetermined output duration period or longer with a predetermined stop duration period in between is repeatedly executed until the value of the first security counter 211a becomes "0". This allows processing for externally outputting security signals in a configuration in which the occurrence of an event that is subject to external output of security signals is performed in specific control processing and non-specific control processing. It becomes possible to consolidate the processing into specific control processing.

When the value of the first security counter 211a becomes 1 or more, "1" is set to the security flag 211f, and when "1" is set to the security flag 211f, the abnormality display device 206 enters the light emitting state. . Further, the state in which the security flag 211f is set to "1" is maintained when the supply of operating power to the main MPU 82 is continued, and the state in which the security flag 211f is set to "1" is maintained in the RAM clear processing (step S4919) in the main processing (FIG. 81). ) or the RAM clearing process (step S5113) in the setting value update process (FIG. 83) is executed, and if the security flag 211f is set to "1", the abnormality display device 206 is maintained in the light emitting state. Ru. As a result, at least when the game hall is in operation, regardless of the timing of confirmation of the abnormality display device 206 by the game hall manager, the game hall can detect whether or not an event that is subject to external output of a security signal has occurred. It becomes possible to have the administrator recognize it.

<Fourteenth embodiment>
This embodiment is different from the thirteenth embodiment in the processing configuration of the first timer interrupt processing executed by the main MPU 82. Hereinafter, the configuration different from the thirteenth embodiment described above will be explained. Note that the description of the same configuration as the thirteenth embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 120 is a flowchart showing the first timer interrupt process in this embodiment executed by the main MPU 82. Note that among the processes from step S7701 to step S7719 in the first timer interrupt process, processes other than the management process called and executed in step S7719 are performed using a specific control program and specific control data. The management process is executed by the specific control processing unit 221 of the main MPU 82, and the management process is executed by the non-specific control processing unit 222 of the main MPU 82 using a non-specific control program and non-specific control data. .

In steps S7701 to S7707, the same processes as steps S5501 to S5507 of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 88) in the thirteenth embodiment are executed. In step S7708, ball entry detection processing is executed.

FIG. 121 is a flowchart showing the ball entry detection process in step S7708. Note that the processes from step S7801 to step S7818 in the ball entry detection process are executed by the specific control processing unit 221 of the main MPU 82 using a specific control program and specific control data.

First, a prize ball counter setting process is executed (step S7801). The prize ball counter setting process is to set each prize ball counter according to the processing contents of the ball entering detection process (FIG. 121) and the processing contents of the fraud detection execution process (step S7911) in the previous processing time. This is the process. Details of the process for setting the prize ball counter will be explained later.

Thereafter, various flag clearing processes are executed (step S7802). In the various flag clearing processing, similar to the various flag clearing processing (step S5601) in the thirteenth embodiment, the first winning confirmation flag, the second winning confirmation flag, and the second winning confirmation flag in the confirmation flag group 211d of the work area 211 for specific control are executed. 3 Clear the winning confirmation flag, special electric winning confirmation flag, first action winning confirmation flag, second action winning confirmation flag, out confirmation flag, and gate winning confirmation flag to "0".

When it is confirmed that the situation has changed from the situation where the 0th bit D0 stores the information of "0" to the situation where the information of "1" is stored, the first winning opening detection sensor 231a detects one It is determined that a game ball has been detected (step S7803: YES). In this case, the first winning confirmation flag in the work area 211 for specific control is set to "1" (step S7804). The first winning confirmation flag is a flag for the main side MPU 82 to specify that one game ball has been detected by the first winning opening detection sensor 231a, as in the thirteenth embodiment.

When it is confirmed that the first bit D1 has changed from the state in which "0" information is stored to the state in which "1" information is stored, the second winning opening detection sensor 232a detects one It is determined that a game ball has been detected (step S7805: YES). In this case, the second winning confirmation flag in the work area 211 for specific control is set to "1" (step S7806). The second winning confirmation flag is a flag for the main side MPU 82 to specify that one game ball has been detected by the second winning opening detection sensor 232a, as in the thirteenth embodiment.

When it is confirmed that the second bit D2 has changed from the state where the information of "0" is stored to the state where the information of "1" is stored, the third winning opening detection sensor 233a detects one It is determined that a game ball has been detected (step S7807: YES). In this case, the third winning confirmation flag in the work area 211 for specific control is set to "1" (step S7808). The third winning confirmation flag is a flag for the main side MPU 82 to specify that one game ball has been detected by the third winning opening detection sensor 233a, as in the thirteenth embodiment.

When it is confirmed that the third bit D3 has changed from the situation where the information “0” is stored to the situation where the information “1” is stored, one game ball is detected by the special electric detection sensor 234a. It is determined that it has been detected (step S7809: YES). In this case, the special electric winning confirmation flag in the work area 211 for specific control is set to "1" (step S7810). The special electric winning confirmation flag is a flag for the main side MPU 82 to specify that one game ball has been detected by the special electric detection sensor 234a, as in the thirteenth embodiment.

When it is confirmed that the fourth bit D4 has changed from the state in which "0" information is stored to the state in which "1" information is stored, the first operating port detection sensor 235a detects one It is determined that a game ball has been detected (step S7811: YES). In this case, the first operation winning confirmation flag in the work area 211 for specific control is set to "1" (step S7812). The first operation winning confirmation flag is a flag for the main MPU 82 to specify that one game ball has been detected by the first operation opening detection sensor 235a, as in the thirteenth embodiment.

When it is confirmed that the fifth bit D5 has changed from the state in which "0" information is stored to the state in which "1" information is stored, the second operating port detection sensor 236a detects one It is determined that a game ball has been detected (step S7813: YES). In this case, the second operation winning confirmation flag in the work area 211 for specific control is set to "1" (step S7814). The second operation winning confirmation flag is a flag for the main side MPU 82 to specify that one game ball has been detected by the second operation opening detection sensor 236a, as in the thirteenth embodiment.

When it is confirmed that the sixth bit D6 has changed from the state in which "0" information is stored to the state in which "1" information is stored, the exit detection sensor 237a detects one game ball. is detected (step S7815: YES). In this case, the out confirmation flag in the specific control work area 211 is set to "1" (step S7816). Similar to the thirteenth embodiment, the out confirmation flag is a flag for the main MPU 82 to specify that one game ball has been detected by the out exit detection sensor 237a.

When it is confirmed that the seventh bit D7 has changed from the state in which "0" information is stored to the state in which "1" information is stored, the gate detection sensor 238a detects that one game ball is It is determined that it has been detected (step S7817: YES). In this case, the gate winning confirmation flag in the work area 211 for specific control is set to "1" (step S7818). Similarly to the thirteenth embodiment, the gate winning confirmation flag is a flag for the main MPU 82 to specify that one game ball has been detected by the gate detection sensor 238a.

Returning to the explanation of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 120), after the ball entry detection process is executed in step S7708, the step of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 88) in the thirteenth embodiment is performed in step S7709. Similar to S5510, specific control timer update processing is executed. Thereafter, the processes of steps S7710 to S7718 are executed. In steps S7710 to S7718, the same processes as steps S5512 to S5520 of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 88) in the thirteenth embodiment are executed.

In this embodiment, the fraud detection process (step S5509) and the fraud response process (step S5511) that were set in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 88) in the thirteenth embodiment are not executed. Instead, in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 120) in this embodiment, the management process is called by the CALLI command in step S7719, and the fraud detection execution process is executed in the management process. Note that the process in step S7719 is executed when an affirmative determination is made in step S7705 or when the process in step S7718 is executed.

Next, the process of step S7719 of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 120) will be described.

In step S7719 of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 120), the management process is executed by the CALLI instruction, as described above. Management processing is included in non-specific control processing. In other words, when the situation changes from executing specific control processing to executing non-specific control processing in the first timer interrupt processing (Fig. 120), the non-specific control processing uses the CALLI instruction. be called.

When management processing is executed by the CALLI instruction, information in the flag register of the main MPU 82 is first saved in the stack area 212 for specific control. The flag register includes a carry flag, a zero flag, a P/V flag, a sign flag, a half-carry flag, and the like, and the information in the flag register changes depending on the execution results of arithmetic instructions, rotate instructions, input/output instructions, and the like. By saving information in such flag registers before starting a program for management processing, which is non-specific control processing, the information before it changes after the management processing is called or the management processing starts. It becomes possible to save the information of the state flag register to the stack area 212 for specific control.

When management processing is executed by the CALLI instruction, the information in the flag register is saved to the stack area 212 for specific control, and then the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 120) and the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 114) are performed. ) interrupts are prohibited. As a result, the first timer interrupt process (Figure 120) and the second timer interrupt process (Figure 114), which are specific control processes, are interrupted and started while the management process, which is a non-specific control process, is being executed. It is possible to prevent this from happening.

When management processing is executed by the CALLI instruction, the information in the flag register is saved to the stack area 212 for specific control, and the information is saved in the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 120) and the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 114). After interrupts are disabled, a program corresponding to management processing is started.

In this way, with the configuration in which management processing is executed by the CALLI instruction, information in the flag register of the main MPU 82 is saved to the stack area 212 for specific control by one instruction ("CALLI"), and , the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 120), and the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 114) are prohibited. Then, a program corresponding to management processing can be started. Therefore, the instruction for saving the information in the flag register of the main MPU 82 to the stack area 212 for specific control and the interrupts of the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 120) and the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 114) are prohibited. The number of instructions set in the program for executing management processing can be reduced compared to the case where an instruction for starting the management processing program and an instruction for starting the management processing program are provided separately. This makes it possible to reduce the storage capacity of the main ROM 83 for storing programs.

FIG. 122 is a flowchart showing management processing. Note that the processes from step S7901 to step S7920 in the management process are executed by the non-specific control processing unit 222 of the main MPU 82 using a non-specific control program and non-specific control data.

First, as "LD SP, Y(u+2)", Y(u+2) is set as a fixed address at the start of non-specific control in the stack pointer of the main MPU 82 by a load instruction (step S7901). The stack pointer is an area in which address information is set for the main MPU 82 to specify a storage area in the stack areas 212 and 214 to which information is to be written by the push command. Each time a push instruction is executed, the stack pointer information is updated to the address of the storage area to be written in the next order, and each time a pop instruction is executed, the stack pointer information is updated to the address of the storage area to be written in the previous order. The address information of the storage area is updated. Furthermore, when using the stack area 214 for non-specific control, the information to be stored is stored starting from the storage area at the last address in the stack area 214 for non-specific control, and each time information to be stored is added. Then, the storage area of the storage destination is changed toward the first address side in the stack area 214 for non-specific control. Therefore, in step S6801, information on the last address in the stack area 214 for non-specific control is set in the stack pointer.

Thereafter, the information in the WA register of the main MPU 82 is saved to the WA buffer set in the work area 213 for non-specific control by a load instruction as "LD (_WABUF), WA" (step S7902). Further, as "LD (_BCBUF), BC", information in the BC register of the main MPU 82 is saved to the BC buffer set in the work area 213 for non-specific control by a load instruction (step S7903). Further, as "LD (_DEBUF), DE", information in the DE register of the main MPU 82 is saved to the DE buffer set in the work area 213 for non-specific control by a load instruction (step S7904). Further, as "LD (_HLBUF), HL", information in the HL register of the main MPU 82 is saved to the HL buffer set in the work area 213 for non-specific control by a load instruction (step S7905). Further, as "LD (_IXBUF), IX", information in the IX register of the main MPU 82 is saved to the IX buffer set in the work area 213 for non-specific control by a load instruction (step S7906). Further, as "LD (_IYBUF), IY", information in the IY register of the main MPU 82 is saved to the IY buffer set in the work area 213 for non-specific control by a load instruction (step S7907).

These WA register, BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register, and IY register are processes corresponding to non-specific control such as information clear processing (step S7908), sighting test processing (step S7909), and timer update of non-specific control. This register is used in processing (step S7910), fraud detection execution processing (step S7911), information abnormality monitoring processing (step S7912), and check processing (step S7913). The information set in such registers is cleared through information clearing processing (step S7908), sighting test processing (step S7909), non-specific control timer updating processing (step S7910), fraud detection execution processing (step S7911), and information abnormality processing. By saving the information in these registers used for specific control to the work area 213 for non-specific control before executing the monitoring process (step S7912) and the check process (step S7913), non-specific control is started. It is possible to evacuate to the front. Therefore, even if these registers are overwritten during non-specific control, the status of these registers can be changed by restoring the information saved in the work area 213 for non-specific control to these registers when terminating the non-specific control. It becomes possible to restore the state to the state corresponding to the specific control before the non-specific control was executed.

In addition, instead of saving all the information of various general-purpose registers, auxiliary registers, and index registers to the work area 213 for non-specific control, information clearing processing (step S7908), which is processing corresponding to non-specific control, WA to be used in test processing (step S7909), non-specific control timer update processing (step S7910), fraud detection execution processing (step S7911), information abnormality monitoring processing (step S7912), and check processing (step S7913) Register information is saved in the work area 213 for non-specific control by selectively saving the information of the registers, BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register, and IY register to the work area 213 for non-specific control. This makes it possible to reduce the amount of capacity secured for this purpose. Therefore, information clearing processing (step S7908), sighting test processing (step S7909), non-specific control timer updating processing (step S7910), fraud detection execution processing (step S7911), information abnormality monitoring processing (step S7912), and check processing It becomes possible to save the register information as described above while ensuring a large capacity of the work area 213 for non-specific control that can be used in (step S7913).

Of course, among the various general-purpose registers, auxiliary registers, and index registers in the main MPU 82, registers other than the WA register, BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register, and IY register support non-specific control. The information set before the start of the process is stored and held until the process corresponding to the non-specific control is finished and the process corresponding to the specific control is restarted.

After executing the processes from step S7902 to step S7907, information clearing process (step S7908), sighting test process (step S7909), non-specific control timer update process (step S7910), fraud detection execution process (step S7911), Information abnormality monitoring processing (step S7912) and checking processing (step S7913) are executed. Information clearing process (step S7908), sighting test process (step S7909), non-specific control timer update process (step S7910), fraud detection execution process (step S7911), information abnormality monitoring process (step S7912), and check process (step S7912) When executing step S7913), information clearing processing set in the program for non-specific control (step S7908), sighting test processing (step S7909), timer update processing for non-specific control (step S7910), fraud detection execution processing (Step S7911), the information abnormality monitoring process (Step S7912), and the check process (Step S7913) will be executed, but when the subroutine program is executed, the information clearing process (Step S7908) will be executed. , management after execution of test firing test processing (step S7909), non-specific control timer update processing (step S7910), fraud detection execution processing (step S7911), information abnormality monitoring processing (step S7912), and check processing (step S7913) Information for specifying the return address of the process is written to the stack area 214 for non-specific control by a push command. Then, information clear processing (step S7908), sighting test processing (step S7909), non-specific control timer update processing (step S7910), fraud detection execution processing (step S7911), information abnormality monitoring processing (step S7912), and check processing When (step S7913) is completed, information for specifying the return address is read by the pop instruction, and the program returns to the management processing program indicated by the return address.

The contents of the information clearing process (step S7908) are the same as the information clearing process (FIG. 94) executed in step S5808 of the fraud detection process (FIG. 93) in the thirteenth embodiment. The contents of the test firing test process (step S7909) are the same as the test firing test process executed in step S5809 of the fraud detection process (FIG. 93) in the thirteenth embodiment. The content of the non-specific control timer update process (step S7910) is similar to the non-specific control timer update process executed in step S5810 of the fraud detection process (FIG. 93) in the thirteenth embodiment. The processing content of the fraud detection execution process (step S7911) is the same as the fraud detection execution process (FIG. 95) executed in step S5811 of the fraud detection process (FIG. 93) in the thirteenth embodiment. The processing contents of the information anomaly monitoring process (step S7912) are similar to the information anomaly monitoring process (FIG. 119) executed in step S6808 of the second management process (FIG. 107) in the thirteenth embodiment. The contents of the check process (step S7913) are similar to the check process (FIG. 108) executed in step S6809 of the second management process (FIG. 107) in the thirteenth embodiment.

Information clearing process (step S7908), sighting test process (step S7909), non-specific control timer update process (step S7910), fraud detection execution process (step S7911), information abnormality monitoring process (step S7912), and check process (step S7912) After executing S7913), a load instruction is used to set Y(r+d) to the stack pointer of the main MPU 82 as a fixed address when returning to specific control after the management process is finished. ) is set (step S7914). The address of Y(r+d) is set as an address between Y(r+8) and Y(s) in the stack area 212 for specific control.

Immediately before the management process is called in step S7719 of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 120), the amount of information stored in the specific control stack area 212 is always constant, and accordingly, the main Information on the stack pointer of the MPU 82 (ie, the value of the stack pointer) is constant. In this case, the information stored in the stack area 212 for specific control includes, for example, information on the return address of the main process (FIG. 81) after the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 120) ends. The above-mentioned fixed information of the stack pointer is Y(r+d). Therefore, the information clearing process (step S7908), sight-firing test process (step S7909), non-specific control timer update process (step S7910), fraud detection execution process (step S7911), which is a process corresponding to non-specific control, information When the abnormality monitoring process (step S7912) and the check process (step S7913) are completed and the process corresponding to the specific control is returned to, the constant information Y(r+d) is set in the stack pointer of the main MPU 82. By doing so, it becomes possible to restore the information of the stack pointer to the information immediately before the process corresponding to non-specific control was started. By setting fixed information in the stack pointer in this way, the information of the stack pointer is restored to the information immediately before the process corresponding to non-specific control was started, so that the process corresponding to non-specific control can be performed. There is no need to save information on the stack pointer of the main MPU 82 corresponding to the specific control to the main RAM 84 before starting the specific control. Therefore, it becomes possible to reduce the processing load, and there is no need to secure an area for the evacuation in the main RAM 84.

Thereafter, the information saved in the WA buffer of the work area 213 for non-specific control is overwritten in the WA register of the main MPU 82 by a load instruction as "LD WA, (_WABUF)" (step S7915). Furthermore, as "LD BC, (_BCBUF)", the information saved in the BC buffer of the work area 213 for non-specific control is overwritten in the BC register of the main MPU 82 by the load instruction (step S7916). Further, as "LD DE, (_DEBUF)", the information saved in the DE buffer of the work area 213 for non-specific control is overwritten in the DE register of the main MPU 82 by the load instruction (step S7917). Also, as "LD HL, (_HLBUF)", the information saved in the HL buffer of the work area 213 for non-specific control is overwritten in the HL register of the main MPU 82 by the load instruction (step S7918). Further, as "LD IX, (_IXBUF)", the information saved in the IX buffer of the work area 213 for non-specific control is overwritten in the IX register of the main MPU 82 by the load instruction (step S7919). Also, as "LD IY, (_IYBUF)", the information saved in the IY buffer of the work area 213 for non-specific control is overwritten in the IY register of the main MPU 82 by the load instruction (step S7920). By executing the processing from step S7915 to step S7920, processing corresponding to non-specific control is started for each information of the WA register, BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register, and IY register of the main MPU 82. It becomes possible to restore the information corresponding to the specific control immediately before the control.

After executing the processing in steps S7915 to S7920, the RETI command returns to the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 120) included in the specific control processing. By executing the RETI instruction, the information in the flag register saved in the specific control stack area 212 before execution of the management process is restored to the flag register of the main MPU 82, and the first timer interrupt process ( The state in which the occurrence of the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 120) and second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 114) is prohibited is switched to the state in which it is permitted. As a result, the information in the flag register of the main MPU 82 is restored to information for executing specific control, and new execution of the first timer interrupt process and the second timer interrupt process becomes possible.

Due to the configuration that executes the RETI instruction, information in the flag register saved in the stack area 212 for specific control before execution of management processing is transferred to the flag register of the main MPU 82 by one instruction (“RETI”). It is possible to switch from a state in which generation of the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 120) and a second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 114) are prohibited to a state in which they are permitted. Therefore, an instruction for restoring the information in the flag register saved in the stack area 212 for specific control before execution of the management process to the flag register of the main MPU 82, and the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 120) and Compared to the case where an instruction for switching from a state in which generation of the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 114) is prohibited to a state in which it is permitted is provided separately, the instruction set in the program for non-specific control processing is The number can be reduced. This makes it possible to reduce the storage capacity of the main ROM 83 for storing programs for non-specific control processing.

Here, the information stored in the flag register and various registers of the main side MPU 82 when the non-specific control process is executed is not saved to the main side RAM 84 when the specific control process is restarted. Thereby, there is no need to secure a storage area for saving the above information in the work area 211 for specific control and the stack area 212 for specific control.

In addition, the information stored in the flag register and various registers of the main MPU 82 when non-specific control processing is executed is stored when non-specific control processing is restarted after returning to specific control processing. This information is not used. In other words, information necessary for multiple processing times of non-specific control processing that is executed with specific control processing in between is stored in the work area 213 for non-specific control or the stack area 214 for non-specific control. and is not stored in the flag register and various registers of the main MPU 82. Therefore, even if the information stored in the flag register and various registers of the main MPU 82 is not saved to the main RAM 84 when a non-specific control process is executed, a problem may arise when executing the non-specific control process. do not have.

As described above, in this embodiment, non-specific control processing is not set in a distributed manner in the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 120), but is set as a single processing. This enables processing for saving information in various registers of the main MPU 82 to the main RAM 84 when a situation where a specific control process is being executed changes to a situation where a non-specific control process is being executed, and a process for saving the non-specific control process. When returning to specific control processing after the processing of There is no need to repeat the process every time. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the processing load of the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 120).

The non-specific control process that is set as a single process in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 120) is set as the last process order in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 120). This makes it possible to execute non-specific control processing in each processing cycle of the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 120) based on the processing contents of all specific control processing in that processing cycle. Furthermore, since the non-specific control process is set as the last processing order in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 120), the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 120) after the non-specific control process is completed. There is no need to store the return address information in the main RAM 84.

Since non-specific control processing is set in the last processing order in the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 120), the ball entry detection processing (step S7708) is executed in the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 120). The fraud detection execution process (step S7911) is not executed later and before the execution of the special figure special electric line control process (step S7712), the general figure general electric line control process (step S7713), and the payout output process (step S7716). In this case, the processing result of the ball entry detection processing (step S7708) in a predetermined processing time of the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 120) is used as the processing result of the special map special electric line control processing (step S7712) in the predetermined processing time, the general map If used as is in the general power control process (step S7713) and the payout output process (step S7716), the winning result of the game ball caused by abnormality or fraud will trigger the process to proceed with the game or the player will not be able to play the game. There is a possibility that processing for discharging the ball may be executed. A processing configuration for preventing such inconvenience from occurring will be described below.

FIG. 123 is a flowchart showing the reservation information acquisition process in this embodiment executed by the main MPU 82. Note that the processing from step S8001 to step S8022 in the reservation information acquisition processing is executed by the specific control processing unit 221 of the main MPU 82 using a specific control program and specific control data.

In step S8001, it is determined whether the first storage standby flag provided in the work area 211 for specific control is set to "1", and in step S8008, the second storage standby flag provided in the work area 211 for specific control is determined. It is determined whether the storage standby flag is set to "1". The first storage standby flag is set in a situation where storage of the first holding information in the first special figure holding area 111 is on standby after it is specified that a game ball has been detected by the first operating port detection sensor 235a. This flag is used by the main MPU 82 to specify that there is a certain value. The second storage standby flag is set in a situation where storage of the second reservation information to the second special figure reservation area 112 is on standby after it is specified that a game ball has been detected by the second operating port detection sensor 236a. This flag is used by the main MPU 82 to specify that there is a certain value.

If the first storage standby flag is not set to "1" (step S8001: NO) and the second storage standby flag is not set to "1" (step S8008: NO), the specific control It is determined whether the first operation winning confirmation flag in the work area 211 is set to "1" (step S8015). If the first operation winning confirmation flag is set to "1" (step S8015: YES), it is determined that the number of first reservation information stored in the first special drawing reservation area 111 is less than the upper limit storage number. As a condition (step S8016: YES), each value of the winning random number counter C1, type random number counter C2, and reach random number counter C3 is stored in the first standby area provided in the work area 211 for specific control (step S8017). . The first standby area stores first hold information acquired when a game ball is detected by the first operating port detection sensor 235a when the first operating port detection sensor 235a detects a gaming ball abnormally. This is an area for waiting without storing it in the first special figure holding area 111 until it is determined in the fraud detection execution process (step S7911) that it is not caused by the fraud. Thereafter, the first storage standby flag in the work area 211 for specific control is set to "1" (step S8018).

When the first storage standby flag is set to "1" (step S8001: YES), check whether the first operation winning abnormality flag 213p in the work area 213 for non-specific control is set to "1". Determination is made (step S8002). In other words, the detection of the game ball by the first operating port detection sensor 235a that triggered the first storage standby flag to be set to "1" is the fraud detection in the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 120) of the previous processing time. It is determined in the execution process (step S7911) whether or not it is identified as being caused by an abnormality.

If "1" is not set to the first operation winning abnormality flag 213p (step S8002: NO), the game at the first operation port detection sensor 235a that triggered the first storage standby flag to be set to "1" This means that the ball detection was not identified as being caused by an abnormality in the fraud detection execution process (step S7911) in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 120) of the previous process. In this case, 1 is added to the value of the first special figure reservation counter (step S8003). According to the value of the first special symbol reservation counter, the display contents of the first special symbol reservation display section 37c in the special symbol unit 37 are adjusted. Thereby, the display contents of the first special figure reservation display section 37c correspond to the number of first reservation information stored in the first special figure reservation area 111. Thereafter, the first reservation information that is on standby in the first standby area is stored in the first storage area of the first special figure reservation area 111, that is, the storage area that corresponds to the number of reservation memories added by 1 in step S8003. Step S8004). Thereafter, the first pending command is stored in the command transmission buffer 223b of the register area 223 (step S8005). By storing the first pending command in the command transmission buffer 223b, the first pending command is transmitted to the sound-light side MPU 93 by the operation of the command transmission circuit 224. Thereby, the display side MPU 103 controls the display of the symbol display device 41 so that the display content of the first reservation display area 42a of the symbol display device 41 corresponds to the increase in the first reservation information.

On the other hand, if the first operation winning abnormality flag 213p is set to "1" (step S8002: YES), the first operation port detection sensor 235a that triggered the first storage standby flag to be set to "1" This means that the detection of the game ball in is identified as being caused by an abnormality in the fraud detection execution process (step S7911) in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 120) of the previous process. In this case, the first pending information waiting in the first waiting area is deleted (step S8006). Further, when the process of step S8005 or the process of step S8006 is executed, the first storage standby flag is cleared to "0" (step S8007).

If a negative determination is made in step S8015, if a negative determination is made in step S8016, or if the process of step S8018 is executed, "1" is set to the second operation winning confirmation flag in the work area 211 for specific control. It is determined whether or not (step S8019). If the second operation winning confirmation flag is set to "1" (step S8019: YES), it is determined that the number of second reservation information stored in the second special drawing reservation area 112 is less than the upper limit storage number. As a condition (step S8020: YES), each value of the winning random number counter C1, type random number counter C2, and reach random number counter C3 is stored in the second standby area provided in the work area 211 for specific control (step S8021). . The second standby area stores the second hold information acquired when a game ball is detected by the second operating port detection sensor 236a if the detection of the gaming ball by the second operating port detection sensor 236a is abnormal or This is an area for waiting without being stored in the second special figure holding area 112 until it is specified in the fraud detection execution process (step S7911) that it is not caused by fraud. Thereafter, the second storage standby flag in the work area 211 for specific control is set to "1" (step S8022).

If the second storage standby flag is set to "1" (step S8008: YES), check whether the second operation winning abnormality flag 213q in the work area 213 for non-specific control is set to "1". Determination is made (step S8009). In other words, the detection of the game ball by the second actuating port detection sensor 236a, which triggered the setting of "1" in the second storage standby flag, is the fraud detection in the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 120) of the previous processing time. It is determined in the execution process (step S7911) whether or not it is identified as being caused by an abnormality.

If the second operation winning abnormality flag 213q is not set to "1" (step S8009: NO), the game at the second operation port detection sensor 236a that triggered the second storage standby flag to be set to "1" This means that the detection of the ball was not identified as being caused by an abnormality or fraud in the fraud detection execution process (step S7911) in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 120) of the previous processing cycle. In this case, 1 is added to the value of the second special figure reservation counter (step S8010). According to the value of the second special symbol reservation counter, the display contents of the second special symbol reservation display section 37d in the special symbol unit 37 are adjusted. Thereby, the display content of the second special figure holding display section 37d corresponds to the number of second holding information stored in the second special figure holding area 112. After that, the second reservation information that is on standby in the second standby area is stored in the first storage area of the second special figure reservation area 112, that is, the storage area that corresponds to the number of reservation memories added by 1 in step S8010 ( Step S8011). Thereafter, the second pending command is stored in the command transmission buffer 223b of the register area 223 (step S8012). By storing the second pending command in the command transmission buffer 223b, the second pending command is transmitted to the sound-light side MPU 93 by the operation of the command transmission circuit 224. Thereby, the display side MPU 103 controls the display of the symbol display device 41 so that the display content of the second reservation display area 42b of the symbol display device 41 becomes the display content corresponding to the increase in the second reservation information.

On the other hand, if the second operation winning abnormality flag 213q is set to "1" (step S8009: YES), the second operation port detection sensor 236a that triggered the second storage standby flag to be set to "1" This means that the game ball detection in is identified as being caused by an abnormality or fraud in the fraud detection execution process (step S7911) in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 120) of the previous processing time. In this case, the second hold information waiting in the second standby area is erased (step S8013). Further, when the process of step S8012 or the process of step S8013 is executed, the second storage standby flag is cleared to "0" (step S8014).

With the above configuration, in the ball entry detection process (step S7708) in a predetermined processing time of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 120), the game ball is detected by the first operating port detection sensor 235a or the second operating port detection sensor 236a. Even if it is identified that the corresponding pending information is detected, in the pending information acquisition process (FIG. 123) in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 120) of the predetermined processing time, the corresponding pending information is temporarily transferred to the corresponding pending state. Waiting in the area. Then, in the fraud detection execution process (step S7911) in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 120) of the predetermined processing time, it is determined that the detection of the game ball that triggered the acquisition of the pending information was caused by an abnormality or fraud. If it is determined that the processing time is not the same, the system waits in the waiting area in the pending information acquisition process (Fig. 123) in the first timer interrupt processing (Fig. 120) of the next processing time for the predetermined processing time. The reserved information is stored in the corresponding special figure reserved areas 111 and 112. As a result, the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 120) includes non-specific control processes including the fraud detection execution process (step S7911) in the last process order of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 120). Even if the fraud detection execution process (step S7911) is not set between the ball entry detection process (step S7708) in FIG. 120 and the pending information acquisition process (FIG. 123), an abnormal It is possible to prevent the reservation information from being stored in the special figure reservation areas 111 and 112 in response to the detection of game balls caused by this.

In addition, as mentioned above, after waiting for execution of a predetermined process triggered by the detection of a game ball, the fraud detection execution process (step S7911) determines that the detection of the game ball is not caused by an abnormality or fraud. The configuration that executes the predetermined process that has been on standby when this is identified is the suspension of the standard game side in the standard computer general electricity control process (step S7713) triggered by the detection of a game ball by the gate detection sensor 238a. It is also used in processing to obtain information.

FIG. 124 is a flowchart showing the prize ball counter setting process executed in step S7801 of the ball entering detection process (FIG. 121). The processes of steps S8101 to S8120 in the prize ball counter setting process are executed by the specific control processing unit 221 of the main MPU 82 using a specific control program and specific control data.

If the first winning confirmation flag in the work area 211 for specific control is set to "1" (step S8101: YES), the first general winning abnormality flag 213l in the work area 213 for non-specific control is set to "1". is not set (step S8102: NO), the value of the 10 award balls counter in the specific control work area 211 is incremented by 1 (step S8103). When it is identified in the fraud detection execution process (step S7911) of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 120) in the previous processing time that the detection of the game ball by the first winning opening detection sensor 231a is caused by an abnormality. "1" is set in the first general winning abnormality flag 213l. If the value of the 10 prize balls counter is 1 or more, the 10 prize balls command is output to the payout control device 77 in the payout output process of step S7716 in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 120), and the 10 prize balls When the prize ball command is output once, the value of the 10 prize ball counter is subtracted by 1. When the payout control device 77 receives the 10 prize balls command, it drives and controls the payout device 76 so that 10 game balls are paid out. The first winning confirmation flag is cleared to "0" in step S7802 of the ball entering detection process (FIG. 121) after the current prize ball counter setting process (FIG. 124) is completed.

If the second winning confirmation flag in the work area 211 for specific control is set to "1" (step S8104: YES), the second general winning abnormality flag 213m in the work area 213 for non-specific control is set to "1". is not set (step S8105: NO), the value of the 10 award balls counter in the work area 211 for specific control is incremented by 1 (step S8106). When it is identified in the fraud detection execution process (step S7911) of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 120) in the previous processing time that the detection of the game ball by the second winning opening detection sensor 232a is caused by an abnormality. ``1'' is set in the second general winning abnormality flag 213m. If the value of the 10 prize balls counter is 1 or more, the 10 prize balls command is output to the payout control device 77 in the payout output process of step S7716 in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 120), and the 10 prize balls When the prize ball command is output once, the value of the 10 prize ball counter is subtracted by 1. When the payout control device 77 receives the 10 prize balls command, it drives and controls the payout device 76 so that 10 game balls are paid out. The second winning confirmation flag is cleared to "0" in step S7802 of the ball entering detection process (FIG. 121) after the current prize ball counter setting process (FIG. 124) is completed.

If the third winning confirmation flag in the work area 211 for specific control is set to "1" (step S8107: YES), the third general winning abnormality flag 213n in the work area 213 for non-specific control is set to "1". is not set (step S8108: NO), the value of the 10 award balls counter in the specific control work area 211 is incremented by 1 (step S8109). When it is identified in the fraud detection execution process (step S7911) of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 120) in the previous processing time that the detection of the game ball by the third winning opening detection sensor 233a is caused by an abnormality. "1" is set in the third general winning abnormality flag 213n. If the value of the 10 prize balls counter is 1 or more, the 10 prize balls command is output to the payout control device 77 in the payout output process of step S7716 in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 120), and the 10 prize balls When the prize ball command is output once, the value of the 10 prize ball counter is subtracted by 1. When the payout control device 77 receives the 10 prize balls command, it drives and controls the payout device 76 so that 10 game balls are paid out. The third winning confirmation flag is cleared to "0" in step S7802 of the ball entering detection process (FIG. 121) after the current prize ball counter setting process (FIG. 124) is completed.

If the special electric winning confirmation flag in the work area 211 for specific control is set to "1" (step S8110: YES), the special electric winning abnormality flag 213o in the work area 213 for non-specific control is set to "1". On the condition that the winning ball counter in the work area 211 for specific control is not set (step S8111: NO), the value of the 15 winning balls counter in the work area 211 for specific control is incremented by 1 (step S8112), and the value of the winning ball counter in the work area 211 for specific control is increased by 1 (step S8112). If the value is 1 or more, 1 is subtracted from this value (step S8113). When it is identified in the fraud detection execution process (step S7911) of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 120) in the previous processing time that the detection of the game ball by the special electric detection sensor 234a is caused by an abnormality or fraud. "1" is set in the special electric prize winning abnormality flag 213o. If the value of the 15 prize balls counter is 1 or more, the 15 prize balls command is output to the payout control device 77 in the payout output process of step S7716 in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 120), and the 15 prize balls When the prize ball command is output once, the value of the 15 prize ball counter is subtracted by 1. When the payout control device 77 receives the 15 prize balls command, it drives and controls the payout device 76 so that 15 game balls are paid out. Further, when the value of the prize winning counter becomes "0", a process is executed to close the special electric prize winning device 32 which is in the open state in the special figure special electric control process (step S7712). The special electric winning confirmation flag is cleared to "0" in step S7802 of the ball entering detection process (FIG. 121) after the current prize ball counter setting process (FIG. 124) is completed.

When the first operation winning confirmation flag in the work area 211 for specific control is set to "1" (step S8114: YES), the first operation winning abnormality flag 213p in the work area 213 for non-specific control is set to "1". ” is not set (step S8115: NO), the value of the one prize ball counter in the work area 211 for specific control is incremented by 1 (step S8116). When it is identified in the fraud detection execution process (step S7911) of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 120) in the previous processing time that the detection of the game ball by the first actuating opening detection sensor 235a is caused by an abnormality. "1" is set in the first operation winning abnormality flag 213p. If the value of the one prize ball counter is 1 or more, the one prize ball command is output to the payout control device 77 in the payout output process of step S7716 in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 120), and the one prize ball command is output to the payout control device 77. When the prize ball command is output once, the value of the prize ball counter is decremented by 1. When the payout control device 77 receives the one prize ball command, it drives and controls the payout device 76 so that one game ball is paid out. The first operation winning confirmation flag is cleared to "0" in step S7802 of the ball entry detection process (FIG. 121) after the current prize ball counter setting process (FIG. 124) is completed.

When the second operation winning confirmation flag in the work area 211 for specific control is set to "1" (step S8117: YES), the second operation winning abnormality flag 213q in the work area 213 for non-specific control is set to "1". ” is not set (step S8118: NO), the value of the one prize ball counter in the work area 211 for specific control is incremented by 1 (step S8119), and the value of the one prize ball counter in the work area 211 for specific control is increased by 1 If the value of the general electricity prize counter in is 1 or more, this value is subtracted by 1 (step S8120). In the fraud detection execution process (step S7911) of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 120) in the previous processing round, it was identified that the detection of the game ball by the second actuating opening detection sensor 236a was caused by an abnormality or fraud. In this case, "1" is set to the second operation winning abnormality flag 213q. If the value of the one prize ball counter is 1 or more, the one prize ball command is output to the payout control device 77 in the payout output process of step S7716 in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 120), and the one prize ball command is output to the payout control device 77. When the prize ball command is output once, the value of the prize ball counter is decremented by 1. When the payout control device 77 receives the one prize ball command, it drives and controls the payout device 76 so that one game ball is paid out. Further, when the value of the general electric power winning counter becomes "0," a process is executed to close the second operating port 34 which is in the open state in the general electric power electric power control process (step S7713). . The second operation winning confirmation flag is cleared to "0" in step S7802 of the ball entry detection process (FIG. 121) after the current prize ball counter setting process (FIG. 124) is completed.

With the above configuration, it is specified that a game ball is detected by the various detection sensors 231a to 236a in the ball entry detection process (step S7708) in a predetermined process time of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 120). However, in the payout output process (step S7716) in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 120) of the predetermined processing time, the process for executing the payout of the corresponding game ball is not executed, and the predetermined The special figure special electric control process (step S7712) in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 120) of the processing time does not execute the process for advancing the round game, but the first timer interrupt process (step S7712) of the predetermined process time. In the general-purpose electric power control process (step S7713) in FIG. 120), processing for advancing the general electric power open state is not executed. Then, in the fraud detection execution process (step S7911) in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 120) of the predetermined processing time, the detection of game balls by the various detection sensors 231a to 236a is not caused by abnormality or fraud. When this is specified, processing for executing the payout of game balls, processing for proceeding with the round game, and processing for proceeding with the normal power open state are executed. As a result, the first timer interrupt processing Fraud detection execution processing is performed between the ball entry detection process (step S7708), the payout output process (step S7716), the special figure special electric line control process (step S7712), and the general figure general electric line control process (step S7713) in (FIG. 120). Even if the configuration is such that (step S7911) is not set, the process for executing the payout of game balls triggered by the detection of a game ball caused by an abnormality or fraud, the process for proceeding with a round game, and the normal process. It becomes possible to prevent the process for advancing the power-open state from being executed.

FIG. 125 is a flowchart showing normal ball entry management processing executed in the check processing in step S7913 of the management processing (FIG. 122). Note that the processing from step S8201 to step S8221 in the normal ball entry management processing is executed by the non-specific control processing unit 222 of the main MPU 82 using a non-specific control program and non-specific control data. .

In the case where the first winning confirmation flag in the work area 211 for specific control is set to "1" (step S8201: YES), the first general winning abnormality flag 213l in the work area 213 for non-specific control is set to "1". If "1" is not set (step S8202: NO), it means that a winning has occurred in the general winning opening 31 and one game ball has been normally detected by the first winning opening detection sensor 231a. do. In this case, the value of the general winning counter 251a in the normal counter area 251 of the non-specific control work area 213 is incremented by 1 (step S8203). Also, if the second winning confirmation flag in the work area 211 for specific control is set to "1" (step S8204: YES), the second general winning abnormality flag in the work area 213 for non-specific control is set to "1" (step S8204: YES). If "1" is not set in 213m (step S8205: NO), a winning has occurred in the general winning opening 31 and one game ball has been normally detected by the second winning opening detection sensor 232a. means. In this case, the value of the general winning counter 251a in the normal counter area 251 of the non-specific control work area 213 is incremented by 1 (step S8206). Also, if the third winning confirmation flag in the work area 211 for specific control is set to "1" (step S8207: YES), the third general winning abnormality flag in the work area 213 for non-specific control is set to "1" (step S8207: YES). If "1" is not set in 213n (step S8208: NO), a winning has occurred in the general winning opening 31 and one game ball has been normally detected by the third winning opening detection sensor 233a. means. In this case, the value of the general winning counter 251a in the normal counter area 251 of the non-specific control work area 213 is incremented by 1 (step S8209).

In the case where the special electric winning confirmation flag in the work area 211 for specific control is set to "1" (step S8210: YES), the special electric winning winning abnormality flag 213o in the work area 213 for non-specific control is set to "1". If is not set (step S8211: NO), it means that a winning has occurred in the special electric winning device 32 and one game ball has been normally detected by the special electric winning detection sensor 234a. In this case, the value of the special electric prize winning counter 251b in the normal counter area 251 of the work area 213 for non-specific control is incremented by 1 (step S8212).

In the case where the first operation winning confirmation flag in the work area 211 for specific control is set to "1" (step S8213: YES), the first operation winning abnormality flag 213p in the work area 213 for non-specific control is set. If "1" is not set to "1" (step S8214: NO), a winning occurs in the first operating port 33 and one game ball is normally detected by the first operating port detection sensor 235a. means. In this case, the value of the first operation counter 251c in the normal counter area 251 of the non-specific control work area 213 is incremented by 1 (step S8215).

This is a case where the second operation winning confirmation flag in the work area 211 for specific control is set to "1" (step S8216: YES), and the second operation winning abnormality flag 213q in the work area 213 for non-specific control is set to "1". If "1" is not set to "1" (step S8217: NO), a winning occurs in the second operating port 34 and one game ball is normally detected by the second operating port detection sensor 236a. means. In this case, the value of the second operation counter 251d in the normal counter area 251 of the non-specific control work area 213 is incremented by 1 (step S8218).

When the out confirmation flag in the work area 211 for specific control is set to "1" (step S8219: YES), and the out abnormality flag 213r in the work area 213 for non-specific control is set to "1". If not (step S8220: NO), it means that a game ball has entered the out port 24a and one game ball has been normally detected by the out port detection sensor 237a. In this case, the value of the out counter 251e in the normal counter area 251 of the non-specific control work area 213 is incremented by 1 (step S8221).

The normal ball entry monitoring process (FIG. 125) is performed after the ball entry detection process (step S7708) and after the fraud detection execution process (step S7911) in each process in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 120). executed. Therefore, after it is specified whether the detection of game balls by the various detection sensors 231a to 237a is caused by abnormality or fraud, the normal ball entry monitoring process (FIG. 125) is executed. In the normal ball entry monitoring process (FIG. 125), if the abnormality flags 213l to 213r are set to "1", even if the corresponding confirmation flag is set to "1", the "1" "1" is not added to the counters 251a to 251e corresponding to the confirmation flags that are set. This makes it possible to accurately manage gaming history.

<Other embodiments>
Note that the present invention is not limited to the contents described in the embodiments described above, and various modifications and improvements can be made without departing from the spirit of the present invention. For example, the following changes may be made. Incidentally, the configurations of the following different embodiments may be applied individually to the configurations of each of the above embodiments, or may be applied in combination. Further, the configurations of the above embodiments may be applied in combination with each other (for example, a combination of the first embodiment, the seventh embodiment, and the tenth embodiment, the sixth embodiment, the eighth embodiment, etc.). A combination of the embodiment and the ninth embodiment, a combination of the first embodiment, the eighth embodiment, and the thirteenth embodiment, a combination of the sixth embodiment and the fourteenth embodiment), each of the above The configurations of the embodiments may be combined with each other, and the following alternative configurations may be applied to the configurations individually or in combination.

(1) In each of the above embodiments, the subtraction process of the ceiling counter 131 is not limited to the configuration in which the subtraction process of the ceiling counter 131 is executed after the setting process for time-saving results is executed in the specific confirmation process, and the subtraction process of the ceiling counter 131 is The configuration may be such that the time-saving result setting process is executed after the process is executed. In this case, when a time saving result is selected in the propriety judgment process in a game round in which a time saving state can be set, and a ceiling time saving occurs in which the value of the ceiling counter 131 becomes "0" after subtracting 1, the ceiling time saving is The setting of the time-saving state triggered by the time-saving state has priority over the setting of the time-saving state triggered by the time-saving result. Therefore, the number of continuations of time reduction set in the time reduction state triggered by the ceiling time reduction is greater than or equal to the number of time reduction continuations set in the time reduction state triggered by the time reduction result, or set in the time reduction state triggered by the time reduction result. It is preferable that the number of times is greater than the number of times of time saving continuation.

(2) In each of the above embodiments, the first time-saving result and the second time-saving result are set as the time-saving result, but the configuration is such that only one of the first time-saving result and the second time-saving result is set. Good too. Further, a configuration may be adopted in which three or more types of time saving results are set. In this case, the number of continuations of time saving set in the time saving state triggered by the time saving result is the same as in each of the above embodiments, regardless of the type of time saving result, the time saving set in the time saving state triggered by the ceiling time saving. The number of continuations may be greater than or equal to the number of continuations, or the number of continuations of time-savings for at least some of the time-saving results may be less than the number of continuations of time-savings set in the time-saving state triggered by ceiling time-savings.

(3) In each of the above embodiments, the number of continuous time reductions set in the time reduction state triggered by the time reduction result may be configured to be less than or equal to the number of time reduction continuations set in the time reduction state triggered by the ceiling time reduction. It may be configured such that the number of times the time saving continues is smaller than the number of times the time saving is continued which is set in the time saving state triggered by the time saving state.

(4) In each of the embodiments described above, in a time-saving state triggered by a time-saving result, the first high-frequency support mode may be used instead of the second high-frequency support mode. In this case, in a time saving state triggered by a jackpot result or a time saving result, the mode becomes the first high frequency support mode, and in a time saving state triggered by a ceiling time reduction, the mode becomes the second high frequency support mode.

(5) In each of the above embodiments, in a time saving state triggered by a ceiling time reduction, the first high frequency support mode may be used instead of the second high frequency support mode. In this case, in a time saving state triggered by a jackpot result or a ceiling time reduction, the mode becomes the first high frequency support mode, and in a time saving state triggered by a time saving result, the mode becomes the second high frequency support mode.

(6) In each of the above embodiments, in the time saving state triggered by one of the first time saving result and the second time saving result, the mode becomes the first high frequency support mode, and in the time saving state triggered by the other, the mode becomes the second high frequency support mode. It may be configured as follows. This makes it possible to set the high-frequency support mode according to the type of time-saving result.

(7) In each of the above embodiments, the first high-frequency support mode and the second high-frequency support mode have different probabilities of winning the electric role open winning in the determination of the validity of the general figure, and other execution modes of the ordinary figure and the general electric role. Although the configuration is such that the probabilities are the same, other execution modes may be different in addition to or in place of the probabilities. For example, one of the first high-frequency support mode and the second high-frequency support mode may have a longer duration of variable display times on the common map display section 38a than the other, and the first high-frequency support mode and the second high-frequency support mode may One of the high-frequency support modes may have a longer average duration of variable display times in the general figure display section 38a than the other, and one of the first high-frequency support mode and the second high-frequency support mode may It may be configured such that the second operating port 34 or the special winning device 151 is in the open state more often in the normal power open state than the other, and one of the first high-frequency support mode and the second high-frequency support mode is more active than the other. It may also be configured such that the total period during which the second operating port 34 or the special prize winning device 151 is in the open state in the normal power open state is long. In this case, the first high-frequency support mode may be more advantageous than the second high-frequency support mode in either execution mode, and the second high-frequency support mode may be used in either execution mode. The first high-frequency support mode may be more advantageous than the first high-frequency support mode, and for some execution modes, the first high-frequency support mode is more advantageous than the second high-frequency support mode, and for the remaining execution modes. Regarding this, the second high-frequency support mode may be more advantageous than the first high-frequency support mode.

(8) In each of the above embodiments, the time saving state of the second high-frequency support mode occurs regardless of whether a time saving result occurs or a ceiling time saving occurs, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when a time saving result occurs, the time saving state of the first high frequency support mode occurs, whereas when a ceiling time saving occurs, the time saving state of the second high frequency support mode occurs. Alternatively, if a time saving result occurs, the time saving state of the second high frequency support mode occurs, whereas when a ceiling time reduction occurs, the time saving state of the first high frequency support mode occurs. Often, when a time-saving result occurs, the time-saving state of the first high-frequency support mode occurs, whereas when a ceiling time-saving occurs, a high probability state occurs. In this case, the time saving state of the second high-frequency support mode occurs, whereas when the ceiling time saving occurs, a high probability state may occur.

(9) In each of the above embodiments, when the time saving result is obtained in the validity determination process and a time saving state occurs, the structure is such that when the time saving state occurs as a result of the stoppage result of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 of the symbol display device 41, it is notified that the time saving state will occur. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and in the middle of the variable display period of the game round, the stop result corresponding to the time saving result is stopped and displayed in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 of the symbol display device 41, and then the stop result corresponding to the time saving result is displayed in the middle of the variable display period of the game round. It may be configured such that a notification is executed until the end timing so that the player can recognize that the time saving state triggered by the time saving result is started. However, in the case of this configuration, it is necessary to specify whether or not a time-saving state triggered by a time-saving result will occur at the stage of determining the performance for the game round, so the setting process for the time-saving result is performed at the start of the game round. It needs to be executed at the same time.

(10) In each of the above embodiments, when a time saving state triggered by ceiling time saving occurs, the notification that the time saving state occurs is not executed depending on the result of stopping the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 of the symbol display device 41. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and in the middle of the variable display period of the game round, the stop result corresponding to the ceiling time reduction is stopped and displayed in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 of the symbol display device 41, and then the stop result corresponding to the ceiling time reduction is displayed in the middle of the variable display period of the game round. It may be configured such that a notification is executed to enable the player to recognize that the time saving state triggered by the ceiling time reduction is starting until the end timing. However, in the case of this configuration, it is necessary to specify whether or not a time-saving state triggered by the ceiling time reduction occurs at the stage of determining the performance for the game round, so the subtraction process of the ceiling counter 131 is performed at the start of the game round. It needs to be executed at the same time.

(11) In each of the above embodiments, if the time-saving result is obtained in the win/fail judgment process and the game round in which the win/fail judgment process was executed ends, a new game round in the time-saving state triggered by the time-saving result is immediately started. Although this configuration is permissible, it is not limited to this, and when a time-saving state occurs due to a time-saving result, when the game session that resulted in the time-saving result ends, a predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds) ) may be configured to prevent the start of a new game round. In this case, it is possible to make use of the predetermined period to provide notification to the player so that he or she can recognize that the time-saving state triggered by the time-saving result will start.

(12) In each of the above embodiments, when a game round in which a ceiling time reduction occurs ends, a new game round in a time saving state triggered by the ceiling time reduction is immediately permitted to start, but this is not limited to this. In the event that a time reduction condition occurs due to a ceiling time reduction, if the game round that caused the ceiling time reduction has ended, a new game round will not be started for a predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds). It may also be configured to be blocked. In this case, it is possible to make use of the predetermined period to perform notification to allow the player to recognize that the time saving state triggered by the ceiling time reduction will start.

(13) In each of the above embodiments, when a game round ends, the time-saving state counter 134 is decremented, the variable selection state counter 132 is decremented, the time-saving result setting process, and the ceiling counter 131 is decremented. However, these processes may be executed after the validity determination process is executed and before the variable display period specifying process is executed. In this case, it is possible to specify whether or not a ceiling time shortening occurs before executing the process for specifying the variable display period, so that the occurrence of a ceiling time shortening can be handled as a result of stopping the special figure display sections 37a and 37b. A configuration may be adopted in which a stop result is selected, or a configuration may be adopted in which a stop result corresponding to the occurrence of ceiling time reduction is selected as a stop result in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 of the symbol display device 41.

(14) In each of the above embodiments, both the subtraction processing of the time saving state counter 134 and the setting processing for the time saving result are executed at the end of a game round, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the time saving state counter 134 The subtraction process may be executed at the beginning of the game round, and the setting process for time-saving results may be executed at the end of the game round.

(15) In each of the above embodiments, both the subtraction processing of the time saving state counter 134 and the subtraction processing of the ceiling counter 131 are executed at the end of a game round, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the time saving state counter 134 The subtraction process of the ceiling counter 131 may be executed at the beginning of the game round, and the subtraction process of the ceiling counter 131 may be executed at the end of the game round.

(16) In each of the above embodiments, the time saving state is configured to end when a predetermined number of continuous time saving games are played, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the ending lottery process executed in the time saving state The time saving state may be configured to end when the end lottery result is reached. In this case, if the termination lottery process is executed and a termination lottery result is obtained, the process of terminating the time saving state is executed before the setting process for the time saving result and the subtraction process of the ceiling counter 131. Good too. This makes it possible to start a new time-saving state triggered by a time-saving result or a ceiling time-saving in a game round where the time-saving state has ended.

(17) In the first embodiment and the like, both the time saving result setting process and the subtraction process of the high probability state counter 133 are executed at the end of a game round, but the invention is not limited to this. The setting process for the time-saving result may be executed at the start of a game round, and the subtraction process for the high probability state counter 133 may be executed at the end of the game round.

(18) Although in the first embodiment and the like, both the subtraction processing of the ceiling counter 131 and the subtraction processing of the high probability state counter 133 are executed at the end of a game round, the present invention is not limited to this. The subtraction process of the ceiling counter 131 may be executed at the beginning of the game round, and the subtraction process of the high probability state counter 133 may be executed at the end of the game round.

(19) In each of the above embodiments, the value of the ceiling counter 131 is not subtracted even if a game round is executed in a high probability state, but the value of the ceiling counter 131 is not decremented even in a high probability state. A configuration may be adopted in which the value of the ceiling counter 131 is subtracted when a game round is executed. In this case, the value of the ceiling counter 131 after being subtracted by 1 may become "0" in the high probability state, but in this case, it is preferable to disable the occurrence of the ceiling time reduction and continue the high probability state.

(20) In each of the above embodiments, the value of the ceiling counter 131 is decremented when a game is played even in the time saving state, but the value of the ceiling counter 131 is not limited to this. A configuration may also be adopted in which the value of the ceiling counter 131 is not subtracted even if a game round is executed.

(21) In each of the above embodiments, when a predetermined trigger occurs, a numerical value such as the number of fixed ceilings is set in the ceiling counter 131, and when a game is played, the value of the ceiling counter 131 is subtracted by 1, and Although the configuration is such that the time saving state occurs when the value of the ceiling counter 131 becomes "0" after being subtracted by 1, the present invention is not limited to this, and when a predetermined trigger occurs, the ceiling counter 131 becomes "0". 0'' is cleared and a game round is executed, the value of the ceiling counter 131 is incremented by 1, and the value of the ceiling counter 131 after the 1 increment becomes a value corresponding to an occurrence trigger such as the number of fixed ceilings. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which a time-saving state occurs.

(22) In each of the above embodiments, the configuration is such that it is determined whether or not to generate a time-saving result in the correctness determination process using the winning random number counter C1, but the invention is not limited to this, and the winning random number counter C1 and may be configured to determine whether or not to generate a time-saving result through another determination process using another random number counter. In this case, in the third embodiment, it may be configured to determine whether or not to generate a time-saving result in the fall determination process using the fall random number counter C5.

(23) In each of the above embodiments, the type of time-saving result is determined using the type random number counter C2, but the configuration is not limited to this, and a random number counter different from the type random number counter C2 may be used. A configuration may also be adopted in which the type of time-saving result is determined. In addition, instead of determining whether or not to generate a time-saving result using the winning random number counter C1, the jackpot result, the first time-saving result, and the first time-saving result are determined using the winning random number counter C1. 2. A configuration may be adopted in which it is determined which of the time-saving result and the missed result is generated.

(24) In the first embodiment, when an information abnormality occurs in the main side RAM 84, information corresponding to the same fixed ceiling frequency as when the opening/closing execution mode occurs is set in the ceiling counter 131. The present invention is not limited to this, and the configuration may be such that information corresponding to a number of times smaller than the fixed ceiling number when the opening/closing execution mode occurs is set. Furthermore, in the fourth embodiment, when the setting value update process is executed when an information abnormality occurs in the main side RAM 84, it corresponds to the same fixed ceiling frequency as when the opening/closing execution mode occurs in the ceiling counter 131. Although the configuration is such that the information is set, the present invention is not limited to this, and the configuration may be such that information corresponding to a number of times smaller than the number of fixed ceilings when the opening/closing execution mode occurs is set.

(25) In each of the above embodiments, when an information abnormality occurs in a configuration in which a time saving state triggered by a ceiling time reduction occurs when the value of the ceiling counter 131 becomes "0" after subtracting 1, the ceiling counter 131 Although the configuration has been described in which information on the number of ceilings is set, the information is not limited to this, and an information abnormality may occur in a configuration in which a high probability state occurs when the value of the ceiling counter 131 after being subtracted by 1 becomes "0". If this occurs, information on the number of ceilings may be set in the ceiling counter 131.In a configuration in which the opening/closing execution mode occurs when the value of the ceiling counter 131 after subtracting 1 becomes "0", an information abnormality occurs. In this case, information on the number of ceilings may be set in the ceiling counter 131.

(26) In the above-described first embodiment, information on the number of ceilings is not set in the ceiling counter 131 when the setting value update process is executed, but when the setting value update process is executed, The counter 131 may be configured to set information on the number of ceilings. This makes it possible to set information on the number of ceilings in the ceiling counter 131 when changing the set value.

(27) In each of the above embodiments, the information on the number of ceilings is not set in the ceiling counter 131 when the RAM clearing process is executed. It may also be configured to set the information. This makes it possible to set information on the number of ceilings in the ceiling counter 131 when the main RAM 84 is cleared.

(28) In each of the above embodiments, when the supply of operating power is started in a situation where the setting change operation, setting confirmation operation, and RAM clearing operation are not performed and the gaming machine main body 12 is in an open state. Although the ceiling counter 131 is configured to set information corresponding to the number of fixed ceilings, the present invention is not limited to this, and in the situation, it may be configured to set information corresponding to a number of times greater than the number of fixed ceilings. In this situation, information corresponding to a number of times smaller than the fixed ceiling number of times may be set. In addition, when the supply of operating power is started in a situation where the setting change operation, setting confirmation operation, and RAM clearing operation are not performed and the front door frame 14 is in the open state, the ceiling counter 131 is connected to the fixed ceiling. It may be configured to set information corresponding to the number of times, it may be configured to set information corresponding to a number of times greater than the fixed ceiling number, or it may be configured to set information corresponding to a number of times less than the fixed ceiling number. . Further, a configuration may be adopted in which information corresponding to the number of fixed ceilings is set in the ceiling counter 131 when the supply of operating power is started in a situation where a dedicated operation button is operated, and the number of times that is higher than the number of fixed ceilings is set in the ceiling counter 131. The configuration may be such that corresponding information is set, or the configuration may be configured such that information corresponding to a number of times less than the fixed ceiling number of times is set.

(29) In the first embodiment and the like, information corresponding to the number of ceilings is set in the ceiling counter 131 in the special figure confirmation process when the opening/closing execution mode is started, but this is not limited to this. Instead, information corresponding to the number of ceilings may be set in the ceiling counter 131 at a timing in the middle of the opening period. It may also be configured to set information corresponding to the number of ceiling hits. Even in these cases, it is possible to set information corresponding to the number of ceilings in the ceiling counter 131 when the opening/closing execution mode is started.

(30) In the sixth embodiment, information corresponding to the number of ceilings is set in the ceiling counter 131 when it is confirmed in the special call termination process that the ending period has passed, but the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, information corresponding to the number of ceilings may be set in the ceiling counter 131 at the timing when the last round game in the opening/closing execution mode ends, and information corresponding to the number of ceilings is set in the ceiling counter 131 at the timing immediately before the ending period starts. The configuration may be such that information corresponding to the ceiling count is set, or the information corresponding to the ceiling count may be set in the ceiling counter 131 at a timing in the middle of the ending period.

(31) In the sixth embodiment, if it is specified in the power outage monitoring process that the opening/closing execution mode is triggered by a low-frequency jackpot result or a first small jackpot result, the number of times greater than the fixed ceiling number is Although the configuration is such that information corresponding to a certain special ceiling frequency is set in the ceiling counter 131, the present invention is not limited to this, and in the above situation, the configuration may also be such that information corresponding to a fixed ceiling frequency is set in the ceiling counter 131. In the above situation, information corresponding to a number smaller than the fixed ceiling number may be set in the ceiling counter 131. Further, in the power outage monitoring process, if the opening/closing execution mode is in progress, even if the trigger is not a low frequency jackpot result or a first small win result, information corresponding to the number of ceiling hits may be set in the ceiling counter 131.

(32) In the above-described first embodiment, when the value of the variable selection state counter 132 after subtracting 1 becomes "0", it becomes a high frequency reach state and the reach display is likely to occur. The present invention is not limited to this, and a configuration may be adopted in which, when the value of the variable selection state counter 132 after being subtracted by 1 becomes "0", an effect indicating that the ceiling time reduction is approaching is performed. In this state, by selecting a variable display period for the game times that is different from when a reach display occurs or when a completely missed result occurs, the sound-light side MPU 93 It becomes possible to specify that the state is such that an effect indicating that the ceiling time is approaching is to be executed.

(33) In the first embodiment and the like, when information on the number of ceilings is set in the ceiling counter 131 using the opening/closing execution mode as a trigger, information corresponding to the reference number of period switching is set in the fluctuation selection state counter 132; When information on the number of ceilings is set in the ceiling counter 131 in the main process when power supply is started, the information corresponding to the period switching reference number is not set in the fluctuation selection state counter 132. However, when information on the number of times of ceiling is set in the ceiling counter 131 in the main processing when the supply of operating power is started, information corresponding to the reference number of period switching is set in the fluctuation selection state counter 132. It may also be configured to set. In other words, when information on the number of times of ceiling is set in the ceiling counter 131, information corresponding to the reference number of period switching may be always set in the variable selection state counter 132. In this case, if there are multiple types of ceiling counts set in the ceiling counter 131, information corresponding to a predetermined number of counts smaller than the ceiling count can be set in the variable selection state counter 132. Regardless of which ceiling number of times is set, it is possible to achieve a high reach frequency state in the game play a predetermined number of times before the ceiling time shortening occurs.

(34) In the above-mentioned first embodiment, even if the value of the variable selection state counter 132 becomes "0" after being subtracted by 1, the high reach frequency state does not occur when the time is shortened. However, a configuration may be adopted in which the reach high frequency state occurs even in the time saving state. When the reach frequency is high in the time saving state, the probability that a reach display will occur in a game session that results in a winning result increases, and a long fluctuating display period is selected in a game session that produces a jackpot result or a miss reach display. Although the probability of winning becomes higher, the shortest period on the special figure side will be selected in the game round with a losing result in which no reach display occurs.

(35) In the seventh embodiment, if the value of the number of games counter in the main side RAM 84 reaches the reference number of times, the reach display does not occur in the game round in which no jackpot result occurs in any game state. Although the configuration has been described in which the control is executed, the configuration is not limited to this, and the configuration may be such that the control is not performed even if the reference number of times is reached in a high probability state, and the reference number of times is reached in a time saving state. Even if this is the case, a configuration may be adopted in which this control is not performed.

(36) In the seventh embodiment, when the value of the number of games counter in the main side RAM 84 reaches the reference number of times, a control is executed in which no jackpot result occurs only in that game round, and a reach display does not occur in the game round. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the reach display occurs in a game game where no jackpot result occurs for a specific number of game times (for example, 3 times) from the game time that became the standard number of times. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which control is executed without

(37) In the seventh embodiment, every time the number of game rounds executed after the opening/closing execution mode ends reaches the reference number, control is executed so that the reach display does not occur in the game round in which no jackpot result occurs. However, the configuration is not limited to this, and each time the number of games played after the opening/closing execution mode or the time saving state ends reaches the reference number, the reach display is displayed in a game time in which a jackpot result does not occur. The configuration may be such that control is executed so that the reach display does not occur, and every time the number of gaming sessions executed after the end of the time saving state reaches a reference number, the control is executed so that the reach display does not occur in the gaming session where the jackpot result does not occur. It is also possible to have a configuration in which

(38) In the eighth embodiment, regardless of whether the time saving state triggered by the time saving result or the time saving state triggered by the ceiling time saving ends, the variable selection state counter 132 corresponds to the predetermined switching reference number of times. Although the configuration is such that when the information is set and the value of the fluctuation selection state counter 132 becomes "0" after subtraction by 1, the reach high frequency state is set, the present invention is not limited to this, and the fluctuation selection state counter 132 A configuration in which processing for setting information corresponding to a predetermined switching reference number of times is executed when a time saving state triggered by a time saving result ends, but is not executed when a time saving state triggered by a ceiling time saving ends. Alternatively, it may be executed when the time saving state triggered by the ceiling time saving ends, but not executed when the time saving state triggered by the time saving result ends.

(39) In the ninth embodiment, when a time saving result or a ceiling time reduction occurs in the time saving state, the remaining number of continuations in the current time saving state and the number of time saving continuations corresponding to the new time saving state, whichever is greater. Although the configuration is such that the number of times is the remaining number of continuations in the subsequent time-saving state, it is not limited to this, and the number of continuations remaining in the current time-saving state and the number of time-saving continuations corresponding to the new time-saving state is the lesser of The configuration may be such that the number of continuations on the side becomes the remaining number of continuations in the subsequent time-saving state, and regardless of the remaining number of continuations in the current time-saving state, the number of time-saving continuations corresponding to the new time-saving state is the remaining number of continuations in the subsequent time-saving state. The number of continuations may be the number of continuations, or the number of continuations corresponding to the new time-saving state may be added to the remaining number of continuations in the current time-saving state, and the resulting number will be the remaining number of continuations in the subsequent time-saving state. Good too.

(40) In the ninth embodiment, if a time saving result or a ceiling time reduction occurs in the time saving state that is the first high-frequency support mode, the remaining number of continuations of the time saving state is the number of first time saving continuations or the second number of time saving continuations. Although the first high-frequency support mode, which can be set to It may be configured such that the number of times can be set and the time-saving state, which is the second high-frequency support mode, can be set.

(41) In each of the above embodiments, when a time-saving result is selected in the validity judgment process in a high probability state and the time-saving result is invalidated, non-reach out-of-reach symbols are displayed in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 of the symbol display device 41. Although the configuration has been described in which the combinations of are stopped and displayed, the present invention is not limited to this, and a configuration may be adopted in which combinations of out-of-reach symbols are stopped and displayed. Even in this case, it is difficult for the player to recognize from the stop results in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 that the time saving result has been invalidated.

(42) In each of the above embodiments, when a time-saving result is selected in the validity judgment process in a high probability state and the time-saving result is invalidated, non-reach out-of-reach symbols are displayed in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 of the symbol display device 41. Although the configuration is such that the combinations are stopped and displayed, it is not limited to this, and even if the time-saving result is invalidated, the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are stopped in the same way as when the time-saving result is not invalidated. As a result, the combination of the first time-saving symbols or the second time-saving symbol may be stopped and displayed.

(43) In each of the above embodiments, when a time-saving result is selected in the validity judgment process in a high probability state and the time-saving result is invalidated, there are cases where the time-saving result is the first time-saving result and cases where the time-saving result is the second time-saving result. Although the display contents of the state suggestion area 43 of the symbol display device 41 were configured to be different in the above, the display contents are not limited to this, and when the time saving result is invalidated, the first time saving result and the second time saving result are different. The display content of the status suggestion area 43 may be the same regardless of the result.

(44) In the tenth to twelfth embodiments, the game period that triggered the start of the game period is suspended until the game period that triggered the value of the time saving state counter 134 after being subtracted by 1 ends. Although the configuration is such that the time saving state does not end even if the game round triggered by the pending information on the side different from the information ends, the time saving state is not limited to this, and the time saving state counter 134 after being subtracted by 1 in the time saving state is If a specific game session that started before the predetermined game session that triggered the value to become "0" continues, even if the predetermined game session ends, the specific game session will continue. A configuration may be adopted in which the time saving state continues until the end. If the predetermined gaming session is a gaming session triggered by the second pending information, and the specific gaming session is a gaming session triggered by the first pending information, the tenth embodiment or the twelfth embodiment If a long period on the special drawing side is selected as the fluctuation display period for the game times triggered by the 1st reservation information, the above-mentioned changes will be made even after the above-mentioned predetermined game times triggered by the 2nd reservation information have ended. It becomes possible to repeatedly play the game round triggered by the second reservation information until the end of the specific game round.

(45) In the tenth to twelfth embodiments, when the variable display period of a game session is determined by referring to the table group for short-term changes in a game session triggered by the second hold information in the time saving state, Even if the result of the validity determination process for the game round is a time-saving result, the variable display period is determined in the same manner as a game round with a winning result in which no reach display occurs, but the present invention is limited to this. In the case where the fluctuation display period of the game round is determined by referring to the table group for short-term fluctuation in the game round triggered by the second pending information, the result of the validity judgment process for the game round is shortened. In the case of a winning result, the variable display period may be determined in a different manner from a game round with a winning result in which no reach display occurs. As a result, when a time-saving result occurs in the time-saving state, it is possible to set the manner in which the variable display period of the game round is determined in a manner corresponding to the time-saving result.

(46) In the first to fifth and seventh to twelfth embodiments, the main side MPU 82 has a small win result in addition to the jackpot result, time saving result, and miss result as a result of the win/fail determination process. You can also use it as The small winning result is a win/fail result that triggers a transition to the opening/closing execution mode, but does not trigger a transition to the win/fail lottery mode and the support mode. In addition, in the opening/closing execution mode triggered by a small winning result, the special electric winning device 32 is configured to open once or twice in a short period of time (for example, 1 second), so the special electric winning device 32 in the opening/closing execution mode is The number of game balls that enter the game is about 1 to 3. Even if the opening/closing execution mode triggered by the small winning result occurs, it is preferable that the ceiling number is not set to the ceiling counter 131 and the number of times to the fluctuation selection state counter 132 is not set. As a result, it is possible to generate a short ceiling time and a high reach frequency state based on the opening/closing execution mode triggered by the jackpot result.

(47) In each of the above embodiments, the stop result in the status suggestion area 43 of the symbol display device 41 in the case of a time saving result indicates whether or not the second high frequency support mode is set based on the time saving result. However, the configuration is not limited to this, and the stop result of the state suggestion area 43 of the symbol display device 41 in the case of a time saving result triggers the second high frequency support mode to be triggered by the time saving result. It may be configured such that it does not change depending on whether it is set or not. For example, if the first time saving result is obtained, blue will be stopped and displayed in the status suggestion area 43 regardless of whether or not the second high frequency support mode is set based on the first time saving result, and the second time saving result will be displayed in blue. In this case, the configuration may be such that green is stopped and displayed in the status suggestion area 43 regardless of whether or not the second high-frequency support mode is set based on the second time saving result.

(48) In the thirteenth embodiment, the unused areas of the main side RAM 84 (address Y(r+3) to address Y(r+5), address Y(s+3) to address Y(s+5), address Y(t+3) to address Y(t+5)), but the unused areas (address Y(r+3) to address Y(r+5), address Y(s+3) to address Y(s+5), address Y (t+3) to address Y(t+5)) may not be protected. Even in this case, in the RAM clearing process (FIG. 118), an unused area (address Y (r+3) to address Y(r+5)), it is possible to simplify the processing configuration for specifying the address range to be executed for the clearing process. Become.

(49) In the thirteenth embodiment, the storage area to be cleared in the information abnormality monitoring process (FIG. 119) is the work area 213 for non-specific control; however, the invention is not limited to this. Instead, the storage area targeted for the clearing process may be a work area 213 for non-specific control and a stack area 214 for non-specific control. In this case, an unused area (address Y(t+3) to address Y(t+5)) exists between the work area 213 for non-specific control and the stack area 214 for non-specific control in the address of the main side RAM 84. Therefore, before executing the clearing process, execute the protection canceling process and clear the protect register 223c to "0" in the same way as step S7501 of the RAM clearing process (FIG. 118). A series of addresses from addresses included in the work area 213 for non-specific control to addresses included in the stack area 214 for non-specific control, including unused areas (address Y(t+3) to address Y(t+5)) is specified and executes the clear process, and after executing the clear process, the protect setting process is executed in the same way as step S7506 of the RAM clear process (FIG. 118) to set "1" in the protect register 223c. It is also possible to configure the setting again. This makes it possible to simplify the processing configuration when clearing not only the work area 213 for non-specific control but also the stack area 214 for non-specific control in the information abnormality monitoring process (FIG. 119). Become.

(50) In the thirteenth embodiment, when the protection release process (step S7501) is executed in the RAM clear process (FIG. 118), the work area 211 for specific control and the work area 211 for specific control at the address of the main side RAM 84 are An unused area (address Y(r+3) to address Y(r+5)) provided between the stack area 212 for specific control and a work area for non-specific control at the address of the main RAM 84. 213 (address Y(s+3) to address Y(s+5)), and a work area 213 for non-specific control and a stack area 214 for non-specific control at the address of the main side RAM 84. The protection is canceled for all unused areas (address Y(t+3) to address Y(t+5)) between the Protection is canceled for unused areas (address Y(r+3) to address Y(r+5)) included in the address range, but protection is canceled for other unused areas (address Y(s+3) to address Y( s+5) and address Y(t+3) to address Y(t+5)), the protection may not be canceled.

In this case, there is an unused area (address Y(r+3) to address Y(r+5)) included in the address range targeted for clearing, and an unused area (address Y(r+5)) that is not included in the address range targeted for clearing. A protect register 223c is provided corresponding to each of address Y(s+3) to address Y(s+5) and address Y(t+3) to address Y(t+5)), and the protect setting process (step S4903) of the main process (FIG. 81) By setting "1" in all of these protect registers 223c, all unused areas (address Y(r+3) to address Y(r+5), address Y(s+3) to address Y(s+5), address Y (t+3) to address Y(t+5)), and in the unprotected area (address Y (r+3) to address Y(r+5)) to clear the protect register 223c to "0" to cancel the protection, while unused areas not included in the address range to be cleared (address Y(s+3) ) to address Y(s+5) and address Y(t+3) to address Y(t+5)) may be configured so that the protection is not canceled by not clearing them to "0". In addition, in the protect setting process (step S7506) of the RAM clear process (FIG. 118) after the clear process is completed, " By setting "1", protection is set again for the unused area (address Y(r+3) to address Y(r+5)). This makes it unnecessary to protect unused areas (address Y(s+3) to address Y(s+5), address Y(t+3) to address Y(t+5)) that are not included in the address range subject to clear processing. It becomes possible to prevent it from being canceled.

(51) In the thirteenth embodiment, clearing processing is executed for the work area 211 for specific control and the stack area 212 for specific control in the RAM clearing process (FIG. 118), but the work area 213 for non-specific control Although the configuration is such that the clearing process is not executed for the stack area 214 for non-specific control, the clearing process is not executed for the stack area 214 for non-specific control, but the invention is not limited to this. A configuration may also be adopted in which clear processing for the control work area 213 is executed, or a configuration may be adopted in which clear processing is also executed for the non-specific control work area 213 and the non-specific control stack area 214. In a configuration in which clear processing is also executed for the work area 213 for non-specific control, an unused area provided between the stack area 212 for specific control and the work area 213 for non-specific control at the address of the main side RAM 84 is used. The area (address Y(s+3) to address Y(s+5)) is also included in the series of address ranges to be cleared. In addition, in a configuration in which clear processing is also executed for the work area 213 for non-specific control and the stack area 214 for non-specific control, the stack area 212 for specific control and the stack area 212 for non-specific control are cleared at the address of the main RAM 84. An unused area (address Y(s+3) to address Y(s+5)) provided between the area 213 and the work area 213 for non-specific control and a stack area for non-specific control at the address of the main RAM 84 214 (address Y(t+3) to address Y(t+5)) is also included in the series of address ranges to be cleared.

(52) In the thirteenth embodiment, a setting display device 205 is provided, and setting values are displayed on the setting display device 205 in the setting confirmation process (FIG. 82) and the setting value update process (FIG. 83). However, the present invention is not limited to this configuration, and a configuration may be adopted in which the setting display device 205 is not provided and the setting values are displayed on the symbol display device 41. Further, the configuration may be such that the setting values are displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204.

In a configuration in which setting values are displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, in the setting confirmation process (FIG. 82) and setting value update process (FIG. 83), the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 display setting values. The display devices 201 to 204 may have a configuration in which the display of the set value and the display of the base value are alternately displayed at predetermined intervals (for example, every 5 seconds). As a result, even if the setting value is displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 where the base value is displayed, the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 can be checked. By doing so, it becomes possible to perform setting confirmation work or setting change work while checking both the base value and the setting value.

In addition, in a configuration in which setting values are displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, in a situation where the setting confirmation process (FIG. 82) or the setting value update process (FIG. 83) is being executed, The setting values are displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, and the processing to be executed among the setting confirmation processing (FIG. 82) and the setting value updating processing (FIG. 83) is performed. The configuration may be such that the display of the set value is ended when the setting value is ended. In this case, in a configuration where the display of the base value is started before the setting confirmation process (Fig. 82) and the setting value update process (Fig. 83) are started, when the display of the setting value is finished, the setting value The display of the base value of the type that was to be displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 immediately before the display of the information resumes on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. It is also possible to have a configuration in which Moreover, upon restarting, the display of the type of base value to be restarted may be performed over the display continuation period, regardless of the remaining display continuation period at the timing when it was previously stopped.

In addition, in a configuration where the display of the base value is started before the setting confirmation process (FIG. 82) and the setting value update process (FIG. 83) are started, the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 When setting values are displayed, a check display may be performed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 before or after the display. In this case, when the setting value display ends and the base value display resumes, or when the check display ends and the base value display resumes, immediately before the check display or the setting value display starts. The display of the base value of the type that was to be displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 may be resumed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. Furthermore, when restarting, the display of the type of base value to be restarted may be performed over the display duration period, regardless of the remaining display duration period at the timing when it was previously stopped.

(53) In the thirteenth embodiment, the base value is displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, but the present invention is not limited to this, and instead of or in addition to the base value. At least one of the following parameters may be calculated and displayed. Note that the number of game balls entering the out port 24a is "K1", the number of game balls entering the general winning hole 31 is "K2", and the number of game balls entering the special electric winning device 32 is Let "K3" be the number of game balls entering the first operating port 33, "K4" be the number of game balls entering the first operating port 33, and "K5" be the number of game balls entering the second operating port 34.
・First parameter: Ratio of total number of game balls entering the general prize opening 31 K2/total number of game balls ejected from the game area PA (K1+K2+K3+K4+K5)・Second parameter: Game balls entering the special electric prize winning device 32 Ratio of total number of game balls entering K3/total number of game balls discharged from gaming area PA (K1+K2+K3+K4+K5) - Third parameter: Total number of game balls entering first operating port 33 K4/ejecting from gaming area PA Ratio of the total number of game balls (K1+K2+K3+K4+K5) that were released/Fourth parameter: Ratio of the total number of game balls that entered the second operating port 34 K5/total number of game balls that were ejected from the gaming area PA (K1+K2+K3+K4+K5)・Fifth parameter: (K3 x "Number of prize balls for winning into the special electric winning device 32" + K5 x "Number of winning balls for winning into the second operating port 34") / Total number of game balls paid out (K2 x "General "Number of prize balls for winning into the winning opening 31" + K3 x "Number of winning balls for winning into the special electric winning device 32" + K4 x "Number of winning balls for winning into the first operating port 33" + K5 x "Second operating port 34 6th parameter: K3 x "Number of prize balls for winning in the special electric winning device 32" / Total number of game balls paid out (K2 x "Number of prize balls for winning in the general winning slot 31") Number of prize balls" + K3 x "Number of prize balls for winning into the special electric winning device 32" + K4 x "Number of prize balls for winning into the first actuation port 33" + K5 x "Number of prize balls for winning into the second actuation port 34 ”) 7th parameter: Total number of game balls paid out in all gaming states (K2 x “Number of prize balls for winning in the general winning slot 31” + K3 x “Number of prize balls for winning in the special electric winning device 32”) +K4 x "Number of prize balls for winning in the first operating port 33" + K5 x "Number of prize balls for winning in the second operating port 34")/Total number of game balls ejected from the gaming area PA in all gaming states Ratio of (K1+K2+K3+K4+K5).

In the above configuration, for example, the first parameter is set as a notification target in the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, and the first parameter at a plurality of different timings is set to the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. The display may be sequentially switched and displayed every time a predetermined display duration period (for example, 5 seconds) elapses in step 204 . In this case, if the setting confirmation process (FIG. 82) or the setting value update process (FIG. 83) is executed when the supply of operating power to the main MPU 82 is started, the setting confirmation process (FIG. 82) is executed. ) or in a situation where the setting value update process (FIG. 83) is being executed, the first parameter may be sequentially switched and displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. In addition, if the check display on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is executed in a situation where the above-described sequential switching display of the first parameter is performed, after the check display ends, the corresponding The configuration may be such that the display of the first parameter of the type that was the display target immediately before the start of the check display is restarted, and upon the restart, the measurement of the predetermined display duration period may be newly started. .

Further, for example, the first to seventh parameters are set as notification targets in the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, and the first to seventh parameters are set to the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. The display may be sequentially switched and displayed every time a predetermined display duration period (for example, 5 seconds) elapses in step 204 . In this case, when the setting confirmation process (FIG. 82) or the setting value update process (FIG. 83) is executed when the supply of operating power to the main MPU 82 is started, the setting confirmation process (FIG. 82) is executed. ) or in a situation where the setting value update process (FIG. 83) is being executed, the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 may sequentially switch and display the first to seventh parameters. In addition, if the check display on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is executed in a situation where the first to seventh parameters are sequentially switched and displayed, after the check display ends, may be configured such that the display of the type of parameter that was to be displayed immediately before the start of the check display is restarted, and upon said restart, measurement of a predetermined display duration period may be newly started. .

(54) In the thirteenth embodiment, the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 and the setting display device 205 are provided in the main control device 71 mounted on the back of the game board 24, To check the fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 and the setting display device 205, unlock the gaming machine main body 12 relative to the outer frame 11, and rotate the gaming machine main body 12 forward of the pachinko machine 10. Although the configuration is described as necessary, the configuration is not limited to this, and the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 may be provided on the front of the pachinko machine 10, and the setting display device 205 may be provided in the front of the pachinko machine 10. The configuration may be such that they are provided on the front side of the Pachinko machine 10, or the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 and the setting display device 205 may both be provided on the front side of the Pachinko machine 10.

Furthermore, in a configuration in which at least one of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 and the setting display device 205 is provided on the front surface of the pachinko machine 10, the display device provided on the front surface displays other information. It may also be configured to be used also as a display device for displaying images. For example, in a configuration in which the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are provided on the front side of the pachinko machine 10, the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 may be used in addition to the base value in the opening/closing execution mode. The configuration may be such that the number of game balls paid out is displayed. Furthermore, in a configuration in which the setting display device 205 is provided on the front of the pachinko machine 10, the setting display device 205 may display information corresponding to abnormalities in the pachinko machine 10 in addition to setting values.

Further, a configuration in which the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 and the setting display device 205 are provided on the front side of the gaming machine may be applied to a slot machine. In this case, in addition to the base value, the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 display the number of virtual medals owned by the player and the number of gaming media awarded to the player when a small winning combination is achieved. One of the numbers may be displayed, and the setting display device 205 may display the other of the number of virtual medals and the number of awarded game media in addition to the set value.

(55) In the thirteenth embodiment, after the check display is finished, if the operating power continues to be supplied to the main MPU 82 regardless of whether the game machine main body 12 is in the closed or open state. Although the base value is continuously displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the gaming machine main body 12 is in the open state, the base value is continuously displayed. ~The display of the base value on the fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 may be started. In this case, when the gaming machine main body 12 is in the open state, the type of information that was to be displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 immediately before the gaming machine main body 12 was closed last time. The display of the base value may be resumed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. In addition, when restarting, regardless of the remaining display duration at the time when the display of the base value of the type to be resumed was previously stopped, the display for the duration of the display of the base value of the type to be resumed will be renewed. It is also possible to configure the configuration to be performed separately.

(56) In the thirteenth embodiment, the non-specific control process in the main MPU 82 monitors whether the detection of a game ball by each of the detection sensors 231a to 238a is caused by an abnormality or fraud. A configuration in which processes for monitoring whether or not magnetism is detected by the magnetic detection sensor are executed, and processes corresponding to these monitoring results are executed in the specific control process in the main MPU 82. However, a configuration may be adopted in which some of these monitoring processes are executed in the non-specific control process. Additionally, in addition to or in place of these monitoring processes, in the non-specific control process, a process to monitor whether or not the radio wave detection sensor has detected a radio wave is executed, and in the specific control process The configuration may also be such that a process corresponding to the monitoring result is executed.

(57) In the thirteenth embodiment, a special power monitoring delay timer counter 211b for specifying whether the detection of a game ball by each of the detection sensors 231a to 238a is caused by an abnormality or fraud; Among the monitoring delay timer counter 211c and the first to eighth prize monitoring timer counters 213a to 213h, the special electricity monitoring delay timer counter 211b and the general electricity monitoring delay timer counter 211c are provided in the work area 211 for specific control, and the first Although the configuration is such that the eighth prize monitoring timer counters 213a to 213h are provided in the work area 213 for non-specific control, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, all of the timer counters 211b, 211c, and 213a to 213h may be provided in the work area 211 for specific control; for example, all of the timer counters 211b, 211c, and 213a to 213h may be provided for non-specific control. It may also be configured such that it is provided in the work area 213.

(58) In the fourteenth embodiment, after executing the prize ball counter setting process (step S7801) in the ball entry detection process (FIG. 121), various flag clearing processes (step S7802) are executed to clear the various flags. After executing the process (step S7802), by executing the process (steps S7803 to S7818) for monitoring whether or not a game ball is detected by each detection sensor 231a to 238a, the first The setting process for various prize ball counters according to the monitoring results of each detection sensor 231a to 238a in the ball entry detection process (FIG. 121) of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 120) is performed at the next processing time for a predetermined processing time. The configuration is such that the ball entry detection processing (Fig. 121) in the first timer interrupt processing (Fig. 120) is suspended until the ball entry detection processing (Fig. 121); however, the ball entry detection processing (Fig. 121) A process for monitoring whether or not a game ball is detected by each detection sensor 231a to 238a is executed, and a process for setting various prize ball counters according to the monitoring result is executed, and subsequent fraud detection is performed. If it is specified in the execution process (step S7911) that the detection of game balls by the detection sensors 231a to 238a is caused by an abnormality or fraud, the value of the prize ball counter corresponding to the detection sensor 231a to 238a It is also possible to have a configuration in which 1 is subtracted. In this case, the value of the predetermined prize ball counter is incremented by 1 in the ball entry detection process (FIG. 121), and the value of the predetermined prize ball counter is set to "1" in the subsequent payout output process (step S7716). Due to a certain event, the corresponding prize ball command is output, and after the value of the predetermined prize ball counter is subtracted by 1 and the value becomes "0", the value of the predetermined prize ball counter is output. If it is determined that the game ball detection that triggered the addition of 1 was caused by an abnormality or fraud, the value of the predetermined prize ball counter is subtracted by 1 and becomes "-1". The predetermined prize ball counter that has become "-1" is incremented by 1 when it is subsequently newly identified that a game ball has been detected by the detection sensor corresponding to the predetermined prize ball counter. It becomes "0". Therefore, the amount of game balls paid out based on the detection of game balls caused by abnormality or fraud is compensated for by the fact that the subsequent payout of game balls based on the detection of regular game balls is not executed.

(59) In the thirteenth and fourteenth embodiments, if it is specified that the detection of the game ball by the first operation opening detection sensor 235a is caused by an abnormality or fraud, the first Although the configuration has been described in which both the storage in the special figure holding area 111 and the payout of one game ball are not executed, the present invention is not limited to this, and a configuration may be adopted in which only one of these is not executed. Further, the configuration may be applied to a process when it is specified that the detection of a game ball by the second operating port detection sensor 236a is caused by an abnormality or fraud.

(60) In the thirteenth and fourteenth embodiments, the special electric current detection sensor 234a detects the game ball in relation to the period measured by the special electric monitoring delay timer counter 211b provided in the work area 211 for specific control. If it is determined that the game is caused by fraud, and in relation to the period measured by the fourth prize monitoring timer counter 213e provided in the work area 213 for non-specific control, the game is determined by the special electric detection sensor 234a. Although the configuration is such that the special electric winning abnormality flag 213o is set to "1" in any case where it is determined that the ball detection is caused by an abnormality, the present invention is not limited to this, and each It may be configured such that different abnormality flags are set to "1" depending on the case, and the process corresponding to the abnormality flag to which "1" is set is executed. For example, if it is determined that the detection of a game ball by the special electric detection sensor 234a is caused by fraud, a predetermined abnormality flag is set to "1"; In this case, not only will the value of the 15 prize ball counter not be incremented by 1, but the game stop flag will be set to "1" and the execution of the process to proceed with the game will be blocked. If it is determined that the detection of the game ball by the detection sensor 234a is caused by an abnormality, a specific abnormality flag is set to "1"; and if the specific abnormality flag is set to "1"; Although the value of the 15 award balls counter is not incremented by 1, the game stop flag may not be set to "1", so that the execution of the process for advancing the game may not be blocked. This makes it possible to execute processes corresponding to each.

(61) In the thirteenth and fourteenth embodiments, in relation to the period measured by the special power monitoring delay timer counter 211b or the general power monitoring delay timer counter 211c provided in the work area 211 for specific control. Monitoring of whether or not the detection of a game ball by the special electric detection sensor 234a or the second actuating opening detection sensor 236a is caused by fraud is performed in a non-specific control process, and a work area for non-specific control is Monitoring whether the detection of game balls by the detection sensors 231a to 238a is caused by an abnormality in relation to the period measured by the first to eighth prize monitoring timer counters 213a to 213h provided in the 213. Although the configuration has been described in which the above is executed in the non-specific control process, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the former monitoring may be executed in the non-specific control process, and the latter monitoring may be executed in the specific control process. It may also be configured to be executed.

(62) In the thirteenth embodiment, the commands stored in the command transmission buffer 223b are configured to be transmitted to the audio-optical side MPU 93 by the command transmission circuit 224 that operates without using a program, but the configuration is limited to this. The information may be transmitted to the audio/light MPU 93 under control using a program. In this case, the control may be executed as a specific control process, or may be executed as a non-specific control process.

(63) In the thirteenth embodiment, the commands sent to the sound and light side MPU 93 are stored in the command sending buffer 223b, but in addition to or in place of this, commands sent to the payout control device 77 may be stored in the command transmission buffer 223b.

(64) In the thirteenth embodiment, when it becomes necessary to send a command to the sound-light side MPU 93 in specific control processing, the command is stored in the command transmission buffer 223b, and the non-specific control processing Even when it becomes necessary to send a command to the sound/light side MPU 93, the command is stored in the command sending buffer 223b. However, the present invention is not limited to this. When it becomes necessary to send a command to the optical side MPU 93, the command is stored in the work area 211 for specific control or the stack area 212 for specific control, and the command is sent to the optical side MPU 93 in non-specific control processing. When it becomes necessary to send a command, the command may be stored in the work area 213 for non-specific control or the stack area 214 for non-specific control. In this case, the processing for transmitting the stored commands may be performed by the command transmission circuit 224, may be performed as a specific control process, or may be performed as a non-specific control process. You can also use it as

(65) In the thirteenth embodiment, the value of the second security counter 213k is added to the value of the first security counter 211a in the security processing (FIG. 101), and corresponds to the value of the first security counter 211a after the addition. Although the configuration is such that a number of security signals are output to the outside, the present invention is not limited to this, and the total value of the value of the first security counter 211a and the value of the second security counter 213k is output to the register of the main MPU 82. The configuration may be such that a number of security signals corresponding to the total value stored in the register are output to the outside.

(66) In the thirteenth embodiment, the process for outputting the security signal is executed as a specific control process, but it may be executed as a non-specific control process. In this case, the value of the first security counter 211a may be added to the value of the second security counter 213k, and the number of security signals corresponding to the value of the second security counter 213k after the addition may be outputted to the outside. In addition, in the non-specific control process, the total value of the value of the first security counter 211a and the value of the second security counter 213k is stored in a register of the main MPU 82, and a number corresponding to the total value stored in the register is stored. The security signal may be output externally.

(67) In the thirteenth and fourteenth embodiments described above, when non-specific control processing is started in a situation where specific control processing is being executed, information in the flag register of the main MPU 82 is used for specific control processing. Although information in other registers is saved in the stack area 212 for specific control and is saved in the work area 213 for non-specific control in non-specific control processing, the present invention is not limited to this. , the information of the flag register may be saved in the work area 211 for specific control, and the information of other registers may be saved in the stack area 214 for non-specific control.

Further, a configuration may be adopted in which both the information in the flag register and the information in other registers are saved in the work area 211 for specific control or the stack area 212 for specific control in the process of specific control. In this case, when the non-specific control process ends and the process returns to the specific control process, information is returned to the flag register and other registers in the specific control process.

Further, a configuration may be adopted in which both the information in the flag register and the information in other registers are saved in the work area 213 for non-specific control or the stack area 214 for non-specific control in the non-specific control process. In this case, when the non-specific control process ends and the process returns to the specific control process, information is returned to the flag register and other registers in the non-specific control process.

(68) In the thirteenth and fourteenth embodiments, the operation in which the setting key insertion section 195 is turned on and the reset button 196 is pressed is a setting change operation, and the setting key insertion section 195 is turned on. Although the configuration has been described in which an operation in which the reset button 196 is pressed and the reset button 196 is not pressed is a setting confirmation operation, these setting change operations and setting confirmation operations are not limited to this. In a configuration where the setting key insertion part 195 can be switched to the OFF position, the first position, and the second position by the key, the setting change operation is to switch the setting key insertion part 195 to the first position by the setting key. 195 may be switched to the second position by the setting key as a setting confirmation operation.

(69) Instead of the configuration in which the display control device 101 is controlled by the audio emission control device 91 based on the command output from the main control device 71, the display control device 101 is controlled based on the command output from the main control device 71. A configuration may be adopted in which the device 101 controls the audio emission control device 91. Further, instead of the configuration in which the audio emission control device 91 and the display control device 101 are provided separately, a configuration in which both control devices are provided as one control device may be used, and the function of one of the two control devices may be may be integrated into the main control device 71, or both functions of these two control devices may be integrated into the main control device 71. Furthermore, the structure of the commands output from the main control device 71 to the sound emission control device 91 and the structure of the commands output from the sound emission control device 91 to the display control device 101 are also arbitrary.

(70) The device on which the performance of the game rerun is executed is not limited to the symbol display device 41, and is configured such that the rendition of the game rerun is performed by the operation of a movably provided decorative member. It may also be a configuration in which a game replay effect is executed by lighting up a predetermined light emitting section, or a configuration in which a game replay effect is performed by a combination of all or part of each of the above aspects. good.

(71) Other types of pachinko machines different from the above embodiments, such as pachinko machines in which an electric accessory is released a predetermined number of times when a game ball enters a specific area of a special device, or a pachinko machine in which a game ball is released in a specific area of a special device. The present invention can also be applied to game machines such as a pachinko machine in which a jackpot is generated when the game is entered, a pachinko machine equipped with other accessories, an arranged ball machine, and a mahjong ball machine.

In addition, non-pinball type game machines, for example, are equipped with multiple reels with multiple types of symbols attached in the circumferential direction, and rotation of the reels is started by inserting a medal and operating a start lever, and a stop switch is operated. After the reels have stopped after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, if a specific symbol or a specific symbol combination is established on the active line that can be seen from the display window, the player is given benefits such as a payout of medals, etc. The present invention can also be applied to slot machines.

In addition, the game machine main body, which is supported by the outer frame in an openable and closable manner, is equipped with a storage section and a retrieval device, and the start lever is operated after a predetermined number of game balls stored in the storage section are retrieved by the retrieval device. The present invention can also be applied to a gaming machine that is a combination of a pachinko machine and a slot machine, which starts the rotation of the reels by doing so.

<About the invention group extracted from the above embodiments>
Hereinafter, the features of the invention group extracted from the above-described embodiments will be explained, showing effects etc. as necessary. In the following, for ease of understanding, configurations corresponding to the above embodiments are appropriately indicated in parentheses, etc., but the present invention is not limited to the specific configurations shown in parentheses.

<Characteristics Group A>
Feature A1. Game round control means (first to eighth embodiments) that controls the game round execution means (first special figure display section 37a, second special figure display section 37b) so that the game round operation is executed in the game round. function of executing the special figure fluctuation start process, the special figure fluctuation process, and the special figure confirmation process of the main side MPU 82);
In the game round, when it is specified that a predetermined start opportunity (time saving result, ceiling time saving) has occurred, a predetermined gaming state (low probability mode and a time saving state which is the second high frequency support mode) is started, and the corresponding A predetermined start process that prevents the predetermined gaming state from starting when it is determined that a predetermined start trigger has not occurred (setting process for time-saving results or ceiling executed by the main MPU 82 in the first to eighth embodiments) A predetermined start execution means (a function of executing the setting process for the time saving result of the main MPU 82 in the first to eighth embodiments, the main MPU 82 in the first to eighth embodiments) (a function of executing subtraction processing of the ceiling counter 131);
In the gaming session, when it is specified that a predetermined end trigger (the value of the time saving state counter 134 becomes "0" after being subtracted by 1) has occurred, the predetermined game state is ended, and the predetermined end trigger is When it is determined that the predetermined game state has not occurred, a predetermined end process (subtraction process of the time saving state counter 134 executed by the main MPU 82 in the first to eighth embodiments) is executed. Predetermined termination execution means (a function of executing the subtraction process of the time saving state counter 134 of the main side MPU 82 in the first to eighth embodiments);
Equipped with
A gaming machine characterized in that the predetermined start process is executed after the predetermined end process is executed in one game round.

According to feature A1, the predetermined gaming state is started when it is specified in the predetermined start process that a predetermined start trigger has occurred, and it is specified in the predetermined end process that a predetermined end trigger has occurred. Since the predetermined gaming state ends when the player is in the predetermined gaming state, the player who expects to be in the predetermined gaming state expects that the predetermined starting opportunity will occur if the player is not in the predetermined gaming state. expects that the predetermined termination trigger will not occur. In this case, the predetermined start process is executed after the predetermined end process is executed in one game round. As a result, if both a predetermined start trigger and a predetermined end trigger occur in one game round, the predetermined end process is executed first in the game round, so that after the current predetermined gaming state is ended, , the predetermined game state is restarted by executing the predetermined start process later in the game round. Therefore, it is possible to continue the predetermined gaming state even in the game round in which the predetermined end opportunity has occurred. In addition, the above-mentioned excellent effects can be achieved by a simple configuration in which the execution order of the processes in one game round is the order in which the predetermined start process is executed after the predetermined end process is executed.

Feature A2. The gaming machine according to feature A1, wherein the predetermined start execution means disables the occurrence of the predetermined start opportunity in the predetermined gaming state.

According to feature A2, since the occurrence of the predetermined start opportunity is disabled in the predetermined gaming state, it is possible to prevent the predetermined gaming state from being newly started in the middle of the predetermined gaming state. In this case, if both a predetermined start trigger and a predetermined end trigger occur in one game round, the current predetermined game state is ended by executing the predetermined end process first in the game round. Later, the predetermined game state is restarted by executing the predetermined start process later in the game round. As a result, in a configuration in which a predetermined game state is prevented from being newly started in the middle of a predetermined game state, if both a predetermined start trigger and a predetermined end trigger occur in one game round, the predetermined start trigger It is possible to create a situation in which the occurrence of an opportunity is treated as valid and a predetermined gaming state continues for a long time.

Feature A3. The gaming machine according to feature A1 or A2, wherein both the predetermined end process and the predetermined start process are executed after the game cycle operation in the game cycle executing means ends in the game cycle.

According to feature A3, since both the predetermined end process and the predetermined start process are executed after the game repeat operation ends, these processes advance the process for starting the game repeat operation and the game repeat operation. This allows the processing to be executed in a situation where other processing is not being executed, making it possible to distribute the processing load. Furthermore, even with the configuration in which the processing load is distributed in this way, the configuration has the feature A1 described above, and since the predetermined start process is executed after the predetermined end process is executed in one game round, one game If both a predetermined start trigger and a predetermined end trigger occur in a game, the predetermined end process is executed first in the game, the current predetermined gaming state is ended, and then the predetermined start is started later in the game. By executing the process, the predetermined gaming state is restarted.

Feature A4. comprising a predetermined measuring means (ceiling counter 131) for measuring the number of times the game is executed;
The number of times the game is executed as measured by the predetermined measuring means is the predetermined trigger number (in the first to fourth, seventh, and eighth embodiments, the fixed ceiling number, and in the fifth embodiment, the first ceiling number or the first ceiling number). The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A3, wherein the predetermined start trigger occurs when the number of ceilings reaches 2 (in the sixth embodiment, the number of fixed ceilings or the number of special ceilings).

According to feature A4, in a configuration in which a predetermined gaming state occurs based on a predetermined number of gaming sessions being executed, the configuration of feature A1 is provided, and the predetermined termination process is executed in one gaming session. Since the predetermined start process is executed later, if both a predetermined start trigger and a predetermined end trigger occur in one game round, the predetermined end process is executed first in that game round, so that the current predetermined game After the state is ended, the predetermined game state is restarted by executing a predetermined start process in the relevant game round. This makes it possible to increase the possibility that a predetermined gaming state will occur after a predetermined number of gaming rounds have been executed.

Feature A5. A predetermined lottery means (the main MPU 82 in the first to eighth embodiments) that executes a predetermined lottery process (a reservation information acquisition process and a win/fail judgment process executed by the main MPU 82 in the first to eighth embodiments) function to acquire pending information and to determine validity).
The game time control means controls the game time execution means so that the operation result corresponds to the result of the predetermined lottery process,
The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A4, wherein the predetermined start opportunity occurs when the predetermined lottery process results in a predetermined lottery result (time-saving result).

According to feature A5, in a configuration in which a predetermined game state occurs based on the result of a predetermined lottery process becoming a predetermined lottery result, the configuration of feature A1 is provided, and the predetermined end process is executed in one game round. Since the predetermined start process is executed after the predetermined start process is executed, if both a predetermined start trigger and a predetermined end trigger occur in one game round, the predetermined end process is executed first in the game round, thereby changing the current situation. After the predetermined game state is ended, the predetermined game state is restarted by executing a predetermined start process later in the game round. This makes it possible to increase the possibility that a predetermined gaming state will occur when the predetermined lottery process results in a predetermined lottery result.

Feature A6. comprising a specific measuring means (time saving state counter 134) for measuring the number of times the game is executed in the predetermined gaming state;
A feature characterized in that the predetermined termination trigger occurs when the number of executions of the game round measured by the specific measuring means reaches a specific trigger frequency (first time saving continuation number, second time saving continuation number). The gaming machine according to any one of A1 to A5.

According to feature A6, the predetermined gaming state ends based on the number of times the game is executed in the predetermined gaming state reaches the specific trigger number, so that the trigger for ending the predetermined gaming state is clear to the player. becomes.

Feature A7. When both the predetermined start trigger and the predetermined end trigger occur in one game round, the number of times the game round is executed in the predetermined gaming state until the predetermined end process is executed. This is set when the total number of times the game is executed in the predetermined gaming state after the predetermined start process is executed changes from a gaming state that is not the predetermined gaming state to the predetermined gaming state. The gaming machine according to feature A6, characterized in that the number of times that the predetermined gaming state can be continued may be greater than the number of times that the predetermined gaming state can be continued.

According to feature A7, when both a predetermined start trigger and a predetermined end trigger occur in one game round, the configuration of feature A1 is provided, and the predetermined start trigger is executed after the predetermined end process is executed in one game round. Since the process is executed, if both a predetermined start trigger and a predetermined end trigger occur in one game round, the predetermined end process is executed first in that game round, thereby ending the current predetermined gaming state. After that, the predetermined game state is restarted by executing the predetermined start process later in the game round. If such an event occurs, the number of games played in the predetermined gaming state until the predetermined end process is executed, and the number of games played in the predetermined gaming state after the predetermined start process is executed. The total number of times can be greater than the number of times that the predetermined gaming state can be continued, which is set when the predetermined gaming state is changed from a gaming state that is not the predetermined gaming state. This makes it possible to increase the advantage of having both a predetermined start opportunity and a predetermined end opportunity occur in one game round.

Feature A8. A predetermined ball entrance means into which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter (the second operating port 34 in the first to fifth, seventh, and eighth embodiments, and the special winning device 151 in the sixth embodiment) and,
Acquisition means (steps in the main MPU 82 in the first to fifth, seventh, and eighth embodiments) that acquires special information (second pending information) based on the game ball entering the predetermined ball entry means. a function of executing the process of S709, a function of executing the process of step S2806 in the main MPU 82 in the sixth embodiment),
A provision determination means (a function of executing the validity determination process of the main MPU 82 in the first to eighth embodiments) for determining whether or not the special information corresponds to the grant correspondence information (properity determination process); ,
A benefit for granting a benefit (open/close execution mode) to the player based on the result of the grant determination being a grant correspondence result (jackpot result) in which the special information corresponds to the grant correspondence information. A granting means (a function of executing the special electric line start process, special electric line open process, special electric line closed process, and special electric line end process of the main side MPU 82 in the first to eighth embodiments);
Predetermined ball entry control means (a function of the main side MPU 82 in the first to eighth embodiments to execute general/universal power control processing) capable of switching the predetermined ball entry means between a closed state and an open state; ,
Equipped with
The game cycle control means controls the game cycle in each game cycle, with the start of the game cycle operation and the end of the game cycle operation corresponding to the determination result of the grant determination as one game cycle. It enables the reuse operation to take place,
The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A7, wherein the predetermined gaming state is a gaming state in which the predetermined ball entering means is more likely to be in the open state than in another gaming state (normal gaming state).

According to feature A8, when special information is acquired based on a game ball entering a predetermined ball entry means that can be switched between a closed state and an open state, and the special information corresponds to provision corresponding information. In a configuration in which a bonus is given to a player, when the player is in a predetermined game state, the predetermined ball entering means is more likely to be in the open state than when the player is in a different game state. Therefore, the player expects that the predetermined gaming state will be reached and that the predetermined gaming state will continue for a long time. In this case, the configuration of feature A1 is provided, and since the predetermined start process is executed after the predetermined end process is executed in one game round, both the predetermined start trigger and the predetermined end trigger are executed in one game round. If this occurs, the current predetermined gaming state is ended by first executing the predetermined end process in the relevant game round, and then the predetermined gaming state is restored by executing the predetermined start process later in the relevant game round. will be started again. Therefore, if a predetermined end opportunity occurs, the player expects a predetermined start opportunity to occur in the game round in which the predetermined end opportunity occurs.

Note that for the configuration of features A1 to A8, features A1 to A8, features B1 to B8, features C1 to C8, features D1 to D8, features E1 to E9, features F1 to F6, features G1 to G11, and features H1 to H8, Features I1 to I5, Features J1 to J7, Features K1 to K7, Features L1 to L5, Features M1 to M4, Features N1 to N8, Features O1 to O8, Features P1 to P6, Features Q1 to Q16, Features R1 to Any one or more of R6, features S1 to S7, features T1 to T3, features U1 to U5, and features V1 to V6 may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

According to the invention related to feature group A above, it is possible to solve the following problems.

Pachinko machines, slot machines, and the like are known as types of gaming machines. These gaming machines are known to have a configuration in which an internal lottery is held based on the satisfaction of predetermined lottery conditions, and a bonus is awarded to a player according to the result of the internal lottery.

Specifically, pachinko machines have configurations in which a game ball enters a ball entry section provided in the gaming area and enters a special gaming state when a winning result is obtained in an internal lottery. A configuration is known in which the game enters a special game state based on the entry of a game ball into a game ball. When the special game state is entered, for example, a ball entering device provided in the gaming area starts to open and close, and game balls are paid out based on balls entering the ball entering device.

Here, in gaming machines such as those exemplified above, processing for advancing the game needs to be suitably executed, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Characteristics Group B>
Feature B1. Game round control means (first, fourth, fifth , a function of executing the special pattern fluctuation start process, the special pattern fluctuation process, and the special pattern confirmation process of the main side MPU 82 in the seventh to ninth embodiments);
In the game round, when it is specified that a specific termination trigger (the value of the high probability state counter 133 becomes "0" after being subtracted by 1) has occurred, the specific gaming state (high probability state) is ended. , a specific termination process that does not terminate the specific gaming state when it is determined that the specific termination trigger has not occurred (in the main MPU 82 in the first, fourth, fifth, seventh to ninth embodiments) Specific end execution means (subtraction process of the high probability state counter 133 of the main MPU 82 in the first, fourth, fifth, seventh to ninth embodiments) that executes the subtraction process of the high probability state counter 133 executed ) and
In the game round, when it is specified that a predetermined start opportunity (time saving result, ceiling time saving) has occurred, a predetermined gaming state (low probability mode and a time saving state which is the second high frequency support mode) is started, and the corresponding A predetermined start process (executed by the main MPU 82 in the first, fourth, fifth, seventh to ninth embodiments) that does not start the predetermined gaming state when it is determined that the predetermined start trigger has not occurred. A predetermined start execution means (setting for a time-saving result of the main MPU 82 in the first, fourth, fifth, seventh to ninth embodiments) that executes a time-saving result setting process or a subtraction process of the ceiling counter 131 a function of executing a process, a function of executing a subtraction process of the ceiling counter 131 of the main side MPU 82 in the first, fourth, fifth, seventh to ninth embodiments);
Equipped with
The predetermined start execution means prevents the predetermined start opportunity from occurring if the predetermined start process is executed in the specific gaming state, or prevents the predetermined start process from occurring in the specific gaming state. In this case, the occurrence of the prescribed starting opportunity shall be invalidated,
A gaming machine characterized in that the specific end process is executed after the predetermined start process is executed in one game round.

According to feature B1, the specific gaming state is ended when it is specified in the specific end process that a specific end opportunity has occurred, and when it is specified in the predetermined start process that a predetermined start opportunity has occurred. Since the predetermined gaming state is started when expects a predetermined start opportunity to occur in a game state that is not a predetermined game state.

In this case, if the predetermined start process is executed in a specific gaming state, the predetermined start opportunity does not occur, or if the predetermined start process is executed in the specific game state, the occurrence of the predetermined start opportunity becomes invalid. This makes it possible to prevent the predetermined game state from occurring overlappingly in the specific game state.

In addition, since the specific end process is executed after the predetermined start process is executed in one game round, even if the specific game state ends, if the predetermined start process is executed in the specific game state. If the predetermined start opportunity does not occur, or if the predetermined start process is executed in a specific gaming state, the occurrence of the predetermined start opportunity becomes invalid. This makes it possible to prevent the predetermined gaming state from occurring in a gaming round started in the specific gaming state even if it is the last gaming round of the specific gaming state. Therefore, it is possible to prevent excessive profits from being given to the players. Moreover, the above-mentioned excellent effects can be achieved by a simple configuration in which the execution order of the processes in one game round is the order in which the specific end process is executed after the predetermined start process is executed.

Feature B2. The gaming machine according to feature B1, wherein the specific gaming state is more advantageous to the player than the predetermined gaming state.

According to feature B2, since the specific gaming state is more advantageous for the player than the predetermined gaming state, even if the predetermined gaming state does not occur in the game round executed in the specific gaming state, it is more advantageous for the player. This makes it possible to avoid causing any major disadvantage.

Feature B3. The gaming machine according to feature B1 or B2, wherein both the specific end process and the predetermined start process are executed after the game round operation in the game round executing means ends in the game round.

According to feature B3, since both the specific end process and the predetermined start process are executed after the game repeat operation ends, these processes advance the process for starting the game repeat operation and the game repeat operation. This allows the processing to be executed in a situation where other processing is not being executed, making it possible to distribute the processing load. Further, even if the processing load is distributed in this way, the configuration has the feature B1 described above, and if the predetermined start process is executed in a specific gaming state, the predetermined start trigger does not occur, or the predetermined start trigger does not occur in the specific gaming state. In a configuration in which the occurrence of a predetermined start trigger is invalidated when the start process is executed, the specific end process is executed after the predetermined start process is executed in one game round, so that a profit is granted to the player. It is possible to prevent this from becoming excessive.

Feature B4. Predetermined lottery means (first, (a function of executing the reservation information acquisition process and the propriety determination process of the main MPU 82 in the fourth, fifth, seventh to ninth embodiments);
The game time control means controls the game time execution means so that the operation result corresponds to the result of the predetermined lottery process,
The predetermined start opportunity occurs when the result of the predetermined lottery process is a predetermined lottery result (time saving result),
According to any one of features B1 to B3, the predetermined start execution means invalidates the occurrence of the predetermined start opportunity when the predetermined start process is executed in the specific gaming state. The game machine described.

According to feature B4, in a configuration in which a predetermined gaming state occurs based on the result of a predetermined lottery process becoming a predetermined lottery result, the configuration of feature B1 is provided, and the predetermined start process is executed in the specific gaming state. In this case, in a configuration where the occurrence of a predetermined start trigger is invalidated, the specific end process is executed after the predetermined start process is executed in one game round, resulting in excessive profits being given to the player. This makes it possible to prevent this from happening.

Feature B5. comprising a predetermined measuring means (ceiling counter 131) for measuring the number of times the game is executed;
The predetermined start execution means includes, as the predetermined start process, a number update process (first, fourth , step S1503 executed by the main side MPU 82 in the fifth, seventh, and eighth embodiments, step S3703 executed by the main side MPU 82 in the ninth embodiment, and measured by the predetermined measuring means. When the number of times the game is executed reaches a predetermined number of triggers (in the first, fourth, fifth, seventh to ninth embodiments, the fixed ceiling number of times), the predetermined game is executed as the predetermined start trigger occurs. Start execution processing for starting the state (step S1506 executed by the main MPU 82 in the first, fourth, fifth, seventh, and eighth embodiments, and executed by the main MPU 82 in the ninth embodiment) Step S3705) is executed.
The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B4, wherein the number of times updating process is not executed in the specific gaming state.

According to feature B5, in a configuration in which a predetermined gaming state occurs based on a predetermined number of playing games being executed, in a specific gaming state, even if a gaming round is executed, it is not measured by the predetermined measuring means. The number update process for updating the number of times the current game is played is not executed. As a result, in a specific gaming state, not only the predetermined gaming state does not occur, but also the number of times updating process that approaches the occurrence of the predetermined gaming state can be prevented from being executed. In this case, with the configuration of feature B1 described above, the specific end process is executed after the predetermined start process is executed in one game round, so even if the specific game state is the game round where the specific game state ends, the predetermined game state is This makes it possible to prevent the number of times updating process from being executed, which brings the occurrence of the event closer to each other.

Feature B6. Acquisition means (in the first, fourth, fifth, seventh to ninth embodiments, in the main side MPU 82) that acquires special information (first reservation information, second reservation information) based on the occurrence of an acquisition opportunity a function of executing the processing of step S704 and step S709);
Attribution determination means (of the main side MPU 82 in the first, fourth, fifth, seventh to ninth embodiments) for determining whether or not the special information corresponds to the attachment correspondence information (appropriateness determination processing) function to execute validity judgment processing),
A benefit for granting a benefit (open/close execution mode) to the player based on the result of the grant determination being a grant correspondence result (jackpot result) in which the special information corresponds to the grant correspondence information. A providing means (a function of executing the special electric line start process, special electric line open process, special electric line closed process, and special electric line end process of the main side MPU 82 in the first, fourth, fifth, seventh to ninth embodiments);
Equipped with
The game cycle control means controls the game cycle in each game cycle, with the start of the game cycle operation and the end of the game cycle operation corresponding to the determination result of the grant determination as one game cycle. It enables the reuse operation to take place,
According to any one of features B1 to B5, the specific gaming state is a gaming state in which the result of the award determination has a higher probability of becoming the award corresponding result than another gaming state (normal gaming state). gaming machines.

According to feature B6, in a specific gaming state, the probability that the result of the award determination becomes the award corresponding result is high, so the specific gaming state becomes a gaming state that is advantageous for the player. In this case, it is possible to achieve the excellent effects already described.

Feature B7. A predetermined ball entrance means (second operating port 34 in the first, fourth, fifth, seventh to ninth embodiments) into which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter;
Acquisition means (in the first, fourth, fifth, and seventh to ninth embodiments, the main side a function of executing the process of step S709 in the MPU 82);
Attribution determination means (of the main side MPU 82 in the first, fourth, fifth, seventh to ninth embodiments) for determining whether or not the special information corresponds to the attachment correspondence information (appropriateness determination processing) function to execute validity judgment processing),
A benefit for granting a benefit (open/close execution mode) to the player based on the result of the grant determination being a grant correspondence result (jackpot result) in which the special information corresponds to the grant correspondence information. A providing means (a function of executing the special electric line start process, special electric line open process, special electric line closed process, and special electric line end process of the main side MPU 82 in the first, fourth, fifth, seventh to ninth embodiments);
The predetermined ball entry control means that can switch the predetermined ball entry means between a closed state and an open state (a general system of the main side MPU 82 in the first, fourth, fifth, seventh to ninth embodiments) function to execute electrical control processing),
Equipped with
The game cycle control means controls the game cycle in each game cycle, with the start of the game cycle operation and the end of the game cycle operation corresponding to the determination result of the grant determination as one game cycle. It enables the reuse operation to take place,
The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B6, wherein the predetermined gaming state is a gaming state in which the predetermined ball entering means is more likely to be in the open state than another gaming state (normal gaming state).

According to feature B7, when special information is acquired based on a game ball entering a predetermined ball entry means that is switched between a closed state and an open state, and the special information corresponds to the provision corresponding information. In a configuration in which a bonus is given to a player, when the player is in the predetermined game state, the predetermined ball entering means is more likely to be in the open state than when the player is in a different game state. Therefore, the predetermined gaming state is a gaming state that is advantageous to the player. In this case, it is possible to achieve the excellent effects already described.

Feature B8. The gaming machine according to feature B7, wherein the specific gaming state is a gaming state in which the predetermined ball entering means is more likely to be in the open state than the predetermined gaming state.

According to feature B8, the specific game state is more advantageous than the predetermined game state with respect to the ease with which the predetermined ball entering means becomes open. Therefore, even if the configuration is such that a predetermined gaming state does not occur in a game round executed in a specific gaming state, it is possible to prevent the player from being greatly disadvantaged.

Note that for the configuration of features B1 to B8, features A1 to A8, features B1 to B8, features C1 to C8, features D1 to D8, features E1 to E9, features F1 to F6, features G1 to G11, and features H1 to H8, Features I1-I5, Features J1-J7, Features K1-K7, Features L1-L5, Features M1-M4, Features N1-N8, Features O1-O8, Features P1-P6, Features Q1-Q16, Features R1- Any one or more of R6, features S1 to S7, features T1 to T3, features U1 to U5, and features V1 to V6 may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Feature C group>
Feature C1. Game round control means (main side MPU 82 in the second embodiment) that controls the game round execution means (first special figure display section 37a, second special figure display section 37b) so that the game round operation is executed in the game round. A function to execute special pattern fluctuation start processing, special pattern fluctuation processing, and special pattern confirmation processing),
a state storage means (start high certainty flag of the main side RAM 84) for storing information on the gaming state when the gaming round is started;
After the game repetition operation is completed, if it is specified that a predetermined start opportunity (time saving result, ceiling time saving) has occurred, a predetermined gaming state (a time saving state which is a low probability mode and a second high frequency support mode) is determined. ) and does not start the predetermined gaming state when it is determined that the predetermined start trigger has not occurred (setting for time-saving results executed by the main MPU 82 in the second embodiment) predetermined start execution means (a function of executing a setting process for time-saving results of the main MPU 82 in the second embodiment, a ceiling counter of the main MPU 82 in the second embodiment) 131 subtraction process),
Equipped with
The predetermined start execution means executes the predetermined start process in a situation where specific state information is stored in the state storage means (a situation where a start high certainty flag of the main side RAM 84 is set to "1"). In this case, the gaming machine is characterized in that the predetermined start opportunity is prevented from occurring or the occurrence of the predetermined start opportunity is invalidated.

According to feature C1, the predetermined gaming state is started when it is specified in the predetermined start process that a predetermined start opportunity has occurred, so a player who expects to be in the predetermined gaming state does not enter the predetermined gaming state. It is expected that a predetermined starting opportunity will occur in a gaming state that is not. In addition, since the predetermined start process is executed after the game repeat operation ends, the predetermined start process is executed in a situation where the process for starting the game repeat operation and the process for advancing the game repeat operation are not executed. This makes it possible to distribute the processing load.

In this case, if the predetermined start process is executed in a situation where the specific state information is stored in the state storage means, the predetermined start trigger is prevented from occurring or the occurrence of the predetermined start trigger is invalidated. This makes it possible to prevent the predetermined gaming state from occurring overlappingly in the gaming state that triggers the storage of specific state information. Further, the state storage means stores information on the game state when a game round is started. As a result, in a configuration in which a predetermined start process is executed after a game cycle operation is completed, the game state when a game cycle is started is the gaming state that triggers the storage of specific state information, and the predetermined start process is executed in the game cycle. Even if the end condition for the game state is satisfied before the start process is executed, it is possible to prevent the predetermined game state from occurring in the game round. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a predetermined gaming state from occurring in a game round in which a profit for a gaming state that is a trigger for storing specific state information is given, and to prevent excessive benefits from being given to the player. It is possible to prevent this from happening.

Feature C2. The state storage means stores the specific state information when the gaming state when the game round is started is a specific gaming state (high probability state),
When this gaming machine specifies that a specific termination trigger (the value of the high probability state counter 133 becomes "0" after subtraction by 1) has occurred after the game repeat operation is completed, A specific termination process (executed by the main MPU 82 in the second embodiment) that terminates a specific gaming state (high probability state) and does not terminate the specific gaming state when it is determined that the specific termination opportunity has not occurred. The present invention is characterized by comprising a specific end execution means (a function for executing a subtraction process of the high probability state counter 133 of the main side MPU 82 in the second embodiment) for executing the subtraction process of the high probability state counter 133 of the main side MPU 82 in the second embodiment. The gaming machine according to feature C1.

According to feature C2, the specific gaming state is ended when it is specified in the specific ending process that a specific ending opportunity has occurred, so a player who expects to be in the specific gaming state is not allowed to enter the specific gaming state. We hope that no specific termination triggers will occur. In addition, since the specific end process is executed after the game repeat operation ends, the specific end process is executed in a situation where the process for starting the game repeat operation and the process for advancing the game repeat operation are not executed. This makes it possible to distribute the processing load.

In this case, both the specific end process and the predetermined start process will be executed after the game repeat operation ends. Then, depending on the execution order of these specific end processes and predetermined start processes, even if the game is started in a specific gaming state, the predetermined start process may be executed after entering a gaming state that is not a specific gaming state. . On the other hand, in a game round that has the configuration of feature C1 and is started in a specific gaming state, the specific state information is stored in the information storage means when the game round is started, and the specific state information is stored in the state storage means. When a predetermined start process is executed in a situation where information is stored, the predetermined start trigger is prevented from occurring or the occurrence of the predetermined start trigger is invalidated. Therefore, regardless of the execution order of the specific end process and the predetermined start process, it is possible to prevent the predetermined game state from occurring in a game round started in the specific game state.

Feature C3. The state storage means stores the specific state information when the gaming state when the game round is started is a specific gaming state (high probability state),
The gaming machine according to feature C1 or C2, wherein the specific gaming state is more advantageous to the player than the predetermined gaming state.

According to feature C3, the specific gaming state is more advantageous for the player than the predetermined gaming state, so even if the predetermined gaming state does not occur in a game round that is started in the specific gaming state, the player is not This makes it possible to avoid causing any major disadvantage.

Feature C4. Acquisition means that acquires special information (first pending information, second pending information) based on the occurrence of an acquisition opportunity (in the second embodiment, a function that executes the processing of step S704 and step S709 in the main MPU 82) and,
A grant determination means (a function of executing the propriety determination process of the main MPU 82 in the second embodiment) that performs a grant determination (validity determination process) as to whether the special information corresponds to the grant correspondence information;
A benefit for granting a benefit (open/close execution mode) to the player based on the result of the grant determination being a grant correspondence result (jackpot result) in which the special information corresponds to the grant correspondence information. A provision means (a function of executing the special electric line start process, special electric line open process, special electric line closed process, and special electric line end process of the main side MPU 82 in the second embodiment);
Equipped with
The game cycle control means controls the game cycle in each game cycle, with the start of the game cycle operation and the end of the game cycle operation corresponding to the determination result of the grant determination as one game cycle. It enables the reuse operation to take place,
The gaming machine according to feature C2 or C3, wherein the specific gaming state is a gaming state in which the result of the award determination has a higher probability of becoming the award corresponding result than another gaming state (normal gaming state).

According to feature C4, in a specific gaming state, the probability that the result of the award determination becomes an award corresponding result is high, so the specific gaming state becomes a gaming state that is advantageous for the player. In this case, it is possible to achieve the excellent effects already described.

Feature C5. A predetermined lottery means (a pending information acquisition process of the main MPU 82 in the second embodiment) that executes a predetermined lottery process (a pending information acquisition process and a validity determination process executed by the main MPU 82 in the second embodiment) and a function to execute validity judgment processing),
The game time control means controls the game time execution means so that the operation result corresponds to the result of the predetermined lottery process,
The predetermined start opportunity occurs when the result of the predetermined lottery process is a predetermined lottery result (time saving result),
The predetermined start execution means invalidates the occurrence of the predetermined start trigger when the predetermined start processing is executed in a situation where the specific state information is stored in the state storage means. The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C4.

According to feature C5, in a configuration in which a predetermined gaming state occurs based on the result of a predetermined lottery process becoming a predetermined lottery result, the feature C1 is provided, and the gaming state when a gaming round is started is provided. If the information is stored in the state storage means and the predetermined start process is executed in a situation where the specific state information is stored in the state storage means, the occurrence of the predetermined start trigger is invalidated, so that the game round is started. Even if the gaming state in the case where the specific state information is stored is the gaming state that triggers the storage of specific state information, and the end condition of the gaming state is satisfied before the predetermined start process is executed in the relevant gaming round, It becomes possible to prevent a predetermined gaming state from occurring in the game.

Feature C6. comprising a predetermined measuring means (ceiling counter 131) for measuring the number of times the game is executed;
The predetermined start execution means includes, as the predetermined start process, a number update process (second embodiment) of updating the number of executions of the game round measured by the predetermined measuring means when the game round is executed. Step S2103) executed by the main MPU 82 in step S2103), and when the number of executions of the game round measured by the predetermined measuring means reaches a predetermined trigger number (in the second embodiment, the fixed ceiling number) It executes a start execution process (step S2106 executed by the main MPU 82 in the second embodiment) to start the predetermined gaming state as a predetermined start opportunity occurs,
The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C5, characterized in that when the specific state information is stored in the state storage means, the number of times updating process is not executed.

According to feature C6, in a configuration in which a predetermined gaming state occurs based on a predetermined number of playing games being executed, if the specific state information is stored in the state storage means, a gaming round is executed. Even if the number of times the game is played is updated by the predetermined measuring means, the number of times updating process is not executed. Thereby, in the gaming state that is the trigger for storing the specific state information, not only the predetermined gaming state does not occur, but also the number of times updating process that approaches the occurrence of the predetermined gaming state can be prevented from being executed. In this case, the configuration of feature C1 is provided, and information on the gaming state when a gaming round is started is stored in the state storage means, and a predetermined start is made in a situation where specific state information is stored in the state storage means. If the process is executed, the number of times update process for updating the number of times the game has been executed as measured by the predetermined measuring means is not executed, so a game where the game state that is the trigger for storing the specific state information ends. It is possible to prevent execution of the number-of-times updating process that brings the occurrence of the predetermined gaming state closer even if the number of times the predetermined gaming state occurs.

Feature C7. A predetermined ball entrance means (second operating port 34 in the second embodiment) into which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter;
an acquisition means (in the second embodiment, a function of executing the process of step S709 in the main MPU 82) that acquires special information (second pending information) based on the game ball entering the predetermined ball entry means; ,
A grant determination means (a function of executing the propriety determination process of the main MPU 82 in the second embodiment) that performs a grant determination (validity determination process) as to whether the special information corresponds to the grant correspondence information;
A benefit for granting a benefit (open/close execution mode) to the player based on the result of the grant determination being a grant correspondence result (jackpot result) in which the special information corresponds to the grant correspondence information. A provision means (a function of executing the special electric line start process, special electric line open process, special electric line closed process, and special electric line end process of the main side MPU 82 in the second embodiment);
Predetermined ball entry control means (a function of executing the general-purpose power control process of the main side MPU 82 in the second embodiment) capable of switching the predetermined ball entry means between a closed state and an open state;
Equipped with
The game time control means sets the game time when the game time operation is started and ends as a state corresponding to the determination result of the grant determination as one game time, and controls the game time in each game time. This is to enable the game reuse operation to be performed,
The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C6, wherein the predetermined gaming state is a gaming state in which the predetermined ball entering means is more likely to be in the open state than another gaming state (normal gaming state).

According to feature C7, when special information is acquired based on a game ball entering a predetermined ball entry means that is switched between a closed state and an open state, and the special information corresponds to the provision corresponding information. In a configuration in which a bonus is given to a player, when the player is in the predetermined game state, the predetermined ball entering means is more likely to be in the open state than when the player is in a different game state. Therefore, the predetermined gaming state is a gaming state that is advantageous to the player. In this case, it is possible to achieve the excellent effects already described.

Feature C8. The state storage means stores the specific state information when the gaming state when the game round is started is a specific gaming state (high probability state),
The gaming machine according to feature C7, wherein the specific gaming state is a gaming state in which the predetermined ball entering means is more likely to be in the open state than the predetermined gaming state.

According to feature C8, the specific game state is more advantageous than the predetermined game state with respect to the ease with which the predetermined ball entering means becomes open. Therefore, even if the configuration is such that a predetermined gaming state does not occur in a game round executed in a specific gaming state, it is possible to prevent the player from being greatly disadvantaged.

Note that for the configuration of features C1 to C8, features A1 to A8, features B1 to B8, features C1 to C8, features D1 to D8, features E1 to E9, features F1 to F6, features G1 to G11, and features H1 to H8, Features I1-I5, Features J1-J7, Features K1-K7, Features L1-L5, Features M1-M4, Features N1-N8, Features O1-O8, Features P1-P6, Features Q1-Q16, Features R1- Any one or more of R6, features S1 to S7, features T1 to T3, features U1 to U5, and features V1 to V6 may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

According to the inventions related to the feature B group and the feature C group, the following problems can be solved.

Pachinko machines, slot machines, and the like are known as types of gaming machines. These gaming machines are known to have a configuration in which an internal lottery is held based on the fulfillment of predetermined lottery conditions, and a bonus is awarded to a player according to the result of the internal lottery.

Specifically, pachinko machines have a configuration in which a game ball enters a ball entry section provided in a gaming area, and when a winning result is obtained in an internal lottery, the machine enters a special gaming state, and A configuration is known in which the game enters a special game state based on a game ball entering the game ball. When the state shifts to the special game state, for example, a ball entering device provided in the gaming area starts to open and close, and game balls are paid out based on balls entering the ball entering device.

Here, in gaming machines such as those exemplified above, it is necessary to appropriately provide profits to players, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Characteristic group D>
Feature D1. Game round control means (main side in the third embodiment) that controls the game round execution means (first special figure display section 37a, second special figure display section 37b) so that the game round operation is executed in the game round. A function of executing the special figure fluctuation start process, the special figure fluctuation process, and the special figure confirmation process of the MPU 82),
A specific lottery that executes a specific end lottery process (fall determination process executed by the main MPU 82 in the third embodiment) that determines whether or not to end the specific gaming state in a specific gaming state (high probability state). means (a function of executing the fall determination process of the main MPU 82 in the third embodiment);
A predetermined lottery means (a pending information acquisition process of the main MPU 82 in the third embodiment) that executes a predetermined lottery process (a pending information acquisition process and a validity determination process executed by the main MPU 82 in the third embodiment) and a function to execute validity judgment processing);
A predetermined benefit granting means (main in the third embodiment) for granting a predetermined benefit (second high-frequency support mode) to the player based on the result of the predetermined lottery process being a predetermined lottery result (time-saving result). (a function to execute setting processing for time-saving results of the side MPU 82);
Equipped with
A gaming machine characterized in that the specific lottery means executes the specific end lottery process before the predetermined lottery process is executed in one game round.

According to feature D1, when the specific end lottery process results in a lottery result that ends the specific gaming state, the specific gaming state is ended, and the predetermined benefit is awarded based on the predetermined lottery result in the predetermined lottery process. Therefore, a player who expects to be in a specific gaming state will receive the specified benefit in the hope that the specific end lottery process in the specific gaming state will not result in a lottery result that ends the specific gaming state. A player who expects to get a predetermined lottery result in a predetermined lottery process. In this case, the specific end lottery process is executed before the predetermined lottery process is executed in one game round. As a result, if the lottery result of the specific end lottery process in a game round in a specific gaming state is a lottery result that ends the specific gaming state, the predetermined lottery process is executed after the lottery result is a lottery result that ends the specific gaming state. Therefore, in the game round where the specific gaming state ends, it becomes possible to execute the predetermined lottery process in the situation where the specific gaming state ends. Therefore, it becomes possible to suitably perform the lottery process.

Feature D2. The gaming machine according to feature D1, wherein the predetermined lottery means changes the execution mode of the predetermined lottery process depending on whether or not the specific gaming state is present.

According to feature D2, since the execution mode of the predetermined lottery process differs depending on whether or not the specific gaming state is in effect, the player pays attention to the gaming state at the timing when the predetermined lottery process is executed. In this case, if the configuration of feature D1 is provided, and the lottery result of the specific end lottery process in a game round in a specific gaming state is a lottery result that ends the specific gaming state, it is the lottery result that ends the specific gaming state. Since the predetermined lottery process is executed after the specific game state ends, the predetermined lottery process is executed in the situation where the specific game state ends in the game round where the specific game state ends. Therefore, in the predetermined lottery process, it is possible to treat a game round in which a specific gaming state ends as a gaming round that is not in a specific gaming state.

Feature D3. A specific termination process for terminating the specific gaming state based on the result of the specific termination lottery process being a termination result (falling result) (step S2208 executed by the main MPU 82 in the third embodiment) (a function of executing the process of step S2208 of the main MPU 82 in the third embodiment),
The gaming machine according to feature D1 or D2, wherein when the result of the specific end lottery process is the end result, the specific end lottery process is executed before the predetermined lottery process is executed.

According to feature D3, if the result of the specific end lottery process in a game round in a specific game state is the end result, the specific game state can be ended before the predetermined lottery process is executed in the game round. It becomes possible.

Feature D4. A variable ball entry means (special electric prize winning device 32) provided in a game area where game balls flow down and switchable between an open state and a closed state;
Variable ball entry control means that executes variable ball entry control that switches the variable ball entry means to the open state and then to the closed state (special call start processing, special call opening process, and special call processing of the main side MPU 82 in the third embodiment) function to execute processing during closure),
A special transition means (a special transition means (first) for shifting the gaming state to a special gaming state (opening/closing execution mode) in which the variable entering ball entry control is executed based on the result of the predetermined lottery processing being a special lottery result (jackpot result). function of executing the special power start process of the main side MPU 82 in the embodiment of No. 3);
The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D3, characterized by comprising:

According to feature D4, in a configuration in which a special game state occurs in which variable ball entry control is executed for the variable ball entry means based on the result of the predetermined drawing processing being a special drawing result, the result of the predetermined drawing processing is A predetermined benefit is given based on the predetermined lottery result. This makes it possible to determine whether or not to provide a predetermined benefit by using the configuration of the predetermined lottery process that determines whether or not to generate a special gaming state.

Feature D5. The gaming machine according to feature D4, wherein the specific gaming state is a gaming state in which there is a higher probability that the result of the predetermined lottery process will be the special lottery result than in another gaming state (normal gaming state).

According to feature D5, the probability that a special gaming state will occur in a specific gaming state is high, so that the specific gaming state becomes a gaming state that is advantageous for the player. In this case, with the configuration of feature D1 described above, in a game round where the result of the specific lottery process is to end the specific game state, the predetermined lottery process is executed after the specific game state ends. This makes it possible to suppress the frequency of game times in which a predetermined lottery process is executed in a specific game state.

Feature D6. Specific updating means (type random number counter C2) for updating numerical information;
When the result of the predetermined lottery process is the special lottery result, a special type lottery process (executed by the main MPU 82 in the third embodiment) is performed using the numerical information updated by the specific updating means. By executing the process of step S2211), the means (the process of step S2211 of the main MPU 82 in the third embodiment) for determining the types of benefits (opening/closing execution mode, win/fail lottery mode, and support mode) that can be given to the player function to perform processing), and
When the result of the predetermined lottery process is the predetermined lottery result, the numerical information updated by the specific updating means is used to perform a predetermined type lottery process (executed by the main MPU 82 in the third embodiment). A means for determining the type of the predetermined benefit that can be given to the player by executing the process in step S2217 (a function of the main MPU 82 in the third embodiment to execute the process in step S2217);
The gaming machine according to feature D4 or D5, characterized by comprising:

According to feature D6, if the result of the predetermined lottery process is a special lottery result, the type of benefit selected by the special type lottery process is granted, so it is possible to diversify the manner in which the benefit is granted. becomes. Furthermore, if the result of the predetermined lottery process is a predetermined lottery result, a predetermined benefit of the type selected by the predetermined type lottery process is awarded, so it is possible to diversify the manner in which the predetermined benefit is granted. . In this case, in a configuration in which the numerical information of the specific updating means is used in the special type lottery process, the numerical information of the specific updating means is also used in the predetermined type lottery process. This makes it possible to determine the type of predetermined benefit to be given when a predetermined lottery result is obtained by using the configuration for determining the type of benefit to be given when a special lottery result is obtained.

Feature D7. Any one of features D1 to D6, characterized in that the predetermined benefit awarding means does not award the predetermined benefit even if the result of the predetermined lottery process is the predetermined lottery result in the specific gaming state. 1. The gaming machine described in 1.

According to feature D7, even if the result of the predetermined lottery process is the predetermined lottery result in a specific gaming state, the predetermined benefit is not awarded, thereby preventing the predetermined benefit from being excessively granted. It becomes possible. In this case, if the configuration of feature D1 is provided, and the lottery result of the specific end lottery process in a game round in a specific gaming state is a lottery result that ends the specific gaming state, it is the lottery result that ends the specific gaming state. Since the predetermined lottery process is executed after the specific game state ends, the predetermined lottery process is executed in the situation where the specific game state ends in the game round where the specific game state ends. Therefore, it is possible to provide a predetermined benefit in a game round in which a specific game state ends.

Feature D8. A predetermined ball entry means (second operating port 34) into which a game ball flowing down the gaming area can enter;
Acquisition means (a function of executing the process of step S709 of the main side MPU 82 in the third embodiment) that acquires special information (second pending information) based on the game ball entering the predetermined ball entry means; ,
A predetermined ball entry control means (a function of executing the general card/university power control process of the main side MPU 82 in the third embodiment) capable of switching the predetermined ball entry means between a closed state and an open state;
Equipped with
The predetermined lottery means executes the predetermined lottery process based on the acquisition of the special information,
The predetermined benefit granting means changes the gaming state to a predetermined gaming state (second high-frequency support mode) in which the predetermined ball entry means is more likely to be in the open state than a different gaming state (normal gaming state), as the provision of the predetermined privilege. The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D7, characterized in that the game is transferred.

According to feature D8, special information is acquired based on the game ball entering the predetermined ball entering means that is switched between the closed state and the open state, and the predetermined lottery process is executed by obtaining the special information. In this configuration, the predetermined ball entering means is more likely to be in the open state when the game is in the predetermined game state than when it is in a different game state. Therefore, the player expects that the predetermined gaming state will be reached and that the predetermined gaming state will continue for a long time. In this case, it is possible to achieve the excellent effects already described.

Note that for the configuration of features D1 to D8, features A1 to A8, features B1 to B8, features C1 to C8, features D1 to D8, features E1 to E9, features F1 to F6, features G1 to G11, features H1 to H8, Features I1-I5, Features J1-J7, Features K1-K7, Features L1-L5, Features M1-M4, Features N1-N8, Features O1-O8, Features P1-P6, Features Q1-Q16, Features R1- Any one or more of R6, features S1 to S7, features T1 to T3, features U1 to U5, and features V1 to V6 may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

According to the invention related to the feature group D described above, it is possible to solve the following problems.

Pachinko machines, slot machines, and the like are known as types of gaming machines. These gaming machines are known to have a configuration in which an internal lottery is held based on the fulfillment of predetermined lottery conditions, and a bonus is awarded to a player according to the result of the internal lottery.

Specifically, pachinko machines have a configuration in which a game ball enters a ball entry section provided in a gaming area, and when a winning result is obtained in an internal lottery, the machine enters a special gaming state, and A configuration is known in which the game enters a special game state based on a game ball entering the game ball. When the state shifts to the special game state, for example, a ball entering device provided in the gaming area starts to open and close, and game balls are paid out based on balls entering the ball entering device.

Here, in gaming machines such as those exemplified above, it is necessary to suitably execute the lottery process, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Characteristic group E>
Feature E1. Game round control means (first to twelfth embodiments) that controls the game round execution means (first special figure display section 37a, second special figure display section 37b) so that the game round operation is executed in the game round. function of executing the special figure fluctuation start process, the special figure fluctuation process, and the special figure confirmation process of the main side MPU 82);
a predetermined measuring means (ceiling counter 131) for measuring the number of times the game is executed;
A number updating means (in the first, third to eighth embodiments, step S1503 in the main MPU 82 In the second embodiment, the function to execute the process of step S2103 in the main MPU 82, in the ninth embodiment, the function to execute the process of step S3703 in the main MPU 82, 10th to 12th In the embodiment, a function of executing the process of step S4503 in the main MPU 82);
The number of execution times of the game game measured by the predetermined measuring means is the predetermined trigger number (in the first to fourth and sixth to twelfth embodiments, the fixed ceiling number, in the fifth embodiment, the first ceiling number or A predetermined benefit granting means (in the first, third to eighth embodiments, executes the process of step S1506 in the main MPU 82 In the second embodiment, the function to execute the process in step S2106 in the main MPU 82, in the ninth embodiment, the function to execute the process in step S3705 in the main MPU 82, in the tenth to twelfth embodiments. A function of executing the process of step S4505 in the main MPU 82);
If it is determined that an information abnormality has occurred in the predetermined storage means (main side RAM 84) when the supply of operating power is started, the abnormality handling process (first to third, sixth to twelfth embodiments) is performed. In this case, there is an error in executing step S121 executed by the main MPU 82, step S2421 executed by the main MPU 82 in the fourth embodiment, and step S2621 executed by the main MPU 82 in the fifth embodiment. Corresponding means (in the first to third and sixth to twelfth embodiments, the function of executing the process of step S121 in the main side MPU 82, in the fourth embodiment, the function of executing the process of step S2421 in the main side MPU 82, In the fifth embodiment, a function of executing the process of step S2621 in the main MPU 82),
Based on the occurrence of the information abnormality, the information of the predetermined measuring means is set to a predetermined initial value ("500" in the first to fourth and sixth to twelfth embodiments, "800" in the fifth embodiment). ”) (step S122 executed by the main MPU 82 in the first to third and sixth to twelfth embodiments, and executed by the main MPU 82 in the fourth embodiment) A predetermined setting means (in the first to third and sixth to twelfth embodiments, step S122 in the main MPU 82) is executed (step S2506 in the fifth embodiment, step S2622 in the main MPU 82 in the fifth embodiment). a function of executing a process, a function of executing the process of step S2506 in the main side MPU 82 in the fourth embodiment, a function of executing the process of step S2622 in the main side MPU 82 in the fifth embodiment),
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature E1, a predetermined benefit is given when the number of times a game is played, as measured by the predetermined measuring means, reaches a predetermined number of triggers. It becomes possible to provide a predetermined benefit. Further, if an information abnormality occurs in the predetermined storage means when the supply of operating power is started, the abnormality handling process is executed, so that it becomes possible to deal with the occurrence of the information abnormality. In this case, the information of the predetermined measuring means becomes the predetermined initial value based on the occurrence of the information abnormality. If an information abnormality occurs, there is a possibility that the information of the predetermined measurement means is also abnormal information, but in such a situation, the information of the predetermined measurement means becomes the predetermined initial value, so the predetermined measurement It is possible to prevent a game from being started with abnormal information on the means.

Feature E2. Means for executing profit granting processing (appropriateness determination processing) in a manner corresponding to the set value set as the target of use from among multiple levels of set values corresponding to the player's advantage level (appropriateness determination in the main MPU 82) function to perform processing), and
When the supply of operating power is started, the setting value that is to be used can be changed based on the predetermined related operation (setting change operation) being performed (setting value update processing is not possible). situation generating means (in the first to third and sixth to twelfth embodiments, the function of executing the process of step S117 in the main MPU 82, in the fifth embodiment, a function of executing the process of step S2617 in the MPU 82);
Equipped with
The gaming machine according to feature E1, wherein the predetermined setting means does not execute the predetermined setting process in the setting possible situation.

According to feature E2, since the configuration is such that the setting value to be used is set from among the setting values in multiple stages corresponding to the player's advantage level, the player can use the more advantageous setting value. It is to be expected that In this case, since the information of the predetermined measuring means is not set to the predetermined initial value in the setting possible situation, it is not possible to maintain the information of the predetermined measuring means at the information before the supply of operating power is stopped even if the setting possible situation occurs. It becomes possible. This configuration has the feature E1 described above, and the information of the predetermined measuring means becomes a predetermined initial value based on the occurrence of an information abnormality, so that the game is started while the information of the predetermined measuring means is abnormal information. It is possible to prevent this from happening.

Feature E3. The abnormality handling means stores abnormality handling information (information of "1") in the abnormality handling storage area (gaming stop flag of the main side RAM 84) in the abnormality handling process,
This gaming machine includes a means for initializing the abnormality handling storage area when the setting possible situation occurs (in the first to third and fifth to twelfth embodiments, by means of setting value update processing in the main MPU 82). The gaming machine according to feature E2, characterized in that the gaming machine is equipped with a function for executing RAM clearing.

According to feature E3, in a configuration in which it is necessary to generate a settable situation in order to delete the abnormality response information stored based on the occurrence of an information abnormality, the information of the predetermined measurement means is set in a predetermined manner in the settable situation. The information of the predetermined measuring means becomes the predetermined initial value when the abnormality response information is stored, instead of being the initial value of the error response information. As a result, in a setting possible situation, it is only necessary to initialize the abnormality handling storage area regardless of whether abnormality handling information is stored, and execution of processing in a setting possible situation depends on whether or not abnormality handling information is stored. There is no need to differ in content. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the processing load in the setting possible situation.

Feature E4. The abnormality handling means stores abnormality handling information (information of "1") in the abnormality handling storage area (gaming stop flag of the main side RAM 84) in the abnormality handling process,
This gaming machine is
Means for executing profit granting processing (appropriateness determination processing) in a manner corresponding to the setting value set as the target of use from among the setting values at multiple stages corresponding to the player's advantage level (appropriateness determination processing in the main side MPU 82) function to perform processing), and
When the supply of operating power is started, the setting value can be changed based on the predetermined related operation (setting change operation) being performed (setting value update processing is not possible). a situation generating means (a function for executing the process of step S2417 of the main MPU 82 in the fourth embodiment),
means for initializing the abnormality handling storage area when the settable situation occurs (a function for executing the processing of step S2504 and step S2505 of the main MPU 82 in the fourth embodiment);
Equipped with
The predetermined setting means does not execute the predetermined setting process when the setting possible situation occurs in a situation where the abnormality handling information is not stored, but executes the predetermined setting process when the abnormality handling information is stored. The gaming machine according to feature E1, wherein the predetermined setting process is executed when a setting possible situation occurs.

According to feature E4, since the configuration is such that the setting value to be used is set from among the setting values in multiple stages corresponding to the player's advantage level, the player can use the more advantageous setting value. It is to be expected that Further, in order to erase the stored abnormality response information based on the occurrence of an information abnormality, it is necessary to generate a setting enable state. In this case, if a setting possible situation occurs in a situation where the abnormality response information is not stored, the information of the predetermined measurement means will not become the predetermined initial value, and the setting will be made in a situation where the abnormality response information is stored. When a possible situation occurs, the information of the predetermined measuring means becomes the predetermined initial value. As a result, when a setting possible situation occurs, the information of the specified measurement means is basically prevented from becoming the specified initial value, and when a setting possible situation occurs, it is adjusted accordingly in order to erase the abnormality response information. It becomes possible to set the information of the predetermined measuring means to a predetermined initial value.

Feature E5. means (first to first) for executing initialization processing of predetermined information on the predetermined storage means based on the fact that a specific related operation (RAM clearing operation) is being performed when the supply of operating power is started; 3. In the sixth to twelfth embodiments, the function of executing the process of step S119 in the main side MPU 82, in the fourth embodiment, the function of executing the process of step S2419 in the main side MPU 82, and in the fifth embodiment, the function of executing the process of step S2419 in the main side MPU 82. A function of executing the process of step S2619 in the side MPU 82),
Even if the initialization process is executed, the information of the predetermined measurement means is not initialized,
The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E4, wherein the predetermined setting means does not execute the predetermined setting process even if the initialization process is executed.

According to feature E5, in a configuration in which initialization processing of predetermined information is performed on the predetermined storage means based on the fact that a specific related operation is being performed when the supply of operating power is started, the initialization processing is performed on the predetermined storage means. Even if the conversion process is executed, the information of the predetermined measuring means is not set to the predetermined initial value. Thereby, even if the initialization process is executed, it is possible to maintain the information of the predetermined measuring means at the information before the supply of operating power was stopped. This configuration has the feature E1 described above, and the information of the predetermined measuring means becomes a predetermined initial value based on the occurrence of an information abnormality, so that the game is started while the information of the predetermined measuring means is abnormal information. It is possible to prevent this from happening.

Feature E6. Means for shifting the gaming state to a special gaming state (opening/closing execution mode) advantageous to the player (a function of executing the special electric start processing of the main MPU 82 in the first to fourth and sixth to twelfth embodiments);
Means for making the information of the predetermined measuring means become the predetermined initial value upon transition to the special gaming state (step in the main MPU 82 in the first, fourth, eighth, and ninth embodiments) The function of executing the process of S1005, the function of executing the process of step S1905 in the main side MPU 82 in the second embodiment, the function of executing the process of step S2305 in the main side MPU 82 in the third embodiment, the sixth embodiment In the embodiment, the function of executing the process of step S3109 in the main side MPU 82, in the seventh embodiment, the function of executing the process of step S3305 in the main side MPU 82, and in the tenth to twelfth embodiments, the function of executing the process of step S4208 in the main side MPU 82. functions) and
The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E5, characterized by comprising:

According to feature E6, in a configuration in which the information of the predetermined measuring means becomes a predetermined initial value upon transition to the special gaming state, even if an information abnormality occurs when the supply of operating power is started, The information of the predetermined measuring means becomes the predetermined initial value. As a result, if an information abnormality occurs, the number of game runs required to be awarded a predetermined benefit can be changed to the number of game runs required to be given a prescribed benefit after a special gaming state has occurred. It is possible to make it the same as the number of times.

Feature E7. Equipped with a means (a function for executing special electric start processing in the main MPU 82) for shifting the gaming state to a special gaming state (opening/closing execution mode) advantageous to the player,
The predetermined benefit granting means specifies, based on information measured by the predetermined measuring means, that the number of times the game is executed after the special gaming state ends is the predetermined number of triggers. If the above-mentioned specified benefits are granted,
the number of times the game is to be executed ("800" in the fifth embodiment) until it is specified that the number of times the game has been executed has reached the predetermined number of triggers after the predetermined setting process is executed; The number of executions of the game session ("500" in the fifth embodiment) required until it is determined that the number of executions of the game session has reached the predetermined number of triggers after the special gaming state ends is different. The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E5.

According to feature E7, in a configuration in which a predetermined benefit is granted when the number of executions of a game session executed after the occurrence of a special gaming state reaches a predetermined trigger count, the number of executions of a game session after an information abnormality occurs. The number of times the game is played until it is determined that the number of times the game has been executed has reached the predetermined number of triggers, and the number of times that the game has been played is required until it is determined that the number of times that the game has been executed has reached the predetermined number of triggers after the special gaming state ends. The number of executions is different. This makes it possible to vary the number of times the game must be executed before a predetermined benefit is granted between after the special game state ends and after an information abnormality occurs.

Feature E8. After the predetermined setting process is executed, the number of executions of the game session required until it is specified that the number of executions of the game session has reached the predetermined number of triggers is longer than the number of executions of the game session after the special gaming state ends. The gaming machine according to feature E7, wherein the number of executions of the game is greater than the number of executions of the game that is required until it is specified that the number of times of execution has reached the predetermined number of triggers.

According to feature E8, the number of times the game time is executed after the special game state ends is longer than the number of times the game time is executed after the information abnormality occurs until it is determined that the number of game times has reached the predetermined trigger count. If the number of executions is greater than the number of executions required for the game to be determined to have reached the predetermined number of triggers, and an act that fraudulently causes an information abnormality is performed, the predetermined benefit will not be given after that. It becomes possible to increase the number of times the game is played before being awarded.

Feature E9. A predetermined ball entrance means into which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter (the second operating port 34 in the first to fifth and seventh to ninth embodiments, the sixth and tenth to twelfth embodiments) Now, the special winning device 151),
Acquisition means (steps in the main side MPU 82 in the first to fifth and seventh to ninth embodiments) that acquires special information (second pending information) based on the game ball entering the predetermined ball entry means. (a function of executing the process of step S709, a function of executing the process of step S2806 in the main MPU 82 in the sixth embodiment, a function of executing the process of step S3901 in the main MPU 82 in the tenth to twelfth embodiments). ,
A provision determination means (a function of executing the validity determination process of the main MPU 82 in the first to twelfth embodiments) for determining whether or not the special information corresponds to the grant correspondence information (appropriateness determination process); ,
A benefit for granting a benefit (open/close execution mode) to the player based on the result of the grant determination being a grant correspondence result (jackpot result) in which the special information corresponds to the grant correspondence information. A granting means (a function of executing the special electric line start process, special electric line open process, special electric line closed process, and special electric line end process of the main side MPU 82 in the first to twelfth embodiments);
Predetermined ball entry control means (a function of the main side MPU 82 in the first to twelfth embodiments to execute general/universal electricity control processing) capable of switching the predetermined ball entry means between a closed state and an open state; ,
Equipped with
The game time control means sets the game time when the game time operation is started and ends as a state corresponding to the determination result of the grant determination as one game time, and controls the game time in each game time. This is to enable the game repeat operation to be performed,
The predetermined benefit granting means changes the gaming state to a predetermined gaming state (second high-frequency support mode) in which the predetermined ball entry means is more likely to be in the open state than in a different gaming state (normal gaming state) in order to provide the predetermined privilege. The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E8, characterized in that the game is transferred.

According to feature E9, when special information is acquired based on a game ball entering a predetermined ball entry means that is switched between a closed state and an open state, and the special information corresponds to the provision corresponding information. In a configuration in which a bonus is given to a player, when the player is in the predetermined game state, the predetermined ball entering means is more likely to be in the open state than when the player is in a different game state. Therefore, the predetermined gaming state is a gaming state that is advantageous to the player. In this case, it is possible to achieve the excellent effects already described.

Note that for the configuration of features E1 to E9, features A1 to A8, features B1 to B8, features C1 to C8, features D1 to D8, features E1 to E9, features F1 to F6, features G1 to G11, and features H1 to H8, Features I1-I5, Features J1-J7, Features K1-K7, Features L1-L5, Features M1-M4, Features N1-N8, Features O1-O8, Features P1-P6, Features Q1-Q16, Features R1- Any one or more of R6, features S1 to S7, features T1 to T3, features U1 to U5, and features V1 to V6 may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

According to the invention related to the feature group E, the following problems can be solved.

Pachinko machines, slot machines, and the like are known as types of gaming machines. These gaming machines are known to have a configuration in which an internal lottery is held based on the fulfillment of predetermined lottery conditions, and a bonus is awarded to a player according to the result of the internal lottery.

Specifically, pachinko machines have a configuration in which a game ball enters a ball entry section provided in a gaming area, and when a winning result is obtained in an internal lottery, the machine enters a special gaming state, and A configuration is known in which the game enters a special game state based on a game ball entering the game ball. When the state shifts to the special game state, for example, a ball entering device provided in the gaming area starts to open and close, and game balls are paid out based on balls entering the ball entering device.

Here, in a gaming machine such as the one exemplified above, it is necessary to play the game in a suitable manner, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Characteristic group F>
Feature F1. Game round control means (first to fifth, seventh ~Function to execute the special figure fluctuation start process, the special figure fluctuation process, and the special figure confirmation process of the main side MPU 82 in the twelfth embodiment);
a predetermined measuring means (ceiling counter 131) for measuring the number of times the game is executed;
A number updating means (in the first, third to fifth, seventh, and eighth embodiments) that updates the number of executions of the game round measured by the predetermined measuring means when the game round is executed. A function to execute the process in step S1503 in the main MPU 82, a function to execute the process in step S2103 in the main MPU 82 in the second embodiment, a function to execute the process in step S3703 in the main MPU 82 in the ninth embodiment. , in the tenth to twelfth embodiments, the function of executing the process of step S4503 in the main MPU 82);
The number of executions of the game run measured by the predetermined measuring means is the predetermined trigger number (in the first to fourth and seventh to twelfth embodiments, the fixed ceiling number, in the fifth embodiment, the first ceiling number or A predetermined privilege granting means (in the first, third to fifth, seventh, and eighth embodiments, the main MPU 82 The function of executing the process of step S1506, the function of executing the process of step S2106 in the main side MPU 82 in the second embodiment, the function of executing the process of step S3705 in the main side MPU 82 in the ninth embodiment, the tenth to In the twelfth embodiment, a function of executing the process of step S4505 in the main MPU 82);
Special transition means for transitioning the game state to a special game state (opening/closing execution mode) that is advantageous to the player (function of executing the special electric start process of the main MPU 82 in the first to fifth and seventh to twelfth embodiments) and,
A predetermined setting process ("500" in the first to fifth and seventh to twelfth embodiments) in which the information of the predetermined measuring means becomes a specific initial value when the special gaming state is started. In the first, fourth, fifth, eighth, and ninth embodiments, the process of step S1005 is executed by the main MPU 82, and in the second embodiment, the process of step S1905 is executed by the main MPU 82, In the third embodiment, the process of step S2305 is executed by the main MPU 82, in the seventh embodiment, the process of step S3305 is executed by the main MPU 82, and in the tenth to twelfth embodiments, the process is executed by the main MPU 82. The predetermined setting means (in the first, fourth, fifth, eighth, and ninth embodiments, the function of executing the process of step S1005 in the main MPU 82) In the embodiment, the function of executing the process of step S1905 in the main side MPU 82, in the third embodiment, the function of executing the process of step S2305 in the main side MPU 82, and in the seventh embodiment, the process of step S3305 in the main side MPU 82 (in the tenth to twelfth embodiments, a function to execute the process of step S4208 in the main MPU 82),
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature F1, a predetermined benefit is given when the number of executions of a game round, which is measured by the predetermined measuring means, reaches a predetermined number of triggers. It becomes possible to provide a predetermined benefit. In addition, since the information of the predetermined measuring means is set to a specific initial value using the special gaming state as a trigger, the predetermined benefit will be awarded when the number of times the game is played after the special gaming state ends reaches the predetermined trigger number. It becomes possible to make it so that it is granted. In this case, if the information of the predetermined measuring means is set to a specific initial value in response to the special gaming state, the specific initial value is set when the special gaming state is started. As a result, after a certain amount of profit has been obtained in the special gaming state and before the special gaming state ends, the information of the predetermined measuring means is updated by stopping the supply of operating power and restarting the supply of operating power. Even if a fraudulent act is committed that forcibly terminates the special gaming state while the special gaming state is being maintained, the information of the predetermined measuring means that is maintained will be the specific initial value set when the special gaming state is started. becomes. Therefore, it becomes possible to neutralize the above-mentioned fraudulent acts.

Feature F2. Means for executing profit granting processing (appropriateness determination processing) in a manner corresponding to the setting value set as the target of use from among the setting values at multiple stages corresponding to the player's advantage level (appropriateness determination processing in the main side MPU 82) function to perform processing), and
When the supply of operating power is started, the setting value can be changed based on the predetermined related operation (setting change operation) being performed (setting value update processing is not possible). situation generation means (in the first to third and seventh to twelfth embodiments, the function of executing the process of step S117 in the main MPU 82, in the fourth embodiment, A function of executing the process of step S2417 in the MPU 82, a function of executing the process of step S2617 in the main MPU 82 in the fifth embodiment),
Equipped with
The gaming machine according to feature F1, wherein the predetermined setting means does not execute the predetermined setting process in the setting possible situation.

According to feature F2, since the configuration is such that the setting value to be used is set from among the setting values in multiple stages corresponding to the player's advantage level, the player can use the more advantageous setting value. It is to be expected that In this case, since the information of the predetermined measuring means is not set to a specific initial value in a setting possible situation, it is not possible to maintain the information of the predetermined measuring means at the information before the supply of operating power is stopped even if a setting possible situation occurs. It becomes possible. This configuration has the configuration of feature F1 described above, and when a special gaming state is started, the specific initial value is set. As a result, after a certain amount of profit has been obtained in the special gaming state and before the special gaming state ends, the information of the predetermined measuring means is updated by stopping the supply of operating power and restarting the supply of operating power. Even if a fraudulent act is committed that forcibly terminates the special gaming state while the special gaming state is being maintained, the information of the predetermined measuring means that is maintained will be the specific initial value set when the special gaming state is started. becomes. Therefore, it becomes possible to neutralize the above-mentioned fraudulent acts.

Feature F3. Means (means) for executing initialization processing of predetermined information on the predetermined storage means (main side RAM 84) based on the fact that a specific related operation (RAM clearing operation) is being performed when the supply of operating power is started. In the first to third and seventh to twelfth embodiments, the function of executing the process of step S119 in the main side MPU 82, the function of executing the process of step S2419 in the main side MPU 82 in the fourth embodiment, and the function of executing the process of step S2419 in the main side MPU 82, In the embodiment, the main MPU 82 has a function of executing the process of step S2619),
Even if the initialization process is executed, the information of the predetermined measurement means is not initialized,
The gaming machine according to feature F1 or F2, wherein the predetermined setting means does not execute the predetermined setting process even if the initialization process is executed.

According to feature F3, in a configuration in which initialization processing of predetermined information is performed on a predetermined storage means based on the fact that a specific related operation is being performed when the supply of operating power is started, the initial Even if the conversion process is executed, the information of the predetermined measuring means is not set to a specific initial value. Thereby, even if the initialization process is executed, it is possible to maintain the information of the predetermined measuring means at the information before the supply of operating power was stopped. This configuration has the configuration of feature F1 described above, and when a special gaming state is started, the specific initial value is set. As a result, after a certain amount of profit has been obtained in the special gaming state and before the special gaming state ends, the information of the predetermined measuring means is updated by stopping the supply of operating power and restarting the supply of operating power. Even if a fraudulent act is committed that forcibly terminates the special gaming state while the special gaming state is being maintained, the information of the predetermined measuring means that is maintained will be the specific initial value set when the special gaming state is started. becomes. Therefore, it becomes possible to neutralize the above-mentioned fraudulent acts.

Feature F4. Means (first to fifth, A function of executing the validity determination process of the main MPU 82 in the seventh to twelfth embodiments);
When the supply of operating power is started, the setting value can be changed based on the predetermined related operation (setting change operation) being performed (setting value update processing is not possible). situation generation means (in the first to third and seventh to twelfth embodiments, the function of executing the process of step S117 in the main MPU 82, in the fourth embodiment, A function of executing the process of step S2417 in the MPU 82, a function of executing the process of step S2617 in the main MPU 82 in the fifth embodiment),
Equipped with
The predetermined setting means is configured not to execute the predetermined setting process even if the initialization process is executed, and is configured not to execute the predetermined setting process in the setting possible situation, and the supply of operating power is started. A predetermined situation in which both the specific related operation and the predetermined related operation are not performed (in the first to third and seventh to twelfth embodiments, a situation in which an affirmative determination is made in step S113 in the main MPU 82) In the fourth embodiment, the main MPU 82 makes an affirmative determination in step S2413; in the fifth embodiment, the main MPU 82 makes an affirmative determination in step S2613), the predetermined setting process is performed. The gaming machine according to feature F3.

According to feature F4, since the configuration is such that the setting value to be used is set from among the setting values in multiple stages corresponding to the player's advantage level, the player can use the more advantageous setting value. It is to be expected that In this case, even if the initialization process is executed, the information of the predetermined measurement means will not be set to a specific initial value, and the information of the predetermined measurement means will not be set to a specific initial value in a setting possible situation, so the initialization process Not only can the information of the predetermined measuring means be maintained at the information before the supply of operating power is maintained even if the setting is performed, but also the information of the predetermined measuring means can be maintained as before the supply of operating power It becomes possible to maintain the information before the stoppage. In this case, the information of the predetermined measuring means is set to a specific initial value when the supply of operating power is started in a predetermined situation in which both the specific related operation and the predetermined related operation are not performed. As a result, in a configuration in which the information of the predetermined measurement means is not set to a specific initial value even if the initialization process is executed, and the information of the predetermined measurement means is not set to a specific initial value in a setting possible situation, the supply of operating power By setting the predetermined situation to be in place when the measurement is started, it becomes possible to set the information of the predetermined measuring means to a specific initial value.

Feature F5. A variable ball entry means (special electric prize winning device 32) provided in a game area where game balls flow down and switchable between an open state and a closed state;
Variable ball entry control means (special power supply of main side MPU 82 in the first to fifth and seventh to twelfth embodiments) that executes variable ball entry control that switches the variable ball entry means to the open state and then to the closed state. function to execute start processing, special train open processing, and special train closed processing);
Equipped with
The special transition means transitions the game state to the special game state after the game round in which the operation result of the game repeat operation is a special result (stop result corresponding to a jackpot result) ends;
The variable entry control is executed in the special game state,
The predetermined setting means executes the predetermined setting process after the operation result of the game repetition operation becomes the special result and before the variable ball entry control is started in the special game state. The gaming machine according to any one of features F1 to F4.

According to feature F5, the information of the predetermined measuring means is set to a specific initial value after the operation result of the game repetition operation becomes a special result and before the variable ball entry control is started in the special game state. It becomes possible to do so.

Feature F6. A predetermined ball entry means into which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter (the second operating port 34 in the first to fifth and seventh to ninth embodiments, and a special prize winning means in the tenth to twelfth embodiments) device 151);
Acquisition means (steps in the main side MPU 82 in the first to fifth and seventh to ninth embodiments) that acquires special information (second pending information) based on the game ball entering the predetermined ball entry means. a function of executing the process of S709, a function of executing the process of step S3901 in the main MPU 82 in the tenth to twelfth embodiments),
Attribution determination means (appropriateness determination processing of the main side MPU 82 in the first to fifth and seventh to twelfth embodiments) for determining whether or not the special information corresponds to the assignment corresponding information (appropriateness determination processing) ) and
A predetermined ball entry control means that is capable of switching the predetermined ball entry means between a closed state and an open state (regular card/common power control processing of the main side MPU 82 in the first to fifth and seventh to twelfth embodiments) ) and
Equipped with
The game time control means sets the game time when the game time operation is started and ends as a state corresponding to the determination result of the grant determination as one game time, and controls the game time in each game time. This is to enable the game repeat operation to be performed,
The predetermined benefit granting means changes the gaming state to a predetermined gaming state (second high-frequency support mode) in which the predetermined ball entry means is more likely to be in the open state than in a different gaming state (normal gaming state) in order to provide the predetermined privilege. The gaming machine according to any one of features F1 to F5, characterized in that the game is transferred.

According to feature F6, when special information is acquired based on a game ball entering a predetermined ball entry means that can be switched between a closed state and an open state, and the special information corresponds to provision corresponding information. In a configuration in which a bonus is given to a player, when the player is in the predetermined game state, the predetermined ball entering means is more likely to be in the open state than when the player is in a different game state. Therefore, the predetermined gaming state is a gaming state that is advantageous to the player. In this case, it is possible to achieve the excellent effects already described.

Note that for the configuration of features F1 to F6, features A1 to A8, features B1 to B8, features C1 to C8, features D1 to D8, features E1 to E9, features F1 to F6, features G1 to G11, and features H1 to H8, Features I1-I5, Features J1-J7, Features K1-K7, Features L1-L5, Features M1-M4, Features N1-N8, Features O1-O8, Features P1-P6, Features Q1-Q16, Features R1- Any one or more of R6, features S1 to S7, features T1 to T3, features U1 to U5, and features V1 to V6 may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

According to the invention related to the above feature group F, it is possible to solve the following problems.

Pachinko machines, slot machines, and the like are known as types of gaming machines. These gaming machines are known to have a configuration in which an internal lottery is held based on the fulfillment of predetermined lottery conditions, and a bonus is awarded to a player according to the result of the internal lottery.

Specifically, pachinko machines have a configuration in which a game ball enters a ball entry section provided in a gaming area, and when a winning result is obtained in an internal lottery, the machine enters a special gaming state, and A configuration is known in which the game enters a special game state based on a game ball entering the game ball. When the state shifts to the special game state, for example, a ball entering device provided in the gaming area starts to open and close, and game balls are paid out based on balls entering the ball entering device.

Here, in gaming machines such as those illustrated above, it is necessary to ensure that games are played appropriately, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Feature G group>
Feature G1. Game round control means (main side in the sixth embodiment) that controls the game round execution means (first special figure display section 37a, second special figure display section 37b) so that the game round operation is executed in the game round. A function of executing the special figure fluctuation start process, the special figure fluctuation process, and the special figure confirmation process of the MPU 82),
a predetermined measuring means (ceiling counter 131) for measuring the number of times the game is executed;
A number updating means for updating the number of executions of the game round measured by the predetermined measuring means when the game round is executed (a function of executing the process of step S1503 of the main MPU 82 in the sixth embodiment) )and,
A predetermined benefit (second high-frequency support mode) is provided when the number of executions of the game round measured by the predetermined measuring means reaches a predetermined trigger number (fixed ceiling number or special ceiling number in the sixth embodiment). A predetermined privilege granting means (a function of executing the process of step S1506 of the main MPU 82 in the sixth embodiment),
A special transition means (a function of executing the special electric start process of the main MPU 82 in the sixth embodiment) that transitions the gaming state to a special gaming state (opening/closing execution mode) that is advantageous to the player;
A predetermined setting process (of the main MPU 82 in the sixth embodiment) in which the information of the predetermined measuring means becomes a specific initial value ("500" in the sixth embodiment) when the special gaming state ends. a predetermined setting means (a function of the main MPU 82 in the sixth embodiment that executes the process of step S3109) that executes the process of step S3109;
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature G1, a predetermined benefit is given when the number of executions of a game round, which is measured by the predetermined measuring means, reaches a predetermined number of triggers. It becomes possible to provide a predetermined benefit. In addition, since the information of the predetermined measuring means is set to a specific initial value using the special gaming state as a trigger, the predetermined benefit will be awarded when the number of times the game is played after the special gaming state ends reaches the predetermined trigger number. It becomes possible to make it so that it is granted. In this case, if the information of the predetermined measuring means is set to a specific initial value in response to the special gaming state, the specific initial value is set when the special gaming state ends. As a result, even in a configuration where there are multiple patterns of gaming situations immediately before transitioning to the special gaming state, the process of setting a specific initial value in the predetermined measurement means using the special gaming state as an opportunity is performed when the special gaming state ends. It becomes possible to consolidate as a process. Therefore, it is possible to achieve the above excellent effects while simplifying the processing configuration.

Feature G2. The special transition means are:
A means for shifting the gaming state to the special gaming state when the gaming round ends (a function of executing the processing of steps S3002 to S3005 of the main MPU 82 in the sixth embodiment);
Means for shifting the gaming state to the special gaming state when an event different from the end of the gaming round occurs (a function of executing the distribution processing of the main MPU 82 in the sixth embodiment);
The gaming machine according to feature G1, comprising:

According to feature G2, there are cases in which the game enters the special game state after the end of the game round, and cases where the game goes into the special game state when an event different from the end of the game round occurs. This makes it possible to diversify the patterns of transition to the special gaming state. In this case, the above-mentioned feature G1 is provided, and since a specific initial value is set in the predetermined measuring means when the special gaming state ends, a configuration in which there are multiple patterns of gaming situations immediately before transitioning to the special gaming state Even so, the process of setting a specific initial value in the predetermined measuring means using the special game state as an opportunity can be integrated into the process when the special game state ends.

Feature G3. If the supply of operating power is stopped during the special gaming state, the information of the predetermined measuring means may change to the specific initial value or an initial value different from the specific initial value after the supply of operating power is started. A specific setting means (sixth embodiment) that executes a specific setting process (step S3204 executed by the main MPU 82 in the sixth embodiment) for causing the game round to be executed in a situation where the value is The gaming machine according to feature G1 or G2, characterized in that the gaming machine is equipped with a function of executing the process of step S3204 of the main MPU 82 in .

In the case of a configuration in which a specific initial value is set in the predetermined measuring means when the special gaming state ends, the operating power is A fraudulent act is assumed in which the special gaming state is forcibly terminated while the information of the predetermined measuring means is maintained by stopping the supply and restarting the supply of operating power. On the other hand, according to feature G3, if the supply of operating power is stopped in the middle of the special gaming state, the information of the predetermined measuring means is changed to a specific initial value or the relevant value after the supply of operating power is started. A specific setting process is executed so that a game round is executed in a situation where the initial value is different from the specific initial value. This makes it possible to neutralize fraudulent acts such as those described above.

Feature G4. When it is determined that the supply of operating power is to be stopped, means (the main MPU 82 in the sixth embodiment) for executing a power outage process (power outage monitoring process executed by the main MPU 82 in the sixth embodiment) power outage monitoring function).
The gaming machine according to feature G3, wherein the specific setting means executes the specific setting process in the power outage process when the supply of operating power is stopped during the special gaming state.

According to feature G4, when the supply of operating power is stopped during the special gaming state, a specific initial value or an initial value different from the specific initial value is set in the predetermined measuring means in the power outage process. Compared to a configuration in which the process of setting an initial value to the predetermined measuring means is executed when the supply of operating power is started, it is easier to identify whether or not the supply of operating power is stopped during the special gaming state. Become.

Feature G5. The number of executions of the game session ("500" in the sixth embodiment) required until it is determined that the number of executions of the game session has reached the predetermined number of triggers after the predetermined setting process is executed; The number of executions of the gaming session ("800" in the sixth embodiment) required until it is determined that the number of executions of the gaming session has reached the predetermined number of triggers after the specific setting process is executed is different. The gaming machine according to feature G3 or G4.

According to feature G5, the number of times the game is executed until it is specified that the number of times the game is executed reaches a predetermined trigger count after the special game state ends, and the supply of operating power during the special game state are determined. In the case where the game is stopped, the number of times the game is executed is different from the number of times the game is executed until it is specified that the number of times the game has been executed has reached the predetermined trigger count after the supply of operating power is restarted. As a result, the supply of operating power is stopped and the supply of operating power is resumed after the special gaming state ends, and during the special gaming state, to determine the number of times the game must be executed before a predetermined benefit is granted. It is possible to make the difference after the

Feature G6. The number of executions of the gaming session required until it is determined that the number of executions of the gaming session has reached the predetermined number of triggers after the specific setting process is executed is longer than the number of executions of the gaming session after the specific setting process is executed. The gaming machine according to any one of features G3 to G5, wherein the number of executions of the game is greater than the number of executions of the game that is necessary until it is determined that the number of times of execution of the game has reached the predetermined number of triggers. .

According to feature G6, if the supply of operating power is stopped during the special gaming state, and after the supply of operating power is restarted, it is determined that the number of times the game has been executed has reached the predetermined trigger number. Because the required number of times the game is executed is greater than the number of times the game is executed until it is specified that the number of times the game is executed has reached the predetermined trigger number after the special gaming state ends. If the act of illegally stopping the supply of operating power in the middle of a special game state is performed, it becomes possible to increase the number of times the game is required to be executed before a predetermined benefit is awarded.

Feature G7. Profit granting processing (appropriateness or non-execution performed by the main MPU 82 in the sixth embodiment) in a manner corresponding to the setting value set as the target of use from among the setting values of multiple stages corresponding to the player's advantage level. (a function of executing the judgment process of the main MPU 82 in the sixth embodiment);
When the supply of operating power is started, the setting value that is to be used can be changed based on the predetermined related operation (setting change operation) being performed (setting value update processing is not possible). a situation generating means (a function for executing the process of step S117 of the main MPU 82 in the sixth embodiment),
Equipped with
The gaming machine according to any one of features G3 to G6, characterized in that the information of the predetermined measuring means is not changed in the setting possible situation.

According to feature G7, since the configuration is such that the setting value to be used is set from among the setting values in multiple stages corresponding to the player's advantage level, the player can use the more advantageous setting value. It is to be expected that In this case, since the information of the predetermined measuring means is not set to the initial value in the setting possible situation, it is possible to maintain the information of the predetermined measuring means at the information before the supply of operating power is stopped even if the setting possible situation occurs. Become. In this configuration, if the configuration of feature G3 is provided and the supply of operating power is stopped during the special gaming state, the information of the predetermined measuring means will change to a specific initial value or the relevant value after the supply of operating power is started. A specific setting process is executed so that a game round is executed in a situation where the initial value is different from the specific initial value. As a result, after a certain amount of profit has been obtained in the special gaming state and before the special gaming state ends, the information of the predetermined measuring means is updated by stopping the supply of operating power and restarting the supply of operating power. It becomes possible to neutralize the fraudulent act of forcibly terminating the special game state while ensuring that the special game state is maintained.

Feature G8. Means (means) for executing initialization processing of predetermined information on a predetermined storage means (main side RAM 84) based on the fact that a specific related operation (RAM clearing operation) is being performed when the supply of operating power is started. a function of executing the process of step S119 of the main MPU 82 in the sixth embodiment,
Even if the initialization process is executed, the information of the predetermined measurement means is not initialized,
The gaming machine according to any one of features G3 to G7, wherein the information of the predetermined measuring means is not changed even if the initialization process is executed.

According to feature G8, in a configuration in which initialization processing of predetermined information is performed on a predetermined storage means based on the fact that a specific related operation is performed when the supply of operating power is started, the initial Even if the conversion process is executed, the information of the predetermined measuring means is not set to the initial value. Thereby, even if the initialization process is executed, it is possible to maintain the information of the predetermined measuring means at the information before the supply of operating power was stopped. In this configuration, if the configuration of feature G3 is provided and the supply of operating power is stopped during the special gaming state, the information of the predetermined measuring means will change to a specific initial value or the relevant value after the supply of operating power is started. A specific setting process is executed so that a game round is executed in a situation where the initial value is different from the specific initial value. As a result, after a certain amount of profit has been obtained in the special gaming state and before the special gaming state ends, the information of the predetermined measuring means is updated by stopping the supply of operating power and restarting the supply of operating power. It becomes possible to neutralize the fraudulent act of forcibly terminating the special game state while ensuring that the special game state is maintained.

Feature G9. Profit granting processing (appropriateness or non-execution performed by the main MPU 82 in the sixth embodiment) in a manner corresponding to the setting value set as the target of use from among the setting values of multiple stages corresponding to the player's advantage level. (a function of executing the judgment process of the main MPU 82 in the sixth embodiment);
When the supply of operating power is started, the setting value that is to be used can be changed based on the predetermined related operation (setting change operation) being performed (setting value update processing is not possible). a situation generating means (a function for executing the process of step S117 of the main MPU 82 in the sixth embodiment),
Equipped with
Even if the initialization process is executed, the information on the predetermined measurement means is not changed, and the information on the predetermined measurement means is not changed in the setting possible situation;
This gaming machine is configured in a predetermined situation in which both the specific related operation and the predetermined related operation are not performed when the supply of operating power is started (an affirmative determination is made in step S113 of the main MPU 82 in the sixth embodiment). means for making the information of the predetermined measuring means take the specific initial value or an initial value different from the specific initial value (step S114 of the main MPU 82 in the sixth embodiment) The gaming machine according to feature G8, characterized in that the gaming machine is equipped with a function of executing the processing of (a).

According to feature G9, since the configuration is such that the setting value to be used is set from among the setting values in multiple stages corresponding to the player's advantage level, the player can use the more advantageous setting value. It is to be expected that In this case, even if the initialization processing is executed, the information on the predetermined measurement means is not set to the initial value, and the information on the predetermined measurement means is not set to the initial value in a setting possible situation, so the initialization processing is not executed. This not only makes it possible to maintain the information of the predetermined measurement means at the information before the stoppage of the supply of operating power, but also maintains the information of the predetermined measurement means as the information before the stoppage of the supply of operating power even if a setting possible situation occurs. It is possible to maintain the In this case, if the supply of operating power is started in a predetermined situation where both the specific related operation and the predetermined related operation are not performed, the information of the predetermined measuring means is a specific initial value or the specific initial value. is set to an initial value different from . As a result, the supply of operating power is started in a configuration in which the information of the predetermined measurement means is not set to the initial value even if the initialization process is executed, and the information of the predetermined measurement means is not set to the initial value in a setting possible situation. By setting the predetermined situation in such a case, it becomes possible to set the information of the predetermined measuring means to a specific initial value or an initial value different from the specific initial value.

Feature G10. A variable ball entry means (special electric prize winning device 32) provided in a game area where game balls flow down and switchable between an open state and a closed state;
Variable ball entry control means that executes variable ball entry control that switches the variable ball entry means to the open state and then to the closed state (special call start processing, special call opening process, and special call processing of the main side MPU 82 in the sixth embodiment) function to execute processing during closure),
Equipped with
The variable entry control is executed in the special game state,
Any of features G1 to G9, characterized in that the predetermined setting means executes the predetermined setting process after the variable ball entry control in the special game state is completed and before the end timing of the special game state. The gaming machine described in (1) above.

According to feature G10, it is possible to set the information of the predetermined measuring means to a specific initial value after the variable ball entry control is completed in the special game state and before the end timing of the special game state.

Feature G11. A predetermined ball entry means (special winning device 151 in the sixth embodiment) into which game balls flowing down the gaming area can enter;
an acquisition means (a function of executing the process of step S2806 of the main MPU 82 in the sixth embodiment) that acquires special information (second pending information) based on the game ball entering the predetermined ball entry means; ,
Attribution determination means (main side in the sixth embodiment) that performs an attachment determination (appropriateness determination process executed by the main side MPU 82 in the sixth embodiment) as to whether or not the special information corresponds to the attachment correspondence information. function of executing the validity judgment process of the MPU 82);
Predetermined ball entry control means (a function for executing the general-purpose power control process of the main side MPU 82 in the sixth embodiment) capable of switching the predetermined ball-entry means between a closed state and an open state;
Equipped with
The game time control means sets the game time when the game time operation is started and ends as a state corresponding to the determination result of the grant determination as one game time, and controls the game time in each game time. This is to enable the game reuse operation to be performed,
The predetermined benefit granting means changes the gaming state to a predetermined gaming state (second high-frequency support mode) in which the predetermined ball entry means is more likely to be in the open state than a different gaming state (normal gaming state), as the provision of the predetermined privilege. The gaming machine according to any one of features G1 to G10, characterized in that the game machine is transferred.

According to feature G11, when special information is acquired based on a game ball entering a predetermined ball entry means that is switched between a closed state and an open state, and the special information corresponds to the provision corresponding information. In a configuration in which a bonus is given to a player, when the player is in the predetermined game state, the predetermined ball entering means is more likely to be in the open state than when the player is in a different game state. Therefore, the predetermined gaming state is a gaming state that is advantageous to the player. In this case, it is possible to achieve the excellent effects already described.

Note that for the configuration of features G1 to G11, features A1 to A8, features B1 to B8, features C1 to C8, features D1 to D8, features E1 to E9, features F1 to F6, features G1 to G11, and features H1 to H8, Features I1-I5, Features J1-J7, Features K1-K7, Features L1-L5, Features M1-M4, Features N1-N8, Features O1-O8, Features P1-P6, Features Q1-Q16, Features R1- Any one or more of R6, features S1 to S7, features T1 to T3, features U1 to U5, and features V1 to V6 may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

According to the invention related to feature group G above, it is possible to solve the following problems.

Pachinko machines, slot machines, and the like are known as types of gaming machines. These gaming machines are known to have a configuration in which an internal lottery is held based on the fulfillment of predetermined lottery conditions, and a bonus is awarded to a player according to the result of the internal lottery.

Specifically, pachinko machines have a configuration in which a game ball enters a ball entry section provided in a gaming area, and when a winning result is obtained in an internal lottery, the machine enters a special gaming state, and A configuration is known in which the game enters a special game state based on a game ball entering the game ball. When the state shifts to the special game state, for example, a ball entering device provided in the gaming area starts to open and close, and game balls are paid out based on balls entering the ball entering device.

Here, in gaming machines such as those exemplified above, processing needs to be suitably executed, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Feature H group>
Feature H1. Game round control means (first to fifth, seventh , a function of executing the special figure fluctuation start process, the special figure fluctuation process, and the special figure confirmation process of the main side MPU 82 in the ninth embodiment);
a period determining means for determining the duration of the game round (a function for executing the process of specifying the variable display period of the main MPU 82 in the first to fifth, seventh, and ninth embodiments);
A specific measuring means for measuring the number of times the game is executed (the variable selection state counter 132 in the first to fifth and ninth embodiments, and the game number counter in the main side RAM 84 in the seventh embodiment);
Specific updating means (step S1703 of the main MPU 82 in the first to fifth and ninth embodiments) that updates the number of executions of the gaming session measured by the specific measuring section when the gaming session is executed. (a function to execute the process of step S3401 of the main MPU 82 in the seventh embodiment),
The number of executions of the game run measured by the specific measuring means after the occurrence of the measurement standard trigger (opening/closing execution mode) is the specific standard number of times (500 in the first to fifth and ninth embodiments, and the seventh In this embodiment, mode changing means (first to fifth , a function of executing the process of step S1705 of the main side MPU 82 in the ninth embodiment, a function of executing the process of steps S3402 to S3405 of the main side MPU 82 in the seventh embodiment),
A predetermined benefit granting means (time saving of the main MPU 82 in the first to fifth, seventh and ninth embodiments) that grants a predetermined benefit (second high frequency support mode) when a predetermined grant opportunity (time saving result) occurs. the ability to perform configuration processing for results), and
Equipped with
A gaming machine characterized in that even if the predetermined award opportunity occurs and the predetermined benefit is awarded, the measurement standard opportunity does not occur.

According to feature H1, the manner in which the duration of a gaming session is determined is changed based on the fact that the number of gaming sessions executed after the measurement reference trigger has occurred has reached a specific reference number, so that the gaming session is repeated. When executed, it is possible to prevent the manner in which the duration of a game round is determined from becoming uniform. Further, since a predetermined benefit is awarded when a predetermined award opportunity occurs, the player expects the predetermined award opportunity to occur. In this case, even if a predetermined award opportunity occurs and a predetermined benefit is awarded, a measurement standard opportunity does not occur. This makes it possible to award a predetermined benefit in response to the occurrence of a predetermined award opportunity without affecting the timing at which the manner in which the duration of a game round is determined is changed.

Feature H2. Predetermined lottery means (first to fifth, (a function of executing the reservation information acquisition process and the propriety determination process of the main MPU 82 in the seventh and ninth embodiments);
The game time control means controls the game time execution means so that the operation result corresponds to the result of the predetermined lottery process,
The gaming machine according to feature H1, characterized in that the predetermined granting opportunity occurs when the result of the predetermined lottery process is a predetermined lottery result (time saving result).

According to feature H2, in a configuration in which a predetermined benefit can be given when the result of a predetermined lottery process is a predetermined lottery result, the method of determining the duration of a game round is changed while not affecting the timing at which the determination mode of the duration of a game round is changed. , it becomes possible to provide a predetermined benefit based on a predetermined lottery result.

Feature H3. A predetermined ball entry means (second operating port 34 in the first to fifth, seventh, and ninth embodiments) into which a game ball flowing down the gaming area can enter;
Acquisition means (steps of the main MPU 82 in the first to fifth, seventh, and ninth embodiments) that acquires special information (second pending information) based on the game ball entering the predetermined ball entry means function to execute the process of S709),
Attribution determination means (appropriateness determination processing of the main side MPU 82 in the first to fifth, seventh, and ninth embodiments) for determining whether or not the special information corresponds to the attachment corresponding information (appropriateness determination processing) ) and
A benefit for granting a benefit (open/close execution mode) to the player based on the result of the grant determination being a grant correspondence result (jackpot result) in which the special information corresponds to the grant correspondence information. A providing means (a function of executing the special electric line start process, special electric line open process, special electric line closed process, and special electric line end process of the main side MPU 82 in the first to fifth, seventh, and ninth embodiments);
A predetermined ball entry control means that can switch the predetermined ball entry means between a closed state and an open state (normal figure/general power control processing of the main side MPU 82 in the first to fifth, seventh, and ninth embodiments) ) and
Equipped with
The game time control means sets the game time when the game time operation is started and ends as a state corresponding to the determination result of the grant determination as one game time, and controls the game time in each game time. This is to enable the game reuse operation to be performed,
The predetermined benefit granting means changes the gaming state to a predetermined gaming state (second high-frequency support mode) in which the predetermined ball entry means is more likely to be in the open state than in a different gaming state (normal gaming state) in order to provide the predetermined privilege. The gaming machine according to feature H1 or H2, which is characterized by a transition.

According to feature H3, when special information is acquired based on a game ball entering a predetermined ball entry means that is switched between a closed state and an open state, and the special information corresponds to the provision corresponding information. In a configuration in which a bonus is given to a player, when the player is in the predetermined game state, the predetermined ball entering means is more likely to be in the open state than when the player is in a different game state. Therefore, the predetermined gaming state is a gaming state that is advantageous to the player. In this case, with the configuration of feature H1 described above, even if a predetermined granting opportunity occurs and a predetermined gaming state occurs, a measurement reference opportunity does not occur. As a result, it is possible to cause a transition to a predetermined gaming state in response to the occurrence of a predetermined award opportunity while not affecting the timing at which the manner in which the duration of a game round is determined is changed.

Feature H4. a predetermined measuring means (ceiling counter 131) for measuring the number of times the game is executed;
A number updating means (in the first, third to fifth, and seventh embodiments, the main side MPU 82 (in the second embodiment, the main MPU 82 executes the process of step S2103; in the ninth embodiment, the main MPU 82 executes the process of step S3703);
Equipped with
The number of times the game is executed, which is measured by the predetermined measuring means from the measurement standard trigger, is the predetermined number of triggers (the fixed ceiling number in the first to fourth and seventh to ninth embodiments, and the fixed ceiling number in the fifth embodiment). The predetermined benefit (second high-frequency support mode) or a benefit different from it is provided when the number of times reaching the first ceiling or the number of times reaching the second ceiling is reached.
The gaming machine according to any one of features H1 to H3, wherein the specific reference number of times is a number smaller than the predetermined opportunity number by a predetermined number of times.

According to feature H4, when the number of executions of the game round measured by the predetermined measuring means from the measurement reference trigger reaches the predetermined number of triggers, the predetermined benefit or a different benefit is granted, so that the game round is repeatedly executed. It becomes possible to provide a predetermined benefit or a different benefit to the player in response to the player's actions. In this case, the specific reference number of times is a number smaller than the predetermined number of triggers by a predetermined number of times. As a result, the number of executions of the game round measured by the predetermined measuring means from the measurement reference trigger becomes the predetermined trigger number, and the number of times the game run is executed a predetermined number of times before the predetermined benefit or a different benefit is given. It becomes possible to vary the manner in which the duration is determined. Therefore, by changing the method for determining the duration of a game session, it is possible to detect that a situation in which a predetermined benefit or a benefit different from it will be given is approaching when the number of times a game session is executed reaches a predetermined number of triggers. It becomes possible to make the player recognize it. In this case, even if the configuration of feature H1 is provided and a predetermined award opportunity occurs and a predetermined benefit is awarded, a measurement standard opportunity will not occur. This makes it possible to prevent the granting of a predetermined benefit due to the occurrence of a predetermined granting opportunity from affecting the game content as described above.

Feature H5. The aspect changing means changes the game times in the period determining means based on the fact that the number of times the game times have been executed, which has been measured by the specific measuring means since the measurement standard trigger has occurred, has reached the specific standard number of times. The gaming machine according to feature H4, characterized in that when changing the manner in which the duration of the game is determined, the average duration of the duration of the game is made longer than before.

According to feature H5, in a game round a predetermined number of times before the number of executions of the game round measured by the predetermined measuring means from the measurement standard trigger becomes the predetermined number of triggers and the predetermined privilege or a privilege different from it is granted. Since the average duration of the game round becomes longer than before, the number of times the game round is executed reaches the predetermined number of triggers, which reduces the efficiency of playing the game round before the prescribed benefit or a different benefit is granted. This makes it possible to prevent excessive benefits from being granted in a short period of time. In this case, even if the configuration of feature H1 is provided and a predetermined award opportunity occurs and a predetermined benefit is awarded, a measurement standard opportunity will not occur. This makes it possible to prevent the granting of a predetermined benefit due to the occurrence of a predetermined granting opportunity from affecting the game content as described above.

Feature H6. Multiple types of the specific standard number of times are set,
The mode changing means changes the duration of the gaming session in the period determining means every time the number of executions of the gaming session measured by the specific measuring device after the measurement standard trigger occurs reaches the specific standard number of times. The game according to any one of features H1 to H3, characterized in that the determining manner of is changed to a predetermined determining manner (a function of executing the processing of steps S3401 to S3405 of the main side MPU 82 in the seventh embodiment). Machine.

According to feature H6, each time the number of games played after the measurement standard trigger occurs reaches one of a plurality of specific reference times, the manner in which the duration of the game period is determined is changed to a predetermined manner. Therefore, it is possible to regularly and repeatedly generate a situation in which the player pays attention to the content of the game round. In this case, even if the configuration of feature H1 is provided and a predetermined award opportunity occurs and a predetermined benefit is awarded, a measurement standard opportunity will not occur. This makes it possible to prevent the granting of a predetermined benefit due to the occurrence of a predetermined granting opportunity from affecting the game content as described above.

Feature H7. The mode changing means determines that the situation when the number of executions of the game run measured by the specific measuring means after the occurrence of the measurement standard trigger reaches the specific reference number is a specific situation (second high frequency support). mode), the gaming machine according to any one of features H1 to H6, characterized in that the period determining means does not change the manner in which the duration of the game round is determined.

According to feature H7, in the case of a specific situation, even if the number of gaming sessions executed after the measurement reference trigger occurs reaches the specific reference number, the manner in which the duration of the gaming session is determined is not changed; In situations where it is undesirable to change the manner in which the duration of a game round is determined, it is possible to prevent the manner in which the duration of a game round is determined from being changed.

Feature H8. The aspect changing means changes the game times in the period determining means based on the fact that the number of times the game times have been executed, which has been measured by the specific measuring means since the measurement standard trigger has occurred, has reached the specific standard number of times. When changing the manner in which the duration of the game is determined, the average duration of the duration of the game is made longer than before,
The specific situation is a situation in which the period determining means determines the duration of the gaming session in such a manner that the average duration of the gaming session is shorter than that in the normal gaming state. The gaming machine described in characteristic feature H7.

According to feature H8, when the number of games played after the measurement standard trigger occurs reaches the specific standard number, the average duration of the game times becomes longer than before, It is possible to create a situation in which a flashy performance occurs as a performance. In this case, in a situation where the average duration of the gaming sessions is shorter than that in the normal gaming state, if the number of gaming sessions executed after the measurement standard trigger occurs reaches the specific standard number, The manner in which the duration of a game round is determined remains unchanged. This makes it possible to give priority to situations where the efficiency of playing games is high.

Note that for the configuration of features H1 to H8, features A1 to A8, features B1 to B8, features C1 to C8, features D1 to D8, features E1 to E9, features F1 to F6, features G1 to G11, features H1 to H8, Features I1-I5, Features J1-J7, Features K1-K7, Features L1-L5, Features M1-M4, Features N1-N8, Features O1-O8, Features P1-P6, Features Q1-Q16, Features R1- Any one or more of R6, features S1 to S7, features T1 to T3, features U1 to U5, and features V1 to V6 may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Characteristics Group I>
Feature I1. A predetermined ball entrance means (second operating port 34 in the eighth embodiment) into which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter;
Acquisition means (a function of executing the process of step S709 of the main MPU 82 in the eighth embodiment) that acquires special information (second pending information) based on the game ball entering the predetermined ball entry means; ,
A grant determination means (a function of executing the propriety determination process of the main MPU 82 in the eighth embodiment) that performs a grant determination (validity determination process) as to whether or not the special information corresponds to the grant correspondence information;
A benefit for granting a benefit (open/close execution mode) to the player based on the result of the grant determination being a grant correspondence result (jackpot result) in which the special information corresponds to the grant correspondence information. A granting means (a function of the main MPU 82 in the eighth embodiment to execute special electricity start processing, special electricity opening processing, special electricity closing processing, and special electricity termination processing);
The game reuse operation is started and the game reuse operation is completed in a state corresponding to the determination result of the award determination as one game time, and the game reuse operation is performed in each game time. The game time control means (special symbol fluctuation start processing and special symbol fluctuation processing of the main side MPU 82 in the eighth embodiment) that controls the game execution means (first special symbol display section 37a, second special symbol display section 37b) and a function to execute the process during special drawing confirmation),
a period determining means for determining the duration of the game round (a function for executing a process for specifying a variable display period of the main MPU 82 in the eighth embodiment);
Predetermined ball entry control means (a function for executing the general-purpose power control process of the main side MPU 82 in the eighth embodiment) capable of switching the predetermined ball-entry means between a closed state and an open state;
a predetermined transition means for shifting the gaming state to a predetermined gaming state (second high-frequency support mode) in which the predetermined ball entering means is more likely to be in the open state than a different gaming state (normal gaming state);
A specific measuring means (in the eighth embodiment, a variable selection state counter 132) that measures the number of times the game is executed;
The period determining means based on the fact that the number of times the game has been executed as measured by the specific measuring means after the end of the predetermined gaming state has reached a specific reference number (50 times in the eighth embodiment). a manner changing means for changing the manner in which the duration of the game round is determined (a function of executing the processing of step S1705 and step S3512 of the main MPU 82 in the eighth embodiment);
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature I1, when special information is acquired based on a game ball entering a predetermined ball entry means that is switched between a closed state and an open state, and the special information corresponds to the provision corresponding information. In a configuration in which a bonus is given to a player, when the player is in the predetermined game state, the predetermined ball entering means is more likely to be in the open state than when the player is in a different game state. Therefore, the predetermined gaming state is a gaming state that is advantageous to the player. In this case, the manner in which the duration of the gaming session is determined is changed based on the fact that the number of gaming sessions executed after the end of the predetermined gaming state has reached a specific reference number, so the predetermined gaming state does not end. After that, it is possible to change the manner in which the duration of the game is determined at the timing when the specified standard number of games have been completed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the manner in which the duration of a game round is determined from becoming uniform, and it is also possible to provide surprise to the player.

Feature I2. The predetermined transition means does not provide the benefit based on the result of the provision determination being a predetermined response result (time saving result) that the special information corresponds to the predetermined response information, The gaming machine according to feature I1, characterized in that the gaming state is shifted to the predetermined gaming state.

According to feature I2, it is possible to create a situation in which the gaming state shifts to a predetermined gaming state without being awarded a benefit, based on the result of the granting determination. The present invention has the configuration of feature I1 above, and the manner in which the duration of a game session is determined is changed based on the number of game sessions executed after the end of the predetermined gaming state has reached a specific reference number. , it becomes possible to change the manner in which the duration of a gaming session is determined at the timing when a specific standard number of gaming sessions are completed after a predetermined gaming state ends. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the manner in which the duration of a game round is determined from becoming uniform, and it is also possible to provide surprise to the player.

Feature I3. The mode changing means changes the gaming cycle in the period determining means based on the fact that the number of executions of the gaming cycle measured by the specific measuring unit after the end of the predetermined gaming state has reached the specific reference number. The gaming machine according to feature I1 or I2, characterized in that when changing the manner in which the duration of the game is determined, the average duration of the duration of the game is made longer than before.

According to feature I3, when the number of games played after the end of the predetermined game state reaches a specific standard number of times, the average duration of the game times becomes longer than before, so the predetermined game If this situation occurs, it becomes possible to reduce the efficiency of playing the game afterward, and it becomes possible to prevent excessive benefits from being granted in a short period of time.

Feature I4. The aspect changing means determines that the situation when the number of executions of the game round measured by the specific measuring means after the end of the predetermined gaming state reaches the specific reference number is a specific situation (second high frequency support mode), the gaming machine according to any one of features I1 to I3, characterized in that the manner in which the duration of the game round is determined by the period determining means is not changed.

According to feature I4, in a specific situation, even if the number of gaming sessions executed after the end of a predetermined gaming state reaches a specific reference number, the manner in which the duration of a gaming session is determined is not changed; In situations where it is undesirable to change the manner in which the duration of a game round is determined, it is possible to prevent the manner in which the duration of a game round is determined from being changed.

Feature I5. The aspect changing means changes the game times in the period determining means based on the fact that the number of times the game times have been executed as measured by the specific measuring means after the end of the predetermined gaming state has reached the specific reference number of times. When changing the manner in which the duration of the game is determined, the average duration of the duration of the game is made longer than before,
The specific situation is a situation in which the period determining means determines the duration of the gaming session in such a manner that the average duration of the gaming session is shorter than that in the normal gaming state. The gaming machine according to feature I4.

According to feature I5, when the number of games played after the end of a predetermined game state reaches a specific standard number of times, the average duration of the game times becomes longer than before. It is possible to create a situation in which a flashy performance occurs as a performance. In this case, in a situation where the average duration of the gaming sessions is shorter than that in the normal gaming state, if the number of gaming sessions executed after the end of the predetermined gaming state reaches the specific reference number, The manner in which the duration of a game round is determined remains unchanged. This makes it possible to give priority to situations where the efficiency of playing games is high.

Note that for the configuration of features I1 to I5, features A1 to A8, features B1 to B8, features C1 to C8, features D1 to D8, features E1 to E9, features F1 to F6, features G1 to G11, and features H1 to H8, Features I1 to I5, Features J1 to J7, Features K1 to K7, Features L1 to L5, Features M1 to M4, Features N1 to N8, Features O1 to O8, Features P1 to P6, Features Q1 to Q16, Features R1 to Any one or more of R6, features S1 to S7, features T1 to T3, features U1 to U5, and features V1 to V6 may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Feature J group>
Feature J1. A predetermined ball entrance means (second operating port 34 in the ninth embodiment) into which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter;
an acquisition means (a function of executing the process of step S709 of the main MPU 82 in the ninth embodiment) that acquires special information (second pending information) based on the game ball entering the predetermined ball entry means; ,
A provision determination means (a function of executing the validity determination process of the main MPU 82 in the ninth embodiment) for determining whether the special information corresponds to the grant correspondence information (appropriateness determination process);
A benefit for granting a benefit (open/close execution mode) to the player based on the result of the grant determination being a grant correspondence result (jackpot result) in which the special information corresponds to the grant correspondence information. A granting means (a function of executing the special electric line start process, special electric line open process, special electric line closed process, and special electric line end process of the main side MPU 82 in the ninth embodiment);
The game reuse operation is started and the game reuse operation is completed in a state corresponding to the determination result of the award determination as one game time, and the game reuse operation is performed in each game time. The game time control means (the special symbol fluctuation start process and special symbol fluctuation processing of the main side MPU 82 in the ninth embodiment) that controls the game execution means (first special symbol display section 37a, second special symbol display section 37b) and a function to execute the process during special drawing confirmation),
Predetermined ball entry control means (a function for executing the general/universal power control process of the main side MPU 82 in the ninth embodiment) capable of switching the predetermined ball entry means between a closed state and an open state;
A predetermined game state in which the predetermined ball entering means is more likely to be in the open state than in another gaming state (normal game state) without giving the benefit based on the occurrence of a predetermined transition opportunity (time saving result, ceiling time reduction). (second high-frequency support mode);
Equipped with
A gaming machine characterized in that a subsequent execution mode of the predetermined gaming state may differ depending on a gaming situation in which the predetermined shift trigger occurs.

According to feature J1, when special information is acquired based on a game ball entering a predetermined ball entry means that can be switched between a closed state and an open state, and the special information corresponds to provision corresponding information. In a configuration in which a bonus is given to a player, when the player is in the predetermined game state, the predetermined ball entering means is more likely to be in the open state than when the player is in a different game state. Therefore, the predetermined gaming state is a gaming state that is advantageous to the player. In addition, when the predetermined gaming state is entered based on the occurrence of a predetermined transition opportunity, the predetermined gaming state is entered without being awarded any benefits. This makes it possible to provide surprise to the player. In this case, the mode of execution of the subsequent predetermined gaming state may differ depending on the gaming situation in which the predetermined shift trigger occurs. This makes it possible to diversify the manner in which a predetermined game state is executed, thereby making it possible to improve the interest of the game.

Feature J2. A subsequent execution mode of the predetermined gaming state may be different depending on when the predetermined transition trigger occurs in the predetermined gaming state and when the predetermined transition trigger occurs in a situation other than the predetermined gaming state. The gaming machine according to feature J1.

According to feature J2, the mode of subsequent transition to the predetermined gaming state may differ depending on whether or not the predetermined transition trigger occurs in the predetermined gaming state. It is possible to draw the player's attention to whether or not a predetermined shift opportunity occurs in a predetermined gaming state.

Feature J3. The predetermined game state includes a first predetermined game state (first high-frequency support mode) and a second predetermined game state (where the frequency with which the predetermined ball entering means is in the open state is different from the first predetermined game state). 2nd high frequency support mode) exists,
The predetermined state setting means includes:
When the predetermined shift trigger occurs in the first predetermined gaming state, the first predetermined state setting means (in step S3603 of the main MPU 82 in the ninth embodiment) causes the first predetermined gaming state to continue. function to make a positive judgment), and
If the predetermined transition trigger occurs in a gaming state that is not the first predetermined gaming state, a second predetermined state setting means (main in the ninth embodiment) sets the subsequent gaming state to the second predetermined gaming state. function of executing the process of step S3604 of the side MPU 82);
The gaming machine according to feature J1 or J2, characterized by comprising:

According to feature J3, there is a first predetermined game state as the predetermined game state, and a second predetermined game state in which the frequency with which the predetermined ball entering means is in the open state is different from the first predetermined game state. This makes it possible to diversify the execution mode of a predetermined gaming state. Furthermore, if a predetermined shift trigger occurs in the first predetermined gaming state, the first predetermined gaming state is continued, and if a predetermined shift trigger occurs in a gaming state that is not the second predetermined gaming state, the subsequent gaming state is This is a second predetermined gaming state. This makes it possible to draw the player's attention to whether or not a predetermined shift opportunity occurs in the first predetermined gaming state.

Feature J4. The gaming machine according to feature J3, wherein the predetermined ball entering means is in the open state more frequently in the first predetermined game state than in the second predetermined game state.

According to feature J4, in a configuration in which the predetermined ball entry means is in the open state more frequently in the first predetermined game state than in the second predetermined game state, when a predetermined shift trigger occurs in the first predetermined game state, By continuing the first predetermined gaming state, it becomes possible to give priority to continuation of the first predetermined gaming state, which is advantageous for the player.

Feature J5. Means (nineth (a function of executing the subtraction process of the time saving state counter 134 of the main side MPU 82 in the embodiment),
When the predetermined gaming state is to be shifted to the predetermined gaming state based on the occurrence of the predetermined shift trigger, the predetermined state setting means sets the end reference number of times of the predetermined gaming state to a predetermined number of times (first time saving continuation number, second time saving number of times). The configuration is such that the number of continuations is
When the predetermined shift trigger occurs in the predetermined gaming state, the present gaming machine is configured to calculate the remaining number of times required to reach the end reference number of times in the predetermined gaming state at that time and the predetermined number of times, which is greater. Means for making the number of times on the side become the reference number of termination of the subsequent predetermined gaming state (a function of executing the processing of steps S3605 to S3610 and steps S3706 to S3708 of the main side MPU 82 in the ninth embodiment) ) The gaming machine according to any one of features J1 to J4.

According to feature J5, when a predetermined transition opportunity occurs in a predetermined gaming state, it is possible to set the reference number of times for ending the subsequent predetermined gaming state to a number that is advantageous for the player.

Feature J6. Feature J1 characterized in that the predetermined shift trigger occurs based on the result of the provision determination being a predetermined response result (time-saving result) that the special information corresponds to the predetermined response information. The gaming machine according to any one of J5 to J5.

According to feature J6, it is possible to create a situation in which the gaming state shifts to a predetermined gaming state without being awarded a benefit, based on the result of the granting determination. In this case, it is possible to achieve the excellent effects as described above.

Feature J7. a predetermined measuring means (ceiling counter 131) for measuring the number of times the game is executed;
A number updating means for updating the number of executions of the game round measured by the predetermined measuring means when the game round is executed (a function of executing the process of step S3703 of the main MPU 82 in the ninth embodiment) )and,
Equipped with
Any one of the features J1 to J6, characterized in that the predetermined shift trigger occurs when the number of times the game is executed as measured by the predetermined measuring means reaches a predetermined number of triggers (fixed ceiling number). The gaming machine described in .

According to feature J7, the predetermined gaming state is entered when the number of executions of the gaming session measured by the predetermined measuring means reaches the predetermined number of triggers. It becomes possible to shift to a gaming state. In this case, it is possible to achieve the excellent effects as described above.

Note that for the configuration of features J1 to J7, features A1 to A8, features B1 to B8, features C1 to C8, features D1 to D8, features E1 to E9, features F1 to F6, features G1 to G11, and features H1 to H8, Features I1-I5, Features J1-J7, Features K1-K7, Features L1-L5, Features M1-M4, Features N1-N8, Features O1-O8, Features P1-P6, Features Q1-Q16, Features R1- Any one or more of R6, features S1 to S7, features T1 to T3, features U1 to U5, and features V1 to V6 may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

According to the inventions related to the feature H group, the feature I group, and the feature J group, the following problems can be solved.

Pachinko machines, slot machines, and the like are known as types of gaming machines. These gaming machines are known to have a configuration in which an internal lottery is held based on the fulfillment of predetermined lottery conditions, and a bonus is awarded to a player according to the result of the internal lottery.

Specifically, pachinko machines have a configuration in which a game ball enters a ball entry section provided in a gaming area, and when a winning result is obtained in an internal lottery, the machine enters a special gaming state, and A configuration is known in which the game enters a special game state based on a game ball entering the game ball. When the state shifts to the special game state, for example, a ball entering device provided in the gaming area starts to open and close, and game balls are paid out based on balls entering the ball entering device.

Here, in gaming machines such as those exemplified above, it is necessary to improve the interest of the game, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Feature K group>
Feature K1. Acquisition means (in the first to fifth and seventh to ninth embodiments, step S704 and The function of executing the process of step S709 is the function of executing the process of step S2803 and step S2806 in the main side MPU 82 in the sixth embodiment, and the function of executing the process of step S3801 and step S3901 in the main side MPU 82 in the tenth to twelfth embodiments. function to perform processing), and
a predetermined determination means (a function of executing the propriety determination process of the main MPU 82 in the first to twelfth embodiments) that performs a predetermined determination (propriety determination processing) as to whether or not the special information corresponds to predetermined correspondence information; ,
Based on the result of the predetermined determination being a predetermined response result (time saving result) that the special information corresponds to the predetermined response information, a predetermined benefit (second high-frequency support mode) is provided to the player. a predetermined benefit granting means (a function of executing the setting process for time-saving results of the main MPU 82 in the first to twelfth embodiments);
The variable display of the predetermined symbol is started and the variable display of the predetermined symbol is ended as a stop result corresponding to the determination result of the predetermined determination as one game round, and the fluctuating display of the predetermined symbol is performed in each game round. A predetermined display control means (special figure fluctuation of the main side MPU 82 in the first to twelfth embodiments) that controls the display of the predetermined display means (first special figure display section 37a, second special figure display section 37b) so that function to execute start processing, special pattern fluctuation processing, and special pattern confirmation processing),
Specific display control means (sound-light side MPU 93, display side MPU 103) that controls the display of the specific display means (symbol display device 41) so that a variable display of specific symbols (symbols in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3) is executed in the game round. )and,
Equipped with
The predetermined display means has a narrower display range than the specific display means,
The predetermined privilege awarding means is configured to provide a grantable situation (first to eighth embodiments) that is not a restricted situation (high probability state or time saving state in the first to eighth embodiments, high probability state in the ninth to twelfth embodiments). The predetermined benefit is granted based on the result of the predetermined determination being the predetermined corresponding result in the normal gaming state in the embodiment, and the normal gaming state or time saving state in the ninth to twelfth embodiments, and If the result of the predetermined determination is the predetermined response result in the restriction situation, the predetermined benefit is not granted;
The predetermined display control means is configured to stop the variable display of the predetermined symbol on the predetermined display means when the result of the predetermined determination is the predetermined response result, regardless of whether the granting is possible or the restricting situation. As a result, a predetermined stop result (“4” or “5”) is displayed,
The specific display control means is
If the result of the predetermined determination is the predetermined corresponding result in the grantable situation, the specific stop result (“1.23” or “3.4. 1”) is displayed (a function that executes the process of step S1408 of the sound-light side MPU 93 in the first to twelfth embodiments);
If the result of the predetermined determination is the predetermined response result in the restriction situation, the result of stopping the variable display of the specific symbol on the specific display means may be displayed if the result of the predetermined determination is an incorrect result. A restriction response means (a function that executes the process of step S1410 of the sound and light side MPU 93 in the first to twelfth embodiments) for displaying a predetermined out-of-reach result (combination of non-reach out-of-reach symbols);
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature K1, the predetermined benefit is awarded based on the fact that the result of the predetermined determination is the predetermined response result, so the player expects that the result of the predetermined determination will be the predetermined response result. In addition, in a grantable situation, a predetermined benefit is granted based on the result of a predetermined response resulting in a predetermined response, whereas in a restricted situation, a predetermined benefit is not granted even if the predetermined determination results in a predetermined response result. . This makes it possible to limit the situations in which the predetermined benefit is granted.

In this case, in the specific display means that has a wider display range than the predetermined display means, if the result of the predetermined judgment becomes the predetermined response result in the grantable situation, the specific stop result is the result of stopping the variable display of the specific symbol. On the other hand, if the result of a predetermined judgment becomes a predetermined response result in a restricted situation, the change display of the specific symbol will be stopped, and if the result of a predetermined judgment is an error result, a predetermined deviation that may be displayed will be displayed. The results will be displayed. As a result, when a predetermined benefit is granted, it can be highlighted that the predetermined benefit is granted, and when the predetermined benefit is not granted even though the predetermined judgment result is the predetermined response result. It is possible to make it less noticeable.

On the other hand, the predetermined display means displays a predetermined stop result as a stop result of the variable display of the predetermined symbol if the result of the predetermined determination is a predetermined response result, regardless of whether the grant is possible or restricted. be done. This allows the game hall manager to easily visually confirm that the predetermined determination result is the predetermined response result. In addition, since the display range of the predetermined display means is narrower than that of the specific display means, even if the predetermined stop result is displayed on the predetermined display means in a restricted situation, the result of the predetermined judgment in the restricted situation will not become the predetermined response result. It becomes difficult for players to notice.

Feature K2. The specific display control means controls a special display area in the specific display means when the result of the predetermined determination is the predetermined response result in the restriction situation and when the result of the predetermined determination is the negative result. It is characterized by being equipped with a display difference means (a function of executing the processing of step S1412 and step S1413 of the sound-light side MPU 93 in the first to twelfth embodiments) for differentiating the display contents of the (state suggestion area 43). The gaming machine according to feature K1.

According to feature K2, even if a predetermined deviation result is displayed as a result of stopping the variable display of a specific symbol on the specific display device when the result of the predetermined determination becomes a predetermined corresponding result in a restricted situation, the special display device of the specific display device The display content in the display area will be different from the display content when the predetermined judgment result is a negative result, so the administrator of the game hall can check if the predetermined negative result is displayed on the specific display means. It is also possible to understand from the display content of the specific display means whether or not the predetermined response result in is the trigger.

Feature K3. As the predetermined response results, there are at least a first predetermined response result (first time-saving result) and a second predetermined response result (second time-saving result),
The predetermined benefit granting means differs the content of the predetermined benefit to be granted depending on whether the result of the predetermined determination is the first predetermined response result or the result of the predetermined determination is the second predetermined response result. It is something that makes
The predetermined display control means is configured to vary the contents of the predetermined stop result depending on whether the result of the predetermined determination is the first predetermined response result or the result of the predetermined determination is the second predetermined response result. and
The provision possible response means makes the content of the specific suspension result different depending on whether the result of the predetermined determination is the first predetermined response result or the second predetermined response result in the grantability situation. It is a thing,
The restriction response means may display the information in the specific display means whether the result of the predetermined determination in the restriction situation is the first predetermined response result or the second predetermined response result. The predetermined deviation result is displayed as a result of stopping the variable display of the specific symbol,
The display difference means differs the display contents of the special display area depending on whether the result of the predetermined determination is the first predetermined response result or the second predetermined response result in the restriction situation. The gaming machine according to feature K2.

According to feature K3, when the result of the predetermined determination is the first predetermined response result and the second predetermined response result in the grantable situation, the result of stopping the variable display of the specific symbol on the specific display means is Since the contents of a certain specific stop result are different, it becomes possible to suggest to the player the contents of a predetermined benefit that will be given after that based on the contents of the specific stop result. On the other hand, regardless of whether the result of the predetermined determination in the restricted situation is the first predetermined response result or the second predetermined response result, the result of stopping the variable display of the specific symbol on the specific display means is Since results that are outside the predetermined range are displayed, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize that the predetermined response result has been obtained, including the type of the predetermined response result. In addition, even in this case, the display contents of the special display area on the specific display means are different depending on whether the result of the predetermined determination is the first predetermined response result or the second predetermined response result, so the game When a result that is out of the prescribed range is displayed on the specific display means, the hall manager can also understand from the display content of the specific display means whether or not it was triggered by any prescribed response result in the restricted situation. becomes.

Feature K4. The gaming machine according to feature K2 or K3, wherein the display range of the special display area in the specific display means is narrower than the display range of the display area in which the specific symbol is displayed in the specific display means.

According to feature K4, when the result of a predetermined determination in a restricted situation is a predetermined response result, the display contents of the special display area in the specific display means are different from those displayed when the result of a predetermined determination is an incorrect result. Even if the content is configured, the display range of the special display area on the specific display means is narrower than the display range of the display area in which the specific symbol is displayed on the specific display means, so the special display area is not noticeable to the player. It becomes possible to do so.

Feature K5. A predetermined ball entrance means (second operating port 34 in the eighth embodiment) into which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter;
A predetermined ball entry control means (a function of executing the general/universal power control process of the main side MPU 82 in the eighth embodiment) capable of switching the predetermined ball entry means between a closed state and an open state;
Equipped with
The acquisition opportunity is configured to occur based on the game ball entering the predetermined ball entry means,
The predetermined benefit granting means changes the gaming state to a predetermined gaming state (second high-frequency support mode) in which the predetermined ball entry means is more likely to be in the open state than a different gaming state (normal gaming state), as the provision of the predetermined privilege. The gaming machine according to any one of features K1 to K4, characterized in that the gaming machine is transferred.

According to feature K5, when special information is acquired based on a game ball entering a predetermined ball entry means that is switched between a closed state and an open state, and the special information corresponds to predetermined corresponding information. It is possible to shift to a predetermined gaming state. When the player is in the predetermined game state, the predetermined ball entering means is more likely to be in the open state than in a different game state. Therefore, the predetermined gaming state is a gaming state that is advantageous to the player. In this case, it is possible to achieve the excellent effects already described.

Feature K6. Specifying that a specific benefit (opening/closing execution mode) is granted to the player based on the result of the predetermined determination being a grant correspondence result (jackpot result) in which the special information corresponds to grant correspondence information. Equipped with a privilege granting means (a function of executing special train start processing, special train opening process, special train closing process, and special train end process of the main side MPU 82 in the eighth embodiment),
Feature K5 characterized in that the predetermined benefit granting means shifts the gaming state to the predetermined gaming state without granting the specific benefit based on the fact that the result of the predetermined determination is the predetermined response result. The gaming machine described in .

According to feature K6, when the result of the predetermined determination is a predetermined response result, the gaming state shifts to the predetermined gaming state without being awarded a specific benefit. This makes it possible to provide surprise to the player.

Feature K7. Specifying that a specific benefit (opening/closing execution mode) is granted to the player based on the result of the predetermined determination being a grant correspondence result (jackpot result) in which the special information corresponds to grant correspondence information. Equipped with a privilege granting means (a function of executing special train start processing, special train opening process, special train closing process, and special train end process of the main side MPU 82 in the eighth embodiment),
Any of the features K1 to K6, characterized in that the restriction situation is a specific gaming state (high probability state) in which the probability that the result of the predetermined determination is the grant corresponding result is higher than that of another gaming state. The gaming machine described in (1) above.

According to feature K7, in a specific game state where the probability that the result of the predetermined determination becomes the corresponding result is higher than in another game state, the predetermined benefit is not granted even if the result of the predetermined determination becomes the corresponding result. It becomes possible to do so. In this case, it is possible to achieve the excellent effects already described.

Note that for the configuration of features K1 to K7, features A1 to A8, features B1 to B8, features C1 to C8, features D1 to D8, features E1 to E9, features F1 to F6, features G1 to G11, and features H1 to H8, Features I1-I5, Features J1-J7, Features K1-K7, Features L1-L5, Features M1-M4, Features N1-N8, Features O1-O8, Features P1-P6, Features Q1-Q16, Features R1- Any one or more of R6, features S1 to S7, features T1 to T3, features U1 to U5, and features V1 to V6 may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

According to the invention related to the feature K group described above, it is possible to solve the following problems.

Pachinko machines, slot machines, and the like are known as types of gaming machines. These gaming machines are known to have a configuration in which an internal lottery is held based on the fulfillment of predetermined lottery conditions, and a bonus is awarded to a player according to the result of the internal lottery.

Specifically, pachinko machines have a configuration in which a game ball enters a ball entry section provided in a gaming area, and when a winning result is obtained in an internal lottery, the machine enters a special gaming state, and A configuration is known in which the game enters a special game state based on a game ball entering the game ball. When the state shifts to the special game state, for example, a ball entering device provided in the gaming area starts to open and close, and game balls are paid out based on balls entering the ball entering device.

Here, in a gaming machine such as the one exemplified above, it is necessary to play the game in a suitable manner, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Feature L group>
Feature L1. A first acquisition means (10th to 12th implementation) that acquires the first special information (first pending information) based on the occurrence of the first acquisition opportunity (the entry of a game ball into the first operating port 33). (a function of executing the process of step S3801 of the main MPU 82 in the configuration);
First provision determination of whether the first special information is information corresponding to provision of a specific privilege (opening/closing execution mode) (first special figure special electric control process of the main side MPU 82 in the tenth to twelfth embodiments) (step S4005 of the special figure variation start process in the first special figure special electric control process of the main side MPU 82 in the tenth to twelfth embodiments) function to perform processing), and
The first game reuse operation is started and the first game reuse operation is ended as a state corresponding to the result of the first grant determination as one game time, and the first special information is used as a trigger. A first game control means (in the tenth to twelfth embodiments) that causes the first game execution means (first special figure display section 37a) to execute the first game reuse operation in each game round. A function of executing the special figure fluctuation start process, the special figure fluctuation process, and the special figure confirmation process in the first special figure special electric control process of the main side MPU 82),
A second acquisition means (10th to 12th embodiments) that acquires the second special information (second pending information) based on the occurrence of the second acquisition opportunity (the entry of a game ball into the special winning device 151) function of executing the process of step S3901 of the main side MPU 82);
Second award determination of whether the second special information is information corresponding to the award of the specific benefit (special symbol fluctuation in the second special symbol special electric control process of the main side MPU 82 in the tenth to twelfth embodiments) The second provision determination means (step S4005 of the start process) is executed in the special figure fluctuation start process in the second special figure special electric control process of the main side MPU 82 in the tenth to twelfth embodiments. function) and
The second game repetition operation is started, and the second game repetition operation is ended as a state corresponding to the result of the second grant determination, which is regarded as one game time, and the second special information is used as a trigger. A second game control means (in the tenth to twelfth embodiments) that causes the second game execution means (second special figure display section 37b) to execute the second game reuse operation in each game round. A function of executing special symbol fluctuation start processing, special symbol fluctuation processing, and special symbol confirmation processing in the second special symbol special electric control processing of the main side MPU 82);
A predetermined transition means for shifting the gaming state to a predetermined gaming state (time saving state) (a function of executing the setting process for the time saving result of the main side MPU 82 and the subtraction process of the ceiling counter 131 in the tenth to twelfth embodiments);
The total number of game times triggered by the first special information and game times triggered by the second special information executed in the predetermined gaming state is the number of termination triggers (first time saving continuation number, second time saving continuation number) a predetermined ending means (a function of executing the end determination process of the time-saving state of the main MPU 82 in the tenth to twelfth embodiments) that ends the predetermined gaming state based on the number of times);
Equipped with
A configuration in which at least a part of the period in which a game round triggered by the first special information is being executed may overlap with at least a part of a period in which a game round triggered by the second special information is being executed. and
The predetermined ending means is configured such that when one of the game times triggered by the first special information and the game time triggered by the second special information ends, the total number of times becomes the number of times triggered by the end. However, if the other game round is in the middle of the other game round that has been started before the one game round is started, the predetermined game state is ended after the other game round ends. A gaming machine.

According to feature L1, since the game session triggered by the first special information and the game session triggered by the second special information can be executed in duplicate, it is possible to increase the overall frequency of execution of the game sessions. becomes. In this case, even if one of the game times triggered by the first special information and the game time triggered by the second special information ends, and the total number of times becomes the number of times triggered by the end, the said one If the game is in the middle of another game round that was started before the game round, the predetermined game state ends after the other game round ends. As a result, the duration of a game round that started when the total number of times in a predetermined game state is one less than the number of triggers for ending, and special information on a side different from the special information that triggered the relevant game round. The number of games played until a predetermined game state ends varies depending on the start timing of the game game and the duration of the game game, thereby making it possible to improve the interest of the game.

Feature L2. Period determining means for making the average duration of the gaming rounds triggered by the second special information to be shorter than the average duration of the gaming rounds triggered by the first special information in the predetermined gaming state. (The function of executing the process of specifying the variable display period of the main MPU 82 in the tenth to twelfth embodiments) The gaming machine according to feature L1.

According to feature L2, in a predetermined gaming state, the gaming cycle triggered by the second special information in which the average duration of the gaming cycle is relatively short is repeated, thereby increasing the efficiency of gaming cycles. It is possible to increase it. On the other hand, in a situation where the total number of times in the predetermined gaming state is one less than the number of termination triggers, a game round triggered by the first special information that makes the average duration of the game round relatively long is started. By doing so, the predetermined gaming state continues until the gaming round triggered by the first special information ends. Then, by causing a game session triggered by the second special information to be executed while a game session triggered by the first special information is being executed, the game session executed in the predetermined gaming state is It is possible to make the total number of times greater than the number of termination triggers.

Feature L3. The period determining means is means for determining, by lottery, a continuation period of a game round triggered by the first special information that is started in a situation where the total number of times is one less than the number of times of termination trigger in the predetermined game state ( The gaming machine according to feature L2, characterized in that the gaming machine is equipped with a function of executing the processing of steps S4809 to S4811 of the main MPU 82 in the twelfth embodiment.

According to feature L3, when a game round triggered by the first special information is started in a situation where the total number of times in the predetermined game state is one less than the number of termination triggers, the duration of the game round is determined by lottery. Therefore, a player who wants to increase the number of gaming rounds executed in a predetermined gaming state as much as possible will expect that a long period will be selected as the continuation period of the gaming rounds triggered by the first special information.

Feature L4. A first ball entrance means (first operating port 33) that allows the game ball to enter when the game ball flows down the first area (left side area PA2);
A second ball entry means (special prize winning device 151) that allows the game ball to enter when the game ball flows down the second area (right side area PA3);
Equipped with
The first acquisition opportunity occurs when a game ball enters the first ball entry means,
The gaming machine according to any one of features L1 to L3, wherein the second acquisition opportunity occurs when a game ball enters the second ball entry means.

According to feature L4, the player can select which of the game rounds triggered by the first special information and the game rounds triggered by the second special information to be executed in a predetermined gaming state. In particular, in the configuration having the feature L2 or L3, the game cycle triggered by the second special information is repeated until the total number of times in the predetermined game state becomes one less than the number of times the end trigger occurs, If the total number of times in the predetermined gaming state is one less than the number of termination triggers, the game time triggered by the first special information is executed, and the game time triggered by the first special information is executed. After the start of the game, the second special information is used as a trigger to execute the game rounds, thereby making it possible to execute as many game rounds as possible before the predetermined game state ends. Become.

Feature L5. A predetermined ball entry means (special prize winning device 151 in the tenth to twelfth embodiments) into which a game ball flowing down the gaming area can enter;
a predetermined ball entry control means (a function for executing general/universal power control processing of the main side MPU 82) capable of switching the predetermined ball entry means between a closed state and an open state;
Equipped with
The second acquisition opportunity occurs when a game ball enters the predetermined ball entry means,
The gaming machine according to any one of features L1 to L4, wherein the predetermined gaming state is a gaming state in which the predetermined ball entering means is more likely to be in the open state than another gaming state (normal gaming state).

According to feature L5, the second special information is acquired based on the game ball entering the predetermined ball entry means that can be switched between the closed state and the open state, and the second special information is used to provide a specific benefit. In the configuration in which it is determined whether or not the information corresponds, when the game is in a predetermined game state, the predetermined ball entering means is more likely to be in the open state than when it is in a different game state. Therefore, the predetermined gaming state is a gaming state that is advantageous to the player. In this case, it is possible to achieve the excellent effects already described.

Note that for the configuration of features L1 to L5, features A1 to A8, features B1 to B8, features C1 to C8, features D1 to D8, features E1 to E9, features F1 to F6, features G1 to G11, and features H1 to H8, Features I1-I5, Features J1-J7, Features K1-K7, Features L1-L5, Features M1-M4, Features N1-N8, Features O1-O8, Features P1-P6, Features Q1-Q16, Features R1- Any one or more of R6, features S1 to S7, features T1 to T3, features U1 to U5, and features V1 to V6 may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

According to the invention related to the feature L group described above, it is possible to solve the following problems.

Pachinko machines, slot machines, and the like are known as types of gaming machines. These gaming machines are known to have a configuration in which an internal lottery is held based on the fulfillment of predetermined lottery conditions, and a bonus is awarded to a player according to the result of the internal lottery.

Specifically, pachinko machines have a configuration in which a game ball enters a ball entry section provided in a gaming area, and when a winning result is obtained in an internal lottery, the machine enters a special gaming state, and A configuration is known in which the game enters a special game state based on a game ball entering the game ball. When the state shifts to the special game state, for example, a ball entering device provided in the gaming area starts to open and close, and game balls are paid out based on balls entering the ball entering device.

Here, in gaming machines such as those exemplified above, it is necessary to improve the interest of the game, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Feature M group>
Feature M1. A first acquisition means (11th and 12th implementation) that acquires the first special information (first pending information) based on the occurrence of the first acquisition opportunity (the entry of a game ball into the first operating port 33). (a function of executing the process of step S3801 of the main MPU 82 in the configuration);
First provision determination of whether the first special information is information corresponding to provision of a specific privilege (opening/closing execution mode) (first special symbol special electric control process of the main side MPU 82 in the eleventh and twelfth embodiments) (step S4005 of the special figure fluctuation start process in the first special figure special electric control process of the main side MPU 82 in the eleventh and twelfth embodiments) functions) and
The first game reuse operation is started and the first game reuse operation is ended as a state corresponding to the result of the first grant determination as one game time, and the first special information is used as a trigger. A first game control means (in the eleventh and twelfth embodiments) that causes the first game execution means (first special figure display section 37a) to execute the first game reuse operation in each game round. A function of executing the special figure fluctuation start process, the special figure fluctuation process, and the special figure confirmation process in the first special figure special electric control process of the main side MPU 82),
A second acquisition means (eleventh and twelfth embodiments) that acquires second special information (second pending information) based on the occurrence of a second acquisition opportunity (entering of a game ball into the special winning device 151). function of executing the process of step S3901 of the main side MPU 82);
Second award determination of whether the second special information is information corresponding to the award of the specific benefit (special symbol fluctuation in the second special symbol special electric control process of the main side MPU 82 in the eleventh and twelfth embodiments) The second provision determination means (step S4005 of the start process) is executed in the special figure fluctuation start process in the second special figure special electric control process of the main side MPU 82 in the eleventh and twelfth embodiments. function) and
The second game repetition operation is started, and the second game repetition operation is ended as a state corresponding to the result of the second grant determination, which is regarded as one game time, and the second special information is used as a trigger. A second game control means (in the eleventh and twelfth embodiments) that causes the second game execution means (second special figure display section 37b) to execute the second game reuse operation in each game round. A function of executing special symbol fluctuation start processing, special symbol fluctuation processing, and special symbol confirmation processing in the second special symbol special electric control processing of the main side MPU 82);
A predetermined transition means for shifting the gaming state to a predetermined gaming state (time saving state) (a function of executing the setting processing for the time saving result of the main side MPU 82 and the subtraction processing of the ceiling counter 131 in the eleventh and twelfth embodiments);
The total number of game times triggered by the first special information and game times triggered by the second special information executed in the predetermined gaming state is the number of termination triggers (first time saving continuation number, second time saving continuation) a predetermined ending means (a function of executing the end determination process of the time saving state of the main MPU 82 in the eleventh and twelfth embodiments) that ends the predetermined gaming state based on the number of times);
Period determining means for making the average duration of the gaming rounds triggered by the second special information to be shorter than the average duration of the gaming rounds triggered by the first special information in the predetermined gaming state. (In the 11th embodiment, the function of executing the processing of steps S4710 to S4713 of the main side MPU 82, and in the 12th embodiment, the function of executing the processing of steps S4812 to S4815 of the main side MPU 82),
Equipped with
A configuration in which at least a part of the period in which a game round triggered by the first special information is being executed may overlap with at least a part of a period in which a game round triggered by the second special information is being executed. and
The predetermined ending means is configured to set the total number of times as the end trigger number when one of the game times triggered by the first special information and the game time triggered by the second special information ends. Even if the game is in the middle of the other game round that has started before the start of the one game round, the predetermined game state is ended after the other game round ends,
The period determining means determines the duration of a gaming session triggered by the first special information that is started in a situation where the total number of times is one less than the number of termination triggers in the predetermined gaming state. Short-term selection means (in the eleventh embodiment, the main MPU 82 (in the twelfth embodiment, a function of executing the processing of step S4809 to step S4811 of the main MPU 82).

According to feature M1, since the game session triggered by the first special information and the game session triggered by the second special information can be executed in duplicate, it is possible to increase the overall execution frequency of the game sessions. becomes. In addition, in a predetermined gaming state, by repeating the game rounds triggered by the second special information in which the average duration of the game rounds is relatively short, it is possible to increase the efficiency of playing the game rounds. becomes.

In this case, even if one of the game times triggered by the first special information and the game time triggered by the second special information ends, and the total number of times becomes the number of times triggered by the end, the said one If the game is in the middle of another game round that was started before the game round, the predetermined game state ends after the other game round ends. Thereby, it becomes possible to continue the predetermined gaming state until the gaming round that triggered the end of the predetermined gaming state ends.

However, in this configuration, if a game round triggered by the first special information is started in a situation where the total number of times in the predetermined gaming state is one less than the number of times the end trigger is triggered, the first special information is triggered. Until the specified game time ends, the game time triggered by the second special information is repeatedly executed, and the actual total number of game times executed in the predetermined game state is more extreme than the number of end triggers. There is a risk that the number will increase. On the other hand, the duration of a game session triggered by the first special information that started when the total number of times was one less than the end trigger number in a predetermined gaming state is the same as the duration of a game session triggered by the first special information. The period becomes or tends to become shorter than the duration of the game round triggered by the first special information. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the actual total number of gaming times executed in the predetermined gaming state from becoming extremely larger than the number of termination triggers.

Feature M2. The short-term selection means selects the duration of a gaming session triggered by the first special information that is started in a situation where the total number of times is one less than the number of termination triggers in the predetermined gaming state. The gaming machine according to feature M1, wherein the duration is equal to or less than the duration selected in the game round triggered by the second special information.

According to feature M2, the duration of a game session triggered by the first special information that is started in a situation where the total number of times is one less than the end trigger number in the predetermined game state is the same as the second special information in the predetermined game state. Since the period is less than or equal to the duration selected for the game session that was the trigger, it is possible to prevent the actual total number of game sessions executed in the predetermined gaming state from becoming greater than the number of times that triggered the end. becomes.

Feature M3. A first ball entrance means (first operating port 33) that allows the game ball to enter when the game ball flows down the first area (left side area PA2);
A second ball entry means (special winning device 151) that allows the game ball to enter when the game ball flows down the second area (right side area PA3);
Equipped with
The first acquisition opportunity occurs when a game ball enters the first ball entry means,
The gaming machine according to feature M1 or M2, wherein the second acquisition opportunity occurs when a game ball enters the second ball entry means.

According to feature M3, the player can select which of the game rounds triggered by the first special information and the game rounds triggered by the second special information to be executed in a predetermined gaming state.

Feature M4. A predetermined ball entry means (special winning device 151 in the eleventh and twelfth embodiments) into which a game ball flowing down the gaming area can enter;
a predetermined ball entry control means (a function for executing general/universal power control processing of the main side MPU 82) capable of switching the predetermined ball entry means between a closed state and an open state;
Equipped with
The second acquisition opportunity occurs when a game ball enters the predetermined ball entry means,
The gaming machine according to any one of features M1 to M3, wherein the predetermined gaming state is a gaming state in which the predetermined ball entering means is more likely to be in the open state than another gaming state (normal gaming state).

According to feature M4, the second special information is acquired based on the game ball entering the predetermined ball entry means that can be switched between the closed state and the open state, and the second special information is used to provide a specific benefit. In the configuration in which it is determined whether or not the information corresponds, when the game is in a predetermined game state, the predetermined ball entering means is more likely to be in the open state than when it is in a different game state. Therefore, the predetermined gaming state is a gaming state that is advantageous to the player. In this case, it is possible to achieve the excellent effects already described.

Note that for the configuration of features M1 to M4, features A1 to A8, features B1 to B8, features C1 to C8, features D1 to D8, features E1 to E9, features F1 to F6, features G1 to G11, and features H1 to H8, Features I1-I5, Features J1-J7, Features K1-K7, Features L1-L5, Features M1-M4, Features N1-N8, Features O1-O8, Features P1-P6, Features Q1-Q16, Features R1- Any one or more of R6, features S1 to S7, features T1 to T3, features U1 to U5, and features V1 to V6 may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

According to the invention related to the above feature M group, it is possible to solve the following problems.

Pachinko machines, slot machines, and the like are known as types of gaming machines. These gaming machines are known to have a configuration in which an internal lottery is held based on the fulfillment of predetermined lottery conditions, and a bonus is awarded to a player according to the result of the internal lottery.

Specifically, pachinko machines have a configuration in which a game ball enters a ball entry section provided in a gaming area, and when a winning result is obtained in an internal lottery, the machine enters a special gaming state, and A configuration is known in which the game enters a special game state based on a game ball entering the game ball. When the state shifts to the special game state, for example, a ball entering device provided in the gaming area starts to open and close, and game balls are paid out based on balls entering the ball entering device.

Here, in a gaming machine such as the one exemplified above, it is necessary to play the game in a suitable manner, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Characteristics N group>
Feature N1. A control means (main MPU 82 in the thirteenth embodiment) that executes various predetermined processes (specific control processes);
an information storage means (main RAM 84 in the thirteenth embodiment) into which information is written when the various predetermined processes are executed in the control means;
Equipped with
The information storage means includes:
a first storage area (work area 211 for specific control in the thirteenth embodiment) into which information is written when the various predetermined processes are executed;
A second storage area (an unused area in the thirteenth embodiment) that is contiguous with the first storage area at the address of the information storage means and to which information is not written when the various predetermined processes are executed. Area (address Y(r+3) to address Y(r+5)),
A third storage area (a third storage area for specific control in the thirteenth embodiment) that is continuous with the second storage area at the address of the information storage means and into which information is written when the various predetermined processes are executed. stack area 212),
Equipped with
This gaming machine includes the first storage area, the second storage area, and the third storage area when a predetermined information deletion trigger (negative determination in step S4918 or execution of setting value update processing) occurs. It is characterized by comprising an erasing execution means (a function of executing the RAM clearing process of the main MPU 82 in the thirteenth embodiment) that executes an information erasing process (RAM clearing process) on the storage area of the information storage means. A gaming machine that does.

According to feature N1, the first storage area and the third storage area are provided as storage areas in which information is written when various predetermined processes are executed in the control means. It becomes possible to use the target storage area as a first storage area and a third storage area depending on the role. Further, a second storage area is provided between the first storage area and the third storage area at the address of the information storage means, and the second storage area contains information when various predetermined processes are executed. Since writing is not performed, it becomes possible to clearly distinguish between the first storage area and the third storage area in the address of the information storage means.

In this case, when a predetermined information deletion trigger occurs, not only the first storage area and the third storage area used when various predetermined processes are executed, but also the various predetermined processes are executed. The information erasing process is executed including the second storage area which is not used in this case. As a result, instead of specifying the first storage area and the third storage area individually and executing the information erasing process, the first storage area, the second storage area, and the third storage area are contiguous at the address of the information storage means. It becomes possible to specify all the information all at once and execute the information deletion process. Therefore, it is possible to simplify the processing configuration when performing information erasure processing.

Feature N2. The erasure execution means is configured to erase the information in a continuous address range from a predetermined address (address Y(3)) in the first storage area to a specific address (address Y(s+1)) in the third storage area. The gaming machine according to feature N1, wherein the information erasing process is executed on the storage area in .

According to feature N2, even if the second storage area is provided as an unused area between the first storage area and the third storage area, the third storage area is Since it is sufficient to perform the information erasing process on the storage area in a series of address ranges up to a specific address in the storage area, it is possible to simplify the processing configuration when executing the information erasing process.

Feature N3. a predetermined prohibition setting means (a function of executing the processing of step S4903 and step S7506 of the main MPU 82 in the thirteenth embodiment) that performs a predetermined prohibition setting so that information is not written to the second storage area; ,
When the information erasing process is executed, a predetermined disable setting is canceled (a function of executing the process of step S7501 of the main MPU 82 in the thirteenth embodiment);
The gaming machine according to feature N1 or N2, characterized by comprising:

According to feature N3, by setting the predetermined disable setting, information will not be written to the second storage area, so information will not be written to the second storage area by mistake. It is possible to prevent this from occurring. In this case, when the information deletion process is executed, the predetermined prohibition setting is intentionally canceled. Accordingly, in a configuration that prevents information from being written to the second storage area by mistake, the first storage area, second storage area, and third storage area that are continuous at the address of the information storage means are It becomes possible to execute information deletion processing by specifying them all at once.

Feature N4. The gaming machine according to feature N3, wherein the predetermined prohibition setting means performs the predetermined prohibition setting after the information erasing process is executed.

According to feature N4, even if the predetermined prohibition setting is canceled when the information deletion process is executed, the predetermined prohibition setting is performed after the information deletion process is executed. As a result, after the information erasing process is executed, it is possible to restore the second storage area to a state in which information is not written in error.

Feature N5. The gaming machine according to feature N3 or N4, wherein the predetermined disable setting means performs the predetermined disable setting when supply of operating power to the control means is started.

According to feature N5, since the predetermined disable setting is performed when the supply of operating power to the control means is started, information may be written in the second storage area by mistake before the game starts. This makes it possible to maintain a state in which it will not be damaged.

Feature N6. A predetermined setting area (protect register 223c) that becomes one of the binary information when the predetermined prohibition setting is performed and becomes the other information of the binary information when the predetermined prohibition setting is cancelled. have,
The present gaming machine is characterized in that, when the information in the predetermined setting area is the one of the information, means (RAM management circuit 225) for excluding the second storage area from the information writing target. The gaming machine according to any one of N3 to N5.

According to feature N6, in order to set the predetermined prohibition setting, the information in the predetermined setting area is set as one of the binary information, and in order to cancel the predetermined prohibition setting, the information in the predetermined setting area is set as one of the binary information. It may be used as the other information. This makes it possible to reduce the processing load for setting the predetermined disable setting and the processing load for canceling the predetermined disable setting.

Feature N7. The control means includes:
a predetermined control execution means for executing the various predetermined processes (a function for executing specific control processing of the main MPU 82 in the thirteenth embodiment);
Another control execution means (a function of executing the non-specific control process of the main MPU 82 in the thirteenth embodiment) that executes other various processes (non-specific control process);
Equipped with
The information storage means includes a fourth storage area (work area 213 for non-specific control in the thirteenth embodiment) into which information is written when the other various processes are executed,
In the first storage area and the third storage area, information is written when the predetermined various processes are executed, and information is written to the first storage area and the third storage area when the other various processes are executed. You won't be hurt,
In the fourth storage area, information is written when the other various processes are executed, but information is not written when the predetermined various processes are executed,
The game according to any one of features N1 to N6, wherein the erasure execution means does not execute the information erasure process on the fourth storage area when the predetermined information erasure trigger occurs. Machine.

According to feature N7, when the control means executes various predetermined processes, the first storage area and the third storage area of the information storage means become targets for writing information, and when the control means executes various other processes. In this case, the fourth storage area in the information storage means is the target for writing information. This makes it possible to distinguish the type of storage area to which information is to be written, depending on the type of processing executed by the control means. In this case, in the configuration in which when a predetermined information deletion trigger occurs and various predetermined processes are executed, the information deletion process is executed including the second storage area which is an unused area. Information erasure processing is not performed on the storage area. As a result, in a configuration in which the information erasure process is executed including the second storage area in order to simplify the processing configuration, the first storage area, the third storage area, and the fourth storage area are also included in the execution target of the information erasure process. It becomes possible to distinguish between

Feature N8. a predetermined prohibition setting means (a function of executing the processing of step S4903 and step S7506 of the main MPU 82 in the thirteenth embodiment) that performs a predetermined prohibition setting so that information is not written to the second storage area; ,
When the information erasing process is executed, a predetermined disable setting is canceled (a function of executing the process of step S7501 of the main MPU 82 in the thirteenth embodiment);
Separate erasure means (information abnormality monitoring of the main MPU 82 in the thirteenth embodiment) that executes information erasure processing on the fourth storage area when a specific information erasure trigger (affirmative determination in step S7602) occurs. functions) and
Equipped with
The gaming machine according to feature N7, characterized in that when the separate erasing means executes the information erasing process on the fourth storage area, the predetermined prohibition setting is not canceled.

According to feature N8, in a configuration in which information erasure processing is not executed on the fourth storage area when a predetermined information erasure opportunity occurs, when a specific information erasure opportunity occurs, the information erasure process is performed on the fourth storage area. Information deletion processing is performed on the area. This makes it possible to perform the information erasing process on the fourth storage area as well. In this case, if the deletion process of the information is executed, the predetermined prohibition setting is not canceled. This makes it possible to prevent the predetermined prohibition setting from being canceled in a situation where information erasure processing is not performed on the second storage area.

Note that for the configuration of features N1 to N8, features A1 to A8, features B1 to B8, features C1 to C8, features D1 to D8, features E1 to E9, features F1 to F6, features G1 to G11, and features H1 to H8, Features I1-I5, Features J1-J7, Features K1-K7, Features L1-L5, Features M1-M4, Features N1-N8, Features O1-O8, Features P1-P6, Features Q1-Q16, Features R1- Any one or more of R6, features S1 to S7, features T1 to T3, features U1 to U5, and features V1 to V6 may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

According to the invention related to the above feature N group, it is possible to solve the following problems.

Pachinko machines, slot machines, and the like are known as types of gaming machines. These gaming machines are known to have a configuration in which an internal lottery is held based on the fulfillment of predetermined lottery conditions, and a bonus is awarded to a player according to the result of the internal lottery.

Specifically, pachinko machines have a configuration in which a game ball enters a ball entry section provided in a gaming area, and when a winning result is obtained in an internal lottery, the machine enters a special gaming state, and A configuration is known in which the game enters a special game state based on a game ball entering the game ball. When the state shifts to the special game state, for example, a ball entering device provided in the gaming area starts to open and close, and game balls are paid out based on balls entering the ball entering device.

Here, in gaming machines such as those exemplified above, processing needs to be suitably executed by the control means, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Characteristics Group O>
Feature O1. means (a function of executing the process of step S805 of the main MPU 82) for executing the profit granting process (step S805 of the main MPU 82) in a manner corresponding to the set value corresponding to the player's advantage level;
Situation generation means (in the thirteenth embodiment) that creates a setting possible situation (a situation in which the setting value update process in the thirteenth embodiment is executed) in which the setting value to be used can be set. A function of making an affirmative determination in step S4908 or step S4915 of the main MPU 82);
When a specific event (entering of a game ball into the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34) occurs due to the execution of the game, it is handled accordingly. a history storage execution means (a function for executing the normal ball entry management process of the main MPU 82 in the thirteenth and fourteenth embodiments) that stores history information of games to be played in the history storage means (normal counter area 251);
Information derivation means for deriving mode information (base value) corresponding to the result of a game using the history information stored in the history storage means (executes the result calculation process of the main MPU 82 in the thirteenth embodiment) function) and
Mode notification control means (main side in the thirteenth embodiment) that controls the mode notification unit (first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204) so that the mode information derived by the information derivation unit is notified. a function of executing the second timer interrupt processing and display processing of the MPU 82);
Equipped with
A gaming machine characterized in that the mode information can be notified by the mode notification means even if the setting is possible.

According to feature O1, since the configuration is such that setting values to be used are set, the player expects that more advantageous setting values are to be used. Furthermore, when a specific event occurs, history information corresponding to it is stored in the history storage means. By storing the history information in the gaming machine itself, unauthorized access to and unauthorized modification of the history information can be prevented. Moreover, the mode information corresponding to the result of the game is derived using the history information stored in the history storage means, and the derived mode information is notified. This makes it possible for the game hall manager to recognize the number of occurrences or the frequency of occurrence of a specific event. In this case, the mode information can be reported by the mode notification means even if the setting is possible. This makes it possible to set the setting value in a manner corresponding to the content of the notified aspect information while checking the contents. Therefore, it becomes possible to appropriately manage gaming machines.

Feature O2. Means for controlling the setting notification means (setting display device 205) so that the setting value is notified in the setting possible situation (executing the processes of step S7203 and steps S7207 to S7212 of the main MPU 82 in the thirteenth embodiment) The gaming machine according to feature O1, characterized in that the gaming machine is equipped with a function of:

According to feature O2, in a setting possible situation, the setting notifying means notifies the setting value, and the manner notifying means notifies the aspect information. As a result, the administrator of the game hall can check the content of the mode information notified by the mode notification means and state that the desired setting value based on the content of the mode information is notified by the setting notification means. It becomes possible to perform the setting work until . Therefore, it is possible to improve the work efficiency for setting desired setting values based on the content of the mode information.

Feature O3. The gaming machine according to feature O2, wherein the setting notification means is mounted on a mounting surface (element mounting surface of the main control board 81) on which the mode notification means is mounted.

According to feature O3, since the setting notifying means is mounted on the mounting surface on which the mode notifying means is mounted, the content of the mode information notified by the mode notifying means and the settings notified by the setting notifying means It becomes easier to check both values.

Feature O4. The situation generation means detects a situation occurrence trigger (that both the pressing operation of the reset button 196 and the ON operation of the setting key insertion part 195 are performed, and the setting update display flag is set to "0" when the supply of operating power is started). 1" is set) is occurring, the setting possible situation is established,
The mode notification control means is characterized in that, when supply of operating power is started and the setting possible situation is reached, the mode notification control means starts notification corresponding to the mode information when the setting possible situation is started. The gaming machine according to any one of features O1 to O3.

According to feature O4, when the supply of operating power is started, the setting becomes possible based on the occurrence of a situation trigger, so in order to set the setting value, the supply of operating power must be restarted. It becomes necessary to start it. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to illegally set the setting value. In this case, when the supply of operating power is started and a setting possible situation is reached, notification corresponding to the aspect information is started when the setting possible situation is started. This makes it possible to prevent the notification corresponding to the mode information from starting before the game hall manager starts the work for setting the setting value.

Feature O5. Check control means for causing the mode notifying means to perform a check display that allows checking whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the mode notifying means (processing of step S4926 and step S7302 of the main MPU 82 in the thirteenth embodiment) ),
The gaming machine according to any one of features O1 to O4, wherein the check control means causes the mode notification means to start the check display when the settable situation ends.

According to feature O5, since a check display is displayed that allows checking whether an abnormality has occurred in the mode notification means, the manager of the game hall can check the check display to detect an abnormality in the mode notification means. It becomes possible to specify whether or not this is occurring. In this case, if a settable situation occurs, a check display is started when the settable situation ends. Thereby, it is possible to give priority to the mode notification means to make a notification corresponding to the mode information in a setting possible situation over the check display of the mode notification means.

Feature O6. The situation generation means detects a situation occurrence trigger (that both the pressing operation of the reset button 196 and the ON operation of the setting key insertion part 195 are performed, and the setting update display flag is set to "0" when the supply of operating power is started). 1" is set) is occurring, the setting possible situation is established,
The mode notification control means controls the check display when a predetermined situation (a situation where the setting confirmation process and the setting value update process are not executed) occurs in which the setting possible situation does not occur when the supply of the operating power is started. starts the notification corresponding to the mode information after the execution of the second timer interrupt process is permitted in step S4932 of the main process in the thirteenth embodiment. 201 to 204). The gaming machine according to feature O5.

According to feature O6, when the supply of operating power is started, the setting becomes possible based on the occurrence of a situation trigger, so in order to set the setting value, the supply of operating power must be restarted. It becomes necessary to start it. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to illegally set the setting values. In this case, if a predetermined situation occurs in which the setting is not possible when the supply of operating power is started, the notification corresponding to the mode information is started after the check display ends. This makes it possible to give priority to the check display over the start of the notification corresponding to the mode information when the setting is not possible.

Feature O7. comprising aspect information storage means (calculation result storage area 252 in the thirteenth embodiment) for storing a plurality of the aspect information derived by the information deriving means,
The mode notification control means includes:
Sequential notification control means (steps of the main MPU 82 in the thirteenth embodiment) that controls the aspect notification means so that notifications corresponding to each of the plurality of aspect information stored in the aspect information storage means are executed sequentially A function to execute the processing from S7408 to S7414);
When the check display ends after the end of the settable situation, the mode notification means executes notification from the mode information of the type that was the notification target immediately before the check display started. (a function that executes the processing of step S7419 and step S7420 of the main MPU 82 in the thirteenth embodiment);
The gaming machine according to feature O5 or O6, characterized by comprising:

According to feature O7, since the mode notification means sequentially executes notifications corresponding to each of the plurality of mode information, the manager of the game hall can grasp the contents of the plurality of mode information by checking the mode notification means. becomes possible. In this case, when the check display ends after the end of the settable situation, notification is performed starting from the type of aspect information that was the notification target immediately before the check display started. Thereby, after the check display ends, the game hall manager can check the content of the mode information of the type that was interrupted by the occurrence of the check display.

Feature O8. The sequential notification control means changes the type of the aspect information to be notified based on the elapse of a predetermined notification duration period (display duration period),
When the check display ends after the end of the settable situation, the notification restart means executes notification from the type of aspect information that was the target of notification immediately before the check display started. wherein the notification corresponding to the aspect information of the type continues for the predetermined notification duration period regardless of the remaining predetermined notification duration period when the check display is started. The gaming machine according to feature O7, characterized in that the gaming machine is configured to be executed.

According to feature O8, when the check display ends after the end of the settable situation, notification is executed from the type of aspect information that was the notification target immediately before the check display started, and The notification of this type of aspect information is executed for a predetermined notification duration period after the end of the check display. Thereby, after the check display ends, it is possible to ensure that the game hall manager has a sufficient opportunity to confirm the content of the type of mode information that was interrupted by the occurrence of the check display.

Note that for the configuration of features O1 to O8, features A1 to A8, features B1 to B8, features C1 to C8, features D1 to D8, features E1 to E9, features F1 to F6, features G1 to G11, and features H1 to H8, Features I1-I5, Features J1-J7, Features K1-K7, Features L1-L5, Features M1-M4, Features N1-N8, Features O1-O8, Features P1-P6, Features Q1-Q16, Features R1- Any one or more of R6, features S1 to S7, features T1 to T3, features U1 to U5, and features V1 to V6 may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

According to the invention related to the characteristic group O described above, it is possible to solve the following problems.

Pachinko machines, slot machines, and the like are known as types of gaming machines. These gaming machines are known to have a configuration in which an internal lottery is held based on the fulfillment of predetermined lottery conditions, and a bonus is awarded to a player according to the result of the internal lottery.

Specifically, pachinko machines have a configuration in which a game ball enters a ball entry section provided in a gaming area, and when a winning result is obtained in an internal lottery, the machine enters a special gaming state, and A configuration is known in which the game enters a special game state based on a game ball entering the game ball. When the state shifts to the special game state, for example, a ball entering device provided in the gaming area starts to open and close, and game balls are paid out based on balls entering the ball entering device.

Here, in gaming machines such as those exemplified above, it is necessary to appropriately manage the gaming machines, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Feature P group>
Feature P1. Display target storage means (calculation result storage area 252 in the thirteenth embodiment) that stores a plurality of display target information (base values);
The predetermined display means (first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204) are controlled so that displays corresponding to each of the plurality of display target information stored in the display target storage means are sequentially executed, and the predetermined Predetermined display control means (second timer interrupt processing of the main MPU 82 in the thirteenth embodiment and function to perform display processing), and
Equipped with
When a predetermined situation in which no display corresponding to the display target information is performed ends, the predetermined display control means controls the display from the type of display target information that was the display target immediately before the predetermined situation started. and the display corresponding to the display target information of the type is executed for the predetermined display duration period regardless of the remaining predetermined display duration period when the predetermined situation is started. A gaming machine characterized by comprising a display resuming means (a function of executing the processing of steps S7419 and S7420 of the main MPU 82 in the thirteenth embodiment).

According to feature P1, in the predetermined display means, the display corresponding to each of the plurality of display target information is executed sequentially, and the type of display target information to be displayed is changed based on the elapse of a predetermined display duration period. Therefore, the manager of the game hall can grasp the contents of a plurality of pieces of display target information by checking the predetermined display means. In this case, when the predetermined situation ends, the display of the display target information of the type that was the display target immediately before the start of the predetermined situation is executed, and the display of the display target information of the relevant type is executed. This is executed for a predetermined display duration period after the end of the predetermined situation. Thereby, after the predetermined situation ends, it is possible to ensure that the game hall manager has a sufficient opportunity to check the content of the display target information of the type that was interrupted due to the occurrence of the predetermined situation.

Feature P2. Separate display control means (a function for executing the processes of step S4926 and step S7302 of the main MPU 82 in the thirteenth embodiment) for causing the predetermined display means to perform a separate display different from the display corresponding to the display target information. ,
The predetermined situation is a situation in which the separate display is performed,
The display resuming means is for, when the separate display ends, displaying is executed from the display target information of the type that was the display target immediately before the separate display started, and The display corresponding to the type of display target information is executed for the predetermined display duration period regardless of the remaining predetermined display duration period when the separate display is started. The gaming machine according to feature P1.

According to feature P2, when a situation arises in which separate display is performed on the predetermined display means, the display corresponding to the information to be displayed is not performed, so that separate display can be given priority. In this case, when the separate display ends, the display will start from the type of display target information that was being displayed immediately before the separate display started, and the display of the display target information of that type will start. This is executed for a predetermined display duration period after the end of the separate display. Thereby, after the separate display ends, it is possible to ensure that the game hall manager has a sufficient opportunity to confirm the content of the display target information of the type that was interrupted due to the occurrence of the separate display.

Feature P3. The separate display control means causes the predetermined display means to display, as the separate display, a check display that allows checking whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the predetermined display means, as described in feature P2. gaming machines.

According to feature P3, since a check display is performed that allows checking whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the predetermined display means, the manager of the game hall can confirm whether there is an abnormality in the predetermined display means by checking the check display. It becomes possible to specify whether or not this is occurring. In this case, the configuration of feature P1 is provided, and when the check display ends, the display is executed from the type of display target information that was the display target immediately before the check display started, and , the display of the relevant type of display target information is executed for a predetermined display duration period after the end of the check display. Thereby, after the check display ends, it is possible to ensure that the game hall manager has a sufficient opportunity to confirm the content of the display target information of the type that was interrupted by the occurrence of the check display.

Feature P4. The predetermined display control means includes:
When the supply of operating power is started and in the first situation (a situation in which the setting value update process is executed), means for starting the display of the display target information before the check display starts. function of executing the process of step S5101 of the main MPU 82 in the thirteenth embodiment);
When the supply of operating power is started and a second situation (a situation in which a setting confirmation process and a setting value update process are not executed) starts displaying the display target information until the checking display ends. means for starting the display of the display target information after the check display ends (a function for executing the process of step S4932 of the main MPU 82 in the thirteenth embodiment);
The gaming machine according to feature P3, characterized by comprising:

According to feature P4, depending on the situation when the supply of operating power is started, the display target information may start to be displayed before the check display starts, or may be displayed until the check display ends. It is possible to cause a case where the display of the display target information is started after the check display ends without the display of the target information being started.

Feature P5. means (a function of executing the process of step S805 of the main MPU 82) for executing the profit granting process (step S805 of the main MPU 82) in a manner corresponding to the set value corresponding to the player's advantage level;
When the supply of operating power is started, the situation occurrence trigger (both the pressing operation of the reset button 196 and the ON operation of the setting key insertion part 195 are performed, and the setting update display flag is set to "1") Based on the fact that the setting value to be used can be set before the check display starts, based on the occurrence of the setting value (setting in the thirteenth embodiment) a situation generating means (a function that makes an affirmative determination in step S4908 or step S4915 of the main MPU 82 in the thirteenth embodiment),
Equipped with
The first situation occurs when the configurable situation occurs,
The gaming machine according to feature P4, wherein the second situation occurs when the settable situation does not occur.

According to feature P5, since the configuration is such that setting values to be used are set, the player expects that more advantageous setting values are to be used. In this case, if a setting possible situation occurs when the supply of operating power starts, the display target information starts to be displayed before the check display starts, and if the supply of operating power starts. If a settable situation does not occur, the display of the display target information does not start until the check display ends, and the display of the display target information starts after the check display ends. As a result, if the setting is possible, the display target information can be displayed in the setting possible state, but if the setting is not possible, the display target information is not displayed after the check display ends. It becomes possible to start the process.

Feature P6. When a specific event (entering of a game ball into the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34) occurs due to the execution of the game, it is handled accordingly. a history storage execution means (a function for executing the normal ball entry management process of the main MPU 82 in the thirteenth and fourteenth embodiments) that stores history information of games to be played in the history storage means (normal counter area 251);
Information derivation means for deriving mode information (base value) corresponding to the result of a game using the history information stored in the history storage means (executes the result calculation process of the main MPU 82 in the thirteenth embodiment) function) and
Equipped with
The gaming machine according to any one of features P1 to P5, wherein the display target information is the mode information.

According to feature P6, when a specific event occurs, history information corresponding to it is stored in the history storage means. By storing the history information in the gaming machine itself, unauthorized access to and unauthorized modification of the history information can be prevented. Moreover, the mode information corresponding to the result of the game is derived using the history information stored in the history storage means, and the derived mode information is displayed. This makes it possible for the game hall manager to recognize the number of occurrences or the frequency of occurrence of a specific event. In this case, it becomes possible to achieve the excellent effect as described in the feature P1 above.

Note that for the configuration of features P1 to P6, features A1 to A8, features B1 to B8, features C1 to C8, features D1 to D8, features E1 to E9, features F1 to F6, features G1 to G11, and features H1 to H8, Features I1-I5, Features J1-J7, Features K1-K7, Features L1-L5, Features M1-M4, Features N1-N8, Features O1-O8, Features P1-P6, Features Q1-Q16, Features R1- Any one or more of R6, features S1 to S7, features T1 to T3, features U1 to U5, and features V1 to V6 may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

According to the invention related to the feature P group described above, it is possible to solve the following problems.

Pachinko machines, slot machines, and the like are known as types of gaming machines. These gaming machines are known to have a configuration in which an internal lottery is held based on the fulfillment of predetermined lottery conditions, and a bonus is awarded to a player according to the result of the internal lottery.

Specifically, pachinko machines have a configuration in which a game ball enters a ball entry section provided in a gaming area, and when a winning result is obtained in an internal lottery, the machine enters a special gaming state, and A configuration is known in which the game enters a special game state based on a game ball entering the game ball. When the state shifts to the special game state, for example, a ball entering device provided in the gaming area starts to open and close, and game balls are paid out based on balls entering the ball entering device.

Here, in gaming machines such as those exemplified above, it is necessary to ensure that the display on the predetermined display means is suitably performed, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Feature Q group>
Features Q1. a first processing group execution unit (a function of executing the specific control process of the main MPU 82 in the thirteenth and fourteenth embodiments) that executes the first process group process (specific control process);
a second processing group execution means (a function of executing the non-specific control processing of the main MPU 82 in the thirteenth and fourteenth embodiments) that executes the second processing group processing (non-specific control processing);
When the processing of the first processing group is executed, information can be written and information can be read, while when the processing of the second processing group is executed, information can be read, but the information cannot be read. a first process-compatible storage area (work area 211 for specific control and stack area 212 for specific control in the thirteenth and fourteenth embodiments) in which writing is not possible;
When the processing of the second processing group is executed, information can be written and information can be read, while when the processing of the first processing group is executed, information can be read, but the information cannot be read. a second process-compatible storage area (the work area 213 for non-specific control and the stack area 214 for non-specific control in the thirteenth and fourteenth embodiments) to which writing is not possible;
Equipped with
The second processing group execution means executes a predetermined event (an event for which an affirmative determination is made in step S6003 of the main MPU 82 in the thirteenth and fourteenth embodiments, an event for which an affirmative determination is made in step S6009 of the main MPU 82 in the thirteenth and fourteenth embodiments) as a process of the second processing group. If an event, an event for which an affirmative determination is made in step S6014, or an event for which an affirmative determination is made in step S6505 has occurred, predetermined event occurrence information (any of the abnormality flags 213l to 213t) is set in the second processing corresponding storage area. 1") (a function for executing the process of step S6004, step S6010, step S6015, or step S6506 of the main MPU 82 in the thirteenth and fourteenth embodiments) Equipped with
The first processing group execution means includes a special processing execution means (a thirteenth In the embodiment, step S6602, step S6603, step S6605, step S6606, step S6608, step S6609, step S6611, step S6612, step S6614, step S6615, step S6617, step S6618, step S6620, step S6622 or The function of executing the process of step S6624, in the fourteenth embodiment, the process of step S8006 of the main MPU 82, the process of step S8013, the process of making an affirmative determination in step S8102, the process of making an affirmative determination in step S8105, A process for making an affirmative determination in step S8108, a process for making an affirmative determination in step S8111, a process for making an affirmative determination in step S8115, a process for making an affirmative determination in step S8118). A gaming machine that does.

According to feature Q1, when the process of the first processing group is executed, the storage area corresponding to the first process becomes the target for writing information, but the storage area corresponding to the second process does not become the target for writing information. When the process of the second process group is executed, the storage area corresponding to the second process becomes the target for writing information, but the storage area corresponding to the first process does not become the target for writing information. This makes it possible to clearly distinguish the type of storage area to which information is to be written when the first processing group's processing is executed and when the second processing group's processing is executed. On the other hand, even when the processing of the first processing group is executed, it is possible to read information not only from the storage area corresponding to the first processing but also from the storage area corresponding to the second processing. Even when a process is executed, information can be read not only from the storage area corresponding to the second process but also from the storage area corresponding to the first process. This makes it possible to refer to information corresponding to a processing result in one of the processing of the first processing group and the processing of the second processing group in the other processing.

In this case, if it is specified that a predetermined event has occurred in the processing of the second processing group and the predetermined event occurrence information is stored in the storage area corresponding to the second processing, then the predetermined event occurrence information is stored in the storage area corresponding to the second processing, Corresponding special processing is performed. As a result, by executing the process for identifying whether or not a predetermined event has occurred as a process in the second process group instead of as a process in the first process group, the process can be executed as a process in the first process group. Even with a configuration that provides a margin, it is possible to execute special processing in response to the occurrence of a predetermined event as the processing of the first processing group. Therefore, it becomes possible to suitably execute the processing in the control means.

Features Q2. The first processing group execution means is a means for executing, as a process of the first processing group, a granting trigger process for specifying whether or not a privilege granting trigger has occurred (in the thirteenth embodiment, a means for executing a granting trigger process of the main side MPU 82). The function of executing the processing of step S5602, step S5605, step S5608, step S5611, step S5614, step S5617, step S5620 or step S5622, in the fourteenth embodiment, step S7803, step S7805, step S7807, step of the main MPU 82 S7809, step S7811, step S7813, step S7815 or step S7817)
The gaming machine according to feature Q1, wherein the special process is a process of invalidating the award opportunity for the benefit specified in the award opportunity process.

According to feature Q2, it is specified whether or not a privilege grant opportunity has occurred in the grant trigger process that is the process of the first process group, and a predetermined event is specified in the occurrence information storage process that is the process of the second process group. If it is identified that the event has occurred and the predetermined event occurrence information is stored in the storage area corresponding to the second process, the trigger for granting the above benefit is invalidated in the special process that is the process of the first process group. . As a result, by executing the process for identifying whether or not a predetermined event has occurred as a process in the second process group instead of as a process in the first process group, the process can be executed as a process in the first process group. It becomes possible to perform the processing for specifying the occurrence of the opportunity for awarding a benefit and the processing for invalidating the opportunity for awarding the benefit in a consolidated manner in the processing of the first processing group, while allowing some margin.

Feature Q3. The first processing group execution means includes:
As the processing of the first processing group, when it is specified in the granting trigger process that the granting opportunity of the benefit has occurred, means (fourteenth (a function of executing the processing of steps S8017 to S8018 or steps S8021 to S8022 of the main side MPU 82 in the embodiment);
As the processing of the first processing group, if the special processing is not executed after the reservation processing is executed, means for executing a privilege granting process for granting the privilege reserved in the reservation processing ( A function of executing the process of step S8004 or step S8011 of the main MPU 82 in the fourteenth embodiment);
The gaming machine according to feature Q2, characterized by comprising:

According to feature Q3, in the processing of the first processing group, when it is specified that an opportunity for awarding a privilege has occurred, the awarding of the privilege is temporarily suspended, and then, in the processing of the second processing group, the awarding of the privilege is temporarily suspended. If the process of invalidating the award grant opportunity is not executed in the process of the first process group without storing the predetermined event occurrence information in the process-compatible storage area, the process of the first process group will execute the above-mentioned Reserved benefits will be granted. As a result, even if the occurrence information storage process, which is the process of the second process group, is not executed between the grant trigger process and the benefit grant process in the process of the first process group, if the predetermined event has not occurred, This allows the privilege to be granted in response to the privilege grant opportunity, and also invalidates the benefit grant opportunity to prevent the benefit from being granted if a predetermined event occurs.

Features Q4. The reservation process is a process of acquiring numerical information used in the lottery process from the numerical information updating means (winning random number counter C1, type random number counter C2, reach random number counter C3),
The gaming machine according to feature Q3, wherein the benefit granting process is a process of storing the numerical information in the first process compatible storage area so that it can be used in the lottery process.

According to feature Q4, when an opportunity for awarding a benefit occurs, numerical information is acquired from the numerical information updating means and a lottery process is executed using the acquired numerical information. If a trigger occurs, numerical information is obtained from the numerical information updating means, but it is reserved, and if it is subsequently determined that the predetermined event has not occurred, the reserved numerical information is It is stored in the storage area corresponding to the first process so that it can be used in the lottery process. As a result, it is possible to obtain the numerical information at the timing when the opportunity for granting the benefit occurs, and it is also possible to achieve the excellent effect as described in the feature Q3 above.

Features Q5. The first processing group execution means stores the predetermined event occurrence information in the second processing corresponding storage area in a situation where the provision of the privilege is withheld in the reservation processing as the processing of the first processing group. means for executing information specifying processing for specifying whether or not there is a user (a function for executing the process of step S8002 or step S8009 of the main MPU 82 in the fourteenth embodiment);
The special processing execution means executes the special processing when it is specified in the information specifying process that the predetermined event occurrence information is stored in the storage area corresponding to the second process. The gaming machine described in feature Q3 or Q4.

According to feature Q5, an information specifying process is executed to specify whether or not predetermined event occurrence information is stored in the second process compatible storage area in a situation where granting of a benefit is withheld in the reservation process; This configuration is such that when it is specified that the predetermined event occurrence information is stored, the incentive for awarding the benefit is invalidated as a special process. This makes it possible to prevent the information specifying process from being executed in a situation where the provision of benefits is not reserved.

Features Q6. A means for starting a predetermined unit process (first timer interrupt process) when a process execution trigger occurs (a function for executing the first timer interrupt process of the main MPU 82 in the fourteenth embodiment);
The predetermined unit processing includes the occurrence information storage processing, the special processing, the granting opportunity processing, the reservation processing, and the privilege granting processing,
Features Q3 to Q3 characterized in that the processing order of the predetermined unit processing in one processing round is set so that the occurrence information storage processing is a processing order that is later than the processing of the first processing group. The gaming machine described in any one of Q5.

According to feature Q6, the above-mentioned processing is performed while ensuring that the generated information storage processing, which is the processing of the second processing group, is a processing order that is later than the processing of the first processing group in a predetermined unit processing in one processing round. This makes it possible to achieve excellent effects.

Feature Q7. In addition to the occurrence information storage process, the predetermined unit process includes the processes of the second process group (information clear process in the fourteenth embodiment, sighting test process, non-specific control timer update process, information abnormality monitoring process, and check processing) is included.
A processing order of the predetermined unit processing in one processing round is set such that the processing of the second processing group is a processing order that is later than the processing of the first processing group. The gaming machine described in Q6.

According to feature Q7, in the predetermined unit processing in one processing round, the processing of the second processing group is aggregated as a processing order that is later than the processing of the first processing group, so that the predetermined unit processing in one processing round is There is no need to repeatedly transition between the processing of the first processing group and the processing of the second processing group in the processing. In addition, even with this configuration, the above-mentioned feature Q3 is provided, and in the processing of the first processing group, if it is identified that an opportunity to grant a benefit has occurred, the granting of the benefit is temporarily suspended, and then In the case where the predetermined event occurrence information is not stored in the storage area corresponding to the second process in the process of the second process group, and the process of invalidating the award grant opportunity is not executed in the process of the first process group, The benefits that were once reserved are granted in the first processing group. As a result, even if the occurrence information storage process, which is the process of the second process group, is not executed between the grant trigger process and the benefit grant process in the process of the first process group, if the predetermined event has not occurred, This allows the privilege to be granted in response to the privilege grant opportunity, and also invalidates the benefit grant opportunity to prevent the benefit from being granted if a predetermined event occurs.

Features Q8. The first processing group execution means stores granting trigger information (confirmation flag group 211d) in the first processing corresponding storage area when it is specified that a privilege granting trigger has occurred as a process of the first processing group. Means for executing the provision trigger process (step S5603, step S5606, step S5609, step S5612, step S5615, step S5618 of the main MPU 82 in the 13th embodiment) for storing "1" in each confirmation flag) , a function of executing the process of step S5621 or step S5623),
The gaming machine according to any one of features Q1 to Q7, wherein the special process is a process of erasing the granting opportunity information stored in the first process corresponding storage area.

According to feature Q8, when it is specified that a benefit granting opportunity has occurred in the granting trigger process which is the process of the first processing group, granting trigger information is stored in the storage area corresponding to the first process, and thereafter If it is specified that the predetermined event has occurred in the occurrence information storage processing which is the processing of the second processing group, and the predetermined event occurrence information is stored in the storage area corresponding to the second processing, the first processing is performed. In the special process that is the group process, the above-mentioned provision trigger information in the storage area corresponding to the first process is deleted. As a result, by executing the process for identifying whether or not a predetermined event has occurred as a process in the second process group instead of as a process in the first process group, the process can be executed as a process in the first process group. Processing for specifying the occurrence of an opportunity for awarding a benefit and processing for invalidating the opportunity for awarding the benefit are performed in the processing of the first processing group while using the storage area corresponding to the first processing, while allowing some margin. It becomes possible to do this in a centralized manner.

Features Q9. The first processing group execution means executes a privilege granting process when the granting trigger information is stored in the first processing corresponding storage area as a process of the first processing group (a thirteenth embodiment). (a function of executing the process of step S5518, step S5704 or step S5709 of the main side MPU 82),
The gaming machine according to feature Q8, wherein the occurrence information storage process and the special process are executed after the award trigger process is executed and before the bonus award process is executed.

According to feature Q9, the generated information storage process, which is the process of the second process group, and the special process, which is the process of the first process group, are executed after the provision trigger process, which is the process of the first process group. It is executed before the privilege granting process, which is the process of the first process group, is executed. As a result, by executing the process for identifying whether or not a predetermined event has occurred as a process in the second process group instead of as a process in the first process group, the process can be executed as a process in the first process group. If a predetermined event occurs, it is possible to invalidate the opportunity for awarding a benefit before the awarding process is executed, while allowing some time.

Features Q10. A means for starting a predetermined unit process (first timer interrupt process) when a process execution opportunity occurs (a function for executing the first timer interrupt process of the main MPU 82 in the thirteenth embodiment),
The first processing group execution means is a means (a first (a function of executing the processing of step S6601, step S6604, step S6607, step S6610, step S6613, step S6616, step S6619 or step S6621 of the main side MPU 82 in the thirteenth embodiment),
The special processing execution means executes the special processing when it is specified in the information specifying process that the predetermined event occurrence information is stored in the second processing corresponding storage area,
The predetermined unit process includes the occurrence information storage process, the granting opportunity process, the privilege granting process, and the information specifying process,
The occurrence information storage process is executed after the grant trigger process is executed, the information identification process is executed after the occurrence information storage process is executed, and the benefit grant process is executed after the information identification process is executed. The gaming machine according to feature Q9, wherein the processing order of the predetermined unit processing in one processing round is set so that the predetermined unit processing is executed.

According to feature Q10, in a configuration in which the predetermined unit process includes an occurrence information storage process, a grant trigger process, a privilege grant process, and an information identification process, the occurrence information storage process is executed after the grant trigger process is executed; Simply by setting the execution order of the processes in the predetermined unit process so that the information specifying process is executed after the generated information storage process is executed, and the benefit granting process is executed after the information specifying process is executed. It becomes possible to achieve the excellent effects described above.

Features Q11. The first processing group execution means is a means (a first In the thirteenth embodiment, the function of the main MPU 82 to execute the process of step S6601, step S6604, step S6607, step S6610, step S6613, step S6616, step S6619 or step S6621, and in the fourteenth embodiment, the function of the main side MPU 82 S8002, step S8009, step S8102, step S8105, step S8108, step S8111, step S8115, step S8118)
The special processing execution means executes the special processing when it is specified in the information specifying process that the predetermined event occurrence information is stored in the second processing corresponding storage area,
The second processing group execution means is a means (thirteenth, fourteenth The gaming machine according to any one of features Q1 to Q10, characterized in that the gaming machine is equipped with a function of executing an information clearing process of the main MPU 82 in the embodiment.

According to feature Q11, when it is specified that predetermined event occurrence information is stored in the storage area corresponding to the second process in the information specifying process that is the process of the first process group, the process of the first process group is performed. In a configuration in which special processing is executed, after the information specifying process is executed, the predetermined event occurrence information is erased in an occurrence information erasing process that is a process of the second processing group. As a result, when the predetermined event occurrence information is stored in the storage area corresponding to the second process, special processing is executed for the predetermined event occurrence information, while the predetermined event occurrence information is deleted in the process of the second processing group. becomes possible.

Features Q12. The second processing group execution means is a means for executing, as the processing of the second processing group, an event occurrence specifying process for specifying whether or not the predetermined event has occurred (steps in the thirteenth and fourteenth embodiments). S6001 to S6003, S6007 to S6009, or S6013 to S6014)
When the occurrence of the predetermined event is identified in the event occurrence specifying process, the predetermined event occurrence information is stored in the second process compatible storage area in the occurrence information storage process. The configuration is
The gaming machine according to feature Q11, wherein the occurrence information erasing process is executed before the event occurrence specifying process is executed when the event occurrence specifying process is executed.

According to feature Q12, when it is specified that a predetermined event has occurred in the event occurrence identification process that is the process of the second process group, the occurrence information storage process that is the process of the second process group In a configuration in which predetermined event occurrence information is stored in a processing-compatible storage area, when an event occurrence specifying process is executed, an occurrence for erasing the predetermined event occurrence information before the event occurrence specifying process is executed. Information deletion processing is executed. That is, after the predetermined event occurrence information is once erased, the event occurrence specifying process and the occurrence information storage process are executed. As a result, when the process for storing predetermined event occurrence information in the second process compatible storage area is executed in the process of the second process group, and the predetermined event occurrence information is stored in the second process compatible storage area In a configuration in which special processing is executed in the processing of the first processing group, it is possible to prevent the special processing from being executed multiple times due to the storage of one predetermined event occurrence information, and to perform appropriate processing in the processing of the second processing group. It becomes possible to execute occurrence information deletion processing for erasing predetermined event occurrence information at a suitable timing.

Feature Q13. The first processing group execution means performs processing of the first processing group based on the occurrence of a predetermined measurement start event (step S6104 or step S6303 of the main MPU 82 in the thirteenth and fourteenth embodiments). , a predetermined measurement start to start measuring a predetermined monitoring period using a predetermined measurement storage area (special power monitoring delay timer counter 211b, general power monitoring delay timer counter 211c) provided in the first processing storage area. A means for executing processing (a function of executing the processing of step S6106 or step S6305 of the main MPU 82 in the thirteenth and fourteenth embodiments),
In the occurrence information storage process, if the predetermined response event is occurring in a situation where the predetermined response event should not occur in relation to the predetermined monitoring period, the occurrence of the predetermined event is determined in the second process response storage area. The gaming machine according to any one of features Q1 to Q12, wherein the predetermined event occurrence information is stored in the gaming machine.

According to feature Q13, when a predetermined response event occurs in a situation where the predetermined response event should not occur in relation to the predetermined monitoring period, the predetermined event occurrence information is stored in the second processing response storage area as the occurrence of the predetermined event. In a configuration in which a special process is executed by storing a predetermined measurement storage area, it becomes possible to perform a process for measuring a predetermined monitoring period using a predetermined measurement storage area in the process of the first processing group.

Feature Q14. The first processing group execution means is a means for executing processing for determining whether or not the predetermined measurement start event has occurred as the processing of the first processing group (in the thirteenth and fourteenth embodiments). The gaming machine according to feature Q13, further comprising a function of executing the process of step S6103 or step S6302 of the main MPU 82.

According to feature Q14, in a configuration in which a process for specifying whether a predetermined measurement start event has occurred in the processing of the first processing group is provided with the configuration of feature Q13 above, a predetermined measurement memory is provided. Processing for measuring a predetermined monitoring period using a region is performed in the processing of the first processing group. This makes it possible to integrate the processing for measuring the predetermined monitoring period into the processing of the first processing group.

Features Q15. The second processing group execution means performs processing of the second processing group based on the occurrence of a specific measurement start event (affirmative determination in step S6013 of the main MPU 82 in the thirteenth and fourteenth embodiments). , Execute a specific measurement start process that starts measurement of a specific monitoring period using specific measurement storage areas (first to eighth prize monitoring timer counters 213a to 213h) provided in the second process compatible storage area. The gaming machine according to feature Q13 or Q14, characterized in that the gaming machine is equipped with means (a function of executing the process of step S6016 of the main MPU 82 in the thirteenth and fourteenth embodiments).

According to feature Q15, processing for measuring a specific monitoring period based on the occurrence of a specific measurement start event is included in the processing of the second processing group. This makes it possible to distribute the processing for measuring various periods into the processing of the first processing group and the processing of the second processing group in units of the types of periods to be measured.

Feature Q16. The second processing group execution means executes the second processing group when the specific response event is occurring in a situation where the specific response event should not occur in relation to the specific monitoring period. It is characterized by comprising means for executing a process of storing the predetermined event occurrence information in a storage area corresponding to two processes (a function of executing the process of step S6015 of the main MPU 82 in the thirteenth and fourteenth embodiments). The gaming machine described in feature Q15.

According to feature Q16, if the predetermined response event occurs in a situation where the predetermined response event should not occur in relation to the predetermined monitoring period measured in the processing of the first processing group, the occurrence of the predetermined event is determined as the occurrence of the predetermined event. In a situation where predetermined event occurrence information is stored in the storage area corresponding to the second processing and special processing is executed, and the specific corresponding event should not occur in relation to the specific monitoring period measured in the processing of the second processing group. Even when a specific corresponding event has occurred, predetermined event occurrence information is stored in the second processing corresponding storage area and special processing is executed. As a result, the process of measuring each period for identifying whether or not an event that triggers the storage of predetermined event occurrence information in the storage area corresponding to the second process is performed in units of the type of period to be measured. This makes it possible to distribute the processing into the first processing group and the second processing group.

Note that for the configuration of features Q1 to Q16, features A1 to A8, features B1 to B8, features C1 to C8, features D1 to D8, features E1 to E9, features F1 to F6, features G1 to G11, and features H1 to H8, Features I1-I5, Features J1-J7, Features K1-K7, Features L1-L5, Features M1-M4, Features N1-N8, Features O1-O8, Features P1-P6, Features Q1-Q16, Features R1- Any one or more of R6, features S1 to S7, features T1 to T3, features U1 to U5, and features V1 to V6 may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Characteristic R group>
Feature R1. a first processing group execution unit (a function of executing the specific control process of the main MPU 82 in the thirteenth and fourteenth embodiments) that executes the first process group process (specific control process);
a second processing group execution means (a function of executing the non-specific control processing of the main MPU 82 in the thirteenth and fourteenth embodiments) that executes the second processing group processing (non-specific control processing);
When the processing of the first processing group is executed, information can be written and information can be read, while when the processing of the second processing group is executed, information can be read, but the information cannot be read. a first process-compatible storage area (work area 211 for specific control and stack area 212 for specific control in the thirteenth and fourteenth embodiments) in which writing is not possible;
When the processing of the second processing group is executed, information can be written and information can be read, while when the processing of the first processing group is executed, information can be read, but the information cannot be read. a second process-compatible storage area (the work area 213 for non-specific control and the stack area 214 for non-specific control in the thirteenth and fourteenth embodiments) to which writing is not possible;
Equipped with
The second processing group execution means includes:
The processing of the second processing group includes a predetermined event (an event for which an affirmative determination is made in step S6003 of the main MPU 82 in the thirteenth and fourteenth embodiments, an event for which an affirmative determination is made in step S6009, or an event for which an affirmative determination is made in step S6014). Means for executing an event occurrence specifying process for specifying whether an event (event that occurs) has occurred (processing of steps S6001 to S6003, steps S6007 to S6009, or steps S6013 to S6014 in the thirteenth and fourteenth embodiments) ) and
As the processing of the second processing group, when the occurrence of the predetermined event is specified in the event occurrence specifying processing, predetermined event occurrence information (abnormality flags 213l to 213l) is stored in the storage area corresponding to the second processing. means for executing the occurrence information storage process (setting "1" to any one of 213r) (executing the process of step S6004, step S6010, or step S6015 of the main MPU 82 in the thirteenth and fourteenth embodiments) function) and
Equipped with
The first processing group execution means includes:
Means for executing an information specifying process for specifying whether or not the predetermined event occurrence information is stored in the second process compatible storage area (in the thirteenth embodiment, steps S6601, S6604, and S6607 of the main MPU 82) The function of executing the process of step S6610, step S6613, step S6616, step S6619 or step S6621, in the 14th embodiment, step S8002, step S8009, step S8102, step S8105, step S8108, step S8111, step of the main MPU 82 A function to execute the processing of S8115 and S8118);
As the processing of the first processing group, special processing execution means ( In the thirteenth embodiment, step S6602, step S6603, step S6605, step S6606, step S6608, step S6609, step S6611, step S6612, step S6614, step S6615, step S6617, step S6618, step S6620 or step The function of executing the process of S6622, in the fourteenth embodiment, the process of step S8006 of the main MPU 82, the process of step S8013, the process of making an affirmative determination in step S8102, the process of making an affirmative determination in step S8105, and step S8108. (a function of executing a process of making an affirmative determination in step S8111, a process of making an affirmative determination in step S8115, a process of making an affirmative determination in step S8118),
Equipped with
The second processing group execution means is configured to generate an event that erases the predetermined event occurrence information before the event occurrence identification processing is executed when the event occurrence identification processing is executed as the processing of the second processing group. A gaming machine characterized by comprising means for executing information clearing processing (a function for executing information clearing processing of the main MPU 82 in the thirteenth and fourteenth embodiments).

According to feature R1, when the processing of the first processing group is executed, the storage area corresponding to the first process becomes the target for writing information, but the storage area corresponding to the second process does not become the target for writing information, When the process of the second process group is executed, the storage area corresponding to the second process becomes the target for writing information, but the storage area corresponding to the first process does not become the target for writing information. This makes it possible to clearly distinguish the type of storage area to which information is to be written when the first processing group's processing is executed and when the second processing group's processing is executed. On the other hand, even when the processing of the first processing group is executed, it is possible to read information not only from the storage area corresponding to the first processing but also from the storage area corresponding to the second processing. Even when a process is executed, information can be read not only from the storage area corresponding to the second process but also from the storage area corresponding to the first process. This makes it possible to refer to information corresponding to a processing result in one of the processing of the first processing group and the processing of the second processing group in the other processing.

In this case, if it is specified that a predetermined event has occurred in the processing of the second processing group and the predetermined event occurrence information is stored in the storage area corresponding to the second processing, then the predetermined event occurrence information is stored in the storage area corresponding to the second processing, Corresponding special processing is performed. As a result, by executing the process for identifying whether or not a predetermined event has occurred as a process in the second process group instead of as a process in the first process group, the process can be executed as a process in the first process group. Even with a configuration that provides a margin, it is possible to execute special processing in response to the occurrence of a predetermined event as the processing of the first processing group. Therefore, it becomes possible to suitably execute the processing in the control means.

In addition, when it is specified that a predetermined event has occurred in the event occurrence specifying process that is the process of the second process group, the storage area corresponding to the second process is stored in the occurrence information storage process that is the process of the second process group. In a configuration in which predetermined event occurrence information is stored in a computer, when an event occurrence specifying process is executed, an occurrence information erasing process for erasing the predetermined event occurrence information is performed before the event occurrence specifying process is executed. executed. That is, after the predetermined event occurrence information is once erased, the event occurrence specifying process and the occurrence information storage process are executed. As a result, when the process for storing predetermined event occurrence information in the second process compatible storage area is executed in the process of the second process group, and the predetermined event occurrence information is stored in the second process compatible storage area In a configuration in which special processing is executed in the processing of the first processing group, it is possible to prevent the special processing from being executed multiple times due to the storage of one predetermined event occurrence information, and to perform appropriate processing in the processing of the second processing group. It becomes possible to execute occurrence information deletion processing for erasing predetermined event occurrence information at a suitable timing.

Feature R2. The information specifying process is executed after the event occurrence specifying process is executed and before the occurrence information erasing process corresponding to the next execution of the event occurrence specifying process. The gaming machine according to feature R1.

According to feature R2, when it is specified that predetermined event occurrence information is stored in the storage area corresponding to the second process in the information specifying process that is the process of the first process group, the information specifying process that is the process of the first process group In a configuration in which special processing is executed, after the information specifying process is executed, the predetermined event occurrence information is erased in an occurrence information erasing process that is a process of the second processing group. As a result, when the predetermined event occurrence information is stored in the storage area corresponding to the second process, special processing is executed for the predetermined event occurrence information, while the predetermined event occurrence information is deleted in the process of the second processing group. becomes possible.

Feature R3. The first processing group execution means is a means for executing, as a process of the first processing group, a granting trigger process for specifying whether or not a privilege granting trigger has occurred (in the thirteenth embodiment, a means for executing a granting trigger process of the main side MPU 82). The function of executing the processing of step S5602, step S5605, step S5608, step S5611, step S5614, step S5617, step S5620 or step S5622, in the fourteenth embodiment, step S7803, step S7805, step S7807, step of the main MPU 82 S7809, step S7811, step S7813, step S7815 or step S7817)
The gaming machine according to feature R1 or R2, wherein the special process is a process of invalidating the award opportunity for the benefit specified in the award opportunity process.

According to feature R3, it is specified whether or not a privilege grant opportunity has occurred in the grant trigger process that is the process of the first process group, and a predetermined event is specified in the occurrence information storage process that is the process of the second process group. If it is identified that the event has occurred and the predetermined event occurrence information is stored in the storage area corresponding to the second process, the trigger for granting the above benefit is invalidated in the special process that is the process of the first process group. . As a result, by executing the process for identifying whether or not a predetermined event has occurred as a process in the second process group instead of as a process in the first process group, the process can be executed as a process in the first process group. It becomes possible to perform the processing for specifying the occurrence of the opportunity for awarding a benefit and the processing for invalidating the opportunity for awarding the benefit in a consolidated manner in the processing of the first processing group, while allowing some margin.

Feature R4. The first processing group execution means stores granting trigger information (confirmation flag group 211d) in the first processing corresponding storage area when it is specified that a privilege granting trigger has occurred as a process of the first processing group. Means for executing the provision trigger process (step S5603, step S5606, step S5609, step S5612, step S5615, step S5618 of the main MPU 82 in the 13th embodiment) for storing "1" in each confirmation flag) , a function of executing the process of step S5621 or step S5623),
The gaming machine according to any one of features R1 to R3, wherein the special process is a process of erasing the provision opportunity information stored in the first process corresponding storage area.

According to feature R4, when it is specified that a benefit award opportunity has occurred in the award opportunity process that is the process of the first process group, award opportunity information is stored in the first process corresponding storage area, and thereafter. If it is specified that the predetermined event has occurred in the occurrence information storage processing which is the processing of the second processing group, and the predetermined event occurrence information is stored in the storage area corresponding to the second processing, the first processing is performed. In the special process that is the group process, the above-mentioned provision trigger information in the storage area corresponding to the first process is deleted. As a result, by executing the process for identifying whether or not a predetermined event has occurred as a process in the second process group instead of as a process in the first process group, the process can be executed as a process in the first process group. Processing for specifying the occurrence of an opportunity for awarding a benefit and processing for invalidating the opportunity for awarding the benefit are performed in the processing of the first processing group while using the storage area corresponding to the first processing, while allowing some margin. It becomes possible to do this in a centralized manner.

Feature R5. The first processing group execution means executes a privilege granting process when the granting trigger information is stored in the first processing corresponding storage area as a process of the first processing group (a thirteenth embodiment). (a function of executing the process of step S5518, step S5704 or step S5709 of the main side MPU 82),
The gaming machine according to feature R4, wherein the event occurrence specifying process and the information specifying process are executed after the award trigger process is executed and before the bonus award process is executed. .

According to feature R5, the event occurrence specifying process, which is the process of the second process group, and the information specifying process, which is the process of the first process group, are performed after the provision trigger process, which is the process of the first process group, is executed. This is executed before the privilege granting process, which is the process of the first process group, is executed. As a result, by executing the process for identifying whether or not a predetermined event has occurred as a process in the second process group instead of as a process in the first process group, the process can be executed as a process in the first process group. If a predetermined event occurs, it is possible to invalidate the opportunity for awarding a benefit before the awarding process is executed, while allowing some time.

Feature R6. A means for starting a predetermined unit process (first timer interrupt process) when a process execution opportunity occurs (a function for executing the first timer interrupt process of the main MPU 82 in the thirteenth embodiment),
The predetermined unit process includes the event occurrence specifying process, the granting opportunity process, the privilege granting process, and the information specifying process,
The event occurrence specifying process is executed after the grant trigger process is executed, the information specifying process is executed after the event occurrence specifying process is executed, and the benefit granting process is executed after the information specifying process is executed. The gaming machine according to feature R5, wherein the processing order of the predetermined unit processing in one processing round is set such that the predetermined unit processing is executed.

According to feature R6, in a configuration in which the predetermined unit process includes an event occurrence specifying process, a grant trigger process, a benefit grant process, and an information specify process, the event occurrence specifying process is executed after the grant trigger process is executed; Simply by setting the execution order of the processes in the predetermined unit process so that the information specifying process is executed after the event occurrence specifying process is executed, and the benefit granting process is executed after the information specifying process is executed. It becomes possible to achieve the excellent effects described above.

Note that for the configuration of features R1 to R6, features A1 to A8, features B1 to B8, features C1 to C8, features D1 to D8, features E1 to E9, features F1 to F6, features G1 to G11, and features H1 to H8, Features I1-I5, Features J1-J7, Features K1-K7, Features L1-L5, Features M1-M4, Features N1-N8, Features O1-O8, Features P1-P6, Features Q1-Q16, Features R1- Any one or more of R6, features S1 to S7, features T1 to T3, features U1 to U5, and features V1 to V6 may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Feature S group>
Feature S1. a first processing group execution unit (a function of executing the specific control process of the main MPU 82 in the thirteenth and fourteenth embodiments) that executes the first process group process (specific control process);
a second processing group execution means (a function of executing the non-specific control processing of the main MPU 82 in the thirteenth and fourteenth embodiments) that executes the second processing group processing (non-specific control processing);
When the processing of the first processing group is executed, information can be written and information can be read, while when the processing of the second processing group is executed, information can be read, but the information cannot be read. a first process-compatible storage area (work area 211 for specific control and stack area 212 for specific control in the thirteenth and fourteenth embodiments) in which writing is not possible;
When the processing of the second processing group is executed, information can be written and information can be read, while when the processing of the first processing group is executed, information can be read, but the information cannot be read. a second process-compatible storage area (the work area 213 for non-specific control and the stack area 214 for non-specific control in the thirteenth and fourteenth embodiments) to which writing is not possible;
Equipped with
The first processing group execution means performs processing of the first processing group based on the occurrence of a predetermined measurement start event (step S6104 or step S6303 of the main MPU 82 in the thirteenth and fourteenth embodiments). , a predetermined measurement start to start measuring a predetermined monitoring period using a predetermined measurement storage area (special power monitoring delay timer counter 211b, general power monitoring delay timer counter 211c) provided in the first processing storage area. A means for executing processing (a function of executing the processing of step S6106 or step S6305 of the main MPU 82 in the thirteenth and fourteenth embodiments),
The second processing group execution means executes a predetermined response when the predetermined response event occurs in a situation where the predetermined response event should not occur in relation to the predetermined monitoring period, as a process of the second processing group. A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with a predetermined corresponding execution means for executing a process (a function of executing the process of step S6004, step S6010, or step S6015 of the main MPU 82 in the thirteenth and fourteenth embodiments).

According to feature S1, when the process of the first process group is executed, the storage area corresponding to the first process becomes the target for writing information, but the storage area corresponding to the second process does not become the target for writing information. When the process of the second process group is executed, the storage area corresponding to the second process becomes the target for writing information, but the storage area corresponding to the first process does not become the target for writing information. This makes it possible to clearly distinguish the type of storage area to which information is to be written when the first processing group's processing is executed and when the second processing group's processing is executed. On the other hand, even when the processing of the first processing group is executed, it is possible to read information not only from the storage area corresponding to the first processing but also from the storage area corresponding to the second processing. Even when a process is executed, information can be read not only from the storage area corresponding to the second process but also from the storage area corresponding to the first process. This makes it possible to refer to information corresponding to a processing result in one of the processing of the first processing group and the processing of the second processing group in the other processing.

In this case, if the predetermined response event occurs in a situation where the predetermined response event should not occur in relation to the predetermined monitoring period, the predetermined response process is executed in the processing of the second processing group. As a result, processing that can be executed as the processing of the first processing group by executing the processing for identifying whether or not a predetermined response event has occurred is performed as the processing of the second processing group instead of the processing of the first processing group. This makes it possible to provide some leeway. Therefore, it becomes possible to suitably execute the processing in the control means.

Furthermore, in a configuration in which a predetermined response process is executed in the second processing group when a predetermined response event occurs in a situation where the predetermined response event should not occur in relation to the predetermined monitoring period, the predetermined response It becomes possible to perform processing for measuring a predetermined monitoring period using the measurement storage area in the processing of the first processing group.

Feature S2. The first processing group execution means is a means for executing processing for determining whether or not the predetermined measurement start event has occurred as the processing of the first processing group (in the thirteenth and fourteenth embodiments). The gaming machine according to feature S1, further comprising a function of executing the process of step S6103 or step S6302 of the main MPU 82.

According to feature S2, in a configuration in which a process for specifying whether or not a predetermined measurement start event has occurred in the processing of the first processing group is provided with the configuration of feature S1 above, and a predetermined measurement memory is provided. Processing for measuring a predetermined monitoring period using a region is performed in the processing of the first processing group. This makes it possible to integrate the processing for measuring the predetermined monitoring period into the processing of the first processing group.

Feature S3. The second processing group execution means performs processing of the second processing group based on the occurrence of a specific measurement start event (affirmative determination in step S6013 of the main MPU 82 in the thirteenth and fourteenth embodiments). , Execute a specific measurement start process that starts measurement of a specific monitoring period using specific measurement storage areas (first to eighth prize monitoring timer counters 213a to 213h) provided in the second process compatible storage area. The gaming machine according to feature S1 or S2, characterized in that it is equipped with means (a function of executing the process of step S6016 of the main MPU 82 in the thirteenth and fourteenth embodiments).

According to feature S3, the process for measuring a specific monitoring period based on the occurrence of a specific measurement start event is included in the process of the second process group. This makes it possible to distribute the processing for measuring various periods into the processing of the first processing group and the processing of the second processing group in units of the types of periods to be measured.

Feature S4. The predetermined response execution means executes the predetermined response processing when the specific response event is occurring in a situation where the specific response event should not occur in relation to the specific monitoring period. The gaming machine described in S3.

According to feature S4, the predetermined response process is executed when the predetermined response event occurs in a situation where the predetermined response event should not occur in relation to the predetermined monitoring period measured in the processing of the first processing group. In addition, the predetermined response process is also executed when the specific response event occurs in a situation where the specific response event should not occur in relation to the specific monitoring period measured in the processing of the second processing group. As a result, the process of measuring each period to identify whether an event that triggers the execution of a predetermined response process has occurred can be performed in the first process group for each type of period to be measured. It becomes possible to distribute the processing into the processing of the second processing group and the processing of the second processing group.

Feature S5. The predetermined response process stores predetermined event occurrence information ( This is a process of storing "1" in any of the abnormality flags 213l to 213r.
The first processing group execution means includes a special processing execution means (a thirteenth In the embodiment, step S6602, step S6603, step S6605, step S6606, step S6608, step S6609, step S6611, step S6612, step S6614, step S6615, step S6617, step S6618, step S6620, or step S6622 of the main side MPU 82 The function of executing the process, in the fourteenth embodiment, the process of step S8006 of the main MPU 82, the process of step S8013, the process of making an affirmative determination in step S8102, the process of making an affirmative determination in step S8105, and the process of making an affirmative determination in step S8108. A feature characterized by having a function of executing a process of making an affirmative determination, a process of making an affirmative determination in step S8111, a process of making an affirmative determination in step S8115, a process of making a positive determination in step S8118). The gaming machine according to any one of S1 to S4.

According to feature S5, when the predetermined response event occurs in a situation where the predetermined response event should not occur in relation to the predetermined monitoring period, the predetermined event occurrence information is stored in the second process response storage area, and the predetermined event occurrence information is stored in the second process response storage area. When predetermined event occurrence information is stored in the storage area corresponding to two processes, special processing is executed in the first processing group. As a result, processing that can be executed as the processing of the first processing group by executing the processing for identifying whether or not a predetermined response event has occurred is performed as the processing of the second processing group instead of the processing of the first processing group. Even with a configuration that allows for a margin, it is possible to execute special processing in response to the occurrence of a predetermined corresponding event as the processing of the first processing group.

Feature S6. The first processing group execution means is a means for executing, as a process of the first processing group, a granting trigger process for specifying whether or not a privilege granting trigger has occurred (in the thirteenth embodiment, a means for executing a granting trigger process of the main side MPU 82). The function of executing the processing of step S5602, step S5605, step S5608, step S5611, step S5614, step S5617, step S5620 or step S5622, in the fourteenth embodiment, step S7803, step S7805, step S7807, step of the main MPU 82 S7809, step S7811, step S7813, step S7815 or step S7817)
The gaming machine according to feature S5, wherein the special process is a process of invalidating the award opportunity for the benefit specified in the award opportunity process.

According to feature S6, it is specified whether or not a privilege grant opportunity has occurred in the grant trigger process that is the process of the first process group, and a predetermined event is specified in the occurrence information storage process that is the process of the second process group. If it is identified that the event has occurred and the predetermined event occurrence information is stored in the storage area corresponding to the second process, the trigger for granting the above benefit is invalidated in the special process that is the process of the first process group. . As a result, by executing the process for identifying whether or not a predetermined event has occurred as a process in the second process group instead of as a process in the first process group, the process can be executed as a process in the first process group. It becomes possible to perform the processing for specifying the occurrence of the opportunity for awarding a benefit and the processing for invalidating the opportunity for awarding the benefit in a consolidated manner in the processing of the first processing group, while allowing some margin.

Feature S7. The first processing group execution means stores granting trigger information (confirmation flag group 211d) in the first processing corresponding storage area when it is specified that a privilege granting trigger has occurred as a process of the first processing group. Means for executing the provision trigger process (step S5603, step S5606, step S5609, step S5612, step S5615, step S5618 of the main MPU 82 in the 13th embodiment) for storing "1" in each confirmation flag) , a function of executing the process of step S5621 or step S5623),
The gaming machine according to feature S5, wherein the special process is a process of erasing the provision opportunity information stored in the first process corresponding storage area.

According to feature S7, when it is specified that a benefit granting opportunity has occurred in the granting trigger process that is the process of the first processing group, granting trigger information is stored in the first process corresponding storage area, and thereafter If it is specified that the predetermined event has occurred in the occurrence information storage processing which is the processing of the second processing group, and the predetermined event occurrence information is stored in the storage area corresponding to the second processing, the first processing is performed. In the special process that is the group process, the above-mentioned provision trigger information in the storage area corresponding to the first process is deleted. As a result, by executing the process for identifying whether or not a predetermined event has occurred as a process in the second process group instead of as a process in the first process group, the process can be executed as a process in the first process group. Processing for specifying the occurrence of an opportunity for awarding a benefit and processing for invalidating the opportunity for awarding the benefit are performed in the processing of the first processing group while using the storage area corresponding to the first processing, while allowing some margin. It becomes possible to do this in a centralized manner.

Note that for the configuration of features S1 to S7, features A1 to A8, features B1 to B8, features C1 to C8, features D1 to D8, features E1 to E9, features F1 to F6, features G1 to G11, and features H1 to H8, Features I1-I5, Features J1-J7, Features K1-K7, Features L1-L5, Features M1-M4, Features N1-N8, Features O1-O8, Features P1-P6, Features Q1-Q16, Features R1- Any one or more of R6, features S1 to S7, features T1 to T3, features U1 to U5, and features V1 to V6 may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Characteristic T group>
Feature T1. a first processing group execution unit (a function of executing the specific control process of the main MPU 82 in the thirteenth and fourteenth embodiments) that executes the first process group process (specific control process);
a second processing group execution means (a function of executing the non-specific control processing of the main MPU 82 in the thirteenth and fourteenth embodiments) that executes the second processing group processing (non-specific control processing);
When the processing of the first processing group is executed, information can be written and information can be read, while when the processing of the second processing group is executed, information can be read, but the information cannot be read. a first process-compatible storage area (work area 211 for specific control and stack area 212 for specific control in the thirteenth and fourteenth embodiments) in which writing is not possible;
When the processing of the second processing group is executed, information can be written and information can be read, while when the processing of the first processing group is executed, information can be read, but the information cannot be read. a second process-compatible storage area (the work area 213 for non-specific control and the stack area 214 for non-specific control in the thirteenth and fourteenth embodiments) to which writing is not possible;
Equipped with
The second processing group execution means executes a predetermined event (an event for which an affirmative determination is made in step S6003 of the main MPU 82 in the thirteenth and fourteenth embodiments, an event for which an affirmative determination is made in step S6009 of the main MPU 82 in the thirteenth and fourteenth embodiments) as a process of the second processing group. event, or an event determined affirmatively in step S6014), the predetermined event occurrence information (setting "1" to any of the abnormality flags 213l to 213r) is stored in the storage area corresponding to the second process. A means for executing the generation information storage process to be stored (a function for executing the process of step S6004, step S6010 or step S6015 of the main MPU 82 in the thirteenth and fourteenth embodiments),
The first processing group execution means includes:
As a process of the first processing group, when it is specified that a privilege granting opportunity has occurred, granting trigger information (setting "1" to each confirmation flag of the confirmation flag group 211d) is stored in the storage area corresponding to the first process. Means for executing the provision trigger process for storing (the process of step S5603, step S5606, step S5609, step S5612, step S5615, step S5618, step S5621 or step S5623 of the main side MPU 82 in the thirteenth embodiment) function) and
As the processing of the first processing group, when the predetermined event occurrence information is stored in the storage area corresponding to the second processing, special processing is performed to erase the provision trigger information stored in the storage area corresponding to the first processing. Special processing execution means (in the thirteenth embodiment, the main MPU 82 performs steps S6602, S6603, S6605, S6606, S6608, S6609, S6611, S6612, S6614, S6615, S6617, A function to execute the process of step S6618, step S6620 or step S6622, in the fourteenth embodiment, the process of step S8006 of the main MPU 82, the process of step S8013, the process of making an affirmative determination in step S8102, and the process of making an affirmative determination in step S8105. A function that executes a process of making a determination, a process of making an affirmative determination in step S8108, a process of making an affirmative determination in step S8111, a process of making an affirmative determination in step S8115, a process of making an affirmative determination in step S8118). ,
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature T1, when the process of the first processing group is executed, the storage area corresponding to the first process becomes the target for writing information, but the storage area corresponding to the second process does not become the target for writing information. When the process of the second process group is executed, the storage area corresponding to the second process becomes the target for writing information, but the storage area corresponding to the first process does not become the target for writing information. This makes it possible to clearly distinguish the type of storage area to which information is to be written when the first processing group's processing is executed and when the second processing group's processing is executed. On the other hand, even when the processing of the first processing group is executed, it is possible to read information not only from the storage area corresponding to the first processing but also from the storage area corresponding to the second processing. Even when a process is executed, information can be read not only from the storage area corresponding to the second process but also from the storage area corresponding to the first process. This makes it possible to refer to information corresponding to a processing result in one of the processing of the first processing group and the processing of the second processing group in the other processing.

In this case, if it is specified that a benefit award opportunity has occurred in the award opportunity process that is the process of the first processing group, the award opportunity information is stored in the storage area corresponding to the first process, and then the award opportunity information is stored in the storage area corresponding to the first process. When the occurrence information storage process, which is the process of the second processing group, specifies that the predetermined event has occurred and the predetermined event occurrence information is stored in the storage area corresponding to the second process, the process of the first processing group In the special process, the provision trigger information in the storage area corresponding to the first process is deleted. As a result, by executing the process for identifying whether or not a predetermined event has occurred as a process in the second process group instead of as a process in the first process group, the process can be executed as a process in the first process group. Processing for specifying the occurrence of an opportunity for awarding a benefit and processing for invalidating the opportunity for awarding the benefit are performed in the processing of the first processing group while using the storage area corresponding to the first processing, while allowing some margin. It becomes possible to do this in a centralized manner.

Feature T2. The first processing group execution means executes a privilege granting process when the granting trigger information is stored in the first processing corresponding storage area as a process of the first processing group (a thirteenth embodiment). (a function of executing the process of step S5518, step S5704 or step S5709 of the main side MPU 82),
The gaming machine according to feature T1, wherein the occurrence information storage process and the special process are executed after the award trigger process is executed and before the privilege award process is executed.

According to feature T2, the generated information storage process, which is the process of the second process group, and the special process, which is the process of the first process group, are performed after the provision trigger process, which is the process of the first process group, is executed. It is executed before the privilege granting process, which is the process of the first process group, is executed. As a result, by executing the process for identifying whether or not a predetermined event has occurred as a process in the second process group instead of as a process in the first process group, the process can be executed as a process in the first process group. If a predetermined event occurs, it is possible to invalidate the opportunity for awarding a benefit before the awarding process is executed, while allowing some time.

Feature T3. A means for starting a predetermined unit process (first timer interrupt process) when a process execution opportunity occurs (a function for executing the first timer interrupt process of the main MPU 82 in the thirteenth embodiment),
The first processing group execution means is a means (a first (a function of executing the processing of step S6601, step S6604, step S6607, step S6610, step S6613, step S6616, step S6619 or step S6621 of the main side MPU 82 in the thirteenth embodiment),
The special processing execution means executes the special processing when it is specified in the information specifying process that the predetermined event occurrence information is stored in the second processing corresponding storage area,
The predetermined unit process includes the occurrence information storage process, the granting opportunity process, the privilege granting process, and the information specifying process,
The occurrence information storage process is executed after the grant trigger process is executed, the information identification process is executed after the occurrence information storage process is executed, and the benefit grant process is executed after the information identification process is executed. The gaming machine according to feature T2, wherein the processing order of the predetermined unit processing in one processing round is set so that the predetermined unit processing is executed.

According to feature T3, in a configuration in which the predetermined unit process includes occurrence information storage processing, grant trigger processing, benefit grant processing, and information identification processing, the occurrence information storage processing is executed after grant trigger processing is executed; Simply by setting the execution order of the processes in the predetermined unit process so that the information specifying process is executed after the generated information storage process is executed, and the benefit granting process is executed after the information specifying process is executed. It becomes possible to achieve the excellent effects described above.

Note that for the configuration of features T1 to T3, features A1 to A8, features B1 to B8, features C1 to C8, features D1 to D8, features E1 to E9, features F1 to F6, features G1 to G11, and features H1 to H8, Features I1-I5, Features J1-J7, Features K1-K7, Features L1-L5, Features M1-M4, Features N1-N8, Features O1-O8, Features P1-P6, Features Q1-Q16, Features R1- Any one or more of R6, features S1 to S7, features T1 to T3, features U1 to U5, and features V1 to V6 may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Feature U group>
Feature U1. In a gaming machine equipped with a control means (main MPU 82 in the thirteenth embodiment) that executes various processes,
The control means includes:
a first processing group execution unit (a function of executing the specific control process of the main MPU 82 in the thirteenth embodiment) that executes the first process group process (specific control process) among the various processes;
a second processing group execution means (a function for executing non-specific control processing of the main MPU 82 in the thirteenth embodiment) for executing a second processing group of processing (non-specific control processing) among the various processes;
Equipped with
This gaming machine is
When the processing of the first processing group is executed, information can be written and information can be read, while when the processing of the second processing group is executed, information can be read, but the information cannot be read. a first process-compatible storage area (work area 211 for specific control and stack area 212 for specific control in the thirteenth embodiment) in which writing is disabled;
When the processing of the second processing group is executed, information can be written and information can be read, while when the processing of the first processing group is executed, information can be read, but the information cannot be read. a second process-compatible storage area (work area 213 for non-specific control and stack area 214 for non-specific control in the thirteenth embodiment) in which writing is not possible;
Equipped with
As a process of the first processing group, the first processing group execution means stores first transmission information (normal return command, clearing command, etc.) in a transmission information storage area (command transmission buffer 223b) when a first transmission trigger occurs. Means for executing a first transmission information storage process (a thirteenth A function of executing the processing of step S4914, step S4921, step S5003, step S5007, step S5105, step S5114, step S5705 or step S5710 of the main side MPU 82 in the embodiment),
As a process of the second processing group, the second processing group execution means stores second transmission information (a disconnection occurrence command, a short circuit occurrence command, a general electricity winning abnormality) in the transmission information storage area when a second transmission trigger occurs. means for executing the second transmission information storage process (step S5404, step S5408, step S6005, step S6011, or step S6507 of the main MPU 82 in the thirteenth embodiment) for storing the command, special electric prize winning abnormal command, or magnetic abnormal command) processing functions),
When the first transmission information is stored in the transmission information storage area, the gaming machine transmits the first transmission information to the transmission target (sound-light side MPU 93), and stores the first transmission information in the transmission information storage area. 2. A gaming machine characterized by comprising a transmission execution means (command transmission circuit 224) that transmits the second transmission information to the transmission target (sound-light side MPU 93) when the second transmission information is stored.

According to feature U1, when the processing of the first processing group is executed, the storage area corresponding to the first process becomes the target for writing information, but the storage area corresponding to the second process does not become the target for writing information, When the process of the second process group is executed, the storage area corresponding to the second process becomes the target for writing information, but the storage area corresponding to the first process does not become the target for writing information. This makes it possible to clearly distinguish the type of storage area to which information is to be written when the first processing group's processing is executed and when the second processing group's processing is executed. On the other hand, even when the processing of the first processing group is executed, it is possible to read information not only from the storage area corresponding to the first processing but also from the storage area corresponding to the second processing. Even when a process is executed, information can be read not only from the storage area corresponding to the second process but also from the storage area corresponding to the first process. This makes it possible to refer to information corresponding to a processing result in one of the processing of the first processing group and the processing of the second processing group in the other processing.

In this case, when the first transmission trigger occurs, the first transmission information is stored in the transmission information storage area in the first transmission information storage process which is the process of the first processing group, and the second transmission trigger occurs. In this case, the second transmission information is stored in the transmission information storage area in a second transmission information storage process which is a process of the second processing group. When the first transmission information is stored in the transmission information storage area, the first transmission information is transmitted to the transmission target, and when the second transmission information is stored in the transmission information storage area, the first transmission information is transmitted to the transmission target. 2 Transmission information is transmitted to the transmission target. In other words, a storage area to which information can be written in the processing of the first processing group and a storage area to which information can be written in the processing of the second processing group are divided into a storage area corresponding to the first processing and a storage area corresponding to the second processing. In the configuration differentiated between the above, transmission information to be transmitted to a transmission target is written in a common transmission information storage area. This makes it possible to consolidate the configuration for transmitting transmission information, compared to a configuration in which transmission information is transmitted individually in each of the processing of the first processing group and the processing of the second processing group.

Feature U2. The control means is configured to write information into an internal storage means (register area 223) provided in the control means when executing the various processes,
The gaming machine according to feature U1, wherein the transmission information storage area is provided in the internal storage means.

According to feature U2, the transmission information storage area in which the first transmission information is stored in the processing of the first processing group and the second transmission information is stored in the processing of the second processing group is the internal storage means of the control means. It is set in. As a result, the storage area where information can be written in the processing of the first processing group and the storage area where information can be written with the processing of the second processing group are divided into the storage area corresponding to the first processing and the storage area corresponding to the second processing. In a configuration in which the areas are clearly differentiated, the storage area for writing transmission information is divided between the processing of the first processing group and the storage area of the second processing group, while avoiding the use of the storage area corresponding to the first processing and the storage area corresponding to the second processing. This makes it possible to share the same processing.

Feature U3. The gaming machine according to feature U1 or U2, wherein the transmission execution means is not included in either the first processing group execution means or the second processing group execution means.

According to feature U3, it becomes possible to transmit the transmission information stored in the transmission information storage area to the transmission target independently of the processing of the first processing group and the processing of the second processing group.

Feature U4. The first processing group execution means executes the processing of the first processing group using a program,
The second processing group execution means executes the processing of the second processing group using a program,
The gaming machine according to any one of features U1 to U3, wherein the transmission execution means performs the transmission without using a program.

According to feature U4, the processing of the first processing group and the processing of the second processing group are executed using a program, whereas the transmission of the transmission information stored in the transmission information storage area to the transmission target is executed using a program. This is done without using any program. This makes it possible to transmit the transmission information stored in the transmission information storage area to the transmission target independently of the processing of the first processing group and the processing of the second processing group, and also saves the necessary program capacity. It becomes possible to perform control to transmit transmission information without increasing the number of transmission information.

Feature U5. The first transmission information may be transmitted not only in a situation where the processing of the first processing group is being executed by the control means but also in a situation where the processing of the second processing group is being executed. and a configuration in which the second transmission information can be transmitted not only in a situation where the processing of the second processing group is being executed by the control means but also in a situation where the processing of the first processing group is being executed. The gaming machine according to any one of features U1 to U4.

According to feature U5, the transmission information stored in the transmission information storage area can be transmitted to the transmission target regardless of the execution status of the processing of the first processing group and the processing of the second processing group.

Note that for the configuration of features U1 to U5, features A1 to A8, features B1 to B8, features C1 to C8, features D1 to D8, features E1 to E9, features F1 to F6, features G1 to G11, and features H1 to H8, Features I1-I5, Features J1-J7, Features K1-K7, Features L1-L5, Features M1-M4, Features N1-N8, Features O1-O8, Features P1-P6, Features Q1-Q16, Features R1- Any one or more of R6, features S1 to S7, features T1 to T3, features U1 to U5, and features V1 to V6 may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Characteristic group V>
Feature V1. A first processing group execution means (a function of executing the specific control process of the main MPU 82 in the thirteenth embodiment) that executes the first process group process (specific control process) among various processes;
a second processing group execution means (a function for executing non-specific control processing of the main MPU 82 in the thirteenth embodiment) for executing a second processing group of processing (non-specific control processing) among the various processes;
When the processing of the first processing group is executed, information can be written and information can be read, while when the processing of the second processing group is executed, information can be read, but the information cannot be read. a first process-compatible storage area (work area 211 for specific control and stack area 212 for specific control in the thirteenth embodiment) in which writing is disabled;
When the processing of the second processing group is executed, information can be written and information can be read, while when the processing of the first processing group is executed, information can be read, but the information cannot be read. a second process-compatible storage area (work area 213 for non-specific control and stack area 214 for non-specific control in the thirteenth embodiment) in which writing is not possible;
Equipped with
The first processing group execution means executes a first update process for updating information in a first numerical storage area (first security counter 211a) when a first update trigger occurs as a process of the first process group. (a function of executing the process of step S4917 or step S4920 of the main MPU 82 in the thirteenth embodiment),
The second processing group execution means executes, as a process of the second processing group, a second update process for updating information in a second numerical storage area (second security counter 213k) when a second update trigger occurs. (a function of executing the process of step S5405, step S5409, step S6006, step S6012 or step S6508 of the main side MPU 82 in the thirteenth embodiment),
This gaming machine includes a means for executing a specific corresponding process corresponding to both the information in the first numerical value storage area and the information in the second numerical value storage area (a security process of the main MPU 82 in the thirteenth embodiment). 1. A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with a function to execute a game.

According to feature V1, when the process of the first processing group is executed, the storage area corresponding to the first process becomes the target for writing information, but the storage area corresponding to the second process does not become the target for writing information, When the process of the second process group is executed, the storage area corresponding to the second process becomes the target for writing information, but the storage area corresponding to the first process does not become the target for writing information. This makes it possible to clearly distinguish the type of storage area to which information is to be written when the first processing group's processing is executed and when the second processing group's processing is executed. On the other hand, even when the processing of the first processing group is executed, it is possible to read information not only from the storage area corresponding to the first processing but also from the storage area corresponding to the second processing. Even when a process is executed, information can be read not only from the storage area corresponding to the second process but also from the storage area corresponding to the first process. This makes it possible to refer to information corresponding to a processing result in one of the processing of the first processing group and the processing of the second processing group in the other processing.

In this case, when the first update trigger occurs, the information in the first numerical storage area is updated in the first update process which is the process of the first process group, and when the second update trigger occurs, the information in the first numerical storage area is updated. In the second update process, which is the process of the process group, the information in the second numerical value storage area is updated. Then, specific correspondence processing corresponding to both the information in the first numerical value storage area and the information in the second numerical value storage area is executed. As a result, in a configuration where the processing of the first processing group and the processing of the second processing group are clearly distinguished, the processing corresponding to the content specified in each of the processing of the first processing group and the processing of the second processing group It becomes possible to execute the process.

Feature V2. The gaming machine according to feature V1, wherein the first numerical value storage area is provided in the first processing corresponding storage area.

According to feature V2, it is possible to use the first process-compatible storage area as a storage area for storing information corresponding to the occurrence of the first update trigger.

Feature V3. The gaming machine according to feature V2, wherein the second numerical value storage area is provided in the second processing compatible storage area.

According to feature V3, it becomes possible to use the first process-compatible storage area as a storage area for storing information corresponding to the occurrence of the first update opportunity, and the occurrence of the second update opportunity. It becomes possible to use the second processing compatible storage area as a storage area for storing information corresponding to the second process.

Feature V4. The gaming machine according to any one of features V1 to V3, wherein the specific corresponding processing is included in one of the processing of the first processing group and the processing of the second processing group.

According to feature V4, it is possible to consolidate the specific corresponding process into either the process of the first process group that includes the first update process or the process of the second process group that includes the second update process.

Feature V5. The specific response processing is included in the processing of the first processing group,
The first process corresponding storage area includes a confirmed storage area (previous value storage area 211e) that stores information of the second numerical value storage area when the specific corresponding process is executed,
The specific response process includes:
Difference identification processing for identifying the difference between the information in the second numerical storage area and the information in the confirmed storage area (processing in steps S6701 to S6703 of the main MPU 82 in the thirteenth embodiment);
A process for executing control corresponding to both the difference information specified by the difference specifying process and the information in the first numerical storage area (steps S6706 to S6706 of the main MPU 82 in the thirteenth embodiment) S6714 processing) and
The gaming machine according to any one of features V1 to V4, characterized in that the gaming machine includes:

According to feature V5, in a configuration in which the first update process and the predetermined corresponding process are included in the process of the first process group, and the second update process is included in the process of the second process group, the information in the second numerical storage area is It becomes possible to execute control corresponding to both the difference and the information in the first numerical storage area through the specific correspondence process.

Feature V6. It is possible to measure the number of times the first update trigger occurs using the first numerical storage area,
It is possible to measure the number of times the second update opportunity has occurred using the second numerical storage area,
The game according to any one of features V1 to V5, characterized in that, in the specific correspondence process, a process corresponding to the sum of the information in the first numerical value storage area and the information in the second numerical value storage area is executed. Machine.

According to feature V6, it is possible to achieve the excellent effects already described in a configuration that executes processing corresponding to the total number of times the first update opportunity occurs and the number of times the second update opportunity occurs. .

Note that for the configuration of features V1 to V6, features A1 to A8, features B1 to B8, features C1 to C8, features D1 to D8, features E1 to E9, features F1 to F6, features G1 to G11, and features H1 to H8, Features I1-I5, Features J1-J7, Features K1-K7, Features L1-L5, Features M1-M4, Features N1-N8, Features O1-O8, Features P1-P6, Features Q1-Q16, Features R1- Any one or more of R6, features S1 to S7, features T1 to T3, features U1 to U5, and features V1 to V6 may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

According to the invention related to the feature Q group, the feature R group, the feature S group, the feature T group, the feature U group, and the feature V group, the following problems can be solved.

Pachinko machines, slot machines, and the like are known as types of gaming machines. These gaming machines are known to have a configuration in which an internal lottery is held based on the fulfillment of predetermined lottery conditions, and a bonus is awarded to a player according to the result of the internal lottery.

Specifically, pachinko machines have a configuration in which a game ball enters a ball entry section provided in a gaming area, and when a winning result is obtained in an internal lottery, the machine enters a special gaming state, and A configuration is known in which the game enters a special game state based on a game ball entering the game ball. When the state shifts to the special game state, for example, a ball entering device provided in the gaming area starts to open and close, and game balls are paid out based on balls entering the ball entering device.

Here, in gaming machines such as those exemplified above, processing needs to be suitably executed by the control means, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

Below, the basic configuration of a gaming machine to which each of the above features can be applied or is applied to each feature will be shown.

Pachinko game machine: an operating means operated by a player, a game ball firing means that fires a game ball based on the operation of the operating means, a ball path that guides the fired game ball to a predetermined gaming area, A game machine comprising game parts arranged within a region, and giving a bonus to a player when a game ball passes through a predetermined passage part of each game part.

A reel-type gaming machine such as a slot machine: equipped with a pattern display device that variably displays a plurality of symbols, the variable display of the plurality of symbols is started due to the operation of the start operation means, and the variable display of the plurality of symbols is started due to the operation of the stop operation means. A gaming machine in which variable display of the plurality of symbols is stopped after the display is stopped or after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, and a bonus is given to a player according to the symbols after the stoppage.

10... Pachinko machine, 24a... Out port, 27... Game ball firing mechanism, 31... General winning port, 32... Special electric winning device, 33... First operating port, 34... Second operating port, 37a... First special figure display Part, 37b...Second special figure display section, 41...Symbol display device, 43...Status suggestion area, 81...Main control board, 82...Main side MPU, 83...Main side ROM, 84...Main side RAM, 93...Sound Light side MPU, 103...Display side MPU, 131...Ceiling counter, 133...High probability state counter, 134...Time saving state counter, 151...Special winning device, 195...Setting key insertion part, 196...Reset button, 201-204... 1st to 4th notification display device, 205...setting display device, 211...work area for specific control, 211a...first security counter, 211b...special power monitoring delay timer counter, 211c...general power monitoring delay timer counter , 211d...Confirmation flag group, 211e...Previous value storage area, 212...Stack area for specific control, 213...Work area for non-specific control, 213a-213h...1st to 8th prize monitoring timer counter, 213k...th 2 Security counter, 213l to 213r... Abnormality flag, 214... Stack area for non-specific control, 223... Register area, 223b... Command sending buffer, 223c... Protect register, 224... Command sending circuit, 225... RAM management circuit, 251 ...Normal counter area, 252...Arithmetic result storage area, PA2...Left side area, PA3...Right side area.

Claims (1)

a control means for executing various predetermined processes;
information storage means into which information is written when the various predetermined processes are executed in the control means;
Equipped with
The information storage means includes:
a first storage area into which information is written when the various predetermined processes are executed;
a second storage area that is contiguous with the first storage area in terms of the address of the information storage means and to which information is not written when the various predetermined processes are executed;
a third storage area that is continuous with the second storage area at the address of the information storage means and into which information is written when the various predetermined processes are executed;
Equipped with
This gaming machine is
erasure execution means for performing information erasure processing on storage areas of the information storage means including the first storage area, the second storage area, and the third storage area when a predetermined information erasure trigger occurs;
a predetermined prohibition setting means for configuring a predetermined prohibition setting so that information is not written to the second storage area;
Predetermined prohibition canceling means for canceling the predetermined prohibition setting when the information erasing process is executed;
a predetermined setting area that becomes one of the binary information when the predetermined prohibition setting is performed and becomes the other information of the binary information when the predetermined prohibition setting is canceled;
means for preventing information from being written to the second storage area when the information in the predetermined setting area is the one of the information;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising :

Images